Table of Contents

 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549
FORM 10-K
(Mark One)
þ
 
ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012
or
o
 
TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
For the transition period from                      to                     
Commission file number 001-13958
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)
Delaware
 
13-3317783
(State or other jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)
 
(I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)
One Hartford Plaza, Hartford, Connecticut 06155
(Address of principal executive offices) (Zip Code)
(860) 547-5000
(Registrant’s telephone number, including area code)
SECURITIES REGISTERED PURSUANT TO SECTION 12 (b) OF THE ACT
(ALL OF WHICH ARE LISTED ON THE NEW YORK STOCK EXCHANGE INC.):
Common Stock, par value $0.01 per share
Depositary shares, representing interests in 7.25% Mandatory Convertible Preferred Stock, Series F, par value $0.01 per share
Warrants (expiring June 26, 2019)
6.10% Notes due October 1, 2041
7.875% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Junior Subordinated Debentures due 2042
SECURITIES REGISTERED PURSUANT TO SECTION 12 (g) OF THE ACT:
None
Indicate by check mark:
Yes
No
•
if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.
þ
 
•
if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Exchange Act.
 
þ
•
whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.
þ
 
•
whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).
þ
 
•
if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant’s knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K.
þ
 
•
whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company. See definitions of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.
 
 
 
Large accelerated filer þ        Accelerated filer o       Non-accelerated filer o        Smaller reporting company o
 
 
•
whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.)
 
þ
The aggregate market value of the shares of Common Stock held by non-affiliates of the registrant as of June 30, 2012 was approximately $7.6 billion , based on the closing price of $17.63 per share of the Common Stock on the New York Stock Exchange on June 30, 2012 .
As of February 21, 2013 , there were outstanding 436,598,310 shares of Common Stock, $0.01 par value per share, of the registrant.
Documents Incorporated by Reference
Portions of the registrant’s definitive proxy statement for its 2013 annual meeting of shareholders are incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K.

1
Table of Contents

THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 10-K
FOR THE FISCAL YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2012
TABLE OF CONTENT
Item
Description
Page
 
 
1
1A.
1B.
2
3
4
 
 
5
6
7
7A.
8
9
9A.
9B.
 
 
10
11
12
13
14
 
 
15
 
 

2
Table of Contents

Forward-Looking Statements
Certain of the statements contained herein are forward-looking statements made pursuant to the safe harbor provisions of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. Forward-looking statements can be identified by words such as “anticipates,” “intends,” “plans,” “seeks,” “believes,” “estimates,” “expects,” “projects,” and similar references to future periods.
Forward-looking statements are based on our current expectations and assumptions regarding economic, competitive and legislative developments. Because forward-looking statements relate to the future, they are subject to inherent uncertainties, risks and changes in circumstances that are difficult to predict. They have been made based upon management’s expectations and beliefs concerning future developments and their potential effect upon The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. and its subsidiaries (collectively, the “Company”). Future developments may not be in line with management’s expectations or have unanticipated effects. Actual results could differ materially from expectations, depending on the evolution of various factors, including those set forth in Part I, Item 1A. Risk Factors, in Part II, Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations, and those identified from time to time in our other filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission. These important risks and uncertainties include:
•
challenges related to the company's current operating environment, including continuing uncertainty about the strength and speed of the recovery in the United States and other key economies and the impact of governmental stimulus and austerity initiatives, sovereign credit concerns, a sustained low interest rate environment, higher tax rates and other potentially adverse developments on financial, commodity and credit markets and consumer and business spending and investment and the effect of these events on our returns in investment portfolios and our hedging costs associated with our variable annuities business;
•
the risks, challenges and uncertainties associated with our capital management plan and our strategic realignment to focus on our property and casualty, group benefits and mutual fund businesses, place our Individual Annuity business into run-off and the sale of the Individual Life, Woodbury Financial Services and the Retirement Plans businesses;
•
execution risk related to the continued reinvestment of our investment portfolios and refinement of our hedge program for our run-off annuity block;
•
market risks associated with our business, including changes in interest rates, credit spreads, equity prices, market volatility and foreign exchange rates, and implied volatility levels, as well as continuing uncertainty in key sectors such as the global real estate market;
•
the possibility of unfavorable loss development including with respect to long-tailed exposures;
•
the possibility of a pandemic, earthquake, or other natural or man-made disaster that may adversely affect our businesses;
•
weather and other natural physical events, including the severity and frequency of storms, hail, winter storms, hurricanes and tropical storms, as well as climate change and its potential impact on weather patterns;
•
risk associated with the use of analytical models in making decisions in key areas such as underwriting, capital, reserving, and catastrophe risk management;
•
the uncertain effects of emerging claim and coverage issues;
•
the Company’s ability to effectively price its property and casualty policies, including its ability to obtain regulatory consents to pricing actions or to non-renewal or withdrawal of certain product lines;
•
the impact on our statutory capital of various factors, including many that are outside the Company’s control, which can in turn affect our credit and financial strength ratings, cost of capital, regulatory compliance and other aspects of our business and results;
•
risks to our business, financial position, prospects and results associated with negative rating actions or downgrades in the Company’s financial strength and credit ratings or negative rating actions or downgrades relating to our investments;
•
the impact on our investment portfolio if our investment portfolio is concentrated in any particular segment of the economy;
•
volatility in our earnings and potential material changes to our results resulting from our adjustment of our risk management program to emphasize protection of economic value;
•
the potential for differing interpretations of the methodologies, estimations and assumptions that underlie the valuation of the Company’s financial instruments that could result in changes to investment valuations;
•
the subjective determinations that underlie the Company’s evaluation of other-than-temporary impairments on available-for-sale securities;
•
losses due to nonperformance or defaults by others;
•
the potential for further acceleration of deferred policy acquisition cost amortization;

3
Table of Contents

•
the potential for further impairments of our goodwill or the potential for changes in valuation allowances against deferred tax assets;
•
the possible occurrence of terrorist attacks and the Company’s ability to contain its exposure, including the effect of the absence or insufficiency of applicable terrorism legislation on coverage;
•
the difficulty in predicting the Company’s potential exposure for asbestos and environmental claims;
•
the response of reinsurance companies under reinsurance contracts and the availability, pricing and adequacy of reinsurance to protect the Company against losses;
•
actions by our competitors, many of which are larger or have greater financial resources than we do;
•
the Company’s ability to distribute its products through distribution channels, both current and future;
•
the cost and other effects of increased regulation as a result of the enactment of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010 (the “Dodd-Frank Act”), which, among other effects, vests a Financial Services Oversight Council with the power to designate “systemically important” institutions, will require central clearing of, and/or impose new margin and capital requirements on, derivatives transactions, and created a new “Federal Insurance Office” within the U.S. Department of the Treasury (“Treasury”);
•
unfavorable judicial or legislative developments;
•
the potential effect of other domestic and foreign regulatory developments, including those that could adversely impact the demand for the Company’s products, operating costs and required capital levels;
•
regulatory limitations on the ability of the Company and certain of its subsidiaries to declare and pay dividends;
•
the Company’s ability to maintain the availability of its systems and safeguard the security of its data in the event of a disaster, cyber or other information security incident or other unanticipated event;
•
the risk that our framework for managing operational risks may not be effective in mitigating material risk and loss to the Company;
•
the potential for difficulties arising from outsourcing relationships;
•
the impact of changes in federal or state tax laws;
•
regulatory requirements that could delay, deter or prevent a takeover attempt that shareholders might consider in their best interests;
•
the impact of potential changes in accounting principles and related financial reporting requirements;
•
the impact of any future errors in financial reporting;
•
the Company’s ability to protect its intellectual property and defend against claims of infringement; and
•
other factors described in such forward-looking statements.
Any forward-looking statement made by the Company in this document speaks only as of the date of the filing of this Form 10-K. Factors or events that could cause the Company’s actual results to differ may emerge from time to time, and it is not possible for the Company to predict all of them. The Company undertakes no obligation to publicly update any forward-looking statement, whether as a result of new information, future developments or otherwise.

4
Table of Contents


PART I
Item 1. BUSINESS
(Dollar amounts in millions, except for per share data, unless otherwise stated)
General
The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. (together with its subsidiaries, “The Hartford”, the “Company”, “we”, or “our”) is an insurance and financial services company. The Hartford, headquartered in Connecticut, is among the largest providers of property and casualty insurance and investment products to both individual and business customers in the United States of America. Also, The Hartford continues to manage life and annuity products previously sold. Hartford Fire Insurance Company, founded in 1810, is the oldest of The Hartford’s subsidiaries. At December 31, 2012 , total assets and total stockholders’ equity of The Hartford were $298.5 billion  and $22.4 billion , respectively.
Organization
The Hartford strives to maintain and enhance its position as a market leader within the financial services industry. The Company sells diverse and innovative products through multiple distribution channels to consumers and businesses. The Company seeks on an ongoing basis to develop and expand its distribution channels, achieving cost efficiencies through economies of scale and improved technology, and capitalizes on its brand name and The Hartford Stag Logo, one of the most recognized symbols in the financial services industry.
In 2012, The Hartford concluded an evaluation of its strategy and business portfolio. The Company is currently focusing on its Property & Casualty, Group Benefits and Mutual Fund businesses. The objective of this realignment is to position the organization for higher returns on equity, reduced sensitivity to capital markets, a lower cost of capital and increased financial flexibility. As a result, the Company completed the sales of its Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses in January 2013 and in 2012, the Company sold Woodbury Financial Services, Inc. ("Woodbury Financial Services", "WFS") an indirect wholly-owned broker-dealer subsidiary, and placed its annuity businesses into runoff.
As a holding company that is separate and distinct from its subsidiaries, The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. has no significant business operations of its own. Therefore, it relies on the dividends from its insurance companies and other subsidiaries as the principal source of cash flow to meet its obligations. Additional information regarding the cash flow and liquidity needs of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. may be found in the Capital Resources and Liquidity section of Part II, Item 7, Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations (“MD&A”).
Reporting Segments
The Hartford currently conducts business principally in six reporting segments including Property & Casualty Commercial, Consumer Markets, Property & Casualty Other Operations, Group Benefits, Mutual Funds and Talcott Resolution (formerly Life Other Operations), as well as a Corporate category. The Hartford includes in its Corporate category the Company’s debt financing and related interest expense, as well as other capital raising activities; and certain purchase accounting adjustments and other charges not allocated to the reporting segments.
The following discussion describes the principal products and services, marketing and distribution, and competition of The Hartford's reporting segments. For further discussion on the reporting segments, including financial disclosures of revenues by product line, geographical revenue, net income (loss), and assets for each reporting segment, see Note 4 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
 

5

Property & Casualty Commercial
Principal Products and Services
Property & Casualty Commercial provides workers’ compensation, property, automobile, liability and umbrella coverages under several different products, primarily throughout the United States, within its standard commercial lines, which consists of The Hartford’s small commercial and middle market lines of business. Additionally, a variety of customized insurance products and risk management services including workers’ compensation, automobile, general liability, professional liability, livestock and specialty casualty coverages are offered through the segment’s specialty lines.
Standard commercial lines seeks to offer products with coverage options and customized pricing based on the policyholder’s individualized risk characteristics. For small businesses, those businesses whose annual payroll is under $5 and whose revenue and property values are less than $15 each, property and liability coverages are bundled as part of a single multi-peril package policy marketed under the Spectrum name. Medium-sized businesses, companies whose payroll, revenue and property values exceed the small business definition, are served within middle market. The middle market line of business provides workers’ compensation, property, automobile, liability, umbrella fidelity, surety and marine coverages.
Within the specialty lines, a significant portion of the specialty casualty business, including workers’ compensation business, is written through large deductible programs where the insured typically provides collateral to support loss payments made within their deductible. The specialty casualty business also provides retrospectively-rated programs where the premiums are adjustable based on loss experience. Captive and Specialty Programs provide tailored property and casualty programs primarily to customers with common risk characteristics and those seeking a loss sensitive solution.
Marketing and Distribution
Standard commercial lines provide insurance products and services through the Company’s home office located in Hartford, Connecticut, and multiple domestic regional office locations and insurance centers. The products are marketed nationwide utilizing brokers and independent agents. The current pace of consolidation within the independent agent and broker distribution channel will likely continue such that, in the future a larger proportion of written premium will likely be concentrated among fewer agents and brokers. Additionally the Company offers insurance products to customers of payroll service providers through its relationships with major national payroll companies.
Specialty lines also provide insurance products and services through its home office located in Hartford, Connecticut and multiple domestic office locations. Specialty lines markets its products nationwide utilizing a variety of distribution networks including independent retail agents, brokers and wholesalers.
Competition
In the small commercial marketplace, The Hartford competes against a number of large national carriers, as well as regional carriers in certain territories. Competitors include other stock companies, mutual companies and other underwriting organizations. The small commercial market has become increasingly competitive as carriers seek to differentiate themselves through product expansion, price reduction, enhanced service and cutting-edge technology. Larger carriers such as The Hartford have improved their pricing sophistication and ease of doing business with agents through the use of predictive modeling tools and automation which speeds up the process of evaluating a risk and quoting new business.
Written premium growth rates in the small commercial market have slowed in recent years and underwriting margins have been pressured by increases in loss costs, particularly in workers’ compensation, and higher catastrophes. A number of companies have sought to grow their business by increasing their underwriting appetite, appointing new agents and expanding business with existing agents. Also, carriers serving middle market-sized accounts are more aggressively competing for small commercial accounts as small commercial business has generally been less price-sensitive.
Middle market business is characterized as “high touch” and involves case-by-case underwriting and pricing decisions. The pricing of middle market accounts is prone to significant variation or cyclicality over time, with sensitivity to legislative and macro-economic forces. Over the last several years, there has been a reduction in average premium size as shrinking company payrolls, smaller auto fleets, and fewer business locations depress insurance exposures. Additionally, various state legislative reforms in recent years designed to control workers compensation indemnity costs have led to rate reductions in many states. These factors, characterized by highly competitive pricing on new business, have resulted in more new business opportunities in the marketplace as customers shop their policies for a lower price. In the face of this competitive environment, The Hartford continues to maintain a disciplined underwriting approach. To gain a competitive advantage in this environment, carriers are improving automation with agents and brokers, increasing pricing sophistication, and enhancing their product offerings. These enhancements include industry specialization, with The Hartford and other national carriers tailoring products and services to specific industry verticals such as technology, health care and renewable energy.

6

In the surety business, favorable underwriting results over the past couple of years have led to increased competition for market share, setting the stage for potential written price decreases. Driven by the upheaval in the credit markets, new private construction activity has declined dramatically, resulting in lower demand for contract surety business.
Specialty lines is comprised of a diverse group of businesses that operate independently within their specific industries. These businesses, while somewhat interrelated, have different business models and operating cycles. Specialty lines competes on an account- by-account basis due to the complex nature of each transaction. Competition in this market includes other stock companies, mutual companies, alternative risk sharing groups and other underwriting organizations. The relatively large size and underwriting capacity of The Hartford provides opportunities not available to smaller companies. Disciplined underwriting and targeted returns are the objectives of specialty lines since premium writings may fluctuate based on the segment’s view of perceived market opportunity.
For specialty casualty businesses, written pricing competition continues to be significant, particularly for the larger individual accounts. Carriers are aggressively negotiating renewals with customers by initiating the renewal process well in advance of the policy renewal date, to improve retention, reducing new business opportunities within the marketplace. Within the national account business, as the market firms, more insureds may opt for loss-sensitive products in lieu of guaranteed cost policies.
Carriers writing professional liability business are increasingly focused on profitable private, middle market companies. This trend has continued as the downturn in the economy has led to a significant drop in the number of initial public offerings, and volatility for all public companies. Also, carriers’ new business opportunities in the marketplace for directors & officers and errors & omissions insurance have been significantly influenced by customer perceptions of financial strength, as investment portfolio losses have had a negative effect on the financial strength ratings of some insurers.
In the commercial marketplace, the weak economy has prompted carriers to offer differentiated products and services as a means of gaining a competitive advantage. In addition to the initiatives specific to each of The Hartford’s Property & Casualty Commercial lines of business noted above, the Company is leveraging its diverse product, service and distribution capabilities to deliver differentiated value in the market, while simultaneously increasing its ability to access its own diverse customer base for new product sales.
Consumer Markets
Principal Products and Services
Consumer Markets provides standard automobile, homeowners and home-based business coverages to individuals across the United States, including a special program designed exclusively for members of AARP (“AARP Program”). The Hartford's auto and homeowners products provide coverage options and customized pricing tailored to a customer's individual risk. The Hartford has individual customer relationships with AARP Program policyholders and, as a group, these customers represent a significant portion of the total Consumer Markets' business. Business sold to AARP members, either direct or through independent agents, amounted to earned premiums of $2.8 billion , $2.8 billion and $2.9 billion in 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively. Consumer Markets also operates a member contact center for health insurance products offered through the AARP Health program, with the current agreement in place through 2018.

Marketing and Distribution
Consumer Markets reaches diverse customers through multiple distribution channels including direct sales to the consumer, brokers and independent agents. In direct sales to the consumer, the Company markets its products through a mix of media, including direct mail and e-commerce marketing, television and advertising, both digitally and in publications. Most of Consumer Markets' direct sales to the consumer are associated with its exclusive licensing arrangement with AARP, with the current agreement in place until January 1, 2020, to market automobile, homeowners and home-based business insurance products to AARP's approximately 37 million members. This agreement provides Consumer Markets with an important competitive advantage given the number of “baby boomers” over age 50, many of whom become AARP members.
Consumer Markets is also focused on targeting specific customer groups and writing business through partnerships and affinities other than AARP. The Company has affinity agreements with the American Kennel Club, Sierra Club, the National Wildlife Federation and Direct Selling Association. In addition to selling product through its relationship with AARP and other affinities, the Company markets direct to the consumer within select underwriting markets, acquired through partnerships or list acquisitions, and to consumers in geographies where it is especially competitive.
The agency channel provides customized products and services to customers through a network of independent agents in the standard personal lines market. These independent agents are not employees of The Hartford. During 2011 and 2012, the Company completed the rollout of its Open Road Advantage auto product and its Hartford Home Advantage homeowners' product.

7

Competition
The personal lines automobile and homeowners businesses are highly competitive. Personal lines insurance is written by insurance companies of varying sizes that compete on the basis of price, product, service (including claims handling), stability of the insurer and brand recognition. Companies with recognized brands, direct sales capability and economies of scale will have a competitive advantage. In recent years, a number of carriers have increased their advertising in an effort to gain new business and retain profitable business. This has been particularly true of carriers that sell directly to the consumer. Industry sales of personal lines insurance direct to the consumer have been growing faster than sales through agents, particularly for auto insurance.
Carriers that distribute products mainly through agents compete by offering agents commissions and additional incentives to attract new business. To distinguish themselves in the marketplace, top tier carriers are offering on-line and self service capabilities to agents and consumers. More agents have been using “comparative rater” tools that allow the agent to compare premium quotes among several insurance companies. The use of comparative rater tools has further increased price competition. Carriers with more efficient cost structures will have an advantage in competing for new business through price.
The use of data mining and predictive modeling is used by more and more carriers to target the most profitable business and carriers have further segmented their pricing plans to expand market share in what they believe to be the most profitable segments. Some companies, including The Hartford, have written a greater percentage of their new business in preferred market segments which tend to have better loss experience but also lower average premiums. In addition, a number of companies have invested in telematics — the use of devices in insured vehicles to transmit information about driving behavior such as miles driven, speed, acceleration, deceleration — and are using that information to price the risk. Companies that are the first to introduce telematics may enjoy a competitive advantage through favorable risk selection.
Group Benefits
Principal Products and Services
Group Benefits provides group life, accident and disability coverage, group retiree health and voluntary benefits to individual members of employer groups, associations, affinity groups and financial institutions. Group Benefits offers disability underwriting, administration, claims processing and reinsurance to other insurers and self-funded employer plans. Policies sold in this segment are generally term insurance, allowing Group Benefits to adjust the rates or terms of its policies in order to minimize the adverse effect of market trends, declining interest rates, and other factors. Policies are typically sold with one, two or three-year rate guarantees depending upon the product.
In addition to the products and services traditionally offered within each of its lines of business, Group Benefits offers The Hartford Productivity Advantage (“THPA”), a single-company solution for leave management, integrating work absence data from the insurer’s short-term and long-term group disability and workers’ compensation insurance with its leave management administration services.
Marketing and Distribution
The Group Benefits distribution network includes an experienced group of Company employees, managed through a regional sales office system, to distribute its group insurance products and services through a variety of distribution outlets including brokers, consultants, third-party administrators and trade associations.
Competition
Group Benefits competes with numerous other insurance companies and other financial intermediaries marketing insurance products. This line of business focuses on both its risk management expertise and economies of scale to derive a competitive advantage. Competitive factors affecting Group Benefits include the variety and quality of products and services offered, the price quoted for coverage and services, the Company’s relationships with its third-party distributors, and the quality of customer service. In addition, active price competition continues in the marketplace resulting in multi-year rate guarantees being offered to customers. Top tier carriers in the marketplace also offer on-line and self service capabilities to agents and consumers. The relatively large size and underwriting capacity of the Group Benefits business provides opportunities not available to smaller companies.

8

Mutual Funds
Principal Products and Services
Mutual Funds offers mutual funds for retail accounts such as retirement plans and 529 college savings plans and provides investment-management and administrative services such as product design, implementation and oversight. In 2012, Mutual Funds expanded its relationship with Wellington Management, which serves as the primary sub-advisor for The Hartford’s 57 retail mutual funds, including equity, fixed-income and asset-allocation funds.
Marketing and Distribution
Mutual Fund sales professionals are segmented into two teams; a retail team and an institutional team. The retail team distributes The Hartford’s open-end funds and markets 529 college savings plans to national and regional broker-dealer organizations, banks and other financial institutions, independent financial advisors and registered investment advisors. The institutional team distributes The Hartford’s funds to professional buyers, such as broker-dealers, consultants, record keepers, and bank trust groups.
Competition
Mutual Funds compete with other mutual fund companies along with investment brokerage companies and differentiate themselves through product solutions, performance, and service. In this non-proprietary broker sold market, the Company and its competitors compete aggressively for net sales.
Talcott Resolution
Talcott Resolution's business is comprised of runoff business from the Company's U.S. annuity, international annuity, and institutional and private-placement life insurance businesses. Talcott Resolution's mission is to pursue opportunities to reduce the size and risk of the annuity book of business while honoring the Company's obligations to its annuity contractholders. Talcott Resolution manages approximately 1.7 million annuity contracts with account values of approximately $163 billion as of December 31, 2012.
In 2009, the Company suspended international annuity sales in its Japan and European operations and institutional annuity sales in the United States. In March 2012, the Company announced its intention to place its U.S. annuity business into runoff and sell its Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses. Subsequently, the Company completed the sale of its U.S. individual annuities new business capabilities to Forethought Financial Group and the sale of the administration and operating assets of its private placement life insurance business to Philadelphia Financial Group, Inc. The Talcott Resolution business segment also includes our Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses that were sold in January 2013. For further discussion of these transactions, see Note 2 - Business Dispositions of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Reserves
The Hartford establishes and carries as liabilities reserves for its insurance products to estimate for the following:
•
a liability for unpaid losses, including those that have been incurred but not yet reported, as well as estimates of all expenses associated with processing and settling these claims;
•
a liability equal to the balance that accrues to the benefit of the life insurance policyholder as of the consolidated financial statement date, otherwise known as the account value;
•
a liability for future policy benefits, representing the present value of future benefits to be paid to or on behalf of policyholders less the present value of future net premiums;
•
fair value reserves for living benefits embedded derivative guarantees; and
•
death and living benefit reserves which are computed based on a percentage of revenues less actual claim costs.
Further discussion of The Hartford’s property and casualty insurance product reserves, including asbestos and environmental claims reserves, may be found in Part II, Item 7, MD&A — Critical Accounting Estimates — Property and Casualty Insurance Product Reserves, Net of Reinsurance. Additional discussion may be found in the Company’s accounting policies for insurance product reserves within Note 1 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

9

Reinsurance
The Hartford cedes insurance to affiliated and unaffiliated insurers for both its property and casualty and life insurance products. Such arrangements do not relieve The Hartford of its primary liability to policyholders. Failure of reinsurers to honor their obligations could result in losses to The Hartford.
For property and casualty insurance products, reinsurance arrangements are intended to provide greater diversification of business and limit The Hartford’s maximum net loss arising from large risks or catastrophes. A major portion of The Hartford’s property and casualty insurance product reinsurance is effected under general reinsurance contracts known as treaties, or, in some instances, is negotiated on an individual risk basis, known as facultative reinsurance. The Hartford also has in-force excess of loss contracts with reinsurers that protect it against a specified part or all of a layer of losses over stipulated amounts.
For life insurance products, The Hartford is involved in both the cession and assumption of insurance with other insurance and reinsurance companies. As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , the Company’s policy for the largest amount of life insurance retained on any one life by any one of its operations was $10. For the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , the Company did not make any significant changes in the terms under which reinsurance is ceded to other insurers. The Company entered into two reinsurance transactions upon completion of the sales of its Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses in January 2013. See Note 2 - Business Dispositions of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for further discussion of these transactions. In addition, the Company has reinsured a portion of the risk associated with U.S. variable annuities and the associated guaranteed minimum death benefit (“GMDB”) and guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit (“GMWB”) riders, and of the risks associated with variable annuity contract and rider benefits issued by Hartford Life Insurance K.K.'s (“HLIKK”), an indirect wholly owned subsidiary.
For further discussion on reinsurance, see Part II, Item 7, MD&A — Enterprise Risk Management. Additional discussion may be found in the Company’s accounting policies for reinsurance within Note 1 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Investment Operations
The majority of the Company’s investment portfolios are managed by Hartford Investment Management Company (“HIMCO”). HIMCO manages the portfolios to maximize economic value, while attempting to generate the income necessary to support the Company’s various product obligations, within internally established objectives, guidelines and risk tolerances. The portfolio objectives and guidelines are developed based upon the asset/liability profile, including duration, convexity and other characteristics within specified risk tolerances. The risk tolerances considered include, for example, asset and credit issuer allocation limits, maximum portfolio limits for below investment grade holdings and foreign currency exposure limits. The Company attempts to minimize adverse impacts to the portfolio and the Company’s results of operations from changes in economic conditions through asset allocation limits, asset/liability duration matching and through the use of derivatives. For further discussion of HIMCO’s portfolio management approach, see Part II, Item 7, MD&A — Enterprise Risk Management — Credit Risk.
In addition to managing the general account assets of the Company, HIMCO is also a SEC registered investment adviser for third party institutional clients, a sub-advisor for certain mutual funds and serves as the sponsor and collateral manager for capital markets transactions. HIMCO specializes in investment management that incorporates proprietary research and active portfolio management within a disciplined risk framework that seeks to provide value added returns versus peers and benchmarks. As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , the fair value of HIMCO’s total assets under management was approximately $144.1 billion and $164.9 billion , respectively, of which $7.6 billion and $7.1 billion , respectively, were held in HIMCO managed third party accounts.
Enterprise Risk Management
The Company has an enterprise risk management function (“ERM”) that is charged with providing analysis of the Company's risks on an individual and aggregated basis and with ensuring that the Company's risks remain within its risk appetite and tolerances. ERM plays an integral role at The Hartford by fostering a strong risk management culture and discipline. The mission of ERM is to support the Company in achieving its strategic priorities by:
•
Providing a comprehensive view of the risks facing the Company, including risk concentrations and correlations;
•
Helping management define the Company's overall capacity and appetite for risk by evaluating the risk return profile of the business relative to the Company's strategic intent and financial underpinning;
•
Assisting management in setting specific risk tolerances and limits that are measurable, actionable, and comply with the Company's overall risk philosophy;
•
Communicating and monitoring the firm's risk exposures relative to set limits and recommending, or implementing as appropriate, mitigating strategies; and
•
Providing valuable insight to assist leaders in growing the businesses and achieving optimal risk-adjusted returns within established guidelines.

10

Enterprise Risk Management Structure and Governance
At The Hartford, the Board of Directors (“the Board”) has ultimate responsibility for risk oversight. It exercises its oversight function through its standing committees, each of which has primary risk oversight responsibility with respect to all matters within the scope of its duties as contemplated by its charter. In addition, the Finance, Investment and Risk Management Committee (“FIRMCo”), which is comprised of all members of the Board, has responsibility for overseeing the investment activities, financial management, and risk management activities of the Company and its subsidiaries, and all risks that do not fall within the oversight responsibility of any other standing committee. The Audit Committee is responsible for discussing with management risk assessment policies and overseeing enterprise operational risk.
At the corporate level, the Company's Enterprise Chief Risk Officer (“ECRO” or “Chief Risk Officer”) leads ERM. The Chief Risk Officer reports directly to the Company's Chief Executive Officer (“CEO”). Reporting to the ECRO are the Chief Insurance Risk Officer (“CIRO”), Chief Operational Risk Officer (“CORO”), Chief Market Risk Officer (“CMRO”), Head of Asset Liability Management, and HIMCO Chief Risk Officer. The Company has established the Enterprise Risk and Capital Committee (“ERCC”) that includes the Company's CEO, Chief Financial Officer (“CFO”), Chief Investment Officer (“CIO”), Chief Risk Officer, the divisional Presidents and the General Counsel. The ERCC is responsible for managing the Company's risks and overseeing the enterprise risk management program. The ERCC also manages the capital structure of the enterprise and is responsible the attribution of capital to the lines of business. The ERCC reports to the Board primarily through FIRMCo and through interactions with the Audit Committee.
The Company also has committees that manage specific risks and recommend risk mitigation strategies to the ERCC. These committees include, but are not limited to, the Company and Division Asset Liability Committees, Catastrophe Risk Committee, Emerging Risk Committees, Model Oversight Committees (“MOC”) and Operational Risk Committee (“ORC”).
Risk Management Framework
At the Company, risk is managed at multiple levels. The first line of risk management is generally the responsibility of the lines of business. Senior business leaders are responsible for taking and managing risks specific to their business objectives and business environment. In many cases, the second line of risk management is the principal responsibility of ERM. ERM has the responsibility to ensure the Company has insight into its aggregate risk and that risks are managed within the Company's overall risk tolerance. Internal Audit forms the third line of risk management by helping assess and ensure that risk controls are present and effective.
The Company's Risk Management Framework consists of four core elements:
1.
Risk Culture and Governance: The Company has established policies for its major risks and a formal governance structure with leadership oversight and an assignment of accountability and authority. The governance structure starts at the Board and cascades to the ERCC and then to individual risk committees across the Company. In addition, the Company promotes a strong risk management culture and high expectations around ethical behavior.
2.
Risk Identification and Assessment: Through its ERM organization, the Company has developed processes for the identification, assessment, and, when appropriate, response to internal and external risks to the Company's operations and business objectives. Risk identification and prioritization has been established within each area, including processes around emerging risks.
3.
Risk Appetite and Limits: The Company has a formal risk appetite framework that is approved by the Company's ERCC and reviewed by the Board. The risk appetite framework includes risk appetite statements, risk preferences, risk tolerances and an associated limit structure for each of its major insurance and financial risks. These formal limits are encapsulated in formal risk policies that are reviewed at least annually by the ERCC.
4.
Risk Monitoring, Controls and Communication: The Company monitors its major risks at the enterprise level through a number of enterprise reports, including but not limited to, a monthly risk dashboard, tracking the return on risk-capital across products, and regular stress testing. ERM communicates the Company's risk exposures to senior and executive management and the Board, and reviews key business performance metrics, risk indicators, audit reports, risk/control self assessments and risk event data.

11

Risk Exposures and Quantification
The Company quantifies its enterprise insurance and financial risk exposures using multiple lenses including statutory, economic and, where appropriate, U.S. GAAP. ERM leverages various modeling techniques and metrics to provide a view of the Company's risk exposure in both normal and stressed environments. ERM regularly monitors the Company's risk exposure as compared to defined statutory limits and provides regular reporting to the ERCC.
In order to quantify group capital levels the Company uses an Economic Capital Model (“ECM”) to quantify the value of risk management across the business lines and to advance its risk-based decision-making and optimization across risk and business. The Company also uses the ECM to inform the attribution of risk capital to each line of business. The Company categorizes its main risks as follows in order to achieve a consistent and disciplined approach to quantifying, evaluating, and managing risk:
•
Insurance Risk
•
Operational Risk
•
Financial Risk
•
Business Risk

Insurance Risk
The Company defines insurance risk as its exposure to loss due to property, liability, mortality, morbidity, disability, longevity and other perils and risks covered under its policies, including adverse development on loss reserves supporting its products and geographic accumulations of loss over time due to property or casualty catastrophes.
Operational Risk
The Company defines operational risk as the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems, or from external events.
Financial Risk
Financial risk is broadly defined by the Company to include liquidity, interest rate, equity, foreign exchange, and credit risks, all of which have the potential to materially impact the Company's financial condition. Financial risk also includes exposure to events that may cause correlated movement in the above risk factors.
Business Risk
The Company manages its business risk at all levels of the organization. The Company categorizes its business risk as strategic risk and management risk. Strategic risk is defined as the risk to the defined company objectives from adverse developments in the Company's strategy vis-à-vis changing market conditions and competitor actions. Management risk is defined as the risk to defined company objectives from the ineffective or inefficient execution of the Company's strategic and business decisions. Enterprise strategic and management risks are assessed through strategic, business and operating plan reviews, as well as through management self-assessment processes and benchmarking.
For further discussion on risk management, see Part II, Item 7, MD&A - Enterprise Risk Management.
Regulation
Insurance companies are subject to comprehensive and detailed regulation and supervision throughout the United States. The extent of such regulation varies, but generally has its source in statutes which delegate regulatory, supervisory and administrative powers to state insurance departments. Such powers relate to, among other things, the standards of solvency that must be met and maintained; the licensing of insurers and their agents; the nature of and limitations on investments; establishing premium rates; claim handling and trade practices; restrictions on the size of risks which may be insured under a single policy; deposits of securities for the benefit of policyholders; approval of policy forms; periodic examinations of the affairs of companies; annual and other reports required to be filed on the financial condition of companies or for other purposes; fixing maximum interest rates on life insurance policy loans and minimum rates for accumulation of surrender values; and the adequacy of reserves and other necessary provisions for unearned premiums, unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses and other liabilities, both reported and unreported.

12

Most states have enacted legislation that regulates insurance holding company systems such as The Hartford. This legislation provides that each insurance company in the system is required to register with the insurance department of its state of domicile and furnish information concerning the operations of companies within the holding company system that may materially affect the operations, management or financial condition of the insurers within the system. All transactions within a holding company system affecting insurers must be fair and equitable. Notice to the insurance departments is required prior to the consummation of transactions affecting the ownership or control of an insurer and of certain material transactions between an insurer and any entity in its holding company system. In addition, certain of such transactions cannot be consummated without the applicable insurance department’s prior approval. In the jurisdictions in which the Company’s insurance company subsidiaries are domiciled, the acquisition of more than 10% of The Hartford’s outstanding common stock would require the acquiring party to make various regulatory filings.
Certain of the Company’s life insurance subsidiaries sold variable life insurance, variable annuity, and some fixed guaranteed products that are “securities” registered with the SEC under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended. Some of the products have separate accounts that are registered as investment companies under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “1940 Act”), and/or are regulated by state law. Separate account investment products are also subject to state insurance regulation. Moreover, each separate account is generally divided into sub-accounts, each of which invests in an underlying mutual fund that is also registered as an investment company under the 1940 Act (“Underlying Funds”). The Company offers these Underlying Funds and retail mutual funds that are registered with and regulated by the SEC.
In addition, other subsidiaries of the Company sold and distributed the Company’s variable insurance products, Underlying Funds and retail mutual funds as broker dealers and are subject to regulation promulgated and enforced by the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (“FINRA”), the SEC and/or in, some instances, state securities administrators. Other entities operate as investment advisers registered with the SEC under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940 and are registered as investment advisers under certain state laws, as applicable. One subsidiary is an investment company registered under the 1940 Act. Because federal and state laws and regulations are primarily intended to protect investors in securities markets, they generally grant regulators broad rulemaking and enforcement authority. Some of these regulations include, among other things, regulations impacting sales methods, trading practices, suitability of investments, use and safekeeping of customers’ funds, corporate governance, capital, record keeping, and reporting requirements.
The extent of insurance regulation on business outside the United States varies significantly among the countries in which The Hartford operates. Some countries have minimal regulatory requirements, while others regulate insurers extensively. Foreign insurers in certain countries are faced with greater restrictions than domestic competitors domiciled in that particular jurisdiction. The Hartford’s international operations are comprised of insurers licensed in their respective countries.
In addition, as described under “Legislative Developments,” we are subject to a number of Dodd-Frank Act provisions. Failure to comply with federal and state laws and regulations may result in censure, fines, the issuance of cease-and-desist orders or suspension, termination or limitation of the activities of our operations and/or our employees. We cannot predict the impact of these actions on our businesses, results of operations or financial condition.
Intellectual Property
We rely on a combination of contractual rights and copyright, trademark, patent and trade secret laws to establish and protect our intellectual property.
We have a worldwide trademark portfolio that we consider important in the marketing of our products and services, including, among others, the trademarks of The Hartford name, the Stag Logo and the combination of these two marks. The duration of trademark registrations varies from country to country and may be renewed indefinitely subject to country-specific use and registration requirements. We regard our trademarks as extremely valuable assets in marketing our products and services and vigorously seek to protect them against infringement.
Employees
The Hartford has approximately 22,500 employees as of December 31, 2012 .
Available Information
The Hartford makes available, free of charge, on or through its Internet website (http://www.thehartford.com) The Hartford’s annual report on Form 10-K, quarterly reports on Form 10-Q, current reports on Form 8-K, and amendments to those reports filed or furnished pursuant to Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act as soon as reasonably practicable after The Hartford electronically files such material with, or furnishes it to, the SEC. None of the information made available on The Hartford’s Internet website shall be deemed to be incorporated by reference herein and the reference to The Hartford's Internet website is provided as an inactive textual reference only. Information filed or furnished to the SEC may be read and copied at the SEC’s Public Reference Room at 100 F Street, NE, Washington, DC 20549 or by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. In addition, the SEC maintains an Internet website (http://sec.gov) that contains reports, proxy and information statements, and other information regarding issuers that file electronically with the SEC.


13

Item 1A. RISK FACTORS
Investing in The Hartford involves risk. In deciding whether to invest in The Hartford, you should carefully consider the following risk factors, any of which could have a significant or material adverse effect on the business, financial condition, results of operations, or liquidity of The Hartford and could also cause the trading price of our securities, including our common stock and other equity-related securities, to experience significant fluctuations and volatility. However, the risks and uncertainties described below are not the only ones related to our business and The Hartford may also be subject to other general risks that are not specifically enumerated which may have a significant or material adverse effect on the business, financial condition, results of operations or liquidity of The Hartford. This information should be considered carefully together with the other information contained in this report and the other reports and materials filed by The Hartford with the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”). The following risk factors are not necessarily listed in order of importance.
Our operating environment remains subject to uncertainty about the timing and strength of an economic recovery. The success of the realignment of our businesses and our capital management plan are subject to material challenges, uncertainties and risks and may not be adequate to mitigate the financial, competitive and other risks associated with our operating environment, which could adversely affect our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
The significant disruptions and difficult conditions in global economies and capital markets experienced in recent years has cast significant uncertainty regarding the timing and strength of an economic recovery, which may adversely affect our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity in 2013. Continued high unemployment, lower family income, higher tax rates, including on small business owners, lower business investment and lower consumer spending have adversely affected or may in the future adversely affect the demand for financial and insurance products, as well as their profitability in some cases. The rate of growth and recovery, including employment levels, from the recession has been below historic levels and a period of slow growth may persist for an extended period of time, which could adversely affect our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
The success of the realignment of our businesses and our capital management plan remain subject to material challenges, uncertainties and risks. We may not achieve all of the benefits we expect to derive from our plan to repurchase $500 of our equity and reduce our debt by $1 billion over the course of 2013 and 2014 and our decision to focus on our Property and Casualty, Group Benefits and Mutual Fund businesses, place our Individual Annuity business into runoff and sell the Individual Life, Woodbury Financial Services and Retirement Plans businesses. Our capital management plan is subject to execution risks, including, among others, risks related to market fluctuations and investor interest and potential legal constraints that could delay execution at an otherwise optimal time. There can be no assurance that we will in fact complete our capital management plan over the planned time frame or at all. Further, our opportunities to reduce the size and risk of the variable annuity book may be limited and initiatives pursued may not achieve the anticipated benefits. We also may not be able to eliminate expenses associated with the divested businesses in the manner and on the schedule we currently anticipate and we may incur additional restructuring charges. We may take further actions beyond the capital management plan and business realignment, which may include acquisitions, divestitures or restructurings that may involve additional uncertainties and risks that negatively impact our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity. In addition, we are exposed to execution risk relating to the continued reinvestment of our investment portfolios and the continuing refinement of our hedge programs for our run-off annuity block. If our actions are not adequate, our ability to support the scale of our business and to absorb operating losses and liabilities under our customer contracts could be impaired, which would in turn adversely affect our overall competitiveness and the capital position of the Company.

Our results, financial condition and statutory capital remain sensitive to equity and credit market performance and effects of interest rates and foreign currency, and we expect that market conditions will put pressure on returns in our investment portfolios and that our hedging costs (in particular with respect to our in-force variable annuity blocks) will remain higher than historical levels. Interest rates in recent periods continue to be at or near historically low levels. A sustained low interest rate environment would continue to pressure our net investment income and could result in lower margins, increased pension expense and lower estimated gross profits on certain products. Further, if global economic conditions worsen and real estate valuations drop to new cycle lows, we may experience additional realized and unrealized investment losses, particularly in the real estate and financial services sectors. Negative rating agency actions with respect to our investments could also indirectly adversely affect our statutory capital and risk-based capital (“RBC”) ratios, which could in turn have other negative consequences for our business and results.
Even if the measures we have taken (or take in the future) are effective to mitigate the risks associated with our current operating environment, they may have unintended consequences. For example, rebalancing our hedging program to protect economic value, while being mindful of statutory surplus, may result in greater earnings volatility under generally accepted accounting principles in the U.S. (“U.S. GAAP”). We could be required to consider actions to manage our capital position and liquidity or further reduce our exposure to market and financial risks. We may also be forced to sell assets on unfavorable terms that could cause us to incur losses or lose the potential for market upside on those assets in a market recovery. We could also face other pressures, such as employee recruitment and retention issues and potential loss of distribution for our products.

14

We are exposed to significant financial and capital markets risk, including changes in interest rates, credit spreads, equity prices, market volatility, foreign exchange rates and global real estate market deterioration that may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations, and liquidity.
One important exposure to equity risk relates to the potential for lower earnings associated with our operations in Mutual Funds and Talcott Resolution, such as U.S. and international variable annuities, where fee income is earned based upon the fair value of the assets under management. Should equity markets decline from current levels, assets under management and related fee income will be reduced. Such a decline could result in a need for significant additional allocated capital to certain insurance companies due to rating agency and regulatory requirements, including with respect to stress scenarios. Furthermore, certain of our products have guaranteed benefits that increase our potential obligation and statutory capital exposure should equity markets decline. Sustained declines in equity markets may result in the need to devote significant additional capital to support these products and adversely affect our ability to support our other businesses.
Interest rates in recent periods continue to be at or near historically low levels. As noted above, a sustained low interest rate environment would continue to pressure our net investment income and could result in lower margins, increased pension expense and lower estimated gross profits on certain products. In addition, due to the long-term nature of the liabilities within our Talcott Resolution operations, such as structured settlements and guaranteed benefits on variable annuities, sustained declines in long-term interest rates subjects us to reinvestment risks, increased hedging costs, spread compression and capital volatility. A rise in interest rates, in the absence of other countervailing changes, will reduce the market value of our investment portfolio and, if long-term interest rates were to rise dramatically within a six-to-twelve month time period, certain products within our Talcott Resolution division might be exposed to disintermediation risk. Disintermediation risk refers to the risk that our policyholders may surrender their contracts in a rising interest rate environment, requiring us to liquidate assets in an unrealized loss position. Although our products have features such as surrender charges and market-value adjustments, we are subject to disintermediation risk. An increase in interest rates can also impact our tax planning strategies and in particular our ability to utilize tax benefits to offset certain previously recognized realized capital losses.
Our exposure to credit spreads primarily relates to market price and cash flow variability associated with changes in credit spreads. If issuer credit spreads widen significantly or retain historically wide levels over an extended period of time, additional other-than-temporary impairments and decreases in the market value of our investment portfolio will likely result. In addition, losses have also occurred due to the volatility in credit spreads. When credit spreads widen, we incur losses associated with the credit derivatives where the Company assumes exposure. When credit spreads tighten, we incur losses associated with derivatives where the Company has purchased credit protection. If credit spreads tighten significantly, the Company's net investment income associated with new purchases of fixed maturities may be reduced. In addition, a reduction in market liquidity can make it difficult to value certain of our securities when trading becomes less frequent. As such, valuations may include assumptions or estimates that may be more susceptible to significant period-to-period changes, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations or liquidity.
Our statutory surplus is also affected by widening credit spreads as a result of the accounting for the assets and liabilities on our fixed market value adjusted (“MVA”) annuities. Statutory separate account assets supporting the fixed MVA annuities are recorded at fair value. In determining the statutory reserve for the fixed MVA annuities we are required to use current crediting rates in the U.S. and Japanese LIBOR in Japan. In many capital market scenarios, current crediting rates in the U.S. are highly correlated with market rates implicit in the fair value of statutory separate account assets. As a result, the change in the statutory reserve from period to period will likely substantially offset the change in the fair value of the statutory separate account assets. However, in periods of volatile credit markets, actual credit spreads on investment assets may increase sharply for certain sub-sectors of the overall credit market, resulting in statutory separate account asset market value losses. As actual credit spreads are not fully reflected in current crediting rates in the U.S. or Japanese LIBOR in Japan, the calculation of statutory reserves will not substantially offset the change in fair value of the statutory separate account assets resulting in reductions in statutory surplus. This has resulted and may continue to result in the need to devote significant additional capital to support the fixed MVA product.
Our primary foreign currency exchange risk is related to certain guaranteed benefits associated with the Japan and U.K. variable annuities. The strengthening of the yen compared with other currencies would substantially increase our exposure to pay yen-denominated obligations. In addition, our foreign currency exchange risk relates to net income from foreign operations, non-U.S. dollar denominated investments, investments in foreign subsidiaries, and our yen-denominated individual fixed annuity product. In general, the weakening of foreign currencies versus the U.S. dollar will unfavorably affect net income from foreign operations, the value of non-U.S. dollar denominated investments, investments in foreign subsidiaries and realized gains or losses on the yen denominated annuity products. A strengthening of the U.S. dollar compared to foreign currencies will increase our exposure to the U.S. variable annuity guarantee benefits where policyholders have elected to invest in international funds, generating losses and statutory surplus strain.


15

Our real estate market exposure includes investments in commercial mortgage-backed securities, residential mortgage-backed securities, commercial real estate collateralized debt obligations, mortgage and real estate partnerships, and mortgage loans. Deterioration in the real estate market in the recent past has adversely affected our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity. Significant further deterioration in the real estate market, including increases in property vacancy rates, delinquencies and foreclosures, could result in new cycle lows for market values and have a negative impact on sources of refinancing resulting in reduced market liquidity and higher risk premiums. This could result in impairments of real estate backed securities, a reduction in net investment income associated with real estate partnerships, and increases in our valuation allowance for mortgage loans.
Significant declines in equity prices, changes in U.S. interest rates, changes in credit spreads, inflation, the strengthening or weakening of foreign currencies against the U.S. dollar, or global real estate market deterioration, individually or in combination, could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations or liquidity.
Our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity may be materially adversely affected by unfavorable loss development.
Our success, in part, depends upon our ability to accurately assess the risks associated with the businesses that we insure. We establish loss reserves to cover our estimated liability for the payment of all unpaid losses and loss expenses incurred with respect to premiums earned on the policies that we write. Loss reserves do not represent an exact calculation of liability. Rather, loss reserves are estimates of what we expect the ultimate settlement and administration of claims will cost, less what has been paid to date. These estimates are based upon actuarial and statistical projections and on our assessment of currently available data, as well as estimates of claims severity and frequency, legal theories of liability and other factors. Loss reserve estimates are refined periodically as experience develops and claims are reported and settled. Establishing an appropriate level of loss reserves is an inherently uncertain process. Because of this uncertainty, it is possible that our reserves at any given time will prove inadequate. Furthermore, since estimates of aggregate loss costs for prior accident years are used in pricing our insurance products, we could later determine that our products were not priced adequately to cover actual losses and related loss expenses in order to generate a profit. To the extent we determine that losses and related loss expenses are emerging unfavorably to our initial expectations, we will be required to increase reserves. Increases in reserves would be recognized as an expense during the period or periods in which these determinations are made, thereby adversely affecting our results of operations for the related period or periods. Depending on the severity and timing of any changes in these estimated losses, such determinations could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations or liquidity.
We are particularly vulnerable to losses from catastrophes, both natural and man-made, which could materially and adversely affect our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
Our insurance operations expose us to claims arising out of catastrophes. Catastrophes can be caused by various unpredictable events, including earthquakes, hurricanes, hailstorms, severe winter weather, wind storms, fires, tornadoes, explosions, pandemics and other natural or man-made disasters. The geographic distribution of our business subjects us to catastrophe exposure for events occurring in a number of areas, including, but not limited to, hurricanes in Florida, the Gulf Coast, the Northeast and the Atlantic coast regions of the United States, tornadoes in the Midwest and Southeast, earthquakes in California and the New Madrid region of the United States, and the spread of disease in metropolitan areas. We expect that increases in the values and concentrations of insured property in these areas will continue to increase the severity of catastrophic events in the future. Starting in 2004 and 2005, third-party catastrophe loss models for hurricane loss events have incorporated medium-term forecasts of increased hurricane frequency and severity - reflecting the potential influence of multi-decadal climate patterns within the Atlantic. In addition, changing climate conditions across longer time scales, including the potential risk of broader climate change, may be increasing, or may in the future increase, the severity of certain natural catastrophe losses across various geographic regions. In addition, changing climate conditions, primarily rising global temperatures, may be increasing, or may in the future increase, the frequency and severity of natural catastrophes and increase the potency of viral pathogens and bacterial outbreaks that can cause pandemics or adverse mortality trends. Potential examples of the impact of climate change on catastrophe exposure include, but are not limited to the following: an increase in the frequency or severity of wind and thunderstorm and tornado/hailstorm events due to increased convection in the atmosphere, more frequent brush fires in certain geographies due to prolonged periods of drought, higher incidence of deluge flooding, and the potential for an increase in severity of the largest hurricane events due to higher sea surface temperatures. Additionally, due to such catastrophes, policyholders may be unable to meet their obligations to pay premiums on our insurance policies or make deposits on our investment products.
Our liquidity could be constrained by a catastrophe, or multiple catastrophes, which could result in extraordinary losses. In addition, in part because accounting rules do not permit insurers to reserve for such catastrophic events until they occur, claims from catastrophic events could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations or liquidity. To the extent that loss experience unfolds or models improve, we will seek to reflect any of these changes in the design and pricing of our products. However, the Company may be exposed to regulatory or legislative actions that prevent a full accounting of loss expectations in the design or pricing of our products or result in additional risk-shifting to the insurance industry.


16

Actual results could materially differ from the analytical models we use to assist our decision making in key areas such as underwriting, capital, hedging, reserving, and catastrophe risks, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations or liquidity.
We employ various modeling techniques (e.g., scenarios, predictive, stochastic and/or forecasting) to analyze and estimate exposures, loss trends and other risks associated with our assets and liabilities. We use the modeled outputs and related analyses to assist us in decision-making related to underwriting, pricing, capital allocation, reserving, hedging, reinsurance, and catastrophe risk. Both proprietary and third party models we use incorporate numerous assumptions and forecasts about the future level and variability of interest rates, capital requirements, loss frequency and severity, currency exchange rates, policyholder behavior, equity markets and inflation, among others. The modeled outputs and related analyses are subject to the inherent limitations of any statistical analysis, including the use of historical internal and industry data and assumptions. Consequently, actual results may differ materially from our modeled results. The profitability and financial condition of the Company substantially depends on the extent to which our actual experience is consistent with assumptions we use in our models and ultimate model outputs. If, based upon these models or other factors, we misprice our products or our estimates of the risks we are exposed to prove to be materially inaccurate, our business, financial condition, results of operations or liquidity may be adversely affected.
Our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity may be adversely affected by the emergence of unexpected and unintended claim and coverage issues.
As industry practices and legal, judicial, social and other environmental conditions change, unexpected and unintended issues related to claims and coverage may emerge. These issues may either extend coverage beyond our underwriting intent or increase the frequency or severity of claims. In some instances, these changes may not become apparent until some time after we have issued insurance contracts that are affected by the changes. As a result, the full extent of liability under our insurance contracts may not be known for many years after a contract is issued, and this liability may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity at the time it becomes known.
As a property and casualty insurer, the premium rates we are able to charge and the profits we are able to obtain are affected by the actions of state insurance departments that regulate our business, the cyclical nature of the business in which we compete and our ability to adequately price the risks we underwrite, which may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
Pricing adequacy depends on a number of factors, including the ability to obtain regulatory approval for rate changes, proper evaluation of underwriting risks, the ability to project future loss cost frequency and severity based on historical loss experience adjusted for known trends, our response to rate actions taken by competitors, and expectations about regulatory and legal developments and expense levels. We seek to price our property and casualty insurance policies such that insurance premiums and future net investment income earned on premiums received will provide for an acceptable profit in excess of underwriting expenses and the cost of paying claims.
State insurance departments that regulate us often propose premium rate changes for the benefit of the consumer at the expense of the insurer and may not allow us to reach targeted levels of profitability. In addition to regulating rates, certain states have enacted laws that require a property and casualty insurer conducting business in that state to participate in assigned risk plans, reinsurance facilities, joint underwriting associations and other residual market plans, or to offer coverage to all consumers and often restrict an insurer's ability to charge the price it might otherwise charge or restrict an insurer's ability to offer or enforce specific policy deductibles. In these markets, we may be compelled to underwrite significant amounts of business at lower than desired rates or accept additional risk not contemplated in our existing rates, participate in the operating losses of residual market plans or pay assessments to fund operating deficits of state-sponsored funds, possibly leading to unacceptable returns on equity. The laws and regulations of many states also limit an insurer's ability to withdraw from one or more lines of insurance in the state, except pursuant to a plan that is approved by the state's insurance department. Additionally, certain states require insurers to participate in guaranty funds for impaired or insolvent insurance companies. These funds periodically assess losses against all insurance companies doing business in the state. Any of these factors could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations or liquidity.
Additionally, the property and casualty insurance market is historically cyclical, experiencing periods characterized by relatively high levels of price competition, less restrictive underwriting standards and relatively low premium rates, followed by periods of relatively low levels of competition, more selective underwriting standards and relatively high premium rates. Prices tend to increase for a particular line of business when insurance carriers have incurred significant losses in that line of business in the recent past or when the industry as a whole commits less of its capital to writing exposures in that line of business. Prices tend to decrease when recent loss experience has been favorable or when competition among insurance carriers increases. In all of our property and casualty insurance product lines and states, there is a risk that the premium we charge may ultimately prove to be inadequate as reported losses emerge. In addition, there is a risk that regulatory constraints, price competition or incorrect pricing assumptions could prevent us from achieving targeted returns. Inadequate pricing could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations.


17

The amount of statutory capital that we have, and the amount of statutory capital that we must hold to maintain our financial strength and credit ratings and meet other requirements, can vary significantly from time to time and is sensitive to a number of factors outside of our control, including equity market, credit market, interest rate and foreign currency conditions, changes in policyholder behavior and changes in rating agency models.
We conduct the vast majority of our business through licensed insurance company subsidiaries. Accounting standards and statutory capital and reserve requirements for these entities are prescribed by the applicable insurance regulators and the National Association of Insurance Commissioners (“NAIC”). Insurance regulators have established regulations that provide minimum capitalization requirements based on risk-based capital formulas for both life and property and casualty companies. The RBC formula for life companies establishes capital requirements relating to insurance, business, asset and interest rate risks, including equity, interest rate and expense recovery risks associated with variable annuities and group annuities that contain death benefits or certain living benefits. The RBC formula for property and casualty companies adjusts statutory surplus levels for certain underwriting, asset, credit and off-balance sheet risks. Our international operations are subject to regulation in the relevant jurisdiction in which they operate, which in many ways is similar to the state regulation outlined above, with similar related restrictions and obligations.
In any particular year, statutory surplus amounts and RBC ratios may increase or decrease depending on a variety of factors, including the amount of statutory income or losses generated by our insurance subsidiaries (which itself is sensitive to equity market and credit market conditions), the amount of additional capital our insurance subsidiaries must hold to support business growth, changes in equity market levels, the value of certain fixed-income and equity securities in our investment portfolio, the value of certain derivative instruments, changes in interest rates and foreign currency exchange rates, the impact of internal reinsurance arrangements, and changes to the NAIC RBC formulas. Most of these factors are outside of the Company's control. The Company's financial strength and credit ratings are significantly influenced by the statutory surplus amounts and RBC ratios of our insurance company subsidiaries. In addition, rating agencies may implement changes to their internal models that have the effect of increasing the amount of statutory capital we must hold in order to maintain our current ratings. Also, in extreme scenarios of equity market declines and other capital market volatility, the amount of additional statutory reserves that we are required to hold for our variable annuity guarantees increases at a greater than linear rate. This reduces the statutory surplus used in calculating our RBC ratios. When equity markets increase, surplus levels and RBC ratios will generally increase. This may be offset, however, as a result of a number of factors and market conditions, including the level of hedging costs and other risk transfer activities, reserve requirements for death and living benefit guarantees and RBC requirements could also increase, lowering RBC ratios. For example, while our property and casualty companies are expected to generate statutory surplus in 2013, our life companies' statutory surplus, excluding the statutory surplus gain from the dispositions of Individual Life and Retirement Plans, is expected to be flat to positive in 2013, which while an improvement over 2012 is challenged due to continued low interest rates and high loss cost trends in Group Benefits. Due to these factors, projecting statutory capital and the related RBC ratios is complex. If our statutory capital resources are insufficient to maintain a particular rating by one or more rating agencies, we may seek to raise capital through public or private equity or debt financing. If we were not to raise additional capital, either at our discretion or because we were unable to do so, our financial strength and credit ratings might be downgraded by one or more rating agencies.
Downgrades in our financial strength or credit ratings, which may make our products less attractive, could increase our cost of capital and inhibit our ability to refinance our debt, which would have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
Financial strength and credit ratings, including commercial paper ratings, are important in establishing the competitive position of insurance companies. Rating agencies assign ratings based upon several factors. While most of the factors relate to the rated company, some of the factors relate to the views of the rating agency, general economic conditions, and circumstances outside the rated company's control. In addition, rating agencies may employ different models and formulas to assess the financial strength of a rated company, and from time to time rating agencies have, at their discretion, altered these models. Changes to the models, general economic conditions, or circumstances outside our control could impact a rating agency's judgment of its rating and the rating it assigns us. We cannot predict what actions rating agencies may take, or what actions we may take in response to the actions of rating agencies, which may adversely affect us.
Our financial strength ratings, which are intended to measure our ability to meet policyholder obligations, are an important factor affecting public confidence in most of our products and, as a result, our competitiveness. A downgrade or a potential downgrade in the rating of our financial strength or of one of our principal insurance subsidiaries could affect our competitive position and reduce future sales of our products.

18

Our credit ratings also affect our cost of capital. A downgrade or a potential downgrade of our credit ratings could make it more difficult or costly to refinance maturing debt obligations, to support business growth at our insurance subsidiaries and to maintain or improve the financial strength ratings of our principal insurance subsidiaries. Downgrades could begin to trigger potentially material collateral calls on certain of our derivative instruments and counterparty rights to terminate derivative relationships, both of which could limit our ability to purchase additional derivative instruments. These events could materially adversely affect our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity. For a further discussion of potential impacts of ratings downgrades on derivative instruments, including potential collateral calls, see the "Capital Resources and Liquidity - Derivative Commitments" section of Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.
Concentration of our investment portfolio in any particular segment of the economy may have adverse effects on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
The concentration of our investment portfolios in any particular industry, collateral type, group of related industries or geographic sector could have an adverse effect on our investment portfolios and consequently on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity. Events or developments that have a negative impact on any particular industry, group of related industries or geographic region may have a greater adverse effect on our investment portfolio to the extent that the portfolio is concentrated rather than diversified.
Our adjustment of our risk management program relating to products we offered with guaranteed benefits to emphasize protection of economic value will likely result in greater U.S. GAAP volatility in our earnings and potentially material charges to net income (loss) in periods of rising equity market pricing levels.
Some of the in-force business within our Talcott Resolution operations, especially variable annuities, offer guaranteed benefits which, in the event of a decline in equity markets, would not only result in lower earnings, but will also increase our exposure to liability for benefit claims. We are also subject to equity market volatility related to these benefits, including the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit (“GMWB”), guaranteed minimum accumulation benefit (“GMAB”), guaranteed minimum death benefit (“GMDB”) and guaranteed minimum income benefit (“GMIB”) associated with in-force variable annuities. We use reinsurance structures and have modified benefit features to mitigate the exposure associated with GMDB. We also use reinsurance in combination with a modification of benefit features and derivative instruments to attempt to minimize the claim exposure and to reduce the volatility of net income associated with the GMWB liability. However, due to the severe economic conditions experienced in recent years, we adjusted our risk management program to place greater relative emphasis on the protection economic value. This shift in relative emphasis has resulted in greater U.S. GAAP earnings volatility and, based upon the types of hedging instruments used, can result in potentially material charges to net income (loss) in periods of rising equity market pricing levels, lower interest rates, rises in volatility and weakening of the yen against other currencies. While we believe that these actions have improved the efficiency of our risk management related to these benefits, we remain liable for the guaranteed benefits in the event that reinsurers or derivative counterparties are unable or unwilling to pay and in turn may need additional capital to support in-force business. We are also subject to the risk that these management procedures prove ineffective or that unanticipated policyholder behavior, combined with adverse market events, produces economic losses beyond the scope of the risk management techniques employed, which individually or collectively may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
Our valuations of many of our financial instruments include methodologies, estimations and assumptions that are subject to differing interpretations and could result in changes to investment valuations that may materially adversely affect our business, results of operations, financial condition and liquidity .
The following financial instruments are carried at fair value in the Company's consolidated financial statements: fixed maturities, equity securities, freestanding and embedded derivatives, and separate account assets. The determination of fair values is made at a specific point in time, based on available market information and judgments about financial instruments, including estimates of the timing and amounts of expected future cash flows and the credit standing of the issuer or counterparty. The use of different methodologies and assumptions may have a material effect on the estimated fair value amounts.
During periods of market disruption, including periods of rapidly widening credit spreads or illiquidity, it may be difficult to value certain of our securities if trading becomes less frequent and/or market data becomes less observable. There may be certain asset classes that were in active markets with significant observable data that become illiquid due to the financial environment. In such cases, securities may require more subjectivity and management judgment in determining their fair values and those fair values may differ materially from the value at which the investments may be ultimately sold. Further, rapidly changing or unprecedented credit and equity market conditions could materially impact the valuation of securities and the period-to-period changes in value could vary significantly. Decreases in value could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations, financial condition and liquidity.

19

Evaluation of available-for-sale securities for other-than-temporary impairment involves subjective determinations and could materially impact our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
The evaluation of impairments is a quantitative and qualitative process, which is subject to risks and uncertainties and is intended to determine whether a credit and/or non-credit impairment exists and whether an impairment should be recognized in current period earnings or in other comprehensive income. The risks and uncertainties include changes in general economic conditions, the issuer's financial condition or future recovery prospects, the effects of changes in interest rates or credit spreads and the expected recovery period. For securitized financial assets with contractual cash flows, the Company currently uses its best estimate of cash flows over the life of the security. In addition, estimating future cash flows involves incorporating information received from third-party sources and making internal assumptions and judgments regarding the future performance of the underlying collateral and assessing the probability that an adverse change in future cash flows has occurred. The determination of the amount of other-than-temporary impairments is based upon our quarterly evaluation and assessment of known and inherent risks associated with the respective asset class. Such evaluations and assessments are revised as conditions change and new information becomes available.
Additionally, our management considers a wide range of factors about the security issuer and uses their best judgment in evaluating the cause of the decline in the estimated fair value of the security and in assessing the prospects for recovery. Inherent in management's evaluation of the security are assumptions and estimates about the operations of the issuer and its future earnings potential. Considerations in the impairment evaluation process include, but are not limited to:
•
the length of time and the extent to which the fair value has been less than cost or amortized cost;
•
changes in the financial condition, credit rating and near-term prospects of the issuer;
•
whether the issuer is current on contractually obligated interest and principal payments;
•
changes in the financial condition of the security's underlying collateral;
•
the payment structure of the security;
•
the potential for impairments in an entire industry sector or sub-sector;
•
the potential for impairments in certain economically depressed geographic locations;
•
the potential for impairments of securities where the issuer, series of issuers or industry has suffered a catastrophic type of loss or has exhausted natural resources;
•
unfavorable changes in forecasted cash flows on mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities;
•
for mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities, commercial and residential property value declines that vary by property type and location and average cumulative collateral loss rates that vary by vintage year;
•
other subjective factors, including concentrations and information obtained from regulators and rating agencies;
•
our intent to sell a debt or an equity security with debt-like characteristics (collectively, “debt security”) or whether it is more likely than not that the Company will be required to sell the debt security before its anticipated recovery; and
•
our intent and ability to retain an equity security without debt-like characteristics for a period of time sufficient to allow for the recovery of its value.
Impairment losses in earnings could materially adversely affect our results of operation and financial condition.
Losses due to nonperformance or defaults by others, including issuers of investment securities (which include structured securities such as commercial mortgage backed securities and residential mortgage backed securities, European private and sovereign issuers, or other high yielding bonds) mortgage loans or reinsurance and derivative instrument counterparties, could have a material adverse effect on the value of our investments, business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
Issuers or borrowers whose securities or loans we hold, customers, trading counterparties, counterparties under swaps and other derivative contracts, reinsurers, clearing agents, exchanges, clearing houses and other financial intermediaries and guarantors may default on their obligations to us due to bankruptcy, insolvency, lack of liquidity, adverse economic conditions, operational failure, fraud, government intervention or other reasons. Such defaults could have a material adverse effect on the value of our investments, business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity. Additionally, the underlying assets supporting our structured securities or loans may deteriorate causing these securities or loans to incur losses.


20

Our investment portfolio includes securities backed by real estate assets the value of which have been adversely impacted by the recent recessionary period, high unemployment rates and the associated property value declines, ultimately resulting in a reduction in expected future cash flows for certain securities. The Company also has exposure to European based issuers of securities and providers of reinsurance, as well as indirect European exposure resulting from the variable annuity products that it has sold in Japan and the United Kingdom. Further details of the European private and sovereign issuers held within the investment portfolio and indirect variable annuity exposures can be found in Part II, Item 7, MD&A - Enterprise Risk Management - Investment Portfolio Risks and Risk Management. The Company's European based reinsurance arrangements are further described in Part II, Item 7, MD&A - Enterprise Risk Management - Investment Portfolio Risks and Risk Management - European Exposure.
Further property value declines and loss rates that exceed our current estimates, as outlined in Part II, Item 7, MD&A - Enterprise Risk Management - Other-Than-Temporary Impairments, or a worsening of global economic conditions could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
To the extent the investment portfolio is not adequately diversified, concentrations of credit risk may exist which could negatively impact the Company if significant adverse events or developments occur in any particular industry, group of related industries or geographic regions. The Company is not exposed to any credit concentration risk of a single issuer greater than 10% of the Company's stockholders' equity other than U.S. government and U.S. government agencies backed by the full faith and credit of the U.S. government, and the Government of Japan. However, if issuers of securities or loans we hold are acquired, merge or otherwise consolidate with other issuers of securities or loans held by the Company, the Company's credit concentration risk could increase above the 10% threshold, for a period of time, until the Company is able to sell securities to get back in compliance with the established investment credit policies.
If assumptions used in estimating future gross profits differ from actual experience, we may be required to accelerate the amortization of DAC and increase reserves for guaranteed minimum death and income benefits, which could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.
The Company deferred acquisition costs associated with the prior sales of its universal and variable life and variable annuity products. These costs are amortized over the expected life of the contracts. The remaining deferred but not yet amortized cost is referred to as the Deferred Acquisition Cost (“DAC”) asset. We amortize these costs in proportion to the present value of estimated gross profits (“EGPs”). The Company evaluates the EGPs compared to the DAC asset to determine if an impairment exists. The Company also establishes reserves for GMDB and GMIB using components of EGPs. The projection of EGPs, or components of EGPs, requires the use of certain assumptions, principally related to separate account fund returns in excess of amounts credited to policyholders, surrender and lapse rates, interest margin (including impairments), mortality, benefit utilization, annuitization and hedging costs. Of these factors, we anticipate that changes in investment returns are most likely to impact the rate of amortization of such costs. However, other factors such as those the Company might employ to reduce risk, such as the cost of hedging or other risk mitigating techniques, could also significantly reduce estimates of future gross profits. Estimating future gross profits is a complex process requiring considerable judgment and the forecasting of events well into the future. If our assumptions regarding policyholder behavior, including lapse rates, benefit utilization, surrenders, and annuitization, hedging costs or costs to employ other risk mitigating techniques prove to be inaccurate or if significant or sustained equity market declines occur, we could be required to accelerate the amortization of DAC related to variable annuity and variable universal life contracts, and increase reserves for GMDB and GMIB which would result in a charge to net income. Such adjustments could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.
If our businesses do not perform well, we may be required to recognize an impairment of our goodwill or to establish a valuation allowance against the deferred income tax asset, which could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.
Goodwill represents the excess of the amounts we paid to acquire subsidiaries and other businesses over the fair value of their net assets at the date of acquisition. We test goodwill at least annually for impairment. Impairment testing is performed based upon estimates of the fair value of the “reporting unit” to which the goodwill relates. The reporting unit is the operating segment or a business one level below that operating segment if discrete financial information is prepared and regularly reviewed by management at that level. The fair value of the reporting unit is impacted by the performance of the business and could be adversely impacted by any efforts made by the Company to limit risk. If it is determined that the goodwill has been impaired, the Company must write down the goodwill by the amount of the impairment, with a corresponding charge to net income (loss). These write downs could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations or financial condition.


21

Deferred income tax represents the tax effect of the differences between the book and tax basis of assets and liabilities. Deferred tax assets are assessed periodically by management to determine if they are realizable. Factors in management's determination include the performance of the business including the ability to generate capital gains, to offset previously recognized capital losses, from a variety of sources and tax planning strategies. If based on available information, it is more likely than not that we are unable to recognize a full tax benefit on realized capital losses, then a valuation allowance will be established with a corresponding charge to net income (loss). Charges to increase our valuation allowance could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.
The occurrence of one or more terrorist attacks in the geographic areas we serve or the threat of terrorism in general may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
The occurrence of one or more terrorist attacks in the geographic areas we serve could result in substantially higher claims under our insurance policies than we have anticipated. Private sector catastrophe reinsurance is extremely limited and generally unavailable for terrorism losses caused by attacks with nuclear, biological, chemical or radiological weapons. Reinsurance coverage from the federal government under the Terrorism Risk Insurance Program Reauthorization Act of 2007 (“TRIPRA”) is also limited. Although TRIPRA provides benefits in the event of certain acts of terrorism, those benefits are subject to a deductible and other limitations. Under TRIPRA, once our losses exceed 20% of our subject commercial property and casualty insurance premium for the preceding calendar year, the federal government will reimburse us for 85% of our losses attributable to certain acts of terrorism which exceed this deductible up to a total industry program cap of $100 billion. Our estimated deductible under the program is $1.2 billion for 2013. In addition, because the interpretation of this law is untested, there is substantial uncertainty as to how it will be applied to specific circumstances. It is also possible that future legislative action could change TRIPRA, which is due to expire at the end of 2014, unless extended.
Accordingly, the effects of a terrorist attack in the geographic areas we serve may result in claims and related losses for which we do not have adequate reinsurance. This would likely cause us to increase our reserves, adversely affect our results during the period or periods affected and, could adversely affect our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity. Further, the continued threat of terrorism and the occurrence of terrorist attacks, as well as heightened security measures and military action in response to these threats and attacks or other geopolitical or military crises, may cause significant volatility in global financial markets, disruptions to commerce and reduced economic activity. These consequences could have an adverse effect on the value of the assets in our investment portfolio as well as those in our separate accounts. Terrorist attacks also could disrupt our operations centers in the U.S. or abroad. As a result, it is possible that any, or a combination of all, of these factors may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
It is difficult for us to predict our potential exposure for asbestos and environmental claims, and our ultimate liability may exceed our currently recorded reserves, which may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
We continue to receive asbestos and environmental claims. Significant uncertainty limits the ability of insurers and reinsurers to estimate the ultimate reserves necessary for unpaid losses and related expenses for both environmental and particularly asbestos claims. For some asbestos and environmental claims, we believe that the actuarial tools and other techniques we employ to estimate the ultimate cost of claims for more traditional kinds of insurance exposure are less precise in estimating reserves for our asbestos and environmental exposures. Accordingly, the degree of variability of reserve estimates for these longer-tailed exposures is significantly greater than for other more traditional exposures. It is also not possible to predict changes in the legal and legislative environment and their effect on the future development of asbestos and environmental claims. Because of the significant uncertainties that limit the ability of insurers and reinsurers to estimate the ultimate reserves necessary for unpaid losses and related expenses for both environmental and particularly asbestos claims, the ultimate liabilities may exceed the currently recorded reserves. Increases in reserves would be recognized as an expense during the periods in which these determinations are made, thereby adversely affecting our results of operations for the related periods. Any such additional liability cannot be reasonably estimated now, but could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.

22

We may incur losses due to our reinsurers' unwillingness or inability to meet their obligations under reinsurance contracts and the availability, pricing and adequacy of reinsurance may not be sufficient to protect us against losses.
As an insurer, we frequently seek to reduce the effect of losses that may arise from catastrophes to transfer other risks that can cause unfavorable results of operations, or to effect the sale of one line of business to an independent company through reinsurance. Under these reinsurance arrangements, other insurers assume a portion of our losses and related expenses; however, we remain liable as the direct insurer on all risks reinsured. Consequently, ceded reinsurance arrangements do not eliminate our obligation to pay claims, and we are subject to our reinsurers' credit risk with respect to our ability to recover amounts due from them. Although we regularly evaluate the financial condition of our reinsurers to minimize our exposure to significant losses from reinsurer insolvencies, our reinsurers may become financially unsound or choose to dispute their contractual obligations by the time their financial obligations become due. The inability or unwillingness of any reinsurer to meet its financial obligations to us could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations. In addition, market conditions beyond our control determine the availability and cost of the reinsurance we are able to purchase. Historically, reinsurance pricing has changed significantly from time to time. No assurances can be made that reinsurance will remain continuously available to us to the same extent and on the same terms as are currently available. If we were unable to maintain our current level of reinsurance or purchase new reinsurance protection in amounts that we consider sufficient and at prices that we consider acceptable, we would have to either accept an increase in our net liability exposure, reduce the amount of business we write, or develop to the extent possible other alternatives to reinsurance. Further, due to the inherent uncertainties as to collection and the length of time before reinsurance recoverables will be due, it is possible that future adjustments to the Company’s reinsurance recoverables, net of the allowance, could be required, which could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated results of operations or cash flows in a particular quarterly or annual period.
Competitive activity may adversely affect our market share and financial results, which could have a material adverse effect on our business and results of operations.
The insurance industry is highly competitive. Our principal competitors are other property and casualty insurers, group benefits providers and mutual funds. Larger competitors may have lower operating costs and an ability to absorb greater risk while maintaining their financial strength ratings, thereby allowing them to price their products more competitively. These highly competitive pressures could result in increased pricing pressures on a number of our products and services and may harm our ability to maintain or increase our profitability. Because of the highly competitive nature of the insurance industry, there can be no assurance that we will continue to compete effectively with our industry rivals, or that competitive pressure will not have a material adverse effect on our business and results of operations.
We may experience difficulty in marketing, distributing and providing investment advisory services in relation to our products through current and future distribution channels and advisory firms.
We distribute our insurance products and mutual funds through a variety of distribution channels, including brokers, independent agents, broker-dealers, banks, wholesalers, affinity partners, our own internal sales force and other third-party organizations. In some areas of our business, we generate a significant portion of our business through or in connection with individual third-party arrangements. For example, we market our Consumer Markets products in part through an exclusive licensing arrangement with AARP that continues through January 2020. Our ability to distribute products through affinity partners may be adversely impacted by membership levels and the pace of membership growth. In December 2011, we entered into a 5-year agreement with Wellington Management Company as the preferred sub-advisor for The Hartford Mutual Funds. We periodically negotiate provisions and renewals of these relationships, and there can be no assurance that such terms will remain acceptable to us or such third parties. An interruption in our continuing relationship with certain of these third parties, including potentially as a result of a strategic transaction, could materially affect our ability to market our products and could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
The impact of regulatory initiatives, including the enactment of the Dodd-Frank Act, could have a material adverse impact on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
Regulatory developments relating to the recent financial crisis may significantly affect our operations and prospects in ways that we cannot predict. U.S. and overseas governmental and regulatory authorities, including the SEC, the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (the "Federal Reserve"), the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (“FDIC”), the NYSE and the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority, Inc. (“FINRA”) are considering enhanced or new regulatory requirements intended to prevent future crises or otherwise stabilize the institutions under their supervision. Such measures are likely to lead to stricter regulation of financial institutions generally, and heightened prudential requirements for systemically important companies in particular. Such measures could include taxation of financial transactions and restrictions on employee compensation.
The Dodd-Frank Act was enacted on July 21, 2010, mandating changes to the regulation of the financial services industry. Implementation of the Dodd-Frank Act is ongoing and may affect our operations and governance in ways that could adversely affect our financial condition and results of operations.

23

Certain provisions of the Dodd-Frank Act will require central clearing of, and/or impose new margin and capital requirements on, derivatives transactions, which we expect will increase the costs of our hedging program. Other provisions in the Dodd-Frank Act that may impact us include: the new “Federal Insurance Office” within Treasury; the possible adverse impact on the pricing and liquidity of the securities in which we invest resulting from the proprietary trading and market making limitation of the Volcker Rule; the possible prohibition of certain asset-backed securities transactions that could adversely impact our ability to offer insurance-linked securities; and enhancements to corporate governance, especially regarding risk management.
The Dodd-Frank Act vests the Financial Stability Oversight Council (“FSOC”) with the power to designate “systemically important” institutions, which will be subject to special regulatory supervision and other provisions intended to prevent, or mitigate the impact of, future disruptions in the U.S. financial system. Systemically important institutions are limited to large bank holding companies and nonbank financial companies that are so important that their potential failure could “pose a threat to the financial stability of the United States.” The FSOC published a final rule setting forth the process they propose to follow when designating systemically important nonbank financial companies in April 2012. Based on its most current financial data, The Hartford is below the initial quantitative thresholds that will be used to determine which nonbank companies merit consideration. The FSOC has indicted it will review on a quarterly basis whether nonbank financial institutions meet the metrics for further review.
If we are designated as a systemically important institution, we could be subject to higher capital requirements and additional regulatory oversight imposed by the Federal Reserve, as well as to post-event assessments imposed by the FDIC to recoup the costs associated with the orderly liquidation of other systemically important institutions in the event one or more such institutions fails. Further, in certain circumstances the FDIC is authorized to petition a state court to commence an insolvency proceeding to liquidate an insurance company that fails in the event the insurer's state regulator fails to act. If designated, we could also be subject to increased capital requirements or quantitative limits with respect to our sponsorship of and investments in private equity and hedge funds, which could limit our discretion in managing our general account. The Federal Reserve issued a proposed rule in December 2011 that would apply capital and liquidity requirements, single-counterparty credit limits, and stress testing and risk management requirements to systemically important institutions, and subject such institutions to an early remediation regime based on these requirements. The Federal Reserve has noted that they may tailor the application of the proposed rule to the particular attributes of systemically important nonbank financial companies. If The Hartford were to be designated as systemically important by the FSOC, these requirements could apply to The Hartford. However, it is not yet clear how or to what extent these requirements would be applied to systemically important nonbank financial companies.
We may experience unfavorable judicial or legislative developments involving claim litigation that could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
The Hartford is involved in claims litigation arising in the ordinary course of business, both as a liability insurer defending or providing indemnity for third-party claims brought against insureds and as an insurer defending coverage claims brought against it. The Hartford accounts for such activity through the establishment of unpaid loss and loss adjustment expense reserves. The Company is also involved in legal actions that do not arise in the ordinary course of business, some of which assert claims for substantial amounts. Pervasive or significant changes in the judicial environment relating to matters such as trends in the size of jury awards, developments in the law relating to the liability of insurers or tort defendants, and rulings concerning the availability or amount of certain types of damages could cause our ultimate liabilities to change from our current expectations. Changes in federal or state tort litigation laws or other applicable law could have a similar effect. It is not possible to predict changes in the judicial and legislative environment and their impact on the future development of the adequacy of our loss reserves, particularly reserves for longer-tailed lines of business, including asbestos and environmental reserves, and how those changes might adversely affect our ability to price our products appropriately. Our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity could also be adversely affected if judicial or legislative developments cause our ultimate liabilities to increase from current expectations.

24

Potential changes in domestic and foreign regulation may increase our business costs and required capital levels, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
We are subject to extensive U.S. and non-U.S. laws and regulations that are complex, subject to change and often conflicting in their approach or intended outcomes. Compliance with these laws and regulations is costly and can affect our strategy, as well as the demand for and profitability of the products we offer.
State insurance laws regulate most aspects of our U.S. insurance businesses, and our insurance subsidiaries are regulated by the insurance departments of the states in which they are domiciled, licensed or authorized to conduct business. U.S. state laws grant insurance regulatory authorities broad administrative powers with respect to, among other things:
•
licensing companies and agents to transact business;
•
calculating the value of assets to determine compliance with statutory requirements;
•
mandating certain insurance benefits;
•
regulating certain premium rates;
•
reviewing and approving policy forms;
•
regulating unfair trade and claims practices, including through the imposition of restrictions on marketing and sales practices, distribution arrangements and payment of inducements;
•
protecting privacy;
•
establishing statutory capital and reserve requirements and solvency standards;
•
fixing maximum interest rates on insurance policy loans and minimum rates for guaranteed crediting rates on life insurance policies and annuity contracts;
•
approving changes in control of insurance companies;
•
approving acquisitions, divestitures and similar transactions;
•
restricting the payment of dividends to the parent company and other transactions between affiliates;
•
establishing assessments and surcharges for guaranty funds, second-injury funds and other mandatory pooling arrangements;
•
requiring insurers to dividend any excess profits to policy holders; and
•
regulating the types, amounts and valuation of investments.
In addition, future regulatory initiatives could be adopted at the federal or state level that could impact the profitability of our businesses. For example, the NAIC and state insurance regulators are continually reexamining existing laws and regulations, specifically focusing on modifications to statutory accounting principles, interpretations of existing laws and the development of new laws and regulations. The NAIC has undertaken a Solvency Modernization Initiative focused on updating the U.S. insurance solvency regulation framework, including capital requirements, governance and risk management, group supervision, accounting and financial reporting and reinsurance. Any proposed or future legislation or NAIC initiatives, if adopted, may be more restrictive on our ability to conduct business than current regulatory requirements or may result in higher costs or increased statutory capital and reserve requirements.
Further, because these laws and regulations are complex and sometimes inexact, there is also a risk that any particular regulator's or enforcement authority's interpretation of a legal, accounting, or reserving issue may change over time to our detriment, or expose us to different or additional regulatory risks. The application of these regulations and guidelines by insurers involves interpretations and judgments that may not be consistent with the opinion of state insurance departments. We cannot provide assurance that such differences of opinion will not result in regulatory, tax or other challenges to the actions we have taken to date. The result of those potential challenges could require us to increase levels of statutory capital and reserves or incur higher operating and/or tax costs.
In addition, our international operations are subject to regulation in the relevant jurisdictions in which they operate (primarily the Japan Financial Services Agency, the Central Bank of Ireland and the United Kingdom Financial Services Authority), which in many ways is similar to the state regulation outlined above, with similar related restrictions and obligations. Our asset management businesses are also subject to extensive regulation in the various jurisdictions where they operate.

25

These laws and regulations are primarily intended to protect investors in the securities markets or investment advisory clients and generally grant supervisory authorities broad administrative powers. Compliance with these laws and regulations is costly, time consuming and personnel intensive, and may have an adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity. See the risk factor, “The impact of regulatory initiatives, including the enactment of The Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010 (the “Dodd-Frank Act”), could have a material adverse impact on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.”
Our ability to declare and pay dividends is subject to limitations.
The payment of future dividends on our capital stock is subject to the discretion of our board of directors, which considers, among other factors, our operating results, overall financial condition, credit-risk considerations and capital requirements, as well as general business and market conditions.
Moreover, as a holding company that is separate and distinct from our insurance subsidiaries, we have no significant business operations of our own. Therefore, we rely on dividends from our insurance company subsidiaries and other subsidiaries as the principal source of cash flow to meet our obligations. These obligations include payments on our debt securities and the payment of dividends on our capital stock. The Connecticut insurance holding company laws limit the payment of dividends by Connecticut-domiciled insurers. In addition, these laws require notice to and approval by the state insurance commissioner for the declaration or payment by those subsidiaries of any dividend which, together with other dividends or distributions made within the preceding 12 months, exceeds the greater of:
•
10% of the insurer's policyholder surplus as of December 31 of the preceding year, or
•
net income, or net gain from operations if the subsidiary is a life insurance company, for the previous calendar year, in each case determined under statutory insurance accounting principles.
In addition, if any dividend of a Connecticut-domiciled insurer exceeds the insurer's earned surplus, it requires the prior approval of the Connecticut Insurance Commissioner. The insurance holding company laws of the other jurisdictions in which our insurance subsidiaries are incorporated, or deemed commercially domiciled, generally contain similar, and in some instances more restrictive, limitations on the payment of dividends. Dividends paid to us by our insurance subsidiaries are further dependent on their cash requirements. For further discussion on dividends from insurance subsidiaries, see Part II, Item 7, MD&A - Capital Resources & Liquidity.
Our rights to participate in any distribution of the assets of any of our subsidiaries, for example, upon their liquidation or reorganization, and the ability of holders of our common stock to benefit indirectly from a distribution, are subject to the prior claims of creditors of the applicable subsidiary, except to the extent that we may be a creditor of that subsidiary. Claims on these subsidiaries by persons other than us include, as of December 31, 2012, claims by policyholders for benefits payable amounting to $111.9 billion , claims by separate account holders of $ 141.6 billion , and other liabilities including claims of trade creditors, claims from guaranty associations and claims from holders of debt obligations, amounting to $14.4  billion.
Holders of our capital stock are only entitled to receive such dividends as our board of directors may declare out of funds legally available for such payments. Moreover, our common stockholders are subject to the prior dividend rights of any holders of our preferred stock or depositary shares representing such preferred stock then outstanding. As of December 31, 2012, there were 575,000 shares of our Series F Preferred Stock issued and outstanding. Under the terms of the Series F Preferred Stock, our ability to declare and pay dividends on or repurchase our common stock will be subject to restrictions in the event we fail to declare and pay (or set aside for payment) full dividends on the Series F Preferred Stock.
The terms of our outstanding junior subordinated debt securities also prohibit us from declaring or paying any dividends or distributions on our capital stock or purchasing, acquiring, or making a liquidation payment on such stock, if we have given notice of our election to defer interest payments but the related deferral period has not yet commenced or a deferral period is continuing.

26

If we are unable to maintain the availability of our systems and safeguard the security of our data due to the occurrence of disasters or a cyber or other information security incident, our ability to conduct business may be compromised, we may incur substantial costs and suffer other negative consequences, all of which may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
We use computer systems to process, store, retrieve, evaluate and utilize customer and company data and information. Our computer, information technology and telecommunications systems, in turn, interface with and rely upon third-party systems or third-parties firms to maintain our systems. Our business is highly dependent on our ability, and the ability of certain third parties, to access these systems to perform necessary business functions, including, without limitation, conducting our financial reporting and analysis, providing insurance quotes, processing premium payments, making changes to existing policies, filing and paying claims, administering variable annuity products and mutual funds, providing customer support and managing our investment portfolios and hedging programs.
Systems failures or outages could compromise our ability to perform our business functions in a timely manner, which could harm our ability to conduct business and hurt our relationships with our business partners and customers. In the event of a disaster such as a natural catastrophe, a pandemic, an industrial accident, a blackout, a terrorist attack or war, systems upon which we rely may be inaccessible to our employees, customers or business partners for an extended period of time. Even if our employees and business partners are able to report to work, they may be unable to perform their duties for an extended period of time if our data or systems used to conduct our business are disabled or destroyed.
Moreover, our computer systems have been, and will likely continue to be, subject to computer viruses or other malicious codes, unauthorized access, cyber-attacks or other computer related penetrations. While, to date, The Hartford has not experienced a material breach of cybersecurity, administrative and technical controls as well as other preventive actions we take to reduce the risk of cyber incidents and protect our information technology may be insufficient to prevent physical and electronic break-ins, denial of service and other cyber-attacks or other security breaches to our computer systems. Such an event could compromise our confidential information as well as that of our clients and third parties with whom we interact, impede or interrupt our business operations and may result in other negative consequences, including remediation costs, loss of revenue, additional regulatory scrutiny and litigation and reputational damage.
In addition, we routinely transmit, receive and store personal, confidential and proprietary information by email and other electronic means. Although we attempt to keep such information confidential, we may be unable to utilize such capabilities in all events, especially with clients, vendors, service providers, counterparties and other third parties who may not have or use appropriate controls to protect confidential information.
Furthermore, certain of our businesses are subject to compliance with regulations enacted by U.S. federal and state governments, the European Union, Japan or other jurisdictions or enacted by various regulatory organizations or exchanges relating to the privacy of the information of clients, employees or others. A misuse or mishandling of confidential or proprietary information being sent to or received from an employee or third party could result in legal liability, regulatory action and reputational harm.
Third parties to whom we outsource certain of our functions are also subject to the risks outlined above, any one of which may result in our incurring substantial costs and other negative consequences, including a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
While we maintain cyber liability insurance that provides both third party liability and first party insurance coverages, our insurance may not be sufficient to protect against all loss.
Our framework for managing operational risks may not be effective in mitigating risk and loss to us that could adversely affect our businesses.
Our business performance is highly dependent on our ability to manage operational risks that arise from a large number of day-to-day business activities, including insurance underwriting, claims processing, servicing, investment, financial and tax reporting, compliance with regulatory requirements and other activities, many of which are very complex and for some of which we rely on third parties. We seek to monitor and control our exposure to risks arising out of these activities through a risk control framework encompassing a variety of reporting systems, internal controls, management review processes and other mechanisms. We cannot be completely confident that these processes and procedures will effectively control all known risks or effectively identify unforeseen risks, or that our employees and third-party agents will effectively implement them. Management of operational risks can fail for a number of reasons, including design failure, systems failure, failures to perform, cyber security attacks, human error, or unlawful activities on the part of employees or third parties. In the event that our controls are not effective or not properly implemented, we could suffer financial or other loss, disruption of our businesses, regulatory sanctions or damage to our reputation. Losses resulting from these failures can vary significantly in size, scope and scale and may have material adverse effects on our financial condition or results of operations.

27

If we experience difficulties arising from outsourcing relationships, our ability to conduct business may be compromised, which may have an adverse effect on our business and results of operations.
As we continue to focus on reducing the expense necessary to support our operations, we have become increasingly committed to outsourcing strategies for certain technology and business functions. If third-party providers experience disruptions or do not perform as anticipated, or we experience problems with a transition, we may experience operational difficulties, an inability to meet obligations, including, but not limited to, policyholder obligations, increased costs and a loss of business that may have a material adverse effect on our business and results of operations. For other risks associated with our outsourcing of certain functions, see the risk factor, “If we are unable to maintain the availability of our systems and safeguard the security of our data due to the occurrence of disasters or a cyber or other information security incident, our ability to conduct business may be compromised, we may incur substantial costs and suffer other negative consequences, all of which may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operation and liquidity.”
Changes in federal or state tax laws could adversely affect our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.
Changes in federal or state tax laws could adversely affect our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity. For instance, the steps taken by the federal government to avoid automatic tax increases and spending cuts that would have gone into effect on January 1, 2013 will result in higher tax rates, including for many small business owners who are already preparing for increased costs associated with healthcare reform. This may cause small businesses to hire fewer workers and decrease investment in their businesses, including purchasing vehicles, property and equipment, which could adversely affect our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity. Conversely, if income tax rates decline it could adversely affect the Company's ability to realize the benefits of its deferred tax assets.
Many of the products that the Company previously sold benefit from one or more forms of tax-favored status under current federal and state income tax regimes. For example, the Company previously sold individual life insurance policies that benefit from the deferral or elimination of taxation on earnings accrued under the policy, as well as permanent exclusion of certain death benefits that may be paid to policyholders' beneficiaries. We also sold annuity contracts that allowed policyholders to defer the recognition of taxable income earned within the contract. The Company also benefits from certain tax items, including but not limited to, tax-exempt bond interest, dividends received deductions, tax credits (such as foreign tax credits), and insurance reserve deductions.
Because the Company no longer sells individual life insurance, changes in the future taxation of life insurance and/or annuity contracts will not adversely impact future sales. If, however, the treatment of earnings accrued inside a life or annuity contract was changed prospectively, and the taxation of current contracts was grandfathered, it would make running off our existing annuity business more difficult. Furthermore, changes to the taxation of tax exempt bonds could limit our investment choices and depress portfolio yields. Lastly, there could be changes in the taxation of reserving methodologies for P&C companies that could increase our taxes.
Due in large part to the recent financial crisis that has affected many governments, there is an increasing risk that federal and/or state tax legislation could be enacted that would result in higher taxes on insurance companies and/or their policyholders. For example, the Obama Administration proposed federal budget released in February 2012 entitled FY 2013, Budget of the United States Government included among many other proposals, a proposal which, if enacted, would have adversely affected the amount of the dividends received deduction the Company currently enjoys. If this proposal were included in the federal budget proposal for FY 2014 and subsequently enacted, the Company's actual tax expense could increase, reducing earnings. Although the specific form of FY 2014 budget and any related legislation is uncertain, any such legislation could include provisions that lessen or eliminate some or all of the tax advantages currently benefiting the Company and/or its policyholders or not provide for grandfathering the current tax treatment of existing life and annuity products. This could occur in the context of deficit reduction or other tax reform. The effects of any such changes could have a material adverse effect on our profitability and financial condition, and could result in lapses of policies currently held, and/or our incurrence of materially higher corporate taxes.

28

Regulatory requirements could delay, deter or prevent a takeover attempt that shareholders might consider in their best interests.
Before a person can acquire control of a U.S. insurance company, prior written approval must be obtained from the insurance commissioner of the state where the domestic insurer is domiciled. Prior to granting approval of an application to acquire control of a domestic insurer, the state insurance commissioner will consider such factors as the financial strength of the applicant, the acquirer's plans for the future operations of the domestic insurer, and any such additional information as the insurance commissioner may deem necessary or appropriate for the protection of policyholders or in the public interest. Generally, state statutes provide that control over a domestic insurer is presumed to exist if any person, directly or indirectly, owns, controls, holds with the power to vote, or holds proxies representing 10 percent or more of the voting securities of the domestic insurer or its parent company. Because a person acquiring 10 percent or more of our Common Stock would indirectly control the same percentage of the stock of our U.S. insurance subsidiaries, the insurance change of control laws of various U.S. jurisdictions would likely apply to such a transaction. Other laws or required approvals pertaining to one or more of our existing subsidiaries, or a future subsidiary, may contain similar or additional restrictions on the acquisition of control of the Company. These laws may discourage potential acquisition proposals and may delay, deter, or prevent a change of control, including transactions that our Board of Directors and some or all of our shareholders might consider to be desirable.
Changes in accounting principles and financial reporting requirements could result in material changes to our reported results and financial condition.
U.S. GAAP and related financial reporting requirements are complex, continually evolving and may be subject to varied interpretation by the relevant authoritative bodies. Such varied interpretations could result from differing views related to specific facts and circumstances. Changes in U.S. GAAP and financial reporting requirements, or in the interpretation of U.S. GAAP or those requirements, could result in material changes to our reported results and financial condition. Moreover, the SEC is currently evaluating International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) to determine whether IFRS should be incorporated into the financial reporting system for U.S. issuers. Certain of these standards could result in material changes to our reported results of operation.
In connection with the restatement of our results for the three and nine month period ended September 30, 2012, we identified a material weakness, since remediated, in our internal control over financial reporting and an ineffectiveness in our disclosure controls and procedures. Future material weaknesses could lead to errors in our financial statements that could require a restatement or untimely filings, which could cause investors to lose confidence in our reported financial information, and a decline in our stock price and that of our other securities.
In connection with the restatement of our results for the three and nine month period ended September 30, 2012 and the filing of an amendment to our Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for such period, we identified a material weakness in our internal control over financial reporting and that our disclosure controls for that same period were ineffective. We have since remediated such material weakness in internal control over financial reporting and in our disclosure controls and procedures, and as of December 31, 2012, our chief executive officer and chief financial officer concluded that our disclosure controls and procedures were effective within the meaning of Exchange Act Rule 13a-15(e) and that our internal control over financial reporting was effective, taking into account the steps taken to address such material weakness. Further material weaknesses in internal control over financial reporting or ineffectiveness in disclosure controls and procedures could result in errors in our financial statements or untimely filings, which could cause investors to lose confidence in our reported financial information, and a decline in our stock price and that of our other securities.
We may not be able to protect our intellectual property and may be subject to infringement claims.
We rely on a combination of contractual rights and copyright, trademark, patent and trade secret laws to establish and protect our intellectual property. Although we use a broad range of measures to protect our intellectual property rights, third parties may infringe or misappropriate our intellectual property. We may have to litigate to enforce and protect our copyrights, trademarks, patents, trade secrets and know-how or to determine their scope, validity or enforceability, which represents a diversion of resources that may be significant in amount and may not prove successful. The loss of intellectual property protection or the inability to secure or enforce the protection of our intellectual property assets could have a material adverse effect on our business and our ability to compete.
We also may be subject to costly litigation in the event that another party alleges our operations or activities infringe upon another party's intellectual property rights. Third parties may have, or may eventually be issued, patents that could be infringed by our products, methods, processes or services. Any party that holds such a patent could make a claim of infringement against us. We may also be subject to claims by third parties for breach of copyright, trademark, trade secret or license usage rights. Any such claims and any resulting litigation could result in significant liability for damages. If we were found to have infringed a third-party patent or other intellectual property rights, we could incur substantial liability, and in some circumstances could be enjoined from providing certain products or services to our customers or utilizing and benefiting from certain methods, processes, copyrights, trademarks, trade secrets or licenses, or alternatively could be required to enter into costly licensing arrangements with third parties, all of which could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.
Item 1B.
UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

29

None.
Item 2.
PROPERTIES
As of December 31, 2012 , The Hartford owned building space of approximately 3.1 million square feet, of which approximately 2.7 million square feet comprised its Hartford, Connecticut location and other properties within the greater Hartford, Connecticut area. In addition, as of December 31, 2012 , The Hartford leased approximately 2.5 million square feet, throughout the United States of America, and approximately 43 thousand square feet, in other countries. All of the properties owned or leased are used by one or more of all six reporting segments, depending on the location. For more information on reporting segments, see Part I, Item 1, Business of The Hartford — Reporting Segments. The Company believes its properties and facilities are suitable and adequate for current operations.

30

Item 3. LEGAL PROCEEDINGS
Litigation
The Hartford is involved in claims litigation arising in the ordinary course of business, both as a liability insurer defending or providing indemnity for third-party claims brought against insureds and as an insurer defending coverage claims brought against it. The Hartford accounts for such activity through the establishment of unpaid loss and loss adjustment expense reserves. Subject to the uncertainties discussed below under the caption “Asbestos and Environmental Claims,” management expects that the ultimate liability, if any, with respect to such ordinary-course claims litigation, after consideration of provisions made for potential losses and costs of defense, will not be material to the consolidated financial condition, results of operations or cash flows of The Hartford.
The Hartford is also involved in other kinds of legal actions, some of which assert claims for substantial amounts. These actions include, among others, and in addition to the matters described below, putative state and federal class actions seeking certification of a state or national class. Such putative class actions have alleged, for example, underpayment of claims or improper underwriting practices in connection with various kinds of insurance policies, such as personal and commercial automobile, property, life and inland marine; improper sales practices in connection with the sale of life insurance and other investment products; and improper fee arrangements in connection with investment products. The Hartford also is involved in individual actions in which punitive damages are sought, such as claims alleging bad faith in the handling of insurance claims. Like many other insurers, The Hartford also has been joined in actions by asbestos plaintiffs asserting, among other things, that insurers had a duty to protect the public from the dangers of asbestos and that insurers committed unfair trade practices by asserting defenses on behalf of their policyholders in the underlying asbestos cases. Management expects that the ultimate liability, if any, with respect to such lawsuits, after consideration of provisions made for estimated losses, will not be material to the consolidated financial condition of The Hartford. Nonetheless, given the large or indeterminate amounts sought in certain of these actions, and the inherent unpredictability of litigation, the outcome in certain matters could, from time to time, have a material adverse effect on the Company's results of operations or cash flows in particular quarterly or annual periods.
Apart from the inherent difficulty of predicting litigation outcomes, the Mutual Funds Litigation identified below purports to seek substantial damages for unsubstantiated conduct spanning a multi-year period based on novel applications of complex legal theories. The alleged damages are not quantified or factually supported in the complaint, and, in any event, the Company's experience shows that demands for damages often bear little relation to a reasonable estimate of potential loss. The matter is in the earliest stages of litigation, with no discovery having been taken and no substantive legal decisions by the court defining the scope of the potentially available damages. Accordingly, management cannot reasonably estimate the possible loss or range of loss, if any, or predict the timing of the eventual resolution of this matter.
Mutual Funds Litigation - In February 2011, a derivative action was brought on behalf of six Hartford retail mutual funds in the United States District Court for the District of New Jersey, alleging that Hartford Investment Financial Services, LLC (“HIFSCO”), an indirect subsidiary of the Company, received excessive advisory and distribution fees in violation of its statutory fiduciary duty under Section 36(b) of the Investment Company Act of 1940.  HIFSCO moved to dismiss and, in September 2011, the motion was granted in part and denied in part, with leave to amend the complaint. In November 2011, plaintiffs filed an amended complaint on behalf of The Hartford Global Health Fund, The Hartford Conservative Allocation Fund, The Hartford Growth Opportunities Fund, The Hartford Inflation Plus Fund, The Hartford Advisors Fund, and The Hartford Capital Appreciation Fund. Plaintiffs seek to rescind the investment management agreements and distribution plans between HIFSCO and these funds and to recover the total fees charged thereunder or, in the alternative, to recover any improper compensation HIFSCO received, in addition to lost earnings. HIFSCO filed a partial motion to dismiss the amended complaint and, in December 2012, the court dismissed without prejudice the claims regarding distribution fees and denied the motion with respect to the advisory fees claims. HIFSCO disputes the allegations and intends to defend vigorously.
Asbestos and Environmental Claims - As discussed in Part II, Item 7, MD&A - Critical Accounting Estimates - Property and Casualty Insurance Product Reserves, Net of Reinsurance - Reserving for Asbestos and Environmental Claims within Property & Casualty Other Operations, The Hartford continues to receive asbestos and environmental claims that involve significant uncertainty regarding policy coverage issues. Regarding these claims, The Hartford continually reviews its overall reserve levels and reinsurance coverages, as well as the methodologies it uses to estimate its exposures. Because of the significant uncertainties that limit the ability of insurers and reinsurers to estimate the ultimate reserves necessary for unpaid losses and related expenses, particularly those related to asbestos, the ultimate liabilities may exceed the currently recorded reserves. Any such additional liability cannot be reasonably estimated now but could be material to The Hartford's consolidated operating results, financial condition and liquidity.
Item 4. MINE SAFETY DISCLOSURES
Not applicable.

31

PART II

Item 5.
MARKET FOR THE HARTFORD’S COMMON EQUITY, RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS AND ISSUER PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES
The Hartford’s common stock is traded on the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”) under the trading symbol “HIG”.
The following table presents the high and low closing prices for the common stock of The Hartford on the NYSE for the periods indicated, and the quarterly dividends declared per share.
 
1 st   Qtr.
2 nd   Qtr.
3 rd   Qtr.
4 th   Qtr.
2012
 
 
 
 
Common Stock Price
 
 
 
 
High
$
22.02

$
21.95

$
20.34

$
22.88

Low
$
16.37

$
16.10

$
15.93

$
19.41

Dividends Declared
$
0.10

$
0.10

$
0.10

$
0.10

2011
 
 
 
 
Common Stock Price
 
 
 
 
High
$
30.80

$
28.97

$
27.05

$
20.27

Low
$
24.75

$
23.81

$
15.82

$
14.92

Dividends Declared
$
0.10

$
0.10

$
0.10

$
0.10

On February 28, 2013, The Hartford’s Board of Directors declared a quarterly dividend of $0.10 per common share payable on April 1, 2013 to common shareholders of record as of March 11, 2013 and a dividend of $18.125 on each share of Series F preferred stock payable on April 1, 2013 to shareholders of record as of March 15, 2013.
As of February 21, 2013 , the Company had approximately 183,800 shareholders. The closing price of The Hartford’s common stock on the NYSE on February 21, 2013 was $23.70.
The Company’s Chief Executive Officer has certified to the NYSE that he is not aware of any violation by the Company of NYSE corporate governance listing standards, as required by Section 303A.12(a) of the NYSE’s Listed Company Manual.
There are also various legal and regulatory limitations governing the extent to which The Hartford’s insurance subsidiaries may extend credit, pay dividends or otherwise provide funds to The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. as discussed in Part II, Item 7, MD&A — Capital Resources and Liquidity — Liquidity Requirements and Sources of Capital.
See Part III, Item 12, Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters, for information related to securities authorized for issuance under equity compensation plans.
Purchases of Equity Securities by the Issuer
The following table summarizes the Company’s repurchases of its common stock for the three months ended December 31, 2012:
Period
Total Number of Shares Purchased
 
Average
Price Paid per Share
Total Number of
Shares Purchased
as Part of Publicly
Announced Plans or Programs
Approximate Dollar
Value of Shares that
May Yet Be
Purchased Under
the Plans or Programs (in millions) [2]
October 1, 2012 – October 31, 2012
2,606

[1]
$
16.78

—
$
—

November 1, 2012 – November 30, 2012
7,200

[1]
$
21.71

—
$
—

December 1, 2012 – December 31, 2012
852

[1]
$
20.94

—
$
—

Total
10,658

 
$
20.44

—
N/A

[1]
Primarily represents shares acquired from employees of the Company for tax withholding purposes in connection with the Company’s stock compensation plans.
[2]
On January 31, 2013 the Company’s Board of Directors authorized a $500 equity repurchase program. The Company’s repurchase authorization, which expires on December 31, 2014, permits purchases of common stock, as well as warrants or other derivative securities. Repurchases may be made in the open market, through derivative, accelerated share repurchase and other privately negotiated transactions, and through plans designed to comply with Rule 10b5-1(c) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended. The timing of any future repurchases will be dependent upon several factors, including the market price of the Company’s securities, the Company’s capital position, consideration of the effect of any repurchases on the Company’s financial strength or credit ratings, and other corporate considerations. The repurchase program may be modified, extended or terminated by the Board of Directors at any time.


32

Total Return to Shareholders
The following tables present The Hartford’s annual percentage return and five-year total return on its common stock including reinvestment of dividends in comparison to the S&P 500 and the S&P Insurance Composite Index.
Annual Return Percentage
 
For the Years Ended
Company/Index
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc.
(79.99
)%
43.91
%
14.89
%
(37.55
)%
41.01
%
S&P 500 Index
(37.00
)%
26.46
%
15.06
%
2.11
 %
16.00
%
S&P Insurance Composite Index
(58.14
)%
13.90
%
15.80
%
(8.28
)%
19.09
%
Cumulative Five-Year Total Return
 
Base
 
 
Period
For the Years Ended
Company/Index
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc.
$
100

20.01

28.80

33.09

20.66

29.13

S&P 500 Index
$
100

63.00

79.67

91.67

93.60

108.58

S&P Insurance Composite Index
$
100

41.86

47.68

55.21

50.64

60.31



33

Item 6.
SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA
(In millions, except for per share data and combined ratios)
 
2012
2011
2010
2009
2008
Income Statement Data
 
 
 
 
 
Earned premiums
$
13,631

$
14,088

$
14,055

$
14,424

$
15,503

Fee income
4,432

4,750

4,748

4,547

5,103

Net investment income (loss):
 
 
 
 
 
Securities available-for-sale and other
4,237

4,272

4,364

4,017

4,327

Equity securities, trading
4,565

(1,359
)
(774
)
3,188

(10,340
)
Total net investment income (loss)
8,802

2,913

3,590

7,205

(6,013
)
Net realized capital losses:
 
 
 
 
 
Total other-than-temporary impairment (“OTTI”) losses
(389
)
(263
)
(852
)
(2,191
)
(3,964
)
OTTI losses recognized in other comprehensive income
40

89

418

683

—

Net OTTI losses recognized in earnings
(349
)
(174
)
(434
)
(1,508
)
(3,964
)
Net realized capital gains (losses), excluding net OTTI losses recognized in earnings
(362
)
29

(177
)
(496
)
(1,941
)
Total net realized capital losses
(711
)
(145
)
(611
)
(2,004
)
(5,905
)
Other revenues
258

253

267

261

249

Total revenues
26,412

21,859

22,049

24,433

8,937

Benefits, losses and loss adjustment expenses
13,250

14,625

13,025

13,831

14,088

Benefits, losses and loss adjustment expenses — returns credited on international variable annuities
4,564

(1,359
)
(774
)
3,188

(10,340
)
Amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs and present value of future profits
1,988

2,444

1,692

3,125

3,049

Insurance operating costs and other expenses
5,237

5,310

5,326

5,358

5,643

Loss on extinguishment of debt
910

—

—

—

—

Reinsurance loss on disposition, including goodwill impairment of $342
533

—

—

—

—

Interest expense
457

508

508

476

343

Goodwill impairment
—

30

—

32

745

Total benefits, losses and expenses
26,939

21,558

19,777

26,010

13,528

Income (loss) from continuing operations before income taxes
(527
)
301

2,272

(1,577
)
(4,591
)
Income tax expense (benefit)
(494
)
(325
)
572

(812
)
(1,817
)
Income (loss) from continuing operations, net of tax
(33
)
626

1,700

(765
)
(2,774
)
Income (loss) from discontinued operations, net of tax
(5
)
86

(64
)
(4
)
10

Net income (loss)
(38
)
712

1,636

(769
)
(2,764
)
Preferred stock dividends and accretion of discount
42

42

515

127

8

Net income (loss) available to common shareholders
$
(80
)
$
670

$
1,121

$
(896
)
$
(2,772
)
Balance Sheet Data
 
 
 
 
 
Separate account assets
$
141,569

$
143,870

$
159,742

$
150,394

$
130,184

Total assets
298,513

302,609

316,789

306,035

285,665

Total debt (including capital lease obligations)
7,126

6,216

6,607

5,839

6,221

Separate account liabilities
141,569

143,870

159,742

150,394

130,184

Common equity, excluding AOCI
19,048

19,679

19,188

16,696

15,135

Preferred Stock
556

556

556

2,960

—

AOCI, net of tax
2,843

1,251

(990
)
(3,472
)
(7,785
)
Total stockholders’ equity
22,447

21,486

18,754

16,184

7,350

Income (loss) from continuing operations, net of tax, available to common shareholders per common share
 
 
 
 
 
Basic
$
(0.17
)
$
1.31

$
2.75

$
(2.58
)
$
(9.07
)
Diluted
(0.17
)
1.22

2.53

(2.58
)
(9.07
)
Net income (loss) available to common shareholders per common share
 
 
 
 
 
Basic
$
(0.18
)
$
1.51

$
2.60

$
(2.59
)
$
(9.04
)
Diluted
(0.18
)
1.40

2.40

(2.59
)
(9.04
)
Cash dividends declared per common share
0.40

0.40

0.20

0.20

1.91

Other Data
 
 
 
 
 
Total revenues, excluding net investment income on equity securities, trading
$
21,847

$
23,218

$
22,823

$
21,245

$
19,277

Unlock benefit (charge), after-tax
$
31

$
(473
)
$
93

$
(846
)
$
(795
)
Total investments, excluding equity securities, trading
$
105,317

$
104,449

$
98,175

$
93,235

$
89,287


34

Item 7. MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION
AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
(Dollar amounts in millions, except for per share data, unless otherwise stated)
Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations (“MD&A”) addresses the financial condition of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. and its subsidiaries (collectively, “The Hartford” or the “Company”) as of December 31, 2012 , compared with December 31, 2011 , and its results of operations for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2012 . This discussion should be read in conjunction with the Consolidated Financial Statements and related Notes beginning on page F-1. The Hartford made changes to its reporting segments in 2012 to reflect the manner in which the Company is currently organized for purposes of making operating decisions and assessing performance. Accordingly, segment data for prior reporting periods has been adjusted to reflect the new segment reporting; see Note 4 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statement for further discussion. Additionally, certain reclassifications have been made to prior year financial information to conform to the current year presentation.
On January 1, 2012, the Company retrospectively adopted Accounting Standards Update (“ASU”) No. 2010-26, Financial Services – Insurance (Topic 944): Accounting for Costs Associated with Acquiring or Renewing Insurance Contracts which clarifies the definition of policy acquisition costs that are eligible for deferral. Previously reported financial information has been revised to reflect the effect of the Company’s adoption of this accounting standard. For further information regarding the effect of adoption of this accounting standard, see Note 1 and Note 8 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
The Hartford defines increases or decreases greater than or equal to 200%, or changes from a net gain to a net loss position, or vice versa, as “NM” or not meaningful.
INDEX

35

CONSOLIDATED RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
Net income (loss) by segment
2012
2011
2010
Increase
(Decrease) From 2011 to 2012
Increase
(Decrease) From 2010 to 2011
Property & Casualty Commercial
$
547

$
526

$
1,007

$
21

$
(481
)
Consumer Markets
166

7

125

159

(118
)
Property & Casualty Other Operations
57

(117
)
(53
)
174

(64
)
Group Benefits
129

92

188

37

(96
)
Mutual Funds
71

98

132

(27
)
(34
)
Talcott Resolution
1

540

672

(539
)
(132
)
Corporate
(1,009
)
(434
)
(435
)
(575
)
1

Net income (loss)
$
(38
)
$
712

$
1,636

$
(750
)
$
(924
)
Year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011
The decrease in net income from 2011 to 2012 was primarily due to the following items:
•
A loss on extinguishment of debt of $587, after-tax, in 2012 related to the repurchase of all outstanding 10% fixed-to-floating rate junior subordinated debentures due 2068 with a $1.75 billion aggregate principal amount all held by Allianz. The loss consisted of the premium associated with repurchasing the 10% Debentures at an amount greater than the face amount, the write-off of the unamortized discount and debt issuance costs related to the 10% Debentures and other costs related to the repurchase transaction.
•
Net realized capital losses increased primarily due to losses in 2012 on the international variable annuity hedge program, compared to gains in 2011. The losses resulted from rising equity markets and weakening of the yen. Certain hedge assets generated realized capital losses on rising equity markets and weakening of the yen and are used to hedge liabilities that are not carried at fair value. In addition, 2012 includes intent-to-sell impairments relating to the sales of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses. For further discussion of the results, see Net Realized Capital Gains (Losses) within Investment Results. For information on the related sensitivities of the variable annuity hedging program, see Variable Product Guarantee Risks and Risk Management within Enterprise Risk Management.
•
Reinsurance loss on disposition of $388, after-tax, in 2012 consisting of a goodwill impairment charge and loss accrual for premium deficiency related to the disposition of the Individual Life business. For further discussion, see Notes 2 and 9 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. As discussed in Item 9A and Amendment No. 1 to the Company's Third Quarter 2012 Form 10-Q (the “Q3 Form 10-Q/A”) the Company concluded that it would be necessary to recognize an estimated pre-tax loss on the Transaction of $533, comprised of the impairment of goodwill attributed to the Individual Life business of $342 and a loss accrual for premium deficiency of $191, which should have been recorded in the third quarter of 2012. The estimate is subject to change pending final determination of net assets sold, transaction costs, and other adjustments.
•
Income (loss) from discontinued operations, net of tax, decreased due to a realized gain on the sale of Specialty Risk Services of $150, after-tax, which was partially offset by a loss of $74, after-tax, from the disposition of Federal Trust Corporation.
•
Income tax benefit in 2011 includes a release of $86, or 100%, of the valuation allowance associated with realized capital losses, as well as a tax benefit of $52 as a result of a resolution of a tax matter with the IRS for the computation of DRD for years 1998, 2000 and 2001. For additional information, see Note 14 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Partially offsetting these decreases in net income were the following items:
•
An Unlock benefit of $31, after-tax, in 2012 compared to an Unlock charge of $473, after-tax, in 2011. The benefit in 2012 was driven primarily by actual separate account returns above our aggregated estimated return, partially offset by policyholder assumption changes which reduced expected future gross profits including additional costs associated with the U.S. variable annuity macro hedge program. The Unlock charge in 2011 was primarily due to the impact of changes to the international variable annuity hedge program. For further discussion of Unlocks see the Critical Accounting Estimates within the MD&A.
•
Net asbestos reserve strengthening of $31, after-tax, in 2012, compared to $189, after-tax, in 2011 resulting from the Company's annual review of its asbestos liabilities. For further information, see Property & Casualty Other Operations Claims with the Property and Casualty Insurance Product Reserves, Net of Reinsurance section in Critical Accounting Estimates.
•
The Company recorded reserve releases of $40, after-tax, in 2012, compared to reserve strengthening of $31, after-tax, in 2011, in its property and casualty insurance prior accident years development, excluding asbestos and environmental reserves. For additional information regarding prior accident years development, see Critical Accounting Estimates within the MD&A.
•
A $73, after-tax, charge in 2011 related to the write-off of capitalized costs associated with a policy administration software project that was discontinued.
•
Current accident year catastrophe losses of $459, after-tax, in 2012 compared to $484, after-tax, in 2011. The losses in 2012 primarily include Storm Sandy in the Northeast, as well as severe thunderstorms, hail events, and tornadoes in the South, Midwest and Mid-

36

Atlantic states. The losses in 2011 primarily relate to more severe tornadoes and wind storms in the Midwest and Southeast, Hurricane Irene, and winter storms in the Northeast and Midwest.
See the segment sections of the MD&A for a discussion on their respective performances.
Year ended December 31, 2011 compared to the year ended December 31, 2010
The decrease in net income from 2010 to 2011 was primarily due to the following items:
•
An Unlock charge of $473, after-tax, in 2011 compared to an Unlock benefit of $93, after-tax, in 2010. The Unlock charge in 2011 was primarily due to the impact of changes to the international variable annuity hedge program. The Unlock benefit for 2010 was attributable to actual separate account returns being above our aggregated estimated return and the impact of assumption updates primarily related to decreasing lapse and withdrawal rates and lower hedge costs. For further discussion of Unlocks see the Critical Accounting Estimates within the MD&A.
•
Current accident year catastrophe losses of $484, after-tax, in 2011 compared to $294, after-tax, in 2010. The losses in 2011 primarily relate to more severe tornadoes and wind storms in the Midwest and Southeast, Hurricane Irene, and winter storms in the Northeast and Midwest. The losses in 2010 include severe windstorm events, including a hail storm in Arizona, tornadoes and hail in the Midwest, Plains States and the Southeast and winter storms in the Mid-Atlantic and Northeast.
•
The Company recorded reserve strengthening of $31, after-tax, in 2011, compared to reserve releases of $294, after-tax, in 2010, in its property and casualty insurance prior accident years development, excluding asbestos and environmental reserves. For additional information regarding prior accident years development, see Critical Accounting Estimates within the MD&A.
•
An asbestos reserve strengthening of $189, after-tax, in 2011, compared to $110, after-tax, in 2010 resulting from the Company’s annual review of its asbestos liabilities in Property & Casualty Other Operations. The reserve strengthening in 2011 was primarily driven by higher frequency and severity of mesothelioma claims, particularly against certain smaller, more peripheral insureds, while the reserve strengthening in 2010 was primarily driven by increases in claim severity and expenses. For further information, see Property & Casualty Other Operations Claims within the Property and Casualty Insurance Product Reserves, Net of Reinsurance section in Critical Accounting Estimates.
•
A $73, after-tax, charge in 2011 related to the write-off of capitalized costs associated with a policy administration software project that was discontinued.
Partially offsetting these decreases in net income were the following items:
•
Income (loss) from discontinued operations, net of tax, increased due to a realized gain on the sale of Specialty Risk Services of $150, after-tax, in 2011, which was partially offset by a loss of $74, after-tax, from the disposition of Federal Trust Corporation in 2011. In 2010, loss from discontinued operations, net of tax, primarily relates to goodwill impairment on Federal Trust Corporation of approximately $100, after-tax.
•
2010 includes an accrual for a litigation settlement of $73, before-tax, for a class action lawsuit related to structured settlements.
•
Income tax expense (benefit) in 2010 includes a valuation allowance expense of $87 compared to a benefit of $86 in 2011. See Note 14 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for a reconciliation of the tax provision at the U.S. Federal statutory rate to the provision for income taxes.
•
In 2011, the Company recorded a $52 income tax benefit related to a resolution of a tax matter with the IRS for the computation of dividends received deduction (“DRD”) for years 1998, 2000 and 2001. For additional information see Note 14 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
See the segment sections of the MD&A for a discussion on their respective performances.


37

Income Taxes
The differences between the effective rate and the U.S. statutory rate of 35% for 2012 , 2011 and 2010 were due principally to tax-exempt interest earned on invested assets and the DRD. The 2012 and 2011 effective tax rates also include a deferred tax asset valuation allowance decrease, and the 2010 effective tax rate included a deferred tax asset valuation allowance increase.
The separate account DRD is estimated for the current year using information from the most recent return, adjusted for current year equity market performance and other appropriate factors, including estimated levels of corporate dividend payments and level of policy owner equity account balances. The actual current year DRD can vary from estimates based on, but not limited to, changes in eligible dividends received in the mutual funds, amounts of distributions from these mutual funds, amounts of short-term capital gains at the mutual fund level and the Company’s taxable income before the DRD. The Company recorded benefits of $140, $201 and $145 related to the separate account DRD in the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively. These amounts included benefits (charges) related to prior years’ tax returns of $(4), $3, and $(3) in 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively.
The Company receives a foreign tax credit for foreign taxes paid including payments from its separate account assets. This credit reduces the Company’s U.S. tax liability. The separate account foreign tax credit is estimated for the current year using information from the most recent filed return, adjusted for the change in the allocation of separate account investments to the international equity markets during the current year. The actual current year foreign tax credit can vary from the estimates due to actual foreign tax credits passed through from the mutual funds. The Company recorded benefits of $9, $11 and $4 related to the separate account foreign tax credit in the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively.
The Company’s unrecognized tax benefits were unchanged for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , remaining at $48 as of December 31, 2012 and 2011. This entire amount, if it were recognized, would affect the effective tax rate in the period it is released.



38

OUTLOOKS
The Hartford provides projections and other forward-looking information in the following discussions, which contain many forward-looking statements, particularly relating to the Company’s future financial performance. These forward-looking statements are estimates based on information currently available to the Company, are made pursuant to the safe harbor provisions of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995 and are subject to the cautionary statements set forth on pages 3 and 4 of this Form 10-K and the risk factors set forth under Item 1A and other similar information contained in this Form 10-K and in other filings made from time to time by the Company with the SEC. Actual results are likely to differ, and in the past have differed, materially from those forecast by the Company, depending on the outcome of various factors, including, but not limited to, those set forth in each discussion below and in Item 1A, Risk Factors. The Company undertakes no obligation to publicly update any forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future developments or otherwise.
Overview
As a result of a strategic business realignment announced in March 2012, the Company is currently focusing on its Property & Casualty, Group Benefits and Mutual Fund businesses. The objective of this realignment is to position the organization for higher returns on equity, reduced sensitivity to capital markets, a lower cost of capital and increased financial flexibility.
In 2012, the Company completed the sale of its U.S. individual annuities new business capabilities, the sale of the administration and operating assets of its private placement life insurance business and the sale of Woodbury Financial Services, Inc. ("WFS"). In January 2013, the Company completed the sale of its Retirement Plans and Individual Life insurance businesses. For further discussion of these transactions, see Note 2 - Business Dispositions of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
On January 31, 2013, the Board of Directors authorized a capital management plan which provides for a $500 equity repurchase program to be completed by December 31, 2014 and the reduction of approximately $1.0 billion of debt including repayment of 2013 and 2014 debt maturities totaling $520 in aggregate principal amount.
Slow economic and employment expansion may adversely impact the performance of The Hartford’s insurance protection businesses where insureds may change their level of insurance, and asset accumulation businesses may see customers changing their investment choices and level of savings based on anticipated economic conditions. In addition, the performance of The Hartford’s divisions is subject to uncertainty due to capital market conditions, which impact the earnings of its asset management businesses and valuations and earnings in its investment portfolio. The current and future interest rate environment also affects the performance of the Company’s divisions. A sustained low interest rate environment would result in lower net investment income, lower estimated gross profits on certain Talcott Resolution products, and lower margins.
Property & Casualty Commercial
Property & Casualty Commercial focuses on growth through market-differentiated products and services while maintaining a disciplined underwriting approach. Improving market conditions are expected to continue, which should enable the Company to also continue achieving price increases, while a slowly recovering economy is anticipated to drive a modest increase in insurance exposures. The Company expects low single-digit written premium growth for 2013, as compared to 2012, driven by small commercial, with programs aimed at growing total policy counts, the rollout of new product enhancements, a leveraging of the payroll model, and the continued expansion of ease of doing business technology, and middle market, driven by strong pricing and initiatives which management believes positions the Company to expand its property and general liability footprint. In specialty lines, the Company expects written premiums to decline as management continues to streamline its programs business and adjust the mix within professional liability. The Property & Casualty Commercial combined ratio before catastrophes and prior accident year development is expected to improve to between approximately 92.5 and 95.5 for full year 2013 as compared to the 96.6 achieved in 2012 due to anticipated margin expansion across all businesses as expected earned pricing increases outpace loss costs.

39

Consumer Markets
The Company expects written premiums to be flat to slightly higher in 2013 compared to 2012, with growth in business sold through independent agents to AARP members and flat to slightly higher written premium for AARP Direct. In 2013, management expects an increase in new business and improvement in premium retention as the effect of renewal written price increases on retained business is anticipated to more than offset a slight decline in policy retention. Within the Agency channel, management expects written premiums from policyholders other than AARP members to decline, driven by continued pricing and underwriting actions to improve profitability, including efforts to reposition the book into more mature, preferred market business. Management expects that the combined ratio before catastrophes and prior accident year development will be between approximately 89.5 and 92.5 for full year 2013 compared to the 90.8 achieved in 2012. For auto, the current accident year loss and loss adjustment expense ratio before catastrophes is expected to improve slightly for the 2013 full year driven by anticipated earned pricing increases that outpace slightly lower claim frequency and higher average claim severity. For homeowners, the current accident year loss and loss adjustment expense ratio before catastrophes is expected to increase in 2013, driven by an expected return to more normal non-catastrophe weather claim frequency after experiencing very favorable non-catastrophe weather claim frequency in 2012.
Group Benefits
Group Benefits premiums are expected to decline for 2013 as compared to 2012, reflecting the competitive environment coupled with pricing discipline with respect to new sales and renewals with the goal of improving profitability. Specifically, Group Benefits did not renew its largest account effective January 1, 2013 due to pricing and other considerations. Overall, the reductions to premiums will not significantly impact Group Benefits profitability due to expected improvements in the disability loss ratio as a result of pricing actions and improvements in claims management. The Company expects Group Benefits' disability results to improve, contributing to a loss ratio between approximately 77 and 80 for full year 2013 as compared to the 79.5 achieved in 2012.
Mutual Funds
Mutual Funds has been offering new funds to improve our participation in asset classes where we see potential growth opportunities. Wellington now serves as the primary sub-advisor for The Hartford’s retail mutual funds, including equity, fixed-income and asset-allocation funds.
Talcott Resolution
The principal goal for Talcott Resolution is to reduce the size and risk associated with the Company's U.S. and international in-force variable annuities. As a result, the Company expects account values and consequently earnings to decline over time as fees decrease due to surrenders, policyholder initiatives or transactions with third parties that will reduce the size of this legacy book of business. Our international variable annuity business will also continue to be a significant driver of earnings variability due to hedge programs which generate mark to market gains and losses while the underlying international liabilities being hedged are not marked to market. This can result in unpredictable earnings volatility period to period.

40

CRITICAL ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES
The preparation of financial statements, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (“U.S. GAAP”), requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ, and in the past have differed, from those estimates.
The Company has identified the following estimates as critical in that they involve a higher degree of judgment and are subject to a significant degree of variability:
•
property and casualty insurance product reserves, net of reinsurance;
•
estimated gross profits used in the valuation and amortization of assets and liabilities associated with variable annuity and other universal life-type contracts;
•
evaluation of other-than-temporary impairments on available-for-sale securities and valuation allowances on mortgage loans;
•
living benefits required to be fair valued (in other policyholder funds and benefits payable);
•
goodwill impairment;
•
valuation of investments and derivative instruments;
•
pension and other postretirement benefit obligations;
•
valuation allowance on deferred tax assets; and
•
contingencies relating to corporate litigation and regulatory matters.
Certain of these estimates are particularly sensitive to market conditions, and deterioration and/or volatility in the worldwide debt or equity markets could have a material impact on the Consolidated Financial Statements. In developing these estimates management makes subjective and complex judgments that are inherently uncertain and subject to material change as facts and circumstances develop. Although variability is inherent in these estimates, management believes the amounts provided are appropriate based upon the facts available upon compilation of the financial statements.
Property and Casualty Insurance Product Reserves, Net of Reinsurance
The Hartford establishes reserves on its property and casualty insurance products to provide for the estimated costs of paying claims under insurance policies written by the Company. These reserves include estimates for both claims that have been reported and those that have not yet been reported, and include estimates of all expenses associated with processing and settling these claims. Incurred but not reported (“IBNR”) reserves represent the difference between the estimated ultimate cost of all claims and the actual reported loss and loss adjustment expenses (“reported losses”). Reported losses represent cumulative loss and loss adjustment expenses paid plus case reserves for outstanding reported claims. Company actuaries evaluate the total reserves (IBNR and case reserves) on an accident year basis. An accident year is the calendar year in which a loss is incurred, or, in the case of claims-made policies, the calendar year in which a loss is reported.
Reserve estimates can change over time because of unexpected changes in the external environment. Potential external factors include (1) changes in the inflation rate for goods and services related to covered damages such as medical care, hospital care, auto parts, wages and home repair; (2) changes in the general economic environment that could cause unanticipated changes in the claim frequency per unit insured; (3) changes in the litigation environment as evidenced by changes in claimant attorney representation in the claims negotiation and settlement process; (4) changes in the judicial environment regarding the interpretation of policy provisions relating to the determination of coverage and/or the amount of damages awarded for certain types of damages; (5) changes in the social environment regarding the general attitude of juries in the determination of liability and damages; (6) changes in the legislative environment regarding the definition of damages; and (7) new types of injuries caused by new types of injurious exposure: past examples include lead paint, construction defects and tainted Chinese-made drywall.
Reserve estimates can also change over time because of changes in internal Company operations. Potential internal factors include (1) periodic changes in claims handling procedures; (2) growth in new lines of business where exposure and loss development patterns are not well established; or (3) changes in the quality of risk selection in the underwriting process.
In the case of assumed reinsurance, all of the above risks apply. In addition, changes in ceding company case reserving and reporting patterns can create additional factors that need to be considered in estimating the reserves. Due to the inherent complexity of the assumptions used, final claim settlements may vary significantly from the present estimates, particularly when those settlements may not occur until well into the future.

41

Through both facultative and treaty reinsurance agreements, the Company cedes a share of the risks it has underwritten to other insurance companies. The Company’s net reserves for loss and loss adjustment expenses include anticipated recovery from reinsurers on unpaid claims. The estimated amount of the anticipated recovery, or reinsurance recoverable, is net of an allowance for uncollectible reinsurance.
Reinsurance recoverables include an estimate of the amount of gross loss and loss adjustment expense reserves that may be ceded under the terms of the reinsurance agreements, including IBNR unpaid losses. The Company calculates its ceded reinsurance projection based on the terms of any applicable facultative and treaty reinsurance, often including an estimate by reinsurance agreement of how IBNR losses will ultimately be ceded.
The Company provides an allowance for uncollectible reinsurance, reflecting management’s best estimate of reinsurance cessions that may be uncollectible in the future due to reinsurers’ unwillingness or inability to pay. The Company analyzes recent developments in commutation activity between reinsurers and cedants, recent trends in arbitration and litigation outcomes in disputes between reinsurers and cedants and the overall credit quality of the Company’s reinsurers. Where its contracts permit, the Company secures future claim obligations with various forms of collateral, including irrevocable letters of credit, secured trusts, funds held accounts and group-wide offsets. The allowance for uncollectible reinsurance was $268 as of December 31, 2012 , comprised of $65 related to Property & Casualty Commercial and $203 related to Property & Casualty Other Operations.
The Company’s estimate of reinsurance recoverables, net of an allowance for uncollectible reinsurance, is subject to similar risks and uncertainties as the estimate of the gross reserve for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses.
The Hartford, like other insurance companies, categorizes and tracks its insurance reserves for its segments by “line of business”. Furthermore, The Hartford regularly reviews the appropriateness of reserve levels at the line of business level, taking into consideration the variety of trends that impact the ultimate settlement of claims for the subsets of claims in each particular line of business. In addition, Property & Casualty Other Operations categorizes reserves as asbestos and environmental (“A&E”), whereby the Company reviews these reserve levels by type of event, rather than by line of business. Adjustments to previously established reserves, which may be material, are reflected in the operating results of the period in which the adjustment is determined to be necessary. In the judgment of management, information currently available has been properly considered in the reserves established for losses and loss adjustment expenses.
Loss and loss adjustment expense reserves by line of business as of December 31, 2012 , net of reinsurance are as follows:
 
Property & Casualty Commercial
Consumer
Markets
Property & Casualty
Other Operations
Total Property &
Casualty
Reserve Line of Business
 
 
 
 
Commercial property
$
213

$
—

$
—

$
213

Homeowners’
—

430

—

430

Auto physical damage
20

39

—

59

Auto liability
615

1,412

—

2,027

Package business
1,291

—

—

1,291

Workers’ compensation
8,101

—

—

8,101

General liability
2,564

28

—

2,592

Professional liability
669

—

—

669

Fidelity and surety
161

—

—

161

Assumed reinsurance
—

—

309

309

All other non-A&E
—

—

749

749

A&E
21

1

2,066

2,088

Total reserves-net
13,655

1,910

3,124

18,689

Reinsurance and other recoverables
2,365

16

646

3,027

Total reserves-gross
$
16,020

$
1,926

$
3,770

$
21,716


42

Reserving Methodology
(See Reserving for Asbestos and Environmental Claims within Property & Casualty Other Operations for a discussion of how A&E reserves are set)
How reserves are set
Reserves are set by line of business within the various segments. A single line of business may be written in more than one segment. Case reserves are established by a claims handler on each individual claim and are adjusted as new information becomes known during the course of handling the claim. Lines of business for which loss data (e.g., paid losses and case reserves) emerge (i.e., is reported) over a long period of time are referred to as long-tail lines of business. Lines of business for which loss data emerge more quickly are referred to as short-tail lines of business. The Company’s shortest-tail lines of business are property and auto physical damage. The longest tail lines of business include workers’ compensation, general liability, professional liability and assumed reinsurance. For short-tail lines of business, emergence of paid loss and case reserves is credible and likely indicative of ultimate losses. For long-tail lines of business, emergence of paid losses and case reserves is less credible in the early periods and, accordingly, may not be indicative of ultimate losses.
The Company’s reserving actuaries, who are independent of the business units, regularly review reserves for both current and prior accident years using the most current claim data. For most lines of business, these reserve reviews incorporate a variety of actuarial methods and judgments and involve rigorous analysis. These selections incorporate input, as judged by the reserving actuaries to be appropriate, from claims personnel, pricing actuaries and operating management on reported loss cost trends and other factors that could affect the reserve estimates. Most reserves are reviewed fully each quarter, including loss and loss adjustment expense reserves for property, auto physical damage, auto liability, package business, workers’ compensation, most general liability, professional liability and fidelity and surety. Other reserves are reviewed semi-annually (twice per year) or annually. These include, but are not limited to, reserves for losses incurred in accident years older than twelve and twenty years, for Consumer Markets and Property & Casualty Commercial, respectively, assumed reinsurance, latent exposures, such as construction defects and unallocated loss adjustment expense. For reserves that are reviewed semi-annually or annually, management monitors the emergence of paid and reported losses in the intervening quarters to either confirm that the estimate of ultimate losses should not change or, if necessary, perform a reserve review to determine whether the reserve estimate should change.
An expected loss ratio is used in initially recording the reserves for both short-tail and long-tail lines of business. This expected loss ratio is determined through a review of prior accident years’ loss ratios and expected changes to earned pricing, loss costs, mix of business, ceded reinsurance and other factors that are expected to impact the loss ratio for the current accident year. For short-tail lines, IBNR for the current accident year is initially recorded as the product of the expected loss ratio for the period, earned premium for the period and the proportion of losses expected to be reported in future calendar periods for the current accident period. For long-tailed lines, IBNR reserves for the current accident year are initially recorded as the product of the expected loss ratio for the period and the earned premium for the period, less reported losses for the period.
In addition to the expected loss ratio, the actuarial techniques or methods used primarily include paid and reported loss development and frequency / severity techniques as well as the Bornhuetter-Ferguson method (a combination of the expected loss ratio and paid development or reported development method). Within any one line of business, the methods that are given more influence vary based primarily on the maturity of the accident year, the mix of business and the particular internal and external influences impacting the claims experience or the methods. The output of the reserve reviews are reserve estimates that are referred to herein as the “actuarial indication”.
As of December 31, 2012 and 2011, net property and casualty insurance product reserves for losses and loss adjustment expenses reported under accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (“U.S. GAAP”) were approximately equal to net reserves reported on a statutory basis. Under U.S. GAAP, liabilities for unpaid losses for permanently disabled workers’ compensation claimants are discounted at rates that are no higher than risk-free interest rates and which generally exceed the statutory discount rates set by regulators, such that workers’ compensation reserves for statutory reporting are higher than the net reserves for U.S. GAAP reporting. Largely offsetting the effect of the difference in discounting is that a portion of the U.S. GAAP provision for uncollectible reinsurance is not recognized under statutory accounting. Most of the Company’s property and casualty insurance product reserves are not discounted. However, the Company has discounted liabilities funded through structured settlements and has discounted certain reserves for indemnity payments due to permanently disabled claimants under workers’ compensation policies.
Provided below is a general discussion of which methods are preferred by line of business. Because the actuarial estimates are generated at a much finer level of detail than line of business (e.g., by distribution channel, coverage, accident period), this description should not be assumed to apply to each coverage and accident year within a line of business. Also, as circumstances change, the methods that are given more influence will change.

43

Property and Auto Physical Damage. These lines are fast-developing and paid and reported development techniques are used as these methods use historical data to develop paid and reported loss development patterns, which are then applied to current paid and reported losses by accident period to estimate ultimate losses. The Company relies primarily on reported development techniques although a review of frequency and severity and the initial loss expectation based on the expected loss ratio is used for the most immature accident months. The advantage of frequency / severity techniques is that frequency estimates are generally easier to predict and external information can be used to supplement internal data in making severity estimates.
Personal Auto Liability. For auto liability, and bodily injury in particular, the Company performs a greater number of techniques than it does for property and auto physical damage. In addition, because the paid development technique is affected by changes in claim closure patterns and the reported development method is affected by changes in case reserving practices, the Company uses Berquist-Sherman techniques which adjust these patterns to reflect current settlement rates and case reserving techniques. The Company generally uses the reported development method for older accident years as a higher percentage of ultimate losses are reflected in reported losses than in cumulative paid losses and the frequency/severity and Berquist-Sherman methods for more recent accident years. Recent periods are influenced by changes in case reserve practices and changing disposal rates; the frequency/severity techniques are not affected as much by these changes and the Berquist-Sherman techniques specifically adjust for these changes.
Auto Liability for Commercial Lines and Short-Tailed General Liability. The Company performs a variety of techniques, including the paid and reported development methods and frequency / severity techniques. For older, more mature accident years, the Company finds that reported development techniques are best. For more recent accident years, the Company typically prefers frequency / severity techniques that make separate assumptions about loss activity above and below a selected capping level.
Long-Tailed General Liability, Fidelity and Surety and Large Deductible Workers’ Compensation . For these long-tailed lines of business, the Company generally relies on the expected loss ratio and reported development techniques. The Company generally weights these techniques together, relying more heavily on the expected loss ratio method at early ages of development and more on the reported development method as an accident year matures.
Workers’ Compensation . Workers’ compensation is the Company’s single largest reserve line of business so a wide range of methods are reviewed in the reserve analysis. Methods performed include paid and reported development, variations on expected loss ratio methods, and an in-depth analysis on the largest states. Historically, paid development patterns in the Company’s workers’ compensation business have been stable, so paid techniques are preferred. Although paid techniques may be less predictive of the ultimate liability when a low percentage of ultimate losses are paid as in early periods of development, recent changes in the frequency of workers’ compensation claims have caused the Company to place greater reliance on paid methods with continued consideration of the state-by-state analysis and the expected loss ratio approach.
Professional Liability. Reported and paid loss developments patterns for this line tend to be volatile. Therefore, the Company typically relies on frequency and severity techniques.
Assumed Reinsurance and All Other. For these lines, the Company tends to rely on the reported development techniques. In assumed reinsurance, assumptions are influenced by information gained from claim and underwriting audits.
Allocated Loss Adjustment Expenses (ALAE). For some lines of business (e.g., professional liability and assumed reinsurance), ALAE and losses are analyzed together. For most lines of business, however, ALAE is analyzed separately, using paid development techniques and an analysis of the relationship between ALAE and loss payments.
Unallocated Loss Adjustment Expense (ULAE). ULAE is analyzed separately from loss and ALAE. For most lines of business, incurred ULAE costs to be paid in the future are projected based on an expected cost per claim year and the anticipated claim closure pattern and the ratio of paid ULAE to paid loss.
The final step in the reserve review process involves a comprehensive review by senior reserving actuaries who apply their judgment and, in concert with senior management, determine the appropriate level of reserves based on the information that has been accumulated. Numerous factors are considered in this process including, but not limited to, the assessed reliability of key loss trends and assumptions that may be significantly influencing the current actuarial indications, pertinent trends observed over the recent past, the level of volatility within a particular line of business, and the improvement or deterioration of actuarial indications in the current period as compared to the prior periods. Total recorded net reserves, excluding asbestos and environmental, were 1.8% higher than the actuarial indication of the reserves as of December 31, 2012 .
See the Reserve Development section for a discussion of changes to reserve estimates recorded in 2012 .

44

Current trends contributing to reserve uncertainty
The Hartford is a multi-line company in the property and casualty insurance business. The Hartford is therefore subject to reserve uncertainty stemming from a number of conditions, including but not limited to those noted above, any of which could be material at any point in time. Certain issues may become more or less important over time as conditions change. As various market conditions develop, management must assess whether those conditions constitute a long-term trend that should result in a reserving action (i.e., increasing or decreasing the reserve).
Within Property & Casualty Commercial and Property & Casualty Other Operations, the Company has exposure to claims asserted for bodily injury as a result of long-term or continuous exposure to harmful products or substances. Examples include, but are not limited to, pharmaceutical products, silica and lead paint. The Company also has exposure to claims from construction defects, where property damage or bodily injury from negligent construction is alleged. In addition, the Company has exposure to claims asserted against religious institutions and other organizations relating to molestation or abuse. Such exposures may involve potentially long latency periods and may implicate coverage in multiple policy periods. These factors make reserves for such claims more uncertain than other bodily injury or property damage claims. With regard to these exposures, the Company is monitoring trends in litigation, the external environment, the similarities to other mass torts and the potential impact on the Company’s reserves.
In Consumer Markets, reserving estimates are generally less variable than for the Company’s other property and casualty segments because of the coverages having relatively shorter periods of loss emergence. Estimates, however, can still vary due to a number of factors, including interpretations of frequency and severity trends and their impact on recorded reserve levels. Severity trends can be impacted by changes in internal claim handling and case reserving practices in addition to changes in the external environment. These changes in claim practices increase the uncertainty in the interpretation of case reserve data, which increases the uncertainty in recorded reserve levels. In addition, the introduction of new products has led to a different mix of business by type of insured than the Company experienced in the past. Such changes in mix increase the uncertainty of the reserve projections, since historical data and reporting patterns may not be applicable to the new business.
In standard commercial lines, workers’ compensation is the Company’s single biggest line of business and the line of business with the longest pattern of loss emergence. Medical costs make up more than 50% of workers’ compensation payments. As such, reserve estimates for workers’ compensation are particularly sensitive to changes in medical inflation, the changing use of medical care procedures and changes in state legislative and regulatory environments. In addition, a changing economic environment can affect the ability of an injured worker to return to work and the length of time a worker receives disability benefits. The Company has recently experienced a sharp increase in workers’ compensation claim frequency, while only seeing a partial offset from moderating severity trends. These factors increase the uncertainty in the estimate of reserves.
In specialty lines, many lines of insurance are “long-tail”, including large deductible workers’ compensation insurance, as such, reserve estimates for these lines are more difficult to determine than reserve estimates for shorter-tail lines of insurance. Estimating required reserve levels for large deductible workers’ compensation insurance is further complicated by the uncertainty of whether losses that are attributable to the deductible amount will be paid by the insured; if such losses are not paid by the insured due to financial difficulties, the Company would be contractually liable. Another example of reserve variability relates to reserves for directors’ and officers’ insurance. There is potential volatility in the required level of reserves due to the continued uncertainty regarding the number and severity of class action suits, including uncertainty regarding the Company’s exposure to losses arising from the collapse of the sub-prime mortgage market. Additionally, the Company’s exposure to losses under directors’ and officers’ insurance policies is primarily in excess layers, making estimates of loss more complex. The recent financial market turmoil has increased the number of shareholder class action lawsuits against our insureds or their directors and officers and this trend could continue for some period of time.

45

Impact of changes in key assumptions on reserve volatility
As stated above, the Company’s practice is to estimate reserves using a variety of methods, assumptions and data elements. Within its reserve estimation process for reserves other than asbestos and environmental, the Company does not consistently use statistical loss distributions or confidence levels around its reserve estimate and, as a result, does not disclose reserve ranges.
The reserve estimation process includes assumptions about a number of factors in the internal and external environment. Across most lines of business, the most important assumptions are future loss development factors applied to paid or reported losses to date. The trend in loss costs is also a key assumption, particularly in the most recent accident years, where loss development factors are less credible.
The following discussion includes disclosure of possible variation from current estimates of loss reserves due to a change in certain key indicators of potential losses. Each of the impacts described below is estimated individually, without consideration for any correlation among key indicators or among lines of business. Therefore, it would be inappropriate to take each of the amounts described below and add them together in an attempt to estimate volatility for the Company’s reserves in total. The estimated variation in reserves due to changes in key indicators is a reasonable estimate of possible variation that may occur in the future, likely over a period of several calendar years. It is important to note that the variation discussed is not meant to be a worst-case scenario, and therefore, it is possible that future variation may be more than the amounts discussed below.
Recorded reserves for auto liability, net of reinsurance, are $2.0 billion across all lines, $1.4 billion of which is in Consumer Markets. Personal auto liability reserves are shorter-tailed than other lines of business (such as workers’ compensation) and, therefore, less volatile. However, the size of the reserve base means that future changes in estimates could be material to the Company’s results of operations in any given period. The key indicator for Consumer Markets auto liability is the annual loss cost trend, particularly the severity trend component of loss costs. A 2.5 point change in annual severity for the two most recent accident years would change the estimated net reserve need by $80 , in either direction. A 2.5 point change in annual severity is within the Company’s historical variation.
Recorded reserves for workers’ compensation, net of reinsurance, are $8.1 billion . Loss development patterns are a key indicator for this line of business, particularly for more mature accident years. Historically, loss development patterns have been impacted by, among other things, medical cost inflation and other changes in loss cost trends. The Company has reviewed the historical variation in reported loss development patterns. If the reported loss development patterns change by 3% , the estimated net reserve need would change by $500 , in either direction. A 3% change in reported loss development patterns is within the Company’s historical variation, as measured by the variation around the average development factors as reported in statutory accident year reports.
Recorded reserves for general liability, net of reinsurance, are $2.6 billion . Loss development patterns are a key indicator for this line of business, particularly for more mature accident years. Historically, loss development patterns have been impacted by, among other things, emergence of new types of claims (e.g., construction defect claims) or a shift in the mixture between smaller, more routine claims and larger, more complex claims. The Company has reviewed the historical variation in reported loss development patterns. If the reported loss development patterns change by 9% , the estimated net reserve need would change by $200 , in either direction. A 9% change in reported loss development patterns is within the Company’s historical variation, as measured by the variation around the average development factors as reported in statutory accident year reports.

46

Reserving for Asbestos and Environmental Claims within Property & Casualty Other Operations
How A&E reserves are set
In establishing reserves for asbestos claims, the Company evaluates its insureds’ estimated liabilities for such claims using a ground-up approach. The Company considers a variety of factors, including the jurisdictions where underlying claims have been brought, past, pending and anticipated future claim activity, disease mix, past settlement values of similar claims, dismissal rates, allocated loss adjustment expense, and potential bankruptcy impact.
Similarly, a ground-up exposure review approach is used to establish environmental reserves. The Company’s evaluation of its insureds’ estimated liabilities for environmental claims involves consideration of several factors, including historical values of similar claims, the number of sites involved, the insureds’ alleged activities at each site, the alleged environmental damage at each site, the respective shares of liability of potentially responsible parties at each site, the appropriateness and cost of remediation at each site, the nature of governmental enforcement activities at each site, and potential bankruptcy impact.
Having evaluated its insureds’ probable liabilities for asbestos and/or environmental claims, the Company then evaluates its insureds’ insurance coverage programs for such claims. The Company considers its insureds’ total available insurance coverage, including the coverage issued by the Company. The Company also considers relevant judicial interpretations of policy language and applicable coverage defenses or determinations, if any.
Evaluation of both the insureds’ estimated liabilities and the Company’s exposure to the insureds depends heavily on an analysis of the relevant legal issues and litigation environment. This analysis is conducted by the Company’s lawyers and is subject to applicable privileges.
For both asbestos and environmental reserves, the Company also compares its historical direct net loss and expense paid and reported experience, and net loss and expense paid and reported experience year by year, to assess any emerging trends, fluctuations or characteristics suggested by the aggregate paid and reported activity.
Once the gross ultimate exposure for indemnity and allocated loss adjustment expense is determined for its insureds by each policy year, the Company calculates its ceded reinsurance projection based on any applicable facultative and treaty reinsurance and the Company’s experience with reinsurance collections.
Uncertainties Regarding Adequacy of Asbestos and Environmental Reserves
A number of factors affect the variability of estimates for asbestos and environmental reserves including assumptions with respect to the frequency of claims, the average severity of those claims settled with payment, the dismissal rate of claims with no payment and the expense to indemnity ratio. The uncertainty with respect to the underlying reserve assumptions for asbestos and environmental adds a greater degree of variability to these reserve estimates than reserve estimates for more traditional exposures. While this variability is reflected in part in the size of the range of reserves developed by the Company, that range may still not be indicative of the potential variance between the ultimate outcome and the recorded reserves. The recorded net reserves as of December 31, 2012 of $2.09 billion ( $1.79 billion and $297 for asbestos and environmental, respectively) are within an estimated range, unadjusted for covariance, of $1.6 billion to $2.4 billion. The process of estimating asbestos and environmental reserves remains subject to a wide variety of uncertainties, which are detailed in Note 13 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. The Company believes that its current asbestos and environmental reserves are appropriate. However, analyses of future developments could cause the Company to change its estimates and ranges of its asbestos and environmental reserves, and the effect of these changes could be material to the Company's consolidated operating results, financial condition and liquidity. Consistent with the Company's long-standing reserve practices, the Company will continue to review and monitor its reserves in Property & Casualty Other Operations regularly, including its annual reviews of asbestos liabilities, reinsurance recoverables and the allowance for uncollectible reinsurance, and environmental liabilities, and where future developments indicate, make appropriate adjustments to the reserves.
Total Property and Casualty Insurance Product Reserves, Net of Reinsurance, Results
In the opinion of management, based upon the known facts and current law, the reserves recorded for the Company’s property and casualty insurance products at December 31, 2012 represent the Company’s best estimate of its ultimate liability for losses and loss adjustment expenses related to losses covered by policies written by the Company. However, because of the significant uncertainties surrounding reserves, and particularly asbestos and environmental exposures, it is possible that management’s estimate of the ultimate liabilities for these claims may change and that the required adjustment to recorded reserves could exceed the currently recorded reserves by an amount that could be material to the Company’s results of operations, financial condition and liquidity.

47

Reserve Roll-forwards and Development
Based on the results of the quarterly reserve review process, the Company determines the appropriate reserve adjustments, if any, to record. Recorded reserve estimates are changed after consideration of numerous factors, including but not limited to, the magnitude of the difference between the actuarial indication and the recorded reserves, improvement or deterioration of actuarial indications in the period, the maturity of the accident year, trends observed over the recent past and the level of volatility within a particular line of business. In general, adjustments are made more quickly to more mature accident years and less volatile lines of business. Such adjustments of reserves are referred to as “reserve development”. Reserve development that increases previous estimates of ultimate cost is called “reserve strengthening”. Reserve development that decreases previous estimates of ultimate cost is called “reserve releases”. Reserve development can influence the comparability of year over year underwriting results and is set forth in the paragraphs and tables that follow.
A roll-forward follows of property and casualty insurance product liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses for the year ended December 31, 2012 :
For the year ended December 31, 2012
 
Property & Casualty Commercial
Consumer Markets
Property & Casualty Other Operations
Total Property & Casualty
Beginning liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, gross
$
15,437

$
2,061

$
4,052

$
21,550

Reinsurance and other recoverables
2,343

9

681

3,033

Beginning liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, net
13,094

2,052

3,371

18,517

Provision for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses
 
 
 
 
Current accident year before catastrophes
4,178

2,390

—

6,568

Current accident year catastrophes
325

381

—

706

Prior accident years
72

(141
)
65

(4
)
Total provision for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses
4,575

2,630

65

7,270

Less: Payments
4,014

2,772

312

7,098

Ending liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, net
13,655

1,910

3,124

18,689

Reinsurance and other recoverables
2,365

16

646

3,027

Ending liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, gross
$
16,020

$
1,926

$
3,770

$
21,716

Earned premiums
$
6,259

$
3,636

 
 
Loss and loss expense paid ratio [1]
64.1

76.2

 
 
Loss and loss expense incurred ratio
73.1

72.3

 
 
Prior accident years development (pts) [2]
1.2

(3.9
)
 
 
[1]
The “loss and loss expense paid ratio” represents the ratio of paid losses and loss adjustment expenses to earned premiums.
[2]
“Prior accident years development (pts)” represents the ratio of prior accident years development to earned premiums.

48

Prior accident years development recorded in 2012
Included within prior accident years development for the year ended December 31, 2012 were the following loss and loss adjustment expense reserve strengthenings (releases):
For the year ended December 31, 2012
 
Property & Casualty Commercial
Consumer Markets
Property & Casualty Other Operations
Total Property & Casualty Insurance
Auto liability
$
56

$
(81
)
$
—

$
(25
)
Homeowners
—

(32
)
—

(32
)
Professional liability
40

—

—

40

Package business
(20
)
—

—

(20
)
Workers’ compensation
78

—

—

78

General liability
(87
)
—

—

(87
)
Fidelity and surety
(9
)
—

—

(9
)
Commercial property
(8
)
—

—

(8
)
Net asbestos reserves
—

—

48

48

Net environmental reserves
—

—

10

10

Change in workers’ compensation discount, including accretion
52

—

—

52

Catastrophes
(37
)
(29
)
—

(66
)
Other reserve re-estimates, net
7

1

7

15

Total prior accident years development
$
72

$
(141
)
$
65

$
(4
)
During 2012 , the Company’s re-estimates of prior accident years reserves included the following significant reserve changes:
•
Released reserves for personal auto liability claims, primarily for accident years 2008 through 2011. As these accident years matured, favorable bodily injury severity trends were observed and management placed more weight on the emerged experience. Management has adjusted trend assumptions accordingly.
•
Released reserves for homeowners claims, primarily for accident year 2011 as a result of favorable large loss frequency and lower than expected severity.
•
Strengthened reserves for commercial auto liability claims, primarily for accident year 2010 and 2011. Higher than expected bodily injury severity, driven by large loss activity, has been observed for these accident years.
•
Strengthened reserves for professional liability directors and officers claims for accident years 2011 and prior as a result of higher severity, primarily for mid- and large-sized accounts.
•
Released reserves in package business liability coverages and general liability, primarily for accident years 2006 through 2011. Claim severity emergence for these years was lower than expected and management has placed more weight on the emerged experience. In addition, older years have improved due to favorable emergence of larger claims.
•
Strengthened reserves in workers' compensation primarily due to the emergence of lost time claims from 2011.
•
The change in workers’ compensation discount, including accretion, primarily reflects a decrease in the number of tabular claims, and to a lesser extent, the decrease in interest rates.
•
Reserve releases on certain prior year catastrophes, primarily related to 2001 World Trade Center worker's compensation claims.
•
Refer to the Property & Casualty Other Operations Claims section for further discussion on net asbestos and net environmental reserves.

49

A roll-forward follows of property and casualty insurance product liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses for the year ended December 31, 2011 :
For the year ended December 31, 2011
 
Property & Casualty Commercial
Consumer Markets
Property & Casualty Other Operations
Total Property & Casualty Insurance
Beginning liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, gross
$
14,727

$
2,177

$
4,121

$
21,025

Reinsurance and other recoverables
2,361

17

699

3,077

Beginning liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, net
12,366

2,160

3,422

17,948

Provision for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses
 
 
 
 
Current accident year before catastrophes
4,139

2,536

—

6,675

Current accident year catastrophes
320

425

—

745

Prior accident years
125

(75
)
317

367

Total provision for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses
4,584

2,886

317

7,787

 Less: Payments
3,856

2,994

368

7,218

Ending liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, net
13,094

2,052

3,371

18,517

Reinsurance and other recoverables
2,343

9

681

3,033

Ending liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, gross
$
15,437

$
2,061

$
4,052

$
21,550

Earned premiums
$
6,127

$
3,747

 
 
Loss and loss expense paid ratio [1]
62.9

79.9

 
 
Loss and loss expense incurred ratio
74.8

77.0

 
 
Prior accident years development (pts) [2]
2.0

(2.0
)
 
 
[1]
The “loss and loss expense paid ratio” represents the ratio of paid losses and loss adjustment expenses to earned premiums.
[2]
“Prior accident years development (pts)” represents the ratio of prior accident years development to earned premiums.

50

Prior accident years development recorded in 2011
Included within prior accident years development for the year ended December 31, 2011 were the following loss and loss adjustment expense reserve strengthenings (releases):
For the year ended December 31, 2011
 
Property & Casualty Commercial
Consumer Markets
Property & Casualty Other Operations
Total Property & Casualty Insurance
Auto liability
$
(4
)
$
(93
)
$
—

$
(97
)
Homeowners
—

(1
)
—

(1
)
Professional liability
29

—

—

29

Package business
(76
)
—

—

(76
)
Workers’ compensation
171

—

—

171

General liability
(40
)
—

—

(40
)
Fidelity and surety
(7
)
—

—

(7
)
Commercial property
(4
)
—

—

(4
)
Net asbestos reserves
—

—

294

294

Net environmental reserves
—

—

26

26

Change in workers' compensation discount, including accretion
38

—

—

38

Catastrophes
12

25

—

37

Other reserve re-estimates, net
6

(6
)
(3
)
(3
)
Total prior accident years development
$
125

$
(75
)
$
317

$
367

During 2011 , the Company’s re-estimates of prior accident years reserves included the following significant reserve changes:
•
Released reserves for personal auto liability claims, primarily for accident years 2006 through 2010. Favorable trends in reported severity have persisted or improved over this time period.
•
Strengthened reserves in professional liability for accident years 2007 through 2008, primarily in the directors and officers (“D&O”) line of business. Detailed reviews of claims involving the sub-prime mortgage market collapse, and shareholder class action lawsuits, resulted in a higher estimate of future claim costs for these exposures.
•
Released reserves in package business liability coverages and general liability, in accident years 2005 through 2009. As these accident years developed, claim severity has emerged lower than expected.
•
Strengthened reserves in workers’ compensation in accident years 2008 through 2010. Accident year 2010 loss costs trends were higher than expected as an increase in frequency outpaced a moderation of severity trends. Strengthening in accident years 2009 and 2008 was the result of higher than expected loss emergence for these years. Strengthening in more recent years is partially offset by releases in accident years 2007 and prior.
•
Strengthened prior year catastrophe reserves, primarily related to a severe wind and hail storm in Arizona during the fourth quarter of 2010. Severity of property damage associated with this event increased more than expected.
•
Refer to the Property & Casualty Other Operations Claims section for discussion concerning the Company’s annual evaluations of net environmental and net asbestos reserves, and related reinsurance.


51

A roll-forward follows of property and casualty insurance product liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses for the year ended December 31, 2010 :
For the year ended December 31, 2010
 
Property & Casualty Commercial
Consumer Markets
Property & Casualty Other Operations
Total Property & Casualty Insurance
Beginning liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, gross
$
15,051

$
2,109

$
4,491

$
21,651

Reinsurance and other recoverables
2,570

11

860

3,441

Beginning liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, net
12,481

2,098

3,631

18,210

Provision for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses
 
 
 
 
Current accident year before catastrophes
3,579

2,737

—

6,316

Current accident year catastrophes
152

300

—

452

Prior accident years
(361
)
(86
)
251

(196
)
Total provision for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses
3,370

2,951

251

6,572

Less: Payments
3,485

2,889

460

6,834

Ending liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, net
12,366

2,160

3,422

17,948

Reinsurance and other recoverables
2,361

17

699

3,077

Ending liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, gross
$
14,727

$
2,177

$
4,121

$
21,025

Earned premiums
$
5,744

$
3,947

 
 
Loss and loss expense paid ratio [1]
60.7

73.2

 
 
Loss and loss expense incurred ratio
58.7

74.8

 
 
Prior accident years development (pts) [2]
(6.3
)
(2.2
)
 
 
[1]
The “loss and loss expense paid ratio” represents the ratio of paid losses and loss adjustment expenses to earned premiums.
[2]
“Prior accident years development (pts)” represents the ratio of prior accident years development to earned premiums.

52

Prior accident years development recorded in 2010
Included within prior accident years development for the year ended December 31, 2010 were the following loss and loss adjustment expense reserve strengthenings (releases):
For the year ended December 31, 2010
 
Property & Casualty Commercial
Consumer Markets
Property & Casualty Other Operations
Total Property & Casualty Insurance
Auto liability
$
(54
)
$
(115
)
$
—

$
(169
)
Homeowners
—

23

—

23

Professional liability
(88
)
—

—

(88
)
Package business
(19
)
—

—

(19
)
Workers’ compensation
(70
)
—

—

(70
)
General liability
(108
)
—

—

(108
)
Fidelity and surety
(5
)
—

—

(5
)
Commercial property
(16
)
—

—

(16
)
Net asbestos reserves
—

—

189

189

Net environmental reserves
—

—

67

67

All other non-A&E
—

—

11

11

Uncollectible reinsurance
(30
)
—

—

(30
)
Change in workers' compensation discount, including accretion
26

—

—

26

Catastrophes
1

10

—

11

Other reserve re-estimates, net
2

(4
)
(16
)
(18
)
Total prior accident years development
$
(361
)
$
(86
)
$
251

$
(196
)
During 2010 , the Company’s re-estimates of prior accident years reserves included the following significant reserve changes:
•
Released reserves for commercial auto liability claims as the Company lowered its reserve estimate to recognize a lower severity trend during 2010 on larger claims in accident years 2002 to 2009. In addition, reserves were released for personal auto liability claims for accident years 2004 to 2009, as a result of favorable trends in reported severity, most notably for accident years 2008 and 2009.
•
Released reserves for professional liability claims, primarily related to D&O claims in accident years 2004 to 2008. For these accident years, reported losses for claims under D&O policies have emerged favorably to initial expectations due to lower than expected claim severity.
•
Released reserves for workers’ compensation business, primarily related to accident years 2006 and 2007. Management updated reviews of state reforms affecting these accident years and determined impacts to be more favorable than previously estimated.
•
Released reserves for general liability claims, primarily related to accident years 2005 through 2008. The Company observed that claim emergence for these accident years continued to be lower than anticipated and believed this would continue, and therefore reduced its reserve estimate in response. Partially offsetting this release was strengthening on loss adjustment expense reserves during the second quarter of 2010 due to higher than expected allocated loss expenses for claims in accident years 2000 and prior.
•
Released reserves for package business claims, primarily related to accident years 2005 through 2009. The Company observed that claim emergence within the liability portion of the package coverage for these accident years continued to be lower than anticipated and believed this lower level of claim activity would continue, and therefore reduced its reserve estimate in response.
•
Strengthened reserves for homeowners’ claims, as the Company observed a lengthening of the claim reporting period for homeowners’ claims which resulted in increasing management’s estimate of the ultimate cost to settle these claims. The Company also began spending more on independent adjuster fees to better assess property damages.
•
The Company reviewed its allowance for uncollectible reinsurance in the second quarter of 2010 and reduced its allowance, in part, by a reduction in gross ceded loss recoverables.
•
Refer to the Property & Casualty Other Operations Claims section for discussion concerning the Company’s annual evaluations of net environmental and net asbestos reserves, and related reinsurance.

53

Property & Casualty Other Operations Claims
Reserve Activity
Reserves and reserve activity in Property & Casualty Other Operations are categorized and reported as asbestos, environmental, or “all other”. The “all other” category of reserves covers a wide range of insurance and assumed reinsurance coverages, including, but not limited to, potential liability for construction defects, lead paint, silica, pharmaceutical products, molestation and other long-tail liabilities.
The following table presents reserve activity, inclusive of estimates for both reported and incurred but not reported claims, net of reinsurance, for Property & Casualty Other Operations, categorized by asbestos, environmental and all other claims, for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 .
Property & Casualty Other Operations Losses and Loss Adjustment Expenses
 
Asbestos
 
Environmental
All Other [1]
Total
2012
 
 
 
 
 
Beginning liability — net [2] [3]
$
1,892

 
$
320

$
1,159

$
3,371

Losses and loss adjustment expenses incurred
48

 
10

7

65

Less: Losses and loss adjustment expenses paid
164


40

108

312

Ending liability — net [2] [3]
$
1,776

[4]
$
290

$
1,058

$
3,124

2011
 
 
 
 
 
Beginning liability — net [2] [3]
$
1,787

 
$
334

$
1,302

$
3,423

Losses and loss adjustment expenses incurred
294

 
26

(3
)
317

Less: Losses and loss adjustment expenses paid
189


40

140

369

Ending liability — net [2] [3]
$
1,892

 
$
320

$
1,159

$
3,371

2010
 
 
 
 
 
Beginning liability — net [2] [3]
$
1,892

 
$
307

$
1,432

$
3,631

Losses and loss adjustment expenses incurred
189

 
67

(5
)
251

Less: Losses and loss adjustment expenses paid
294


40

125

459

Ending liability — net [2] [3]
$
1,787

 
$
334

$
1,302

$
3,423

[1]
“All Other” includes unallocated loss adjustment expense reserves. “All Other” also includes the Company’s allowance for uncollectible reinsurance. When the Company commutes a ceded reinsurance contract or settles a ceded reinsurance dispute, the portion of the allowance for uncollectible reinsurance attributable to that commutation or settlement, if any, is reclassified to the appropriate cause of loss.
[2]
Excludes amounts reported in Property & Casualty Commercial and Consumer Markets reporting segments (collectively “Ongoing Operations”) for asbestos and environmental net liabilities of $15 and $7 respectively, as of December 31, 2012 , $15 and $8, respectively, as of December 31, 2011 , and $11 and $5, respectively, as of December 31, 2010 ; total net losses and loss adjustment expenses incurred for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 of $13, $27 and $15, respectively, related to asbestos and environmental claims; and total net losses and loss adjustment expenses paid for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 of $15, $20 and $14, respectively, related to asbestos and environmental claims.
[3]
Gross of reinsurance, asbestos and environmental reserves, including liabilities in Property & Casualty Commercial and Consumer Markets, were $2,294 and $334, respectively, as of December 31, 2012 ; $2,442 and $367, respectively, as of December 31, 2011 ; and $2,308 and $378, respectively, as of December 31, 2010 .
[4]
The one year and average three year net paid amounts for asbestos claims, including Ongoing Operations, were $175 and $225, respectively, resulting in a one year net survival ratio of 10.3 and a three year net survival ratio of 8.0. Net survival ratio is the quotient of the net carried reserves divided by the average annual payment amount and is an indication of the number of years that the net carried reserve would last (i.e., survive) if the future annual claim payments were consistent with the calculated historical average.

For paid and incurred losses and loss adjustment expenses reporting, the Company classifies its asbestos and environmental reserves into three categories: Direct, Assumed Reinsurance and London Market. Direct insurance includes primary and excess coverage. Assumed reinsurance includes both “treaty” reinsurance (covering broad categories of claims or blocks of business) and “facultative” reinsurance (covering specific risks or individual policies of primary or excess insurance companies). London Market business includes the business written by one or more of the Company’s subsidiaries in the United Kingdom, which are no longer active in the insurance or reinsurance business. Such business includes both direct insurance and assumed reinsurance.

54

Of the three categories of claims (Direct, Assumed Reinsurance and London Market), direct policies tend to have the greatest factual development from which to estimate the Company’s exposures.
Assumed reinsurance exposures are inherently less predictable than direct insurance exposures because the Company may not receive notice of a reinsurance claim until the underlying direct insurance claim is mature. This causes a delay in the receipt of information at the reinsurer level and adds to the uncertainty of estimating related reserves.
London Market exposures are the most uncertain of the three categories of claims. As a participant in the London Market (comprised of both Lloyd’s of London and London Market companies), certain subsidiaries of the Company wrote business on a subscription basis, with those subsidiaries’ involvement being limited to a relatively small percentage of a total contract placement. Claims are reported, via a broker, to the “lead” underwriter and, once agreed to, are presented to the following markets for concurrence. This reporting and claim agreement process makes estimating liabilities for this business the most uncertain of the three categories of claims.
The following table sets forth, for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , paid and incurred loss activity by the three categories of claims for asbestos and environmental.
Paid and Incurred Losses and Loss Adjustment Expenses (“LAE”) Development — Asbestos and Environmental
 
Asbestos [1]
Environmental [1]
 
Paid Losses & LAE
Incurred Losses & LAE
Paid Losses & LAE
Incurred Losses & LAE
2012
 
 
 
 
Gross
 
 
 
 
Direct
$
153

$
55

$
31

$
9

Assumed Reinsurance
51

14

7

—

London Market
17

5

5

3

Total
221

74

43

12

Ceded
(57
)
(26
)
(3
)
(2
)
Net
$
164

$
48

$
40

$
10

2011
 
 
 
 
Gross
 
 
 
 
Direct
$
170

$
350

$
32

$
25

Assumed Reinsurance
55

12

8

—

London Market
23

16

6

4

Total
248

378

46

29

Ceded
(59
)
(84
)
(6
)
(3
)
Net
$
189

$
294

$
40

$
26

2010
 
 
 
 
Gross
 
 
 
 
Direct
$
201

$
209

$
35

$
50

Assumed — Domestic
128

—

12

5

London Market
42

(15
)
7

10

Total
371

194

54

65

Ceded
(77
)
(5
)
(14
)
2

Net
$
294

$
189

$
40

$
67

[1]
Excludes asbestos and environmental paid and incurred loss and LAE reported in Ongoing Operations. Total gross losses and LAE incurred in Ongoing Operations for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 includes $13, $30 and $15, respectively, related to asbestos and environmental claims. Total gross losses and LAE paid in Ongoing Operations for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 includes $15, $22 and $14, respectively, related to asbestos and environmental claims.

55

In the fourth quarters of 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , the Company completed evaluations of certain of its non-asbestos and environmental reserves, including its assumed reinsurance liabilities. In 2012 and 2011, the Company recognized no prior year development. In 2010 , the Company recognized unfavorable prior year development of $11.
During the second quarter of 2012 and the third quarters of 2011 and 2010 , the Company completed its annual ground up environmental reserve evaluations. In each of these evaluations, the Company reviewed all of its open direct domestic insurance accounts exposed to environmental liability as well as assumed reinsurance accounts and its London Market exposures for both direct and assumed reinsurance. The Company found estimates for some individual account exposures increased based upon unfavorable litigation results and increased clean-up or expense costs, with the vast majority of this deterioration emanating from a limited number of insureds. The net effect of these account-specific changes as well as quarterly actuarial evaluations of new account emergence and historical loss and expense paid experience resulted in $10, $19 and $62 increases in net environmental liabilities in 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively. In addition to the quarterly actuarial evaluations, the Company currently expects to continue to perform an evaluation of its environmental liabilities annually.
During the second quarter of 2012, 2011 and 2010 , the Company completed its annual ground-up asbestos reserve evaluations. As part of these evaluations, the Company reviewed all of its open direct domestic insurance accounts exposed to asbestos liability, as well as assumed reinsurance accounts and its London Market exposures for both direct insurance and assumed reinsurance. During 2012 , the Company found estimates for individual cases changed based upon the particular circumstances of such accounts. These changes were case specific and not as a result of any underlying change in the current environment. The Company experienced moderate increases in claim severity, expense and costs associated with litigating asbestos coverage matters, particularly against certain smaller, more peripheral insureds. The Company also experienced unfavorable development on certain of its assumed reinsurance accounts driven largely by the same factors experienced by the direct policyholders. Based on this evaluation, the Company strengthened its net asbestos reserves by $48 in second quarter 2012 . During 2011 , for certain direct policyholders, the Company experienced increases in claim frequency, severity and expense which were driven by mesothelioma claims, particularly against certain smaller, more peripheral insureds. The Company also experienced unfavorable development on its assumed reinsurance accounts driven largely by the same factors experienced by the direct policyholders. Based on this evaluation, the Company strengthened its net asbestos reserves by $290 in second quarter 2011 . During 2010 , for certain direct policyholders, the Company experienced increases in claim severity and expense. Increases in severity and expense were driven by litigation in certain jurisdictions and, to a lesser extent, development on primarily peripheral accounts. The Company also experienced unfavorable development on its assumed reinsurance accounts driven largely by the same factors experienced by the direct policyholders. The net effect of these changes in 2010 resulted in $169 increase in net asbestos reserves. The Company currently expects to continue to perform an evaluation of its asbestos liabilities annually.
The Company divides its gross asbestos and environmental exposures into Direct, Assumed Reinsurance and London Market. Direct asbestos exposures include Major Asbestos Defendants, Non-Major Accounts, and Unallocated Direct Accounts.
•
Major Asbestos Defendants represent the “Top 70” accounts in Tillinghast's published Tiers 1 and 2 and Wellington accounts. Major Asbestos Defendants have the fewest number of asbestos accounts and include reserves related to PPG Industries, Inc. (“PPG”). In January 2009, the Company, along with approximately three dozen other insurers, entered into a modified agreement in principle with PPG to resolve the Company's coverage obligations for all its PPG asbestos liabilities. The agreement is contingent on the fulfillment of certain conditions. Major Asbestos Defendants gross asbestos reserves accounted for approximately 30% of the Company's total Direct gross asbestos reserves as of the second quarter 2012 asbestos reserve evaluation.     
•
Non-Major Accounts are all other open direct asbestos accounts and largely represent smaller and more peripheral defendants. These exposures represented 1,143 accounts and contained approximately 41% of the Company's total Direct gross asbestos reserves as of the second quarter 2012 asbestos reserve evaluation.     
•
Unallocated Direct Accounts includes an estimate of the reserves necessary for asbestos claims related to direct insureds that have not previously tendered asbestos claims to the Company and exposures related to liability claims that may not be subject to an aggregate limit under the applicable policies.


56

The following table displays gross asbestos and environmental reserves by category as of December 31, 2012 :
Summary of Gross A&E Reserves
 
 
Asbestos [1]
Environmental [2]
Total A&E
Gross
 
 
 
 
 
 
     Direct
$
1,722

$
246

$
1,968

     Assumed Reinsurance
 
310

 
33

 
343

     London Market
 
262

 
55

 
317

     Total
 
2,294

 
334

 
2,628

Ceded
 
(503
)
 
(37
)
 
(540
)
Net
$
1,791

$
297

$
2,088

[1]
The one year gross paid amount for total asbestos claims is $231, resulting in a one year gross survival ratio of 9.9. The three year average gross paid amount for total asbestos claims is $289, resulting in a three year gross survival ratio of 7.9.
[2]
The one year gross paid amount for total environmental claims is $51, resulting in a one year gross survival ratio of 6.6. The three year average gross paid amount for total environmental claims is $56, resulting in a three year gross survival ratio of 5.9.

The Company provides an allowance for uncollectible reinsurance, reflecting management’s best estimate of reinsurance cessions that may be uncollectible in the future due to reinsurers’ unwillingness or inability to pay. During the second quarters of 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , the Company completed its annual evaluations of the collectability of the reinsurance recoverables and the adequacy of the allowance for uncollectible reinsurance associated with older, long-term casualty liabilities reported in the Property & Casualty Other Operations. In conducting this evaluation, the Company used its most recent detailed evaluations of ceded liabilities reported in the segment. The Company analyzed the overall credit quality of the Company’s reinsurers, recent trends in arbitration and litigation outcomes in disputes between cedants and reinsurers, and recent developments in commutation activity between reinsurers and cedants. The evaluation in the second quarters of 2012 , 2011 , and 2010 resulted in no adjustments to the allowance for uncollectible reinsurance. As of December 31, 2012 , 2011, and 2010, the allowance for uncollectible reinsurance for Property & Casualty Other Operations totaled $203, $207, and $207. The Company currently expects to perform its regular comprehensive review of Property & Casualty Other Operations reinsurance recoverables annually. Due to the inherent uncertainties as to collection and the length of time before reinsurance recoverables become due, particularly for older, long-term casualty liabilities, it is possible that future adjustments to the Company’s reinsurance recoverables, net of the allowance, could be required.
Consistent with the Company’s long-standing reserving practices, the Company will continue to review and monitor its reserves in the Property & Casualty Other Operations segment regularly and, where future developments indicate, make appropriate adjustments to the reserves. The Company will complete both its annual ground-up asbestos and environmental reserve studies during the second quarter of 2013.



57

Impact of Re-estimates
The establishment of property and casualty insurance product reserves is an estimation process, using a variety of methods, assumptions and data elements. Ultimate losses may vary significantly from the current estimates. Many factors can contribute to these variations and the need to change the previous estimate of required reserve levels. Subsequent changes can generally be thought of as being the result of the emergence of additional facts that were not known or anticipated at the time of the prior reserve estimate and/or changes in interpretations of information and trends.
The table below shows the range of annual reserve re-estimates experienced by The Hartford over the past ten years. The amount of prior accident year development (as shown in the reserve rollforward) for a given calendar year is expressed as a percent of the beginning calendar year reserves, net of reinsurance. The percentage relationships presented are significantly influenced by the facts and circumstances of each particular year and by the fact that only the last ten years are included in the range. Accordingly, these percentages are not intended to be a prediction of the range of possible future variability. See “Impact of key assumptions on reserve volatility” within this section for further discussion of the potential for variability in recorded loss reserves.
 
Property & Casualty Commercial
Consumer Markets
Property & Casualty Other Operations
Total Property & Casualty
Range of prior accident year unfavorable (favorable) development for the ten years ended December 31, 2012 [1] [2]
(3.1)% - 1.5%
(6.9)% - 0.2%
1.9% - 67.5%
(1.2)% - 21.5%
[1]
Excluding the reserve strengthening for asbestos and environmental reserves, over the past ten years reserve re-estimates for total property and casualty insurance ranged from (2.5)% to 1.6%.
[2]
Development for Corporate is included in Property & Casualty Commercial and Consumer Markets in 2007 and prior.
The potential variability of the Company’s property and casualty insurance product reserves would normally be expected to vary by segment and the types of loss exposures insured by those segments. Illustrative factors influencing the potential reserve variability for each of the segments are discussed above.
A table depicting the historical development of the liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, net of reinsurance, follows:
Loss Development Table
Loss And Loss Adjustment Expense Liability Development — Net of Reinsurance
For the Years Ended December 31,
 
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
Liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, net of reinsurance
$
13,141

$
16,218

$
16,191

$
16,863

$
17,604

$
18,231

$
18,347

$
18,210

$
17,948

$
18,517

$
18,689

Cumulative paid losses and loss expenses
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
One year later
3,480

4,415

3,594

3,702

3,727

3,703

3,771

3,882

4,037

4,216

 
Two years later
6,781

6,779

6,035

6,122

5,980

5,980

6,273

6,401

6,664

 
 
Three years later
8,591

8,686

7,825

7,755

7,544

7,752

8,074

8,241

—

 
 
Four years later
10,061

10,075

9,045

8,889

8,833

9,048

9,411

—

—

 
 
Five years later
11,181

11,063

9,928

9,903

9,778

10,061

—

—

—

 
 
Six years later
12,015

11,821

10,798

10,674

10,564

—

—

—

—

 
 
Seven years later
12,672

12,601

11,448

11,334

—

—

—

—

—

 
 
Eight years later
13,385

13,193

12,023

—

—

—

—

—

—

 
 
Nine years later
13,935

13,718

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

 
 
Ten years later
14,423

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

 
 
Liabilities re-estimated
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
One year later
15,965

16,632

16,439

17,159

17,652

18,005

18,161

18,014

18,315

18,513

 
Two years later
16,501

17,232

16,838

17,347

17,475

17,858

18,004

18,136

18,275

 
 
Three years later
17,338

17,739

17,240

17,318

17,441

17,700

18,139

18,093

—

 
 
Four years later
17,876

18,367

17,344

17,497

17,439

17,866

18,120

—

—

 
 
Five years later
18,630

18,554

17,570

17,613

17,676

17,848

—

—

—

 
 
Six years later
18,838

18,836

17,777

17,895

17,673

—

—

—

—

 
 
Seven years later
19,126

19,063

18,064

17,899

—

—

—

—

—

 
 
Eight years later
19,373

19,351

18,062

—

—

—

—

—

—

 
 
Nine years later
19,671

19,358

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

 
 
Ten years later
19,684

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

 
 
Deficiency (redundancy), net of reinsurance
$
6,543

$
3,140

$
1,871

$
1,036

$
69

$
(383
)
$
(227
)
$
(117
)
$
327

$
(4
)



58

The previous table shows the cumulative deficiency (redundancy) of the Company’s reserves, net of reinsurance, as now estimated with the benefit of additional information. Those amounts are comprised of changes in estimates of gross losses and changes in estimates of related reinsurance recoveries.
The following table, for the periods presented, reconciles the net reserves to the gross reserves, as initially estimated and recorded, and as currently estimated and recorded, and computes the cumulative deficiency (redundancy) of the Company’s reserves before reinsurance.
Loss And Loss Adjustment Expense Liability Development — Gross
For the Years Ended December 31,
 
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
Net reserve, as initially estimated
$
16,218

$
16,191

$
16,863

$
17,604

$
18,231

$
18,347

$
18,210

$
17,948

$
18,517

$
18,689

Reinsurance and other recoverables, as initially estimated
5,497

5,138

5,403

4,387

3,922

3,586

3,441

3,077

3,033

3,027

Gross reserve, as initially estimated
$
21,715

$
21,329

$
22,266

$
21,991

$
22,153

$
21,933

$
21,651

$
21,025

$
21,550

$
21,716

Net re-estimated reserve
$
19,358

$
18,062

$
17,899

$
17,673

$
17,848

$
18,120

$
18,093

$
18,275

$
18,513

 
Re-estimated and other reinsurance recoverables
5,693

5,579

5,911

4,311

4,041

3,716

3,225

2,954

2,766

 
Gross re-estimated reserve
$
25,051

$
23,641

$
23,810

$
21,984

$
21,889

$
21,836

$
21,318

$
21,229

$
21,279

 
Gross deficiency (redundancy)
$
3,336

$
2,312

$
1,544

$
(7
)
$
(264
)
$
(97
)
$
(333
)
$
204

$
(271
)
 
The following table is derived from the Loss Development table and summarizes the effect of reserve re-estimates, net of reinsurance, on calendar year operations for the ten-year period ended December 31, 2012 . The total of each column details the amount of reserve re-estimates made in the indicated calendar year and shows the accident years to which the re-estimates are applicable. The amounts in the total accident year column on the far right represent the cumulative reserve re-estimates during the ten year period ended December 31, 2012 for the indicated accident year(s).
Effect of Net Reserve Re-estimates on Calendar Year Operations
 
Calendar Year
 
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
Total
By Accident year
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2002 & Prior
$
2,824

$
536

$
837

$
538

$
754

$
208

$
288

$
247

$
298

$
13

$
6,543

2003
—

(122
)
(237
)
(31
)
(126
)
(21
)
(6
)
(20
)
(10
)
(6
)
(579
)
2004
—

—

(352
)
(108
)
(226
)
(83
)
(56
)
(20
)
(1
)
(9
)
(855
)
2005
—

—

—

(103
)
(214
)
(133
)
(47
)
(91
)
(5
)
6

(587
)
2006
—

—

—

—

(140
)
(148
)
(213
)
(118
)
(45
)
(7
)
(671
)
2007
—

—

—

—

—

(49
)
(113
)
(156
)
(71
)
(15
)
(404
)
2008
—

—

—

—

—

—

(39
)
1

(31
)
(1
)
(70
)
2009
—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(39
)
(13
)
(24
)
(76
)
2010
—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

245

3

248

2011
—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

36

36

Total
$
2,824

$
414

$
248

$
296

$
48

$
(226
)
$
(186
)
$
(196
)
$
367

$
(4
)
$
3,585


59

Reserve changes for accident years 2002 & Prior
The largest impacts of net reserve re-estimates are shown in the “2002 & Prior” accident years. The reserve deterioration is driven, in part, by deterioration of reserves for asbestos, environmental, assumed casualty reinsurance, workers’ compensation, and general liability claims. Numerous actuarial assumptions on assumed casualty reinsurance turned out to be low, including loss cost trends, particularly on excess of loss business, and the impact of deteriorating terms and conditions.
The reserve re-estimates in calendar year 2003 include an increase in reserves of $2.6 billion related to reserve strengthening based on the Company’s evaluation of its asbestos reserves. The reserve evaluation that led to the strengthening in calendar year 2003 confirmed the Company’s view of the existence of a substantial long-term deterioration in the asbestos litigation environment. The reserve re-estimates in calendar years 2004 through 2006 were largely attributable to reductions in the reinsurance recoverable asset associated with older, long-term casualty liabilities, and unexpected development on mature claims in both general liability and workers’ compensation.
The reserve re-estimates during calendar year 2008 are largely driven by increases in asbestos, environmental and general liability reserves. The reserve re-estimates in calendar years 2009, 2010 and 2011 are largely due to increases in asbestos and environmental reserves, resulting from the Company’s annual evaluations of these liabilities. These reserve evaluations reflect deterioration in the litigation environment surrounding asbestos and environmental liabilities during this period.
Reserve changes for accident years 2003 through 2007
During the 2007 calendar year, the Company refined its processes for allocating incurred but not reported (“IBNR”) reserves by accident year, resulting in a reclassification of $347 of IBNR reserves from the 2003 to 2006 accident years to the 2002 and prior accident years. This reclassification of reserves by accident year had no effect on total recorded reserves within any segment or on total recorded reserves for any line of business within a segment. Even after considering the reclassification of IBNR reserves, accident years 2003 through 2007 show favorable development in calendar years 2004 through 2011. A portion of the release comes from short-tail lines of business, where results emerge quickly. During calendar year 2005 and 2006, favorable re-estimates occurred for both loss and allocated loss adjustment expenses. In addition, catastrophe reserves related to the 2004 and 2005 hurricanes developed favorably in 2006. During calendar years 2005 through 2008, the Company recognized favorable re-estimates of both loss and allocated loss adjustment expenses on workers’ compensation claims, driven, in part, by state regulatory reforms in California and Florida, underwriting actions, and expense reduction initiatives that had a greater impact in controlling costs than originally estimated. In 2007, the Company released reserves for package business claims as reported losses emerged favorably to previous expectations. In 2007 through 2009, the Company released reserves for general liability claims due to the favorable emergence of losses for high hazard and umbrella general liability claims. Reserves for professional liability claims were released in 2008 and 2009 related to the 2003 through 2007 accident years due to a lower estimate of claim severity on both directors’ and officers’ insurance claims and errors and omissions insurance claims. Reserves of auto liability claims, within Consumer Markets, were released in 2008 due largely to an improvement in emerged claim severity for the 2005 to 2007 accident years.
Reserve changes for accident years 2008 through 2009
Accident years 2008 through 2009 remain reasonably close to original estimates. Modest favorable reserve re-estimates during calendar periods 2009 through 2012 are primarily related to liability lines of business.
Reserve changes for accident year 2010
Unfavorable reserve re-estimates in calendar year 2011 are largely driven by workers’ compensation. Loss cost trends were higher than initially expected as an increase in frequency outpaced a moderation of severity trends.
Reserve changes for accident year 2011
Accident year 2011 remains reasonably close to the original estimate. Modest unfavorable reserve re-estimates during calendar periods 2012 are primarily related to workers compensation driven by late development of lost time claims.






60

Estimated Gross Profits Used in the Valuation and Amortization of Assets and Liabilities Associated with Variable Annuity and Other Universal Life-Type Contracts
Estimated gross profits are used in the amortization of: the deferred policy acquisition costs ("DAC") asset, which includes the present value of future profits; sales inducement assets (“SIA”); and unearned revenue reserves (“URR”). See Note 1 , Note 2 and Note 8 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information on DAC. See Note 11 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information on SIA. Portions of EGPs are also used in the valuation of reserves for death and other insurance benefit features on variable annuity and universal life-type contracts. See Note 10 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information on death and other insurance benefit reserves.
The most significant EGP based balances are as follows:
 
Talcott Resolution

As of December 31,
 
2012
2011
DAC
$
5,112

$
5,931

SIA
$
325

$
434

URR
$
1,880

$
1,708

Death and Other Insurance Benefit Reserves
$
1,942

$
2,308



Unlocks
The (charge) benefit to net income (loss) by asset and liability as a result of the Unlocks is as follows:
 
Talcott Resolution
 
For the years ended December 31,

2012
2011
2010
DAC
$
(144
)
$
(419
)
$
107

SIA
(82
)
(22
)
—

URR
26

40

17

Death and Other Insurance Benefit Reserves
247

(333
)
25

Total (pre-tax)
$
47

$
(734
)
$
149

Income tax effect
16

(261
)
56

Total (after-tax)
$
31

$
(473
)
$
93

The Unlock benefit, after-tax for the year ended December 31, 2012 was driven primarily by actual separate account returns above our aggregated estimated return, partially offset by policyholder assumption changes which reduced expected future gross profits including additional costs associated with the U.S. variable annuity macro hedge program.
The Unlock charge for the year ended December 31, 2011 was driven primarily by policyholder assumption changes which reduced expected future gross profits including additional costs associated with implementing the Japan hedging strategy and the U.S. variable annuity macro hedge program, as well as actual separate account returns below our aggregated estimated return.
The Unlock benefit for the year ended December 31, 2010 was driven primarily by actual separate account returns above our aggregated estimated return. Also included in the benefit are policyholder assumption changes related to benefits from withdrawals and lapses, offset by hedging, annuitization estimates on Japan products, and long-term expected rate of return updates.
For most life insurance product contracts, the Company estimates gross profits over 20 years as EGPs emerging subsequent to that timeframe are immaterial. Products sold in a particular year are aggregated into cohorts. Future gross profits for each cohort are projected over the estimated lives of the underlying contracts, based on future account value projections for variable annuity and variable universal life products. The projection of future account values requires the use of certain assumptions including: separate account returns; separate account fund mix; fees assessed against the contract holder’s account balance; surrender and lapse rates; interest margin; mortality; and the extent and duration of hedging activities and hedging costs. Changes in these assumptions and, in addition, changes to other policyholder behavior assumptions such as resets, partial surrenders, reaction to price increases, and asset allocations causes EGPs to fluctuate which impacts earnings.

61

The Company determines EGPs from a single deterministic reversion to mean (“RTM”) separate account return projection which is an estimation technique commonly used by insurance entities to project future separate account returns. Through this estimation technique, the Company’s DAC model is adjusted to reflect actual account values at the end of each quarter. Through consideration of recent market returns, the Company will unlock, or adjust, projected returns over a future period so that the account value returns to the long-term expected rate of return, providing that those projected returns do not exceed certain caps or floors. This Unlock for future separate account returns is determined each quarter. Under RTM, the expected long term weighted average rate of return is 8.3% and 5.9% for U.S. and Japan, respectively.
In the third quarter of each year, the Company completes a comprehensive non-market related policyholder behavior assumption study and incorporates the results of those studies into its projection of future gross profits. Additionally, throughout the year, the Company evaluates various aspects of policyholder behavior and periodically revises its policyholder assumptions as credible emerging data indicates that changes are warranted. The Company will continue to evaluate its assumptions related to policyholder behavior as initiatives to reduce the size of the variable annuity business are implemented by management. Upon completion of an annual assumption study or evaluation of credible new information, the Company will revise its assumptions to reflect its current best estimate. These assumption revisions will change the projected account values and the related EGPs in the DAC, SIA and URR amortization models, as well as the death and other insurance benefit reserving model.
All assumption changes that affect the estimate of future EGPs including the update of current account values, the use of the RTM estimation technique and policyholder behavior assumptions are considered an Unlock in the period of revision. An Unlock adjusts DAC, SIA, URR and death and other insurance benefit reserve balances in the Consolidated Balance Sheets with an offsetting benefit or charge in the Consolidated Statements of Operations in the period of the revision. An Unlock that results in an after-tax benefit generally occurs as a result of actual experience or future expectations of product profitability being favorable compared to previous estimates. An Unlock that results in an after-tax charge generally occurs as a result of actual experience or future expectations of product profitability being unfavorable compared to previous estimates.
EGPs are also used to determine the expected excess benefits and assessments included in the measurement of death and other insurance benefit reserves. These excess benefits and assessments are derived from a range of stochastic scenarios that have been calibrated to the Company’s RTM separate account returns. The determination of death and other insurance benefit reserves is also impacted by discount rates, lapses, volatilities, mortality assumptions and benefit utilization, including assumptions around annuitization rates.
An Unlock revises EGPs, on a quarterly basis, to reflect market updates of policyholder account value and the Company’s current best estimate assumptions. Modifications to the Company’s hedging programs may impact EGPs, and correspondingly impact DAC recoverability. After each quarterly Unlock, the Company also tests the aggregate recoverability of DAC by comparing the DAC balance to the present value of future EGPs. The margin between the DAC balance and the present value of future EGPs for U.S. and Japan individual variable annuities was 36% and 43% as of December 31, 2012 , respectively. If the margin between the DAC asset and the present value of future EGPs is exhausted, then further reductions in EGPs would cause portions of DAC to be unrecoverable and the DAC asset would be written down to equal future EGPs.
Evaluation of Other-Than-Temporary Impairments on Available-for-Sale Securities and Valuation Allowances on Mortgage Loans
The Company has a monitoring process overseen by a committee of investment and accounting professionals that identifies investments that are subject to an enhanced evaluation on a quarterly basis to determine if an other-than-temporary impairment (“impairment”) is present for available-for-sale ("AFS") securities or a valuation allowance is required for mortgage loans. This evaluation is a quantitative and qualitative process, which is subject to risks and uncertainties. For further discussion of the accounting policies, see the Significant Investment Accounting Policies Section in Note 1 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. For a discussion of impairments recorded, see the Other-Than-Temporary Impairments within the Investment Portfolio Risks and Risk Management section of the MD&A.

62

Living Benefits Required to be Fair Valued (in Other Policyholder Funds and Benefits Payable )
Fair values for GMWB and GMAB contracts are calculated using the income approach based upon internally developed models because active, observable markets do not exist for those items. The fair value of the Company’s guaranteed benefit liabilities, classified as embedded derivatives, and the related reinsurance and customized freestanding derivatives is calculated as an aggregation of the following components: Best Estimate Claims Payments; Credit Standing Adjustment; and Margins. The resulting aggregation is reconciled or calibrated, if necessary, to market information that is, or may be, available to the Company, but may not be observable by other market participants, including reinsurance discussions and transactions. The Company believes the aggregation of these components, as necessary and as reconciled or calibrated to the market information available to the Company, results in an amount that the Company would be required to transfer, or receive, for an asset, to or from market participants in an active liquid market, if one existed, for those market participants to assume the risks associated with the guaranteed minimum benefits and the related reinsurance and customized derivatives. The fair value is likely to materially diverge from the ultimate settlement of the liability as the Company believes settlement will be based on our best estimate assumptions rather than those best estimate assumptions plus risk margins. In the absence of any transfer of the guaranteed benefit liability to a third party, the release of risk margins is likely to be reflected as realized gains in future periods’ net income. For further discussion on the impact of fair value changes from living benefits see Note 5 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements and for a discussion on the sensitivities of certain living benefits due to capital market factors see Variable Product Guarantee Risks and Risk Management section of the MD&A.
Goodwill Impairment
Goodwill balances are reviewed for impairment at least annually or more frequently if events occur or circumstances change that would indicate that a triggering event for a potential impairment has occurred. The goodwill impairment test follows a two-step process. In the first step, the fair value of a reporting unit is compared to its carrying value. If the carrying value of a reporting unit exceeds its fair value, the second step of the impairment test is performed for purposes of measuring the impairment. In the second step, the fair value of the reporting unit is allocated to all of the assets and liabilities of the reporting unit to determine an implied goodwill value. If the carrying amount of the reporting unit’s goodwill exceeds the implied goodwill value, an impairment loss is recognized in an amount equal to that excess.
Management’s determination of the fair value of each reporting unit incorporates multiple inputs into discounted cash flow calculations including assumptions that market participants would make in valuing the reporting unit. Assumptions include levels of economic capital, future business growth, earnings projections, and assets under management for Mutual Funds and the reporting units within Talcott Resolution and the weighted average cost of capital used for purposes of discounting. Decreases in the amount of economic capital allocated to a reporting unit, decreases in business growth, decreases in earnings projections and increases in the weighted average cost of capital will all cause a reporting unit’s fair value to decrease.
A reporting unit is defined as an operating segment or one level below an operating segment. Certain of the Company’s reporting units, for which goodwill has been allocated, are equivalent to the Company’s operating segments as there is no discrete financial information available for the separate components of the segment or all of the components of the segment have similar economic characteristics. The Group Benefits, Consumer Markets and Mutual Funds operating segments all have equivalent reporting units. In 2012 and 2011, The Hartford changed its operating segments with no change to reporting units. As part of the operating segment changes in 2012, the Individual Life and Retirement Plans reporting units are now included in the Talcott Resolution operating segment. Goodwill associated with the June 30, 2000 buyback of Hartford Life, Inc. was allocated to each of Hartford Life’s reporting units based on the reporting unit's fair value of in-force business at the time of the buyback. Although this goodwill was allocated to each reporting unit, as shown in the table below, it is held in Corporate for segment reporting.

63

The carrying value of goodwill allocated to reporting units is as follows:
 
As of December 31, 2012
As of December 31, 2011
 
Segment
Goodwill
Goodwill in
Corporate
Total
Segment
Goodwill
Goodwill in
Corporate
Total
Group Benefits
$
—

$
138

$
138

$
—

$
138

$
138

Consumer Markets
119

—

119

119

—

119

Mutual Funds [1] [2]
149

92

241

159

92

251

Talcott Resolution:
 
 
 
 
 
 
Individual Life [1]
—

—

—

224

118

342

Retirement Plans [1]
87

69

156

87

69

156

Total Talcott Resolution
87

69

156

311

187

498

Total
$
355

$
299

$
654

$
589

$
417

$
1,006

[1] For further information, see Note 2 - Business Dispositions of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
[2] For further information, see Note 9 - Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
During the first quarter of 2012, the Company determined that a triggering event requiring an impairment assessment had occurred as a result of its decision to pursue sales or other strategic alternatives for the Individual Life and Retirement Plans reporting units.
The Company completed interim impairment tests during each of the first three quarters of 2012 for the Retirement Plans reporting unit which resulted in no impairment of goodwill. The annual goodwill assessment for Retirement Plans was completed as of October 31, 2012 and an additional impairment test was completed as of December 31, 2012 as a result of the anticipated sale of this business unit. No write-down of goodwill resulted for the year ended December 31, 2012. Retirement Plans passed step one of the goodwill impairment tests with a margin of less than 10% between fair value and book value of the reporting unit as of both dates. The fair value of the Retirement Plans reporting unit as of October 31, 2012 and December 31, 2012 was based on a negotiated transaction price.
The Company completed interim impairment tests during each of the first three quarters of 2012 for the Individual Life reporting unit which resulted in no impairment of goodwill in the first and second quarters of 2012. In the third quarter of 2012, the Individual Life reporting unit failed the goodwill impairment tests as the carrying amount of the Individual Life reporting unit's goodwill exceeded the implied goodwill value. Accordingly, an impairment loss of $342 was recognized, representing the carrying value of the reporting unit's goodwill. The goodwill impairment loss is included in reinsurance loss on disposition in the Company's Consolidated Statements of Operations. The fair value of the Individual Life reporting unit as of September 30, 2012 was based on a negotiated transaction price. See Notes 2 and 9 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
The annual goodwill assessment for the Mutual Funds, Group Benefits and Consumer Markets reporting units was completed as of October 31, 2012, which resulted in no write-downs of goodwill for the year ended December 31, 2012. The reporting units passed the first step of their annual impairment test with a significant margin with the exception of the Group Benefits reporting unit. Group Benefits passed the first step of its annual impairment test with less than a 10% margin. The fair value of the Group Benefits reporting unit is based on discounted cash flows using earnings projections on in force business and future business growth. There could be a positive or negative impact on the result of step one in future periods if assumptions change about the level of economic capital, future business growth, earnings projections or the weighted average cost of capital.
See Note 9 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for information on the results of goodwill impairment tests performed in 2011 and 2010.

64

Valuation of Investments and Derivative Instruments
Available-for-Sale Securities, Fixed Maturities, FVO, Equity Securities, Trading, and Short-term Investments
The fair value of AFS securities, fixed maturities, at fair value using the fair value option (“FVO”), equity securities, trading, and short-term investments in an active and orderly market (i.e., not distressed or forced liquidation) is determined by management after considering one of three primary sources of information: third-party pricing services, independent broker quotations or pricing matrices. Security pricing is applied using a “waterfall” approach whereby prices are first sought from third-party pricing services, the remaining unpriced securities are submitted to independent brokers for prices, or lastly, securities are priced using a pricing matrix. Typical inputs used by these pricing methods include, but are not limited to, reported trades, benchmark yields, issuer spreads, bids, offers, and/or estimated cash flows, prepayments speeds and default rates. Based on the typical trading volumes and the lack of quoted market prices for fixed maturities, third-party pricing services will normally derive the security prices through recent reported trades for identical or similar securities making adjustments through the reporting date based upon available market observable information as outlined above. If there are no recent reported trades, the third party pricing services and brokers may use matrix or model processes to develop a security price where future cash flow expectations are developed based upon collateral performance and discounted at an estimated market rate. For further discussion, see the Available-for-Sale, Fixed Maturities, FVO, Equity Securities, Trading, and Short-Term Investments Section in Note 5 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
The Company has analyzed the third-party pricing services valuation methodologies and related inputs, and has also evaluated the various types of securities in its investment portfolio to determine an appropriate fair value hierarchy level based upon trading activity and the observability of market inputs. For further discussion of fair value measurement, see Note 5 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Valuation of Derivative Instruments, including embedded derivatives within investments
Derivative instruments are reported on the Consolidated Balance Sheets at fair value and are reported in Other Investments and Other Liabilities. The fair value of derivative instruments is determined using pricing valuation models, which utilize market data inputs or independent broker quotations. Excluding embedded and reinsurance related derivatives, as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , 97% and 98% , respectively, of derivatives based upon notional values, were priced by valuation models, which utilize independent market data. The remaining derivatives were priced by broker quotations. The derivatives are valued using mid-market level inputs that are predominantly observable in the market with the exception of the customized swap contracts that hedge guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits (“GMWB”) liabilities. Inputs used to value derivatives include, but are not limited to, swap interest rates, foreign currency forward and spot rates, credit spreads and correlations, interest and equity volatility and equity index levels. For further discussion, see the Derivative Instruments, including embedded derivatives within the investments section in Note 5 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Limited partnerships and other alternative investments
Limited partnerships and other alternative investments include hedge funds where investment company accounting has been applied to a wholly-owned fund of funds whose assets are measured at fair value. These funds are fair valued using the net asset value per share or equivalent (“NAV”). The NAV is calculated on a monthly basis and is the amount at which a unit or shareholder may redeem their investment, if redemption is allowed, and includes an assessment of current market conditions and the investee's liquidity. For further discussion of fair value measurement, see Note 5 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Pension and Other Postretirement Benefit Obligations
The Company maintains The Hartford Retirement Plan for U.S. Employees, a U.S. qualified defined benefit pension plan (the “Plan”)that covers substantially all U.S. employees hired prior to January 1, 2013, as well as unfunded excess plans to provide benefits in excess of amounts permitted to be paid to participants of the Plan under the provisions of the Internal Revenue Code. The Company has also entered into individual retirement agreements with certain retired directors providing for unfunded supplemental pension benefits. In addition, the Company provides certain health care and life insurance benefits for eligible retired employees. The Company maintains international plans which represent an immaterial percentage of total pension assets, liabilities and expense and, for reporting purposes, are combined with domestic plans.
Pursuant to accounting principles related to the Company's pension and other postretirement obligations to employees under its various benefit plans, the Company is required to make a significant number of assumptions in order to calculate the related liabilities and expenses each period. The two economic assumptions that have the most impact on pension and other postretirement expense are the discount rate and the expected long-term rate of return on plan assets. In determining the discount rate assumption, the Company utilizes a discounted cash flow analysis of the Company's pension and other postretirement obligations and currently available market and industry data. The yield curve utilized in the cash flow analysis is comprised of bonds rated Aa or higher with maturities primarily between zero and thirty years. Based on all available information, it was determined that 4.00% and 3.50% were the appropriate discount rates as of December 31, 2012 to calculate the Company’s pension and other postretirement obligations, respectively. Accordingly, the 4.00% and 3.50% discount rates will also be used to determine the Company’s 2013 pension and other postretirement expense, respectively. At December 31, 2011 , the discount rate was 4.75% and 4.50% for pension and other postretirement expense, respectively.

65

As of December 31, 2012 , a 25 basis point increase/decrease in the discount rate would decrease/increase the pension and other postretirement obligations by $179 and $6 , respectively.
The Company determines the expected long-term rate of return assumption based on an analysis of the Plan portfolio’s historical compound rates of return since 1979 (the earliest date for which comparable portfolio data is available) and over 5 year and 10 year periods. The Company selected these periods, as well as shorter durations, to assess the portfolio’s volatility, duration and total returns as they relate to pension obligation characteristics, which are influenced by the Company’s workforce demographics. In addition, the Company also applies long-term market return assumptions to an investment mix that generally anticipates 60% fixed income securities, 20% equity securities and 20% alternative assets to derive an expected long-term rate of return. Based upon these analyses, the Company decreased the expected long term rate of return assumption to 7.10% to determine the Company’s 2013 expense. The long-term rate of return assumption at December 31, 2011 and 2010 that was used to determine the Company’s 2012 and 2011 expense, was 7.30% .
The Company uses a five-year averaging method to determine the market-related value of Plan assets, which is used to determine the expected return component of pension expense. Under this methodology, asset gains/losses that result from returns that differ from the Company’s long-term rate of return assumption are recognized in the market-related value of assets on a level basis over a five year period. The difference between actual asset returns for the plans of $381 and $613 for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively, as compared to expected returns of $312 and $298 for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively, will be fully reflected in the market-related value of plan assets over the next five years using the methodology described above. The level of actuarial net loss continues to exceed the allowable amortization corridor. Based on the 4.00% discount rate selected as of December 31, 2012 and taking into account estimated future minimum funding, the difference between actual and expected performance in 2012 will decrease annual pension expense in future years. The decrease in pension expense will be approximately $1 in 2013 and will increase ratably to a decrease of approximately $8 in 2018.
Effective December 31, 2012, the Company amended the Plan to freeze participation and benefit accruals. As a result, employees will not accrue further benefits under the cash balance formula of the plan, although interest will continue to accrue to existing account balances. Compensation earned by employees up to December 31, 2012 will be used for purposes of calculating benefits under the Plan but there will be no future benefit accruals after that date. Participants as of December 31, 2012 will continue to earn vesting credit with respect to their frozen accrued benefits as they continue to work. The freeze also applies to The Hartford Excess Pension Plan II, the Company's non-qualified excess benefit plan for certain highly compensated employees, effective December 31, 2012. The Company announced these changes in April 2012.
Pension expense reflected in the Company’s results was $242 , $213 and $186 in 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively. The Company estimates its 2013 pension income will be approximately $20, based on current assumptions. The income in 2013 is a result of the expected return on plan assets more than offsetting the lower expenses due to the announced plan freeze. Lower expenses are primarily due to a change in the amortization period resulting in lower actuarial losses. To illustrate the impact of these assumptions on annual pension expense for 2013 and going forward, a 25 basis point decrease/increase in the discount rate will increase/decrease pension expense by approximately $2 and a 25 basis point change in the long-term asset return assumption will increase/decrease pension expense by approximately $11.
Also, in April 2012 changes to the Company's other postretirement medical, dental and life insurance coverage plans ("other postretirement plans") were approved to no longer provide subsidized coverage for current employees who retire on or after January 1, 2014. The Company announced these changes in April 2012.
Other postretirement plans (income) expense reflected in the Company's results was $(2) , $10 and $15 in 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively. The Company estimates its 2013 other postretirement plans income will be approximately $9 based on the updated assumptions. The income in 2013 is a result of the expected return on plan assets more than offsetting the lower expenses due to the announced plan freeze.


66

Valuation Allowance on Deferred Tax Assets
Deferred tax assets represent the tax benefit of future deductible temporary differences and operating loss and tax credit carryforwards. Deferred tax assets are measured using the enacted tax rates expected to be in effect when such benefits are realized if there is no change in tax law. Under U.S. GAAP, we test the value of deferred tax assets for impairment on a quarterly basis at the entity level within each tax jurisdiction, consistent with our filed tax returns. Deferred tax assets are reduced by a valuation allowance if, based on the weight of available evidence, it is more likely than not that some portion, or all, of the deferred tax assets will not be realized. The determination of the valuation allowance for our deferred tax assets requires management to make certain judgments and assumptions. In evaluating the ability to recover deferred tax assets, we have considered all available evidence as of December 31, 2012 , including past operating results, the existence of cumulative losses in the most recent years, forecasted earnings, future taxable income, and prudent and feasible tax planning strategies. In the event we determine it is not more likely than not that we will be able to realize all or part of our deferred tax assets in the future, an increase to the valuation allowance would be charged to earnings in the period such determination is made. Likewise, if it is later determined that it is more likely than not that those deferred tax assets would be realized, the previously provided valuation allowance would be reversed. Our judgments and assumptions are subject to change given the inherent uncertainty in predicting future performance and specific industry and investment market conditions.
The Company has recorded a deferred tax asset valuation allowance that is adequate to reduce the total deferred tax asset to an amount that will be more likely than not realized. The deferred tax asset valuation allowance was $58 , relating mostly to foreign net operating losses, as of December 31, 2012 and was $83 as of December 31, 2011 . In assessing the need for a valuation allowance, management considered future taxable temporary difference reversals, future taxable income exclusive of reversing temporary differences and carryforwards, taxable income in open carry back years, as well as other tax planning strategies. These tax planning strategies include holding a portion of debt securities with market value losses until recovery, altering the level of tax exempt securities held, selling appreciated securities to offset capital losses, business considerations such as asset-liability matching, and the sales of certain corporate assets. Management views such tax planning strategies as prudent and feasible, and would implement them, if necessary, to realize the deferred tax asset.
Contingencies Relating to Corporate Litigation and Regulatory Matters
Management evaluates each contingent matter separately. A loss is recorded if probable and reasonably estimable. Management establishes reserves for these contingencies at its “best estimate,” or, if no one number within the range of possible losses is more probable than any other, the Company records an estimated reserve at the low end of the range of losses.
The Company has a quarterly monitoring process involving legal and accounting professionals. Legal personnel first identify outstanding corporate litigation and regulatory matters posing a reasonable possibility of loss. These matters are then jointly reviewed by accounting and legal personnel to evaluate the facts and changes since the last review in order to determine if a provision for loss should be recorded or adjusted, the amount that should be recorded, and the appropriate disclosure. The outcomes of certain contingencies currently being evaluated by the Company, which relate to corporate litigation and regulatory matters, are inherently difficult to predict, and the reserves that have been established for the estimated settlement amounts are subject to significant changes. Management expects that the ultimate liability, if any, with respect to such lawsuits, after consideration of provisions made for estimated losses, will not be material to the consolidated financial condition of the Company. In view of the uncertainties regarding the outcome of these matters, as well as the tax-deductibility of payments, it is possible that the ultimate cost to the Company of these matters could exceed the reserve by an amount that would have a material adverse effect on the Company’s results of operations or liquidity in a particular quarterly or annual period.

67

THE HARTFORD’S OPERATIONS OVERVIEW
The Hartford is a financial holding company for a group of subsidiaries that provide property and casualty and investment products to both individual and business customers in the United States and continues to administer life and annuity products previously sold.
The Company currently conducts business principally in the following six reporting segments Property & Casualty Commercial, Consumer Markets, Property & Casualty Other Operations, Group Benefits, Mutual Funds and Talcott Resolution. For additional discussion regarding The Hartford’s reporting segments, see Note 4 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
The Company derives its revenues principally from: (a) premiums earned for insurance coverages provided to insureds; (b) fee income, including asset management fees, on separate account and mutual fund assets and mortality and expense fees, as well as cost of insurance charges; (c) net investment income; (d) fees earned for services provided to third parties; and (e) net realized capital gains and losses. Premiums charged for insurance coverages are earned principally on a pro rata basis over the terms of the related policies in-force. Asset management fees and mortality and expense fees are primarily generated from separate account assets, which are deposited through the sale of variable annuity and variable universal life products and from mutual funds. Cost of insurance charges are assessed on the net amount at risk for investment-oriented life insurance products. Service fees principally include revenues from member contact center services provided through the AARP Health program.
Profitability over time is greatly influenced by the Company’s underwriting discipline, which seeks to manage exposure to loss through favorable risk selection and diversification, its management of claims, its use of reinsurance, the size of its in force block, actual mortality and morbidity experience, and its ability to manage its expense ratio which it accomplishes through economies of scale and its management of acquisition costs and other underwriting expenses.
Pricing adequacy depends on a number of factors, including the ability to obtain regulatory approval for rate changes, proper evaluation of underwriting risks, the ability to project future loss cost frequency and severity based on historical loss experience adjusted for known trends, the Company’s response to rate actions taken by competitors, and expectations about regulatory and legal developments and expense levels. The Company seeks to price its insurance policies such that insurance premiums and future net investment income earned on premiums received will cover underwriting expenses and the ultimate cost of paying claims reported on the policies and provide for a profit margin. For many of its insurance products, the Company is required to obtain approval for its premium rates from state insurance departments.
The financial results in the Company’s variable annuity and mutual fund businesses, depend largely on the amount of the contract holder account value or assets under management on which it earns fees and the level of fees charged. Changes in account value or assets under management are driven by two main factors: net flows, which measure the success of the Company’s asset gathering and retention efforts, and the market return of the funds, which is heavily influenced by the return realized in the equity markets. Net flows are comprised of new sales and other deposits less surrenders, death benefits, policy charges and annuitizations of investment type contracts, such as variable annuity contracts. In the mutual fund business, net flows are known as net sales. Net sales are comprised of new sales less redemptions by mutual fund customers. The Company uses the average daily value of the S&P 500 Index as an indicator for evaluating market returns of the underlying account portfolios in the United States. Relative financial results of variable products are highly correlated to the growth in account values or assets under management since these products generally earn fee income on a daily basis. Equity market movements could also result in benefits for or charges against deferred acquisition costs.
The profitability of fixed annuities and other “spread-based” products depends largely on the Company’s ability to earn target spreads between earned investment rates on its general account assets and interest credited to policyholders. In addition, the size and persistency of gross profits from these businesses is an important driver of earnings as it affects the rate of amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs.
The investment return, or yield, on invested assets is an important element of the Company’s earnings since insurance products are priced with the assumption that premiums received can be invested for a period of time before benefits, loss and loss adjustment expenses are paid. Due to the need to maintain sufficient liquidity to satisfy claim obligations, the majority of the Company’s invested assets have been held in available-for-sale securities, including, among other asset classes, corporate bonds, municipal bonds, government debt, short-term debt, mortgage-backed securities and asset-backed securities.
The primary investment objective for the Company is to maximize economic value, consistent with acceptable risk parameters, including the management of credit risk and interest rate sensitivity of invested assets, while generating sufficient after-tax income to meet policyholder and corporate obligations. Investment strategies are developed based on a variety of factors including business needs, regulatory requirements and tax considerations.
For a discussion on how the Company establishes property and casualty insurance product reserves, see “Property and Casualty Insurance Product Reserves, Net of Reinsurance” in the Critical Accounting Estimates section of MD&A and for further information on Unlocks, see “Estimated Gross Profits Used in the Valuation and Amortization of Assets and Liabilities Associated with Variable Annuity and Other Universal Life-Type Contracts” also in the Critical Accounting Estimates section of MD&A.

68

Definitions of Non-GAAP and other measures and ratios
Account Value
Account value includes policyholders’ balances for investment contracts and reserves for future policy benefits for insurance contracts. Account value is a measure used by the Company because a significant portion of the Company’s fee income is based upon the level of account value. These revenues increase or decrease with a rise or fall in the amount of account value whether caused by changes in the market or through net flows.
After-tax Margin, excluding buyouts and realized gains (losses)
After-tax margin, excluding buyouts and realized gains (losses), is a non-GAAP financial measure that the Company uses to evaluate, and believes is an important measure of, the Group Benefits segment’s operating performance. After-tax margin is the most directly comparable U.S. GAAP measure. The Company believes that the measure after-tax margin, excluding buyouts and realized gains (losses), provides investors with a valuable measure of the performance of Group Benefits because it reveals trends in the business that may be obscured by the effect of buyouts and realized gains (losses). After-tax margin, excluding buyouts and realized gains (losses), should not be considered as a substitute for after-tax margin and does not reflect the overall profitability of Group Benefits Therefore, the Company believes it is important for investors to evaluate both after-tax margin, excluding buyouts and realized gains (losses), and after-tax margin when reviewing performance. After-tax margin, excluding buyouts and realized gains (losses) is calculated by dividing core earnings excluding buyouts and realized gains (losses) by total core revenues excluding buyouts and realized gains (losses). A reconciliation of after-tax margin to after-tax margin, core earnings excluding buyouts and realized gains (losses) for the year ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 is set forth in the After-tax Margin section within MD&A - Group Benefits.
Assets Under Management
Assets under management (“AUM”) include account values and mutual fund assets. AUM is a measure used by the Company because a significant portion of the Company’s revenues are based upon asset values. These revenues increase or decrease with a rise or fall in the amount of account value whether caused by changes in the market or through net flows.
Catastrophe ratio
The catastrophe ratio (a component of the loss and loss adjustment expense ratio) represents the ratio of catastrophe losses incurred in the current calendar year (net of reinsurance) to earned premiums and includes catastrophe losses incurred for both the current and prior accident years. A catastrophe is an event that causes $25 or more in industry insured property losses and affects a significant number of property and casualty policyholders and insurers. The catastrophe ratio includes the effect of catastrophe losses, but does not include the effect of reinstatement premiums.
Combined ratio
The combined ratio is the sum of the loss and loss adjustment expense ratio, the expense ratio and the policyholder dividend ratio. This ratio is a relative measurement that describes the related cost of losses and expenses for every $100 of earned premiums. A combined ratio below 100 demonstrates underwriting profit; a combined ratio above 100 demonstrates underwriting losses.
Combined ratio before catastrophes and prior accident year development
The combined ratio before catastrophes and prior accident year development, a non-GAAP measure, represents the combined ratio for the current accident year, excluding the impact of catastrophes. Combined ratio is the most directly comparable U.S. GAAP measure. The Company believes this ratio is an important measure of the trend in profitability since it removes the impact of volatile and unpredictable catastrophe losses and prior accident year reserve development. A reconciliation of combined ratio to combined ratio before prior accident year reserve development for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 is set forth in MD&A - Property & Casualty Commercial and Consumer Markets.

69

Core Earnings
Core earnings, a non-GAAP measure is an important measure of the Company’s operating performance. The Company believes that the measure core earnings provides investors with a valuable measure of the performance of the Company’s ongoing businesses because it reveals trends in our insurance and financial services businesses that may be obscured by including the net effect of certain realized capital gains and losses, discontinued operations, loss on extinguishment of debt, gains and losses on business disposition transactions, certain restructuring charges and the impact of Unlocks to DAC, SIA, URR and death and other insurance benefit reserve balances. Some realized capital gains and losses are primarily driven by investment decisions and external economic developments, the nature and timing of which are unrelated to the insurance and underwriting aspects of our business. Accordingly, core earnings excludes the effect of all realized gains and losses (net of tax and the effects of DAC) that tend to be highly variable from period to period based on capital market conditions. The Company believes, however, that some realized capital gains and losses are integrally related to our insurance operations, so core earnings includes net realized gains and losses such as net periodic settlements on credit derivatives and net periodic settlements on the Japan fixed annuity cross-currency swap. These net realized gains and losses are directly related to an offsetting item included in the income statement such as net investment income. Net income (loss) is the most directly comparable U.S. GAAP measure. Core earnings should not be considered as a substitute for net income (loss) and does not reflect the overall profitability of the Company’s business. Therefore, the Company believes that it is useful for investors to evaluate both net income (loss) and core earnings when reviewing the Company’s performance.
A reconciliation of net income to core earnings for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 is set forth below.
 
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
 
2012
 
2011
 
2010
Net income
 
$
(38
)
 
$
712

 
$
1,636

Less: Unlock impacts on net income (loss)
 
31

 
(473
)
 
97

Less: Restructuring and other costs, net of tax
 
(129
)
 
(16
)
 
(17
)
Less: Income (loss) from discontinued operations, net of tax
 
(5
)
 
86

 
(64
)
Less: Loss on extinguishment of debt, net of tax
 
(587
)
 
—

 
—

Less: Reinsurance loss on business disposition, net of tax
 
(388
)
 
—

 
—

Less: Net realized capital gains (losses), net of tax and DAC, excluded from core earnings
 
(363
)
 
(1
)
 
(244
)
Core earnings
 
$
1,403

 
$
1,116

 
$
1,864

Current accident year loss and loss adjustment expense ratio before catastrophes
The current accident year loss and loss adjustment expense ratio before catastrophes is a measure of the cost of non-catastrophe claims incurred in the current accident year divided by earned premiums. Management believes that the current accident year loss and loss adjustment expense ratio before catastrophes is a performance measure that is useful to investors as it removes the impact of volatile and unpredictable catastrophe losses and prior accident year reserve development.
Expense ratio
The expense ratio for the underwriting segments of Property & Casualty Commercial and Consumer Markets is the ratio of underwriting expenses, excluding bad debt expense, to earned premiums. Underwriting expenses include the amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs and insurance operating costs and expenses. Deferred policy acquisition costs include commissions, taxes, licenses and fees and other underwriting expenses and are amortized over the policy term.
The expense ratio Group Benefits is expressed as a ratio of insurance operating costs and other expenses and amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs, to premiums and other considerations, excluding buyout premiums.
Fee Income
Fee income is largely driven from amounts collected as a result of contractually defined percentages of assets under management. These fees are generally collected on a daily basis. Therefore, the growth in assets under management either through positive net flows or net sales, or favorable equity market performance will have a favorable impact on fee income. Conversely, either negative net flows or net sales, or unfavorable equity market performance will reduce fee income.

70

Loss and loss adjustment expense ratio
The loss and loss adjustment expense ratio is a measure of the cost of claims incurred in the calendar year divided by earned premium and includes losses incurred for both the current and prior accident years, as well as the costs of mortality and morbidity and other contractholder benefits to policyholders. Among other factors, the loss and loss adjustment expense ratio needed for the Company to achieve its targeted return on equity fluctuates from year to year based on changes in the expected investment yield over the claim settlement period, the timing of expected claim settlements and the targeted returns set by management based on the competitive environment.
The loss and loss adjustment expense ratio is affected by claim frequency and claim severity, particularly for shorter-tail property lines of business, where the emergence of claim frequency and severity is credible and likely indicative of ultimate losses. Claim frequency represents the percentage change in the average number of reported claims per unit of exposure in the current accident year compared to that of the previous accident year. Claim severity represents the percentage change in the estimated average cost per claim in the current accident year compared to that of the previous accident year. As one of the factors used to determine pricing, the Company’s practice is to first make an overall assumption about claim frequency and severity for a given line of business and then, as part of the ratemaking process, adjust the assumption as appropriate for the particular state, product or coverage.
Loss ratio, excluding buyouts
The loss ratio is utilized for the Group Benefits segment and is expressed as a ratio of benefits, losses and loss adjustment expenses to premiums and other considerations, excluding buyout premiums. Since Group Benefits occasionally buys a block of claims for a stated premium amount, the Company excludes this buyout from the loss ratio used for evaluating the underwriting results of the business as buyouts may distort the loss ratio. Buyout premiums represent takeover of open claim liabilities and other non-recurring premium amounts.
Mutual Fund Assets
Mutual fund assets are owned by the shareholders of those funds and not by the Company and therefore are not reflected in the Company’s consolidated financial statements. Mutual fund assets are a measure used by the Company because a significant portion of the Company’s revenues are based upon asset values. These revenues increase or decrease with a rise or fall in the amount of account value whether caused by changes in the market or through net flows.
New business written premium
New business written premium represents the amount of premiums charged for policies issues to customers who were not insured with the Company in the previous policy term. New business written premium plus renewal policy written premium equals total written premium.
Policies in force
Policies in force represent the number of policies with coverage in effect as of the end of the period. The number of policies in force is a growth measure used for Consumer Markets and standard commercial lines within Property & Casualty Commercial and is affected by both new business growth and premium renewal retention.
Policy count retention
Policy count retention represents the ratio of the number of policies renewed during the period divided by the number of policies from the previous policy term period. The number of policies available to renew from the previous policy term represents the number of policies written in the previous policy term net of any cancellations of those policies. Policy count retention is affected by a number of factors, including the percentage of renewal policy quotes accepted and decisions by the Company to non-renew policies because of specific policy underwriting concerns or because of a decision to reduce premium writings in certain classes of business or states. Policy count retention is also affected by advertising and rate actions taken by competitors.
Policyholder dividend ratio
The policyholder dividend ratio is the ratio of policyholder dividends to earned premium.
Prior accident year loss and loss adjustment expense ratio
The prior year loss and loss adjustment expense ratio represents the increase (decrease) in the estimated cost of settling catastrophe and non-catastrophe claims incurred in prior accident years as recorded in the current calendar year divided by earned premiums.

71

Reinstatement premiums
Reinstatement premium represents additional ceded premium paid for the reinstatement of the amount of reinsurance coverage that was reduced as a result of a reinsurance loss payment.
Renewal earned pricing increase (decrease)
Written premiums are earned over the policy term, which is six months for certain personal lines auto business and 12 months for substantially all of the remainder of the Company’s property and casualty business. Because the Company earns premiums over the 6 to 12 month term of the policies, renewal earned pricing increases (decreases) lag renewal written pricing increases (decreases) by 6 to 12 months.
Renewal written pricing increase (decrease)
Renewal written pricing increase (decrease) represents the combined effect of rate changes, amount of insurance and individual risk pricing decisions per unit of exposure since the prior year. The rate component represents the average change in rate filings during the period and the amount of insurance represents the value of the rating base, such as model year/vehicle symbol for auto, building replacement costs for property and wage inflation for workers’ compensation. The renewal written price increase (decrease) does not include other factors that affect average premium per unit of exposure such as changes in the mix of business by state, territory, class plan and tier of risk. A number of factors affect renewal written pricing increases (decreases) including expected loss costs as projected by the Company’s pricing actuaries, rate filings approved by state regulators, risk selection decisions made by the Company’s underwriters and marketplace competition. Renewal written pricing changes reflect the property and casualty insurance market cycle. Prices tend to increase for a particular line of business when insurance carriers have incurred significant losses in that line of business in the recent past or the industry as a whole commits less of its capital to writing exposures in that line of business. Prices tend to decrease when recent loss experience has been favorable or when competition among insurance carriers increases.
Return on Assets (“ROA”), core earnings
ROA, core earnings, is a non-GAAP financial measure that the Company uses to evaluate, and believes is an important measure of, certain of the segment’s operating performance. ROA is the most directly comparable U.S. GAAP measure. The Company believes that the measure ROA, core earnings, provides investors with a valuable measure of the performance of certain of the Company’s on-going businesses because it reveals trends in our businesses that may be obscured by the effect of realized gains (losses). ROA, core earnings, should not be considered as a substitute for ROA and does not reflect the overall profitability of our businesses. Therefore, the Company believes it is important for investors to evaluate both ROA, core earnings, and ROA when reviewing the Company’s performance. ROA is calculated by dividing core earnings by a two-point average AUM. A reconciliation of ROA to ROA, core earnings for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 is set forth in the ROA section within MD&A - Mutual Funds.
Underwriting gain (loss)
The Company's management evaluates profitability of the P&C businesses primarily on the basis of underwriting gain (loss). Underwriting gain (loss) is a before-tax measure that represents earned premiums less incurred losses, loss adjustment expenses and underwriting expenses. Net income is the most directly comparable GAAP measure. Underwriting gain (loss) is influenced significantly by earned premium growth and the adequacy of the Company's pricing. Underwriting profitability over time is also greatly influenced by the Company's underwriting discipline, which seeks to manage exposure to loss through favorable risk selection and diversification, its management of claims, its use of reinsurance and its ability to manage its expense ratio, which it accomplishes through economies of scale and its management of acquisition costs and other underwriting expenses. The Company believes that underwriting gain (loss) provides investors with a valuable measure of before-tax profitability derived from underwriting activities, which are managed separately from the Company's investing activities. A reconciliation of underwriting gain (loss) to net income for Property & Casualty Commercial and Consumer Markets is set forth in their respective discussions herein.
Written and earned premiums
Written premium is a statutory accounting financial measure which represents the amount of premiums charged for policies issued, net of reinsurance, during a fiscal period. Earned premium is a U.S. GAAP and statutory measure. Premiums are considered earned and are included in the financial results on a pro rata basis over the policy period. Management believes that written premium is a performance measure that is useful to investors as it reflects current trends in the Company’s sale of property and casualty insurance products. Written and earned premium are recorded net of ceded reinsurance premium.
Traditional life insurance type products, such as those sold by Group Benefits, collect premiums from policyholders in exchange for financial protection for the policyholder from a specified insurable loss, such as death or disability. These premiums together with net investment income earned from the overall investment strategy are used to pay the contractual obligations under these insurance contracts. Two major factors, new sales and persistency, impact premium growth. Sales can increase or decrease in a given year based on a number of factors, including but not limited to, customer demand for the Company’s product offerings, pricing competition, distribution channels and the Company’s reputation and ratings. Persistency refers to the percentage of policies remaining in-force from year-to-year.

72

INVESTMENT RESULTS
Composition of Invested Assets
 
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
 
Amount
Percent
Amount
Percent
Fixed maturities, AFS, at fair value
$
85,922

81.6
%
$
81,809

78.3
%
Fixed maturities, at fair value using the fair value option
1,087

1.0
%
1,328

1.3
%
Equity securities, AFS, at fair value
890

0.8
%
921

0.9
%
Mortgage loans
6,711

6.4
%
5,728

5.5
%
Policy loans, at outstanding balance
1,997

1.9
%
2,001

1.9
%
Limited partnerships and other alternative investments
3,015

2.9
%
2,532

2.4
%
Other investments [1]
1,114

1.1
%
2,394

2.3
%
Short-term investments
4,581

4.3
%
7,736

7.4
%
Total investments excluding equity securities, trading
105,317

100.0
%
104,449

100.0
%
Equity securities, trading, at fair value [2]
28,933

 
30,499

 
Total investments [3]
$
134,250

 
$
134,948

 
[1]
Primarily relates to derivative instruments.
[2]
As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , approximately $27.1 billion and $28.5 billion, respectively, of equity securities, trading, support Japan variable annuities. Those equity securities, trading, were invested in mutual funds, which, in turn, invested in the following asset classes as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively, Japan equity 20% and 21%, Japan fixed income (primarily government securities) 15% and 15%, global equity 21% and 21%, global government bonds 43% and 42%, and cash and other 1% and 1%.
[3]
Includes investments relating to the sales of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses; see Note 2 - Business Dispositions of the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements for further discussion of this transaction.

Total investments decreased since December 31, 2011 , primarily due to decreases in short-term investments, equity securities, trading, and other investments, partially offset by an increase in fixed maturities, AFS and mortgage loans. The decline in short-term investments primarily relates to a decline in derivative collateral held due to decreases in derivative market values, as well as reinvesting into longer duration investments. The decrease in equity securities, trading was largely due to variable annuity policy surrenders as well as depreciation of the Japanese yen versus the U.S. dollar, partially offset by market appreciation in the underlying investment funds supporting the variable annuity products. The decline in other investments was primarily due to a decline in derivative market values, primarily related to the variable annuity hedge program. The increase in fixed maturities, AFS, was primarily due to improved valuations as a result of credit spread tightening and declining interest rates. The increase in mortgage loans related to the funding of commercial whole loans.
Net Investment Income (Loss)
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
 
Amount
Yield [1]
Amount
Yield [1]
Amount
Yield [1]
Fixed maturities [2]
$
3,363

4.2
%
$
3,396

4.2
%
$
3,489

4.3
%
Equity securities, AFS
37

4.3
%
36

3.8
%
53

4.8
%
Mortgage loans
337

5.2
%
281

5.4
%
260

5.2
%
Policy loans
119

6.0
%
131

6.1
%
132

6.1
%
Limited partnerships and other alternative investments
196

7.1
%
243

12.0
%
216

12.6
%
Other Investments [3]
296

 
301

 
329

 
Investment expense
(111
)
 
(116
)
 
(115
)
 
Total securities AFS and other
$
4,237

4.3
%
$
4,272

4.4
%
$
4,364

4.5
%
Equity securities, trading
4,565

 
(1,359
)
 
(774
)
 
Total net investment income (loss), before-tax
$
8,802

 
$
2,913

 
$
3,590

 
Total securities, AFS and other excluding limited partnerships and other alternative investments
4,041

4.3
%
4,029

4.2
%
4,148

4.3
%
[1]
Yields calculated using annualized net investment income (excluding income related to equity securities, trading) before investment expenses divided by the monthly average invested assets at cost, amortized cost, or adjusted carrying value, as applicable, excluding equity securities, trading, repurchase agreement and dollar roll collateral, and consolidated variable interest entity non-controlling interests.
[2]
Includes net investment income on short-term investments.
[3]
Includes income from derivatives that qualify for hedge accounting and hedge fixed maturities.

73

Year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011
Total net investment income increased largely due to equity securities, trading, resulting from market appreciation of the underlying investment funds supporting the Japanese variable annuity products. Total net investment income, excluding equity securities, trading, declined primarily due to lower returns on limited partnerships and other alternative investments. This decline was partially offset by the Company reallocating assets from fixed maturities to higher yielding assets, such as mortgage loans and limited partnerships and other alternative investments. The Company’s expectation for 2013, based on the current interest rate and credit environment, is that portfolio yield will decline slightly as a result of reinvestment rates that are lower than the yield on maturing securities as well as the impact of the sales of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses. However, the Company has increased its investment in certain higher yielding asset classes, such as commercial whole loans and a modest amount of emerging markets and high-yield securities.
Year ended December 31, 2011 compared to the year ended December 31, 2010
Total net investment income declined largely due to equity securities, trading, resulting from a market decline of the underlying investment funds supporting the Japanese variable annuity products and net outflows, partially offset by the Japanese yen strengthening in comparison to the euro. Also contributing to the decline was lower income on fixed maturities resulting from the proceeds from sales being reinvested at lower rates. These declines were partially offset by an increase in limited partnership and other alternative investment income due to additional allocations to this asset class and strong private equity and real estate returns, as well as an increase in mortgage loan income due to additional investments in commercial whole loans.
Net Realized Capital Gains (Losses)
 
 
For the years ended December 31,
(Before-tax)
 
2012
 
2011
 
2010
Gross gains on sales
 
$
877

 
$
693

 
$
836

Gross losses on sales
 
(441
)
 
(384
)
 
(522
)
Net OTTI losses recognized in earnings [1]
 
(349
)
 
(174
)
 
(434
)
Valuation allowances on mortgage loans
 
14

 
24

 
(154
)
Japanese fixed annuity contract hedges, net [2]
 
(36
)
 
3

 
27

Periodic net coupon settlements on credit derivatives/Japan
 
(10
)
 
(10
)
 
(17
)
Results of variable annuity hedge program
 
 
 
 
 
 
U.S. GMWB derivatives, net
 
519

 
(397
)
 
89

U.S. macro hedge program
 
(340
)
 
(216
)
 
(445
)
Total U.S. program
 
179

 
(613
)
 
(356
)
International program
 
(1,490
)
 
775

 
11

Total results of variable annuity hedge program
 
(1,311
)
 
162

 
(345
)
Other, net [3]
 
545

 
(459
)
 
(2
)
Net realized capital gains (losses), before-tax
 
$
(711
)
 
$
(145
)
 
$
(611
)
[1]
Includes $177 of intent-to-sell impairments relating to the sales of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses for the year ended December 31, 2012.
[2]
Relates to the Japanese fixed annuity products (adjustment of product liability for changes in spot currency exchange rates, related derivative hedging instruments, excluding net period coupon settlements, and Japan FVO securities).
[3]
Primarily consists of non-qualifying derivatives, transactional foreign currency re-valuation associated with the internal reinsurance of the Japan variable annuity business, which is offset in AOCI, and Japan 3Win related foreign currency swaps.
Details on the Company’s net realized capital gains and losses are as follows:
Gross gains and losses on sales
•
Gross gains and losses on sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 were predominately from investment grade corporate securities, municipal bonds, mortgage backed securities and U.S. Treasuries. These sales were the result of tactical portfolio management in order to increase allocations to higher yielding securities as well as to maintain duration targets.
•
Gross gains and losses on sales for the year ended December 31, 2011 were predominately from investment grade corporate securities, U.S. Treasuries, municipal bonds and commercial real estate related securities. These sales were the result of reinvestment into spread product well-positioned for modest economic growth, as well as the purposeful reduction of certain exposures.

74

•
Gross gains and losses on sales for the year ended December 31, 2010 were predominately from sales of investment grade corporate securities in order to take advantage of attractive market opportunities, as well as sales of U.S. Treasuries related to tactical repositioning of the portfolio.
Net OTTI losses
•
Includes $177 of intent-to-sell impairments for the year ended December 31, 2012, relating to the sales of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses. For further information, see Other-Than-Temporary Impairments within the Investment Portfolio Risks and Risk Management section of the MD&A.
Valuation allowances on mortgage loans
•
For further information, see Valuation Allowances on Mortgage Loans within the Investment Portfolio Risks and Risk Management section of the MD&A.
Variable annuity hedge program
•
For the year ended December 31, 2012 the gain on U.S. GMWB related derivatives, net, was primarily driven by liability model assumption updates of $274 , gains of $106 related to outperformance of underlying actively managed funds compared to their respective indices, and gains of $83 driven by lower equity market volatility. The loss on the U.S. macro hedge program for the year ended December 31, 2012 was primarily driven by losses of $167 related to the passage of time, losses of $118 due to an improvement in domestic equity markets, and losses of $60 related to a decrease in equity market volatility. The loss on the international program for the year ended December 31, 2012 was primarily driven by losses of $795 related to an improvement in global equity markets and losses of $672 related to depreciation of the Japanese yen in relation to the euro and the U.S. dollar.
•
For the year ended December 31, 2011 the loss on U.S. GMWB related derivatives, net, was primarily due to a decrease in long-term interest rates that resulted in a charge of $283 and a higher interest rate volatility that resulted in a charge of $84 . The loss on the U.S. macro hedge program for the year ended December 31, 2011 was primarily driven by the passage of time and a decrease in equity market volatility since the purchase date of certain options during the fourth quarter. The gain associated with the international program for the year ended December 31, 2011 was primarily driven by the Japanese yen strengthening, a decline in global equity markets, and a decrease in interest rates.
•
For the year ended December 31, 2010 the gain on U.S. GMWB related derivatives, net, was primarily due to liability model assumption updates of $159 , gains of $118 related to lower implied market volatility, and gains of $104 related to outperformance of the underlying actively managed funds as compared to their respective indices. These gains were partially offset by losses of $158 due to a general decrease in long-term interest rates and losses of $90 related to an improvement in domestic equity markets. The net loss on the U.S. macro hedge program for the year ended December 31, 2010 was primarily the result of an improvement in domestic equity markets and the impact of trading activity.
Other, net
•
Other, net gain for the year ended December 31, 2012 was primarily related to gains of $313 on credit derivatives due to credit spread tightening, gains of $269 on transactional foreign currency re-valuation associated with the internal reinsurance of the Japan variable annuity business, which is offset in AOCI, and gains of $96 on interest derivatives largely driven by the de-designation of the cash flow hedges associated with bonds included in the sale of Individual Life and Retirement Plans businesses. For further information on the business dispositions, see Note 2 of the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements. These gains were partially offset by losses of $111 related to Japan 3Win foreign currency swaps primarily driven by the strengthening of the currency basis swap spread between the U.S. dollar and Japanese yen and the decline in U.S. interest rates.
•
Other, net loss for the year ended December 31, 2011 was primarily due to losses of $148 on credit derivatives driven by credit spread widening and losses of $141 on transactional foreign currency re-valuation associated with the internal reinsurance of the Japan variable annuity business, which is offset in AOCI. Additionally losses of $94 for the year ended December 31, 2011 resulted from equity futures and options used to hedge equity market risk in the investment portfolio due to an increase in equity market during the hedged period. Also included were losses of $69 on Japan 3Win foreign currency swaps primarily driven by a decrease in long-term U.S. interest rates.
•
Other, net loss for the year ended December 31, 2010 was primarily due to a loss of $326 on transactional foreign currency re-valuation associated with the internal reinsurance of the Japan variable annuity business, which is offset in AOCI, partially offset by gains of $217 on credit derivatives driven by credit spread tightening, and gains of $59 on interest rate derivatives used to manage portfolio duration driven by a decline in long-term interest rates.

75


PROPERTY & CASUALTY COMMERCIAL
Underwriting Summary
2012
2011
2010
Written premiums
$
6,209

$
6,176

$
5,796

Change in unearned premium reserve
(50
)
49

52

Earned premiums
6,259

6,127

5,744

Losses and loss adjustment expenses
 
 
 
Current accident year before catastrophes
4,178

4,139

3,579

Current accident year catastrophes
325

320

152

Prior accident years
72

125

(361
)
Total losses and loss adjustment expenses
4,575

4,584

3,370

Amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs
927

917

905

Underwriting expenses
925

887

855

Dividends to policyholders
14

18

5

Underwriting gain (loss)
(182
)
(279
)
609

Net servicing income
17

13

9

Net investment income
924

910

935

Net realized capital gains (losses)
67

(50
)
3

Goodwill impairment
—

(30
)
—

Other expenses
(115
)
(151
)
(147
)
Income from continuing operations before income taxes
711

413

1,409

Income tax expense
159

37

414

Income from continuing operations, net of tax
552

376

995

Income (loss) from discontinued operations, net of tax [1]
(5
)
150

12

Net income
$
547

$
526

$
1,007

[1]
Represents the income from operations and sale of Specialty Risk Services (“SRS”). For additional information, see Note 20 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Premium Measures [1]
2012
2011
2010
New business premium
$
968

$
1,097

$
1,122

Standard commercial lines policy count retention
83
%
82
%
84
%
Standard commercial lines renewal written pricing increase (decrease)
8
%
4
%
1
%
Standard commercial lines renewal earned pricing increase (decrease)
6
%
2
%
—
%
Standard commercial lines policies in-force as of end of period
1,263,343

1,253,642

1,211,762

[1]
Standard commercial lines represents the Company’s small commercial and middle market property and casualty lines.

76

Ratios
2012
2011
2010
Loss and loss adjustment expense ratio
 
 
 
Current accident year before catastrophes
66.8

67.6

62.3

Current accident year catastrophes
5.2

5.2

2.7

Prior accident years
1.2

2.0

(6.3
)
Total loss and loss adjustment expense ratio
73.1

74.8

58.7

Expense ratio
29.6

29.4

30.7

Policyholder dividend ratio
0.2

0.3

0.1

Combined ratio
102.9

104.6

89.4

Catastrophe ratio
 
 
 
Current accident year
5.2

5.2

2.7

Prior accident years
(0.6
)
0.2

—

Total catastrophe ratio
4.6

5.4

2.7

Combined ratio before catastrophes
98.3

99.1

86.7

Non-catastrophe prior year development
1.7

1.8

(6.3
)
Combined ratio before catastrophes and prior accident year development
96.6

97.3

93.0

Other revenues [1]
$
102

$
97

$
96

[1]
Represents servicing revenues

Year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011
Net income increased in 2012 primarily due to improvements in underwriting results, driven by an increase in earned premiums and lower unfavorable prior year development, and improvements in net realized capital gains (losses), mainly on derivatives. This was offset by the gain on sale of SRS which occurred in 2011 .
Current accident year catastrophe losses in 2012 of $325 , pre-tax, included Storm Sandy and thunderstorms and tornadoes in the Midwest and South. In 2011 , catastrophes of $320 , pre-tax, primarily included severe thunderstorms and tornadoes in the Midwest and Southeast, Hurricane Irene in the Northeast, Tropical Storm Lee, and winter storms in the Northeast and Midwest.
Unfavorable prior year development declined in 2012, primarily due to lower strengthening on workers' compensation reserves. For additional information regarding prior accident years reserve development, including reserve (releases) strengthenings by reserve line, see the Property and Casualty Insurance Product Reserves, Net of Reinsurance section within Critical Accounting Estimates.
Earned premiums increased in 2012 primarily due to improvements in workers’ compensation, driven by renewal earned pricing increases, strong policy count retention and an increase in policies-in-force. The earned pricing changes were primarily a reflection of written pricing changes over the last year. Renewal written pricing increased across all standard commercial lines driven by improving market conditions.
Net realized capital gains (losses) improved primarily due to gains on derivatives as a result of credit spreads tightening. For additional information, see the Investment Results section within Key Performance Measures and Ratios.
Property & Casualty Commercial's combined ratio before catastrophes and prior year development improved slightly primarily due to lower non-catastrophe property losses. Workers' compensation frequency has been improving since recognizing the increase in the latter six months of 2011, while severity has moderated and earned pricing has increased.
The effective tax rate, in both periods, differs from the U.S. Federal statutory rate primarily due to permanent differences related to investments in tax exempt securities. In addition, due to the availability of additional tax planning strategies, the Company released the valuation allowance associated with investment realized capital losses in 2011. For further discussion, see Income Taxes within Note 14 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

77

Year ended December 31, 2011 compared to the year ended December 31, 2010
Net income decreased in 2011 , as compared to the prior year, primarily due to a decrease in underwriting results due to higher current accident year losses, including catastrophes, and unfavorable prior accident years development in 2011 compared to favorable prior accident years development in 2010 . The decrease in underwriting results was partially offset by the net realized capital gain on the sale of SRS. The annual goodwill assessment for the Property & Casualty Commercial reporting unit resulted in a write-down of goodwill of $30, pre-tax for the year ended December 31, 2011 . For further discussion, see Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets within Note 9 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Current accident year catastrophe losses increased $168, pre-tax, from 2010 to 2011 . In 2011 , catastrophes primarily included severe thunderstorms and tornadoes in the Midwest and Southeast, Hurricane Irene in the Northeast, Tropical Storm Lee, and winter storms, earlier in the year, in the Northeast and Midwest. In 2010 , catastrophes primarily included tornadoes, thunderstorms and hail events in the Midwest, Plains States and the Southeast and winter storms in the Mid-Atlantic and Northeast.
For information regarding prior accident years reserve development, including reserve (releases) strengthenings by reserve line, see the Property and Casualty Insurance Product Reserves, Net of Reinsurance section within Critical Accounting Estimates.
The increase in earned premiums in 2011 , is primarily due to improvements in workers’ compensation, driven by higher new business premium, renewal earned pricing increases and an increase in policies-in-force. The earned pricing changes were primarily a reflection of written pricing changes over the last year. Renewal written pricing increased for all standard commercial lines driven by improving market conditions.
Current accident year losses and loss adjustment expenses before catastrophes increased, due primarily to the increase in earned premiums for workers’ compensation, as well as an increase in the current accident year loss and loss adjustment expense ratio before catastrophes. The ratio increased primarily due to loss costs outpacing earned pricing increases driven by an increase in workers’ compensation claim frequency, partially offset by moderating severity, resulting in an increase in current accident year reserve strengthening.
Underwriting expenses increased in 2011 , driven by an increase in technology costs, partially offset by a decrease in compensation related costs. The year ended December 31, 2011 included a $12 release of reserves for other state funds and taxes, while the year ended December 31, 2010 included strengthening of $20, which was due to an increase in the assessment for New York state funds and taxes. The change in dividends to policyholders is due to a decrease in 2010 of dividends payable primarily for workers’ compensation policyholders.
Net realized capital losses increased primarily due to losses on derivatives, partially offset by lower impairments. For additional information, see the Investment Results section within Key Performance Measures and Ratios.
The effective tax rate, in both periods, differs from the U.S. Federal statutory rate primarily due to permanent differences related to investments in tax exempt securities. In addition, due to the availability of additional tax planning strategies, the Company released the valuation allowance associated with investment realized capital losses in 2011. For further discussion, see Income Taxes within Note 14 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.


78

CONSUMER MARKETS
Operating Summary
2012
2011
2010
Written premiums
$
3,630

$
3,675

$
3,886

Change in unearned premium reserve
(6
)
(72
)
(61
)
Earned premiums
3,636

3,747

3,947

Losses and loss adjustment expenses
 
 
 
Current accident year before catastrophes
2,390

2,536

2,737

Current accident year catastrophes
381

425

300

Prior accident years
(141
)
(75
)
(86
)
Total losses and loss adjustment expenses
2,630

2,886

2,951

Amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs
332

337

371

Underwriting expenses
581

572

613

Underwriting gain (loss)
93

(48
)
12

Net servicing income
23

19

35

Net investment income
159

187

187

Net realized capital gains (losses)
12

(11
)
—

Other expenses
(56
)
(162
)
(66
)
Income (loss) before income taxes
231

(15
)
168

Income tax expense (benefit)
65

(22
)
43

Net income
$
166

$
7

$
125

Written Premiums
2012
2011
2010
Product Line
 
 
 
Automobile
$
2,514

$
2,562

$
2,745

Homeowners
1,116

1,113

1,141

Total
$
3,630

$
3,675

$
3,886

Earned Premiums
 
 
 
Product Line
 
 
 
Automobile
$
2,526

$
2,619

$
2,806

Homeowners
1,110

1,128

1,141

Total
$
3,636

$
3,747

$
3,947


79

Premium Measures
2012
2011
2010
Policies in force at year end
 
 
 
Automobile
2,015,323

2,080,535

2,226,351

Homeowners
1,319,101

1,338,676

1,426,107

Total policies in force at year end
3,334,424

3,419,211

3,652,458

New business premium
 
 
 
Automobile
$
332

$
298

$
311

Homeowners
$
117

$
91

$
106

Policy count retention
 
 
 
Automobile
85
%
83
%
83
%
Homeowners
86
%
84
%
85
%
Renewal written pricing increase
 
 
 
Automobile
4
%
5
%
6
%
Homeowners
6
%
8
%
10
%
Renewal earned pricing increase
 
 
 
Automobile
5
%
6
%
5
%
Homeowners
7
%
9
%
7
%
Ratios and Supplemental Data
2012
2011
2010
Loss and loss adjustment expense ratio
 
 
 
Current accident year before catastrophes
65.7

67.7

69.4

Current accident year catastrophes
10.5

11.3

7.6

Prior accident years
(3.9
)
(2.0
)
(2.2
)
Total loss and loss adjustment expense ratio
72.3

77.0

74.8

Expense ratio
25.1

24.3

24.9

Combined ratio
97.4

101.3

99.7

Catastrophe ratio
 
 
 
Current accident year
10.5

11.3

7.6

Prior accident years
(0.8
)
0.7

0.3

Total catastrophe ratio
9.7

12.0

7.8

Combined ratio before catastrophes
87.8

89.3

91.9

Non-catastrophe prior year development
(3.1
)
(2.7
)
(2.4
)
Combined ratio before catastrophes and prior accident year development
90.8

91.9

94.3

Other revenues [1]
155

156

172

[1]
Represents servicing revenues.
Product Combined Ratios
2012
2011
2010
Automobile
97.6

95.3

98.0

Homeowners
97.0

115.8

104.3

Total
97.4

101.3

99.7


80

Year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011
Net income improved relative to the comparable prior period, primarily due to more favorable prior accident year reserve development, lower current accident year catastrophes, and a $73 after-tax charge in 2011, related to the write off of capitalized costs associated with a policy administration software project that was discontinued.
Current accident year catastrophe losses for 2012 were $381 , pre-tax. In 2012, catastrophes primarily included Storm Sandy in the Northeast, severe tornadoes and thunderstorms in the Midwest, the South and Colorado, as well as tornadoes and thunderstorms spanning from the Ohio Valley to the Mid-Atlantic. In 2011, catastrophes losses of $425 , pre-tax, primarily included severe tornado, hail and thunderstorm events in the Midwest and Southeast and Hurricane Irene.
Favorable prior year development of $141 , pre-tax, in 2012 compared with $75 , pre-tax, in 2011, as a result of more favorable development in homeowners' and catastrophe losses. For additional information regarding prior accident years reserve development, see the Property and Casualty Insurance Product Reserves, Net of Reinsurance section within Critical Accounting Estimates.
Earned premiums decreased in auto and were down modestly for homeowners, as a decline in renewal written premium more than offset an increase in new business written premium. Compared to 2011, the number of policies in-force decreased for both auto and home, driven by non-renewals. Policy count retention for auto and home increased as moderating renewal written price increases improved the Company's price competitiveness. Changes in underwriting practices and service operations have also contributed to the improvement in retention.
Auto and home new business written premium increased primarily due to more competitive new business pricing in AARP Direct and an increase in the sale of the AARP auto product through independent agents. The lower auto and homeowners renewal earned pricing in 2012 was primarily due to lower rate increases. For both auto and homeowners, an increase in earned pricing was partially offset by a shift in the mix of business by territory, class plan and pricing tier to policies with lower average earned premium, such that increases in average earned premium were less than the increases in earned pricing.
Current accident year losses and loss adjustment expenses before catastrophes decreased primarily due to lower earned premiums and a decrease in the overall current accident year loss and loss adjustment expense ratio before catastrophes. In 2012, the current accident year loss and loss adjustment expense ratio before catastrophes decreased primarily due to a decrease in home, partially offset by an increase in auto. The decrease for home was primarily due to earned pricing increases and a decrease in the frequency of non-catastrophe weather claims. The increase for auto was primarily due to higher loss cost severity for first party physical damage and third party property damage claims, largely offset by the effect of earned pricing increases.
The effective tax rate, in both periods, differs from the U.S. Federal statutory rate primarily due to permanent differences related to investments in tax exempt securities. For further discussion, see Income Taxes within Note 14 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

81

Year ended December 31, 2011 compared to the year ended December 31, 2010
Net income decreased in 2011, as compared to the prior year, due to higher current accident year catastrophes and a $73, after-tax, charge, recorded in other expenses, related to the write off of capitalized costs associated with a discontinued policy administration software project.
Current accident year catastrophe losses increased from 2010 to 2011, driven by an increase in tornado and thunderstorm losses in the Midwest and Southeast of approximately $140, pre-tax. In 2011, catastrophes primarily included severe tornadoes, hail and thunderstorm events in the Midwest and Southeast and Hurricane Irene. In 2010, catastrophes primarily included tornadoes, hail and thunderstorm events in the Midwest, Plains States and the Southeast, as well as, a severe wind and hail storm event in Arizona.
Earned premiums decreased in auto and were down modestly for homeowners. For both auto and homeowners, non-renewal of existing policies more than offset the impacts of new business written premium and renewal earned pricing increases. Compared to 2010, the number of policies in-force as of December 31, 2011 decreased for both auto and home, driven by non-renewals.
Auto new business written premium decreased, primarily due to the effect of written pricing increases and underwriting actions that lowered the policy issue rate in Agency. Home new business written premium decreased in both AARP and Agency driven largely by the effect of written pricing increases. While auto and home new business written premium declined for the full year, new business increased in the latter part of the year with new business growth in both channels in the fourth quarter of 2011.
The higher auto renewal earned pricing in 2011 was due to rate increases and the effect of policyholders purchasing newer vehicle models in place of older models. Average renewal earned premium per policy for auto increased modestly as renewal earned pricing increases were partially offset by the effect of a continued shift to more preferred market business which has lower average earned premium. Homeowners’ renewal earned pricing increases were due to rate increases and increased coverage amounts. For both auto and home, the Company has increased rates in certain states for certain classes of business to maintain profitability in the face of rising loss costs.
Current accident year losses and loss adjustment expenses before catastrophes decreased primarily due to lower earned premiums. The overall current accident year loss and loss adjustment expense ratio before catastrophes decreased during 2011 as a 2.6 point decrease for auto was partially offset by a 1.2 point increase for home. For auto, the effect of earned pricing increases and lower estimated frequency on auto liability claims was partially offset by higher auto physical damage severity. For home, an increase in the frequency of non-catastrophe weather claims was partially offset by the effect of earned pricing increases.
Amortization of deferred acquisition costs decreased largely due to a decline in commissions paid to agents due to lower Agency earned premium. The decrease in underwriting expenses was primarily driven by a decrease in reserves for other state funds and taxes. The decline in net servicing income in 2011 was largely due to lower contact center transaction volumes handled as a third party administrator under the AARP Health program.
For information regarding prior accident years reserve development, including reserve (releases) strengthenings by reserve line, see the Property and Casualty Insurance Product Reserves, Net of Reinsurance section within Critical Accounting Estimates.
The effective tax rate, in both periods, differs from the U.S. Federal statutory rate primarily due to permanent differences related to investments in tax exempt securities. For further discussion, see Income Taxes within Note 14 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.


82

PROPERTY & CASUALTY OTHER OPERATIONS
Underwriting Summary
2012
2011
2010
Written premiums
$
8

$
1

$
2

Change in unearned premium reserve
10

1

1

Earned premiums
(2
)
—

1

Losses and loss adjustment expenses
 
 
 
Prior accident years
65

317

251

Total losses and loss adjustment expenses
65

317

251

Underwriting expenses
33

27

26

Underwriting losses
(100
)
(344
)
(276
)
Net investment income
149

151

163

Net realized capital gains (losses)
17

(1
)
24

Other income (expense)
5

3

(4
)
Income (loss) before income taxes
71

(191
)
(93
)
Income tax expense (benefit)
14

(74
)
(40
)
Net income (loss)
$
57

$
(117
)
$
(53
)

Year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011
The net income (loss) in Property & Casualty Other Operations improved for the year ended December 31, 2012 . As a result of annual reviews of asbestos and environmental liabilities, the company strengthened its net asbestos reserves by $48, pre-tax, and environmental reserves by $3, pre-tax, as compared to $290, pre-tax, and $19, pre-tax, respectively, in 2011.
For information on net asbestos and environmental reserves, see Property & Casualty Other Operations Claims within the Property and Casualty Insurance Product Reserves, Net of Reinsurance section in Critical Accounting Estimates.
Year ended December 31, 2011 compared to the year ended December 31, 2010
The net loss in Property & Casualty Other Operations increased in 2011, as compared to 2010, primarily due to reserve strengthening of $290, pre-tax, in 2011, resulting from the company’s annual review of its asbestos liabilities. In the comparable prior year period, the reserve strengthening was $169, pre-tax.
Partially offsetting the increase in asbestos reserve strengthening was lower reserve strengthening of net environmental reserves of $19, pre-tax, in 2011 compared to $62, pre-tax, in 2010, resulting from the company’s annual review of its environmental liabilities.
For further information, see Property & Casualty Other Operations Claims within the Property and Casualty Insurance Product Reserves, Net of Reinsurance section in Critical Accounting Estimates.


83

GROUP BENEFITS
Operating Summary
2012
2011
2010
Premiums and other considerations
$
3,810

$
4,147

$
4,278

Net investment income
405

411

429

Net realized capital gains (losses)
40

(3
)
46

Total revenues
4,255

4,555

4,753

Benefits, losses and loss adjustment expenses
3,029

3,306

3,331

Amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs
33

35

40

Insurance operating costs and other expenses
1,033

1,121

1,128

Total benefits, losses and expenses
4,095

4,462

4,499

Income before income taxes
160

93

254

Income tax expense
31

1

66

Net income
$
129

$
92

$
188

Premiums and other considerations
 
 
 
Fully insured — ongoing premiums
$
3,745

$
4,036

$
4,166

Buyout premiums
3

49

58

Other
62

62

54

Total premiums and other considerations
3,810

4,147

4,278

Fully insured ongoing sales, excluding buyouts
$
405

$
505

$
583

Ratios, excluding buyouts
 
 
 
Loss ratio
79.5
%
79.5
%
77.6
%
Loss ratio, excluding financial institutions
84.1
%
84.5
%
82.8
%
Expense ratio
28.0
%
28.2
%
27.7
%
Expense ratio, excluding financial institutions
24.1
%
23.7
%
23.3
%
After-tax margin
 
 
 
After-tax margin (excluding buyouts)
3.0
%
2.0
%
4.0
%
Effect of net realized gains (losses), net of tax on after-tax margin
0.6
%
0.1
%
0.5
%
After-tax margin (excluding buyouts), excluding realized gains (losses)
2.4
%
1.9
%
3.5
%
Group Benefits has a block of financial institution business that is subject to a profit sharing arrangement with a third party. This business comprised approximately 8% to 10% of the segment’s 2012 , 2011 and 2010 premiums and other considerations (excluding buyouts). With respect to the segment’s core earnings, the financial institution business comprised 2% for 2012 , 2% for 2011 , 6% for 2010 , excluding a one-time payment to a third party administrator in 2011.

84

Year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011
Net income, as compared to the prior year period, increased for the year ended December 31, 2012 . While realized capital gains improved in current year, this was partially offset by a decrease in fully insured ongoing premiums, due to the lower sales and persistency resulting from the Company's pricing initiatives as well as the competitive market environment.
The change in insurance operating costs and other expenses is due to lower commission payments as a result of lower sales and a onetime payment to a third party administrator in the first quarter of 2011.
Group Benefits' loss ratio remained flat for both years 2012 and 2011. Loss experience in 2012 reflects stable incidence trends during the year, although elevated when compared to historical levels, and a continuation of the slightly improving claim terminations in group long-term disability that emerged in mid-2012. Group life claims experience deteriorated modestly compared with 2011 but remained more favorable than group long-term disability.
The increase in Group Benefits' after-tax margin (excluding buyouts), excluding realized gains (losses), was primarily due to lower insurance operating costs and other expenses, partially offset by the impact of lower premiums and other considerations due to lower sales and persistency.
The effective tax rate, in both periods, differs from the U.S. Federal statutory rate primarily due to permanent differences related to investments in tax exempt securities. For further discussion, see Income Taxes within Note 14 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Year ended December 31, 2011 compared to the year ended December 31, 2010
Net income decreased, relative to prior year, primarily due to higher mortality and morbidity driven by elevated incidence and lower claim terminations, and to a lesser extent, a decrease in fully insured ongoing premiums, driven by lower sales over the past year, as well as, from a challenging economic environment.
The decrease in Group Benefits’ after-tax margin (excluding buyouts), excluding realized gains (losses), was primarily due to higher mortality and morbidity driven by elevated incidence and lower claim terminations, and to a lesser extent, a decrease in fully insured ongoing premiums, driven by lower sales over the past year, as well as from a challenging economic environment.
The effective tax rate, in both periods, differs from the U.S. Federal statutory rate primarily due to permanent differences related to investments in tax exempt securities. In addition, due to the availability of additional tax planning strategies, the Company released the valuation allowance associated with investment realized capital losses in 2011 . For further discussion, see Income Taxes within Note 14 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

85

MUTUAL FUNDS
Operating Summary
2012
2011
2010
Fee income and other
$
599

$
649

$
664

Net investment loss
(3
)
(3
)
(8
)
Net realized capital gains
—

1

—

Total revenues
596

647

656

Amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs
35

47

51

Insurance operating costs and other expenses
452

448

458

Total benefits, losses and expenses
487

495

509

Income from continuing operations, before income taxes
109

152

147

Income tax expense
38

54

52

Income from continuing operations
71

98

95

Income from discontinued operations, net of tax [1]
—

—

37

Net income
$
71

$
98

$
132

[1]
Represents income from discontinued operations, net of tax of Hartford Investments Canada Corporation (“HICC”). For additional information, see Note 20 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Assets Under Management
2012
2011
2010
Retail mutual fund assets
$
43,149

$
40,228

$
48,753

Investment only mutual fund assets
16,598

16,140

16,634

Other plan assets
1,864

1,557

1,472

Mutual fund assets
61,611

57,925

66,859

Annuity mutual fund assets
26,036

27,613

33,627

Total AUM
$
87,647

$
85,538

$
100,486

 
 
 
 
Retail Mutual Funds
 
 
 
AUM, beginning of period
$
40,228

$
48,753

$
42,829

Sales
8,559

10,876

12,732

Redemptions
(10,947
)
(16,431
)
(11,703
)
Net flows
(2,388
)
(5,555
)
1,029

Change in market value and other
5,309

(2,970
)
4,895

AUM, end of period
$
43,149

$
40,228

$
48,753

 
 
 
 
Return on Assets
 
 
 
ROA
8.2

10.5

13.7

Effect of restructuring, net of tax
0.3

—

—

Effect of net realized gains, net of tax and DAC
—

—

3.9

ROA, core earnings
8.5

10.5

9.8


Year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011
Net income, as compared to the prior year period, decreased for the year ended December 31, 2012 primarily due to lower fee income and other driven by lower average AUM and higher distribution and marketing expenses in 2012 compared to 2011 . AUM increased modestly reflecting the improving performance of the Company's mutual funds in the equity markets largely offset by negative net flows primarily in mutual funds supporting the Company's variable annuity products. Retail net outflows decreased in 2012 compared to 2011 as redemption rates continued to trend lower compared to 2011 , although new business sales activity decreased in 2012 compared to 2011 . Total AUM is expected to be impacted by a planned redemption of approximately $1.5 billion in the second quarter of 2013.
Year ended December 31, 2011 compared to the year ended December 31, 2010
Net income decreased in 2011 primarily due to discontinued operations. The decline in income from discontinued operations in 2011 compared to 2010 is due to the sale of the Canadian mutual fund operations, which closed in December  2010 . Net income from continuing operations increased compared to 2010 due to a decline in expenses largely due to a capital infusion to the Money Market Funds in the third quarter of 2010 .

86

TALCOTT RESOLUTION
Operating Summary
2012
2011
2010
Earned premiums [1]
$
(10
)
$
129

$
137

Fee income and other [1]
3,604

3,830

3,843

Net investment income (loss)
 
 
 
Securities available-for-sale and other
2,572

2,593

2,577

Equity securities trading [2]
4,565

(1,359
)
(774
)
Total net investment income
7,137

1,234

1,803

Net realized capital gains (losses)
(972
)
15

(750
)
Total revenues
9,759

5,208

5,033

Benefits, losses and loss adjustment expenses
2,951

3,535

3,124

Benefits, losses and loss adjustment expenses — returns credited on international variable annuities [2]
4,564

(1,359
)
(774
)
Amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs
661

1,108

325

Insurance operating costs and other expenses
1,451

1,504

1,475

Reinsurance loss on disposition, including goodwill impairment of $224
415

—

—

Total benefits, losses and expenses
10,042

4,788

4,150

Income (loss) from continuing operations, before income taxes
(283
)
420

883

Income tax expense (benefit)
(284
)
(120
)
205

Income from continuing operations
1

540

678

Loss from discontinued operations, net of tax [3]
—

—

(6
)
Net income
$
1

$
540

$
672

Assets Under Management
 
 
 
Variable annuity account value
$
94,371

$
99,922

$
116,520

Fixed Market Value Adjusted annuity and other account value
14,755

16,417

16,819

Institutional annuity account value [4]
17,744

19,330

19,674

Other account value [5]
102,429

100,937

100,804

Total account value [4]
$
228,143

$
235,310

$
252,397

Variable Annuities - Account Value Roll Forward
 
 
 
Account value, beginning of period
$
99,922

$
116,520

$
118,032

Net flows
(13,594
)
(13,400
)
(11,977
)
Change in market value and other
11,303

(4,831
)
6,429

Effect of currency translation
(3,260
)
1,633

4,036

Account value, end of period
$
94,371

$
99,922

$
116,520

[1] Includes earned premiums, fees and other related to the Retirement Plans business of $368 , $380 and $359 and the Individual Life business of
$866 , $899 and $856 , for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
[2] Includes investment income and mark-to-market effects of equity securities, trading, supporting the international variable annuity business, which
are classified in net investment income with corresponding amounts credited to policyholders within benefits, losses and loss adjustment expenses.
[3] Represents loss from discontinued operations, net of tax, of Hartford Advantage Investment, Ltd. (“HAIL”). For additional information, see Note 20
of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
[4] Included in the balance is approximately $(1.2) billion, $(1.3) billion and $(1.4) billion at December 31, 2012, December 31, 2011 and December
31, 2010, respectively, related to an intra-segment funding agreement which is eliminated in consolidation.
[5] Other account value includes $37.4 billion, $13.2 billion and $51.8 billion, respectively, at December 31, 2012 for the Private Placement Life
Insurance, Individual Life and Retirement Plans businesses.

87

In the fourth quarter of 2012, the Company made changes to its reporting segments to reflect the manner in which it is currently organized for purposes of making operating decisions and assessing performance. The Talcott Resolution (formerly Life Other Operations) Operating Summary currently includes the operating results of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses that were sold in January 2013. For further discussion of these transactions, see Note 2 - Business Dispositions of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011
Net income, as compared to the prior year period, decreased for the year ended December 31, 2012 primarily due to net realized capital losses as compared to net realized capital gains in the prior period and the estimated reinsurance loss on disposition of the Individual Life business, including an after tax goodwill impairment charge of $146. The estimate is subject to change pending final determination of net assets sold, transaction costs, and other adjustments. Restructuring costs of $44, after-tax in 2012 also contributed to the decrease in net income as compared to the prior year period as there were no restructuring costs in 2011. An Unlock benefit in 2012 partially offset the decrease in net income as compared to the prior year period. In addition, benefits, losses and loss adjustment expenses, decreased as compared to the prior year period, reflecting an improvement in equity market performance. For related discussion of the goodwill impairment, see MD&A – Critical Accounting Estimates, MD&A - Corporate and Note 9 - Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. For further discussion of the reinsurance loss on disposition, see Note 2 - Business Dispositions of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Net income of the Retirement Plans business decreased, as compared to the prior year, to a net loss of $39 in 2012 from net income of $3 in 2011 primarily due to an increase in net realized capital losses and restructuring costs of $14, after-tax in 2012 associated with the sale of the business. Net income (loss) of the Individual Life business decreased, as compared to the prior year, to a net loss of $172 in 2012 from net income of $114 in 2011 primarily due to the reinsurance loss on disposition, including an after tax goodwill impairment charge of $146, unfavorable mortality, and restructuring costs of $25, after-tax in 2012 associated with the sale of the business.
The net increase in realized capital losses was primarily due to losses in the variable annuity hedge program. Variable annuity hedge program losses for the year ended December 31, 2012 were $ 1,311 including international losses of $1,490 , compared to gains of $ 162 , including international gains of $775 for the prior year period. Net realized capital losses in 2012 also include intent-to-sell impairment losses of $177 related to the sales in January 2013 of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses. Total net impairment losses, including intent-to-sell impairment losses, increased to $247 in 2012 as compared to $117 for the prior year period. For further discussion of investment results and the results of the variable annuity hedge program, see MD&A – Investment Results, Net Investment Income (Loss) and Net Realized Capital Gains (Losses) within Key Performance Measures and Ratios.
Talcott Resolution's effective tax rate for 2012 differs from the statutory rate of 35% primarily due to permanent differences for separate account DRD. For further discussion of income taxes, see Note 14 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Account values for Talcott Resolution decreased to approximately $228 billion at December 31, 2012 from approximately $235 billion at December 31, 2011, due primarily to surrenders of approximately $10 billion in 2012 in the U.S. variable annuity block, largely offset by the impact of improved equity market performance. In 2012, the annualized full surrender rate on U.S. variable annuities rose to 10.9% compared to 9.3% in 2011 and the annualized full surrender rate on Japan variable annuities rose to 3.4% in 2012 from 2.6% in 2011.
The Company expects annuity account values and consequently earnings to continue to decline over time as fee income decreases due to surrenders, policyholder initiatives or potential transactions with third parties that will reduce the size of the related book of business. In addition, as the Individual Life and Retirement Plans sale transactions were structured as reinsurance transactions, account values associated with these businesses will no longer generate asset-based fee income following the January 2013 closings.
Year ended December 31, 2011 compared to the year ended December 31, 2010
Net income, as compared to the prior year period, decreased for December 31, 2011 primarily due to an Unlock charge in 2011 as compared to an Unlock benefit in 2010, partially offset by net realized capital gains in 2011 as compared to net realized capital losses in the prior year period. Benefits, losses and loss adjustment expenses increased in 2011 reflecting the decline in equity market performance however, these expenses were partially offset by the release of a reserve related to a Japan product. In addition, insurance operating costs and other expenses increased in 2011 due to costs associated with expected assessments related to the Executive Life Insurance Company of New York (“ELNY”) insolvency. Net income of the Retirement Plans business decreased, as compared to the prior year, to $3 in 2011 from $6 in 2010. Net income of the Individual Life business decreased, as compared to the prior year, to $114 in 2011 from $198 in 2010. For further discussion of the Unlock see MD&A – Critical Accounting Estimates.
The net realized capital gains in 2011 compared to net realized capital losses in 2010 were primarily due to gains in the variable annuity hedge program and lower net impairment losses. Variable annuity hedge program gains were $162 in 2011 compared to losses of $345 in 2010. For further discussion of investment results and the results of the variable annuity hedge program see MD&A - Investment Results, Net Investment Income (Loss) and Net Realized Capital Gains (Losses) within Key Performance Measures and Ratios.

88

Talcott Resolution's effective tax rate for 2011 differs from the statutory rate of 35% primarily due to permanent differences for separate account DRD and release of a valuation allowance on deferred tax benefits related to certain realized losses on securities that back certain institutional annuities. For further discussion of income taxes, see Note 14 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Account values decreased to approximately $235 billion at December 31, 2011 from approximately $252 billion at December 31, 2010, reflecting an increase in surrenders in the variable annuity block and declining equity market performance as compared to the prior year period.

89

CORPORATE
Operating Summary
2012
2011
2010
Earned premiums
$
—

$
—

$
2

Fee income [1]
167

209

187

Net investment income
31

23

81

Net realized capital gains (losses)
125

(96
)
66

Other revenue
1

—

(1
)
Total revenues
324

136

335

Benefits, losses and loss adjustment expenses
—

(3
)
(2
)
Insurance operating costs and other expenses
365

202

325

Loss on extinguishment of debt
910

—

—

Reinsurance loss on disposition, including goodwill impairment of $118
118

—

—

Interest expense
457

508

508

Total benefits, losses and expenses
1,850

707

831

Loss from continuing operations before income taxes
(1,526
)
(571
)
(496
)
Income tax benefit
(517
)
(201
)
(168
)
Loss from continuing operations, net of tax
(1,009
)
(370
)
(328
)
Loss from discontinued operations, net of tax [2]
—

(64
)
(107
)
Net loss
$
(1,009
)
$
(434
)
$
(435
)
[1]
Fee income includes the income associated with the sales of non-proprietary insurance products in the Company’s broker-dealer subsidiaries that has an offsetting commission expense in insurance operating costs and other expenses.
[2]
Represents the loss from operations and sale of Federal Trust Corporation. For additional information, see Note 20 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011
The net loss in Corporate deteriorated in 2012 primarily due to a loss on extinguishment of debt related to the repurchase of all outstanding 10% fixed-to-floating rate junior subordinated debentures due 2068 with a $1.75 billion aggregate principal amount all held by Allianz. The loss consisted of the premium associated with repurchasing the 10% Debentures at an amount greater than the face amount, the write-off of the unamortized discount and debt issuance costs related to the 10% Debentures and other costs related to the repurchase transaction.
Also in 2012, the Company recorded a reinsurance loss on disposition consisting of an impairment of goodwill related to the disposition of the Individual Life business. See Note 9 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information on the goodwill impairment.
In addition, insurance operating costs and other expenses increased as a result of restructuring and other costs related to the Company’s implementation of its strategic initiatives. See Note 21 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information on restructuring and other costs.
Partially offsetting the losses was an increase in net realized capital gains (losses), primarily due to gains on derivatives as a result of credit spreads tightening. For additional information on net realized capital gains, see the Investment Results section.
See Note 14 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for a reconciliation of the tax provision at the U.S. Federal statutory rate to the provision (benefit) for income taxes.
Year ended December 31, 2011 compared to the year ended December 31, 2010
The net loss in Corporate remained flat due to net realized capital losses in 2011, compared to gains in 2010, partially offset by a decrease in insurance operating costs and other expenses. The net realized capital losses in 2011 primarily relate to losses on derivatives.
Insurance operating costs and other expenses decreased primarily as a result of an accrual for a litigation settlement of $73, before-tax, in 2010, for a class action lawsuit related to structured settlements.
The loss from discontinued operations, net of tax, in 2011, is due to a net realized capital loss of $74, after-tax, from the disposition of Federal Trust Corporation. Loss from discontinued operations, net of tax, in 2010, primarily relates to goodwill impairment on Federal Trust Corporation of approximately $100, after-tax.
See Note 14 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for a reconciliation of the tax provision at the U.S. Federal statutory rate to the provision (benefit) for income taxes.

90

ENTERPRISE RISK MANAGEMENT
The Company has an enterprise risk management function (“ERM”) that is charged with providing analysis of the Company’s risks on an individual and aggregated basis and with ensuring that the Company’s risks remain within its risk appetite and tolerances. The Company has established the Enterprise Risk and Capital Committee (“ERCC”) that includes the Company’s CEO, Chief Financial Officer (“CFO”), Chief Investment Officer (“CIO”), Chief Risk Officer, the divisional Presidents and the General Counsel. The ERCC is responsible for managing the Company’s risks and overseeing the enterprise risk management program.
The Company categorizes its main risks as follows:
•
Insurance Risk
•
Operational Risk
•
Financial Risk
Insurance Risk Management
The Company categorizes its insurance risks across both property-casualty and life products. The Company's insurance operations are vested in the ability to add value through the effective underwriting, pooling, and pricing of insurance risks. As such, working under the direction of the Company's Chief Insurance Risk Officer (“CIRO”), the Company has developed a disciplined approach to insurance risk management that is well integrated into the organization's underwriting, pricing, reinsurance, claims, and capital management processes.
At the same time, the Company has policies and procedures to manage concentrations or correlations of insurance risk, including ERM policies governing the risks related to natural and man-made property catastrophes such as hurricanes, earthquakes, tornado/hailstorms, winter storms, pandemics, terrorism, and casualty catastrophes. The Company establishes risk limits to control potential loss and actively monitors the risk exposures as a percent of statutory surplus. The Company also uses reinsurance to transfer insurance risk to well-established and financially secure reinsurers (see Reinsurance Section). The Company's CIRO has enterprise responsibility for establishing and maintaining the framework, principles and guidelines of The Hartford's insurance risk management program.
Non-Catastrophic Insurance Risks
Non-catastrophic insurance risks exist within each of the Company's divisions and include, but are not limited to, the following:
•
Property: Risk of loss to personal or commercial property from automobile related accidents, weather, explosions, smoke, shaking, fire, theft, vandalism, inadequate installation, faulty equipment, collisions and falling objects, and/or machinery mechanical breakdown resulting in physical damage and other covered perils.
•
Liability: Risk of loss from automobile related accidents, uninsured and underinsured drivers, lawsuits from accidents, defective products, breach of warranty, negligent acts by professional practitioners, environmental claims, latent exposures, fraud, coercion, forgery, failure to fulfill obligations per contract surety, liability from errors and omissions, derivative lawsuits, and other securities actions and covered perils.
•
Mortality: Risk of loss from unexpected trends in insured deaths impacting timing of payouts from life insurance or annuity products, personal or commercial automobile related accidents, and death of employees or executives during the course of employment, while on disability, or while collecting workers compensation benefits.
•
Morbidity : Risk of loss to an insured from illness incurred during the course of employment or illness from other covered perils.
•
Disability: Risk of loss incurred from personal or commercial automobile related losses, accidents arising outside of the workplace, injuries or accidents incurred during the course of employment, or from equipment each loss resulting short term or long term disability payments.
•
Longevity: Risk of loss from increase life expectancy trends among policyholders receiving long term benefit payments or annuity payouts.

The Company's processes for managing these risks include disciplined underwriting protocols, exposure controls, sophisticated risk based pricing, risk modeling, risk transfer, and capital management strategies. The Company has established underwriting guidelines for both individual risks, including individual policy limits, and risks in the aggregate, including aggregate exposure limits by geographic zone and peril. Pricing indications for each line of business are set independent of the business by corporate actuarial and are integrated into the reserve review process to ensure consistency between pricing and reserving. Monthly reports track loss cost trends relative to pricing objectives within each state and product, and corporate actuarial provides an independent report to the Board on the Company's reserve position and loss cost trends.


91

Natural Catastrophe Risk
Natural catastrophe risk is defined as the exposure arising from natural phenomena (e.g., weather, earthquakes, wildfires, etc.) that create a concentration or aggregation of loss across the Company's insurance or asset portfolios. The Company uses both internal and third-party models to estimate the potential loss resulting from various catastrophe events and the potential financial impact those events would have on the Company's financial position and results of operations across the property-casualty, life, and asset management businesses. For natural catastrophe perils, the Company generally limits its estimated pre-tax loss as a result of natural catastrophes for property & casualty exposures from a single 250-year event to less than 30% of statutory surplus prior to reinsurance and to less than 15% of statutory surplus after reinsurance. The Company's modeled loss estimates are derived by averaging 21 modeled loss events representing a 250-year return period loss. For the peril of earthquake, the 21 events averaged to determine the modeled loss estimate include events occurring in California as well as the Northeastern, Southeastern, Northwestern, and Midwestern regions of the United States with associated magnitudes ranging from 6.9 to 8.6 on the Moment Magnitude scale. For the peril of hurricane, the 21 events averaged to determine the modeled loss estimate include category 3, 4 and 5 events in Florida, as well as other Gulf and Northeastern region landfalls.
While Enterprise Risk Management has a process to track and manage these limits, from time to time, the estimated loss to natural catastrophes from a single 250-year event prior to reinsurance may fluctuate above or below these limits due to changes in modeled loss estimates, exposures, or statutory surplus. Currently, the Company's estimated pre-tax loss to a single 250-year natural catastrophe event prior to reinsurance is less than 30% of the statutory surplus of the property and casualty insurance subsidiaries and the Company's estimated pre-tax loss net of reinsurance is less than 15% of statutory surplus of the property and casualty operations. The estimated 250 year pre-tax probable maximum losses from hurricane events are estimated to be $1.6 billion and $553, before and after reinsurance, respectively. The estimated 250 year pre-tax probable maximum loss from earthquake events is estimated to be $786 before reinsurance and $479 net of reinsurance. The loss estimates represent total property losses for hurricane events and property and workers compensation losses for earthquake events resulting from a single event. The estimates provided are based on 250-year return period loss estimates that have a 0.4% likelihood of being exceeded in any single year.
The net loss estimates provided above assume that the Company is able to recover all losses ceded to reinsurers under its reinsurance programs. There are various methodologies used in the industry to estimate the potential property and workers compensation losses that would arise from various catastrophe events and companies may use different models and assumptions in their estimates. Therefore, the Company's estimates of gross and net losses arising from a 250-year hurricane or earthquake event may not be comparable to estimates provided by other companies. Furthermore, the Company's estimates are subject to significant uncertainty and could vary materially from the actual losses that would arise from these events and the loss estimates provided by other companies. The Company also manages natural catastrophe risk for group life, group disability, and individual life insurance, which in combination with property and workers compensation loss estimates are subject to separate enterprise risk management net aggregate loss limits as a percent of enterprise surplus.
Terrorism Risk
The Company defines terrorism risk as the risk of losses from terrorist attacks, including losses caused by single-site and multi-site conventional attacks, as well as the potential for attacks using nuclear, biological, chemical or radiological weapons (“NBCR”). The Company monitors aggregations of terrorism risk exposure around key landmarks primarily in major metropolitan areas that span the Company's insurance portfolio. Enterprise Risk Management limits for terrorism apply to aggregations of risk across property-casualty, group benefits, life insurance and specific asset portfolios and are defined based on a deterministic, single-site conventional terrorism attack scenario. The Company manages its potential estimated loss from a conventional terrorism loss scenario to less than $1.3 billion. In addition, the Company monitors exposures monthly and employs both internally developed and vendor-licensed loss modeling tools as part of its risk management discipline. While our modeled exposures to conventional terrorist attacks around landmark locations may fluctuate above and below $1.3 billion, currently, all such terrorism exposures are within ERM limits. For a discussion on risks related to terrorist attacks, see the risk factor, "The occurrence of one or more terrorist attacks in the geographic areas we serve or the threat of terrorism in general may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity."
Pandemic Risk
Pandemic risk is the exposure to loss arising from widespread influenza or other pathogens or bacterial infections that create an aggregation of loss across the Company's insurance or asset portfolios. Consistent with industry practice, the Company assesses exposure to pandemics by analyzing the potential impact from a variety of pandemic scenarios based on conditions consistent with historical outbreaks of flu-like viruses such as the “Severe” 1918 Spanish Flu, the Asian flu of 1957, the Hong Kong flu of 1968, and the 2009 outbreak of the swine flu. For pandemic risk, the Company generally limits its estimated pre-tax loss from a single 250 year event to less than 12.5% of the statutory surplus for the enterprise. In evaluating these scenarios, the Company assesses the impact on group and individual life policies, short-term and long term disability, annuities, COLI, property & casualty claims, and losses in the investment portfolio associated with market declines in the event of a widespread pandemic. While Enterprise Risk Management has a process to track and manage these limits, from time to time, the estimated loss for pandemics may fluctuate above or below these limits due to changes in modeled loss estimates, exposures, or statutory surplus. Currently, the Company's estimated pre-tax loss for pandemic is less than 12.5% of enterprise statutory surplus.

92

Reinsurance as a Risk Management Strategy
The Hartford utilizes reinsurance to transfer risk to affiliated and unaffiliated insurers. Reinsurance is used to manage aggregation of risk as well as to transfer certain risk to reinsurance companies based on specific geographic or risk concentrations. All reinsurance processes are aligned under a single enterprise reinsurance risk management policy. Reinsurance purchasing is a centralized function within Commercial, Consumer Markets and Wealth Management to support a consistent strategy and to ensure that the reinsurance activities are fully integrated into the organization's risk management processes.
A variety of traditional reinsurance products are used as part of the Company's risk management strategy, including excess of loss occurrence-based products that protect property and workers compensation exposures, and individual risk or quota share arrangements, that protect specific classes or lines of business. The Company has no significant finite risk contracts in place and the statutory surplus benefit from all such prior year contracts is immaterial. Facultative reinsurance is used by the Company to manage policy-specific risk exposures based on established underwriting guidelines. The Hartford also participates in governmentally administered reinsurance facilities such as the Florida Hurricane Catastrophe Fund (“FHCF”), the Terrorism Risk Insurance Program established under The Terrorism Risk Insurance Program Reauthorization Act of 2007 (“TRIPRA”) and other reinsurance programs relating to particular risks or specific lines of business.
Reinsurance for Catastrophes
The Company has several catastrophe reinsurance programs, including reinsurance treaties that cover property and workers’ compensation losses aggregating from single catastrophe events. The following table summarizes the primary catastrophe treaty reinsurance coverage’s that the Company has in place as of January 1, 2013:
Coverage
 
Treaty term
 
% of layer(s) reinsurance
 
Per occurrence limit
 
Retention
Principal property catastrophe program covering property catastrophe losses from a single event
 
1/1/2013 to 1/1/2014
 
90%
 
$750
 
$350
Reinsurance with the FHCF covering Florida Personal Lines property catastrophe losses from a single event
 
6/1/2012 to 6/1/2013
 
90%
 
128
[1]
48
Workers compensation losses arising from a single catastrophe event [2]
 
7/1/2012 to 7/1/2013
 
95%
 
350
 
100
[1]
The per occurrence limit on the FHCF treaty is $128 for the 6/1/2012 to 6/1/2013 treaty year based on the Company's election to purchase the required coverage from FHCF. Coverage is estimated based on the best available information from FHCF, which was updated in January 2013.
[2]
In addition, to the limit shown above, the workers compensation reinsurance includes a non-catastrophe, industrial accident layer, 80% of $30 excess a $20 retention.

In addition to the property catastrophe reinsurance coverage described in the above table, the Company has other catastrophe and working layer treaties and facultative reinsurance agreements that cover property catastrophe losses on an aggregate excess of loss and on a per risk basis. The principal property catastrophe reinsurance program and other reinsurance programs include a provision to reinstate limits in the event that a catastrophe loss exhausts limits on one or more layers under the treaties.
In addition to the reinsurance protection provided by The Hartford's traditional property catastrophe reinsurance program described above, the Hartford has fully collateralized reinsurance coverages from Foundation Re III for losses sustained from qualifying hurricane loss events. Under the terms of the treaties, the Company is reimbursed for losses from hurricanes using customized industry index contracts designed to replicate The Hartford's own catastrophe losses, with a provision that the actual losses incurred by the Company for covered events, net of reinsurance recoveries, cannot be less than zero.
The following table summarizes the terms of the reinsurance treaties with Foundation Re III that were in place as of December 31, 2012 :
Covered perils
Treaty term
Covered losses
Bond amount issued by Foundation Re III
Hurricane loss events affecting the Gulf and Eastern Coast of the United States
1/27/2010 to 1/27/2014
90% of $200 in losses in excess of an index loss trigger equating to approximately $1.2 billion in losses to The Hartford
$180
Hurricane loss events affecting the Gulf and Eastern Coast of the United States
2/18/2011 to 2/18/2015
67.5% of $200 in losses in excess of an index loss trigger equating to approximately $1.4 billion in losses to The Hartford
135
As of December 31, 2012 , there have been no events that are expected to trigger a recovery under the Foundation Re III reinsurance program and, accordingly, the Company has not recorded any recoveries from the associated reinsurance treaties.

93

Reinsurance for Terrorism
For the risk of terrorism, private sector catastrophe reinsurance capacity is generally limited and largely unavailable for terrorism losses caused by nuclear, biological, chemical or radiological weapons attacks. As such, the Company's principal reinsurance protection against large-scale terrorist attacks is the coverage currently provided through the TRIPRA. On December 26, 2007, the President signed TRIPRA extending the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of 2002 (“TRIA”) through the end of 2014. TRIPRA provides a backstop for insurance-related losses resulting from any “act of terrorism” certified by the Secretary of the Treasury, in concurrence with the Secretary of State and Attorney General, that result in industry losses in excess of $100. In addition, TRIPRA revised the TRIA definition of a certified “act of terrorism” by removing the requirement that an act be committed “on behalf of any foreign person or foreign interest.” As a result, domestic acts of terrorism can now be certified as “acts of terrorism” under the program, subject to the other requirements of TRIPRA. Under the program, in any one calendar year, the federal government would pay 85% of covered losses from a certified act of terrorism after an insurer's losses exceed 20% of the Company's eligible direct commercial earned premiums of the prior calendar year up to a combined annual aggregate limit for the federal government and all insurers of $100 billion. The Company's estimated deductible under the program is $1.2 billion for 2013. If an act of terrorism or acts of terrorism result in covered losses exceeding the $100 billion annual industry aggregate limit, a future Congress would be responsible for determining how additional losses in excess of $100 billion will be paid.
Among other items, TRIPRA required that the President's Working Group on Financial Markets (“PWG”) continue to perform an analysis regarding the long-term availability and affordability of insurance for terrorism risk. Among the findings detailed in the PWG's initial report, released October 2, 2006, were that the high level of uncertainty associated with predicting the frequency of terrorist attacks, coupled with the unwillingness of some insurance policyholders to purchase insurance coverage, makes predicting long-term development of the terrorism risk market difficult, and that there is likely little potential for future market development for NBCR coverage. The January 2011 PWG report notes some improvements in capacity and modeling, but also noted that take-up rates for terrorism coverage remained relatively flat over the past three years and that insurers remain uncertain about the ability of models to predict the frequency and severity of terrorist attacks. With respect to NBCR coverage, a December 2008 study by the U.S. Government Accountability Office (“GAO”) found that property and casualty insurers still generally seek to exclude NBCR coverage from their commercial policies when permitted. However, while nuclear, pollution and contamination exclusions are contained in many property and liability insurance policies, the GAO report concluded that such exclusions may be subject to challenges in court because they were not specifically drafted to address terrorist attacks. Furthermore, workers compensation policies generally have no exclusion or limitations. The GAO found that commercial property and casualty policyholders, including companies that own high-value properties in large cities, generally reported that they could not obtain NBCR coverage. Commercial property and casualty insurers generally remain unwilling to offer NBCR coverage because of uncertainties about the risk and the potential for catastrophic losses.
Reinsurance Recoverables
Reinsurance Security
To manage reinsurer credit risk, a reinsurance security review committee evaluates the credit standing, financial performance, management and operational quality of each potential reinsurer. Through this process, the Company maintains a centralized list of reinsurers approved for participation in reinsurance transactions. Only reinsurers approved through this process are eligible to participate in new reinsurance transactions. The Company's approval designations reflect the differing credit exposure associated with various classes of business. Participation eligibility is categorized based upon the nature of the risk reinsured, including the expected liability payout duration. In addition to defining participation eligibility, the Company regularly monitors credit risk exposure to each reinsurance counterparty and has established limits tiered by counterparty credit rating. For further discussions on how the Company manages and mitigates third party credit risk, refer to the Credit Risk section.
Property and Casualty Insurance Product Reinsurance Recoverable
Property and casualty insurance product reinsurance recoverables represent loss and loss adjustment expense recoverable from a number of entities, including reinsurers and pools. The following table shows the components of the gross and net reinsurance recoverable as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 :
Reinsurance Recoverable
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
Paid loss and loss adjustment expenses
$
170

$
153

Unpaid loss and loss adjustment expenses
2,852

2,884

Gross reinsurance recoverable
3,022

3,037

Less: allowance for uncollectible reinsurance
(268
)
(290
)
Net reinsurance recoverable
$
2,754

$
2,747


94

As shown in the following table, a portion of the total gross reinsurance recoverable relates to the Company’s mandatory participation in various involuntary assigned risk pools and the value of annuity contracts held under structured settlement agreements. Reinsurance recoverables due from mandatory pools are backed by the financial strength of the property and casualty insurance industry. Annuities purchased from third-party life insurers under structured settlements are recognized as reinsurance recoverables in cases where the Company has not obtained a release from the claimant. Of the remaining gross reinsurance recoverable as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , the following table shows the portion of recoverables due from companies rated by A.M. Best:
Distribution of gross reinsurance recoverable
December 31, 2012
 
December 31, 2011
 
Gross reinsurance recoverable
$
3,022

 
$
3,037

 
Less: mandatory (assigned risk) pools and structured settlements
(588
)
 
(617
)
 
Gross reinsurance recoverable excluding mandatory pools and structured settlements
$
2,434

 
$
2,420

 
 
 
% of Total
 
% of Total
Rated A- (Excellent) or better by A.M. Best [1]
$
1,691

69.5
%
$
1,774

73.3
%
Other rated by A.M. Best
6

0.2
%
52

2.2
%
Total rated companies
1,697

69.7
%
1,826

75.5
%
Voluntary pools
95

3.9
%
100

4.1
%
Captives
368

15.1
%
242

10.0
%
Other not rated companies
274

11.3
%
252

10.4
%
Total
$
2,434

100.0
%
$
2,420

100.0
%
[1]
Based on A.M. Best ratings as of December 31, 2012 and 2011, respectively.
Where its contracts permit, the Company secures future claim obligations with various forms of collateral, including irrevocable letters of credit, secured trusts, funds held accounts and group wide offsets. As part of its reinsurance recoverable review, the Company analyzes recent developments in commutation activity between reinsurers and cedants, recent trends in arbitration and litigation outcomes in disputes between cedants and reinsurers and the overall credit quality of the Company’s reinsurers. Due largely to investment losses sustained by reinsurers in 2008 along with significant catastrophe losses and European sovereign debt concerns in 2011 and 2012, the financial strength ratings of some reinsurers have been downgraded and the financial strength ratings of other reinsurers have been put on negative watch. Nevertheless, as indicated in the above table, 69.5% of the gross reinsurance recoverables due from reinsurers rated by A.M. Best were rated A- (excellent) or better as of December 31, 2012 . Due to the inherent uncertainties as to collection and the length of time before such amounts will be due, it is possible that future adjustments to the Company’s reinsurance recoverables, net of the allowance, could be required, which could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated results of operations or cash flows in a particular quarterly or annual period.
Annually, the Company completes evaluations of the reinsurance recoverable asset associated with older, long-term casualty liabilities reported in the Property & Casualty Other Operations reporting segment, and the allowance for uncollectible reinsurance reported in the Property & Casualty Commercial reporting segment. For a discussion regarding the results of these evaluations, see Property and Casualty Insurance Product Reserves, Net of Reinsurance within the Critical Accounting Estimates section of the MD&A.
Guaranty Funds and Other Insurance Assessments
As part of its risk management strategy, the Company regularly monitors the financial wherewithal of other insurers and, in particular, activity by insurance regulators and various state guaranty associations relations to troubled insurers. In all states, insurers licensed to transact certain classes of insurance are required to become members of a guaranty fund. In most states, in the event of the insolvency of an insurer writing any such class of insurance in the state, members of the funds are assessed to pay certain claims of the insolvent insurer. A particular state's fund assesses its members based on their respective written premiums in the state for the classes of insurance in which the insolvent insurer was engaged. Assessments are generally limited for any year to one or two percent of the premiums written per year depending on the state. The amount and timing of assessments related to past insolvencies is unpredictable.

95

Citizens Property Insurance Corporation in Florida (“Citizens”), a non-affiliate insurer, provides property insurance to Florida homeowners and businesses that are unable to obtain insurance from other carriers, including for properties deemed to be “high risk.” Citizens maintains a Personal Lines account, a Commercial Lines account and a High Risk account. If Citizens incurs a deficit in any of these accounts, Citizens may impose a “regular assessment” on other insurance carriers in the state, such as the Company, to fund the deficits, subject to certain restrictions and subject to approval by the Florida Office of Insurance Regulation. Carriers are then permitted to surcharge policyholders to recover the assessments over the next few years. Citizens may also opt to finance a portion of the deficits through issuing bonds and may impose “emergency assessments” on other insurance carriers to fund the bond repayments. Unlike with regular assessments, however, insurance carriers only serve as a collection agent for emergency assessments and are not required to remit surcharges for emergency assessments to Citizens until they collect surcharges from policyholders. Under U.S. GAAP, the Company is required to accrue for regular assessments in the period the assessments become probable and estimable and the obligating event has occurred. Surcharges to recover the amount of regular assessments may not be recorded as an asset until the related premium is written. Emergency assessments that may be levied by Citizens are not recorded in the income statement.
Operational Risk Management
The Hartford has an Operational Risk Management (“ORM”) function whose responsibility is to provide a comprehensive and enterprise-wide view of the Company's operational risk on an aggregate basis. The Company defines operational risk as the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems, or from external events. This inadequacy or failure may come from internal or external events. It includes legal risk and considers reputational risk as an impact. The Company has developed a library of operational risks which have been classified into the following seven risk categories:
•
Internal Fraud
•
External Fraud
•
Employment Practices & Workplace Safety
•
Business Disruption & Systems Failures
•
Clients, Products & Business Practice
•
Damage to Physical Assets
•
Execution, Delivery & Process Management
ORM is led by the Chief Operational Risk Officer (“CORO”) who is responsible for establishing, maintaining and communicating the framework, principles and guidelines of The Hartford's operational risk management program. In addition, the CORO also manages business continuity, model risk management and risk assessments. Responsibility for day-to-day management of operational risk lies within each business unit and functional area.
ORM works closely with the Operational Risk Committee (“ORC”), an enterprise wide governance body comprised of senior leaders from functional areas such as ORM, Enterprise Services, Enterprise Operations, Claims, Information Technology, Compliance and Internal Audit. The ORC meets regularly and provides a forum for ensuring the effective management of operational risks across the enterprise. The ORC's responsibilities include reviewing and approving: policies governing operational risk, functional risk tolerances, and risk mitigation strategies. This group also identifies emerging operational risks, prioritizes them, and determines action plans. Individual committees, such as the Enterprise Sourcing Board, Enterprise Privacy and Security Committee, and the Enterprise Health, Environment and Safety Committee focus on specific operational risk issues and report to the ORC.
ORM is responsible for ensuring controls and providing a framework for managing operational risks. ORM has various tools and processes for identifying, monitoring, measuring, prioritizing, and reporting operational risks. ORM uses a centralized Governance, Risk, and Compliance (GRC) system to help manage operational risk across the Company's finance, legal, data security, and information technology functions. The ORM (Archer) Steering Committee manages the direction, strategy and priorities of the initiatives that support governance, risk and compliance.
The Company's business risk assessment process is used to identify operational risks, evaluate controls to mitigate those risks, and monitor control improvements.


96

Financial Risk Management
The Company identifies the following categories of financial risk:
•
Liquidity Risk
•
Interest Rate Risk
•
Equity Risk
•
Foreign Currency Exchange Risk
•
Credit Risk
Financial risks include direct and indirect risks to the Company's financial objectives coming from events that impact market conditions or prices. Financial risk also includes exposure to events that may cause correlated movement in multiple risk factors. The primary source of financial risks are the Company's general account assets and the liabilities which those assets back, together with the guarantees which the company has written over various liability products, particularly its portfolio of variable annuities. The Company assesses its financial risk on a U.S. GAAP, statutory and economic basis. The Hartford has developed a disciplined approach to financial risk management that is well integrated into the Company's underwriting, pricing, hedging, claims, asset and liability management, new product, and capital management processes. Consistent with its risk appetite, the Company establishes financial risk limits to control potential loss. Exposures are actively monitored, and mitigated where appropriate. The Company uses various risk management strategies, including reinsurance and over-the-counter and exchange traded derivatives to transfer risk to well-established and financially secure counterparties. Together, the Company's Chief Market Risk Officer, HIMCO Chief Risk Officer and Head of Asset Liability Management have enterprise responsibility for establishing and maintaining the framework, principles, and guidelines of The Hartford's financial risk management program.
Liquidity Risk
Liquidity risk is the risk to current or prospective earnings or capital arising from the company's inability or perceived inability to meet its contractual cash obligations at the legal entity level when they come due over given horizons without incurring unacceptable costs and without relying on uncommitted funding sources. Liquidity risk includes the inability to manage unplanned increases or accelerations in cash outflows, decreases or changes in funding sources, and changes in market conditions that affect the ability to liquidate assets quickly to meet obligations with minimal loss in value. Components of liquidity risk include funding risk, transaction risk and market liquidity risk. Funding risk is the gap between sources and uses of cash under normal and stressed conditions taking into consideration structural, regulatory and legal entity constraints. Changes in institution-specific conditions that affect the Company's ability to sell assets or otherwise transact business without incurring a significant loss in value is transaction risk. Changes in general market conditions that affect the institution's ability to sell assets or otherwise transact business without incurring a significant loss in value is market liquidity risk.
The Company has defined ongoing monitoring and reporting requirements to assess liquidity across the enterprise. The Company measures and manages liquidity risk exposures and funding needs within prescribed limits and across legal entities, business lines and currencies, taking into account legal, regulatory and operational limitations to the transferability of liquidity. The Company also monitors internal and external conditions, identifies material risk changes and emerging risks that may impact liquidity. The Company's CFO has primary responsibility for liquidity risk.
For further discussion on liquidity see the section on Capital Resources and Liquidity.


97

Interest Rate Risk
Interest rate risk is the risk of financial loss due to adverse changes in the value of assets and liabilities arising from movements in interest rates. Interest rate risk encompasses exposures with respect to changes in the level of interest rates, the shape of the term structure of rates and the volatility of interest rates. Interest rate risk does not include exposure to changes in credit spreads. The Company has exposure to interest rates arising from its fixed maturity securities, interest sensitive liabilities and discount rate assumptions associated with the Company’s pension and other post retirement benefit obligations.
An increase in interest rates from current levels is generally a favorable development for the Company. Interest rate increases are expected to provide additional net investment income, reduce the cost of the variable annuity hedging program, limit the potential risk of margin erosion due to minimum guaranteed crediting rates in certain Talcott Resolution products and, if sustained, could reduce the Company’s prospective pension expense. Conversely, if long-term interest rates rise dramatically within a six to twelve month time period, certain Talcott Resolution businesses may be exposed to disintermediation risk. Disintermediation risk refers to the risk that policyholders will surrender their contracts in a rising interest rate environment requiring the Company to liquidate assets in an unrealized loss position. In conjunction with the interest rate risk measurement and management techniques, certain of Talcott Resolution's fixed income product offerings have market value adjustment provisions at contract surrender. An increase in interest rates may also impact the Company’s tax planning strategies and in particular its ability to utilize tax benefits to offset certain previously recognized realized capital losses.
A decline in interest rates results in certain mortgage-backed and municipal securities being more susceptible to paydowns and prepayments or calls. During such periods, the Company generally will not be able to reinvest the proceeds at comparable yields. Lower interest rates will also likely result in lower net investment income, increased hedging cost associated with variable annuities and, if declines are sustained for a long period of time, it may subject the Company to reinvestment risks, higher pension costs expense and possibly reduced profit margins associated with guaranteed crediting rates on certain Talcott Resolution products. Conversely, the fair value of the investment portfolio will increase when interest rates decline and the Company’s interest expense will be lower on its variable rate debt obligations.
The Company manages its exposure to interest rate risk by constructing investment portfolios that maintain asset allocation limits and asset/liability duration matching targets which may include the use of derivatives. The Company analyzes interest rate risk using various models including parametric models and cash flow simulation under various market scenarios of the liabilities and their supporting investment portfolios, which may include derivative instruments. Measures the Company uses to quantify its exposure to interest rate risk inherent in its invested assets and interest rate sensitive liabilities include duration, convexity and key rate duration. Duration is the price sensitivity of a financial instrument or series of cash flows to a parallel change in the underlying yield curve used to value the financial instrument or series of cash flows. For example, a duration of 5 means the price of the security will change by approximately 5% for a 100 basis point change in interest rates. Convexity is used to approximate how the duration of a security changes as interest rates change in a parallel manner. Key rate duration analysis measures the price sensitivity of a security or series of cash flows to each point along the yield curve and enables the Company to estimate the price change of a security assuming non-parallel interest rate movements.
To calculate duration, convexity, and key rate durations, projections of asset and liability cash flows are discounted to a present value using interest rate assumptions. These cash flows are then revalued at alternative interest rate levels to determine the percentage change in fair value due to an incremental change in the entire yield curve for duration and convexity, or a particular point on the yield curve for key rate duration. Cash flows from corporate obligations are assumed to be consistent with the contractual payment streams on a yield to worst basis. Yield to worst is a basis that represents the lowest potential yield that can be received without the issuer actually defaulting. The primary assumptions used in calculating cash flow projections include expected asset payment streams taking into account prepayment speeds, issuer call options and contract holder behavior. Mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities are modeled based on estimates of the rate of future prepayments of principal over the remaining life of the securities. These estimates are developed by incorporating collateral surveillance and anticipated future market dynamics. Actual prepayment experience may vary from these estimates.
The Company is also exposed to interest rate risk based upon the discount rate assumption associated with the Company’s pension and other postretirement benefit obligations. The discount rate assumption is based upon an interest rate yield curve comprised of bonds rated Aa with maturities primarily between zero and thirty years. For further discussion of interest rate risk associated with the benefit obligations, see the Critical Accounting Estimates Section of the MD&A under Pension and Other Postretirement Benefit Obligations and Note 18 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. In addition, management evaluates performance of certain Talcott Resolution products based on net investment spread which is, in part, influenced by changes in interest rates. For further discussion, see the Talcott Resolution section of the MD&A.
The investments and liabilities primarily associated with interest rate risk are included in the following discussion. Certain product liabilities, including those containing GMWB, GMIB, GMAB, or GMDB, expose the Company to interest rate risk but also have significant equity risk. These liabilities are discussed as part of the Equity Risk section below.

98

Fixed Maturity Investments
The Company’s investment portfolios primarily consist of investment grade fixed maturity securities. The fair value of these investments was $87.0 billion and $83.1 billion at December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively. The fair value of these and other invested assets fluctuates depending on the interest rate environment and other general economic conditions. The weighted average duration of the portfolio, including fixed maturities, commercial mortgage loans, derivatives, and cash equivalents, was approximately 5.6 and 5.3 years as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively. As of December 31, 2012, the weighted average duration of the portfolio, excluding the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses, is approximately 5.4 years.
Liabilities
The Company’s investment contracts and certain insurance product liabilities, other than non-guaranteed separate accounts, include asset accumulation vehicles such as fixed annuities, guaranteed investment contracts, other investment and universal life-type contracts and certain insurance products such as long-term disability.
Asset accumulation vehicles primarily require a fixed rate payment, often for a specified period of time, such as fixed rate annuities with a market value adjustment feature. The term to maturity of these contracts generally range from less than one year to ten years. In addition, certain products such as corporate owned life insurance contracts and the general account portion of Talcott Resolutions’s variable annuity products, credit interest to policyholders subject to market conditions and minimum interest rate guarantees. The term to maturity of the asset portfolio supporting these products may range from short to intermediate.
While interest rate risk associated with many of these products has been reduced through the use of market value adjustment features and surrender charges, the primary risk associated with these products is that the spread between investment return and credited rate may not be sufficient to earn targeted returns.
The Company also manages the risk of certain insurance liabilities similarly to investment type products due to the relative predictability of the aggregate cash flow payment streams. Products in this category may contain significant reliance upon actuarial (including mortality and morbidity) pricing assumptions and do have some element of cash flow uncertainty. Product examples include structured settlement contracts, on-benefit annuities (i.e., the annuitant is currently receiving benefits thereon) and short-term and long-term disability contracts. The cash outflows associated with these policy liabilities are not interest rate sensitive but do vary based on the timing and amount of benefit payments. The primary risks associated with these products are that the benefits will exceed expected actuarial pricing and/or that the actual timing of the cash flows will differ from those anticipated, or interest rate levels may deviate from those assumed in product pricing, ultimately resulting in an investment return lower than that assumed in pricing. The average duration of the liability cash flow payments can range from less than one year to in excess of fifteen years.
Derivatives
The Company utilizes a variety of derivative instruments to mitigate interest rate risk associated with its investment portfolio. Interest rate swaps are primarily used to convert interest receipts or payments to a fixed or variable rate. The use of such swaps enables the Company to customize contract terms and conditions to desired objectives and manage the interest rate risk profile within established tolerances. Interest rate swaps are also used to hedge the variability in the cash flow of a forecasted purchase or sale of fixed rate securities due to changes in interest rates. Interest rate caps, floors, swaps, swaptions, and futures may be used to manage portfolio duration.
At December 31, 2012 and 2011 , notional amounts pertaining to derivatives utilized to manage interest rate risk totaled $ 23.9 billion and $ 19.8 billion , respectively ($ 23.7 billion and $ 19.5 billion , respectively, related to investments and $ 0.2 billion and $ 0.3 billion , respectively, related to Talcott Resolution liabilities). The fair value of these derivatives was $ (281) and $ (332) as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively.

99

Interest Rate Sensitivity
The before-tax change in the net economic value of investment contracts (e.g., fixed annuity contracts) issued by the Company’s Talcott Resolution segment, as well as certain insurance product liabilities (e.g., short-term and long-term disability contracts) issued by the Company’s Group Benefits segment, for which the payment rates are fixed at contract issuance and the investment experience is substantially absorbed by the Company’s operations, along with the corresponding invested assets are included in the following table. Also included in this analysis are the interest rate sensitive derivatives used by the Company to hedge its exposure to interest rate risk in the investment portfolios supporting these contracts. This analysis does not include the assets and corresponding liabilities of certain insurance products such as auto, property, whole and term life insurance, and certain life contingent annuities. Certain financial instruments, such as limited partnerships and other alternative investments, have been omitted from the analysis due to the fact that the investments generally lack sensitivity to interest rate changes. Separate account assets and liabilities, equity securities, trading and the corresponding liabilities associated with the variable annuity products sold in Japan are excluded from the analysis because gains and losses in separate accounts accrue to policyholders. The calculation of the estimated hypothetical change in net economic value below assumes a 100 basis point upward and downward parallel shift in the yield curve.
 
Change in Net Economic Value as of December 31,
 
2012
2011
Basis point shift
--100

+100

-100

+100

Amount
$
(294
)
$
135

$
(494
)
$
287

The fixed liabilities included above represented approximately 41% and 43% of the Company’s general account liabilities as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively. The assets supporting the fixed liabilities are monitored and managed within set duration guidelines, and are evaluated on a daily basis, as well as annually using scenario simulation techniques in compliance with regulatory requirements.
The following table provides an analysis showing the estimated before-tax change in the fair value of the Company’s fixed maturity investments and related derivatives, not included in the table above, assuming 100 basis point upward and downward parallel shifts in the yield curve as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 . Certain financial instruments, such as limited partnerships and other alternative investments, have been omitted from the analysis due to the fact that the investments are accounted for under the equity method and generally lack sensitivity to interest rate changes.
 
Change in Fair Value as of December 31,
 
2012
2011
Basis point shift
--100

+100

-100

+100

Amount
$
3,406

$
(3,357
)
$
3,248

$
(2,985
)
The selection of the 100 basis point parallel shift in the yield curve was made only as an illustration of the potential hypothetical impact of such an event and should not be construed as a prediction of future market events. Actual results could differ materially from those illustrated above due to the nature of the estimates and assumptions used in the above analysis. The Company’s sensitivity analysis calculation assumes that the composition of invested assets and liabilities remain materially consistent throughout the year and that the current relationship between short-term and long-term interest rates will remain constant over time. As a result, these calculations may not fully capture the impact of portfolio re-allocations, significant product sales or non-parallel changes in interest rates.


100

Equity Risk
Equity risk is defined as the risk of financial loss due to changes in the value of global equities or equity indices. The Company has exposure to equity risk from assets under management, embedded derivatives within the Company’s variable annuities and assets that support the Company’s pension plans. Equity Risk on the Company’s Variable Annuity products is mitigated through various hedging programs. (See the Variable Annuity Hedge Program Section)
The Company's exposure to equity risk includes the potential for lower earnings associated with certain businesses such as mutual funds and variable annuities where fee income is earned based upon the value of the assets under management. For further discussion of equity risk, see the Variable Product Guarantee Risks and Risk Management section below. In addition, Talcott Resolution includes certain guaranteed benefits, primarily associated with variable annuity products, which increase the Company's potential benefit exposure as the equity markets decline.

The Company is also subject to equity risk based upon the assets that support its pension plans. The asset allocation mix is reviewed on a peri odic basis. In order to minimize risk, the pension plans maintain a listing of permissible and prohibited investments. In addition, the pension plans have certain concentration limits and investment quality requirements imposed on permissible investment options. For further discussion of equity risk associated with the pension plans, see the Critical Accounting Estimates section of the MD&A under “Pension and Other Postretirement Benefit Obligations” and Note 18 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Variable Product Guarantee Risks and Risk Management
The Company’s variable products are significantly influenced by the U.S., Japanese, and other equity markets. Increases or declines in equity markets impact certain assets and liabilities related to the Company’s variable products and the Company’s earnings derived from those products. The Company’s variable products currently include variable annuity contracts and mutual funds.
Generally, declines in equity markets will:
•
reduce the value of assets under management and the amount of fee income generated from those assets;
•
reduce the value of equity securities trading supporting the international variable annuities, the related policyholder funds and benefits payable, and the amount of fee income generated from those variable annuities;
•
increase the liability for GMWB benefits resulting in realized capital losses;
•
increase the value of derivative assets used to hedge product guarantees resulting in realized capital gains;
•
increase the costs of the hedging instruments we use in our hedging program;
•
increase the Company’s net amount at risk for GMDB and GMIB benefits;
•
decrease the Company’s actual gross profits, resulting in increased DAC amortization;
•
increase the amount of required assets to be held backing variable annuity guarantees to maintain required regulatory reserve levels and targeted risk based capital ratios; and
•
decrease the Company’s estimated future gross profits. See Estimated Gross Profits Used in the Valuation and Amortization of Assets and Liabilities Associated with Variable Annuity and Other Universal Life-Type Contracts within the Critical Accounting Estimates section of the MD&A for further information.
Generally, increases in equity markets will reduce the value of the dynamic hedge program and macro hedge derivative assets, resulting in realized capital losses, and will generally have the inverse impact of those listed above. See section on Variable Annuity Hedging Program for more information.

101

Variable Annuity Guaranteed Benefits
The majority of the Company’s U.S., Japan, and U.K. variable annuities include optional living benefit and guaranteed minimum death benefit features. The net amount at risk (“NAR”) is generally defined as the guaranteed minimum benefit amount in excess of the contractholder’s current account value. Variable annuity account values with guarantee features were $94.4 billion and $99.8 billion as of December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011 , respectively.

The following table summarizes the account values of the Company’s U.S., Japan and U.K. variable annuities with guarantee features and the NAR split between various guarantee features (retained net amount at risk does not take into consideration the effects of the variable annuity hedge programs currently in place):
Total Variable Annuity Guarantees
As of December 31, 2012
($ in billions)
Account Value
Gross Net Amount at Risk
Retained Net Amount at Risk
% of Contracts In the Money[4]
% In the Money[5]
U. S. Variable Annuity [1]
 
 
 
 
 
GMDB [2]
$
64.8

$
6.6

$
2.2

48
%
13
%
GMWB
34.2

0.7

0.5

23
%
9
%
Japan Variable Annuity [1]

 



GMDB
27.7

5.7

4.8

98
%
18
%
GMIB [3]
26.0

3.3

3.3

97
%
12
%
U.K. Variable Annuity [1]

 

 
 
GMDB
1.9

—

—

100
%
2
%
GMWB
1.7

—

—

24
%
7
%
Total Variable Annuity Guarantees
As of December 31, 2011
($ in billions)
Account Value
Gross Net Amount at Risk
Retained Net Amount at Risk
% of Contracts In the Money [4]
% In the Money [5]
U. S Variable Annuity [1]
 
 
 
 
 
GMDB [2]
$
68.7

$
12.0

$
5.1

77
%
15
%
GMWB
36.6

1.9

1.6

45
%
12
%
Japan Variable Annuity [1]
 
 
 
 
 
GMDB
29.2

10.9

9.4

99
%
27
%
GMIB [3]
27.3

7.5

7.5

99
%
22
%
U.K. Variable Annuity [1]
 
 
 
 
 
GMDB
1.9

0.08

0.08

100
%
4
%
GMWB
1.8

0.07

0.07

57
%
3
%
[1]
Policies with a guaranteed living benefit (a GMWB in the US or UK, or a GMIB in Japan) also have a guaranteed death benefit. The net amount at risk (“NAR”) for each benefit is shown; however these benefits are not additive. When a policy terminates due to death, any NAR related to GMWB or GMIB is released. Similarly, when a policy goes into benefit status on a GMWB or, by contract, the GMDB NAR is reduced to zero. When a policy goes into benefit status on a GMIB, its GMDB NAR is released.
[2]
Excludes group annuity contracts with GMDB benefits.
[3]
Includes small amount of GMWB and GMAB.
[4]
Excludes contracts that are fully reinsured.
[5]
For all contracts that are “in the money”, this represents the percentage by which the average contract was in the money.

102

Many policyholders with a GMDB also have a GMWB in the U.S. or GMIB in Japan. Policyholders that have a product that offer both guarantees can only receive the GMDB or the GMIB benefit in Japan or the GMDB or GMWB in the U.S. The GMDB NAR disclosed in the tables above is a point in time measurement and assumes that all participants utilize the GMDB benefit on that measurement date. For additional information on the Company's GMDB liability, see Note 10 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
The Company expects to incur these payments in the future only if the policyholder has an “in the money” GMWB at their death or their account value is reduced to a specified level, through contractually permitted withdrawals and/or market declines. If the account value is reduced to the specified level, the contract holder will receive an annuity equal to the guaranteed remaining benefit (“GRB”). For the Company’s “life-time” GMWB products, this annuity can continue beyond the GRB. As the account value fluctuates with equity market returns on a daily basis and the “life-time” GMWB payments can exceed the GRB, the ultimate amount to be paid by the Company, if any, is uncertain and could be significantly more or less than the Company’s current carried liability. For additional information on the Company’s GMWB liability, see Note 5 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
For GMIB contracts, in general, the policyholder has the right to elect to annuitize benefits, beginning (for certain products) on the tenth or fifteenth anniversary year of contract commencement, receive lump sum payment of the then current account value, or remain in the variable sub-account. For GMIB contracts, if the policyholder makes the election, the policyholder is entitled to receive the original investment value over a 10- to 15- year annuitization period. A small percentage of the contracts will first become eligible to elect annuitization beginning in 2013. The remainder of the contracts will first become eligible to elect annuitization from 2014 to 2022. Because policyholders have various contractual rights to defer their annuitization election, the period over which annuitization election can take place is subject to policyholder behavior and therefore indeterminate. In addition, upon annuitization the contractholder surrenders access to the account value and the account value is transferred to the Company’s general account where it is invested and the additional investment proceeds are used towards payment of the original investment value. If the original investment value exceeds the account value upon annuitization then the contract is “in the money”. As of December 31, 2012 , 73% of retained NAR is reinsured to an affiliate of The Hartford. For additional information on the Company’s GMIB liability, see Note 10 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
The following table represents the timing of account values eligible for annuitization under the Japan GMIB as well as the NAR. The account values reflect 100% annuitization at the earliest point allowed by the contract and no adjustments for future market returns and policyholder behaviors. Future market returns, changes in the value of the Japanese yen and policyholder behaviors will impact account values eligible for annuitization in the years presented.
GMIB [1]
As of December 31, 2012
($ in billions)
Account Value
Net Amount at Risk
2013
$
0.3

$
—

2014
4.3

0.2

2015
7.1

0.8

2016
2.3

0.4

2017
2.7

0.5

2018 & beyond [2]
6.5

0.9

Total
$
23.2

$
2.8

[1]
Excludes certain non-GMIB living benefits of $2.8 billion of account value and $0.5 billion of NAR.
[2]
In 2018 & beyond, $2.5 billion of the $6.5 billion is associated with account value that is eligible in 2021.

103

Variable Annuity Market Risk Exposures
The following table summarizes the broad Variable Annuity Guarantees offered by the Company and the market risks to which the guarantee is most exposed from a U.S. GAAP accounting perspective.
Variable Annuity Guarantees [1]
U.S. GAAP Treatment [1]
Primary Market Risk Exposures [1]
U.S. Variable Guarantees
 
GMDB
Accumulation of the portion of fees required to cover expected claims, less accumulation of actual claims paid
Equity Market Levels
GMWB
Fair Value
Equity Market Levels / Implied
Volatility / Interest Rates
For Life Component of GMWB
Accumulation of the portion of fees required to cover expected claims, less accumulation of actual claims paid
Equity Market Levels
International Variable Guarantees
 
GMDB & GMIB
Accumulation of the portion of fees required to cover expected claims, less accumulation of actual claims paid
Equity Market Levels / Interest
Rates / Foreign Currency
GMWB
Fair Value
Equity Market Levels / Implied
Volatility / Interest
Rates / Foreign Currency
GMAB
Fair Value
Equity Market Levels / Implied
Volatility / Interest Rates / Foreign Currency
[1]
Each of these guarantees and the related U.S. GAAP accounting volatility will also be influenced by actual and estimated policyholder behavior.

Risk Hedging
Variable Annuity Hedging Program
The Company’s variable annuity hedging is primarily focused on reducing the economic exposure to market risks associated with guaranteed benefits that are embedded in our global VA contracts through the use of reinsurance and capital market derivative instruments. The variable annuity hedging also considers the potential impacts on Statutory accounting results.
Reinsurance
The Company uses reinsurance for a portion of contracts with GMWB riders issued prior to the third quarter of 2003 and GMWB risks associated with a block of business sold between the third quarter of 2003 and the second quarter of 2006. The Company also uses reinsurance for a majority of the GMDB issued in the U.S. and a portion of the GMDB issued in Japan.
Capital Market Derivatives
GMWB Hedge Program
The Company enters into derivative contracts to hedge market risk exposures associated with the GMWB liabilities that are not reinsured. These derivative contracts include customized swaps, interest rate swaps and futures, and equity swaps, options, and futures, on certain indices including the S&P 500 index, EAFE index, and NASDAQ index.
Additionally, the Company holds customized derivative contracts to provide protection from certain capital market risks for the remaining term of specified blocks of non-reinsured GMWB riders. These customized derivative contracts are based on policyholder behavior assumptions specified at the inception of the derivative contracts. The Company retains the risk for differences between assumed and actual policyholder behavior and between the performance of the actively managed funds underlying the separate accounts and their respective indices.
While the Company actively manages this dynamic hedging program, increased U.S. GAAP earnings volatility may result from factors including, but not limited to: policyholder behavior, capital markets, divergence between the performance of the underlying funds and the hedging indices, changes in hedging positions and the relative emphasis placed on various risk management objectives.

104

Macro Hedge Program
The Company’s macro hedging program uses derivative instruments such as options and futures on equities and interest rates to provide protection against the statutory tail scenario risk arising from U.S., GMWB and GMDB liabilities, on the Company’s statutory surplus. These macro hedges cover some of the residual risks not otherwise covered by specific dynamic hedging programs. Management assesses this residual risk under various scenarios in designing and executing the macro hedge program. The macro hedge program will result in additional U.S. GAAP earnings volatility as changes in the value of the macro hedge derivatives, which are designed to reduce statutory reserve and capital volatility, may not be closely aligned to changes in U.S. GAAP liabilities.
International Hedge Programs
The Company enters into derivative contracts to hedge market risk exposures associated with the guaranteed benefits which are embedded in the international variable annuity contracts. These derivative contracts include foreign currency forwards and options, interest rate swaps and futures, and equity swaps, customized swaps, options, and futures on certain broadly traded global equity indices including the S&P500 index, Nikkei 225 index, FTSE 100 index, and Euro Stoxx 50.
While the Company actively manages these dynamic hedging programs, increased U.S. GAAP earnings volatility may result from factors including, but not limited to: focus on reducing the economic exposure to market risks associated with guaranteed benefits, capital markets, changes in hedging positions and the relative emphasis placed on various risk management objectives.
Variable Annuity Hedging Program Sensitivities
The following table presents the accounting treatment of the underlying guaranteed living benefits and the related hedge assets by hedge program.
U.S. Programs
International Programs
GMWB
Macro
Japan/UK
Hedge Assets
Liabilities
Hedge Assets
Liabilities
Hedge Assets
Liabilities [1]
Fair Value
Fair Value
Fair Value
Not Fair Value
Fair Value
Not Fair Value
[1]
The liabilities for international variable annuity are primarily not measured on a fair value basis. However there is an immaterial portion of the international variable annuity with a GMWB or GMAB which is measured on a fair value basis.

105

The following table presents our estimates of the potential instantaneous impacts from sudden market stresses related to equity market prices, interest rates, implied market volatilities, and foreign currency exchange rates. The sensitivities below represent: (1) the net estimated difference between the change in the fair value of GMWB liabilities and the underlying hedge instruments and (2) the estimated change in fair value of the hedge instruments for the macro and international hedge programs, before the impacts of amortization of DAC, and taxes. As noted in the table above, certain hedge assets are used to hedge liabilities that are not carried at fair value and will not have a liability offset in the U.S. GAAP sensitivity analysis. All sensitivities are measured as of year end and are related to the fair value of liabilities and hedge instruments in place as of year end for the Company’s variable annuity hedge programs. The impacts presented in the table below are estimated individually and measured without consideration of any correlation among market risk factors.
U.S. GAAP Sensitivity Analysis
As of December 31, 2012
(pre Tax/DAC) [1]
U.S. Programs
International Programs [2]
 
GMWB
Macro
Japan/UK
Equity Market Return
(20
)%
(10
)%
10
 %
(20
)%
(10
)%
10
 %
(20
)%
(10
)%
10
 %
Potential Net Fair Value Impact
$
(150
)
$
(66
)
$
41

$
407

$
70

$
(36
)
$
509

$
247

$
(248
)
Interest Rates
-50bps

-25bps

25bps

-50bps

-25bps

25bps

-50bps

-25bps

25bps

Potential Net Fair Value Impact
$
(61
)
$
(32
)
$
34

$
27

$
13

$
(13
)
$
135

$
72

$
(86
)
Implied Volatilities
10
 %
2
 %
(10
)%
10
 %
2
 %
(10
)%
10
 %
2
 %
(10
)%
Potential Net Fair Value Impact
$
(398
)
$
(78
)
$
358

$
101

$
20

$
(97
)
$
99

$
19

$
(71
)
Yen Strengthens +/ Weakens -
20
 %
10
 %
(10
)%
20
 %
10
 %
(10
)%
20
 %
10
 %
(10
)%
Potential Net Fair Value Impact
N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

$
1,131

$
353

$
(242
)
[1]
These sensitivities are based on the following key market levels as of December 31, 2012: 1) S&P of 1426; 2) 10yr US swap rate of 1.91%; 3) S&P 10yr volatility of 25.87% and 4) FX rates of USDJPY @86.75 and EURJPY @114.46.
[2]
Subsequent to December 31, 2012, the Company added additional currency protection. This action resulted in changes in Yen sensitivities from those disclosed above. As of February 21, 2013, the potential net fair value impact for the additional currency protection from Yen instantaneously strengthening by 20% and 10% are $333 and $90, respectively; and Yen instantaneously weakening by (10)% is $(58).

The above sensitivity analysis is an estimate and should not be used to predict the Company’s future financial performance of its variable annuity hedge programs. The actual net changes in the fair value liability and the hedging assets illustrated in the above table may vary materially depending on a variety of factors which include but are not limited to:
•
The sensitivity analysis is only valid as of the measurement date and assumes instantaneous changes in the capital market factors and no ability to rebalance hedge positions prior to the market changes;
•
Changes to the underlying hedging program, policyholder behavior, and variation in underlying fund performance relative to the hedged index, which could materially impact the liability; and
•
The impact of elapsed time on liabilities or hedge assets, any non-parallel shifts in capital market factors, or correlated moves across the sensitivities.



106

Foreign Currency Exchange Risk
Foreign currency exchange risk is defined as the risk of financial loss due to changes in the relative value between currencies. The Company’s foreign currency exchange risk is related to non-U.S. dollar denominated liability contracts, including its GMDB, GMAB, GMWB and GMIB benefits associated with its Japanese and U.K. variable annuities, the investment in and net income of the Japanese and U.K. operations, non-U.S. dollar denominated investments, which primarily consist of fixed maturity investments, and a yen denominated individual fixed annuity product. In addition, Talcott Resolution issued non-U.S. dollar denominated funding agreement liability contracts. A portion of the Company’s foreign currency exposure is mitigated through the use of derivatives.
The company manages the market risk, including foreign currency exchange risk, associated with the guaranteed benefits related to the Japanese and U.K. variable annuities through its comprehensive International Hedge Program. For more information on the International Hedge Program, including the foreign currency exchange risk sensitivity analysis, see the Variable Product Guarantee Risks and Risk Management section.
In order to manage the currency exposure related to non-U.S. dollar denominated investments and the non-U.S. dollar denominated funding agreement liability contracts, the Company entered into foreign currency swaps and forwards to hedge the variability in cash flows or fair value. These foreign currency swap and forward agreements are structured to match the foreign currency cash flows of the hedged foreign denominated securities and liabilities.
The yen denominated individual fixed annuity product was written by Hartford Life Insurance K.K. (“HLIKK”), a wholly-owned Japanese subsidiary of Hartford Life, Inc. (“HLI”), and subsequently reinsured to Hartford Life Insurance Company, a U.S. dollar based wholly-owned indirect subsidiary of HLI. During 2009, the Company suspended new sales of the Japan business. The underlying investment strategy involves investing in the U.S. securities markets, which offer favorable credit spreads. The yen denominated fixed annuity product (“yen fixed annuities”) is recorded in the consolidated balance sheets with invested assets denominated in dollars while policyholder liabilities are denominated in yen and converted to U.S. dollars based upon the December 31 yen to U.S. dollar spot rate. The difference between U.S. dollar denominated investments and yen denominated liabilities exposes the Company to currency risk. The Company manages the currency risk associated with the yen fixed annuities primarily with pay variable U.S. dollar and receive fixed yen currency swaps.
Although economically an effective hedge, a divergence between the yen denominated fixed annuity product liability and the currency swaps exists primarily due to the difference in the basis of accounting between the liability and the derivative instruments (i.e., historical cost versus fair value). The yen denominated fixed annuity product liabilities are recorded on a historical cost basis and are only adjusted for changes in foreign spot rates and accrued income. The currency swaps are recorded at fair value, incorporating changes in value due to changes in forward foreign exchange rates, interest rates and accrued income. A portion of the Company’s foreign currency exposure is mitigated through the use of derivatives.
Fixed Maturity Investments
The risk associated with the non-U.S. dollar denominated fixed maturities relates to potential decreases in value and income resulting from unfavorable changes in foreign exchange rates. The fair value of the non-U.S. dollar denominated fixed maturities, which are primarily denominated in euro, sterling, yen and Canadian dollars, at December 31, 2012 and 2011 , were approximately $ 2.1 billion and $ 2.3 billion , respectively. Included in these amounts are $ 1.8 billion and $ 1.9 billion at December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively, related to non-U.S. dollar denominated fixed maturity securities that directly support liabilities denominated in the same currencies. At December 31, 2012 and 2011 , the derivatives used to hedge currency exchange risk related to the remaining non-U.S. dollar denominated fixed maturities had a total notional amount of $ 246 and $ 399 , respectively, and total fair value of $ (17) and $ 12 , respectively.
Based on the fair values of the Company’s non-U.S. dollar denominated securities, including the associated yen denominated fixed annuity product liabilities, and derivative instruments as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , management estimates that a 10% unfavorable change in exchange rates would decrease the fair values by a before-tax total of approximately $ 114 and $ 113 , respectively. The estimated impact was based upon a 10% change in December 31 spot rates. The selection of the 10% unfavorable change was made only for illustration of the potential hypothetical impact of such an event and should not be construed as a prediction of future market events. Actual results could differ materially from those illustrated above due to the nature of the estimates and assumptions used in the above analysis.
Liabilities
Talcott Resolution previously issued non-U.S. dollar denominated funding agreement liability contracts. The Company hedged the foreign currency risk associated with these liability contracts with currency rate swaps. At December 31, 2012 and 2011 , the derivatives used to hedge foreign currency exchange risk related to foreign denominated liability contracts had a total notional amount of $ 134 and $ 771 and a total fair value of less than $ 1 and $ (57) , respectively.

107

The Company uses currency swaps to manage the foreign currency risk associated with the yen denominated individual fixed annuity product. As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , the notional value of the currency swaps was $ 1.7 billion and $ 1.9 billion and the fair value was $ 224 and $ 514 , respectively. The currency swaps are recorded at fair value, incorporating changes in value due to changes in forward foreign exchange rates, interest rates and accrued income. A before-tax net loss of $ (36) and net gains of $ 3 and $27 for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively, which includes the changes in value of the currency swaps, excluding net periodic coupon settlements, and the yen fixed annuity contract remeasurement, was recorded in net realized capital gains and losses.
Financial Risk on Statutory Capital
Statutory surplus amounts and risk-based capital (“RBC”) ratios may increase or decrease in any period depending upon a variety of factors and may be compounded in extreme scenarios or if multiple factors occur at the same time. At times the impact of changes in certain market factors or a combination of multiple factors on RBC ratios can be counterintuitive. Factors include:
•
In general, as equity market levels and interest rates decline, the amount and volatility of both our actual potential obligation, as well as the related statutory surplus and capital margin for death and living benefit guarantees associated with U.S. variable annuity contracts can be materially negatively affected, sometimes at a greater than linear rate. Other market factors that can impact statutory surplus, reserve levels and capital margin include differences in performance of variable subaccounts relative to indices and/or realized equity and interest rate volatilities. In addition, as equity market levels increase, generally surplus levels will increase. RBC ratios will also tend to increase when equity markets increase. However, as a result of a number of factors and market conditions, including the level of hedging costs and other risk transfer activities, reserve requirements for death and living benefit guarantees and RBC requirements could increase with rising equity markets, resulting in lower RBC ratios. Non-market factors, which can also impact the amount and volatility of both our actual potential obligation, as well as the related statutory surplus and capital margin, include actual and estimated policyholder behavior experience as it pertains to lapsation, partial withdrawals, and mortality.
•
Similarly, for guaranteed benefits (GMDB, GMIB, and GMWB) reinsured from our international operations to our U.S. insurance subsidiaries, the amount and volatility of both our actual potential obligation, as well as the related statutory surplus and capital margin can be materially affected by a variety of factors, both market and non-market. Market factors include declines in various equity market indices and interest rates, changes in value of the yen versus other global currencies, difference in the performance of variable subaccounts relative to indices, and increases in realized equity, interest rate, and currency volatilities. Non-market factors include actual and estimated policyholder behavior experience as it pertains to lapsation, withdrawals, mortality, and annuitization. Risk mitigation activities, such as hedging, may also result in material and sometimes counterintuitive impacts on statutory surplus and capital margin. Notably, as changes in these market and non-market factors occur, both our potential obligation and the related statutory reserves and/or required capital can increase or decrease at a greater than linear rate.
•
As the value of certain fixed-income and equity securities in our investment portfolio decreases, due in part to credit spread widening, statutory surplus and RBC ratios may decrease.
•
As the value of certain derivative instruments that do not qualify for hedge accounting decreases, statutory surplus and RBC ratios may decrease.
•
The life insurance subsidiaries’ exposure to foreign currency exchange risk exists with respect to non-U.S. dollar denominated assets and liabilities. Assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are accounted for at their U.S. dollar equivalent values using exchange rates at the balance sheet date. As foreign currency exchange rates vary in comparison to the U.S. dollar, the remeasured value of those non-dollar denominated assets or liabilities will also vary, causing an increase or decrease to statutory surplus.
•
Our statutory surplus is also impacted by widening credit spreads as a result of the accounting for the assets and liabilities in our fixed market value adjusted (“MVA”) annuities. Statutory separate account assets supporting the fixed MVA annuities are recorded at fair value. In determining the statutory reserve for the fixed MVA annuities, we are required to use current crediting rates in the U.S. and Japanese LIBOR in Japan. In many capital market scenarios, current crediting rates in the U.S. are highly correlated with market rates implicit in the fair value of statutory separate account assets. As a result, the change in statutory reserve from period to period will likely substantially offset the change in the fair value of the statutory separate account assets. However, in periods of volatile credit markets, actual credit spreads on investment assets may increase sharply for certain sub-sectors of the overall credit market, resulting in statutory separate account asset market value losses. As actual credit spreads are not fully reflected in the current crediting rates in the U.S. or Japanese LIBOR in Japan, the calculation of statutory reserves will not substantially offset the change in fair value of the statutory separate account assets resulting in reductions in statutory surplus. This has resulted and may continue to result in the need to devote significant additional capital to support the product.
Most of these factors are outside of the Company’s control. The Company’s financial strength and credit ratings are significantly influenced by the statutory surplus amounts and RBC ratios of our insurance company subsidiaries. In addition, rating agencies may implement changes to their internal models that have the effect of increasing or decreasing the amount of statutory capital we must hold in order to maintain our current ratings.

108

The Company has reinsured approximately 17% of its risk associated with U.S. GMWB and 67.2% of its risk associated with the aggregate U.S. GMDB exposure. These reinsurance agreements serve to reduce the Company’s exposure to changes in the statutory reserves and the related capital and RBC ratios associated with changes in the capital markets. The Company also continues to explore other solutions for mitigating the capital market risk effect on surplus, such as internal and external reinsurance solutions, modifications to our hedging program, changes in product design, increasing pricing and expense management.
Credit Risk
Credit risk is defined as the risk of financial loss due to uncertainty of an obligor’s or counterparty’s ability or willingness to meet its obligations in accordance with agreed upon terms. The majority of the Company’s credit risk is concentrated in its investment holdings but is also present in reinsurance and insurance portfolios. Credit risk is comprised of three major factors: the risk of change in credit quality, or credit migration risk; the risk of default; and the risk of a change in value of a financial instrument due to changes in credit spread that are unrelated to changes in obligor credit quality. A decline in creditworthiness is typically associated with an increase in an investment’s credit spread, potentially resulting in an increase in other-than-temporary impairments and an increased probability of a realized loss upon sale.
The objective of the Company’s enterprise credit risk management strategy is to identify, quantify, and manage credit risk on an aggregate portfolio basis and to limit potential losses in accordance with an established credit risk appetite. The Company manages to its risk appetite by primarily holding a diversified mix of investment grade issuers and counterparties across its investment, reinsurance, and insurance portfolios. Potential losses are also limited within portfolios by diversifying across geographic regions, asset types, and sectors.
The Company manages a credit exposure from its inception to its maturity or sale. Both the investment and reinsurance areas have formulated procedures for counterparty approvals and authorizations. Although approval processes may vary by area and type of credit risk, approval processes establish minimum levels of creditworthiness and financial stability. Eligible credits are subjected to prudent and conservative underwriting reviews. Within the investment portfolio, private securities, such as commercial mortgages, and private placements, must be presented to their respective review committees for approval.
Credit risks are managed on an on-going basis through the use of various processes and analyses. At the investment, reinsurance, and insurance product levels, fundamental credit analyses are performed at the issuer/counterparty level on a regular basis. To provide a holistic review within the investment portfolio, fundamental analyses are supported by credit ratings, assigned by nationally recognized rating agencies or internally assigned, and by quantitative credit analyses. The Company utilizes a credit Value at Risk ("VaR") to measure default and migration risk on a monthly basis. Issuer and security level risk measures are also utilized. In the event of deterioration in credit quality, the Company maintains watch lists of problem counterparties within the investment and reinsurance portfolios. The watch lists are updated based on regular credit examinations and management reviews. The Company also performs quarterly assessments of probable expected losses in the investment portfolio. The process is conducted on a sector basis and is intended to promptly assess and identify potential problems in the portfolio and to recognize necessary impairments.
Credit risk policies at the enterprise and operation level ensure comprehensive and consistent approaches to quantifying, evaluating, and managing credit risk under expected and stressed conditions. These policies define the scope of the risk, authorities, accountabilities, terms, and limits, and are regularly reviewed and approved by senior management and ERM. Aggregate counterparty credit quality and exposure is monitored on a daily basis utilizing an enterprise-wide credit exposure information system that contains data on issuers, ratings, exposures, and credit limits. Exposures are tracked on a current and potential basis. Credit exposures are reported regularly to the ERCC and to the Finance, Investment and Risk Management Committee (“FIRMCo”). Exposures are aggregated by ultimate parent across investments, reinsurance receivables, insurance products with credit risk, and derivative counterparties. The credit database and reporting system are available to all key credit practitioners in the enterprise.
The Company exercises various and differing methods to mitigate its credit risk exposure within its investment and reinsurance portfolios. Some of the reasons for mitigating credit risk include financial instability or poor credit, avoidance of arbitration or litigation, future uncertainty, and exposure in excess of risk tolerances. Credit risk within the investment portfolio is most commonly mitigated through the use of derivative instruments or asset sales. Counterparty credit risk is mitigated through the practice of entering into contracts only with highly creditworthy institutions and through the practice of holding and posting of collateral. Systemic credit risk is mitigated through the construction of high-quality, diverse portfolios that are subject to regular underwriting of credit risks. For further discussion of the Company’s investment and derivative instruments, see the Investment Management section and Note 6 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. Further discussion on managing and mitigating credit risk from the use of reinsurance via an enterprise security review process, see the Reinsurance section.
As of December 31, 2012, the Company's only exposure to any credit concentration risk of a single issuer greater than 10% of the Company's stockholders' equity, other than the U.S. government and certain U.S. government securities, was the Government of Japan, which represented $2.7 billion, or 12% of stockholders' equity, and 2% of total invested assets. For further discussion of concentration of credit risk, see the Concentration of Credit Risk section in Note 6 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

109

Derivative Instruments
The Company utilizes a variety of over-the-counter and exchange traded derivative instruments as a part of its overall risk management strategy, as well as to enter into replication transactions. Derivative instruments are used to manage risk associated with interest rate, equity market, credit spread, issuer default, price, and currency exchange rate risk or volatility. Replication transactions are used as an economical means to synthetically replicate the characteristics and performance of assets that would otherwise be permissible investments under the Company’s investment policies. For further information on the Company’s use of derivatives, see Note 6 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Derivative activities are monitored and evaluated by the Company’s compliance and risk management teams and reviewed by senior management. In addition, the Company monitors counterparty credit exposure on a monthly basis to ensure compliance with Company policies and statutory limitations. The notional amounts of derivative contracts represent the basis upon which pay or receive amounts are calculated and are not reflective of credit risk. Downgrades to the credit ratings of The Hartford’s insurance operating companies may have adverse implications for its use of derivatives including those used to hedge benefit guarantees of variable annuities. In some cases, downgrades may give derivative counterparties the unilateral contractual right to cancel and settle outstanding derivative trades or require additional collateral to be posted. In addition, downgrades may result in counterparties becoming unwilling to engage in additional over-the-counter (“OTC”) derivatives requiring greater collateralization before entering into any new trades. This will restrict the supply of derivative instruments commonly used to hedge variable annuity guarantees, particularly long-dated equity derivatives and interest rate swaps. Under these circumstances, the Company’s operating subsidiaries could conduct hedging activity using a combination of cash and exchange-traded instruments, in addition to using the available OTC derivatives.
The Company uses various derivative counterparties in executing its derivative transactions. The use of counterparties creates credit risk that the counterparty may not perform in accordance with the terms of the derivative transaction. The Company has developed a derivative counterparty exposure policy which limits the Company’s exposure to credit risk. The derivative counterparty exposure policy establishes market-based credit limits, favors long-term financial stability and creditworthiness of the counterparty and typically requires credit enhancement/credit risk reducing agreements. The Company minimizes the credit risk of derivative instruments by entering into transactions with high quality counterparties primarily rated A or better, which are monitored and evaluated by the Company’s risk management team and reviewed by senior management. In addition, the Company monitors counterparty credit exposure on a monthly basis to ensure compliance with Company policies and statutory limitations. The Company also generally requires that derivative contracts, other than exchange traded contracts, certain forward contracts, and certain embedded and reinsurance derivatives, be governed by an International Swaps and Derivatives Association Master Agreement, which is structured by legal entity and by counterparty and permits right of offset.
The Company has developed credit exposure thresholds which are based upon counterparty ratings. Credit exposures are measured using the market value of the derivatives, resulting in amounts owed to the Company by its counterparties or potential payment obligations from the Company to its counterparties. Credit exposures are generally quantified daily based on the prior business day’s market value and collateral is pledged to and held by, or on behalf of, the Company to the extent the current value of the derivatives exceed the contractual thresholds. In accordance with industry standard and the contractual agreements, collateral is typically settled on the next business day. The Company has exposure to credit risk for amounts below the exposure thresholds which are uncollateralized, as well as for market fluctuations that may occur between contractual settlement periods of collateral movements.
For the company’s domestic derivative programs, the maximum uncollateralized threshold for a derivative counterparty for a single legal entity is $ 10 . The Company currently transacts OTC derivatives in five legal entities that have a threshold greater than zero and therefore the maximum combined threshold for a single counterparty across all legal entities that use derivatives is $ 50 . In addition, the Company may have exposure to multiple counterparties in a single corporate family due to a common credit support provider. As of December 31, 2012 , for the company’s domestic derivative programs, the maximum combined threshold for all counterparties under a single credit support provider across all legal entities that use derivatives is $ 100 . Based on the contractual terms of the collateral agreements, these thresholds may be immediately reduced due to a downgrade in either party’s credit rating. Beginning in the fourth quarter of 2011, the Company began hedging its Japan exposures within the legal entity HLIKK. The counterparty credit exposures at HLIKK are generally managed to be consistent with the maximum uncollateralized threshold of the domestic program. However, for three HLIKK counterparties, the maximum uncollateralized exposures are higher than $10 . These three counterparties maintain credit ratings of A3 or better and the Company actively monitors their credit standing. For further discussion, see the Derivative Commitments section of Note 13 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
For the year ended December 31, 2012 , the Company has incurred no losses on derivative instruments due to counterparty default.

110

In addition to counterparty credit risk, the Company may also introduce credit risk through the use of credit default swaps that are entered into to manage credit exposure. Credit default swaps involve a transfer of credit risk of one or many referenced entities from one party to another in exchange for periodic payments. The party that purchases credit protection will make periodic payments based on an agreed upon rate and notional amount, and for certain transactions there will also be an upfront premium payment. The second party, who assumes credit risk, will typically only make a payment if there is a credit event as defined in the contract and such payment will be typically equal to the notional value of the swap contract less the value of the referenced security issuer’s debt obligation. A credit event is generally defined as default on contractually obligated interest or principal payments or bankruptcy of the referenced entity.
The Company uses credit derivatives to purchase credit protection and to assume credit risk with respect to a single entity, referenced index, or asset pool. The Company purchases credit protection through credit default swaps to economically hedge and manage credit risk of certain fixed maturity investments across multiple sectors of the investment portfolio. The Company also enters into credit default swaps that assume credit risk as part of replication transactions. Replication transactions are used as an economical means to synthetically replicate the characteristics and performance of assets that would otherwise be permissible investments under the Company’s investment policies. These swaps reference investment grade single corporate issuers and baskets, which include customized diversified portfolios of corporate issuers, which are established within sector concentration limits and may be divided into tranches which possess different credit ratings.
As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , the notional amount related to credit derivatives that purchase credit protection was $ 2.2 billion and $ 1.7 billion , respectively, while the fair value was $ 21 and $ 36 , respectively. As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , the notional amount related to credit derivatives that assume credit risk was $ 2.7 billion and $ 3.0 billion , respectively, while the fair value was $ (29) and $ (648) , respectively. For further information on credit derivatives, see Note 6 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Investment Portfolio Risks and Risk Management
Investment Portfolio Composition
The following table presents the Company’s fixed maturities, AFS, by credit quality. The ratings referenced below are based on the ratings of a nationally recognized rating organization or, if not rated, assigned based on the Company’s internal analysis of such securities.
Fixed Maturities by Credit Quality
 
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
 
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Percent of Total Fair Value
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Percent of Total Fair Value
United States Government/Government agencies
$
10,481

$
10,975

12.8
%
$
8,901

$
9,364

11.4
%
AAA
8,646

9,220

10.7
%
9,631

10,113

12.4
%
AA
14,939

16,104

18.7
%
15,471

15,844

19.4
%
A
20,396

22,650

26.4
%
19,501

21,053

25.7
%
BBB
20,833

22,689

26.4
%
20,972

21,760

26.6
%
BB & below
4,452

4,284

5.0
%
4,502

3,675

4.5
%
Total fixed maturities
$
79,747

85,922

100.0
%
$
78,978

81,809

100.0
%
The movement in the overall credit quality of the Company’s portfolio was primarily attributable to an increase in U.S. Government/Government agencies, which increased largely due to collateral associated with repurchase agreements and dollar roll transactions. For further information on repurchase and dollar roll agreements, see Note 6 of the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements. Fixed maturities, FVO, are not included in the above table. For further discussion on fair value option securities, see Note 5 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

111

The following table presents the Company’s AFS securities by type, as well as fixed maturities, FVO.
Securities by Type
 
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
 
Cost or Amortized Cost
Gross Unrealized Gains
Gross Unrealized Losses
Fair Value
Percent of Total Fair Value
Cost or Amortized Cost
Gross Unrealized Gains
Gross Unrealized Losses
Fair Value
Percent of Total Fair Value
Asset-backed securities (“ABS”)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consumer loans
$
2,234

$
29

$
(116
)
$
2,147

2.5
%
$
2,688

$
34

$
(208
)
$
2,514

3.1
%
Small business
336

7

(67
)
276

0.3
%
418

1

(123
)
296

0.4
%
Other
313

27

—

340

0.4
%
324

20

(1
)
343

0.4
%
Collateralized debt obligations ("CDOs")
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Collateralized loan obligations (“CLOs”)
2,197

—

(68
)
2,129

2.5
%
2,334

—

(181
)
2,153

2.6
%
Commercial real estate ("CREs")
420

44

(80
)
384

0.4
%
485

16

(167
)
334

0.4
%
Other [1]
553

16

(11
)
527

0.6
%
—

—

—

—

—
%
Commercial mortgage-backed securities ("CMBS")
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Agency backed [2]
962

79

—

1,041

1.2
%
637

40

—

677

0.8
%
Bonds
4,535

293

(160
)
4,668

5.4
%
5,992

182

(487
)
5,687

7.0
%
Interest only (“IOs”)
586

45

(19
)
612

0.7
%
563

49

(25
)
587

0.7
%
Corporate
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Basic industry [1]
3,741

369

(6
)
4,104

4.8
%
3,690

309

(19
)
3,979

4.9
%
Capital goods
3,109

389

(2
)
3,496

4.1
%
3,327

331

(33
)
3,625

4.4
%
Consumer cyclical
2,423

266

(5
)
2,684

3.1
%
2,277

206

(8
)
2,475

3.0
%
Consumer non-cyclical
5,927

759

(7
)
6,679

7.8
%
5,985

644

(13
)
6,616

8.1
%
Energy
3,816

499

(3
)
4,312

5.0
%
3,338

381

(15
)
3,704

4.5
%
Financial services
7,230

604

(211
)
7,623

8.9
%
7,763

334

(526
)
7,571

9.3
%
Tech./comm.
3,971

526

(16
)
4,481

5.2
%
4,357

443

(61
)
4,739

5.8
%
Transportation
1,393

163

(2
)
1,554

1.8
%
1,285

123

(6
)
1,402

1.7
%
Utilities
7,792

1,017

(24
)
8,785

10.2
%
8,236

857

(38
)
9,055

11.2
%
Other [1]
292

39

—

331

0.4
%
903

33

(20
)
845

1.0
%
Foreign govt./govt. agencies
3,985

191

(40
)
4,136

4.8
%
2,030

141

(10
)
2,161

2.6
%
Municipal Taxable
2,235

246

(15
)
2,466

2.9
%
1,688

120

(51
)
1,757

2.1
%
Tax-exempt
10,766

1,133

(4
)
11,895

13.9
%
10,869

655

(21
)
11,503

14.1
%
Residential mortgage-backed securities ("RMBS")
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Agency
5,906

259

(3
)
6,162

7.2
%
4,436

222

—

4,658

5.7
%
Non-agency
—

—

—

—

—
%
62

—

(2
)
60

0.1
%
Alt-A
38

—

(1
)
37

—
%
115

5

(21
)
99

0.1
%
Sub-prime
1,374

36

(129
)
1,281

1.5
%
1,348

25

(433
)
940

1.1
%
U.S. Treasuries
3,613

175

(16
)
3,772

4.4
%
3,828

203

(2
)
4,029

4.9
%
Fixed maturities, AFS
79,747

7,211

(1,005
)
85,922

100
%
78,978

5,374

(2,471
)
81,809

100
%
Equity securities
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial services
331

15

(42
)
304

 
479

10

(187
)
302

 
Other
535

66

(15
)
586

 
577

58

(16
)
619

 
Equity securities, AFS
866

81

(57
)
890

 
1,056

68

(203
)
921

 
Total AFS securities [3]
$
80,613

$
7,292

$
(1,062
)
$
86,812

 
$
80,034

$
5,442

$
(2,674
)
$
82,730

 
Fixed maturities, FVO [3]
 
 
 
$
1,087

 
 
 
 
$
1,328

 
[1]
Gross unrealized gains (losses) exclude the fair value of bifurcated embedded derivative features of certain securities. Changes in value are recorded in net realized capital gains (losses).
[2]
Includes securities with pools of loans issued by the Small Business Administration which are backed by the full faith and credit of the U.S. government.
[3]
Includes investments relating to the sales of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses; see Note 2 - Business Dispositions of the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements for further discussion of this transaction.

112


The Company continues to invest in a diversified portfolio with purchases focused on investment grade corporate bonds and additional investments into RMBS agencies and U.S. Treasuries as a part of repurchase and dollar roll transactions. For further information on repurchase and dollar roll agreements, see Note 6 of the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements. The Company also reinvested short-term investments into foreign government securities to generate an additional return in support of Japan-related liabilities. In addition, the Company continued to prudently manage exposure to riskier assets through selective sales of CMBS, financial and European exposures. The Company's AFS net unrealized position improved primarily as a result of improved security valuations largely due to credit spread tightening and declining interest rates. Fixed maturities, FVO, primarily represents Japan government securities supporting the Japan fixed annuity product, as well as securities containing an embedded credit derivative for which the Company elected the fair value option. The underlying credit risk of the securities containing credit derivatives are primarily investment grade CRE CDOs. For further discussion on fair value option securities, see Note 5 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
European Exposure
Many economies within Europe continue to experience significant adverse economic conditions which have been precipitated in part by high unemployment rates and government debt levels. As a result, issuers in several European countries have experienced credit deterioration and rating downgrades and a reduced ability to access capital markets and/or higher borrowing costs. The concerns regarding the European countries have impacted the capital markets which, in turn, has made it more difficult to contain the European financial crisis. Austerity measures aimed at reducing sovereign debt levels, along with steps taken by the European Central Bank to provide liquidity and credit support to certain countries issuing debt, have helped to stabilize markets to a degree recently. However, core issues still remain. Further contraction of gross domestic product along with elevated unemployment levels may continue to put pressure on sovereign debt.
The Company manages the credit risk associated with the European securities within the investment portfolio on an on-going basis using several processes which are supported by macroeconomic analysis and issuer credit analysis. For additional details regarding the Company’s management of credit risk, see the Credit Risk section of this MD&A. The Company periodically considers alternate scenarios, including a base-case and both a positive and negative “tail” scenario that includes a partial or full break-up of the Eurozone. The outlook for key factors is evaluated, including the economic prospects for key countries, the potential for the spread of sovereign debt contagion, and the likelihood that policymakers and politicians pursue sufficient fiscal discipline and introduce appropriate backstops. Given the inherent uncertainty in the outcome of developments in the Eurozone, however, the Company has been focused on controlling both absolute levels of exposure and the composition of that exposure through both bond and derivative transactions.
The Company has limited direct European exposure, totaling only 5% of total invested assets as of December 31, 2012 . The following tables present the Company’s European securities included in the Securities by Type table above. The Company identifies exposures with the issuers’ ultimate parent country of domicile, which may not be the country of the security issuer. Certain European countries were separately listed below, specifically, Greece, Italy, Ireland, Portugal and Spain (“GIIPS”), because of the current significant economic strains persisting in these countries. The criteria used for identifying the countries separately listed includes credit default spreads that exceed the iTraxx SovX index level, an S&P credit quality rating lower than BBB and a gross domestic product ("GDP") greater than $200 billion.

113

The following tables present the Company’s European securities included in the Securities by Type table above.
December 31, 2012
 
Corporate & Equity, AFS Non-Finan. [1]
Corporate & Equity, AFS Financials
Foreign Govt./ Govt. Agencies
Total
 
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Italy
$
4

$
4

$
—

$
—

$
—

$
—

$
4

$
4

Spain [3]
53

52

20

20

—

—

73

72

Ireland
143

145

—

—

—

—

143

145

Portugal
—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Greece
—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Higher risk
200

201

20

20

—

—

220

221

Europe excluding higher risk
4,022

4,525

1,158

1,182

751

827

5,931

6,534

Total Europe
$
4,222

$
4,726

$
1,178

$
1,202

$
751

$
827

$
6,151

$
6,755

Europe exposure net of credit default swap protection [2]
 
 
 
 
 
 
$
5,767

$
6,752

December 31, 2011
 
Corporate & Equity, AFS Non-Finan. [1]
Corporate & Equity, AFS Financials
Foreign Govt./ Govt. Agencies
Total
 
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Italy
$
314

$
255

$
—

$
—

$
—

$
—

$
314

$
255

Spain [3]
191

189

20

19

—

—

211

208

Ireland
163

162

—

—

—

—

163

162

Portugal
15

15

—

—

—

—

15

15

Greece
—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Higher risk
683

621

20

19

—

—

703

640

Europe excluding higher risk
4,277

4,695

1,255

1,135

901

970

6,433

6,800

Total Europe
$
4,960

$
5,316

$
1,275

$
1,154

$
901

$
970

$
7,136

$
7,440

Europe exposure net of credit default swap protection [2]
 
 
 
 
 
 
$
6,439

$
7,467

[1]
Includes amortized cost and fair value of $ 74 as of December 31, 2012 and $ 67 as of December 31, 2011 related to limited partnerships and other alternative investments, the majority of which is domiciled in the United Kingdom.
[2]
Includes a notional amount and fair value of $ 384 and $ (3) , respectively, as of December 31, 2012 and $ 697 and $ 27 , respectively, as of December 31, 2011 related to credit default swap protection. This includes a notional amount of $ 56 and $ 89 as of December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011 , respectively, related to single name corporate issuers in the financial services sector.
[3]
The Company has credit default swap protection with a notional amount of $ 20 related to the Corporate and Equity, AFS Financial Services.
The Company’s European investment exposure largely relates to corporate entities which are domiciled in or generated a significant portion of its revenue within the United Kingdom, Germany, the Netherlands and Switzerland. As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , exposure to the United Kingdom totals less than 2% of total invested assets. The majority of investments are U.S. dollar-denominated, and those securities that are pound and euro-denominated are hedged to U.S. dollars or support foreign-denominated liabilities. For a discussion of foreign currency risks, see the Foreign Currency Exchange Risk section of this MD&A. The Company does not hold any sovereign exposure to the higher risk countries and does not hold any exposure to issuers in Greece. As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , the Company’s unfunded commitments associated with its investment portfolio was immaterial, and the weighted average credit quality of European investments was A- and A, respectively.
As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , the Company’s total credit default swaps that provide credit protection on European issuers had a notional amount of $ 384 and $ 697 , respectively, and a fair value of $ (3) and $ 27 , respectively. Included in those notional amounts as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 were $ 384 and $ 407 , respectively, on credit default swaps that reference single name corporate and financial European issuers, of which $ 23 and $ 125 , respectively, relate to the higher risk countries. The maturity dates of credit defaults swaps are primarily consistent with the hedged bonds. Also included are credit default swaps with a notional amount of $290 as of December 31, 2011 which reference a standard basket of European corporate and financial issuers. For further information on the use of the Company’s credit derivatives and counterparty credit quality, see Derivative Instruments within the Credit Risk section of this MD&A.

114

In addition to the credit risk associated with the investment portfolio, the Company has $236 of reinsurance recoverables due from legal entity counterparties domiciled within Europe. For a more detail discussion of the Company's reinsurance arrangements, see Note 7 of the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
Included in the Company’s equity securities, trading, portfolio are investments in World Government Bond Index Funds (“WGBI funds”). The fair value of the WGBI funds at December 31, 2012 and 2011 was $ 11.8 billion and $ 12.5 billion, respectively. Because several of these funds are managed by third party asset managers, the Company does not have access to detailed holdings; however, the WGBI funds' investment mandate follows the Citigroup non-Japan World Government Fund Index (“the index”) and includes allocations to certain European sovereign debt. The estimated fair value of the European allocation based upon the index benchmark allocation was $ 5.0 billion and $ 5.4 billion as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively. Included in this estimated European exposure were investments in Ireland, Italy, Portugal and Spain with an estimated fair value of $ 1.6 billion and $ 1.7 billion as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively. The index guidelines allow investment in issuers rated BBB- or higher by Standard and Poor's or Baa3 or higher by Moody's. Should an issuer’s credit rating fall below both of these rating levels they will be removed from the Index and the holdings will be liquidated. Because these assets support the international variable annuity business, changes in the value of these investments are reflected in the corresponding policyholder liabilities. The Company’s indirect exposure to these holdings is through any guarantees issued on the underlying variable annuity policies. The Company has also entered into credit default swaps with a notional amount and fair value of $350 and $28 , respectively, to hedge certain sovereign credit risks.
Financial Services
The Company’s exposure to the financial services sector is predominantly through banking and insurance institutions. The following table presents the Company’s exposure to the financial services sector included in the Securities by Type table above.
 
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
 
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Net Unrealized
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Net Unrealized
AAA
$
47

$
49

$
2

$
240

$
245

$
5

AA
1,039

1,125

86

1,698

1,675

(23
)
A
3,539

3,763

224

3,664

3,685

21

BBB
2,537

2,563

26

2,335

1,998

(337
)
BB & below
399

427

28

305

270

(35
)
Total
$
7,561

$
7,927

$
366

$
8,242

$
7,873

$
(369
)
Domestic financial companies continued to stabilize throughout 2012 due to improved earnings performance, strengthening of asset quality and capital generation. However, spread volatility remains high due to capital market and economic uncertainty surrounding debt ceiling and sequestration issues, as well as lingering concerns related to the Eurozone. Financial institutions remain vulnerable to these concerns, as well as ongoing stress in the real estate markets which could adversely impact the Company’s net unrealized position.
Commercial Real Estate
The commercial real estate market continued to show signs of improving fundamentals such as spread tightening, firming property prices, increases in transaction volume and modestly easing financing conditions. While delinquencies still remain at elevated levels, they have improved throughout 2012.
The following table presents the Company’s exposure to CMBS bonds by current credit quality and vintage year, included in the Securities by Type table above. Credit protection represents the current weighted average percentage of the outstanding capital structure subordinated to the Company’s investment holding that is available to absorb losses before the security incurs the first dollar loss of principal and excludes any equity interest or property value in excess of outstanding debt.

115

CMBS — Bonds [1]
December 31, 2012
 
AAA
AA
A
BBB
BB and Below
Total
 
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
2003 & Prior
$
180

$
184

$
102

$
103

$
57

$
56

$
5

$
5

$
42

$
43

$
386

$
391

2004
171

178

73

82

36

36

24

24

20

12

324

332

2005
446

485

105

107

121

122

152

139

100

82

924

935

2006
682

757

167

178

129

135

235

229

316

278

1,529

1,577

2007
371

409

289

301

150

154

31

31

188

160

1,029

1,055

2008
55

66

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

55

66

2009
28

30

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

28

30

2010
18

21

—

—

22

23

—

—

—

—

40

44

2011
121

135

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

121

135

2012
98

102

—

—

—

—

1

1

—

—

99

103

Total
$
2,170

$
2,367

$
736

$
771

$
515

$
526

$
448

$
429

$
666

$
575

$
4,535

$
4,668

Credit  protection
29.7%
23.4%
23.3%
16.8%
9.2%
23.7%
December 31, 2011
 
AAA
AA
A
BBB
BB and Below
Total
 
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
2003 
& Prior
$
408

$
415

$
148

$
144

$
83

$
81

$
16

$
13

$
33

$
30

$
688

$
683

2004
333

349

68

75

45

41

30

28

26

21

502

514

2005
520

556

101

96

178

151

177

138

71

57

1,047

998

2006
713

762

516

493

180

159

362

298

430

302

2,201

2,014

2007
245

267

296

275

123

97

166

130

195

149

1,025

918

2008
55

60

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

55

60

2009
28

29

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

28

29

2010
29

31

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

29

31

2011
417

440

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

417

440

Total
$
2,748

$
2,909

$
1,129

$
1,083

$
609

$
529

$
751

$
607

$
755

$
559

$
5,992

$
5,687

Credit 
protection
27.3%
22.7%
19.7%
13.8%
8.2%
21.6%
[1] The vintage year represents the year the pool of loans was originated.
The Company also has AFS exposure to CRE CDOs with an amortized cost and fair value of $ 420 and $ 384 , respectively, as of December 31, 2012 and $ 485 and $ 334 , respectively, as of December 31, 2011 . These securities are comprised of diversified pools of commercial mortgage loans or equity positions of other CMBS securitizations. Although the Company does not plan to invest in this asset class going forward, we continue to monitor these investments as economic and market uncertainties regarding future performance impact market liquidity and security premiums.
In addition to CMBS bonds and CRE CDOs, the Company has exposure to commercial mortgage loans as presented in the following table. These loans are collateralized by a variety of commercial properties and are diversified both geographically throughout the United States and by property type. These loans may be either in the form of a whole loan, where the Company is the sole lender, or a loan participation. Loan participations are loans where the Company has purchased or retained a portion of an outstanding loan or package of loans and participates on a pro-rata basis in collecting interest and principal pursuant to the terms of the participation agreement. In general, A-Note participations have senior payment priority, followed by B-Note participations and then mezzanine loan participations. As of December 31, 2012 , loans within the Company’s mortgage loan portfolio that have had extensions or restructurings other than what is allowable under the original terms of the contract are immaterial.

116

Commercial Mortgage Loans
 
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
 
Amortized Cost [1]
Valuation Allowance
Carrying Value
Amortized Cost [1]
Valuation Allowance
Carrying Value
Agricultural
$
150

$
(8
)
$
142

$
268

$
(19
)
$
249

Whole loans
6,023

(10
)
6,013

4,892

(17
)
4,875

A-Note participations
255

—

255

265

—

265

B-Note participations
263

(50
)
213

296

(66
)
230

Mezzanine loans
88

—

88

109

—

109

Total [2]
$
6,779

$
(68
)
$
6,711

$
5,830

$
(102
)
$
5,728

[1]
Amortized cost represents carrying value prior to valuation allowances, if any.
[2]
Includes commercial mortgage loans relating to the sales of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses; see Note 2 - Business Dispositions of the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements for further discussion of this transaction.

Since December 31, 2011 , the Company funded $ 1.4 billion of commercial whole loans with a weighted average loan-to-value (“LTV”) ratio of 62 % and a weighted average yield of 3.8 %. The Company continues to originate commercial whole loans in primary markets, such as multi-family and retail, focusing on loans with strong LTV ratios and high quality property collateral. The Company had mortgage loans held-for-sale with a carrying value and valuation allowance of $ 47 and $ 3 , respectively, as of December 31, 2012 , and $ 74 and $ 4 , respectively, as of December 31, 2011 .
Municipal Bonds
The Company holds investments in securities backed by states, municipalities and political subdivisions (“municipal”) with an amortized cost and fair value of $ 13.0 billion and $ 14.4 billion, respectively, as of December 31, 2012 , and $ 12.6 billion and $ 13.3 billion, respectively, as of December 31, 2011 . The Company’s municipal bond portfolio primarily consists of high quality essential service revenue and general obligation bonds. As of December 31, 2012 , the largest issuer concentrations were the states of California , Illinois and Massachusetts , which each comprised less than 4 % of the municipal bond portfolio and were primarily comprised of general obligation and taxable bonds . As of December 31, 2011 , the largest issuer concentrations were the states of California , Massachusetts and Illinois , which each comprised less than 3 % of the municipal bond portfolio and were primarily comprised of general obligation bonds .
Limited Partnerships and Other Alternative Investments
The following table presents the Company’s investments in limited partnerships and other alternative investments which include hedge funds, mortgage and real estate funds, mezzanine debt funds, and private equity and other funds. Hedge funds include investments in funds of funds and direct funds. These hedge funds invest in a variety of strategies including global macro and long/short credit and equity. Mortgage and real estate funds consist of investments in funds whose assets consist of mortgage loans, mortgage loan participations, mezzanine loans or other notes which may be below investment grade, as well as equity real estate and real estate joint ventures. Mezzanine debt funds include investments in funds whose assets consist of subordinated debt that often incorporate equity-based options such as warrants and a limited amount of direct equity investments. Private equity and other funds primarily consist of investments in funds whose assets typically consist of a diversified pool of investments in small to mid-sized non-public businesses with high growth potential.
 
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
 
Amount
Percent
Amount
Percent
Hedge funds
$
1,309

43.4
%
$
896

35.4
%
Mortgage and real estate funds
501

16.6
%
479

18.9
%
Mezzanine debt funds
108

3.6
%
118

4.7
%
Private equity and other funds
1,097

36.4
%
1,039

41.0
%
Total
$
3,015

100
%
$
2,532

100
%
Since December 31, 2011 , the Company increased its investment in hedge funds with the expectation of generating attractive risk-adjusted returns over time.

117

Available-for-Sale Securities — Unrealized Loss Aging
The total gross unrealized losses were $ 1.1 billion as of December 31, 2012 , which have improved $ 1.6 billion, or 60% , from December 31, 2011 due to credit spread tightening and lower interest rates. As of December 31, 2012 , $ 561 of the gross unrealized losses were associated with securities depressed less than 20% of cost or amortized cost.
The remaining $501 of gross unrealized losses were associated with securities depressed greater than 20%, which includes $90 associated with securities depressed over 50% for twelve months or more. The securities depressed more than 20% are primarily corporate financial securities, commercial and residential real estate, as well as ABS backed by student loans that have market spreads that continue to be wider than the spreads at the securities' respective purchase dates. The unrealized losses remain largely due to the continued market and economic uncertainties surrounding financial services, residential and certain commercial real estate and ABS student loans. Based upon the Company’s cash flow modeling and current market and collateral performance assumptions, these securities have sufficient credit protection levels to receive contractually obligated principal and interest payments. Also included in the gross unrealized losses depressed greater than 20% are financial services securities that have a floating-rate coupon and/or long-dated maturities.
As part of the Company’s ongoing security monitoring process, the Company has reviewed its AFS securities in an unrealized loss position and concluded that there were no additional impairments as of December 31, 2012 and that these securities are temporarily depressed and are expected to recover in value as the securities approach maturity or as real estate related market spreads continue to improve. For these securities in an unrealized loss position where a credit impairment has not been recorded, the Company’s best estimate of expected future cash flows are sufficient to recover the amortized cost basis of the security. Furthermore, the Company neither has an intention to sell nor does it expect to be required to sell these securities. For further information regarding the Company’s impairment analysis, see Other-Than-Temporary Impairments in the Investment Portfolio Risks and Risk Management section of this MD&A.
The following table presents the Company’s unrealized loss aging for AFS securities by length of time the security was in a continuous unrealized loss position.
 
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
Consecutive Months
Items
Cost or Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Unrealized Loss [1]
Items
Cost or Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Unrealized Loss [1]
Three months or less
771

$
3,964

$
3,893

$
(71
)
855

$
3,933

$
3,672

$
(261
)
Greater than three to six months
306

764

730

(34
)
485

2,617

2,517

(100
)
Greater than six to nine months
183

157

142

(15
)
224

1,181

1,097

(84
)
Greater than nine to eleven months
64

96

90

(6
)
42

106

95

(11
)
Twelve months or more
687

7,850

6,894

(936
)
943

11,613

9,324

(2,218
)
Total
2,011

$
12,831

$
11,749

$
(1,062
)
2,549

$
19,450

$
16,705

$
(2,674
)
[1]
Unrealized losses exclude the fair value of bifurcated embedded derivative features of certain securities as changes in value are recorded in net realized capital gains (losses).
The following tables present the Company’s unrealized loss aging for AFS securities continuously depressed over 20% by length of time (included in the table above).
 
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
Consecutive Months
Items
Cost or Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Unrealized Loss [1]
Items
Cost or Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Unrealized Loss [1]
Three months or less
68

$
54

$
36

$
(18
)
206

$
1,823

$
1,289

$
(500
)
Greater than three to six months
27

22

16

(6
)
134

1,749

1,205

(544
)
Greater than six to nine months
20

72

55

(17
)
42

406

269

(137
)
Greater than nine to eleven months
12

33

25

(8
)
9

1

—

(1
)
Twelve months or more
157

1,329

877

(452
)
239

1,806

1,057

(749
)
Total
284

$
1,510

$
1,009

$
(501
)
630

$
5,785

$
3,820

$
(1,931
)
[1]
Unrealized losses exclude the fair value of bifurcated embedded derivatives features of certain securities as changes in value are recorded in net realized capital gains (losses).


118

The following tables present the Company’s unrealized loss aging for AFS securities continuously depressed over 50% by length of time (included in the tables above).
 
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
Consecutive Months
Items
Cost or Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Unrealized Loss [1]
Items
Cost or Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Unrealized Loss [1]
Three months or less
20

$
48

$
22

$
(26
)
50

$
152

$
55

$
(97
)
Greater than three to six months
4

1

—

(1
)
26

110

46

(64
)
Greater than six to nine months
4

2

—

(2
)
7

33

11

(22
)
Greater than nine to eleven months
7

1

—

(1
)
5

5

1

(4
)
Twelve months or more
27

147

57

(90
)
54

227

71

(156
)
Total
62

$
199

$
79

$
(120
)
142

$
527

$
184

$
(343
)
[1]
Unrealized losses exclude the fair value of bifurcate embedded derivatives features of certain securities as changes in value are recorded in net realized capital gains (losses).

Other-Than-Temporary Impairments
The following table presents the Company’s impairments recognized in earnings by security type excluding intent-to-sell impairment relating to the sales of Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses.
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
ABS
$
29

$
27

$
13

CRE CDOs
10

41

164

CMBS
 
 
 
Bonds
24

16

157

IOs
3

5

3

Corporate
28

50

33

Equity
65

17

14

RMBS Non-agency
—

—

2

RMBS Alt-A
1

1

10

RMBS sub-prime
12

15

37

Other
—

2

1

Total
$
172

$
174

$
434











119

The following table presents the Company's intent-to-sell impairments recognized in earnings relating to the sales of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses by security type. The Company recognized impairments in the amount of the gross unrealized loss as of December 31, 2012 on the securities that were transferred.
 
For the year December 31, 2012
ABS
$
22

CDO
 
CRE CDOs
7

Other CDOs
14

CMBS
 
Bonds
11

IOs
1

Corporate
52

Equity
5

Municipal
1

RMBS Alt-A
5

RMBS sub-prime
57

Other
2

Total
$
177

Year ended December 31, 2012
For the year ended December 31, 2012 , impairments recognized in earnings were comprised of impairments on equity securities of $ 63 , other securities that the Company intends to sell of $61 , excluding the securities included in the sales of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses, and credit impairments of $ 48 . In addition to the intent-to-sell impairments of $61 , were impairments on available-for-sale debt and equity securities of $177 related to the sale of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses.
Impairments on equity securities were largely comprised of downgraded preferred equity securities of financial institutions. Impairments on securities for which the Company has the intent-to-sell, excluding the securities included in the sales of the Retirement Plan and Individual Life businesses, primarily related to European corporate debt where the Company would like the ability to reduce certain exposures, as well as high risk CMBS bonds and ABS collateralized by student loans.
Credit impairments were primarily concentrated in structured securities associated with residential and commercial real estate, as well as ABS small business. The structured securities were impaired primarily due to actual performance or property-specific deterioration of the underlying collateral. The Company calculated these impairments utilizing both a top down modeling approach and a security-specific collateral review. The top down modeling approach used discounted cash flow models that considered losses under current and expected future economic conditions. Assumptions used over the current period included macroeconomic factors, such as a high unemployment rate, as well as sector specific factors such as property values, delinquency levels, service behavior, and severity rates. The macroeconomic assumptions considered by the Company did not materially change during 2012 and, as such, the credit impairments recognized for the year ended December 31, 2012 were primarily driven by actual or expected collateral deterioration, largely as a result of the Company’s security-specific collateral review.
The security-specific collateral review is performed to estimate potential future losses. This review incorporates assumptions about expected future collateral cash flows, including projected rental rates and occupancy levels that varied based on property type and sub-market. The results of the security-specific collateral review allowed the Company to estimate the expected timing of a security’s first loss, if any, and the probability and severity of potential ultimate losses. The Company then discounted these anticipated future cash flows at the security’s book yield prior to impairment.

120

In addition to the credit impairments recognized in earnings, the Company recognized non-credit impairments in other comprehensive income of $ 40 for the year ended December 31, 2012 , predominantly concentrated in corporate financial services and RMBS. These non-credit impairments represent the difference between fair value and the Company’s best estimate of expected future cash flows discounted at the security’s effective yield prior to impairment, rather than at current market implied credit spreads. These non-credit impairments primarily represent increases in market liquidity premiums and credit spread widening that occurred after the securities were purchased, as well as a discount for variable-rate coupons which are paying less than at purchase date. In general, larger liquidity premiums and wider credit spreads are the result of deterioration of the underlying collateral performance of the securities, as well as the risk premium required to reflect future uncertainty in the real estate market.
Future impairments may develop as the result of changes in intent to sell specific securities or if actual results underperform current modeling assumptions, which may be the result of, but are not limited to, macroeconomic factors and security-specific performance below current expectations. Ultimate loss formation will be a function of macroeconomic factors and idiosyncratic security-specific performance. As a result, it is difficult to predict future impairments with accuracy.
Year ended December 31, 2011
For the year ended December 31, 2011 , impairments recognized in earnings were comprised of credit impairments of $ 125 , primarily concentrated on structured securities associated with commercial real estate, as well as direct private investments. Also included were impairments on debt securities for which the Company intended to sel1 of $ 32 , mainly comprised of corporate bonds, certain ABS aircraft bonds and CMBS as market pricing improved, as well as impairments on equity securities of $ 17 primarily related to preferred stock associated with direct private investments.
Year ended December 31, 2010
Impairments recognized in earnings were comprised of credit impairments of $372 primarily concentrated on structured securities associated with commercial and residential real estate. Also included were impairments on debt securities for which the Company intended to sell of $54 , mainly comprised of CMBS bonds in order to take advantage of price appreciation, as well as impairments on equity securities of $8 primarily on below investment grade securities depressed 20% for more than six months.
Valuation Allowances on Mortgage Loans
The following table presents (additions)/reversals to valuation allowances on mortgage loans.
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
Credit-related concerns
$
14

$
27

$
(70
)
Held for sale
 
 
 
Agricultural loans
—

(3
)
(10
)
B-note participations
—

—

(22
)
Mezzanine loans
—

—

(52
)
Total
$
14

$
24

$
(154
)
Year ended December 31, 2012
For the year ended December 31, 2012 , valuation allowances on mortgage loan reversals of $14 were largely driven by recovery of the property collateralizing a B-Note. The valuation allowance was reversed due to an increase in the valuation of the underlying collateral as a result of improved occupancy rates and performance of the property. Continued improvement in commercial real estate property valuations will positively impact future loss development, with future impairments driven by idiosyncratic loan-specific performance.
Year ended December 31, 2011
For the year ended December 31, 2011 , valuation allowances on mortgage loan additions of $24 were largely driven by the release of a reserve associated with the sale of a previously reserved for mezzanine loan. Excluded from the table above are valuation allowances associated with mortgage loans related to the divestiture of Federal Trust Corporation. For further information regarding the divestiture of Federal Trust Corporation, see Note 20 of the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
Year ended December 31, 2010
For the years ended December 31, 2010 , valuation allowances on mortgage loan additions of $(154) , primarily related to B-Note participant and mezzanine loan sales. Also included were additions for expected credit losses due to borrower financial difficulty and/or collateral deterioration.

121

CAPITAL RESOURCES AND LIQUIDITY
Capital resources and liquidity represent the overall financial strength of The Hartford and its insurance operations and their ability to generate cash flows from each of their business segments, borrow funds at competitive rates and raise new capital to meet operating and growth needs over the next twelve months.
Liquidity Requirements and Sources of Capital
The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc.
The liquidity requirements of the holding company of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. (“HFSG Holding Company”) have been and will continue to be met by HFSG Holding Company’s fixed maturities, short-term investments and cash, dividends from its insurance operations, as well as the issuance of common stock, debt or other capital securities and borrowings from its credit facilities, as needed.
As of December 31, 2012, HFSG Holding Company held fixed maturities, short-term investments and cash of $1.4 billion. On February 22, 2013, following extraordinary dividend approval from the State of Connecticut Insurance Department, $1.2 billion was distributed to the HFSG Holding Company from its Connecticut domiciled life insurance subsidiaries. In addition, the Company expects to dissolve its Vermont life reinsurance captive and return approximately $300 of capital to the HFSG Holding Company.
Expected liquidity requirements of the HFSG Holding Company for the next twelve months include interest on debt of approximately $430 , common stockholder dividends, subject to the discretion of the Board of Directors, of approximately $180 , and preferred stock dividends of approximately $21 . On January 31, 2013, the Board of Directors authorized a capital management plan which provides for a $500 equity repurchase program to be completed by December 31, 2014 and for the reduction of approximately $1.0 billion of debt including repayment of $320 of 4.625% senior notes due in July 2013 and $200 of 4.75% senior notes due in March 2014.
During the year ended December 31, 2012 , the Company completed a $500 stock repurchase program authorized by the Board of Directors that permitted for purchases of common stock, as well as warrants and other equity derivative securities. In 2011, the Company repurchased 3.2 million common shares for $51 , and in 2012, repurchased 8.0 million common shares for $149 , as well as all outstanding Series B and Series C warrants held by Allianz for $300 . For additional information see Note 16 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
In addition, in 2010 The Hartford entered into an intercompany liquidity agreement that allows for short-term advances of funds among the HFSG Holding Company and certain affiliates of up to $2.0 billion for liquidity and other general corporate purposes. The Connecticut Insurance Department granted approval for certain affiliated insurance companies that are parties to the agreement to treat receivables from a parent, including the HFSG Holding Company, as admitted assets for statutory accounting purposes.
Debt
Senior Notes
On April 5, 2012, the Company issued $1.55 billion aggregate principal amount of senior notes. The issuance consisted of $325 of 4.000% senior notes due 2017, $800 of 5.125% senior notes due 2022 and $425 of 6.625% senior notes due 2042 (collectively, the “Senior Notes”) for net proceeds of approximately $1.5 billion, after deducting underwriting discounts and offering expenses. The Senior Notes bear interest at their respective rate, payable semi-annually in arrears on April 15 and October 15 of each year, beginning on October 15, 2012.
Junior Subordinated Debentures
On April 17, 2012, the Company (i) repurchased all outstanding 10% fixed-to-floating rate junior subordinated debentures due 2068 with a $1.75 billion aggregate principal amount held by Allianz SE (“Allianz”) (the “10% Debentures”) for $2.125 billion (plus a payment by the Company of unpaid interest on the 10% Debentures) and (ii) settled the repurchase of the Series B and Series C warrants held by Allianz to purchase shares of the Company’s common stock. In addition, the 10% Debentures replacement capital covenant was terminated on April 12, 2012 with the consent of the holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the Company’s outstanding 6.1% senior notes due 2041.
On April 5, 2012, the Company issued $600 aggregate principal amount of 7.875% fixed-to-floating rate junior subordinated debentures due 2042 (the “Debentures”) for net proceeds of approximately $586, after deducting underwriting discounts and offering expenses. The Company financed the repurchase of the 10% Debentures through the issuance of the Senior Notes and the Debentures. The Debentures bear interest from the date of issuance to but excluding April 15, 2022 at an annual rate of 7.875%, payable quarterly in arrears on January 15, April 15, July 15 and October 15 of each year to and including April 15, 2022. Commencing on April 15, 2022 the Debentures bear interest at an annual rate equal to three-month LIBOR, reset quarterly, plus 5.596%, payable quarterly in arrears on January 15, April 15, July 15 and October 15 of each year, commencing on July 15, 2022.
For additional information regarding debt, see Note 15 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. For additional information regarding the warrants, see Note 16 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

122

Dividends
On February 28, 2013, The Hartford’s Board of Directors declared a quarterly dividend of $0.10 per common share payable on April 1, 2013 to common shareholders of record as of March 11, 2013 and a dividend of $18.125 on each share of Series F preferred stock payable on April 1, 2013 to shareholders of record as of March 15, 2013. There are no current restrictions on the HFSG Holding Company's ability to pay dividends to its shareholders. For a discussion of restrictions on dividends to the HFSG Holding Company from its insurance subsidiaries, see "Dividends from Insurance Subsidiaries" below. For a discussion of potential restrictions on the HFSG Holding Company's ability to pay dividends, see the risk factor "Our ability to declare and pay dividends is subject to limitations."
Pension Plans and Other Postretirement Benefits
While the Company has significant discretion in making voluntary contributions to the U. S. qualified defined benefit pension plan, the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended by the Pension Protection Act of 2006 and further amended by the Worker, Retiree, and Employer Recovery Act of 2008, and Internal Revenue Code regulations mandate minimum contributions in certain circumstances. The Company made contributions to the U. S. qualified defined benefit pension plan of $200 in each of 2012, 2011 and 2010. No contributions were made to the other postretirement plans in 2012, 2011 and 2010. The Company’s 2012 required minimum funding contribution was immaterial. The Company presently anticipates contributing approximately $100 to its U. S. qualified defined benefit pension plan in 2013, based upon certain economic and business assumptions. These assumptions include, but are not limited to, equity market performance, changes in interest rates and the Company’s other capital requirements. The Company does not have a required minimum funding contribution for the U.S. qualified defined benefit pension plan for 2013 and the funding requirements for all of the pension plans are expected to be immaterial.
Dividends from Insurance Subsidiaries
Dividends to the HFSG Holding Company from its insurance subsidiaries are restricted. The payment of dividends by Connecticut-domiciled insurers is limited under the insurance holding company laws of Connecticut. These laws require notice to and approval by the state insurance commissioner for the declaration or payment of any dividend, which, together with other dividends or distributions made within the preceding twelve months, exceeds the greater of (i) 10% of the insurer’s policyholder surplus as of December 31 of the preceding year or (ii) net income (or net gain from operations, if such company is a life insurance company) for the twelve-month period ending on the thirty-first day of December last preceding, in each case determined under statutory insurance accounting principles. In addition, if any dividend of a Connecticut-domiciled insurer exceeds the insurer’s earned surplus, it requires the prior approval of the Connecticut Insurance Commissioner. The insurance holding company laws of the other jurisdictions in which The Hartford’s insurance subsidiaries are incorporated (or deemed commercially domiciled) generally contain similar (although in certain instances somewhat more restrictive) limitations on the payment of dividends. Dividends paid to HFSG Holding Company by its life insurance subsidiaries are further dependent on cash requirements of HLI and other factors. The Company’s property-casualty insurance subsidiaries are permitted to pay up to a maximum of approximately $1.4 billion in dividends to HFSG Holding Company in 2013 without prior approval from the applicable insurance commissioner. The life insurance subsidiaries' dividend limitation under the holding company laws of Connecticut is $577 in 2013. However, because the life insurance subsidiaries' earned surplus is negative as of December 31, 2012, the life insurance subsidiaries will not be permitted to pay any dividends in 2013 without prior approval from the Connecticut Insurance Commissioner. In addition to statutory limitations on paying dividends, the Company also takes other items into consideration when determining dividends from subsidiaries. These considerations include, but are not limited to expected earnings and capitalization of the subsidiary, regulatory capital requirements and liquidity requirements of the individual operating company. In 2013 , HFSG Holding Company anticipates receiving approximately $800 in dividends from its property-casualty insurance subsidiaries, net of dividends to fund interest payments on an intercompany note between Hartford Holdings, Inc. and Hartford Fire Insurance Company and no regular dividends from the life insurance subsidiaries. On February 5, 2013 the Company received approval from the State of Connecticut Insurance Department for a $1.2 billion extraordinary dividend from its Connecticut domiciled life insurance subsidiaries. This dividend was paid on February 22, 2013. In 2012 , HFSG Holding Company and HLI received no dividends from the life insurance subsidiaries, and HFSG Holding Company received $1.0 billion in dividends from its property-casualty insurance subsidiaries. The amounts received from its property-casualty insurance subsidiaries included $156 related to funding interest payments on an intercompany note between Hartford Holdings Inc. and Hartford Fire Insurance Company and $841 used in conjunction with other resources at the HFSG Holding Company principally to fund dividends, interest, capital contributions to subsidiaries and debt maturities.
Other Sources of Capital for the HFSG Holding Company
The Hartford endeavors to maintain a capital structure that provides financial and operational flexibility to its insurance subsidiaries, ratings that support its competitive position in the financial services marketplace (see the “Ratings” section below for further discussion), and shareholder returns. As a result, the Company may from time to time raise capital from the issuance of equity, equity-related debt or other capital securities and is continuously evaluating strategic opportunities. The issuance of common equity, equity-related debt or other capital securities could result in the dilution of shareholder interests or reduced net income due to additional interest expense.

123

Shelf Registrations
On August 4, 2010, The Hartford filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) an automatic shelf registration statement (Registration No. 333-168532) for the potential offering and sale of debt and equity securities. The registration statement allows for the following types of securities to be offered: debt securities, junior subordinated debt securities, preferred stock, common stock, depositary shares, warrants, stock purchase contracts, and stock purchase units. In that The Hartford is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 under the Securities Act of 1933, the registration statement went effective immediately upon filing and The Hartford may offer and sell an unlimited amount of securities under the registration statement during the three-year life of the registration statement.
Contingent Capital Facility
The Hartford is party to a put option agreement that provides The Hartford with the right to require the Glen Meadow ABC Trust, a Delaware statutory trust, at any time and from time to time, to purchase The Hartford’s junior subordinated notes in a maximum aggregate principal amount not to exceed $500. Under the Put Option Agreement, The Hartford will pay the Glen Meadow ABC Trust premiums on a periodic basis, calculated with respect to the aggregate principal amount of notes that The Hartford had the right to put to the Glen Meadow ABC Trust for such period. The Hartford has agreed to reimburse the Glen Meadow ABC Trust for certain fees and ordinary expenses. The Company holds a variable interest in the Glen Meadow ABC Trust where the Company is not the primary beneficiary. As a result, the Company did not consolidate the Glen Meadow ABC Trust. As of December 31, 2012 , The Hartford has not exercised its right to require Glen Meadow ABC Trust to purchase the Notes. As a result, the notes remain a source of capital for the HFSG Holding Company.
Commercial Paper and Revolving Credit Facility
The table below details the Company’s short-term debt programs and the applicable balances outstanding.
 
Effective Date
Expiration Date
Maximum Available As of
December 31,
Outstanding As of
December 31,
Description
2012
2011
2012
2011
Commercial Paper
 
 
 
 
 
 
The Hartford
11/10/1986
N/A
$
2,000

$
2,000

$
—

$
—

Revolving Credit Facility
 
 
 
 
 
 
4-year revolving credit facility
1/6/2012
1/6/2016
1,750

—

—

—

5-year revolving credit facility [1]
8/9/2007
8/9/2012
—

1,900

—

—

Total Commercial Paper and Revolving Credit Facility
 
 
$
3,750

$
3,900

$
—

$
—

[1] Terminated in January 2012.
Commercial Paper
While The Hartford’s maximum borrowings available under its commercial paper program are $2.0 billion, the Company is dependent upon market conditions to access short-term financing through the issuance of commercial paper to investors.
Revolving Credit Facilities
In January 2012, the Company entered into a senior unsecured revolving credit facility (the “Credit Facility”) that provides for borrowing capacity up to $1.75 billion (which is available in U.S. dollars, and in Euro, Sterling, Canadian dollars and Japanese Yen) through January 6, 2016. Of the total availability under the Credit Facility, up to $250 is available to support letters of credit issued on behalf of the Company or subsidiaries of the Company. Under the Credit Facility, the Company must maintain a minimum level of consolidated net worth of $14.9 billion. The definition of consolidated net worth under the terms of the Credit Facility, excludes AOCI and includes the Company’s outstanding junior subordinated debentures and perpetual preferred securities, net of discount. In addition, the Company’s maximum ratio of consolidated total debt to consolidated total capitalization is 35%, and the ratio of consolidated total debt of subsidiaries to consolidated total capitalization is limited to 10%. As of December 31, 2012 , the Company was in compliance with all financial covenants under the Credit Facility.
The Hartford’s Japan operations also maintain two lines of credit in support of operations. Both lines of credit are in the amount of approximately $60 , or ¥5 billion, and individually have expiration dates of September 30, 2013 and January 6, 2014.


124

Derivative Commitments
Certain of the Company’s derivative agreements contain provisions that are tied to the financial strength ratings of the individual legal entity that entered into the derivative agreement as set by nationally recognized statistical rating agencies. If the legal entity’s financial strength were to fall below certain ratings, the counterparties to the derivative agreements could demand immediate and ongoing full collateralization and in certain instances demand immediate settlement of all outstanding derivative positions traded under each impacted bilateral agreement. The settlement amount is determined by netting the derivative positions transacted under each agreement. If the termination rights were to be exercised by the counterparties, it could impact the legal entity’s ability to conduct hedging activities by increasing the associated costs and decreasing the willingness of counterparties to transact with the legal entity. The aggregate fair value of all derivative instruments with credit-risk-related contingent features that are in a net liability position as of December 31, 2012 , is $643 . Of this $643 the legal entities have posted collateral of $589 in the normal course of business. Based on derivative market values as of December 31, 2012 , a downgrade of one level below the current financial strength ratings by either Moody’s or S&P could require approximately an additional $37 to be posted as collateral. Based on derivative market values as of December 31, 2012 , a downgrade by either Moody’s or S&P of two levels below the legal entities’ current financial strength ratings could require approximately an additional $57 of assets to be posted as collateral. These collateral amounts could change as derivative market values change, as a result of changes in our hedging activities or to the extent changes in contractual terms are negotiated. The nature of the collateral that we would post, if required, would be primarily in the form of U.S. Treasury bills and U.S. Treasury notes.
As of December 31, 2012 , the aggregate notional amount and fair value of derivative relationships that could be subject to immediate termination in the event of rating agency downgrades to (1) either BBB+ or Baa1 was $ 7.7 billion and $ 257 , respectively, or (2) both BBB+ and Baa1 was $ 10.0 billion and $ 343 , respectively, which includes the amounts in scenario (1). The notional and fair value amounts include a customized GMWB derivative with a notional amount of $ 3.9 billion and a fair value of $ 133 , for which the Company has a contractual right to make a collateral payment in the amount of approximately $ 45 to prevent its termination. This customized GMWB derivative contains an early termination trigger such that if the unsecured, unsubordinated debt of the counterparty’s related party guarantor is downgraded one or more levels below the current rating by S&P, the counterparty could terminate all transactions under the applicable International Swaps and Derivatives Association Master Agreement. As of December 31, 2012 , the gross fair value of all affected derivative contracts is $ 160 , which would approximate the settlement value.
On February 5, 2013 Moody's lowered its counterparty credit and insurer financial strength ratings on Hartford Life and Annuity Insurance Company to Baa2. Given this downgrade action, termination rating triggers of seven derivative counterparty relationships were impacted. The Company is in the process of re-negotiating the rating triggers which it expects to successfully complete. Accordingly, the Company does not expect the current hedging programs to be adversely impacted by the announcement of the downgrade of Hartford Life and Annuity Insurance Company. As of December 31, 2012 , the notional amount and fair value related to these counterparties is $18.8 billion and $331 , respectively. These counterparties have the right to terminate these relationships and would have to settle the outstanding derivatives prior to exercising their termination right. As of December 31, 2012 five of these counterparties combined would owe the Company the derivatives fair value of $ 375 and the Company would owe two counterparties combined $ 44 . Of this $ 44 , the legal entities have posted collateral of $ 33 in the normal course of business. The counterparties have not exercised this termination right. The notional and fair value amounts include a customized GMWB derivative with a notional amount of $ 3.9 billion and a fair value of $ 133 , for which the Company has a contractual right to make a collateral payment in the amount of approximately $ 45 to prevent its termination.




125

Insurance Operations
Current and expected patterns of claim frequency and severity or surrenders may change from period to period but continue to be within historical norms and, therefore, the Company’s insurance operations’ current liquidity position is considered to be sufficient to meet anticipated demands over the next twelve months, including any obligations related to the Company’s restructuring activities. For a discussion and tabular presentation of the Company’s current contractual obligations by period, refer to Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements and Aggregate Contractual Obligations within the Capital Resources and Liquidity section of the MD&A.
The principal sources of operating funds are premiums, fees earned from assets under management and investment income, while investing cash flows originate from maturities and sales of invested assets. The primary uses of funds are to pay claims, claim adjustment expenses, commissions and other underwriting expenses, to purchase new investments and to make dividend payments to the HFSG Holding Company.
The Company’s insurance operations consist of property and casualty insurance products (collectively referred to as “Property & Casualty Operations”) an d life insurance and legacy annuity products (collectively referred to as “Life Operations”).
Property & Casualty Operations
Property & Casualty Operations holds fixed maturity securities including a significant short-term investment position (securities with maturities of one year or less at the time of purchase) to meet liquidity needs.
As of December 31, 2012 , Property & Casualty Operations’ fixed maturities, short-term investments, and cash are summarized as follows:
Fixed maturities
$
26,503

Short-term investments
802

Cash
190

Less: Derivative collateral
169

Total
$
27,326

Liquidity requirements that are unable to be funded by Property & Casualty Operation’s short-term investments would be satisfied with current operating funds, including premiums received or through the sale of invested assets. A sale of invested assets could result in realized losses.
Life Operations
Life Operations’ total general account contractholder obligations are supported by $ 76 billion   of cash and total general account invested assets, excluding equity securities, trading, which includes a significant short-term investment position to meet liquidity needs.
As of December 31, 2012 , Life Operations’ fixed maturities, short-term investments, and cash are summarized as follows:
Fixed maturities
$
59,964

Short-term investments
2,947

Cash
2,231

Less: Derivative collateral
1,151

       Cash associated with Japan variable annuities
622

Total
$
63,369

Capital resources available to fund liquidity, upon contractholder surrender, are a function of the legal entity in which the liquidity requirement resides. Generally, obligations of Group Benefits will be funded by Hartford Life and Accident Insurance Company. Obligations of Talcott Resolution will generally be funded by Hartford Life Insurance Company and Hartford Life and Annuity Insurance Company, while obligations of the Company’s international annuity subsidiaries will generally be funded by the legal entity in the country in which the obligation was generated. C ontractholder obligations of the former Retirement Plans business were funded by Hartford Life Insurance Company and of the former Individual Life business were funded by both Hartford Life Insurance Company and Hartford Life and Annuity Insurance Company. See Note 2 - Business Dispositions of Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements as to the sale of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses and related transfer of invested assets in January 2013.
Hartford Life Insurance Company (“HLIC”), an indirect wholly owned subsidiary, became a member of the Federal Home Loan Bank of Boston (“FHLBB”) in May 2011. Membership allows HLIC access to collateralized advances, which may be used to support various spread-based business and enhance liquidity management. The Connecticut Department of Insurance (“CTDOI”) will permit HLIC to pledge up to $1.25 billion in qualifying assets to secure FHLBB advances for 2013. The amount of advances that can be taken are dependent on the asset types pledged to secure the advances. The pledge limit is recalculated annually based on statutory admitted assets and capital and surplus. HLIC would need to seek the prior approval of the CTDOI if there were a desire to exceed these limits. As of December 31, 2012 , HLIC had no advances outstanding under the FHLBB facility.

126

 
As of
Contractholder Obligations
December 31, 2012
Total Life contractholder obligations
$
231,907

Less: Separate account assets [1]
141,569

International statutory separate accounts [1]
28,922

General account contractholder obligations
$
61,416

Composition of General Account Contractholder Obligations
 
Contracts without a surrender provision and/or fixed payout dates [2]
$
26,767

U.S. Fixed MVA annuities and Other [3]
10,847

International Fixed MVA annuities
2,054

Guaranteed investment contracts (“GIC”) [4]
158

Other [5]
21,590

General account contractholder obligations
$
61,416

[1]
In the event customers elect to surrender separate account assets or international statutory separate accounts, Life Operations will use the proceeds from the sale of the assets to fund the surrender, and Life Operations’ liquidity position will not be impacted. In many instances Life Operations will receive a percentage of the surrender amount as compensation for early surrender (surrender charge), increasing Life Operations’ liquidity position. In addition, a surrender of variable annuity separate account or general account assets (see below) will decrease Life Operations’ obligation for payments on guaranteed living and death benefits.
[2]
Relates to contracts such as payout annuities or institutional notes, other than guaranteed investment products with an MVA feature (discussed below) or surrenders of term life, group benefit contracts or death and living benefit reserves for which surrenders will have no current effect on Life Operations’ liquidity requirements.
[3]
Relates to annuities that are recorded in the general account (under U.S. GAAP), although these annuities are held in a statutory separate account, as the contractholders are subject to the Company's credit risk. In the statutory separate account, Life Operations is required to maintain invested assets with a fair value equal to the MVA surrender value of the Fixed MVA contract. In the event assets decline in value at a greater rate than the MVA surrender value of the Fixed MVA contract, Life Operations is required to contribute additional capital to the statutory separate account. Life Operations will fund these required contributions with operating cash flows or short-term investments. In the event that operating cash flows or short-term investments are not sufficient to fund required contributions, the Company may have to sell other invested assets at a loss, potentially resulting in a decrease in statutory surplus. As the fair value of invested assets in the statutory separate account are generally equal to the MVA surrender value of the Fixed MVA contract, surrender of Fixed MVA annuities will have an insignificant impact on the liquidity requirements of Life Operations.
[4]
GICs are subject to discontinuance provisions which allow the policyholders to terminate their contracts prior to scheduled maturity at the lesser of the book value or market value. Generally, the market value adjustment reflects changes in interest rates and credit spreads. As a result, the market value adjustment feature in the GIC serves to protect the Company from interest rate risks and limit Life Operations’ liquidity requirements in the event of a surrender.
[5]
Surrenders of, or policy loans taken from, as applicable, these general account liabilities, which include the general account option for Talcott Resolution’s individual variable annuities and the var iable life contracts of the former Individual Life business, the general account option for annuities of the former Retirement Plans business and universal life contracts sold by the former Individual Life business, may be funded through operating cash flows of Life Operations, available short-term investments, or Life Operations may be required to sell fixed maturity investments to fund the surrender payment. Sales of fixed maturity investments could result in the recognition of realized losses and insufficient proceeds to fully fund the surrender amount. In this circumstance, Life Operations may need to take other actions, including enforcing certain contract provisions which could restrict surrenders and/or slow or defer payouts. See Note 2 - Business Dispositions of Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements as to the sale of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses and related transfer of invested assets in January 2013.
Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements and Aggregate Contractual Obligations
The Company does not have any off-balance sheet arrangements that are reasonably likely to have a material effect on the financial condition, results of operations, liquidity, or capital resources of the Company, except for the contingent capital facility described above and the following:
•
The Company has unfunded commitments to purchase investments in limited partnerships, private placements and mortgage loans of approximately $598 as disclosed in Note 13 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

127

The following table identifies the Company’s aggregate contractual obligations as of December 31, 2012 :
 
Payments due by period
 
Total
Less than
1 year
1-3
years
3-5
years
More than
5 years
Property and casualty obligations [1]
$
22,254

$
5,670

$
4,692

$
2,764

$
9,128

Life, annuity and disability obligations [2]
323,903

25,265

48,260

39,194

211,184

Operating lease obligations [3]
237

61

82

51

43

Long-term debt obligations [4]
14,216

754

1,518

1,875

10,069

Consumer notes [5]
176

85

51

32

8

Purchase obligations [6]
2,125

1,490

510

106

19

Other long-term liabilities reflected on the balance sheet [7]
2,799

2,663

136

—

—

Total [8]
$
365,710

$
35,988

$
55,249

$
44,022

$
230,451

[1]    The following points are significant to understanding the cash flows estimated for obligations under property and casualty contracts:
•
Reserves for Property & Casualty unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses include IBNR and case reserves. While payments due on claim reserves are considered contractual obligations because they relate to insurance policies issued by the Company, the ultimate amount to be paid to settle both case reserves and IBNR is an estimate, subject to significant uncertainty. The actual amount to be paid is not finally determined until the Company reaches a settlement with the claimant. Final claim settlements may vary significantly from the present estimates, particularly since many claims will not be settled until well into the future.
•
In estimating the timing of future payments by year, the Company has assumed that its historical payment patterns will continue. However, the actual timing of future payments could vary materially from these estimates due to, among other things, changes in claim reporting and payment patterns and large unanticipated settlements. In particular, there is significant uncertainty over the claim payment patterns of asbestos and environmental claims. In addition, the table does not include future cash flows related to the receipt of premiums that may be used, in part, to fund loss payments.
•
Under U.S. GAAP, the Company is only permitted to discount reserves for losses and loss adjustment expenses in cases where the payment pattern and ultimate loss costs are fixed and determinable on an individual claim basis. For the Company, these include claim settlements with permanently disabled claimants. As of December 31, 2012 , the total property and casualty reserves in the above table are gross of a reserve discount of $538 .
[2]
Estimated life, annuity and disability obligations include death and disability claims, policy surrenders, policyholder dividends and trail commissions offset by expected future deposits and premiums on in-force contracts. Estimated life, annuity and disability obligations are based on mortality, morbidity and lapse assumptions comparable with the Company’s historical experience, modified for recent observed trends. The Company has also assumed market growth and interest crediting consistent with other assumptions. In contrast to this table, the majority of the Company’s obligations are recorded on the balance sheet at the current account values and do not incorporate an expectation of future market growth, interest crediting, or future deposits. Therefore, the estimated obligations presented in this table significantly exceed the liabilities recorded in reserve for future policy benefits and unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, other policyholder funds and benefits payable and separate account liabilities. Due to the significance of the assumptions used, the amounts presented could materially differ from actual results.
See Note 2 - Business Dispositions of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for further information as to Retirement Plans and Individual Life reinsurance transactions.
[3]
Includes future minimum lease payments on operating lease agreements. See Note 13 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional discussion on lease commitments.
[4]
Includes contractual principal and interest payments. See Note 15 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional discussion of long-term debt obligations.
[5]
Consumer notes include principal payments and contractual interest for fixed rate notes and interest based on current rates for floating rate notes. See Note 15 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional discussion of consumer notes.
[6]
Includes $598 in commitments to purchase investments including approximately $562 of limited partnership, $6 of private placements and $30 of mortgage loans. Outstanding commitments under these limited partnerships and mortgage loans are included in payments due in less than 1 year since the timing of funding these commitments cannot be reliably estimated. The remaining commitments to purchase investments primarily represent payables for securities purchased which are reflected on the Company’s consolidated balance sheet.
Also included in purchase obligations is $1.0 billion relating to contractual commitments to purchase various goods and services such as maintenance, human resources, information technology, and transportation in the normal course of business. Purchase obligations exclude contracts that are cancelable without penalty or contracts that do not specify minimum levels of goods or services to be purchased.
[7]
Includes cash collateral of $1.4 billion which the Company has accepted in connection with the Company’s derivative instruments. Since the timing of the return of the collateral is uncertain, the return of the collateral has been included in the payments due in less than 1 year.
Also included in other long term liabilities is $48 of net unrecognized tax benefits.
[8]
Does not include estimated voluntary contribution of $100 to the Company’s pension plan in 2013.

128

Capitalization
The capital structure of The Hartford as of December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011 consisted of debt and stockholders’ equity, summarized as follows:
 
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
Change
Short-term debt (includes current maturities of long-term debt)
$
320

$
—

—
 %
Long-term debt
6,806

6,216

9
 %
Total debt [1]
7,126

6,216

15
 %
Stockholders’ equity excluding accumulated other comprehensive income (loss), net of tax (“AOCI”)
19,604

20,235

(3
)%
AOCI, net of tax
2,843

1,251

127
 %
Total stockholders’ equity
$
22,447

$
21,486

4
 %
Total capitalization including AOCI
$
29,573

$
27,702

7
 %
Debt to stockholders’ equity
32
%
29
%
 
Debt to capitalization
24
%
22
%
 
[1]
Total debt of the Company excludes $161 and $314 of consumer notes as of December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011 , respectively .
The Hartford’s total capitalization increased $1.9 billion , or 7% , from December 31, 2011 to December 31, 2012 due to increases in total debt and AOCI, net of tax, partially offset by decreases in stockholders' equity, excluding AOCI. The decrease in stockholders’ equity, excluding AOCI, was primarily due to the repurchase of outstanding warrants held by Allianz for $300 , common and preferred stock dividends declared of $218 and share repurchases of $149.
Total debt increased primarily due to the issuance of $1.55 billion in senior notes and $600 in junior subordinated debentures in April 2012, partially offset by the repurchase of $1.75 billion in junior subordinated debentures in April 2012.
AOCI, net of tax, improved primarily due to improvements in the Company’s net unrealized position on available-for-sale securities of $1.9 billion primarily as a result of improved security valuations largely due to credit spread tightening and declining interest rates.
For additional information on debt and the repurchase of warrants, see MD&A – Liquidity Requirements and Sources of Capital and Note 15 and Note 16 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. For additional information on equity and AOCI, net of tax, see Notes 16 and 17 , respectively, of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

Cash Flow
 
2012
2011
2010
Net cash provided by operating activities
$
2,681

$
2,274

$
3,309

Net cash used for investing activities
$
(2,557
)
$
(1,182
)
$
(434
)
Net cash used for financing activities
$
(228
)
$
(609
)
$
(2,955
)
Cash — end of year
$
2,421

$
2,581

$
2,062

Year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011
Cash provided by operating activities increased primarily due to income taxes received of $486 in 2012 , compared to income taxes paid of $179 in 2011 .
Cash used for investing activities in 2012 primarily relates to net payments on derivatives of $2.7 billion, purchases of mortgage loans of $968 and net payments for the purchases of partnerships of $695, partially offset by net proceeds of available-for-sale securities of $1.7 billion and net receipts of fixed maturities, fair value option of $101. Cash used for investing activities in 2011 primarily relates to net purchases of mortgage loans of $1.3 billion and net purchases of fixed maturities, fair value option of $627, partially offset by net receipts on derivatives of $720 and net proceeds of available-for-sale securities of $256.
Cash used for financing activities in 2012 primarily consists of net outflows on investment and universal life-type contracts of $1.4 billion, repurchase of warrants of $300, as well as share repurchases and dividends paid on common and preferred stock. These were partially offset by net increases in securities loaned or sold of $1.9 billion. Cash used for financing activities in 2011 primarily consists of repayment of long-term debt and dividends paid on common and preferred stock, partially offset by net inflows on investment and universal life-type contracts.

129

Year ended December 31, 2011 compared to the year ended December 31, 2010
The decrease in cash provided by operating activities compared to the prior year period reflected an increase in losses paid on property and casualty insurance products, and to a lesser extent, lower net investment income on available-for-sale securities, excluding limited partnerships and other alternative investments.
Cash used for investing activities in 2011 primarily relates to net purchases of mortgage loans of $1.3 billion and net purchases of fixed maturities, fair value option of $627, partially offset by net receipts on derivatives of $720 and net proceeds of available-for-sale securities of $256. Cash used for investing activities in 2010 primarily relates to net purchases of available-for-sale securities of $1.5 billion and net payments on derivatives of $338, partially offset by net proceeds from sales of mortgage loans of $1.4 billion.
Cash used for financing activities in 2011 primarily consists of repayment of long-term debt and dividends paid on common and preferred stock, partially offset by net inflows on investment and universal life-type contracts. In the comparable prior period of 2010, cash used for financing activities increased primarily due to repayments of consumer notes of $754, repayment of $275 in senior notes and net outflows on investment and universal life-type contracts.
Operating cash flows in each of the last three years have been adequate to meet liquidity requirements.
Equity Markets
For a discussion of the potential impact of the equity markets on capital and liquidity, see the Financial Risk on Statutory Capital and Liquidity Risk section in this MD&A.
Ratings
Ratings impact the Company’s cost of borrowing and its ability to access financing and are an important factor in establishing competitive position in the insurance and financial services marketplace. There can be no assurance that the Company’s ratings will continue for any given period of time or that they will not be changed. In the event the Company’s ratings are downgraded, the Company’s cost of borrowing and ability to access financing, as well as the level of revenues or the persistency of its business may be adversely impacted.
On February 5, 2013, Moody's Investors Service affirmed the insurance financial strength ratings of Hartford Fire Insurance Company, Hartford Life Insurance Company and Hartford Life & Accident Insurance Company. Moody's downgraded the insurance financial strength ratings of Hartford Life and Annuity Insurance Company to Baa2 from A3.  The outlook for all of the ratings is stable.
On March 1, 2013 A.M. Best affirmed the issuer credit ratings of the HFSG Holding Company and the financial strength ratings of Hartford Fire Insurance Company and changed the outlook to stable. A.M. Best downgraded the financial strength ratings of Hartford Life Insurance Company, Hartford Life and Accident Insurance Company and Hartford Life and Annuity Insurance Company to A- from A and changed outlook to stable.
The following table summarizes The Hartford’s significant member companies’ financial ratings from the major independent rating organizations as of March 1, 2013:
Insurance Financial Strength Ratings:
A.M. Best
Fitch
Standard & Poor's
Moody's
Hartford Fire Insurance Company
A
A+
A
A2
Hartford Life Insurance Company
A-
A-
A-
A3
Hartford Life and Accident Insurance Company
A-
A-
A-
A3
Hartford Life and Annuity Insurance Company
A-
A-
BBB+
Baa2
Other Ratings:
 
 
 
 
The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc.:
 
 
 
 
Senior debt
bbb+
BBB
BBB
Baa3
Commercial paper
AMB-2
F2
A-2
P-3
These ratings are not a recommendation to buy or hold any of The Hartford’s securities and they may be revised or revoked at any time at the sole discretion of the rating organization.
The agencies consider many factors in determining the final rating of an insurance company. One consideration is the relative level of statutory surplus necessary to support the business written. Statutory surplus represents the capital of the insurance company reported in accordance with accounting practices prescribed by the applicable state insurance department. See Part I, Item 1A. Risk Factors — “Downgrades in our financial strength or credit ratings, which may make our products less attractive, could increase our cost of capital and inhibit our ability to refinance our debt, which would have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.”

130

Statutory Surplus
The table below sets forth statutory surplus for the Company’s insurance companies as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 :
 
2012
2011
U.S. life insurance subsidiaries, includes domestic captive insurance subsidiaries
$
6,410

$
7,388

Property and casualty insurance subsidiaries
7,645

7,412

Total
$
14,055

$
14,800

Statutory capital and surplus for the U.S. life insurance subsidiaries, including domestic captive insurance subsidiaries, decreased by $978 , primarily due to variable annuity surplus impacts of approximately $425, a $200 increase in reserves on a change in valuation basis, $200 transfer of the Mutual Funds business from the U.S. life insurance companies to the life holding company, and an increase in the asset valuation reserve of $115. As a result of the January 2013 statutory gain from the sale of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses, the Company's pro forma January 2, 2013 U.S. life statutory surplus was estimated to be $8.1 billion, before approximately $1.5 billion in extraordinary dividends and return of capital to HFSG Holding Company.
Statutory capital and surplus for the property and casualty insurance subsidiaries increased by $233 , primarily due to statutory net income, after tax, of $727, unrealized gains of $249, and an increase in statutory admitted deferred tax assets of $77, capital contributions of $14, and an increase of statutory admitted assets of $7, partially offset by dividends to the HFSG Holding Company of $841. Both net income and dividends are net of interest payments and dividends, respectively, on an intercompany note between Hartford Holdings, Inc. and Hartford Fire Insurance Company.
The Company also holds regulatory capital and surplus for its operations in Japan. Under the accounting practices and procedures governed by Japanese regulatory authorities, the Company’s statutory capital and surplus was $1.1 billion and $1.3 billion as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively.
Statutory Capital
The Company’s stockholders’ equity, as prepared using U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (“U.S. GAAP”) was $22.4 billion as of December 31, 2012 . The Company’s estimated aggregate statutory capital and surplus, as prepared in accordance with the National Association of Insurance Commissioners’ Accounting Practices and Procedures Manual (“U.S. STAT”) was $14.1 billion as of December 31, 2012 . Significant differences between U.S. GAAP stockholders’ equity and aggregate statutory capital and surplus prepared in accordance with U.S. STAT include the following:
•
U.S. STAT excludes equity of non-insurance and foreign insurance subsidiaries not held by U.S. insurance subsidiaries.
•
Costs incurred by the Company to acquire insurance policies are deferred under U.S. GAAP while those costs are expensed immediately under U.S. STAT.
•
Temporary differences between the book and tax basis of an asset or liability which are recorded as deferred tax assets are evaluated for recoverability under U.S. GAAP while those amounts deferred are subject to limitations under U.S. STAT.
•
The assumptions used in the determination of Life benefit reserves is prescribed under U.S. STAT, while the assumptions used under U.S. GAAP are generally the Company’s best estimates. The methodologies for determining life insurance reserve amounts may also be different. For example, reserving for living benefit reserves under U.S. STAT is generally addressed by the Commissioners’ Annuity Reserving Valuation Methodology and the related Actuarial Guidelines, while under U.S. GAAP, those same living benefits may be considered embedded derivatives and recorded at fair value or they may be considered SOP 03-1 reserves. The sensitivity of these life insurance reserves to changes in equity markets, as applicable, will be different between U.S. GAAP and U.S. STAT.
•
The difference between the amortized cost and fair value of fixed maturity and other investments, net of tax, is recorded as an increase or decrease to the carrying value of the related asset and to equity under U.S. GAAP, while U.S. STAT only records certain securities at fair value, such as equity securities and certain lower rated bonds required by the NAIC to be recorded at the lower of amortized cost or fair value.
•
U.S. STAT for life insurance companies establishes a formula reserve for realized and unrealized losses due to default and equity risks associated with certain invested assets (the Asset Valuation Reserve), while U.S. GAAP does not. Also, for those realized gains and losses caused by changes in interest rates, U.S. STAT for life insurance companies defers and amortizes the gains and losses, caused by changes in interest rates, into income over the original life to maturity of the asset sold (the Interest Maintenance Reserve) while U.S. GAAP does not.
•
Goodwill arising from the acquisition of a business is tested for recoverability on an annual basis (or more frequently, as necessary) for U.S. GAAP, while under U.S. STAT goodwill is amortized over a period not to exceed 10 years and the amount of goodwill is limited.

131

In addition, certain assets, including a portion of premiums receivable and fixed assets, are non-admitted (recorded at zero value and charged against surplus) under U.S. STAT. U.S. GAAP generally evaluates assets based on their recoverability.
Risk-Based Capital
The Hartford's U.S. insurance companies' states of domicile impose risk-based capital (“RBC”) requirements. The requirements provide a means of measuring the minimum amount of statutory surplus appropriate for an insurance company to support its overall business operations based on its size and risk profile. Regulatory compliance is determined by a ratio of a company's total adjusted capital (“TAC”) to its authorized control level RBC (“ACL RBC”). Companies below specific trigger points or ratios are classified within certain levels, each of which requires specified corrective action. The minimum level of TAC before corrective action commences is two times the ACL RBC (“Company Action Level”). The adequacy of a company's capital is determined by the ratio of a company's TAC to its Company Action Level (known as the RBC ratio). All of The Hartford's operating insurance subsidiaries had RBC ratios in excess of the minimum levels required by the applicable insurance regulations.
Similar to the RBC ratios that are employed by U.S. insurance regulators, regulatory authorities in the international jurisdictions in which The Hartford operates generally establish minimum solvency requirements for insurance companies. All of The Hartford's international insurance subsidiaries have solvency margins in excess of the minimum levels required by the applicable regulatory authorities.
Sensitivity
In any particular year, statutory surplus amounts and RBC ratios may increase or decrease depending upon a variety of factors. The amount of change in the statutory surplus or RBC ratios can vary based on individual factors and may be compounded in extreme scenarios or if multiple factors occur at the same time. At times the impact of changes in certain market factors or a combination of multiple factors on RBC ratios can be counterintuitive. For further discussion on these factors and the potential impacts to the life insurance subsidiaries, see the Financial Risk on Statutory Capital section within Enterprise Risk Management.
Statutory capital at the property and casualty subsidiaries has historically been maintained at or above the capital level required to meet “AA level” ratings from rating agencies. Statutory capital generated by the property and casualty subsidiaries in excess of the capital level required to meet “AA level” ratings is available for use by the enterprise or for corporate purposes. The amount of statutory capital can increase or decrease depending on a number of factors affecting property and casualty results including, among other factors, the level of catastrophe claims incurred, the amount of reserve development, the effect of changes in interest rates on investment income and the discounting of loss reserves, and the effect of realized gains and losses on investments.
In addition, the Company can access the $500 Glen Meadow trust contingent capital facility and maintains the ability to access $1.75 billion of capacity under its revolving credit facility.
Contingencies
Legal Proceedings — For a discussion regarding contingencies related to The Hartford’s legal proceedings, please see the information contained under “Litigation” and “Asbestos and Environmental Claims,” in Note 13 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements, which is incorporated herein by reference.
For a discussion of terrorism reinsurance legislation and how it affects The Hartford, see “Terrorism” under the Insurance Risk Management section of the MD&A.
Tax proposals and regulatory initiatives which have been or are being considered by Congress and/or the United States Treasury Department could have a material effect on the insurance business. These proposals and initiatives include, or could include, new taxes or assessments on large financial institutions, changes pertaining to the income tax treatment of insurance companies and life insurance products and annuities, repeal or reform of the estate tax and comprehensive federal tax reform, and changes to the regulatory structure for financial institutions. The nature and timing of any Congressional or regulatory action with respect to any such efforts is unclear.

132

Legislative Developments
The Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010 (the “Dodd-Frank Act”) was enacted on July 21, 2010, mandating changes to the regulation of the financial services industry. Implementation of the Dodd-Frank Act is ongoing and may affect our operations and governance in ways that could adversely affect our financial condition and results of operations.
The Dodd-Frank Act vests the Financial Stability Oversight Council (“FSOC”) with the power to designate “systemically important” financial institutions, which will be subject to special regulatory supervision and other provisions intended to prevent, or mitigate the impact of, future disruptions in the U.S. financial system. Systemically important institutions are limited to large bank holding companies and nonbank financial companies that are so important that their potential failure could “pose a threat to the financial stability of the United States.” The FSOC finalized its rule for designating systemically important nonbank financial institutions in April 2012.  Based on its most current financial data, The Hartford is below the quantitative thresholds that will be used to determine which nonbank companies merit consideration. The FSOC has indicated it will review on a quarterly basis whether non-bank financial institutions meet the metrics for further review.
If we are designated as a systemically important institution, The Hartford could be subject to higher capital requirements and additional regulatory oversight imposed by the Federal Reserve, as well as to post-event assessments imposed by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (“FDIC”) to recoup the costs associated with the orderly liquidation of other systemically important institutions in the event one or more such institutions fails. Further, in certain circumstances, the FDIC is authorized to petition a state court to commence an insolvency proceeding to liquidate an insurance company that fails in the event the insurer's state regulator fails to act. If designated, we could also be subject to increased capital requirements or quantitative limits with respect to our sponsorship of and investments in private equity and hedge funds, which could limit our discretion in managing our general account.
Other provisions in the Dodd-Frank Act that may impact us include: the requirement for central clearing of, and/or new margin and capital requirements on, derivatives transactions, which we expect will increase the costs of our hedging program; the new “Federal Insurance Office” within Treasury; the possible adverse impact on the pricing and liquidity of the securities in which we invest resulting from the proprietary trading and market making limitation of the Volcker Rule; the possible prohibition of certain asset-backed securities transactions that could adversely impact our ability to offer insurance-linked securities; and enhancements to corporate governance, especially regarding risk management.
Budget of the United States Government
The Obama Administration has not yet released its proposed federal budget for FY 2014. Last year's proposal, entitled “FY 2013, Budget of the United States Government” (the “Budget”) includes proposals that if enacted, would have affected the taxation of life insurance companies and certain life insurance products. In particular, the proposals would have changed the method used to determine the amount of dividend income received by a life insurance company on assets held in separate accounts used to support products, including variable life insurance and variable annuity contracts, which are eligible for the dividends received deduction (“DRD”). The DRD reduces the amount of dividend income subject to tax and is a significant component of the difference between the Company's actual tax expense and expected amount determined using the federal statutory tax rate of 35%. If this proposal is included in the proposed federal budget for FY 2014 and subsequently enacted, the Company's actual tax expense could increase, reducing earnings.
Tax Rate Extension
The steps taken by the federal government to avoid automatic tax increases and spending cuts that would have gone into effect on January 1, 2013 will result in higher tax rates, including for many small business owners whom are already preparing for increased costs associated with healthcare reform. This may cause small businesses to hire fewer workers and decrease investment in their businesses, including limiting the purchases of vehicles, property and equipment, which could adversely affect our business and results of operations.
Guaranty Fund and Other Insurance-related Assessments
For a discussion regarding Guaranty Fund and Other Insurance-related Assessments, see Note 13 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

133

IMPACT OF NEW ACCOUNTING STANDARDS
For a discussion of accounting standards, see Note 1 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Item 7A.
QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK
The information required by this item is set forth in the Enterprise Risk Management section of Item 7, Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations and is incorporated herein by reference.
Item 8.
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA
See Index to Consolidated Financial Statements and Schedules elsewhere herein.
Item 9.
CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS ON ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE
None.
Item 9A.
CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES
Evaluation of disclosure controls and procedures
The Company's principal executive officer and its principal financial officer, based on their evaluation of the Company's disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rule 13a-15(e)), including the steps taken to address the material weakness described below, have concluded that the Company's disclosure controls and procedures are effective for the purposes set forth in the definition thereof in Exchange Act Rule 13a-15(e) as of December 31, 2012.
Management’s annual report on internal control over financial reporting
The management of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. and its subsidiaries (“The Hartford”) is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting for The Hartford as defined in Rule 13a-15(f) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.
A company's internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States. A company's internal control over financial reporting includes policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that in reasonable detail accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use or disposition of the company's assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.
Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.
The Hartford's management assessed its internal controls over financial reporting as of December 31, 2012 in relation to criteria for effective internal control over financial reporting described in “Internal Control - Integrated Framework” issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. Based on this assessment under those criteria, including the steps taken to address the material weakness described below, The Hartford's management concluded that its internal control over financial reporting was effective as of December 31, 2012.


134

Changes in internal control over financial reporting
As reported in the Q3 Form 10-Q/A, the circumstances described therein constituted a material weakness in internal control over financial reporting as of September 30, 2012.
Based on accounting review and validation procedures performed in connection with the financial reporting and close process for the fourth quarter of 2012 and subsequent to the filing of the Third Quarter 2012 Form 10-Q, the Company identified that the impact of certain reinsurance recoverable balances associated with the sale of the Individual Life business (the “Transaction”) was incorrectly omitted in determining the estimated gain or loss on disposition associated with the Transaction. As a result of such identification, the Company concluded that it would be necessary to recognize an estimated pre-tax loss on the Transaction of $533, comprised of the impairment of goodwill attributed to the Individual Life business of $342 and a loss accrual for premium deficiency of $191, which should have been recorded in the third quarter of 2012. The estimate is subject to change pending final determination of net assets sold, transaction costs, and other adjustments. Management performed additional procedures in order to confirm the extent of the impact of the error. As a result of these procedures and the conclusions reached regarding the error, the Company filed the Amendment No.1 to its third quarter 2012 Form 10-Q to recognize such third quarter 2012 reinsurance loss on disposition through the impairment of goodwill and a loss accrual for premium deficiency.
The Company performed its planned year-end procedures, which included accounting review and validation procedures performed by management and accounting operations professionals. These procedures included a detailed evaluation of the impact to general ledger accounts associated with the Transaction to ensure the accuracy of the reinsurance loss on disposition of business calculation associated with the Transaction and resulted in the identification of the error described in more detail above. For future transactions involving the purchase or sale of a business, the Company will perform these accounting review and validation procedures upon signing of a purchase or sale agreement. We believe the actions described above remediated the material weakness described in the Q3 Form 10-Q/A.
Other than the steps taken to address the material weakness described above, there was no change in the Company's internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the Company's current fiscal quarter that have materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the Company's internal control over financial reporting
Attestation report of the Company’s registered public accounting firm
The Hartford's independent registered public accounting firm, Deloitte & Touche LLP, has issued their attestation report on the Company's internal control over financial reporting which is set forth below.


135


REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
To the Board of Directors and Stockholders of
The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc.
Hartford, Connecticut
We have audited the internal control over financial reporting of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. and its subsidiaries (collectively, the "Company") as of December 31, 2012 , based on the criteria established in Internal Control-Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.  The Company's management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Item 9A. Controls and Procedures.  Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company's internal control over financial reporting based on our audit.
We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States).  Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects.  Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk, and performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.
A company's internal control over financial reporting is a process designed by, or under the supervision of, the company's principal executive and principal financial officers, or persons performing similar functions, and effected by the company's board of directors, management, and other personnel to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of consolidated financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.  A company's internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of consolidated financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company's assets that could have a material effect on the consolidated financial statements.
Because of the inherent limitations of internal control over financial reporting, including the possibility of collusion or improper management override of controls, material misstatements due to error or fraud may not be prevented or detected on a timely basis.  Also, projections of any evaluation of the effectiveness of the internal control over financial reporting to future periods are subject to the risk that the controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.
In our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2012 , based on the criteria established in Internal Control-Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. 
We have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the consolidated financial statements and financial statement schedules as of and for the year ended December 31, 2012 of the Company and our report, dated March 1, 2013 , expressed an unqualified opinion on those consolidated financial statements and financial statement schedules and included an explanatory paragraph regarding the retrospective adjustment of the accompanying consolidated financial statements and financial statement schedules for the Company's adoption of a change in accounting for costs associated with acquiring or renewing insurance contracts.


DELOITTE & TOUCHE LLP
Hartford, Connecticut
March 1, 2013


136

Item 9B.
OTHER INFORMATION
None.
PART III
Item 10.
DIRECTORS, AND EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE OF THE HARTFORD
Certain of the information called for by Item 10 will be set forth in the definitive proxy statement for the 2013 annual meeting of shareholders (the “Proxy Statement”) to be filed by The Hartford with the Securities and Exchange Commission within 120 days after the end of the fiscal year covered by this Form 10-K under the captions “Nominee for Directorships”, “Section 16(a) Beneficial Ownership Reporting Compliance”, “Corporate Governance” and “Board of Directors” and is incorporated herein by reference.
The Company has adopted a Code of Ethics and Business Conduct, which is applicable to all employees of the Company, including the principal executive officer, the principal financial officer and the principal accounting officer. The Code of Ethics and Business Conduct is available on the Company’s website at: www.thehartford.com. Any waiver of, or material amendment to, the Code of Ethics and Business Conduct applicable to the Company’s principal executive officer, principal financial officer, principal accounting officer or controller or persons performing similar functions will be posted promptly to our web site in accordance with applicable NYSE and SEC rules.
Executive Officers of The Hartford
Information about the executive officers of The Hartford who are also nominees for election as directors will be set forth in The Hartford’s Proxy Statement. Set forth below is information about the other executive officers of the Company:
 
 
Position with The Hartford and Business Experience
Name
Age
During the Past Five Years
Robert H. Bateman
46
Senior Vice President and Controller (August 2012-Present); Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer, Commercial Markets (April 2011-August 2012); Senior Vice President and Interim Chief Financial Officer, Commercial Markets (August 2010-April 2011); Chief Financial Officer, P&C Runoff and Claims (August 2007–August 2010)

Beth A. Bombara
45
Executive Vice President, President of Talcott Resolution (July 2012-Present); Senior Vice President and Controller (June 2007-July 2012); Vice President (2004-June 2007)
James E. Davey
48
Executive Vice President and President of The Hartford Mutual Funds (2010-Present); Executive Vice President, Retirement Division (2009-2010); Executive Vice President, Employer Markets Group (2008-2009); Senior Vice President, Retirement Plans (2006-2008)

Douglas Elliot
52
Executive Vice President and President of Commercial Markets (April 2011-Present); President and Chief Executive Officer, HSB Group (July 2007-March 2011); President and Chief Operating Officer, HSB Group (January 2007-June 2007); Senior Advisor, Aspen Insurance Holdings (2006); Chief Executive Officer of General Commercial and Personal Lines, St. Paul Travelers Companies (2004-2007)
Martha Gervasi
51
Executive Vice President, Human Resources (May 2012-present); Senior Vice President, Human Resources (November 2010-May 2012); General Manager Human Resources, SABIC Innovative Plastics & SABIC Americas (January 2010- October 2010); Global Human Resource Leader, SABIC Innovative Plastics (September 2007-January 2010)

Brion Johnson
53
Executive Vice President, Chief Investment Officer (May 2012- Present); Chief Financial Officer, Hartford Investment Management Company [1] (October 2011 – May 2012); Managing Member, Shoreline Arts & Publishing, LLC (2009 - 2010); Executive Vice President, PPM America, Inc. (2001 – 2008)

Alan J. Kreczko
61
Executive Vice President and General Counsel (June 2007-Present); Senior Vice President and Deputy General Counsel (2002-June 2007)
André A. Napoli
48
Executive Vice President and President of Consumer Markets (August 2010-Present); Executive Vice President and Chief Administrative Officer, CUNA Mutual Group (July 2009-August 2010 ); Senior Vice President, Consumer Products, CUNA Mutual Group (August 2007-July 2009); Vice President, Standard Auto Product and Pricing, Nationwide (October 2006-August 2007); Vice President, Personal Lines Pricing and Research, Nationwide (July 2005-October 2006)
Robert Rupp
60
Executive Vice President and Chief Risk Officer (October 2011-Present); Executive Vice President, Head of Enterprise-Wide Market Risk, BONY Mellon (September 2008-October 2011); Managing Director, Risk Management, JP Morgan Chase (2004-2008)
Christopher J. Swift
52
Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer (March 2010-Present); Vice President and CFO, American Life Insurance Company (March 2009-March 2010); Executive Vice President and CFO, AIG’s Global Life Insurance and Retirement Services Division (July 2005-March 2009)
[1]
Denotes a subsidiary of The Hartford.

137

Item 11.
EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION
The information called for by Item 11 will be set forth in the Proxy Statement under the captions “Compensation Discussion and Analysis”, “Executive Compensation”, “Director Compensation”, “Report of the Compensation and Management Development Committee”, and “Compensation and Management Development Committee Interlocks and Insider Participation” and is incorporated herein by reference.
Item 12.
SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS
Certain of the information called for by Item 12 will be set forth in the Proxy Statement under the caption “Information on Stock Ownership” and is incorporated herein by reference.
Equity Compensation Plan Information
The following table provides information as of December 31, 2012 about the securities authorized for issuance under the Company’s equity compensation plans. The Company maintains The Hartford Incentive Stock Plan (the “2000 Stock Plan”), The Hartford 2005 Incentive Stock Plan (the “2005 Stock Plan”), The Hartford 2010 Incentive Stock Plan (the “2010 Stock Plan”), and The Hartford Employee Stock Purchase Plan (the “ESPP”). On May 19, 2010, the shareholders of the Company approved the 2010 Stock Plan, which superseded the 2005 Stock Plan. Pursuant to the provisions of the 2010 Stock Plan, no additional shares may be issued from the 2005 Stock Plan. To the extent that any awards under the 2005 Stock Plan are forfeited, terminated, expire unexercised or are settled in cash in lieu of stock, the shares subject to such awards (or the relevant portion thereof) shall be available for award under the 2010 Stock Plan and such shares shall be added to the total number of shares available under the 2010 Stock Plan. See Note 19 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for a description of the 2010 Stock Plan and the ESPP.
 
(a)
(b)
(c)
 
 Number of Securities
to be Issued Upon Exercise of
Outstanding Options,
Warrants and Rights
Weighted-average
Exercise Price of Outstanding
Options, Warrants
and Rights
Number of Securities Remaining
Available for Future Issuance Under Equity Compensation Plans
(Excluding Securities   Reflected in
Column (a))
Equity compensation plans approved by stockholders
4,534,036

$
38.42

16,667,298

[1]
Equity compensation plans not approved by stockholders
2,964

37.37

267,380

 
Total
4,537,000

$
38.42

16,934,678

 
[1]
Of these shares, 5,773,954 shares remain available for purchase under the ESPP.



138

Summary Description of the 2000 PLANCO Non-Employee Option Plan
In addition, the Company maintains the 2000 PLANCO Non-employee Option Plan (the “PLANCO Plan”) pursuant to which it granted awards to non-employee wholesalers of products of Hartford Life Distributors, LLC, and its affiliate, PLANCO, LLC (collectively “HLD”). No awards have been issued under the PLANCO Plan since 2003, and no future awards are contemplated. The only remaining outstanding awards under the PLANCO Plan expire in February, 2013.
The Company's Board of Directors adopted the PLANCO Plan on July 20, 2000, and amended it on February 20, 2003 to increase the number of shares of the Company's common stock subject to the plan to 450,000 shares. The stockholders of the Company have not approved the PLANCO Plan.
Eligibility - Any non-employee independent contractor serving on the wholesale sales force as an insurance agent who was an exclusive agent of the Company or who derived more than 50% of his or her annual income from the Company was eligible.
Terms of options - Nonqualified stock options (“NQSOs”) to purchase shares of common stock were available for grant under the PLANCO Plan. The administrator of the PLANCO Plan, the Compensation and Management Development Committee, (i) determined the recipients of options under the PLANCO Plan, (ii) determined the number of shares of common stock covered by such options, (iii) determined the dates and the manner in which options became exercisable (which was typically in three equal annual installments beginning on the first anniversary of the date of grant), (iv) set the exercise price of options (which could be less than, equal to or greater than the fair market value of common stock on the date of grant) and (v) determined the other terms and conditions of each option. Payment of the exercise price may be made in cash, other shares of the Company's common stock or through a same day sale program. The term of an NQSO could not exceed ten years and two days from the date of grant.
If an optionee's required relationship with the Company terminates for any reason, other than for cause, any exercisable options remain exercisable for a fixed period of four months, not to exceed the remainder of the option's term. Any options that are not exercisable at the time of such termination are canceled on the date of such termination. If the optionee's required relationship is terminated for cause, the options are canceled immediately.
Acceleration in Connection with a Change in Control - Upon the occurrence of a change in control, each option outstanding on the date of such change in control, and which is not then fully vested and exercisable, shall immediately vest and become exercisable. In general, a “Change in Control” will be deemed to have occurred upon the acquisition of 40% or more of the outstanding voting stock of the Company, a tender or exchange offer to acquire 15% or more of the outstanding voting stock of the Company, certain mergers or corporate transactions resulting in the shareholders of the Company before the transactions owning less than 55% of the entity surviving the transactions, certain transactions involving a transfer of substantially all of the Company's assets or a change in greater than 50% of the Board members over a two year period.
Item 13.
CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS, AND DIRECTOR INDEPENDENCE
Any information called for by Item 13 will be set forth in the Proxy Statement under the caption “Corporate Governance” and “Board of Directors” and is incorporated herein by reference.
Item 14.
PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTING FEES AND SERVICES
The information called for by Item 14 will be set forth in the Proxy Statement under the caption “Report of the Audit Committee” and is incorporated herein by reference.

Part IV
Item 15.
EXHIBITS, FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES
(a) 
Documents filed as a part of this report:
(1)
Consolidated Financial Statements. See Index to Consolidated Financial Statements and Schedules elsewhere herein.
(2)
Consolidated Financial Statement Schedules. See Index to Consolidated Financial Statement and Schedules elsewhere herein.
(3)
Exhibits. See Exhibit Index elsewhere herein.


139

THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SCHEDULES
 
Page(s)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 



F-1

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
To the Board of Directors and Stockholders of
The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc.
Hartford, Connecticut
We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. and its subsidiaries (collectively, the “Company”) as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , and the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income, changes in stockholders' equity, and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2012 .  Our audits also included the consolidated financial statement schedules listed in the Index at Item 15.  These consolidated financial statements and financial statement schedules are the responsibility of the Company's management.  Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements and financial statement schedules based on our audits.
We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States).  Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free of material misstatement.  An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements.  An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall consolidated financial statement presentation.  We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
In our opinion, such consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. and its subsidiaries as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2012 , in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.  Also, in our opinion, such consolidated financial statement schedules, when considered in relation to the basic consolidated financial statements taken as a whole, present fairly, in all material respects, the information set forth therein.
As discussed in Note 1 to the consolidated financial statements, the accompanying consolidated financial statements and financial statement schedules have been retrospectively adjusted for the Company's adoption of a change in accounting for costs associated with acquiring or renewing insurance contracts.

We have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the Company's internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2012 , based on the criteria established in Internal Control-Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission and our report dated March 1, 2013 expressed an unqualified opinion on the Company's internal control over financial reporting.


DELOITTE & TOUCHE LLP
Hartford, Connecticut
March 1, 2013

F-2
Table of Contents

THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
Consolidated Statements of Operations

 
For the years ended December 31,
(In millions, except for per share data)
2012
2011
2010
Revenues
 
 
 
Earned premiums
$
13,631

$
14,088

$
14,055

Fee income
4,432

4,750

4,748

Net investment income:
 
 
 
Securities available-for-sale and other
4,237

4,272

4,364

Equity securities, trading
4,565

(1,359
)
(774
)
Total net investment income
8,802

2,913

3,590

Net realized capital gains (losses):
 

 

 

Total other-than-temporary impairment (“OTTI”) losses
(389
)
(263
)
(852
)
OTTI losses recognized in other comprehensive income (“OCI”)
40

89

418

Net OTTI losses recognized in earnings
(349
)
(174
)
(434
)
Net realized capital gains (losses), excluding net OTTI losses recognized in earnings
(362
)
29

(177
)
Total net realized capital losses
(711
)
(145
)
(611
)
Other revenues
258

253

267

Total revenues
26,412

21,859

22,049

Benefits, losses and expenses
 

 

 

Benefits, losses and loss adjustment expenses
13,250

14,625

13,025

Benefits, losses and loss adjustment expenses — returns credited on international variable annuities
4,564

(1,359
)
(774
)
Amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs and present value of future profits
1,988

2,444

1,692

Insurance operating costs and other expenses
5,237

5,310

5,326

Loss on extinguishment of debt
910

—

—

Reinsurance loss on disposition, including goodwill impairment of $342
533

—

—

Interest expense
457

508

508

Goodwill impairment
—

30

—

Total benefits, losses and expenses
26,939

21,558

19,777

Income (loss) from continuing operations before income taxes
(527
)
301

2,272

Income tax expense (benefit)
(494
)
(325
)
572

Income (loss) from continuing operations, net of tax
(33
)
626

1,700

Income (loss) from discontinued operations, net of tax
(5
)
86

(64
)
Net income (loss)
$
(38
)
$
712

$
1,636

Preferred stock dividends
42

42

515

Net income (loss) available to common shareholders
$
(80
)
$
670

$
1,121

Income from continuing operations, net of tax, available to common shareholders per common share
 
 
 
Basic
$
(0.17
)
$
1.31

$
2.75

Diluted
$
(0.17
)
$
1.22

$
2.53

Net income (loss) available to common shareholders per common share
 
 
 
Basic
$
(0.18
)
$
1.51

$
2.60

Diluted
$
(0.18
)
$
1.40

$
2.40

Cash dividends declared per common share
$
0.40

$
0.40

$
0.20

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

F-3
Table of Contents

THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income

 
For the years ended December 31,
(In millions)
2012
2011
2010
Comprehensive Income
 
 
 
Net income (loss)
$
(38
)
$
712

$
1,636

Other comprehensive income
 

 

 

Change in net unrealized gain/loss on securities
1,907

2,067

1,889

Change in OTTI losses recognized in other comprehensive income
52

9

116

Change in net gain/loss on cash-flow hedging instruments
(88
)
131

128

Change in foreign currency translation adjustments
(168
)
107

275

Change in pension and other postretirement plan adjustments
(111
)
(73
)
(123
)
Total other comprehensive income
1,592

2,241

2,285

Total comprehensive income
$
1,554

$
2,953

$
3,921

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

F-4
Table of Contents

THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
Consolidated Balance Sheets

 
As of December 31,
(In millions, except for share and per share data)
2012
2011
Assets
 
 
Investments:
 
 
Fixed maturities, available-for-sale, at fair value (amortized cost of $79,747 and $78,978) (includes variable interest entity assets, at fair value, of $89 and $153)
$
85,922

$
81,809

Fixed maturities, at fair value using the fair value option (includes variable interest entity assets, at fair value, of $163 and $338)
1,087

1,328

Equity securities, trading, at fair value (cost of $26,820 and $32,928)
28,933

30,499

Equity securities, available-for-sale, at fair value (cost of $866 and $1,056 )
890

921

Mortgage loans (net of allowances for loan losses of $68 and $102)
6,711

5,728

Policy loans, at outstanding balance
1,997

2,001

Limited partnerships and other alternative investments (includes variable interest entity assets of $6 and $7)
3,015

2,532

Other investments
1,114

2,394

Short-term investments
4,581

7,736

Total investments
134,250

134,948

Cash
2,421

2,581

Premiums receivable and agents’ balances, net
3,542

3,446

Reinsurance recoverables, net
4,666

4,768

Deferred policy acquisition costs and present value of future profits
5,725

6,556

Deferred income taxes, net
1,942

2,131

Goodwill
654

1,006

Property and equipment, net
977

1,029

Other assets
2,767

2,274

Separate account assets
141,569

143,870

Total assets
$
298,513

$
302,609

Liabilities
 

 

Reserve for future policy benefits and unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses
$
40,992

$
41,016

Other policyholder funds and benefits payable
41,979

45,612

Other policyholder funds and benefits payable — international variable annuities
28,922

30,461

Unearned premiums
5,145

5,222

Short-term debt
320

—

Long-term debt
6,806

6,216

Consumer notes
161

314

Other liabilities (includes variable interest entity liabilities of $89 and $471)
10,172

8,412

Separate account liabilities
141,569

143,870

Total liabilities
276,066

281,123

Commitments and Contingencies (Note 13)




Stockholders’ Equity
 

 

Preferred stock, $0.01 par value — 50,000,000 shares authorized, 575,000 shares issued, liquidation preference $1,000 per share
556

556

Common stock, $0.01 par value — 1,500,000,000 shares authorized, 469,744,822 and 469,750,171 shares issued
5

5

Additional paid-in capital
10,038

10,391

Retained earnings
10,745

11,001

Treasury stock, at cost — 33,439,044 and 27,211,115 shares
(1,740
)
(1,718
)
Accumulated other comprehensive income, net of tax
2,843

1,251

Total stockholders’ equity
22,447

21,486

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
$
298,513

$
302,609

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

F-5
Table of Contents

THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholders' Equity

 
For the years ended December 31,
(In millions, except for share data)
2012
2011
2010
Preferred Stock, beginning of period
$
556

$
556

$
2,960

Issuance of mandatory convertible preferred stock
—

—

556

Accelerated accretion of discount from redemption of preferred stock issued to U.S. Treasury
—

—

440

Redemption of preferred stock to the U.S. Treasury
—

—

(3,400
)
Preferred Stock, at end of period
556

556

556

Common Stock
5

5

5

Additional Paid-in Capital, beginning of period
10,391

10,448

8,985

Repurchase of warrants
(300
)
—

—

Issuance of common shares under public offering
—

—

1,599

Issuance of shares under incentive and stock compensation plans
(52
)
(50
)
(130
)
Tax expense on employee stock options and awards
(1
)
(7
)
(6
)
Additional Paid-in Capital, end of period
10,038

10,391

10,448

Retained Earnings, beginning of period, before cumulative effect of accounting change, net of tax
11,001

10,509

9,643

Cumulative effect of accounting change, net of tax
—

—

26

Retained Earnings, beginning of period, as adjusted
11,001

10,509

9,669

Net income
(38
)
712

1,636

Cumulative effect of accounting changes, net of tax
—

—

(197
)
Accelerated accretion of discount from redemption of preferred stock issued to U.S. Treasury
—

—

(440
)
Dividends on preferred stock
(42
)
(42
)
(75
)
Dividends declared on common stock
(176
)
(178
)
(84
)
Retained Earnings, end of period
10,745

11,001

10,509

Treasury Stock, at Cost, beginning of period
(1,718
)
(1,774
)
(1,936
)
Treasury stock acquired
(149
)
(51
)
—

Issuance of shares under incentive and stock compensation plans from treasury stock
134

115

165

Return of shares under incentive and stock compensation plans to treasury stock
(7
)
(8
)
(3
)
Treasury Stock, at Cost, end of period
(1,740
)
(1,718
)
(1,774
)
Accumulated Other Comprehensive Loss, Net of Tax, beginning of period
1,251

(990
)
(3,472
)
Cumulative effect of accounting changes, net of tax
—

—

197

Total other comprehensive income
1,592

2,241

2,285

Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income (Loss), Net of Tax, end of period
2,843

1,251

(990
)
Noncontrolling Interest, beginning of period
—

—

29

Recognition of noncontrolling interest in other liabilities
—

—

(29
)
Noncontrolling Interest, end of period
—

—

—

Total Stockholders’ Equity
$
22,447

$
21,486

$
18,754

Preferred Shares Outstanding, beginning of period (in thousands)
575

575

3,400

Redemption of preferred shares issued to the U.S. Treasury
—

—

(3,400
)
Issuance of mandatory convertible preferred shares
—

—

575

Preferred Shares Outstanding, end of period
575

575

575

Common Shares Outstanding, at beginning of period (in thousands)
442,539

444,549

383,007

Issuance of shares under public offering
—

—

59,590

Treasury stock acquired
(8,045
)
(3,225
)
—

Issuance of shares under incentive and stock compensation plans
2,156

1,476

2,095

Return of shares under incentive and stock compensation plans and other to treasury stock
(344
)
(261
)
(143
)
Common Shares Outstanding, at end of period
436,306

442,539

444,549

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

F-6
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

 
For the years ended December 31,
(In millions)
2012
2011
2010
Operating Activities
 
 
 
Net income (loss)
$
(38
)
$
712

$
1,636

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities
 

 

 

Amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs and present value of future profits
1,988

2,444

1,709

Additions to deferred policy acquisition costs and present value of future profits
(1,639
)
(1,696
)
(1,729
)
Change in reserve for future policy benefits and unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses and unearned premiums
(226
)
1,451

(93
)
Change in reinsurance recoverables
(351
)
(31
)
353

Change in receivables and other assets
(257
)
(211
)
437

Change in payables and accruals
874

(491
)
(612
)
Change in accrued and deferred income taxes
(386
)
(82
)
521

Net realized capital losses
711

24

554

Net receipts (disbursements) from investment contracts related to policyholder funds — international variable annuities
(1,539
)
(2,332
)
497

Net (increase) decrease in equity securities, trading
1,566

2,321

(499
)
Depreciation and amortization
467

668

596

Goodwill impairment
—

30

153

Loss on extinguishment of debt
910

—

—

Reinsurance loss on disposition, including goodwill impairment of $342
533

—

—

Other operating activities, net
68

(533
)
(214
)
Net cash provided by operating activities
2,681

2,274

3,309

Investing Activities
 

 

 

Proceeds from the sale/maturity/prepayment of:
 

 

 

Fixed maturities, available-for-sale
44,116

37,914

49,155

Fixed maturities, fair value option
283

37

20

Equity securities, available-for-sale
295

239

325

Mortgage loans
515

515

1,723

Partnerships
208

237

367

Payments for the purchase of:
 

 

 

Fixed maturities, available-for-sale
(42,578
)
(37,627
)
(50,807
)
Fixed maturities, fair value option
(182
)
(664
)
(75
)
Equity securities, available-for-sale
(144
)
(270
)
(163
)
Mortgage loans
(1,483
)
(1,800
)
(291
)
Partnerships
(903
)
(784
)
(348
)
Proceeds from business sold
58

278

241

Derivatives, net
(2,665
)
720

(338
)
Change in policy loans, net
4

180

(7
)
Change in payables for collateral under securities lending, net
—

—

(46
)
Other investing activities, net
(81
)
(157
)
(190
)
Net cash used for investing activities
(2,557
)
(1,182
)
(434
)
Financing Activities
 

 

 

Deposits and other additions to investment and universal life-type contracts
10,951

11,531

12,602

Withdrawals and other deductions from investment and universal life-type contracts
(25,543
)
(21,022
)
(22,476
)
Net transfers from separate accounts related to investment and universal life-type contracts
13,196

9,843

8,409

Repayments at maturity or settlement of consumer notes
(153
)
(68
)
(754
)
Net increase (decrease) in securities loaned or sold under agreements to repurchase
1,988

—

—

Repurchase of Warrants
(300
)
—

—

Net proceeds from issuance of mandatory convertible preferred stock
—

—

556

Net proceeds from issuance of common shares under public offering
—

—

1,600

Redemption of preferred stock and warrants issued to U.S. Treasury
—

—

(3,400
)
Repayment of long-term debt
(2,133
)
(405
)
(343
)
Proceeds from the issuance of long-term debt
2,123

—

1,090

Proceeds from net issuance of shares under incentive and stock compensation plans, excess tax benefit and other
14

10

25

Treasury stock acquired
(154
)
(46
)
—

Dividends paid on preferred stock
(42
)
(42
)
(85
)
Dividends paid on common stock
(175
)
(153
)
(85
)
Changes in bank deposits and payments on bank advances
—

(257
)
(94
)
Net cash used for financing activities
(228
)
(609
)
(2,955
)
Foreign exchange rate effect on cash
(56
)
36

—

Net increase (decrease) in cash
(160
)
519

(80
)
Cash — beginning of period
2,581

2,062

2,142

Cash — end of period
$
2,421

$
2,581

$
2,062

Supplemental Disclosure of Cash Flow Information
 

 

 

Income taxes paid (received)
$
(486
)
$
179

$
308

Interest paid
$
461

$
501

$
485

Supplemental Disclosure of Non-Cash Investing Activity
 
 
 
Conversion of fixed maturities, available-for-sale to equity securities, available-for-sale
$
67

$
—

$
—

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

F-7
Table of Contents

THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
(Dollar amounts in millions, except for per share data, unless otherwise stated)
1 . Basis of Presentation and Significant Accounting Policies
Basis of Presentation
The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. is a holding company for insurance and financial services subsidiaries that provide investment products and life and property and casualty insurance to both individual and business customers in the United States (collectively, “The Hartford”, the “Company”, “we” or “our”). In 2012, The Hartford concluded an evaluation of its strategy and business portfolio. The Company is currently focusing on its Property & Casualty, Group Benefits and Mutual Fund businesses. Also, the Company continues to administer life and annuity products previously sold.
On January 1, 2013, the Company completed the sale of its Retirement Plans business to Massachusetts Mutual Life Insurance Company ("MassMutual") and on January 2, 2013 the Company completed the sale of its Individual Life insurance business to The Prudential Insurance Company of America ("Prudential"), a subsidiary of Prudential Financial, Inc. For further discussion of these and other such transactions, see Note 2 - Business Dispositions of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
The Consolidated Financial Statements have been prepared on the basis of accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (“U.S. GAAP”), which differ materially from the accounting practices prescribed by various insurance regulatory authorities.
On January 1, 2012, the Company retrospectively adopted Accounting Standards Update (“ASU”) No. 2010-26, Financial Services – Insurance (Topic 944): Accounting for Costs Associated with Acquiring or Renewing Insurance Contracts which clarifies the definition of policy acquisition costs that are eligible for deferral. Previously reported financial information has been revised to reflect the effect of the Company’s adoption of this accounting standard. As a result of this accounting change, total stockholders’ equity as of January 1, 2010, decreased by approximately $1.7 billion , after-tax from $17.9 billion , as previously reported, to $16.2 billion due to a reduction of the Company’s deferred acquisition cost asset ("DAC") balance related to certain costs that do not meet the provisions of the revised standard.
The effect of adoption of this accounting standard on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheet and Consolidated Statements of Operations was as follows:
 
 
December 31, 2011
 
As previously
reported
Effect of 
change
As currently
reported
Deferred policy acquisition costs and present value of future profits
$
8,744

$
(2,188
)
$
6,556

Deferred income taxes, net
$
1,398

$
733

$
2,131

Other liabilities
$
8,443

$
(31
)
$
8,412

Retained earnings
$
12,519

$
(1,518
)
$
11,001

Accumulated other comprehensive income, net of tax
$
1,157

$
94

$
1,251

Total stockholders’ equity
$
22,910

$
(1,424
)
$
21,486

 

F-8
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)

1. Basis of Presentation and Accounting Policies (continued)

 
For the year ended December 31, 2011
 
As previously
reported
Effect of 
change
As currently
reported
Amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs and present value of future profits
$
3,427

$
(983
)
$
2,444

Insurance operating costs and other expenses
$
4,398

$
912

$
5,310

Income from continuing operations before income taxes
$
230

$
71

$
301

Income tax expense (benefit)
$
(346
)
$
21

$
(325
)
Net income
$
662

$
50

$
712

Net income available to common shareholders
$
620

$
50

$
670

Income from continuing operations, net of tax, available to common shareholders per common share:
 
 
 
Basic
$
1.20

$
0.11

$
1.31

Diluted
$
1.12

$
0.10

$
1.22

Net income available to common shareholders per common share:
 
 
 
Basic
$
1.39

$
0.12

$
1.51

Diluted
$
1.30

$
0.10

$
1.40

 
For the year ended December 31, 2010
 
As previously
reported
Effect of 
change
As currently
reported
Amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs and present value of future profits
$
2,527

$
(835
)
$
1,692

Insurance operating costs and other expenses
$
4,407

$
919

$
5,326

Income from continuing operations before income taxes
$
2,356

$
(84
)
$
2,272

Income tax expense (benefit)
$
612

$
(40
)
$
572

Net income
$
1,680

$
(44
)
$
1,636

Net income available to common shareholders
$
1,165

$
(44
)
$
1,121

Income from continuing operations, net of tax, available to common shareholders per common share:
 
 
 
Basic
$
2.85

$
(0.10
)
$
2.75

Diluted
$
2.62

$
(0.09
)
$
2.53

Net income available to common shareholders per common share:
 
 
 
Basic
$
2.70

$
(0.10
)
$
2.60

Diluted
$
2.49

$
(0.09
)
$
2.40

Consolidation
The Consolidated Financial Statements include the accounts of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc., companies in which the Company directly or indirectly has a controlling financial interest and those variable interest entities (“VIEs”) in which the Company is required to consolidate. Entities in which the Company has significant influence over the operating and financing decisions but are not required to consolidate are reported using the equity method. For further discussions on VIEs see Note 6 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. Material intercompany transactions and balances between The Hartford and its subsidiaries and affiliates have been eliminated.
Discontinued Operations
The results of operations of a component of the Company that either has been disposed of or is classified as held-for-sale are reported in discontinued operations if the operations and cash flows of the component have been or will be eliminated from the ongoing operations of the Company as a result of the disposal transaction and the Company will not have any significant continuing involvement in the operations of the component after the disposal transaction.
The Company is presenting the operations of certain businesses that meet the criteria for reporting as discontinued operations. Amounts for prior periods have been retrospectively reclassified. See Note 20 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for information on the specific subsidiaries and related impacts.

F-9
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)

1. Basis of Presentation and Accounting Policies (continued)

Use of Estimates
The preparation of financial statements, in conformity with U.S. GAAP, requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and the disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.
The most significant estimates include those used in determining property and casualty insurance product reserves, net of reinsurance; estimated gross profits used in the valuation and amortization of assets and liabilities associated with variable annuity and other universal life-type contracts; evaluation of other-than-temporary impairments on available-for-sale securities and valuation allowances on investments; living benefits required to be fair valued; goodwill impairment; valuation of investments and derivative instruments; pension and other postretirement benefit obligations (see Note 18 ); valuation allowance on deferred tax assets; and contingencies relating to corporate litigation and regulatory matters (see Note 13 ). The related accounting policies are summarized in the Significant Accounting Policies section of this footnote unless indicated otherwise herein. Certain of these estimates are particularly sensitive to market conditions, and deterioration and/or volatility in the worldwide debt or equity markets could have a material impact on the Consolidated Financial Statements.
Mutual Funds
The Company maintains a retail mutual fund operation whereby the Company provides investment management, administrative and distribution services to The Hartford Mutual Funds, Inc. and The Hartford Mutual Funds II, Inc. (collectively, “mutual funds”). These mutual funds are registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) under the Investment Company Act of 1940. The mutual funds are owned by the shareholders of those funds and not by the Company. As such, the mutual fund assets and liabilities and related investment returns are not reflected in the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements since they are not assets, liabilities and operations of the Company.
Reclassifications
Certain reclassifications have been made to prior year financial information to conform to the current year presentation.
Significant Accounting Policies
The Company’s significant accounting policies are as follows:
Revenue Recognition
Property and casualty insurance premiums are earned on a pro rata basis over the lives of the policies and include accruals for ultimate premium revenue anticipated under auditable and retrospectively rated policies. Unearned premiums represent the premiums applicable to the unexpired terms of policies in force. An estimated allowance for doubtful accounts is recorded on the basis of periodic evaluations of balances due from insureds, management’s experience and current economic conditions. The Company charges off any balances that are determined to be uncollectible. The allowance for doubtful accounts included in premiums receivable and agents’ balances in the Consolidated Balance Sheets was $117 and $119 as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively.
Traditional life and group disability products premiums are generally recognized as revenue when due from policyholders.
Fee income for universal life-type contracts consists of policy charges for policy administration, cost of insurance charges and surrender charges assessed against policyholders’ account balances and are recognized in the period in which services are provided. The amounts collected from policyholders for investment and universal life-type contracts are considered deposits and are not included in revenue. Unearned revenue reserves, representing amounts assessed as consideration for policy origination of a universal life-type contract, are deferred and recognized in income over the period benefited, generally in proportion to estimated gross profits.
The Company provides investment management, administrative and distribution services to mutual funds. The Company charges fees to these mutual funds which are primarily based on the average daily net asset values of the mutual funds and recorded as fee income in the period in which the services are provided. Commission fees are based on the sale proceeds and recognized at the time of the transaction. Transfer agent fees are assessed as a charge per account and recognized as fee income in the period in which the services are provided.
Other revenues primarily consists of servicing revenues which are recognized as services are performed.

F-10
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)

1. Basis of Presentation and Accounting Policies (continued)

Dividends to Policyholders
Policyholder dividends are paid to certain property and casualty and life insurance policyholders. Policies that receive dividends are referred to as participating policies. Such dividends are accrued using an estimate of the amount to be paid based on underlying contractual obligations under policies and applicable state laws.
Net written premiums for participating property and casualty insurance policies represented 10% , 9% and 8% of total net written premiums for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively. Participating dividends to policyholders were $14 , $18 and $5 for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively.
Total participating policies in-force represented 1% of the total life insurance policies in-force as of December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 . Dividends to policyholders were $20 , $17 and $21 for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively. There were no additional amounts of income allocated to participating policyholders. If limitations exist on the amount of net income from participating life insurance contracts that may be distributed to stockholder’s, the policyholder’s share of net income on those contracts that cannot be distributed is excluded from stockholder’s equity by a charge to operations and a credit to a liability.
Fair Value
The following financial instruments are carried at fair value in the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements: fixed maturity and equity securities, available-for-sale (“AFS”), fixed maturities at fair value using fair value option (“FVO”), equity securities, trading, short-term investments, freestanding and embedded derivatives, limited partnerships and other alternative investments, separate account assets and certain other liabilities.
Investments
Overview
The Company’s investments in fixed maturities include bonds, redeemable preferred stock and commercial paper. These investments, along with certain equity securities, which include common and non-redeemable preferred stocks, are classified as AFS and are carried at fair value. The after-tax difference from cost or amortized cost is reflected in stockholders’ equity as a component of Other Comprehensive Income (Loss) (“OCI”), after adjustments for the effect of deducting the life and pension policyholders’ share of the immediate participation guaranteed contracts and certain life and annuity deferred policy acquisition costs and reserve adjustments. Fixed maturities for which the Company elected the fair value option are classified as FVO and are carried at fair value. The equity investments associated with the variable annuity products offered in Japan are recorded at fair value and are classified as trading with changes in fair value recorded in net investment income. Policy loans are carried at outstanding balance. Mortgage loans are recorded at the outstanding principal balance adjusted for amortization of premiums or discounts and net of valuation allowances. Short-term investments are carried at amortized cost, which approximates fair value. Limited partnerships and other alternative investments are reported at their carrying value with the change in carrying value primarily accounted for under the equity method and accordingly the Company’s share of earnings are included in net investment income. In addition, investment fund accounting is applied to a wholly-owned fund of funds. Recognition of limited partnerships and other alternative investment income is delayed due to the availability of the related financial information, as private equity and other funds are generally on a three-month delay and hedge funds are on a one-month delay. Accordingly, income for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 , and 2010 may not include the full impact of current year changes in valuation of the underlying assets and liabilities, which are generally obtained from the limited partnerships and other alternative investments’ general partners. Other investments primarily consist of derivatives instruments which are carried at fair value.

F-11
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)

1. Basis of Presentation and Accounting Policies (continued)

Recognition and Presentation of Other-Than-Temporary Impairments
The Company deems debt securities and certain equity securities with debt-like characteristics (collectively “debt securities”) to be other-than-temporarily impaired (“impaired”) if a security meets the following conditions: a) the Company intends to sell or it is more likely than not that the Company will be required to sell the security before a recovery in value, or b) the Company does not expect to recover the entire amortized cost basis of the security. If the Company intends to sell or it is more likely than not that the Company will be required to sell the security before a recovery in value, a charge is recorded in net realized capital losses equal to the difference between the fair value and amortized cost basis of the security. For those impaired debt securities which do not meet the first condition and for which the Company does not expect to recover the entire amortized cost basis, the difference between the security’s amortized cost basis and the fair value is separated into the portion representing a credit other-than-temporary impairment (“impairment”), which is recorded in net realized capital losses, and the remaining impairment, which is recorded in OCI. Generally, the Company determines a security’s credit impairment as the difference between its amortized cost basis and its best estimate of expected future cash flows discounted at the security’s effective yield prior to impairment. The remaining non-credit impairment, which is recorded in OCI, is the difference between the security’s fair value and the Company’s best estimate of expected future cash flows discounted at the security’s effective yield prior to the impairment, which typically represents current market liquidity and risk premiums. The previous amortized cost basis less the impairment recognized in net realized capital losses becomes the security’s new cost basis. The Company accretes the new cost basis to the estimated future cash flows over the expected remaining life of the security by prospectively adjusting the security’s yield, if necessary. The following table presents the change in non-credit impairments recognized in OCI as disclosed in the Company’s Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income (Loss).
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
OTTI losses recognized in OCI
$
(40
)
$
(89
)
$
(418
)
Changes in fair value and/or sales
147

112

647

Tax and deferred acquisition costs
(55
)
(14
)
(113
)
Change in non-credit impairments recognized in OCI
$
52

$
9

$
116

The Company’s evaluation of whether a credit impairment exists for debt securities includes but is not limited to, the following factors: (a) changes in the financial condition of the security’s underlying collateral, (b) whether the issuer is current on contractually obligated interest and principal payments, (c) changes in the financial condition, credit rating and near-term prospects of the issuer, (d) the extent to which the fair value has been less than the amortized cost of the security and (e) the payment structure of the security. The Company’s best estimate of expected future cash flows used to determine the credit loss amount is a quantitative and qualitative process that incorporates information received from third-party sources along with certain internal assumptions and judgments regarding the future performance of the security. The Company’s best estimate of future cash flows involves assumptions including, but not limited to, various performance indicators, such as historical and projected default and recovery rates, credit ratings, current and projected delinquency rates, and loan-to-value ("LTV") ratios. In addition, for structured securities, the Company considers factors including, but not limited to, average cumulative collateral loss rates that vary by vintage year, commercial and residential property value declines that vary by property type and location and commercial real estate delinquency levels. These assumptions require the use of significant management judgment and include the probability of issuer default and estimates regarding timing and amount of expected recoveries which may include estimating the underlying collateral value. In addition, projections of expected future debt security cash flows may change based upon new information regarding the performance of the issuer and/or underlying collateral such as changes in the projections of the underlying property value estimates.
For equity securities where the decline in the fair value is deemed to be other-than-temporary, a charge is recorded in net realized capital losses equal to the difference between the fair value and cost basis of the security. The previous cost basis less the impairment becomes the security’s new cost basis. The Company asserts its intent and ability to retain those equity securities deemed to be temporarily impaired until the price recovers. Once identified, these securities are systematically restricted from trading unless approved by investment and accounting professionals. The investment and accounting professionals will only authorize the sale of these securities based on predefined criteria that relate to events that could not have been reasonably foreseen. Examples of the criteria include, but are not limited to, the deterioration in the issuer’s financial condition, security price declines, a change in regulatory requirements or a major business combination or major disposition.
The primary factors considered in evaluating whether an impairment exists for an equity security include, but are not limited to: (a) the length of time and extent to which the fair value has been less than the cost of the security, (b) changes in the financial condition, credit rating and near-term prospects of the issuer, (c) whether the issuer is current on preferred stock dividends and (d) the intent and ability of the Company to retain the investment for a period of time sufficient to allow for recovery.

F-12
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)

1. Basis of Presentation and Accounting Policies (continued)

Mortgage Loan Valuation Allowances
The Company’s security monitoring process reviews mortgage loans on a quarterly basis to identify potential credit losses. Commercial mortgage loans are considered to be impaired when management estimates that, based upon current information and events, it is probable that the Company will be unable to collect amounts due according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement. Criteria used to determine if an impairment exists include, but are not limited to: current and projected macroeconomic factors, such as unemployment rates, and property-specific factors such as rental rates, occupancy levels, LTV ratios and debt service coverage ratios (“DSCR”). In addition, the Company considers historic, current and projected delinquency rates and property values. These assumptions require the use of significant management judgment and include the probability and timing of borrower default and loss severity estimates. In addition, projections of expected future cash flows may change based upon new information regarding the performance of the borrower and/or underlying collateral such as changes in the projections of the underlying property value estimates.
For mortgage loans that are deemed impaired, a valuation allowance is established for the difference between the carrying amount and the Company’s share of either (a) the present value of the expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate, (b) the loan’s observable market price or, most frequently, (c) the fair value of the collateral. A valuation allowance has been established for either individual loans or as a projected loss contingency for loans with an LTV ratio of 90% or greater and consideration of other credit quality factors, including DSCR. Changes in valuation allowances are recorded in net realized capital gains and losses. Interest income on impaired loans is accrued to the extent it is deemed collectible and the loans continue to perform under the original or restructured terms. Interest income ceases to accrue for loans when it is probable that the Company will not receive interest and principal payments according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement, or if a loan is more than 60 days past due. Loans may resume accrual status when it is determined that sufficient collateral exists to satisfy the full amount of the loan and interest payments, as well as when it is probable cash will be received in the foreseeable future. Interest income on defaulted loans is recognized when received.
Net Realized Capital Gains and Losses
Net realized capital gains and losses from investment sales, after deducting the life and pension policyholders’ share for certain products, are reported as a component of revenues and are determined on a specific identification basis, as well as changes in value associated with fixed maturities for which the fair value option was elected. Net realized capital gains and losses also result from fair value changes in derivatives contracts (both free-standing and embedded) that do not qualify, or are not designated, as a hedge for accounting purposes, ineffectiveness on derivatives that qualify for hedge accounting treatment, and the change in value of derivatives in certain fair-value hedge relationships and their associated hedged asset. Impairments and mortgage loan valuation allowances are recognized as net realized capital losses in accordance with the Company’s impairment and mortgage loan valuation allowance policies previously discussed above. Foreign currency transaction remeasurements are also included in net realized capital gains and losses.
Net Investment Income
Interest income from fixed maturities and mortgage loans is recognized when earned on the constant effective yield method based on estimated timing of cash flows. The amortization of premium and accretion of discount for fixed maturities also takes into consideration call and maturity dates that produce the lowest yield. For securitized financial assets subject to prepayment risk, yields are recalculated and adjusted periodically to reflect historical and/or estimated future repayments using the retrospective method; however, if these investments are impaired, any yield adjustments are made using the prospective method. Prepayment fees on fixed maturities and mortgage loans are recorded in net investment income when earned. Limited partnerships and other alternative investments primarily use the equity method of accounting to recognize the Company’s share of earnings, as well as investment fund accounting applied to a wholly-owned fund of funds. For impaired debt securities, the Company accretes the new cost basis to the estimated future cash flows over the expected remaining life of the security by prospectively adjusting the security’s yield, if necessary. The Company’s non-income producing investments were not material for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 .
Net investment income on equity securities, trading, includes dividend income and the changes in market value of the securities associated with the variable annuity products sold in Japan and the United Kingdom. The returns on these policyholder-directed investments inure to the benefit of the variable annuity policyholders but the underlying funds do not meet the criteria for separate account reporting. Accordingly, these assets are reflected in the Company’s general account and the returns credited to the policyholders are reflected in interest credited, a component of benefits, losses and loss adjustment expenses.

F-13
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)

1. Basis of Presentation and Accounting Policies (continued)

Derivative Instruments
Overview
The Company utilizes a variety of derivative instruments, including swaps, caps, floors, forwards, futures and options through one of four Company-approved objectives: to hedge risk arising from interest rate, equity market, credit spread and issuer default, price or currency exchange rate risk or volatility; to manage liquidity; to control transaction costs; or to enter into replication transactions.
Interest rate, volatility, dividend, credit default and index swaps involve the periodic exchange of cash flows with other parties, at specified intervals, calculated using agreed upon rates or other financial variables and notional principal amounts. Generally, no cash or principal payments are exchanged at the inception of the contract. Typically, at the time a swap is entered into, the cash flow streams exchanged by the counterparties are equal in value.
Interest rate cap and floor contracts entitle the purchaser to receive from the issuer at specified dates, the amount, if any, by which a specified market rate exceeds the cap strike interest rate or falls below the floor strike interest rate, applied to a notional principal amount. A premium payment is made by the purchaser of the contract at its inception and no principal payments are exchanged.
Forward contracts are customized commitments that specify a rate of interest or currency exchange rate to be paid or received on an obligation beginning on a future start date and are typically settled in cash.
Financial futures are standardized commitments to either purchase or sell designated financial instruments, at a future date, for a specified price and may be settled in cash or through delivery of the underlying instrument. Futures contracts trade on organized exchanges. Margin requirements for futures are met by pledging securities or cash, and changes in the futures’ contract values are settled daily in cash.
Option contracts grant the purchaser, for a premium payment, the right to either purchase from or sell to the issuer a financial instrument at a specified price, within a specified period or on a stated date.
Foreign currency swaps exchange an initial principal amount in two currencies, agreeing to re-exchange the currencies at a future date, at an agreed upon exchange rate. There may also be a periodic exchange of payments at specified intervals calculated using the agreed upon rates and exchanged principal amounts.
The Company’s derivative transactions are used in strategies permitted under the derivative use plans required by the State of Connecticut, the State of Illinois and the State of New York insurance departments.
Accounting and Financial Statement Presentation of Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities
Derivative instruments are recognized on the Consolidated Balance Sheets at fair value. For balance sheet presentation purposes, the Company offsets the fair value amounts, income accruals, and cash collateral, related to derivative instruments executed in a legal entity and with the same counterparty under a master netting agreement, which provides the Company with the legal right of offset.
On the date the derivative contract is entered into, the Company designates the derivative as (1) a hedge of the fair value of a recognized asset or liability (“fair value” hedge), (2) a hedge of the variability in cash flows of a forecasted transaction or of amounts to be received or paid related to a recognized asset or liability (“cash flow” hedge), (3) a hedge of a net investment in a foreign operation (“net investment” hedge) or (4) held for other investment and/or risk management purposes, which primarily involve managing asset or liability related risks and do not qualify for hedge accounting.
Fair Value Hedges
Changes in the fair value of a derivative that is designated and qualifies as a fair value hedge, including foreign-currency fair value hedges, along with the changes in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability that is attributable to the hedged risk, are recorded in current period earnings with any differences between the net change in fair value of the derivative and the hedged item representing the hedge ineffectiveness. Periodic cash flows and accruals of income/expense (“periodic derivative net coupon settlements”) are recorded in the line item of the consolidated statements of operations in which the cash flows of the hedged item are recorded.
Cash Flow Hedges
Changes in the fair value of a derivative that is designated and qualifies as a cash flow hedge, including foreign-currency cash flow hedges, are recorded in AOCI and are reclassified into earnings when the variability of the cash flow of the hedged item impacts earnings. Gains and losses on derivative contracts that are reclassified from AOCI to current period earnings are included in the line item in the consolidated statements of operations in which the cash flows of the hedged item are recorded. Any hedge ineffectiveness is recorded immediately in current period earnings as net realized capital gains and losses. Periodic derivative net coupon settlements are recorded in the line item of the consolidated statements of operations in which the cash flows of the hedged item are recorded.

F-14
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)

1. Basis of Presentation and Accounting Policies (continued)

Net Investment in a Foreign Operation Hedges
Changes in fair value of a derivative used as a hedge of a net investment in a foreign operation, to the extent effective as a hedge, are recorded in the foreign currency translation adjustments account within AOCI. Cumulative changes in fair value recorded in AOCI are reclassified into earnings upon the sale or complete, or substantially complete, liquidation of the foreign entity. Any hedge ineffectiveness is recorded immediately in current period earnings as net realized capital gains and losses. Periodic derivative net coupon settlements are recorded in the line item of the consolidated statements of operations in which the cash flows of the hedged item are recorded.
Other Investment and/or Risk Management Activities
The Company’s other investment and/or risk management activities primarily relate to strategies used to reduce economic risk or replicate permitted investments and do not receive hedge accounting treatment. Changes in the fair value, including periodic derivative net coupon settlements, of derivative instruments held for other investment and/or risk management purposes are reported in current period earnings as net realized capital gains and losses.
Hedge Documentation and Effectiveness Testing
To qualify for hedge accounting treatment, a derivative must be highly effective in mitigating the designated changes in fair value or cash flow of the hedged item. At hedge inception, the Company formally documents all relationships between hedging instruments and hedged items, as well as its risk-management objective and strategy for undertaking each hedge transaction. The documentation process includes linking derivatives that are designated as fair value, cash flow, or net investment hedges to specific assets or liabilities on the balance sheet or to specific forecasted transactions and defining the effectiveness and ineffectiveness testing methods to be used. The Company also formally assesses both at the hedge’s inception and ongoing on a quarterly basis, whether the derivatives that are used in hedging transactions have been and are expected to continue to be highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values or cash flows of hedged items. Hedge effectiveness is assessed using qualitative and quantitative methods. Qualitative methods may include comparison of critical terms of the derivative to the hedged item. Quantitative methods include regression or other statistical analysis of changes in fair value or cash flows associated with the hedge relationship. Hedge ineffectiveness of the hedge relationships are measured each reporting period using the “Change in Variable Cash Flows Method”, the “Change in Fair Value Method”, the “Hypothetical Derivative Method”, or the “Dollar Offset Method”.
Discontinuance of Hedge Accounting
The Company discontinues hedge accounting prospectively when (1) it is determined that the derivative is no longer highly effective in offsetting changes in the fair value or cash flows of a hedged item; (2) the derivative is de-designated as a hedging instrument; or (3) the derivative expires or is sold, terminated or exercised.
When hedge accounting is discontinued because it is determined that the derivative no longer qualifies as an effective fair-value hedge, the derivative continues to be carried at fair value on the balance sheet with changes in its fair value recognized in current period earnings.
When hedge accounting is discontinued because the Company becomes aware that it is not probable that the forecasted transaction will occur, the derivative continues to be carried on the balance sheet at its fair value, and gains and losses that were accumulated in AOCI are recognized immediately in earnings.
In other situations in which hedge accounting is discontinued on a cash-flow hedge, including those where the derivative is sold, terminated or exercised, amounts previously deferred in AOCI are reclassified into earnings when earnings are impacted by the variability of the cash flow of the hedged item.
Embedded Derivatives
The Company purchases and issues financial instruments and products that contain embedded derivative instruments. When it is determined that (1) the embedded derivative possesses economic characteristics that are not clearly and closely related to the economic characteristics of the host contract, and (2) a separate instrument with the same terms would qualify as a derivative instrument, the embedded derivative is bifurcated from the host for measurement purposes. The embedded derivative, which is reported with the host instrument in the consolidated balance sheets, is carried at fair value with changes in fair value reported in net realized capital gains and losses.

F-15
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)

1. Basis of Presentation and Accounting Policies (continued)

Credit Risk
Credit risk is measured as the amount owed to the Company based on current market conditions and potential payment obligations between the Company and its counterparties. For each legal entity of the Company, credit exposures are generally quantified daily based on the prior business day’s market value and collateral is pledged to and held by, or on behalf of, the Company to the extent the current value of derivatives exceeds the contractual thresholds for every counterparty. For the Company’s domestic derivative programs, the maximum uncollateralized threshold for a derivative counterparty for a single legal entity is generally $10 . The Company also minimizes the credit risk of derivative instruments by entering into transactions with high quality counterparties rated A or better, which are monitored and evaluated by the Company’s risk management team and reviewed by senior management. In addition, the Company monitors counterparty credit exposure on a monthly basis to ensure compliance with Company policies and statutory limitations. The Company generally requires that derivative contracts, other than exchange traded contracts, certain forward contracts, and certain embedded and reinsurance derivatives, be governed by an International Swaps and Derivatives Association Master Agreement which is structured by legal entity and by counterparty and permits right of offset.
Cash
Cash represents cash on hand and demand deposits with banks or other financial institutions.
Reinsurance
The Company cedes insurance to affiliated and unaffiliated insurers in order to limit its maximum losses and to diversify its exposures and provide statutory surplus relief. Such arrangements do not relieve the Company of its primary liability to policyholders. Failure of reinsurers to honor their obligations could result in losses to the Company. The Company also assumes reinsurance from other insurers and is a member of and participates in reinsurance pools and associations. Assumed reinsurance refers to the Company’s acceptance of certain insurance risks that other insurance companies have underwritten.
Reinsurance accounting is followed for ceded and assumed transactions that provide indemnification against loss or liability relating to insurance risk (i.e. risk transfer). To meet risk transfer requirements, a reinsurance agreement must include insurance risk, consisting of underwriting, investment, and timing risk, and a reasonable possibility of a significant loss to the reinsurer. If the ceded and assumed transactions do not meet risk transfer requirements, the Company accounts for these transactions as financing transactions.
Premiums, benefits, losses and loss adjustment expenses reflect the net effects of ceded and assumed reinsurance transactions. Included in other assets are prepaid reinsurance premiums, which represent the portion of premiums ceded to reinsurers applicable to the unexpired terms of the reinsurance contracts. Included in reinsurance recoverables are balances due from reinsurance companies for paid and unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses and are presented net of an allowance for uncollectible reinsurance.
The Company also is a member of and participates in several reinsurance pools and associations. The Company evaluates the financial condition of its reinsurers and concentrations of credit risk. Reinsurance is placed with reinsurers that meet strict financial criteria established by the Company. As of December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , the Company had no reinsurance-related concentrations of credit risk greater than 10% of the Company’s stockholders’ equity. The Company entered into two reinsurance transactions upon completion of the sales of its Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses in January 2013. See Note 2 - Business Dispositions for further discussion of these transactions.
Deferred Policy Acquisition Costs and Present Value of Future Profits
On January 1, 2012, the Company retrospectively adopted ASU No. 2010-26 as further discussed in the Basis of Presentation section of this footnote. Deferred acquisition costs represent costs that are directly related to the successful acquisition of new and renewal insurance contracts and incremental direct costs of contract acquisition that are incurred in transactions with either independent third parties or employees.
For property and casualty insurance products, costs are deferred and amortized ratably over the period the related premiums are earned. Deferred acquisition costs are reviewed to determine if they are recoverable from future income, and if not, are charged to expense. Anticipated investment income is considered in the determination of the recoverability of DAC. For the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and, 2010 no amount of DAC was charged to expense based on the determination of recoverability.
For life insurance products, the DAC asset, which includes the present value of future profits, related to most universal life-type contracts (including variable annuities) is amortized over the estimated life of the contracts acquired in proportion to the present value of estimated gross profits (“EGPs”). EGPs are also used to amortize other assets and liabilities in the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets, such as, sales inducement assets (“SIA”) and unearned revenue reserves (“URR”). Components of EGPs are used to determine reserves for universal life type contracts (including variable annuities) with death or other insurance benefits such as guaranteed minimum death, guaranteed minimum income and universal life secondary guarantee benefits. These benefits are accounted for and collectively referred to as death and other insurance benefit reserves and are held in addition to the account value liability representing policyholder funds.

F-16
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)

1. Basis of Presentation and Accounting Policies (continued)

For most life insurance product contracts, the Company estimates gross profits over 20 years  as EGPs emerging subsequent to that timeframe are immaterial. Products sold in a particular year are aggregated into cohorts. Future gross profits for each cohort are projected over the estimated lives of the underlying contracts, based on future account value projections for variable annuity and variable universal life products. The projection of future account values requires the use of certain assumptions including: separate account returns; separate account fund mix; fees assessed against the contract holder’s account balance; surrender and lapse rates; interest margin; mortality; and the extent and duration of hedging activities and hedging costs.
The Company determines EGPs from a single deterministic reversion to mean (“RTM”) separate account return projection which is an estimation technique commonly used by insurance entities to project future separate account returns. Through this estimation technique, the Company’s DAC model is adjusted to reflect actual account values at the end of each quarter. Through consideration of recent market returns, the Company will unlock, or adjust, projected returns over a future period so that the account value returns to the long-term expected rate of return, providing that those projected returns do not exceed certain caps or floors. This Unlock for future separate account returns is determined each quarter.
In the third quarter of each year, the Company completes a comprehensive non-market related policyholder behavior assumption study and incorporates the results of those studies into its projection of future gross profits. Additionally, throughout the year, the Company evaluates various aspects of policyholder behavior and periodically revises its policyholder assumptions as credible emerging data indicates that changes are warranted. The Company will continue to evaluate its assumptions related to policyholder behavior as initiatives to reduce the size of the variable annuity business are implemented by management. Upon completion of an annual assumption study or evaluation of credible new information, the Company will revise its assumptions to reflect its current best estimate. These assumption revisions will change the projected account values and the related EGPs in the DAC, SIA and URR amortization models, as well as, the death and other insurance benefit reserving models.
All assumption changes that affect the estimate of future EGPs including the update of current account values, the use of the RTM estimation technique and policyholder behavior assumptions are considered an Unlock in the period of revision. An Unlock adjusts the DAC, SIA, URR and death and other insurance benefit reserve balances in the Consolidated Balance Sheets with an offsetting benefit or charge in the Consolidated Statements of Operations in the period of the revision. An Unlock revises EGPs to reflect the Company’s current best estimate assumptions. The Company also tests the aggregate recoverability of DAC by comparing the existing DAC balance to the present value of future EGPs. An Unlock that results in an after-tax benefit generally occurs as a result of actual experience or future expectations of product profitability being favorable compared to previous estimates. An Unlock that results in an after-tax charge generally occurs as a result of actual experience or future expectations of product profitability being unfavorable compared to previous estimates.
Income Taxes
The Company recognizes taxes payable or refundable for the current year and deferred taxes for the tax consequences of differences between the financial reporting and tax basis of assets and liabilities. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years the temporary differences are expected to reverse.
Goodwill
Goodwill represents the excess of costs over the fair value of net assets acquired. Goodwill is not amortized but is reviewed for impairment at least annually or more frequently if events occur or circumstances change that would indicate that a triggering event for a potential impairment has occurred. During the fourth quarter of 2011, the Company changed the date of its annual impairment test for all reporting units to October 31 st . As a result, all reporting units performed an impairment test on October 31, 2011 in addition to the annual impairment tests performed on January 1 st or October 1 st as applicable. The change was made to be consistent across all reporting units and to more closely align the impairment testing date with the long-range planning and forecasting process. The Company has determined that this change in accounting principle is preferable under the circumstances and does not result in any delay, acceleration or avoidance of impairment. As it was impracticable to objectively determine projected cash flows and related valuation estimates as of each October 31 for periods prior to October 31, 2011, without applying information that has been learned since those periods, the Company has prospectively applied the change in the annual goodwill impairment testing date from October 31, 2011.
The goodwill impairment test follows a two-step process. In the first step, the fair value of a reporting unit is compared to its carrying value. If the carrying value of a reporting unit exceeds its fair value, the second step of the impairment test is performed for purposes of measuring the impairment. In the second step, the fair value of the reporting unit is allocated to all of the assets and liabilities of the reporting unit to determine an implied goodwill value. If the carrying amount of the reporting unit’s goodwill exceeds the implied goodwill value, an impairment loss is recognized in an amount equal to that excess.

F-17
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)

1. Basis of Presentation and Accounting Policies (continued)

Management’s determination of the fair value of each reporting unit incorporates multiple inputs into discounted cash flow calculations, including assumptions that market participants would make in valuing the reporting unit. Assumptions include levels of economic capital, future business growth, earnings projections and assets under management for Mutual Funds and the reporting units within Talcott Resolution and the weighted average cost of capital used for purposes of discounting. Decreases in the amount of economic capital allocated to a reporting unit, decreases in business growth, decreases in earnings projections and increases in the weighted average cost of capital will all cause a reporting unit’s fair value to decrease.
Goodwill within Corporate is primarily attributed to the Company’s “buy-back” of Hartford Life, Inc. in 2000 and was allocated to each of Hartford Life’s reporting units based on the reporting unit’s fair value of in-force business at the buy-back date. Although this goodwill was allocated to each reporting unit, it is held in Corporate for segment reporting.
Property and Equipment
Property and equipment is carried at cost net of accumulated depreciation. Depreciation is based on the estimated useful lives of the various classes of property and equipment and is determined principally on the straight-line method. Accumulated depreciation was $2.0 billion   and $2.1 billion as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively. Depreciation expense was $183 , $216 , and $276 for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively.
Separate Accounts, Death Benefits and Other Insurance Benefit Features
The Company records the variable portion of individual variable annuities, 401(k), institutional, 403(b)/457, private placement life and variable life insurance products within separate accounts. Separate account assets are reported at fair value and separate account liabilities are reported at amounts consistent with separate account assets. Investment income and gains and losses from those separate account assets accrue directly to the policyholder, who assumes the related investment risk, and are offset by the related liability changes reported in the same line item in the Consolidated Statements of Operations. The Company earns fees for investment management, certain administrative expenses, and mortality and expense risks assumed which are reported in fee income.
Certain contracts classified as universal life-type include death and other insurance benefit features including GMDB and GMIB, offered with variable annuity contracts, or secondary guarantee benefits offered with universal life (“UL”) insurance contracts. GMDBs and GMIBs have been written in various forms. UL secondary guarantee benefits ensure that the universal life policy will not terminate, and will continue to provide a death benefit, even if there is insufficient policy value to cover the monthly deductions and charges. These death and other insurance benefit features require an additional liability be held above the account value liability representing the policyholders’ funds. This liability is reported in reserve for future policy benefits in the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets. Changes in the death and other insurance benefit reserves are recorded in benefits, losses and loss adjustment expenses in the Company’s Consolidated Statements of Operations.
The death and other insurance benefit liability is determined by estimating the expected present value of the benefits in excess of the policyholder’s expected account value in proportion to the present value of total expected assessments. The liability is accrued as actual assessments are recorded. The expected present value of benefits and assessments are generally derived from a set of stochastic scenarios, that have been calibrated to our RTM separate account returns, and assumptions including market rates of return, volatility, discount rates, lapse rates and mortality experience. Consistent with the Company’s policy on the Unlock, the Company regularly evaluates estimates used and adjusts the additional liability balance, with a related charge or credit to benefits, losses and loss adjustment expense. For further information on the Unlock, see Deferred Policy Acquisition Costs and Present Value of Future Benefits in Note 1 .
The Company reinsures a portion of its in-force GMDB and UL secondary guarantees. The death and other insurance benefit reserves, net of reinsurance, are established by estimating the expected value of net reinsurance costs and death and other insurance benefits in excess of the projected account balance. The additional death and other insurance benefits and net reinsurance costs are recognized ratably over the accumulation period based on total expected assessments.

F-18
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)

1. Basis of Presentation and Accounting Policies (continued)

Reserve for Future Policy Benefits and Unpaid Losses and Loss Adjustment Expenses
Property and Casualty Insurance Products
The Hartford establishes property and casualty insurance products reserves to provide for the estimated costs of paying claims under insurance policies written by the Company. These reserves include estimates for both claims that have been reported and those that have been incurred but not reported, and include estimates of all losses and loss adjustment expenses associated with processing and settling these claims. Estimating the ultimate cost of future losses and loss adjustment expenses is an uncertain and complex process. This estimation process is based significantly on the assumption that past developments are an appropriate predictor of future events, and involves a variety of actuarial techniques that analyze experience, trends and other relevant factors. The uncertainties involved with the reserving process have become increasingly difficult due to a number of complex factors including social and economic trends and changes in the concepts of legal liability and damage awards. Accordingly, final claim settlements may vary from the present estimates, particularly when those payments may not occur until well into the future.
The Hartford regularly reviews the adequacy of its estimated losses and loss adjustment expense reserves by line of business within the various reporting segments. Adjustments to previously established reserves are reflected in the operating results of the period in which the adjustment is determined to be necessary. Such adjustments could possibly be significant, reflecting any variety of new and adverse or favorable trends.
Most of the Company’s property and casualty insurance products insurance reserves are not discounted. However, the Company has discounted liabilities funded through structured settlements and has discounted certain reserves for indemnity payments due to permanently disabled claimants under workers’ compensation policies. Structured settlements are agreements that provide fixed periodic payments to claimants and include annuities purchased to fund unpaid losses for permanently disabled claimants and, prior to 2008, agreements that funded loss run-offs for unrelated parties. Most of the annuities have been issued by the Company and these structured settlements are recorded at present value as annuity obligations, either within the reserve for future policy benefits if the annuity benefits are life-contingent or within other policyholder funds and benefits payable if the annuity benefits are not life-contingent. If not funded through an annuity, reserves for certain indemnity payments due to permanently disabled claimants under workers’ compensation policies are recorded as property and casualty insurance products reserves and were discounted to present value at an average interest rate of 4.0% in 2012 and 4.4% in 2011 .
Life Insurance Products
Liabilities for future policy benefits are calculated by the net level premium method using interest, withdrawal and mortality assumptions appropriate at the time the policies were issued. The methods used in determining the liability for unpaid losses and future policy benefits are standard actuarial methods recognized by the American Academy of Actuaries. For the tabular reserves, discount rates are based on the Company’s earned investment yield and the morbidity/mortality tables used are standard industry tables modified to reflect the Company’s actual experience when appropriate. In particular, for the Company’s group disability known claim reserves, the morbidity table for the early durations of claim is based exclusively on the Company’s experience, incorporating factors such as gender, elimination period and diagnosis. These reserves are computed such that they are expected to meet the Company’s future policy obligations. Future policy benefits are computed at amounts that, with additions from estimated premiums to be received and with interest on such reserves compounded annually at certain assumed rates, are expected to be sufficient to meet the Company’s policy obligations at their maturities or in the event of an insured’s death. Changes in or deviations from the assumptions used for mortality, morbidity, expected future premiums and interest can significantly affect the Company’s reserve levels and related future operations and, as such, provisions for adverse deviation are built into the long-tailed liability assumptions.
Liabilities for the Company’s group life and disability contracts, as well as its individual term life insurance policies, include amounts for unpaid losses and future policy benefits. Liabilities for unpaid losses include estimates of amounts to fully settle known reported claims, as well as claims related to insured events that the Company estimates have been incurred but have not yet been reported. These reserve estimates are based on known facts and interpretations of circumstances, and consideration of various internal factors including The Hartford’s experience with similar cases, historical trends involving claim payment patterns, loss payments, pending levels of unpaid claims, loss control programs and product mix. In addition, the reserve estimates are influenced by consideration of various external factors including court decisions, economic conditions and public attitudes. The effects of inflation are implicitly considered in the reserving process.

F-19
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)

1. Basis of Presentation and Accounting Policies (continued)

Other Policyholder Funds and Benefits Payable
Other policyholder funds and benefits payable consist of universal life-type contracts and investment contracts.
Universal life-type contracts consist of fixed and variable annuities, 401(k), certain governmental annuities, private placement life insurance (“PPLI”), variable universal life insurance, universal life insurance and interest sensitive whole life insurance. The liability for universal life-type contracts is equal to the balance that accrues to the benefit of the policyholders as of the financial statement date (commonly referred to as the account value), including credited interest, amounts that have been assessed to compensate the Company for services to be performed over future periods, and any amounts previously assessed against policyholders that are refundable on termination of the contract.
Investment contracts consist of institutional and governmental products, without life contingencies, including funding agreements, certain structured settlements and guaranteed investment contracts. The liability for investment contracts is equal to the balance that accrues to the benefit of the contract holder as of the financial statement date, which includes the accumulation of deposits plus credited interest, less withdrawals and amounts assessed through the financial statement date. Contract holder funds include funding agreements held by Variable Interest Entities issuing medium-term notes.
Foreign Currency Translation
Foreign currency translation gains and losses are reflected in stockholders’ equity as a component of accumulated other comprehensive income (loss). The Company’s foreign subsidiaries’ balance sheet accounts are translated at the exchange rates in effect at each year end and income statement accounts are translated at the average rates of exchange prevailing during the year. The national currencies of the international operations are generally their functional currencies.


F-20
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)


2 . Business Dispositions
Sale of Retirement Plans
On January 1, 2013, the Company completed the sale of its Retirement Plans business to MassMutual for a ceding commission of $355 . The sale was structured as a reinsurance transaction and is estimated to break-even on a pre tax basis and result in an after tax loss consisting of a reinsurance loss, partially offset by realized capital gains. The estimated after tax loss is primarily driven by non-deductible goodwill. Upon closing, the Company reinsured $9.2 billion of policyholder liabilities and $26.3 billion of separate account liabilities under indemnity reinsurance arrangements. The Company also transferred invested assets with a carrying value of $9.3 billion , net of the ceding commission, to MassMutual and wrote off $200 of deferred acquisition costs, deferred income taxes, goodwill, property and equipment and other assets associated with the disposition. These amounts are subject to change pending final determination of the net assets sold, transaction costs and other adjustments. The Retirement Plans business is included in the Talcott Resolution reporting segment.
Sale of Individual Life
On January 2, 2013 the Company completed the sale of its Individual Life insurance business to Prudential for consideration of $615 consisting primarily of a ceding commission. The sale was structured as a reinsurance transaction and is estimated to result in a loss on business disposition consisting of a reinsurance loss partially offset by realized capital gains. Upon closing, in the first quarter of 2013 the Company reinsured $8.7 billion of policyholder liabilities and $5.3 billion of separate account liabilities under indemnity reinsurance arrangements. The Company also transferred invested assets with a carrying value of $8.0 billion , exclusive of $1.4 billion of assets supporting the modified coinsurance agreement, net of cash transferred in place of short-term investments, to Prudential and wrote off $1.8 billion of deferred acquisition costs, deferred income taxes, property and equipment and other assets and $1.5 billion of other liabilities associated with the disposition.
The estimated reinsurance loss on business disposition of $533 , pre tax, for the year ended December 31, 2012 includes a goodwill impairment charge of $342 and a loss accrual for premium deficiency of $191 . This estimate reflects management's best estimate of the potential loss from this transaction. The loss accrual is included in other liabilities in the Company's Consolidated Balance Sheets at December 31, 2012. For further information regarding the Company's 2012 goodwill impairment testing, see Note 9 - Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets. These amounts are subject to change pending final determination of the net assets sold, transaction costs and other adjustments. The Individual Life business is included in the Talcott Resolution reporting segment.
Composition of Invested Assets Transferred
The following table presents invested assets transferred by the Company in connection with the sale of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses in January 2013. In December 2012, the Company recognized intent-to-sell impairments of $177 and gains on derivatives hedging of $108 associated with the sale of these assets.
 
As of December 31, 2012
 
Carrying Value
Asset-backed securities ("ABS")
$
289

Collaterialized debt obligations ("CDOs") [1]
474

Commercial mortgage-backed securities ("CMBS")
949

Corporate
11,651

Foreign govt./govt. agencies
263

Municipal
900

Residential mortgage-backed securities ("RMBS")
707

U.S. Treasuries
116

Total fixed maturities, AFS at fair value (amortized cost of $13,916) [2]
15,349

Equity securities, AFS, at fair value (cost of $35) [3]
37

Fixed maturities, at fair value using the FVO [4]
16

Mortgage loans (net of allowances for loan losses of $1)
1,364

Policy loans, at outstanding balance
582

Total invested assets transferred
$
17,348


F-21
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)

2. Business Dispositions (continued)

[1]
The market value includes the fair value of bifurcated embedded derivative features of certain securities. Changes in fair value are recorded in the net realized capital gains (losses).
[2]
Includes $14.7 billion and $670 of securities in level 2 and 3 of the fair value hierarchy, respectively.
[3]
All equity securities transferred are included in level 2 of the fair value hierarchy.
[4]
All FVO securities transferred are included in level 3 of the fair value hierarchy.


Purchase Agreement with Forethought Financial Group, Inc.
On December 31, 2012, the Company completed the sale of its U.S. individual annuity new business capabilities to Forethought Financial Group. Effective May 1, 2012, all new U.S. annuity policies sold by the Company are reinsured to Forethought Life Insurance Company. The Company will cease the sale of such annuity policies and the reinsurance agreement will terminate as to new business in the second quarter of 2013. The reinsurance agreement has no impact on in-force policies issued on or before April 27, 2012 and the impact of this transaction was not material to the Company's results of operations, financial position or liquidity. The Individual Annuity business is included in the Talcott Resolution reporting segment.
Sale of Woodbury Financial Services, Inc.
On November 30, 2012, the Company completed the sale of Woodbury Financial Services, Inc. ("Woodbury Financial Services", "WFS"), an indirect wholly-owned subsidiary, to AIG Advisor Group, Inc. ("AIG Advisor Group"), a subsidiary of American International Group, Inc. The impact of the disposition of this business was not material to the Company's results of operations, financial position or liquidity. The WFS broker-dealer business is included in the Corporate reporting category.
Servicing Agreement of Hartford Life Private Placement LLC
On July 13, 2012, the Company closed a sale transaction with Philadelphia Financial Group, Inc. (“Philadelphia Financial”) whereby Philadelphia Financial acquired certain assets used to administer the Company's private placement life insurance (“PPLI”) businesses and will service the PPLI businesses. The Company retained certain corporate functions associated with this business as well as the mortality risk on the insurance policies. Upon closing, the Company recorded a deferred gain of $61 after-tax, which will be amortized over the estimated life of the underlying insurance policies. The PPLI business is included in the Talcott Resolution reporting segment.
See Note 20 for sale of subsidiaries that are being reported as discontinued operations.



F-22
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)


3 . Earnings (Loss) per Share
The following table presents a reconciliation of net income (loss) and shares used in calculating basic earnings (loss) per common share to those used in calculating diluted earnings (loss) per common share.
 
For the years ended December 31,
(In millions, except for per share data)
2012
2011
2010
Earnings
 
 
 
Income (loss) from continuing operations
 
 
 
Income (loss) from continuing operations, net of tax
$
(33
)
$
626

$
1,700

Less: Preferred stock dividends and accretion of discount
42

42

515

Income (loss) from continuing operations, net of tax, available to common shareholders
(75
)
584

1,185

Add: Dilutive effect of preferred stock dividends
—

—

33

Income (loss) from continuing operations, net of tax, available to common shareholders and assumed conversion of preferred shares
$
(75
)
$
584

$
1,218

Income (loss) from discontinued operations, net of tax
$
(5
)
$
86

$
(64
)
Net income (loss)
 

 

 

Net income (loss)
$
(38
)
$
712

$
1,636

Less: Preferred stock dividends and accretion of discount
42

42

515

Net income (loss) available to common shareholders
(80
)
670

1,121

Add: Dilutive effect of preferred stock dividends
—

—

33

Net income (loss) available to common shareholders and assumed conversion of preferred shares
$
(80
)
$
670

$
1,154

Shares
 

 

 

Weighted average common shares outstanding, basic
437.7

445.0

431.5

Dilutive effect of warrants
—

31.9

32.3

Dilutive effect of stock compensation plans
—

1.1

1.3

Dilutive effect of mandatory convertible preferred shares
—

—

16.4

Weighted average shares outstanding and dilutive potential common shares
437.7

478.0

481.5

Earnings (loss) per common share
 
 
 
Basic
 
 
 
Income (loss) from continuing operations, net of tax, available to common shareholders
$
(0.17
)
$
1.31

$
2.75

Income (loss) from discontinued operations, net of tax
(0.01
)
0.20

(0.15
)
Net income (loss) available to common shareholders
$
(0.18
)
$
1.51

$
2.60

Diluted
 

 

 

Income (loss) from continuing operations, net of tax, available to common shareholders
$
(0.17
)
$
1.22

$
2.53

Income (loss) from discontinued operations, net of tax
(0.01
)
0.18

(0.13
)
Net income (loss) available to common shareholders
$
(0.18
)
$
1.40

$
2.40



F-23
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
3. Earnings (Loss) per Share (continued)

Basic earnings per share is computed based on the weighted average number of common shares outstanding during the year. Diluted earnings per share includes the dilutive effect of warrants, stock compensation plans, and assumed conversion of preferred shares to common using the treasury stock method. Contingently issuable shares are included for the number of shares issuable assuming the end of the reporting period was the end of the contingency period, if dilutive.
Under the treasury stock method for the warrants issued as a result of the Company’s participation in the Capital Purchase Program (see Note 16 ) exercise shall be assumed at the beginning of the period. The proceeds from exercise of $9.599 per share in 2012 , $9.699 per share in 2011 and $9.790 per share in 2010 shall be assumed to be used to purchase common shares at the average market price during the period.
Under the treasury stock method for stock compensation plans, shares are assumed to be issued and then reduced for the number of shares repurchaseable with theoretical proceeds at the average market price for the period. Theoretical proceeds for the stock compensation plans include option exercise price payments, unamortized stock compensation expense and tax benefits realized in excess of the tax benefit recognized in net income. The difference between the number of shares assumed issued and number of shares purchased represents the dilutive shares. Upon exercise of outstanding options or vesting of other stock compensation plan awards, the additional shares issued and outstanding are included in the calculation of the Company’s weighted average shares from the date of exercise or vesting.
As a result of the losses available to common shareholders for the year ended December 31, 2012 , the Company was required to use basic weighted average common shares outstanding in the calculation of diluted loss per share, since the inclusion of shares for warrants of 26.0 million , stock compensation plans of 2.2 million and mandatory convertible preferred shares, along with the related dividend adjustment, of 20.9 million , would have been antidilutive to the earnings (loss) per share calculations. In the absence of the losses, weighted average common shares outstanding and dilutive potential common shares would have totaled 486.8 million .
Under the if-converted method for mandatory convertible preferred stock (see Note 16 ) the conversion to common shares is assumed if the inclusion of these shares and the related dividend adjustment are dilutive to the earnings per share calculation. For the year ended December 31, 2011 , 20.7 million shares for mandatory convertible preferred shares, along with the related dividend adjustment, would have been antidilutive to the earnings per share calculations. Assuming the impact of the mandatory convertible preferred shares was not antidilutive, weighted average common shares outstanding and dilutive potential common shares would have totaled 498.7 million , for the year ended December 31, 2011 . For the year ended December 31, 2010 , these shares and the related dividend adjustment are included in the diluted earnings per share calculation.
On March 30, 2012 the Company entered into an agreement with Allianz and repurchased the outstanding Series B and Series C warrants. As a result, Allianz no longer holds potentially dilutive outstanding warrants. See Note 16 for additional information regarding the warrant repurchase.



F-24
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)


4 . Segment Information
The Company currently conducts business principally in six reporting segments, as well as a Corporate category. Starting in the fourth quarter of 2012, financial results for the former Individual Life and Retirement Plans segments have been reported in the Talcott Resolution reporting segment. Segment data for prior reporting periods has been adjusted accordingly.
The Company’s reporting segments, as well as the Corporate category, are as follows:
Property & Casualty Commercial
Property & Casualty Commercial provides workers’ compensation, property, automobile, marine, livestock, liability and umbrella coverages primarily throughout the United States (“U.S.”), along with a variety of customized insurance products and risk management services including professional liability, fidelity, surety, and specialty casualty coverages.
Consumer Markets
Consumer Markets provides standard automobile, homeowners and home-based business coverages to individuals across the U.S., including a special program designed exclusively for members of AARP. Consumer Markets also operates a member contact center for health insurance products offered through the AARP Health program.
Property & Casualty Other Operations
Property & Casualty Other Operations includes certain property and casualty operations, currently managed by the Company, that have discontinued writing new business and substantially all of the Company’s asbestos and environmental exposures.
Group Benefits
Group Benefits provides employers, associations, affinity groups and financial institutions with group life, accident and disability coverage, along with other products and services, including voluntary benefits, and group retiree health.
Mutual Funds
Mutual Funds offers mutual funds for retail accounts such as retirement plans and 529 college savings plans and provides investment-management and administrative services such as product design, implementation and oversight.
Talcott Resolution
Talcott Resolution (formerly Life Other Operations) is comprised of runoff business from the Company's U.S. annuity, international (primarily in Japan and Europe) annuity, and institutional and private-placement life insurance businesses, as well as the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses that were sold in January 2013 (see Note 2 for information regarding the sale of these businesses).
Corporate
The Company includes in the Corporate category the Company’s debt financing and related interest expense, as well as other capital raising activities; and certain purchase accounting adjustments and other charges not allocated to the segments.
Financial Measures and Other Segment Information
Certain transactions between segments occur during the year that primarily relate to tax settlements, insurance coverage, expense reimbursements, services provided, security transfers and capital contributions. Also, one segment may purchase group annuity contracts from another to fund pension costs and annuities to settle casualty claims. In addition, certain inter-segment transactions occur that relate to interest income on allocated surplus. Consolidated net investment income is unaffected by such transactions.
The following table presents net income (loss) for each reporting segment, as well as the Corporate category.

For the years ended December 31,
Net income (loss)
2012
2011
2010
Property & Casualty Commercial
$
547

$
526

$
1,007

Consumer Markets
166

7

125

Property & Casualty Other Operations
57

(117
)
(53
)
Group Benefits
129

92

188

Mutual Funds
71

98

132

Talcott Resolution
1

540

672

Corporate
(1,009
)
(434
)
(435
)
Net income (loss)
$
(38
)
$
712

$
1,636


F-25
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
4. Segment Information (continued)

The following table presents revenues by product line for each reporting segment, as well as the Corporate category.
 
For the years ended December 31,
Revenues
2012
2011
2010
Earned premiums, fees, and other considerations
 
 
 
Property & Casualty Commercial
 
 
 
Workers’ compensation
$
2,987

$
2,809

$
2,387

Property
505

528

547

Automobile
587

583

598

Package business
1,160

1,145

1,124

Liability
562

540

540

Fidelity and surety
205

215

224

Professional liability
253

307

324

Total Property & Casualty Commercial
6,259

6,127

5,744

Consumer Markets
 

 

 

Automobile
2,526

2,619

2,806

Homeowners
1,110

1,128

1,141

Total Consumer Markets [1]
3,636

3,747

3,947

Property & Casualty Other Operations
(2
)
—

1

Group Benefits
 

 

 

Group disability
1,735

1,929

2,004

Group life
1,881

2,024

2,052

Other
194

194

222

Total Group Benefits
3,810

4,147

4,278

Mutual Funds
 

 

 

Retail
487

541

561

Annuity and other
112

108

103

Total Mutual Funds
599

649

664

Talcott Resolution
3,594

3,959

3,980

Corporate
167

209

189

Total earned premiums, fees, and other considerations
18,063

18,838

18,803

Net investment income (loss):
 

 

 

Securities available-for-sale and other
4,237

4,272

4,364

Equity securities, trading
4,565

(1,359
)
(774
)
Total net investment income
8,802

2,913

3,590

Net realized capital losses
(711
)
(145
)
(611
)
Other revenues
258

253

267

Total revenues
$
26,412

$
21,859

$
22,049

[1] For 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , AARP members accounted for earned premiums of $ 2.8 billion , $ 2.8 billion and $ 2.9 billion , respectively.
Geographical Revenue Information
For the years ended December 31,
Revenues
2012
2011
2010
United States of America
$
21,814

$
21,561

$
22,140

Japan
4,363

135

(329
)
Other
235

163

238

Total revenues
$
26,412

$
21,859

$
22,049


F-26
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
4. Segment Information (continued)

 
For the years ended December 31,
Amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs and present value of future profits
2012
2011
2010
Property & Casualty Commercial
$
927

$
917

$
905

Consumer Markets
332

337

371

Group Benefits
33

35

40

Mutual Funds
35

47

51

Talcott Resolution
661

1,108

325

Total amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs and present value of future profits
$
1,988

$
2,444

$
1,692

 
For the years ended December 31,
Income tax expense (benefit)
2012
2011
2010
Property & Casualty Commercial
$
159

$
37

$
414

Consumer Markets
65

(22
)
43

Property & Casualty Other Operations
14

(74
)
(40
)
Group Benefits
31

1

66

Mutual Funds
38

54

52

Talcott Resolution
(284
)
(120
)
205

Corporate
(517
)
(201
)
(168
)
Total income tax expense (benefit)
$
(494
)
$
(325
)
$
572

 
As of December 31,
Assets
2012
2011
Property & Casualty Commercial
$
25,595

$
24,566

Consumer Markets
6,024

6,181

Property & Casualty Other Operations
4,509

4,639

Group Benefits
9,545

9,473

Mutual Funds
325

307

Talcott Resolution
243,836

250,817

Corporate
8,679

6,626

Total assets
$
298,513

$
302,609



F-27
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)


5 . Fair Value Measurements
The following section applies the fair value hierarchy and disclosure requirements for the Company’s financial instruments that are carried at fair value. The fair value hierarchy prioritizes the inputs in the valuation techniques used to measure fair value into three broad Levels (Level 1, 2 or 3).
Level 1
Observable inputs that reflect quoted prices for identical assets or liabilities in active markets that the Company has the ability to access at the measurement date. Level 1 securities include highly liquid U.S. Treasuries, money market funds and exchange traded equity securities, open-ended mutual funds reported in separate account assets and exchange-traded derivative securities.
Level 2
Observable inputs, other than quoted prices included in Level 1, for the asset or liability or prices for similar assets and liabilities. Most fixed maturities and preferred stocks, including those reported in separate account assets, are model priced by vendors using observable inputs and are classified within Level 2. Also included are limited partnerships and other alternative assets measured at fair value w here an investment can be redeemed, or substantially redeemed, at the NAV at the measurement date or in the near-term, not to exceed 90 days.
Level 3
Valuations that are derived from techniques in which one or more of the significant inputs are unobservable (including assumptions about risk). Level 3 securities include less liquid securities, guaranteed product embedded and reinsurance derivatives and other complex derivative securities, as well as limited partnerships and other alternative investments carried at fair value that cannot be redeemed in the near-term at the NAV. Because Level 3 fair values, by their nature, contain one or more significant unobservable inputs as there is little or no observable market for these assets and liabilities, considerable judgment is used to determine the Level 3 fair values. Level 3 fair values represent the Company’s best estimate of an amount that could be realized in a current market exchange absent actual market exchanges.
In many situations, inputs used to measure the fair value of an asset or liability position may fall into different levels of the fair value hierarchy. In these situations, the Company will determine the level in which the fair value falls based upon the lowest level input that is significant to the determination of the fair value. Transfers of securities among the levels occur at the beginning of the reporting period. As of December 31, 2012 , the amount of transfers from Level 1 to Level 2 was $2.5 billion , which represented previously on-the-run U.S. Treasury securities that are now off-the-run, and there were no transfers from Level 2 to Level 1. In most cases, both observable (e.g., changes in interest rates) and unobservable (e.g., changes in risk assumptions) inputs are used in the determination of fair values that the Company has classified within Level 3. Consequently, these values and the related gains and losses are based upon both observable and unobservable inputs. The Company’s fixed maturities included in Level 3 are classified as such because these securities are primarily priced by independent brokers and/or within illiquid markets.
The following tables present assets and (liabilities) carried at fair value by hierarchy level. These disclosures provide information as to the extent to which the Company uses fair value to measure financial instruments and information about the inputs used to value those financial instruments to allow users to assess the relative reliability of the measurements. The following table presents assets and (liabilities) carried at fair value by hierarchy level.


F-28
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
5. Fair Value Measurements (continued)

 
December 31, 2012
 
Total
Quoted Prices in
Active Markets
for Identical
Assets
(Level 1)
Significant
Observable
Inputs
(Level 2)
Significant
Unobservable
Inputs
(Level 3)
Assets accounted for at fair value on a recurring basis
 
 
 
 
Fixed maturities, AFS
 
 
 
 
ABS
$
2,763

$
—

$
2,485

$
278

CDOs
3,040

—

2,096

944

CMBS
6,321

—

5,462

859

Corporate
44,049

—

42,048

2,001

Foreign government/government agencies
4,136

—

4,080

56

States, municipalities and political subdivisions (“Municipal”)
14,361

—

14,134

227

RMBS
7,480

—

6,107

1,373

U.S. Treasuries
3,772

115

3,657

—

Total fixed maturities
85,922

115

80,069

5,738

Fixed maturities, FVO
1,087

8

865

214

Equity securities, trading
28,933

1,847

27,086

—

Equity securities, AFS
890

337

469

84

Derivative assets
 
 
 
 
Credit derivatives
(19
)
—

(8
)
(11
)
Equity derivatives
32

—

—

32

Foreign exchange derivatives
104

—

104

—

Interest rate derivatives
235

—

268

(33
)
U.S. GMWB hedging instruments
36

—

(53
)
89

U.S. macro hedge program
186

—

—

186

International program hedging instruments
448

—

318

130

Other derivative contracts
23

—

—

23

Total derivative assets [1]
1,045

—

629

416

Short-term investments
4,581

342

4,239

—

Limited partnerships and other alternative investments [2]
907

—

593

314

Reinsurance recoverable for U.S. GMWB
191

—

—

191

Separate account assets [3]
138,509

97,988

39,938

583

Total assets accounted for at fair value on a recurring basis
$
262,065

$
100,637

$
153,888

$
7,540

Percentage of level to total
100
%
38
%
59
%
3
%
Liabilities accounted for at fair value on a recurring basis
 

 

 

 

Other policyholder funds and benefits payable
 

 

 

 

U.S guaranteed withdrawal benefits
$
(1,249
)
$
—

$
—

$
(1,249
)
International guaranteed withdrawal benefits
(50
)
—

—

(50
)
International other guaranteed living benefits
2

—

—

2

Equity linked notes
(7
)
—

—

(7
)
Total other policyholder funds and benefits payable
(1,304
)
—

—

(1,304
)
Derivative liabilities
 

 

 

 

Credit derivatives
(18
)
—

(33
)
15

Equity derivatives
25

—

—

25

Foreign exchange derivatives
(24
)
—

(24
)
—

Interest rate derivatives
(517
)
—

(518
)
1

U.S. GMWB hedging instruments
536

—

106

430

U.S. macro hedge program
100

—

—

100

International program hedging instruments
(279
)
—

(217
)
(62
)
Total derivative liabilities [4]
(177
)
—

(686
)
509

Consumer notes [5]
(2
)
—

—

(2
)
Total liabilities accounted for at fair value on a recurring basis
$
(1,483
)
$
—

$
(686
)
$
(797
)

F-29
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
5. Fair Value Measurements (continued)

 
December 31, 2011
 
Total
Quoted Prices in
Active Markets
for Identical
Assets
(Level 1)
Significant
Observable
Inputs
(Level 2)
Significant
Unobservable
Inputs
(Level 3)
Assets accounted for at fair value on a recurring basis
 
 
 
 
Fixed maturities, AFS
 
 
 
 
ABS
$
3,153

$
—

$
2,792

$
361

CDOs
2,487

—

2,119

368

CMBS
6,951

—

6,363

588

Corporate
44,011

—

41,756

2,255

Foreign government/government agencies
2,161

—

2,112

49

Municipal
13,260

—

12,823

437

RMBS
5,757

—

4,694

1,063

U.S. Treasuries
4,029

750

3,279

—

Total fixed maturities
81,809

750

75,938

5,121

Fixed maturities, FVO
1,328

—

833

495

Equity securities, trading
30,499

1,967

28,532

—

Equity securities, AFS
921

352

476

93

Derivative assets
 
 
 
 
Credit derivatives
(24
)
—

(11
)
(13
)
Equity derivatives
31

—

—

31

Foreign exchange derivatives
519

—

519

—

Interest rate derivatives
195

—

147

48

U.S. GMWB hedging instruments
494

—

11

483

U.S. macro hedge program
357

—

—

357

International program hedging instruments
731

—

692

39

Other derivative contracts
28

—

—

28

Total derivative assets [1]
2,331

—

1,358

973

Short-term investments
7,736

750

6,986

—

Reinsurance recoverable for U.S. GMWB
443

—

—

443

Separate account assets [3]
139,432

101,644

36,757

1,031

Total assets accounted for at fair value on a recurring basis
$
264,499

$
105,463

$
150,880

$
8,156

Percentage of level to total
100
%
40
%
57
%
3
%

F-30
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
5. Fair Value Measurements (continued)

 
December 31, 2011
 
Total
Quoted Prices
in Active
Markets for
Identical Assets
(Level 1)
Significant
Observable
Inputs
(Level 2)
Significant
Unobservable
Inputs
(Level 3)
Liabilities accounted for at fair value on a recurring basis
 
 
 
 
Other policyholder funds and benefits payable
 
 
 
 
U.S guaranteed withdrawal benefits
$
(2,538
)
$
—

$
—

$
(2,538
)
International guaranteed withdrawal benefits
(66
)
—

—

(66
)
International other guaranteed living benefits
(5
)
—

—

(5
)
Equity linked notes
(9
)
—

—

(9
)
Total other policyholder funds and benefits payable
(2,618
)
—

—

(2,618
)
Derivative liabilities
 
 
 
 
Credit derivatives
(573
)
—

(25
)
(548
)
Equity derivatives
9

—

—

9

Foreign exchange derivatives
134

—

134

—

Interest rate derivatives
(527
)
—

(421
)
(106
)
U.S. GMWB hedging instruments
400

—

—

400

International program hedging instruments
19

—

23

(4
)
Total derivative liabilities [4]
(538
)
—

(289
)
(249
)
Other liabilities
(9
)
—

—

(9
)
Consumer notes [5]
(4
)
—

—

(4
)
Total liabilities accounted for at fair value on a recurring basis
$
(3,169
)
$
—

$
(289
)
$
(2,880
)
[1]
Includes over-the-counter derivative instruments in a net asset value position which may require the counterparty to pledge collateral to the Company. As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , $160 and $1.4 billion , respectively, was netted against the derivative asset value in the Consolidated Balance Sheet and is excluded from the table above. See footnote 4 below for derivative liabilities.
[2]
Represents hedge funds where investment company accounting has been applied to a wholly-owned fund of funds measured at fair value.
[3]
Approximately $3.1 billion and $4.0 billion of investment sales receivable that are not subject to fair value accounting are excluded as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively.
[4]
Includes over-the-counter derivative instruments in a net negative market value position (derivative liability). In the Level 3 roll-forward table included below in this Note 5, the derivative asset and liability are referred to as “freestanding derivatives” and are presented on a net basis.
[5]
Represents embedded derivatives associated with non-funding agreement-backed consumer equity linked notes.
Determination of Fair Values
The valuation methodologies used to determine the fair values of assets and liabilities under the “exit price” notion, reflect market-participant objectives and are based on the application of the fair value hierarchy that prioritizes relevant observable market inputs over unobservable inputs. The Company determines the fair values of certain financial assets and financial liabilities based on quoted market prices where available and where prices represent a reasonable estimate of fair value. The Company also determines fair value based on future cash flows discounted at the appropriate current market rate. Fair values reflect adjustments for counterparty credit quality, the Company’s default spreads, liquidity and, where appropriate, risk margins on unobservable parameters. The following is a discussion of the methodologies used to determine fair values for the financial instruments listed in the above tables.
The fair value process is monitored by the Valuation Committee, which is a cross-functional group of senior management within the Company that meets at least quarterly. The Valuation Committee is co-chaired by the Heads of Investment Operations and Accounting, and has representation from various investment sector professionals, accounting, operations, legal, compliance and risk management. The purpose of the committee is to oversee the pricing policy and procedures by ensuring objective and reliable valuation practices and pricing of financial instruments, as well as addressing fair valuation issues and approving changes to valuation methodologies and pricing sources. There is also a Fair Value Working Group (“Working Group”) which includes the Heads of Investment Operations and Accounting, as well as other investment, operations, accounting and risk management professionals that meet monthly to review market data trends, pricing and trading statistics and results, and any proposed pricing methodology changes described in more detail in the following paragraphs.

F-31
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
5. Fair Value Measurements (continued)

AFS Securities, Fixed Maturities, FVO, Equity Securities, Trading, and Short-term Investments
The fair value of AFS securities, fixed maturities, FVO, equity securities, trading, and short-term investments in an active and orderly market (e.g. not distressed or forced liquidation) are determined by management after considering one of three primary sources of information: third-party pricing services, independent broker quotations or pricing matrices. Security pricing is applied using a “waterfall” approach whereby publicly available prices are first sought from third-party pricing services, the remaining unpriced securities are submitted to independent brokers for prices, or lastly, securities are priced using a pricing matrix. Typical inputs used by these pricing methods include, but are not limited to, reported trades, benchmark yields, issuer spreads, bids, offers, and/or estimated cash flows, prepayments speeds and default rates. Based on the typical trading volumes and the lack of quoted market prices for fixed maturities, third-party pricing services will normally derive the security prices from recent reported trades for identical or similar securities making adjustments through the reporting date based upon available market observable information as outlined above. If there are no recently reported trades, the third-party pricing services and independent brokers may use matrix or model processes to develop a security price where future cash flow expectations are developed based upon collateral performance and discounted at an estimated market rate. Included in the pricing of ABS and RMBS are estimates of the rate of future prepayments of principal over the remaining life of the securities. Such estimates are derived based on the characteristics of the underlying structure and prepayment speeds previously experienced at the interest rate levels projected for the underlying collateral. Actual prepayment experience may vary from these estimates.
Prices from third-party pricing services are often unavailable for securities that are rarely traded or are traded only in privately negotiated transactions. As a result, certain securities are priced via independent broker quotations which utilize inputs that may be difficult to corroborate with observable market based data. Additionally, the majority of these independent broker quotations are non-binding.
A pricing matrix is used to price private placement securities for which the Company is unable to obtain a price from a third-party pricing service by discounting the expected future cash flows from the security by a developed market discount rate utilizing current credit spreads. Credit spreads are developed each month using market based data for public securities adjusted for credit spread differentials between public and private securities which are obtained from a survey of multiple private placement brokers. The appropriate credit spreads determined through this survey approach are based upon the issuer’s financial strength and term to maturity, utilizing an independent public security index and trade information and adjusting for the non-public nature of the securities.
The Working Group performs ongoing analysis of the prices and credit spreads received from third parties to ensure that the prices represent a reasonable estimate of the fair value. This process involves quantitative and qualitative analysis and is overseen by investment and accounting professionals. As a part of this analysis, the Company considers trading volume, new issuance activity and other factors to determine whether the market activity is significantly different than normal activity in an active market, and if so, whether transactions may not be orderly considering the weight of available evidence. If the available evidence indicates that pricing is based upon transactions that are stale or not orderly, the Company places little, if any, weight on the transaction price and will estimate fair value utilizing an internal pricing model. In addition, the Company ensures that prices received from independent brokers represent a reasonable estimate of fair value through the use of internal and external cash flow models developed based on spreads, and when available, market indices. As a result of this analysis, if the Company determines that there is a more appropriate fair value based upon the available market data, the price received from the third party is adjusted accordingly and approved by the Valuation Committee. The Company’s internal pricing model utilizes the Company’s best estimate of expected future cash flows discounted at a rate of return that a market participant would require. The significant inputs to the model include, but are not limited to, current market inputs, such as credit loss assumptions, estimated prepayment speeds and market risk premiums.
The Company conducts other specific activities to monitor controls around pricing. Daily analyses identify price changes over 3-5%, sale trade prices that differ over 3% from the prior day’s price and purchase trade prices that differ more than 3% from the current day’s price. Weekly analyses identify prices that differ more than 5% from published bond prices of a corporate bond index. Monthly analyses identify price changes over 3% , prices that haven’t changed, missing prices and second source validation on most sectors. Analyses are conducted by a dedicated pricing unit who follows up with trading and investment sector professionals and challenges prices with vendors when the estimated assumptions used differ from what the Company feels a market participant would use. Any changes from the identified pricing source are verified by further confirmation of assumptions used. Examples of other procedures performed include, but are not limited to, initial and on-going review of third-party pricing services’ methodologies, review of pricing statistics and trends and back testing recent trades.
The Company has analyzed the third-party pricing services’ valuation methodologies and related inputs, and has also evaluated the various types of securities in its investment portfolio to determine an appropriate fair value hierarchy level based upon trading activity and the observability of market inputs. Most prices provided by third-party pricing services are classified into Level 2 because the inputs used in pricing the securities are market observable. Due to a general lack of transparency in the process that brokers use to develop prices, most valuations that are based on brokers’ prices are classified as Level 3. Some valuations may be classified as Level 2 if the price can be corroborated with observable market data.

F-32
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
5. Fair Value Measurements (continued)

Derivative Instruments, including embedded derivatives within investments
Derivative instruments are fair valued using pricing valuation models that utilize independent market data inputs, quoted market prices for exchange-traded derivatives, or independent broker quotations. Excluding embedded and reinsurance related derivatives, as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , 97% and 98% , respectively, of derivatives, based upon notional values, were priced by valuation models or quoted market prices. The remaining derivatives were priced by broker quotations. The derivatives are valued using mid-market level inputs that are predominantly observable in the market with the exception of the customized swap contracts that hedge guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits (“GMWB”) liabilities. Inputs used to value derivatives include, but are not limited to, swap interest rates, foreign currency forward and spot rates, credit spreads and correlations, interest and equity volatility and equity index levels. For further discussion, see the Derivative Instruments, including embedded derivatives within the investments section in Note 6 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
The Company performs various controls on derivative valuations which include both quantitative and qualitative analysis. Analyses are conducted by a dedicated derivative pricing team that works directly with investment sector professionals to analyze impacts of changes in the market environment and investigate variances. There is a monthly analysis to identify market value changes greater than pre-defined thresholds, stale prices, missing prices and zero prices. Also on a monthly basis, a second source validation, typically to broker quotations, is performed for certain of the more complex derivatives, as well as for all new deals during the month. A model validation review is performed on any new models, which typically includes detailed documentation and validation to a second source. The model validation documentation and results of validation are presented to the Valuation Committee for approval. There is a monthly control to review changes in pricing sources to ensure that new models are not moved to production until formally approved.
The Company utilizes derivative instruments to manage the risk associated with certain assets and liabilities. However, the derivative instrument may not be classified with the same fair value hierarchy level as the associated assets and liabilities. Therefore the realized and unrealized gains and losses on derivatives reported in Level 3 may not reflect the offsetting impact of the realized and unrealized gains and losses of the associated assets and liabilities.
Limited partnerships and other alternative investments
Limited partnerships and other alternative investments include hedge funds where investment company accounting has been applied to a wholly-owned fund of funds measured at fair value. These funds are fair valued using the net asset value per share or equivalent (“NAV”), as a practical expedient, calculated on a monthly basis and is the amount at which a unit or shareholder may redeem their investment, if redemption is allowed. Certain impediments to redemption include, but are not limited to the following: 1) redemption notice may be required and the notice period may be as long as 90 days, 2) redemption may be restricted (e.g. only be allowed on a quarter-end), 3) a holding period referred to as a lock-up may be imposed whereby an investor must hold their investment for a specified period of time before they can make a notice for redemption, 4) gating provisions may limit all redemptions in a given period to a percentage of the entities' equity interests, or may only allow an investor to redeem a portion of their investment at one time and 5) early redemption penalties may be imposed that are expressed as a percentage of the amount redeemed. The Company will assess impediments to redemption and current market conditions that will restrict the redemption at the end of the notice period. Any funds that are subject to significant liquidity restrictions are reported in Level 3; all others will be classified as Level 2.
Valuation Techniques and Inputs for Investments
Generally, the Company determines the estimated fair value of its AFS securities, fixed maturities, FVO, equity securities, trading, and short-term investments using the market approach. The income approach is used for securities priced using a pricing matrix, as well as for derivative instruments. Certain limited partnerships and other alternative investments are measured at fair value using a NAV as a practical expedient. For Level 1 investments, which are comprised of on-the-run U.S. Treasuries, exchange-traded equity securities, short-term investments, and exchange traded futures, option and swap contracts, valuations are based on observable inputs that reflect quoted prices for identical assets in active markets that the Company has the ability to access at the measurement date.
For most of the Company’s debt securities, the following inputs are typically used in the Company’s pricing methods: reported trades, benchmark yields, bids and/or estimated cash flows. For securities except U.S. Treasuries, inputs also include issuer spreads, which may consider credit default swaps. Derivative instruments are valued using mid-market inputs that are predominantly observable in the market.

F-33
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
5. Fair Value Measurements (continued)

A description of additional inputs used in the Company’s Level 2 and Level 3 measurements is listed below:
Level 2
The fair values of most of the Company’s Level 2 investments are determined by management after considering prices received from third party pricing services. These investments include most fixed maturities and preferred stocks, including those reported in separate account assets, as well as certain limited partnerships and other alternative investments.
•
ABS, CDOs, CMBS and RMBS — Primary inputs also include monthly payment information, collateral performance, which varies by vintage year and includes delinquency rates, collateral valuation loss severity rates, collateral refinancing assumptions, credit default swap indices and, for ABS and RMBS, estimated prepayment rates.
•
Corporates, including investment grade private placements — Primary inputs also include observations of credit default swap curves related to the issuer.
•
Foreign government/government agencies - Primary inputs also include observations of credit default swap curves related to the issuer and political events in emerging markets.
•
Municipals — Primary inputs also include Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board reported trades and material event notices, and issuer financial statements.
•
Short-term investments — Primary inputs also include material event notices and new issue money market rates.
•
Equity securities, trading — Consist of investments in mutual funds. Primary inputs include net asset values obtained from third party pricing services.
•
Credit derivatives — S ignificant inputs primarily include the swap yield curve and credit curves.
•
Foreign exchange derivatives — Significant inputs primarily include the swap yield curve, currency spot and forward rates, and cross currency basis curves.
•
Interest rate derivatives — Significant input is primarily the swap yield curve.
•
Limited partnerships and other alternative investments — Primary inputs include a NAV for investment companies with no redemption restrictions as reported on their U.S. GAAP financial statements.
Level 3
Most of the Company's securities classified as Level 3 include less liquid securities such as lower quality ABS, CMBS, commercial real estate ("CRE") CDOs and RMBS primarily backed by below-prime loans. Securities included in level 3 are primarily valued based on broker prices or broker spreads, without adjustments. Primary inputs for non-broker priced investments, including structured securities, are consistent with the typical inputs used in Level 2 measurements noted above, but are Level 3 due to their less liquid markets. Additionally, certain long-dated securities are priced based on third party pricing services, including municipal securities, foreign government/government agencies, bank loans and below investment grade private placement securities. Primary inputs for these long-dated securities are consistent with the typical inputs used in Level 1 and Level 2 measurements noted above, but include benchmark interest rate or credit spread assumptions that are not observable in the marketplace. Level 3 investments also include certain limited partnerships and other alternative investments measured at fair value where the Company does not have the ability to redeem the investment in the near-term at the NAV. Also included in Level 3 are certain derivative instruments that either have significant unobservable inputs or are valued based on broker quotations. Significant inputs for these derivative contracts primarily include the typical inputs used in the Level 1 and Level 2 measurements noted above, but also may include the following:
•
Credit derivatives — Significant unobservable inputs may include credit correlation and swap yield curve and credit curve extrapolation beyond observable limits.
•
Equity derivatives — Significant unobservable inputs may include equity volatility.
•
Interest rate contracts — Significant unobservable inputs may include swap yield curve extrapolation beyond observable limits and interest rate volatility.

F-34
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
5. Fair Value Measurements (continued)

Significant Unobservable Inputs for Level 3 Assets Measured at Fair Values
The following tables present information about significant unobservable inputs used in Level 3 assets measured at fair value.
 
As of December 31, 2012
Securities
 
 
 
Unobservable Inputs
 
Assets accounted for at fair value on a recurring basis
Fair
Value
Predominant
Valuation
Method
Significant Unobservable Input
Minimum
Maximum
Weighted Average [1]
Impact of
Increase in Input
on Fair Value [2]
CMBS
$
859

Discounted
cash flows
Spread (encompasses prepayment, default risk and loss severity)
320 bps
3,615 bps
1,031 bps
Decrease
Corporate [3]
1,371

Discounted
cash flows
Spread
106 bps
900 bps
328 bps
Decrease
Municipal
227

Discounted
cash flows
Spread
227 bps
344 bps
258 bps
Decrease
RMBS
1,373

Discounted
cash flows
Spread
54 bps
1,689 bps
367 bps
Decrease
 
 
 
Constant prepayment rate
—%
12.0%
2.0%
Decrease [4]
 
 
 
Constant default rate
1.0%
24.0%
8.0%
Decrease
 
 
 
Loss severity
—%
100.0%
80.0%
Decrease
[1]
The weig hted average is determined based on the fair value of the securities.
[2]
Conversely, the impact of a decrease in input would have the opposite impact to the fair value as that presented in the table above.
[3]
Level 3 corporate securities excludes those for which the Company bases fair value on broker quotations as discussed below.
[4]
Decrease for above market rate coupons and increase for below market rate coupons.
 
 
As of December 31, 2012
Freestanding Derivatives
 
 
 
Unobservable Inputs
 
  
Fair
Value
Predominant Valuation
Method
Significant
Unobservable Input
Minimum
Maximum
Impact of
Increase in Input
on Fair Value [1]
Equity derivatives
 
 
 
 
 
 
Equity options
$
57

Option model
Equity volatility
13
%
24
%
Increase
Interest rate derivative
 
 
 
 
 
 
Interest rate swaps
(55
)
Discounted
cash flows
Swap curve beyond 30 years
2.8
%
2.8
%
Increase
Long interest rate swaptions
23

Option model
Interest rate volatility
—
%
1
%
Increase
U.S. GMWB hedging instruments
 
 
 
 
 
 
Equity options
281

Option model
Equity volatility
10
%
31
%
Increase
Customized swaps
238

Discounted
cash flows
Equity volatility
10
%
50
%
Increase
U.S. macro hedge program
 
 
 
 
 
 
Equity options
286

Option model
Equity volatility
24
%
43
%
Increase
International program hedging
 
 
 
 
 
 
Equity options
26

Option model
Equity volatility
19
%
27
%
Increase
Long interest rate swaptions
42

Option model
Interest rate volatility
—
%
1
%
Increase
[1]
 Conversely, the impact of a decrease in input would have the opposite impact to the fair value as that presented in the table. Changes are based on long positions, unless otherwise noted. Changes in fair value will be inversely impacted for short positions.

F-35
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
5. Fair Value Measurements (continued)

Securities and derivatives for which the Company bases fair value on broker quotations predominately include ABS, CDOs, corporate, fixed maturities, FVO and certain credit derivatives. Due to the lack of transparency in the process brokers use to develop prices for these investments, the Company does not have access to the significant unobservable inputs brokers use to price these securities and derivatives. The Company believes however, the types of inputs brokers may use would likely be similar to those used to price securities and derivatives for which inputs are available to the Company, and therefore may include, but not be limited to, loss severity rates, constant prepayment rates, constant default rates and credit spreads. Therefore, similar to non broker priced securities and derivatives, generally, increases in these inputs would cause fair values to decrease. For the year ended December 31, 2012 , no significant adjustments were made by the Company to broker prices received.
Excluded from the tables above are limited partnerships and other alternative investments which total $314 of level 3 assets measured at fair value. The predominant valuation method uses a NAV calculated on a monthly basis and represents funds where the Company does not have the ability to redeem the investment in the near-term at that NAV, including an assessment of the investee's liquidity.
Product Derivatives
The Company formerly offered certain variable annuity products with GMWB riders in the U.S., U.K. and Japan. The GMWB provides the policyholder with a guaranteed remaining balance ("GRB") if the account value is reduced to zero through a combination of market declines and withdrawals. The GRB is generally equal to premiums less withdrawals. Certain contract provisions can increase the GRB at contractholder election or after the passage of time. The GMWB represents an embedded derivative in the variable annuity contract. When it is determined that (1) the embedded derivative possesses economic characteristics that are not clearly and closely related to the economic characteristics of the host contract, and (2) a separate instrument with the same terms would qualify as a derivative instrument, the embedded derivative is bifurcated from the host for measurement purposes. The embedded derivative is carried at fair value, with changes in fair value reported in net realized capital gains and losses. The Company’s GMWB liability is reported in other policyholder funds and benefits payable in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. The notional value of the embedded derivative is the GRB.
In valuing the embedded derivative, the Company attributes to the derivative a portion of the expected fees to be collected over the expected life of the contract from the contract holder equal to the present value of future GMWB claims (the “Attributed Fees”). The excess of fees collected from the contract holder in the current period over the current period’s Attributed Fees are associated with the host variable annuity contract and reported in fee income.
U.S. GMWB Reinsurance Derivative
The Company has reinsurance arrangements in place to transfer a portion of its risk of loss due to GMWB. These arrangements are recognized as derivatives and carried at fair value in reinsurance recoverables. Changes in the fair value of the reinsurance agreements are reported in net realized capital gains and losses.
The fair value of the U.S. GMWB reinsurance derivative is calculated as an aggregation of the components described in the Living Benefits Required to be Fair Valued discussion below and is modeled using significant unobservable policyholder behavior inputs, identical to those used in calculating the underlying liability, such as lapses, fund selection, resets and withdrawal utilization and risk margins.


F-36
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
5. Fair Value Measurements (continued)

Separate Account Assets
Separate account assets are primarily invested in mutual funds. Other separate account assets include fixed maturities, limited partnerships, equity securities, short-term investments and derivatives that are valued in the same manner, and using the same pricing sources and inputs, as those investments held by the Company. Separate account assets classified as Level 3 primarily include limited partnerships in which fair value represents the separate account's share of the fair value of the equity in the investment ("net asset value") and are classified in level 3 based on the Company's ability to redeem its investments.
Living Benefits Required to be Fair Valued (in Other Policyholder Funds and Benefits Payable)
Living benefits required to be fair valued include U.S. GMWB, international GMWB and international other guaranteed living benefits.
Fair values for GMWB and guaranteed minimum accumulation benefit (“GMAB”) contracts are calculated using the income approach based upon internally developed models because active, observable markets do not exist for those items. The fair value of the Company’s guaranteed benefit liabilities, classified as embedded derivatives, and the related reinsurance and customized freestanding derivatives is calculated as an aggregation of the following components: Best Estimate Claim Payments; Credit Standing Adjustment; and Margins. The resulting aggregation is reconciled or calibrated, if necessary, to market information that is, or may be, available to the Company, but may not be observable by other market participants, including reinsurance discussions and transactions. The Company believes the aggregation of these components, as necessary and as reconciled or calibrated to the market information available to the Company, results in an amount that the Company would be required to transfer or receive, for an asset, to or from market participants in an active liquid market, if one existed, for those market participants to assume the risks associated with the guaranteed minimum benefits and the related reinsurance and customized derivatives. The fair value is likely to materially diverge from the ultimate settlement of the liability as the Company believes settlement will be based on our best estimate assumptions rather than those best estimate assumptions plus risk margins. In the absence of any transfer of the guaranteed benefit liability to a third party, the release of risk margins is likely to be reflected as realized gains in future periods’ net income. Each component described below is unobservable in the marketplace and require subjectivity by the Company in determining their value.
Oversight of the Company's valuation policies and processes for product and U.S. GMWB reinsurance derivatives is performed by a multidisciplinary group comprised of finance, actuarial and risk management professionals. This multidisciplinary group reviews and approves changes and enhancements to the Company's valuation model as well as associated controls.
Best Estimate
Claim Payments
The Best Estimate Claim Payments is calculated based on actuarial and capital market assumptions related to projected cash flows, including the present value of benefits and related contract charges, over the lives of the contracts, incorporating expectations concerning policyholder behavior such as lapses, fund selection, resets and withdrawal utilization. For the customized derivatives, policyholder behavior is prescribed in the derivative contract. Because of the dynamic and complex nature of these cash flows, best estimate assumptions and a Monte Carlo stochastic process is used in valuation. The Monte Carlo stochastic process involves the generation of thousands of scenarios that assume risk neutral returns consistent with swap rates and a blend of observable implied index volatility levels. Estimating these cash flows involves numerous estimates and subjective judgments regarding a number of variables —including expected market rates of return, market volatility, correlations of market index returns to funds, fund performance, discount rates and assumptions about policyholder behavior which emerge over time.
At each valuation date, the Company assumes expected returns based on:
•
risk-free rates as represented by the euro dollar futures, LIBOR deposits and swap rates to derive forward curve rates;
•
market implied volatility assumptions for each underlying index based primarily on a blend of observed market “implied volatility” data;
•
correlations of historical returns across underlying well known market indices based on actual observed returns over the ten years preceding the valuation date; and
•
three years of history for fund indexes compared to separate account fund regression.
On a daily basis, the Company updates capital market assumptions used in the GMWB liability model such as interest rates, equity indices and the blend of implied equity index volatilities. The Company monitors various aspects of policyholder behavior and may modify certain of its assumptions, including living benefit lapses and withdrawal rates, if credible emerging data indicates that changes are warranted. In addition, the Company will continue to evaluate policyholder behavior assumptions as we begin to implement initiatives to reduce the size of the variable annuity business. At a minimum, all policyholder behavior assumptions are reviewed and updated, as appropriate, in conjunction with the completion of the Company’s comprehensive study to refine its estimate of future gross profits during the third quarter of each year.

F-37
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
5. Fair Value Measurements (continued)

Credit Standing Adjustment
This assumption makes an adjustment that market participants would make, in determining fair value, to reflect the risk that guaranteed benefit obligations or the GMWB reinsurance recoverables will not be fulfilled (“nonperformance risk”). The Company incorporates a blend of observable Company and reinsurer credit default spreads from capital markets, adjusted for market recoverability. The credit standing adjustment assumption, net of reinsurance, resulted in pre-tax realized gains (losses) of $(69) , $55 and $(10) , for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively. As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 the credit standing adjustment was $12 and $80 , respectively.
Margins
The behavior risk margin adds a margin that market participants would require, in determining fair value, for the risk that the Company’s assumptions about policyholder behavior could differ from actual experience. The behavior risk margin is calculated by taking the difference between adverse policyholder behavior assumptions and best estimate assumptions.
Assumption updates, including policyholder behavior assumptions, affected best estimates and margins for total pre-tax realized gains of $274 , $52 and $159 for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively. As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 the behavior risk margin was $302 and $419 , respectively.
In addition to the non-market-based updates described above, the Company recognized non-market-based updates driven by the relative outperformance (underperformance) of the underlying actively managed funds as compared to their respective indices resulting in pre-tax realized gains (losses) of approximately $106 , $(72) and $104 for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively.
Significant unobservable inputs used in the fair value measurement of living benefits required to be fair valued and the U.S. GMWB reinsurance derivative are withdrawal utilization and withdrawal rates, lapse rates, reset elections and equity volatility. The following table provides quantitative information about the significant unobservable inputs and is applicable to all of the Living Benefits Required to be Fair Valued and the U.S. GMWB Reinsurance Derivative. Significant increases in any of the significant unobservable inputs, in isolation, will generally have an increase or decrease correlation with the fair value measurement, as shown in the table.
Significant Unobservable Input
Unobservable Inputs (Minimum)
Unobservable Inputs (Maximum)
Impact of Increase in Input
on Fair Value Measurement [1]
Withdrawal Utilization[2]
20%
100%
Increase
Withdrawal Rates [2]
—%
8%
Increase
Lapse Rates [3]
—%
75%
Decrease
Reset Elections [4]
20%
75%
Increase
Equity Volatility [5]
10%
50%
Increase
[1]
Conversely, the impact of a decrease in input would have the opposite impact to the fair value as that presented in the table.
[2]
Ranges represent assumed cumulative percentages of policyholders taking withdrawals and the annual amounts withdrawn.
[3]
Range represents assumed annual percentages of full surrender of the underlying variable annuity contracts across all policy durations for in force business.
[4]
Range represents assumed cumulative percentages of policyholders that would elect to reset their guaranteed benefit base.
[5]
Range represents implied market volatilities for equity indices based on multiple pricing sources.

Generally a change in withdrawal utilization assumptions would be accompanied by a directionally opposite change in lapse rate assumptions, as the behavior of policyholders that utilize GMWB or GMAB riders is typically different from policyholders that do not utilize these riders.

F-38
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
5. Fair Value Measurements (continued)

Assets and Liabilities Measured at Fair Value on a Recurring Basis Using Significant Unobservable Inputs (Level 3)
The tables below provide fair value roll-forwards for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 , for the financial instruments classified as Level 3.
For the year ended December 31, 2012
 
Fixed Maturities, AFS
 
Assets
ABS
CDOs
CMBS
Corporate
Foreign
govt./govt.
agencies
Municipal
RMBS
Total  Fixed
Maturities,
AFS
Fixed
Maturities,
FVO
Fair value as of January 1, 2012
$
361

$
368

$
588

$
2,255

$
49

$
437

$
1,063

$
5,121

$
495

Total realized/unrealized gains (losses)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Included in net income [1], [2], [6]
(2
)
(20
)
(83
)
3

—

(5
)
(55
)
(162
)
109

Included in OCI [3]
49

163

152

(46
)
2

41

315

676

—

Purchases
36

—

21

264

23

293

446

1,083

1

Settlements
(63
)
(47
)
(160
)
(157
)
(4
)
—

(151
)
(582
)
(1
)
Sales
(37
)
(3
)
(210
)
(114
)
(19
)
(96
)
(207
)
(686
)
(391
)
Transfers into Level 3 [4]
13

483

666

775

5

25

1

1,968

1

Transfers out of Level 3 [4]
(79
)
—

(115
)
(979
)
—

(468
)
(39
)
(1,680
)
—

Fair value as of December 31, 2012
$
278

$
944

$
859

$
2,001

$
56

$
227

$
1,373

$
5,738

$
214

Changes in unrealized gains (losses) included in net income related to financial instruments still held at December 31, 2012 [2] [7]
$
(5
)
$
(12
)
$
(46
)
$
(7
)
$
—

$
(5
)
$
(12
)
$
(87
)
$
(4
)
 
 
 
Freestanding Derivatives [5]
Assets (Liabilities)
Equity
Securities,
AFS
Credit
Equity
Interest
Rate
U.S.
GMWB
Hedging
U.S.
Macro
Hedge
Program
Intl.
Program
Hedging
Other
Contracts
Total Free-
Standing
Derivatives [5]
Fair value as of January 1, 2012
$
93

$
(561
)
$
40

$
(58
)
$
883

$
357

$
35

$
28

$
724

Total realized/unrealized gains (losses)

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Included in net income [1], [2], [6]
8

195

(40
)
(9
)
(429
)
(323
)
(21
)
(5
)
(632
)
Included in OCI [3]
(5
)
—

—

2

—

—

—

—

2

Purchases
21

—

76

1

55

252

(58
)
—

326

Settlements
—

371

(19
)
—

(13
)
—

104

—

443

Sales
(33
)
—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Transfers out of Level 3 [4]
—

(1
)
—

32

23

—

8

—

62

Fair value as of December 31, 2012
$
84

$
4

$
57

$
(32
)
$
519

$
286

$
68

$
23

$
925

Changes in unrealized gains (losses) included in net income related to financial instruments still held at December 31, 2012 [2] [7]
$
5

$
146

$
(15
)
$
(12
)
$
(425
)
$
(322
)
$
(5
)
$
(4
)
$
(637
)
 

F-39
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
5. Fair Value Measurements (continued)

Assets
Limited Partnerships and Other Alternative Investments
Reinsurance 
Recoverable
for U.S. GMWB
Separate Accounts
Fair value as of January 1, 2012
$
—

$
443

$
1,031

Total realized/unrealized gains (losses)
 
 
 
Included in net income [1], [2], [6]
(1
)
(280
)
37

Purchases
55

—

252

Settlements
—

28

(1
)
Sales
—

—

(476
)
Transfers into Level 3 [4]
260

—

443

Transfers out of Level 3 [4]
—

—

(703
)
Fair value as of December 31, 2012
$
314

$
191

$
583

Changes in unrealized gains (losses) included in net income related to financial instruments still held at December 31, 2012 [2] [7]
$
(1
)
$
(280
)
$
28

 
 
Other Policyholder Funds and Benefits Payable
 
 
Liabilities
U.S.
Guaranteed
Withdrawal
Benefits
International
Guaranteed
Living
Benefits
International
Other Living
Benefits
Equity
Linked
Notes
Total Other
Policyholder
Funds and
Benefits
Payable
Other
Liabilities
Consumer
Notes
Fair value as of January 1, 2012
$
(2,538
)
$
(66
)
$
(5
)
$
(9
)
$
(2,618
)
$
(9
)
$
(4
)
Total realized/unrealized gains (losses)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Included in net income [1], [2], [6]
1,430

26

11

2

1,469

(34
)
2

Settlements [8]
(141
)
(10
)
(4
)
—

(155
)
43

—

Fair value as of December 31, 2012
$
(1,249
)
$
(50
)
$
2

$
(7
)
$
(1,304
)
$
—

$
(2
)
Changes in unrealized gains (losses) included in net income related to financial instruments still held at December 31, 2012 [2] [7]
$
1,430

$
26

$
11

$
2

$
1,469

$
—

$
2



F-40
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
5. Fair Value Measurements (continued)

For the year ended December 31, 2011
 
Fixed Maturities, AFS
 
Assets
ABS
CDOs
CMBS
Corporate
Foreign
govt./govt.
agencies
Municipal
RMBS
Total  Fixed
Maturities,
AFS
Fixed
Maturities,
FVO
Fair value as of January 1, 2011
$
477

$
2,581

$
689

$
2,129

$
56

$
272

$
1,285

$
7,489

$
522

Total realized/unrealized gains (losses)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Included in net income [1], [2], [6]
(27
)
(41
)
11

(40
)
—

—

(21
)
(118
)
22

Included in OCI [3]
22

126

52

(31
)
1

48

3

221

—

Purchases
58

—

29

108

3

131

25

354

—

Settlements
(37
)
(151
)
(86
)
(121
)
(4
)
—

(135
)
(534
)
(3
)
Sales
(10
)
(66
)
(317
)
(162
)
(7
)
(2
)
(16
)
(580
)
(42
)
Transfers into Level 3 [4]
82

30

268

774

39

4

82

1,279

—

Transfers out of Level 3 [4]
(204
)
(2,111
)
(58
)
(402
)
(39
)
(16
)
(160
)
(2,990
)
(4
)
Fair value as of December 31, 2011
$
361

$
368

$
588

$
2,255

$
49

$
437

$
1,063

$
5,121

$
495

Changes in unrealized gains (losses) included in net income related to financial instruments still held at December 31, 2011 [2] [7]
$
(16
)
$
(41
)
$
(17
)
$
(17
)
$
—

$
—

$
(15
)
$
(106
)
$
19

 
 
 
Freestanding Derivatives [5]
Assets (Liabilities)
Equity
Securities,
AFS
Credit
Equity
Interest
Rate
U.S.
GMWB
Hedging
U.S.
Macro
Hedge
Program
Intl.
Program
Hedging
Other
Contracts
Total Free-
Standing
Derivatives [5]
Fair value as of January 1, 2011
$
154

$
(390
)
$
4

$
(53
)
$
600

$
203

$
5

$
32

$
401

Total realized/unrealized gains (losses)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Included in net income [1], [2], [6]
(12
)
(170
)
(9
)
(21
)
279

(128
)
(3
)
(4
)
(56
)
Included in OCI [3]
(4
)
—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Purchases
39

1

45

64

23

347

33

—

513

Settlements
—

(2
)
—

(48
)
(19
)
(65
)
—

—

(134
)
Sales
(10
)
—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Transfers into Level 3 [4]
7

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Transfers out of Level 3 [4]
(81
)
—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Fair value as of December 31, 2011
$
93

$
(561
)
$
40

$
(58
)
$
883

$
357

$
35

$
28

$
724

Changes in unrealized gains (losses) included in net income related to financial instruments still held at December 31, 2011 [2] [7]
$
(10
)
$
(163
)
$
(8
)
$
(19
)
$
278

$
(107
)
$
(5
)
$
(4
)
$
(28
)
 

F-41
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
5. Fair Value Measurements (continued)

Assets
Reinsurance Recoverable
for U.S. GMWB
Separate Accounts
Fair value as of January 1, 2011
$
280

$
1,247

Total realized/unrealized gains (losses)
 
 
Included in net income [1], [2], [6]
131

25

Included in OCI [3]
—

—

Purchases
—

292

Settlements
32

—

Sales
—

(171
)
Transfers into Level 3 [4]
—

14

Transfers out of Level 3 [4]
—

(376
)
Fair value as of December 31, 2011
$
443

$
1,031

Changes in unrealized gains (losses) included in net income related to financial instruments still held at December 31, 2011 [2] [7]
$
131

$
(1
)
 
 
Other Policyholder Funds and Benefits Payable
 
 
Liabilities
U.S.
Guaranteed
Withdrawal
Benefits
International
Guaranteed
Living
Benefits
International
Other Living
Benefits
Equity
Linked
Notes
Total Other
Policyholder
Funds and
Benefits
Payable
Other
Liabilities
Consumer
Notes
Fair value as of January 1, 2011
$
(1,611
)
$
(36
)
$
3

$
(9
)
$
(1,653
)
$
(37
)
$
(5
)
Total realized/unrealized gains (losses)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Included in net income [1], [2], [6]
(780
)
(21
)
(4
)
—

(805
)
28

1

Included in OCI [3]
—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Settlements
(147
)
(9
)
(4
)
—

(160
)
—

—

Fair value as of December 31, 2011
$
(2,538
)
$
(66
)
$
(5
)
$
(9
)
$
(2,618
)
$
(9
)
$
(4
)
Changes in unrealized gains (losses) included in net income related to financial instruments still held at December 31, 2011 [2] [7]
$
(780
)
$
(21
)
$
(4
)
$
—

$
(805
)
$
28

$
1

[1]
The Company classifies gains and losses on GMWB reinsurance derivatives and Guaranteed Living Benefit embedded derivatives as unrealized gains (losses) for purposes of disclosure in this table because it is impracticable to track on a contract-by-contract basis the realized gains (losses) for these derivatives and embedded derivatives.
[2]
All amounts in these rows are reported in net realized capital gains/losses. The realized/unrealized gains (losses) included in net income for separate account assets are offset by an equal amount for separate account liabilities, which results in a net zero impact on net income for the Company. All amounts are before income taxes and amortization DAC.
[3]
All amounts are before income taxes and amortization of DAC.
[4]
Transfers in and/or (out) of Level 3 are primarily attributable to the availability of market observable information and the re-evaluation of the observability of pricing inputs.
[5]
Derivative instruments are reported in this table on a net basis for asset/(liability) positions and reported in the Consolidated Balance Sheet in other investments and other liabilities.
[6]
Includes both market and non-market impacts in deriving realized and unrealized gains (losses).
[7]
Amounts presented are for Level 3 only and therefore may not agree to other disclosures included herein.
[8]
Settlements of other liabilities reflect the removal of liabilities carried at fair value upon the deconsolidation of a variable interest entity. See note 6, Investments and Derivative Instruments for additional information.

F-42
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
5. Fair Value Measurements (continued)

Fair Value Option
The Company holds fair value option investments that contain an embedded credit derivative with underlying credit risk primarily related to commercial real estate. Also included are foreign government securities that align with the accounting for yen-based fixed annuity liabilities, which are adjusted for changes in spot rates through realized gains and losses. Similar to other fixed maturities, income earned from these securities is recorded in net investment income. Changes in the fair value of these securities are recorded in net realized capital gains and losses.
In 2012, the Company disposed of substantially all of its interest in a consolidated VIE, resulting in its deconsolidation. See Note 6, Investments and Derivative Instruments, for additional information related to the deconsolidation of this VIE. The Company previously elected the fair value option for this consolidated VIE in order to apply a consistent accounting model for the VIE’s assets and liabilities. The VIE is an investment vehicle that holds high quality investments, derivative instruments that reference third-party corporate credit and issues notes to investors that reflect the credit characteristics of the high quality investments and derivative instruments. The risks and rewards associated with the assets of the VIE inure to the investors. The investors have no recourse against the Company. As a result, there was no adjustment to the market value of the notes for the Company’s own credit risk.
The Company elected the fair value option for consolidated VIE investment funds that were established in 2012. The Company elected the fair value option in order to report investments of consolidated investment companies at fair value with changes in the fair value of these securities recognized in net realized capital gains and losses, consistent with Investment Company accounting. The investment funds hold fixed income securities and the Company has management and control of the funds as well as a significant ownership interest.
The following table presents the changes in fair value of those assets and liabilities accounted for using the fair value option reported in net realized capital gains and losses in the Company’s Consolidated Statements of Operations.
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
Assets
 
 
Fixed maturities, FVO
 
 
Corporate
13

10

CRE CDOs
63

(33
)
CMBS bonds
(2
)
—

Foreign government
(86
)
45

RMBS
5

—

Other liabilities
 
 
Credit-linked notes
(34
)
28

Total realized capital gains (losses)
$
(41
)
$
50

The following table presents the fair value of assets and liabilities accounted for using the fair value option included in the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets.
 
As of December 31,
 
2012
2011
Assets
 
 
Fixed maturities, FVO
 
 
ABS
$
—

$
65

CRE CDOs
205

225

CMBS
5

—

Corporate
140

272

Foreign government
730

766

U.S. government
2

—

Municipals
1

—

RMBS
4

—

Total fixed maturities, FVO
$
1,087

$
1,328

Other liabilities
 
 
Credit-linked notes [1]
$
—

$
9

[1] As of December 31, 2011 , the outstanding principal balance of the notes was $243 .

F-43
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
5. Fair Value Measurements (continued)

Financial Instruments Not Carried at Fair Value
The following table presents carrying amounts and fair values of The Hartford’s financial instruments not carried at fair value and not included in the above fair value discussion as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 .
 
 
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
 
Fair Value
Hierarchy
Level
Carrying
Amount
Fair
Value
Carrying
Amount
Fair
Value
Assets
 
 
 
 
 
Policy loans
Level 3
$
1,997

$
2,165

$
2,001

$
2,153

Mortgage loans
Level 3
6,711

6,933

5,728

5,977

Liabilities
 
 
 
 
 
Other policyholder funds and benefits payable [1]
Level 3
$
9,558

$
9,910

$
10,343

$
11,238

Senior notes [2]
Level 2
5,706

7,071

4,481

4,623

Junior subordinated debentures [2]
Level 2
1,100

1,265

500

498

Private placement junior subordinated debentures [2]
Level 3
—

—

1,235

1,932

Consumer notes [3]
Level 3
159

159

310

305

[1]
Excludes guarantees on variable annuities, group accident and health and universal life insurance contracts, including corporate owned life insurance.
[2]
Included in long-term debt in the Consolidated Balance Sheets, except for current maturities, which are included in short-term debt.
[3]
Excludes amounts carried at fair value and included in preceding disclosures.

The Company has not made any changes in its valuation methodologies for the following assets and liabilities during the years ended December 31, 2012 or December 31, 2011 .
•
Fair value for policy loans and consumer notes were estimated using discounted cash flow calculations using current interest rates adjusted for estimated loan durations.
•
Fair values for mortgage loans were estimated using discounted cash flow calculations based on current lending rates for similar type loans. Current lending rates reflect changes in credit spreads and the remaining terms of the loans.
•
Fair values for other policyholder funds and benefits payable, not carried at fair value, are estimated based on the cash surrender values of the underlying policies or by estimating future cash flows discounted at current interest rates adjusted for credit risk.
•
Fair values for senior notes and junior subordinated debentures are determined using the market approach based on reported trades, benchmark interest rates and issuer spread for the Company which may consider credit default swaps.
•
Fair values for private placement junior subordinated debentures are based primarily on market quotations from independent third party brokers.

F-44
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)


6 . Investments and Derivative Instruments

Net Investment Income (Loss)
 
For the years ended December 31,
(Before-tax)
2012
2011
2010
Fixed maturities [1]
$
3,363

$
3,396

$
3,489

Equity securities, AFS
37

36

53

Mortgage loans
337

281

260

Policy loans
119

131

132

Limited partnerships and other alternative investments
196

243

216

Other investments [2]
296

301

329

Investment expenses
(111
)
(116
)
(115
)
Total securities AFS and other
4,237

4,272

4,364

Equity securities, trading
4,565

(1,359
)
(774
)
Total net investment income (loss)
$
8,802

$
2,913

$
3,590

[1]
Includes net investment income on short-term investments.
[2]
Includes income from derivatives that qualify for hedge accounting and hedge fixed maturities.
The net unrealized gain (loss) on equity securities, trading, included in net investment income during the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , was $4.6 billion, $(1.3) billion and $(68) , respectively, substantially all of which have corresponding amounts credited to policyholders. These amounts were not included in gross unrealized gains (losses).
Net Realized Capital Gains (Losses)
 
For the years ended December 31,
(Before-tax)
2012
2011
2010
Gross gains on sales
$
877

$
693

$
836

Gross losses on sales
(441
)
(384
)
(522
)
Net OTTI losses recognized in earnings [1]
(349
)
(174
)
(434
)
Valuation allowances on mortgage loans
14

24

(154
)
Japanese fixed annuity contract hedges, net [2]
(36
)
3

27

Periodic net coupon settlements on credit derivatives/Japan
(10
)
(10
)
(17
)
Results of variable annuity hedge program
 
 
 
GMWB derivatives, net
519

(397
)
89

U.S. macro hedge program
(340
)
(216
)
(445
)
Total U.S. program
179

(613
)
(356
)
International program
(1,490
)
775

11

Total results of variable annuity hedge program
(1,311
)
162

(345
)
Other, net [3]
545

(459
)
(2
)
Net realized capital gains (losses)
$
(711
)
$
(145
)
$
(611
)
[1] Includes $177 of intent-to-sell impairments relating to the sales of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses.
[2] Relates to the Japanese fixed annuity products (adjustment of product liability for changes in spot currency exchange rates, related derivative hedging instruments, excluding net period coupon settlements, and Japan FVO securities).
[3] Primarily consists of non-qualifying derivatives, transactional foreign currency re-valuation associated with the internal reinsurance of the Japan variable annuity business, which is offset in AOCI, and Japan 3Win related foreign currency swaps.

Net realized capital gains and losses from investment sales, after deducting the life and pension policyholders' share for certain products, are reported as a component of revenues and are determined on a specific identification basis. Gross gains and losses on sales and impairments previously reported as unrealized gains or (losses) in AOCI were $87 , $135 and $(120) for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.

F-45
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)
6. Investments and Derivative Instruments (continued)

Sales of Available-for-Sale Securities
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
Fixed maturities, AFS
 
 
 
Sale proceeds
$
41,442

$
36,956

$
46,482

Gross gains
845

617

706

Gross losses
(416
)
(381
)
(452
)
Equity securities, AFS
 
 
 
Sale proceeds
$
295

$
239

$
325

Gross gains
34

59

24

Gross losses
(20
)
—

(16
)
Sales of AFS securities in 2012 were the result of the reinvestment into spread product well-positioned for modest economic growth, as well as the purposeful reduction of certain exposures.
Other-Than-Temporary Impairment Losses
The following table presents a roll-forward of the Company’s cumulative credit impairments on debt securities held as of December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 .
 
For the years ended December 31,
 (Before-tax)
2012
2011
2010
Balance as of beginning of period
$
(1,676
)
$
(2,072
)
$
(2,200
)
Additions for credit impairments recognized on [1]:
 
 
 
Securities not previously impaired
(28
)
(56
)
(211
)
Securities previously impaired
(20
)
(69
)
(161
)
Reductions for credit impairments previously recognized on:
 
 
 
Securities that matured or were sold during the period
700

505

468

Securities due to an increase in expected cash flows
11

16

32

Balance as of end of period
$
(1,013
)
$
(1,676
)
$
(2,072
)
[1] These additions are included in the net OTTI losses recognized in earnings in the Consolidated Statements of Operations.

F-46
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)
6. Investments and Derivative Instruments (continued)

Available-for-Sale Securities
The following table presents the Company’s AFS securities by type.
 
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
 
Cost or
Amortized
Cost
Gross
Unrealized
Gains
Gross
Unrealized
Losses
Fair
Value
Non-
Credit
OTTI [1]
Cost or
Amortized
Cost
Gross
Unrealized
Gains
Gross
Unrealized
Losses
Fair
Value
Non-
Credit
OTTI [1]
ABS
$
2,883

$
63

$
(183
)
$
2,763

$
(4
)
$
3,430

$
55

$
(332
)
$
3,153

$
(7
)
CDOs [2]
3,170

60

(159
)
3,040

(14
)
2,819

16

(348
)
2,487

(44
)
CMBS
6,083

417

(179
)
6,321

(11
)
7,192

271

(512
)
6,951

(31
)
Corporate [2]
39,694

4,631

(276
)
44,049

(19
)
41,161

3,661

(739
)
44,011

—

Foreign govt./govt. agencies
3,985

191

(40
)
4,136

—

2,030

141

(10
)
2,161

—

Municipal
13,001

1,379

(19
)
14,361

—

12,557

775

(72
)
13,260

—

RMBS
7,318

295

(133
)
7,480

(32
)
5,961

252

(456
)
5,757

(105
)
U.S. Treasuries
3,613

175

(16
)
3,772

—

3,828

203

(2
)
4,029

—

Total fixed maturities, AFS
79,747

7,211

(1,005
)
85,922

(80
)
78,978

5,374

(2,471
)
81,809

(187
)
Equity securities, AFS
866

81

(57
)
890

—

1,056

68

(203
)
921

—

Total AFS securities [3]
$
80,613

$
7,292

$
(1,062
)
$
86,812

$
(80
)
$
80,034

$
5,442

$
(2,674
)
$
82,730

$
(187
)
[1] Represents the amount of cumulative non-credit OTTI losses recognized in OCI on securities that also had credit impairments. These losses are included in gross unrealized losses as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 .
[2] Gross unrealized gains (losses) exclude the fair value of bifurcated embedded derivative features of certain securities. Subsequent changes in value will be recorded in net realized capital gains (losses).
[3] Includes fixed maturities, AFS and equity securities, AFS relating to the sales of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses; see Note 2 - Business Dispositions of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for further discussion of this transaction.

The following table presents the Company’s fixed maturities, AFS, by contractual maturity year.
 
December 31, 2012
Contractual Maturity
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
One year or less
$
1,689

$
1,710

Over one year through five years
14,664

15,556

Over five years through ten years
15,542

17,038

Over ten years
28,398

32,014

Subtotal
60,293

66,318

Mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities
19,454

19,604

Total fixed maturities, AFS [1]
$
79,747

$
85,922

[1] Includes fixed maturities, AFS relating to the sales of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses; see Note 2 - Business Dispositions of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for further discussion of this transaction.
Estimated maturities may differ from contractual maturities due to security call or prepayment provisions. Due to the potential for variability in payment spreads (i.e. prepayments or extensions), mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities are not categorized by contractual maturity.

F-47
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)
6. Investments and Derivative Instruments (continued)

Concentration of Credit Risk
The Company aims to maintain a diversified investment portfolio including issuer, sector and geographic stratification, where applicable, and has established certain exposure limits, diversification standards and review procedures to mitigate credit risk.
As of December 31, 2012 , the Company's only exposure to any credit concentration risk of a single issuer greater than 10% of the Company's stockholders' equity, other than the U.S. government and certain U.S. government securities, was the Government of Japan, which represents $2.7 billion , or 12% of stockholders' equity, and 2% of total invested assets. As of December 31, 2011 , the Company was not exposed to any concentration of credit risk of a single issuer greater than 10% of the Company’s stockholders’ equity other than U.S. government and certain U.S. government agencies. As of December 31, 2012 , other than U.S. government and certain U.S. government agencies, the Company’s three largest exposures by issuer were the Government of Japan, State of California, and National Grid PLC. which each comprised less than 3% of total invested assets. As of December 31, 2011 , other than U.S. government and certain U.S. government agencies, the Company’s three largest exposures by issuer were the Government of Japan, Government of the United Kingdom and AT&T Inc. which each comprised less than 0.8% of total invested assets.
The Company’s three largest exposures by sector as of December 31, 2012 were municipal investments, utilities, and financial services which comprised approximately 7% , 6% and 5% , respectively, of total invested assets. The Company’s three largest exposures by sector as of December 31, 2011 were commercial real estate, municipal investments and U.S. Treasuries which comprised approximately 10% , 10% and 7% , respectively, of total invested assets.
Security Unrealized Loss Aging
The following tables present the Company’s unrealized loss aging for AFS securities by type and length of time the security was in a continuous unrealized loss position.
 
December 31, 2012
 
Less Than 12 Months
12 Months or More
Total
 
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Unrealized Losses
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Unrealized Losses
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Unrealized Losses
ABS
$
163

$
161

$
(2
)
$
886

$
705

$
(181
)
$
1,049

$
866

$
(183
)
CDOs [1]
5

4

(1
)
2,567

2,389

(158
)
2,572

2,393

(159
)
CMBS
339

322

(17
)
1,248

1,086

(162
)
1,587

1,408

(179
)
Corporate
1,261

1,218

(43
)
1,823

1,590

(233
)
3,084

2,808

(276
)
Foreign govt./govt. agencies
1,380

1,343

(37
)
20

17

(3
)
1,400

1,360

(40
)
Municipal
271

265

(6
)
157

144

(13
)
428

409

(19
)
RMBS
910

908

(2
)
869

738

(131
)
1,779

1,646

(133
)
U.S. Treasuries
583

567

(16
)
—

—

—

583

567

(16
)
Total fixed maturities, AFS
4,912

4,788

(124
)
7,570

6,669

(881
)
12,482

11,457

(1,005
)
Equity securities, AFS
69

67

(2
)
280

225

(55
)
349

292

(57
)
Total securities in an unrealized loss
$
4,981

$
4,855

$
(126
)
$
7,850

$
6,894

$
(936
)
$
12,831

$
11,749

$
(1,062
)

F-48
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)
6. Investments and Derivative Instruments (continued)

 
December 31, 2011
 
Less Than 12 Months
12 Months or More
Total
 
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Unrealized Losses
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Unrealized Losses
Amortized Cost
Fair Value
Unrealized Losses
ABS
$
629

$
594

$
(35
)
$
1,169

$
872

$
(297
)
$
1,798

$
1,466

$
(332
)
CDOs [1]
81

59

(22
)
2,709

2,383

(326
)
2,790

2,442

(348
)
CMBS
1,297

1,194

(103
)
2,144

1,735

(409
)
3,441

2,929

(512
)
Corporate
4,388

4,219

(169
)
3,268

2,627

(570
)
7,656

6,846

(739
)
Foreign govt./govt. agencies
218

212

(6
)
51

47

(4
)
269

259

(10
)
Municipal
299

294

(5
)
627

560

(67
)
926

854

(72
)
RMBS
415

330

(85
)
1,206

835

(371
)
1,621

1,165

(456
)
U.S. Treasuries
343

341

(2
)
—

—

—

343

341

(2
)
Total fixed maturities, AFS
7,670

7,243

(427
)
11,174

9,059

(2,044
)
18,844

16,302

(2,471
)
Equity securities, AFS
167

138

(29
)
439

265

(174
)
606

403

(203
)
Total securities in an unrealized loss
$
7,837

$
7,381

$
(456
)
$
11,613

$
9,324

$
(2,218
)
$
19,450

$
16,705

$
(2,674
)
[1] Unrealized losses exclude the change in fair value of bifurcated embedded derivative features of certain securities. Subsequent changes in fair value are recorded in net realized capital gains (losses).
As of December 31, 2012 , AFS securities in an unrealized loss position, comprised of 2,011 securities, primarily related to corporate securities within the financial services sector, ABS, CMBS, CDOs, and RMBS which have experienced price deterioration. As of December 31, 2012 , 86% of these securities were depressed less than 20% of cost or amortized cost. The decline in the total unrealized loss of $1.6 billion in 2012 was primarily attributable to credit spread tightening and a decline in interest rates.
Most of the securities depressed for twelve months or more relate to structured securities with exposure to commercial and residential real estate, ABS backed by student loans, as well as certain floating rate corporate securities or those securities with greater than 10 years to maturity, concentrated in the financial services sector. Current market spreads continue to be significantly wider for structured securities with exposure to commercial and residential real estate, as compared to spreads at the security’s respective purchase date, largely due to the economic and market uncertainties regarding future performance of commercial and residential real estate. In addition, the majority of securities have a floating-rate coupon referenced to a market index where rates have declined substantially. In addition equity securities include investment grade perpetual preferred securities that contain "debt-like" characteristics where the decline in fair value is not attributable to issuer-specific credit deterioration, none of which have, nor are expected to, miss a periodic dividend payment. These securities have been depressed due to the securities' floating-rate coupon in the current low interest rate environment, general market credit spread widening since the date of purchase and the long-dated nature of the securities. The Company neither has an intention to sell nor does it expect to be required to sell the securities outlined above.
Mortgage Loans
 
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
 
Amortized Cost [1]
Valuation Allowance
Carrying Value
Amortized Cost [1]
Valuation Allowance
Carrying Value
Commercial
$
6,779

$
(68
)
$
6,711

$
5,830

$
(102
)
$
5,728

Total mortgage loans [2]
$
6,779

$
(68
)
$
6,711

$
5,830

$
(102
)
$
5,728

[1] Amortized cost represents carrying value prior to valuation allowances, if any.
[2] Includes commercial mortgage loans relating to the sales of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses; see Note 2 - Business Dispositions of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for further discussion of this transaction.

As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , the carrying value of mortgage loans associated with the valuation allowance was $291 and $621 , respectively. Included in the table above are mortgage loans held-for-sale with a carrying value and valuation allowance of $47 and $3 , respectively, as of December 31, 2012 , and $74 and $4 , respectively, as of December 31, 2011 . The carrying value of these loans is included in mortgage loans in the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets. As of December 31, 2012 , loans within the Company’s mortgage loan portfolio that have had extensions or restructurings other than what is allowable under the original terms of the contract are immaterial.

F-49
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)
6. Investments and Derivative Instruments (continued)

The following table presents the activity within the Company’s valuation allowance for mortgage loans. These loans have been evaluated both individually and collectively for impairment. Loans evaluated collectively for impairment are immaterial.
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
Balance as of January 1
$
(102
)
$
(155
)
$
(366
)
(Additions)/Reversals
14

(26
)
(157
)
Deductions
20

79

368

Balance as of December 31
$
(68
)
$
(102
)
$
(155
)
The current weighted-average LTV ratio of the Company’s commercial mortgage loan portfolio was 62% as of December 31, 2012 , while the weighted-average LTV ratio at origination of these loans was 63% . LTV ratios compare the loan amount to the value of the underlying property collateralizing the loan. The loan values are updated no less than annually through property level reviews of the portfolio. Factors considered in the property valuation include, but are not limited to, actual and expected property cash flows, geographic market data and capitalization rates. DSCRs compare a property’s net operating income to the borrower’s principal and interest payments. The current weighted average DSCR of the Company’s commercial mortgage loan portfolio was 2.24x as of December 31, 2012 . The Company held only two delinquent commercial mortgage loans past due by 90 days or more . The total carrying value and valuation allowance of these loans totaled $ 32 and $ 50 , respectively, as of December 31, 2012 , and are not accruing income.

The following table presents the carrying value of the Company’s commercial mortgage loans by LTV and DSCR.
Commercial Mortgage Loans Credit Quality
 
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
Loan-to-value
Carrying Value
Avg. Debt-Service Coverage Ratio
Carrying Value
Avg. Debt-Service Coverage Ratio
Greater than 80%
$
253

0.95x
$
707

1.45x
65% - 80%
2,220

2.12x
2,384

1.60x
Less than 65%
4,238

2.40x
2,637

2.40x
Total commercial mortgage loans
$
6,711

2.24x
$
5,728

1.94x
The following tables present the carrying value of the Company’s mortgage loans by region and property type.
Mortgage Loans by Region
 
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
 
Carrying Value
Percent of Total
Carrying Value
Percent of Total
East North Central
$
145

2.2
%
$
94

1.6
%
Middle Atlantic
477

7.1
%
508

8.9
%
Mountain
99

1.5
%
125

2.2
%
New England
350

5.2
%
294

5.1
%
Pacific
1,978

29.5
%
1,690

29.5
%
South Atlantic
1,378

20.5
%
1,149

20.1
%
West North Central
16

0.2
%
30

0.5
%
West South Central
398

5.9
%
224

3.9
%
Other [1]
1,870

27.9
%
1,614

28.2
%
Total mortgage loans
$
6,711

100.0
%
$
5,728

100.0
%
[1] Primarily represents loans collateralized by multiple properties in various regions.

F-50
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)
6. Investments and Derivative Instruments (continued)

Mortgage Loans by Property Type
 
 
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
 
Carrying Value
Percent of Total
Carrying Value
Percent of Total
Commercial
 
 
 
 
Agricultural
$
142

2.1
%
$
249

4.3
%
Industrial
2,079

30.9
%
1,747

30.5
%
Lodging
81

1.2
%
93

1.6
%
Multifamily
1,200

17.9
%
1,070

18.7
%
Office
1,510

22.5
%
1,078

18.8
%
Retail
1,460

21.8
%
1,234

21.5
%
Other
239

3.6
%
257

4.6
%
Total mortgage loans
$
6,711

100.0
%
$
5,728

100.0
%
Variable Interest Entities
The Company is involved with various special purpose entities and other entities that are deemed to be VIEs primarily as a collateral or investment manager and as an investor through normal investment activities, as well as a means of accessing capital. A VIE is an entity that either has investors that lack certain essential characteristics of a controlling financial interest or lacks sufficient funds to finance its own activities without financial support provided by other entities.
The Company performs ongoing qualitative assessments of its VIEs to determine whether the Company has a controlling financial interest in the VIE and therefore is the primary beneficiary. The Company is deemed to have a controlling financial interest when it has both the ability to direct the activities that most significantly impact the economic performance of the VIE and the obligation to absorb losses or right to receive benefits from the VIE that could potentially be significant to the VIE. Based on the Company’s assessment, if it determines it is the primary beneficiary, the Company consolidates the VIE in the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements.
Consolidated VIEs
The following table presents the carrying value of assets and liabilities, and the maximum exposure to loss relating to the VIEs for which the Company is the primary beneficiary. Creditors have no recourse against the Company in the event of default by these VIEs nor does the Company have any implied or unfunded commitments to these VIEs. The Company’s financial or other support provided to these VIEs is limited to its investment management services and original investment.
 
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
 
Total Assets
Total Liabilities [1]
Maximum Exposure to Loss [2]
Total Assets
Total Liabilities [1]
Maximum Exposure to Loss [2]
CDOs [3]
$
89

$
88

$
7

$
491

$
471

$
29

Investment funds [4]
163

—

162

—

—

—

Limited partnerships
6

1

5

7

—

7

Total
$
258

$
89

$
174

$
498

$
471

$
36

[1] Included in other liabilities in the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets.
[2] The maximum exposure to loss represents the maximum loss amount that the Company could recognize as a reduction in net investment income or as a realized capital loss and is the cost basis of the Company’s investment.
[3] Total assets included in fixed maturities, AFS in the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets.
[4] Total assets included in fixed maturities, FVO in the Company's Consolidated Balance Sheets.
CDOs represent structured investment vehicles for which the Company has a controlling financial interest as it provides collateral management services, earns a fee for those services and also holds investments in the securities issued by these vehicles. Investment funds represent wholly-owned fixed income funds established in 2012 for which the Company has management and control of the investments which is the activity that most significantly impacts its economic performance. Limited partnerships represent one hedge fund for which the Company holds a majority interest in the fund as an investment.
In 2012, the Company disposed of substantially all of its interest in a consolidated VIE. Upon disposition, the Company determined that it was no longer the primary beneficiary of the VIE. Therefore, the investment was deconsolidated as of the disposition date in the fourth quarter of 2012. The deconsolidation of the VIE resulted in a decrease in assets of $344 , liabilities of $319 , and a maximum exposure to loss of $7 at the time of disposal. The deconsolidation did not have a significant impact on the Company's results from operations.

F-51
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)
6. Investments and Derivative Instruments (continued)

Non-Consolidated VIEs
The Company holds a significant variable interest for one VIE for which it is not the primary beneficiary and, therefore, was not consolidated on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets. This VIE represents a contingent capital facility (“facility”) that has been held by the Company since February 2007 for which the Company has no implied or unfunded commitments. Assets and liabilities recorded for the facility were $ 23 and $ 23 as of December 31, 2012 , respectively and $ 28 and $ 28 , respectively as of December 31, 2011 . Additionally, the Company has a maximum exposure to loss of $ 3 and $ 3 , respectively, as of December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011 , which represents the issuance costs that were incurred to establish the facility. The Company does not have a controlling financial interest as it does not manage the assets of the facility nor does it have the obligation to absorb losses or the right to receive benefits that could potentially be significant to the facility, as the asset manager has significant variable interest in the vehicle. The Company’s financial or other support provided to the facility is limited to providing ongoing support to cover the facility’s operating expenses. For further information on the facility, see Note 15 .
In addition, the Company, through normal investment activities, makes passive investments in structured securities issued by VIEs for which the Company is not the manager which are included in ABS, CDOs, CMBS and RMBS in the Available-for-Sale Securities table and fixed maturities, FVO, in the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets. The Company has not provided financial or other support with respect to these investments other than its original investment. For these investments, the Company determined it is not the primary beneficiary due to the relative size of the Company’s investment in comparison to the principal amount of the structured securities issued by the VIEs, the level of credit subordination which reduces the Company’s obligation to absorb losses or right to receive benefits and the Company’s inability to direct the activities that most significantly impact the economic performance of the VIEs. The Company’s maximum exposure to loss on these investments is limited to the amount of the Company’s investment.
Repurchase Agreements and Dollar Roll Agreements
The Company enters into repurchase agreements and dollar roll transactions to earn incremental income. A repurchase agreement is a transaction in which one party (transferor) agrees to sell securities to another party (transferee) in return for cash (or securities), with a simultaneous agreement to repurchase the same securities at a specified price at a later date. A dollar roll is a type of repurchase transaction where a mortgage backed security is sold with an agreement to repurchase substantially the same security at a specified time in the future. These transactions are generally short-term in nature, and therefore, the carrying amounts of these instruments approximate fair value.
As part of repurchase agreements and dollar roll transactions, the Company transfers U.S. government and government agency securities and receives cash. For the repurchase agreements, the Company obtains collateral in an amount equal to at least 95% of the fair value of the securities transferred, and the agreements with third parties contain contractual provisions to allow for additional collateral to be obtained when necessary. The cash received from the repurchase program is typically invested in short-term investments or fixed maturities. The Company accounts for the repurchase agreements and dollar roll transactions as collateralized borrowings. The securities transferred under repurchase agreements and dollar roll transactions are included in fixed maturities, available-for-sale with the obligation to repurchase those securities recorded in Other Liabilities on the Company's Consolidated Balance Sheets. The fair value of the securities transferred was $ 1.9 billion with a corresponding agreement to repurchase $ 1.9 billion as of December 31, 2012 . The obligation for securities transferred under agreement to repurchase was $1.9 billion as of December 31, 2012 .

Equity Method Investments
The Company has investments in limited partnerships and other alternative investments which include hedge funds, mortgage and real estate funds, mezzanine debt funds, and private equity and other funds (collectively, “limited partnerships”). These investments are accounted for under the equity method and the Company’s maximum exposure to loss as of December 31, 2012 is limited to the total carrying value of $3.0 billion . In addition, the Company has outstanding commitments totaling $562 to fund limited partnership and other alternative investments as of December 31, 2012 . The Company’s investments in limited partnerships are generally of a passive nature in that the Company does not take an active role in the management of the limited partnerships. In 2012 , aggregate investment income from limited partnerships and other alternative investments exceeded 10% of the Company’s pre-tax consolidated net income. Accordingly, the Company is disclosing aggregated summarized financial data for the Company’s limited partnership investments. This aggregated summarized financial data does not represent the Company’s proportionate share of limited partnership assets or earnings. Aggregate total assets of the limited partnerships in which the Company invested totaled $90.5 billion and $91.3 billion as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively. Aggregate total liabilities of the limited partnerships in which the Company invested totaled $12.8 billion and $20.6 billion as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively. Aggregate net investment income of the limited partnerships in which the Company invested totaled $1.0 billion , $1.3 billion and $857 for the periods ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively. Aggregate net income of the limited partnerships in which the Company invested totaled $7.2 billion , $9.1 billion and $10.3 billion for the periods ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively. As of, and for the period ended, December 31, 2012 , the aggregated summarized financial data reflects the latest available financial information.


F-52
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)
6. Investments and Derivative Instruments (continued)

Derivative Instruments
The Company utilizes a variety of over-the-counter and exchange traded derivative instruments as a part of its overall risk management strategy, as well as to enter into replication transactions. Derivative instruments are used to manage risk associated with interest rate, equity market, credit spread, issuer default, price, and currency exchange rate risk or volatility. Replication transactions are used as an economical means to synthetically replicate the characteristics and performance of assets that would be permissible investments under the Company's investment policies. The Company also purchases and issues financial instruments and products that either are accounted for as free-standing derivatives, such as certain reinsurance contracts, or may contain features that are deemed to be embedded derivative instruments, such as the GMWB rider included with certain variable annuity products.
Strategies that qualify for hedge accounting
Certain derivatives the Company enters into satisfy the hedge accounting requirements as outlined in Note 1 of these financial statements. Typically, these hedge relationships include interest rate and foreign currency swaps where the terms or expected cash flows of the securities closely match the “pay” leg terms of the swap. The swaps are typically used to manage interest rate duration of certain fixed maturity securities, or liability contracts, or convert securities, or liabilities, denominated in a foreign currency to US dollars. The hedge strategies by hedge accounting designation include:
Cash flow hedges
Interest rate swaps are predominantly used to manage portfolio duration and better match cash receipts from assets with cash disbursements required to fund liabilities. These derivatives convert interest receipts on floating-rate fixed maturity securities or interest payments on floating-rate guaranteed investment contracts to fixed rates. The Company also enters into forward starting swap agreements primarily to hedge interest rate risk inherent in the assumptions used to price certain liabilities.
Foreign currency swaps are used to convert foreign currency-denominated cash flows related to certain investment receipts and liability payments to U.S. dollars in order to reduce cash flow fluctuations due to changes in currency rates.
Fair value hedges
Interest rate swaps are used to hedge the changes in fair value of certain fixed rate liabilities and fixed maturity securities due to fluctuations in interest rates. Foreign currency swaps are used to hedge the changes in fair value of certain foreign currency-denominated fixed rate liabilities due to changes in foreign currency rates by swapping the fixed foreign payments to floating rate U.S. dollar denominated payments.
Non-qualifying strategies
Derivative relationships that do not qualify for hedge accounting or “non-qualifying strategies” primarily include the hedge programs for our U.S. and international variable annuity products, as well as the hedging and replication strategies through the use of credit default swaps. In addition, hedges of interest rate and foreign currency risk of certain fixed maturities and liabilities do not qualify for hedge accounting. These non-qualifying strategies include:
Interest rate swaps, swaptions, caps, floors, and futures
The Company uses interest rate swaps, swaptions, caps, floors, and futures to manage duration between assets and liabilities in certain investment portfolios. In addition, the Company enters into interest rate swaps to terminate existing swaps, thereby offsetting the changes in value of the original swap. As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , the notional amount of interest rate swaps in offsetting relationships was $ 7.5 billion and $ 7.8 billion , respectively .
Foreign currency swaps and forwards
The Company enters into foreign currency swaps and forwards to convert the foreign currency exposures of certain foreign currency-denominated fixed maturity investments to U.S. dollars.
Japan 3Win foreign currency swaps
Prior to the second quarter of 2009, the Company offered a yen denominated fixed annuity product through a wholly-owned Japanese subsidiary and reinsured to a wholly-owned U.S. subsidiary. The U.S. subsidiary invests in U.S. dollar denominated securities to support the yen denominated fixed liability payments and entered into currency rate swaps to hedge the foreign currency exchange rate and yen interest rate exposures that exist as a result of U.S. dollar assets backing the yen denominated liability.


F-53
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)
6. Investments and Derivative Instruments (continued)


Japanese fixed annuity hedging instruments
Prior to the second quarter of 2009, the Company offered a yen denominated fixed annuity product through a wholly-owned Japanese subsidiary and reinsured to a wholly-owned U.S. subsidiary. The U.S. subsidiary invests in U.S. dollar denominated securities to support the yen denominated fixed liability payments and entered into currency rate swaps to hedge the foreign currency exchange rate and yen interest rate exposures that exist as a result of U.S. dollar assets backing the yen denominated liability.
Credit derivatives
Credit default swaps are used to purchase credit protection on an individual entity or referenced index to economically hedge against default risk and credit-related changes in value on fixed maturity securities. Credit default swaps are also used to assume credit risk related to an individual entity, referenced index, or asset pool, as a part of replication transactions. These contracts require the Company to pay or receive a periodic fee in exchange for compensation from the counterparty should the referenced security issuers experience a credit event, as defined in the contract. The Company is also exposed to credit risk related to credit derivatives embedded within certain fixed maturity securities. These securities are primarily comprised of structured securities that contain credit derivatives that reference a standard index of corporate securities. In addition, the Company enters into credit default swaps to terminate existing credit default swaps, thereby offsetting the changes in value of the original swap going forward.
Equity index swaps and options
The Company formerly offered certain equity indexed products, which may contain an embedded derivative that requires bifurcation. The Company enters into S&P index swaps and options to economically hedge the equity volatility risk associated with these embedded derivatives. The Company also enters into equity index options and futures with the purpose of hedging the impact of an adverse equity market environment on the investment portfolio.
U.S GMWB derivatives, net
The Company formerly offered certain variable annuity products with GMWB riders in the U.S. The GMWB product is a bifurcated embedded derivative (“U.S. GMWB product derivative”) that has a notional value equal to the GRB. The Company uses reinsurance contracts to transfer a portion of its risk of loss due to U.S GMWB. The reinsurance contracts covering U.S. GMWB (“U.S. GMWB reinsurance contracts”) are accounted for as free-standing derivatives with a notional amount equal to the GRB amount.
The Company utilizes derivatives (“ U.S. GMWB hedging derivatives”) as part of an actively managed program designed to hedge a portion of the capital market risk exposures of the un-reinsured GMWB due to changes in interest rates, equity market levels, and equity volatility. These derivatives include customized swaps, interest rate swaps and futures, and equity swaps, options, and futures, on certain indices including the S&P 500 index, EAFE index, and NASDAQ index. The following table represents notional and fair value for U.S. GMWB hedging instruments.
 
Notional Amount
Fair Value
 
December 31,
2012
December 31,
2011
December 31,
2012
December 31,
2011
Customized swaps
$
7,787

$
8,389

$
238

$
385

Equity swaps, options, and futures
5,130

5,320

267

498

Interest rate swaps and futures
5,705

2,697

67

11

Total
$
18,622

$
16,406

$
572

$
894

U.S. macro hedge program
The Company utilizes equity options and futures contracts to partially hedge against a decline in the equity markets and the resulting statutory surplus and capital impact primarily arising from GMDB and GMWB obligations. The following table represents notional and fair value for the U.S. macro hedge program.
 
Notional Amount
Fair Value
 
December 31,
2012
December 31,
2011
December 31,
2012
December 31,
2011
Equity futures
$
—

$
59

$
—

$
—

Equity options
7,442

6,760

286

357

Total
$
7,442

$
6,819

$
286

$
357


F-54
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)
6. Investments and Derivative Instruments (continued)

International program
The Company formerly offered certain variable annuity products in the U.K. and Japan with GMWB or GMAB riders, which are bifurcated embedded derivatives (“International program product derivatives”). The GMWB provides the policyholder with a GRB if the account value is reduced to zero through a combination of market declines and withdrawals. The GRB is generally equal to premiums less withdrawals. Certain contract provisions can increase the GRB at contractholder election or after the passage of time. The GMAB provides the policyholder with their initial deposit in a lump sum after a specified waiting period. The notional amount of the International program product derivatives are the foreign currency denominated GRBs converted to U.S. dollars at the current foreign spot exchange rate as of the reporting period date.
The Company enters into derivative contracts (“International program hedging instruments”) to hedge a portion of the capital market risk exposures associated with the guaranteed benefits associated with the international variable annuity contracts. The hedging derivatives are comprised of equity futures, options, and swaps and currency forwards and options to partially hedge against a decline in the debt and equity markets or changes in foreign currency exchange rates and the resulting statutory surplus and capital impact primarily arising from GMDB, GMIB and GMWB obligations issued in the U.K. and Japan. The Company also enters into foreign currency denominated interest rate swaps and swaptions to hedge the interest rate exposure related to the potential annuitization of certain benefit obligations. The following table represents notional and fair value for the international program hedging instruments.
 
Notional Amount
Fair Value
 
December 31,
2012
December 31,
2011
December 31,
2012
December 31,
2011
Credit derivatives
$
350

$
—

$
28

$
—

Currency forwards [1]
9,327

8,622

(87
)
446

Currency options
10,342

7,357

(24
)
127

Equity futures
2,332

3,835

—

—

Equity options
3,952

1,565

47

74

Equity swaps
2,617

392

(12
)
(8
)
Customized swaps
899

—

(11
)
—

Interest rate futures
634

739

—

—

Interest rate swaps and swaptions
32,632

11,216

228

111

Total
$
63,085

$
33,726

$
169

$
750

[1]
As of December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011 net notional amounts are $ 0.1 billion and $ 7.2 billion , respectively, which include $ 4.7 billion and $ 7.9 billion , respectively, related to long positions and $ 4.6 billion and $ 0.7 billion , respectively, related to short positions.
Contingent capital facility put option
The Company entered into a put option agreement that provides the Company the right to require a third-party trust to purchase, at any time, The Hartford’s junior subordinated notes in a maximum aggregate principal amount of $500 . Under the put option agreement, The Hartford will pay premiums on a periodic basis and will reimburse the trust for certain fees and ordinary expenses.
Derivative Balance Sheet Classification
The table below summarizes the balance sheet classification of the Company’s derivative related fair value amounts, as well as the gross asset and liability fair value amounts. For reporting purposes, the Company offsets the fair value amounts, income accruals, and cash collateral held related to derivative instruments executed in a legal entity and with the same counterparty under a master netting agreement, which provides the Company with the legal right of offset. The fair value amounts presented below do not include income accruals or cash collateral held amounts, which are netted with derivative fair value amounts to determine balance sheet presentation. Derivative fair value reported as liabilities after taking into account the master netting agreements, is $1.5 billion and $3.2 billion as of December 31, 2012 , and December 31, 2011 , respectively. Derivatives in the Company’s separate accounts are not included because the associated gains and losses accrue directly to policyholders. The Company’s derivative instruments are held for risk management purposes, unless otherwise noted in the table below. The notional amount of derivative contracts represents the basis upon which pay or receive amounts are calculated and is presented in the table to quantify the volume of the Company’s derivative activity. Notional amounts are not necessarily reflective of credit risk.

F-55
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)
6. Investments and Derivative Instruments (continued)

 
Net Derivatives
Asset Derivatives
Liability Derivatives
 
Notional Amount
Fair Value
Fair Value
Fair Value
Hedge Designation/ Derivative Type
Dec 31, 2012
Dec 31, 2011
Dec 31, 2012
Dec 31, 2011
Dec 31, 2012
Dec 31, 2011
Dec 31, 2012
Dec 31, 2011
Cash flow hedges
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Interest rate swaps
$
6,063

$
8,652

$
271

$
329

$
271

$
329

$
—

$
—

Foreign currency swaps
163

291

(17
)
6

3

30

(20
)
(24
)
Total cash flow hedges
6,226

8,943

254

335

274

359

(20
)
(24
)
Fair value hedges
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Interest rate swaps
753

1,007

(55
)
(78
)
—

—

(55
)
(78
)
Foreign currency swaps
40

677

16

(39
)
16

63

—

(102
)
Total fair value hedges
793

1,684

(39
)
(117
)
16

63

(55
)
(180
)
Non-qualifying strategies
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Interest rate contracts
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Interest rate swaps, caps, floors, and futures
17,117

10,144

(497
)
(583
)
556

531

(1,053
)
(1,114
)
Foreign exchange contracts
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Foreign currency swaps and forwards
355

380

(16
)
(12
)
5

6

(21
)
(18
)
Japan 3Win foreign currency swaps
1,816

2,054

(127
)
184

—

184

(127
)
—

Japanese fixed annuity hedging instruments
1,652

1,945

224

514

228

540

(4
)
(26
)
Credit contracts
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Credit derivatives that purchase credit protection
1,823

1,721

(8
)
36

5

56

(13
)
(20
)
Credit derivatives that assume credit risk [1]
2,745

2,952

(29
)
(648
)
19

2

(48
)
(650
)
Credit derivatives in offsetting positions
9,497

8,189

(32
)
(57
)
94

164

(126
)
(221
)
Equity contracts
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Equity index swaps and options
994

1,501

47

27

57

40

(10
)
(13
)
Variable annuity hedge program
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
U.S. GMWB product derivative [2]
28,868

34,569

(1,249
)
(2,538
)
—

—

(1,249
)
(2,538
)
U.S. GMWB reinsurance contracts
5,773

7,193

191

443

191

443

—

—

U.S. GMWB hedging instruments
18,622

16,406

572

894

743

1,022

(171
)
(128
)
U.S. macro hedge program
7,442

6,819

286

357

356

357

(70
)
—

International program product derivatives [2]
2,454

2,710

(48
)
(71
)
—

—

(48
)
(71
)
International program hedging instruments
63,085

33,726

169

750

1,020

887

(851
)
(137
)
Other
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Contingent capital facility put option
500

500

23

28

23

28

—

—

Total non-qualifying strategies
162,743

130,809

(494
)
(676
)
3,297

4,260

(3,791
)
(4,936
)
Total cash flow hedges, fair value hedges, and non-qualifying strategies
$
169,762

$
141,436

$
(279
)
$
(458
)
$
3,587

$
4,682

$
(3,866
)
$
(5,140
)
Balance Sheet Location
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Fixed maturities, available-for-sale
$
703

$
703

$
(32
)
$
(72
)
$
—

$
—

$
(32
)
$
(72
)
Other investments
54,504

60,227

1,045

2,331

1,581

3,165

(536
)
(834
)
Other liabilities
77,384

35,944

(177
)
(538
)
1,815

1,074

(1,992
)
(1,612
)
Consumer notes
26

35

(2
)
(4
)
—

—

(2
)
(4
)
Reinsurance recoverables
5,773

7,193

191

443

191

443

—

—

Other policyholder funds and benefits payable
31,372

37,334

(1,304
)
(2,618
)
—

—

(1,304
)
(2,618
)
Total derivatives
$
169,762

$
141,436

$
(279
)
$
(458
)
$
3,587

$
4,682

$
(3,866
)
$
(5,140
)
[1] The derivative instruments related to this strategy are held for other investment purposes.
[2] These derivatives are embedded within liabilities and are not held for risk management purposes.

F-56
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)
6. Investments and Derivative Instruments (continued)

Change in Notional Amount
The net increase in notional amount of derivatives since December 31, 2011 , was primarily due to the following:
•
$63.1  billion notional amount related to the international program hedging instruments as of December 31, 2012 consisted of $58.5 billion of long positions and $4.6 billion of offsetting short positions, resulting in a net notional amount of $53.9 billion . The $33.7 billion notional amount as of December 31, 2011 consisted of $33.0 billion of long positions and $0.7 billion of offsetting short positions, resulting in a net notional amount of $32.3 billion . The increase in net notional of $21.6 billion primarily resulted from the Company increasing its hedging of interest rate exposure.
Change in Fair Value
The improvement in the total fair value of derivative instruments since December 31, 2011 , was primarily related to the following:
•
The increase in fair value related to the combined GMWB hedging program, which includes the GMWB product, reinsurance, and hedging derivatives, was primarily due to a liability model assumption update, outperformance of the underlying actively managed funds as compared to their respective indices and lower equity market volatility.
•
The increase in fair value related to credit derivatives that assume credit risk was primarily due to credit spread tightening and to the disposition of substantially all of the Company's interest in a consolidated VIE that contained a credit derivative. For more information on the disposition, see the Variable Interest Entity section of this footnote.
•
The fair value related to the international program hedging instruments decreased as a result of the improvement in global equity markets and the depreciation of the Japanese yen in relation to the euro and the U.S. dollar.
•
The fair value related to the Japanese fixed annuity hedging instruments and Japan 3Win foreign currency swaps decreased primarily due to the strengthening of the currency basis swap spread between U.S. dollar and Japanese yen, a decline in U.S. interest rates, and depreciation of the Japanese yen in relation to the U.S. dollar.
Cash Flow Hedges
For derivative instruments that are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges, the effective portion of the gain or loss on the derivative is reported as a component of OCI and reclassified into earnings in the same period or periods durin g which the hedged transaction affects earnings. Gains and losses on the derivative representing hedge ineffectiveness are recognized in current period earnings. All components of each derivative’s gain or loss were included in the assessment of hedge effectiveness.
The following table presents the components of the gain or loss on derivatives that qualify as cash flow hedges:
Derivatives in Cash Flow Hedging Relationships
 
Gain (Loss) Recognized in OCI on Derivative (Effective Portion)
Net Realized Capital Gains(Losses) Recognized in Income on Derivative (Ineffective Portion)
 
2012
2011
2010
2012
2011
2010
Interest rate swaps
$
120

$
337

$
294

$
—

$
(4
)
$
2

Foreign currency swaps
(31
)
(3
)
8

—

—

(1
)
Total
$
89

$
334

$
302

$
—

$
(4
)
$
1

Derivatives in Cash Flow Hedging Relationships
 
 
Gain (Loss) Reclassified from AOCI into Income (Effective Portion)
 
Location
2012
2011
2010
Interest rate swaps
Net realized capital gain/(loss)
$
90

$
9

$
18

Interest rate swaps
Net investment income
140

126

94

Foreign currency swaps
Net realized capital gain/(loss)
(6
)
(3
)
(7
)
Total
 
$
224

$
132

$
105


F-57
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)
6. Investments and Derivative Instruments (continued)

As of December 31, 2012 , the before-tax deferred net gains on derivative instruments recorded in AOCI that are expected to be reclassified to earnings during the next twelve months are $ 180 . This expectation is based on the anticipated interest payments on hedged investments in fixed maturity securities that will occur over the next twelve months, at which time the Company will recognize the deferred net gains (losses) as an adjustment to interest income over the term of the investment cash flows. The maximum term over which the Company is hedging its exposure to the variability of future cash flows (for forecasted transactions, excluding interest payments on existing variable-rate financial instruments) is approximately three years . Also included are deferred gains related to cash flow hedges associated with fixed-rate bonds sold as part of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life business dispositions completed January 1, 2013 and January 2, 2013, respectively. For further information on the business dispositions, see Note 2.
During the year ended December 31, 2012, the before-tax deferred net gains on derivative instruments reclassified from AOCI to earnings totaled $ 99 . This primarily resulted from the discontinuance of cash flow hedges due to forecasted transactions no longer probable of occurring associated with variable rate bonds sold as part of the Individual Life and Retirement Plans business dispositions. For further information on the business dispositions, see Note 2. For the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010 , the Company had no net reclassifications and less than $1 of net reclassifications, respectively, from AOCI to earnings resulting from the discontinuance of cash-flow hedges due to forecasted transactions that were no longer probable of occurring.

Fair Value Hedges
For derivative instruments that are designated and qualify as a fair value hedge, the gain or loss on the derivative, as well as the offsetting loss or gain on the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk are recognized in current earnings. The Company includes the gain or loss on the derivative in the same line item as the offsetting loss or gain on the hedged item. All components of each derivative’s gain or loss were included in the assessment of hedge effectiveness.
The Company recognized in income gains (losses) representing the ineffective portion of fair value hedges as follows:
Derivatives in Fair Value Hedging Relationships
 
Gain (Loss) Recognized in Income [1]
 
2012
2011
2010
 
Derivative
Hedged Item
Derivative
Hedged Item
Derivative
Hedged Item
Interest rate swaps
 
 
 
 
 
 
Net realized capital gains (losses)
$
(3
)
$
(3
)
$
(73
)
$
70

$
(43
)
$
36

Benefits, losses and loss adjustment expenses
—

—

(1
)
—

(1
)
3

Foreign currency swaps
 

 

 

 

 
 
Net realized capital gains (losses)
(7
)
7

(1
)
1

8

(8
)
Benefits, losses and loss adjustment expenses
(6
)
6

(22
)
22

(12
)
12

Total
$
(16
)
$
10

$
(96
)
$
93

$
(48
)
$
43

[1]
The amounts presented do not include the periodic net coupon settlements of the derivative or the coupon income (expense) related to the hedged item. The net of the amounts presented represents the ineffective portion of the hedge.

F-58
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)
6. Investments and Derivative Instruments (continued)

Non-qualifying Strategies
For non-qualifying strategies, including embedded derivatives that are required to be bifurcated from their host contracts and accounted for as derivatives, the gain or loss on the derivative is recognized currently in earnings within net realized capital gains (losses). The following table presents the gain or loss recognized in income on non-qualifying strategies:
Non-qualifying Strategies
Gain (Loss) Recognized within Net Realized Capital Gains (Losses)
 
December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
Interest rate contracts
 
 
 
Interest rate swaps, caps, floors, and forwards
$
21

$
(22
)
$
45

Foreign exchange contracts
 
 
 
Foreign currency swaps and forwards
19

3

(1
)
Japan 3Win foreign currency swaps [1]
(300
)
31

215

Japanese fixed annuity hedging instruments [2]
(178
)
109

385

Credit contracts
 
 
 
Credit derivatives that purchase credit protection
(64
)
(10
)
(23
)
Credit derivatives that assume credit risk
293

(174
)
196

Equity contracts
 
 
 
Equity index swaps and options
(39
)
(89
)
5

Variable annuity hedge program
 
 
 
U.S. GMWB product derivative
1,430

(780
)
486

U.S. GMWB reinsurance contracts
(280
)
131

(102
)
U.S. GMWB hedging instruments
(631
)
252

(295
)
U.S. macro hedge program
(340
)
(216
)
(445
)
International program product derivatives
36

(25
)
26

International program hedging instruments
(1,526
)
800

(15
)
Other
 
 
 
Contingent capital facility put option
(6
)
(5
)
(6
)
Total
$
(1,565
)
$
5

$
471

[1]
The associated liability is adjusted for changes in spot rates through realized capital gains and was $189 , $(100) and $(273) for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively.
[2]
The associated liability is adjusted for changes in spot rates through realized capital gains and losses and was $245 , $(129) and $(332) for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively.
For the year ended December 31, 2012 , the net realized capital gain (loss) related to derivatives used in non-qualifying strategies was primarily comprised of the following:
•
The net loss associated with the international program hedging instruments was primarily driven by an improvement in global equity markets and depreciation of the Japanese yen in relation to the euro and the U.S. dollar.
•
The net gain related to the combined GMWB hedging program, which includes the GMWB product, reinsurance, and hedging derivatives, was primarily driven by liability model assumption updates, outperformance of underlying actively managed funds compared to their respective indices, and lower equity volatility.
•
The net loss on the U.S. macro hedge program was primarily due to the passage of time, an improvement in domestic equity markets, and a decrease in equity volatility.
•
The net loss related to the Japan 3Win foreign currency swaps and Japanese fixed annuity hedging instruments was primarily due to the depreciation of the Japanese yen in relation to the U.S. dollar, the strengthening of the currency basis swap spread between the U.S. dollar and the Japanese yen, and a decline in U.S. interest rates.
•
The gain on credit derivatives that assume credit risk as a part of replication transactions resulted from credit spread tightening.

F-59
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)
6. Investments and Derivative Instruments (continued)

For the year ended December 31, 2011 , the net realized capital gain (loss) related to derivatives used in non-qualifying strategies was primarily comprised of the following:
•
The net gain associated with the international program hedging instruments was primarily driven by strengthening of the Japanese yen, a decline in global equity markets, and a decrease in interest rates.
•
The loss related to the combined GMWB hedging program, which includes the GMWB product, reinsurance, and hedging derivatives, was primarily a result of a decrease in long-term interest rates and higher interest rate volatility.
•
The net loss on the U.S. macro hedge program was primarily driven by time decay and a decrease in equity market volatility since the purchase date of certain options during the fourth quarter.
•
The loss on credit derivatives that assume credit risk as a part of replication transactions resulted from credit spread widening.
For the year ended December 31, 2010 , the net realized capital gain (loss) related to derivatives used in non-qualifying strategies was primarily due to the following:
•
The net loss on the U.S. macro hedge program was primarily the result of a higher equity market valuation, time decay, and lower implied market volatility.
•
The net gain on the Japanese fixed annuity hedging instruments was primarily due to the strengthening of the Japanese yen in comparison to the U.S. dollar.
•
The net gain related to the Japan 3Win foreign currency swaps was primarily due to the strengthening of the Japanese yen in comparison to the U.S. dollar, partially offset by the decrease in long-term U.S. interest rates.
•
The net gain associated with credit derivatives that assume credit risk as a part of replication transactions resulted from credit spread tightening.
•
The gain related to the combined GMWB hedging program, which includes the GMWB product, reinsurance, and hedging derivatives, was primarily a result of liability model assumption updates during third quarter, lower implied market volatility, and outperformance of the underlying actively managed funds as compared to their respective indices, partially offset by a decrease in long-term interest rates and rising equity markets.
Refer to Note 13 for additional disclosures regarding contingent credit related features in derivative agreements.

F-60
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)
6. Investments and Derivative Instruments (continued)

Credit Risk Assumed through Credit Derivatives
The Company enters into credit default swaps that assume credit risk of a single entity, referenced index, or asset pool in order to synthetically replicate investment transactions. The Company will receive periodic payments based on an agreed upon rate and notional amount and will only make a payment if there is a credit event. A credit event payment will typically be equal to the notional value of the swap contract less the value of the referenced security issuer’s debt obligation after the occurrence of the credit event. A credit event is generally defined as a default on contractually obligated interest or principal payments or bankruptcy of the referenced entity. The credit default swaps in which the Company assumes credit risk primarily reference investment grade single corporate issuers and baskets, which include standard and customized diversified portfolios of corporate issuers. The diversified portfolios of corporate issuers are established within sector concentration limits and may be divided into tranches that possess different credit ratings.
The following tables present the notional amount, fair value, weighted average years to maturity, underlying referenced credit obligation type and average credit ratings, and offsetting notional amounts and fair value for credit derivatives in which the Company is assuming credit risk as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 .
As of December 31, 2012  
 
 
 

Underlying Referenced Credit Obligation(s) [1]

 
Credit Derivative type by derivative risk exposure
Notional Amount [2]
Fair Value
Weighted Average Years to Maturity
Type
Average Credit Rating
Offsetting Notional Amount [3]
Offsetting Fair Value [3]
Single name credit default swaps
 

 

 
 
 
 
 

Investment grade risk exposure
$
2,321

$
7

3 years
Corporate Credit/
Foreign Gov.
A
$
1,367

$
(26
)
Below investment grade risk exposure
145

(1
)
1 year
Corporate Credit
B+
145

(3
)
Basket credit default swaps [4]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Investment grade risk exposure
3,978

7

3 years
Corporate Credit
BBB+
2,712

(13
)
Investment grade risk exposure
330

(17
)
4 years
CMBS Credit
A
330

17

Below investment grade risk exposure
195

(46
)
4 years
CMBS Credit
B+
195

46

Embedded credit derivatives
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Investment grade risk exposure
525

478

4 years
Corporate Credit
BBB-
—

—

Total
$
7,494

$
428

 
 
 
$
4,749

$
21


F-61
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)
6. Investments and Derivative Instruments (continued)

December 31, 2011
 
 
 

Unifying Refernced Credit Obligation(s) [1]
 

 
Credit Derivative type by derivative risk exposure
Notional Amount [2]
Fair Value
Weighted Average Years to Maturity
Type
Average Credit Rating
Offsetting Notional Amount [3]
Offsetting Fair Value [3]
Single name credit default swaps
 

 

 
 
 
 

 

Investment grade risk exposure
$
1,628

$
(34
)
3 years
Corporate Credit/
Foreign Gov.
A+
$
1,424

$
(15
)
Below investment grade risk exposure
170

(7
)
2 years
Corporate Credit
BB-
144

(5
)
Basket credit default swaps [4]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Investment grade risk exposure
3,645

(92
)
3 years
Corporate Credit
BBB+
2,001

29

Investment grade risk exposure
525

(98
)
5 years
CMBS Credit
BBB+
525

98

Below investment grade risk exposure
553

(509
)
3 years
Corporate Credit
BBB+
—

—

Embedded credit derivatives
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Investment grade risk exposure
25

24

3 years
Corporate Credit
BBB-
—

—

Below investment grade risk exposure
500

411

5 years
Corporate Credit
BB+
—

—

Total
$
7,046

$
(305
)
 
 
 
$
4,094

$
107

[1]
The average credit ratings are based on availability and the midpoint of the applicable ratings among Moody’s, S&P, and Fitch. If no rating is available from a rating agency, then an internally developed rating is used.
[2]
Notional amount is equal to the maximum potential future loss amount. There is no specific collateral related to these contracts or recourse provisions included in the contracts to offset losses.
[3]
The Company has entered into offsetting credit default swaps to terminate certain existing credit default swaps, thereby offsetting the future changes in value of, or losses paid related to, the original swap.
[4]
Includes $ 4.5 billion and $ 4.2 billion as of December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011 , respectively, of standard market indices of diversified portfolios of corporate issuers referenced through credit default swaps. These swaps are subsequently valued based upon the observable standard market index. As of December 31, 2012 , The Company did not hold customized diversified portfolios of corporate issuers referenced through credit default swaps. As of December 31, 2011 the Company held $ 553 of customized diversified portfolios of corporate issuers referenced through credit default swaps.
Collateral Arrangements
The Company enters into various collateral arrangements in connection with its derivative instruments, which require both the pledging and accepting of collateral. As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , collateral pledged having a fair value of $630 and $1.1 billion , respectively, was included in fixed maturities, AFS, in the Consolidated Balance Sheets.
From time to time, the Company enters into secured borrowing arrangements as a means to increase net investment income. The Company received cash collateral of $33 as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 .
The following table presents the classification and carrying amount of derivative instruments collateral pledged.
 
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
Fixed maturities, AFS
$
663

$
1,086

Short-term investments
208

199

Total collateral pledged
$
871

$
1,285

As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , the Company had accepted collateral with a fair value of $3.3 billion and $2.6 billion , respectively, of which $2.6 billion and $2.0 billion , respectively, was cash collateral which was invested and recorded in the Consolidated Balance Sheets in fixed maturities and short-term investments with corresponding amounts recorded in other assets and other liabilities. Included in the $2.6 billion of cash collateral, as of December 31, 2012, was $1.9 billion which relates to repurchase agreements and dollar roll transactions. The Company is only permitted by contract to sell or repledge the noncash collateral in the event of a default by the counterparty. As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , noncash collateral accepted was held in separate custodial accounts and was not included in the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets.
Securities on Deposit with States
The Company is required by law to deposit securities with government agencies in states where it conducts business. As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , the fair value of securities on deposit was approximately $1.7 billion and $1.6 billion , respectively.

F-62
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)


7 . Reinsurance
The Company is involved in both the cession and assumption of insurance with affiliated and unaffiliated insurers. The Company entered into two reinsurance transactions upon completion of the sales of its Retirement Plans and Individual Life businesses in January 2013. See Note 2 - Business Dispositions for further discussion of these transactions.
As of December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , the Company’s policy for the largest amount of life insurance retained on any one life by any company was $ 10 .
Life insurance fees, earned premiums and other were comprised of the following:
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
Gross fee income, earned premiums and other
$
8,546

$
9,342

$
9,482

Reinsurance assumed
137

134

192

Reinsurance ceded
(524
)
(524
)
(576
)
Net fee income, earned premiums and other
$
8,159

$
8,952

$
9,098

The Company reinsures certain of its risks to other reinsurers under yearly renewable term, coinsurance, and modified coinsurance arrangements, and variations thereto. Yearly renewable term and coinsurance arrangements result in passing all or a portion of the risk to the reinsurer. Generally, the reinsurer receives a proportionate amount of the premiums less an allowance for commissions and expenses and is liable for a corresponding proportionate amount of all benefit payments. Modified coinsurance is similar to coinsurance except that the cash and investments that support the liabilities for contract benefits are not transferred to the assuming company, and settlements are made on a net basis between the companies. Coinsurance with funds withheld is a form of coinsurance except that the investment assets that support the liabilities are withheld by the ceding company.
The cost of reinsurance related to long-duration contracts is accounted for over the life of the underlying reinsured policies using assumptions consistent with those used to account for the underlying policies. Life insurance recoveries on ceded reinsurance agreements were $ 285 , $ 224 and $ 275 for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 , and 2010 , respectively.
In addition, the Company has reinsured a portion of the risk associated with U.S. variable annuities and the associated GMDB and GMWB riders, and of the risks associated with variable annuity contract and rider benefits issued by Hartford Life Insurance KK (“HLIKK”), an indirect wholly owned subsidiary.
The effect of reinsurance on property and casualty premiums written and earned was as follows:
 
For the years ended December 31,
Premiums Written
2012
2011
2010
Direct
$
10,405

$
10,368

$
10,070

Assumed
230

226

234

Ceded
(788
)
(742
)
(619
)
Net
$
9,847

$
9,852

$
9,685

Premiums Earned
 

 

 

Direct
$
10,484

$
10,337

$
10,105

Assumed
205

225

256

Ceded
(796
)
(688
)
(668
)
Net
$
9,893

$
9,874

$
9,693

Ceded losses, which reduce losses and loss adjustment expenses incurred, were $ 512 , $ 385 , and $ 598 for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 , and 2010 , respectively.

F-63
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
7. Reinsurance

Reinsurance recoverables include balances due from reinsurance companies for paid and unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses and are presented net of an allowance for uncollectible reinsurance. The reinsurance recoverables balance includes an estimate of the amount of gross losses and loss adjustment expense reserves that may be ceded under the terms of the reinsurance agreements, including incurred but not reported unpaid losses. The Company’s estimate of losses and loss adjustment expense reserves ceded to reinsurers is based on assumptions that are consistent with those used in establishing the gross reserves for business ceded to the reinsurance contracts. The Company calculates its ceded reinsurance projection based on the terms of any applicable facultative and treaty reinsurance, including an estimate of how incurred but not reported losses will ultimately be ceded by reinsurance agreements. Accordingly, the Company’s estimate of reinsurance recoverables is subject to similar risks and uncertainties as the estimate of the gross reserve for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses.
The allowance for uncollectible reinsurance was $ 268 and $ 290 , as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively. The allowance for uncollectible reinsurance reflects management’s best estimate of reinsurance cessions that may be uncollectible in the future due to reinsurers’ unwillingness or inability to pay. The Company analyzes recent developments in commutation activity between reinsurers and cedants, recent trends in arbitration and litigation outcomes in disputes between reinsurers and cedants and the overall credit quality of the Company’s reinsurers. Based on this analysis, the Company may adjust the allowance for uncollectible reinsurance or charge off reinsurer balances that are determined to be uncollectible. Where its contracts permit, the Company secures future claim obligations with various forms of collateral, including irrevocable letters of credit, secured trusts, funds held accounts and group-wide offsets.
Due to the inherent uncertainties as to collection and the length of time before reinsurance recoverables become due, it is possible that future adjustments to the Company’s reinsurance recoverables, net of the allowance, could be required, which could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated results of operations or cash flows in a particular quarter or annual period.

8 . Deferred Policy Acquisition Costs and Present Value of Future Profits
On January 1, 2012, the Company adopted ASU No. 2010-26 as further discussed in Note 1 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. As a result of this change in accounting policy, deferred policy acquisition costs and present value of future profits as of January 1, 2010 decreased by approximately $2.6 billion from $10.7 billion , as previously reported.
Changes in the DAC balance are as follows:
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
Balance, beginning of period
$
6,556

$
7,473

$
8,127

Deferred Costs
1,639

1,696

1,729

Amortization — DAC
(1,844
)
(2,025
)
(1,816
)
Amortization — Unlock benefit (charge), pre-tax
(144
)
(419
)
107

Adjustments to unrealized gains and losses on securities available-for-sale and other [1] [2]
(364
)
(240
)
(874
)
Effect of currency translation
(118
)
71

191

Cumulative effect of accounting change, pre-tax [3]
—

—

9

Balance, end of period [4]
$
5,725

$
6,556

$
7,473

[1]
Primarily represents the effect of declining interest rates, resulting in unrealized gains on securities classified in AOCI.
[2]
Other includes a $16 reduction of the DAC asset as a result of the sale of assets used to administer the Company's PPLI business in 2012. The reduction is directly attributable to this transaction as it results in lower future estimated gross profits than originally estimated on these products. For further information regarding this transaction see Note 2 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. Other also includes a $34 reduction of the DAC asset as a result of the sale of the Hartford Investment Canada Corporation in 2010.
[3]
For the year ended December 31, 2010 the effect of adopting new accounting guidance for embedded credit derivatives resulted in a decrease to retained earnings and, as a result, a DAC benefit. In addition, an offsetting amount was recorded in unrealized losses as unrealized losses decreased upon adoption of the new accounting guidance.
[4]
For further information, see Note 2 - Business Dispositions of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

As of December 31, 2012 , estimated future net amortization expense of present value of future profits for the succeeding five years is $22 , $6 , $6 , $6 and $5 in 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016 and 2017, respectively. Future net amortization expense as of December 31, 2012 reflects the estimated impact of the business disposition transactions discussed in Note 2 - Business Dispositions of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

F-64
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)


9 . Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets
Goodwill
The carrying value of goodwill allocated to reporting units is as follows:
 
December 31, 2012
December 31, 2011
 
Gross
Accumulated Impairments
Business Dispositions [1]
Carrying Value
Gross
Accumulated Impairments
Discontinued Operations [2]
Carrying Value
Property & Casualty Commercial
$
30

$
(30
)
$
—

$
—

$
30

$
(30
)
$
—

$
—

Consumer Markets
119

—

—

119

119

—

—

119

Mutual Funds [4]
159

—

(10
)
149

159

—

—

159

Talcott Resolution:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Individual Life [4]
224

—

(224
)
—

224

—

—

224

Retirement Plans [4]
87

—

—

87

87

—

—

87

Total Talcott Resolution
311

—

(224
)
87

311

—

—

311

Corporate [3][4]
772

(355
)
(118
)
299

787

(355
)
(15
)
417

Total
$
1,391

$
(385
)
$
(352
)
$
654

$
1,406

$
(385
)
$
(15
)
$
1,006

[1]
Represents goodwill written off in connection with the sales of WFS and Individual Life.
[2]
Represents goodwill written off related to Federal Trust Corporation; see Note 20 - Discontinued Operations for further information.
[3]
Carrying value as of December 31, 2012 includes $138 , $92 and $69 , respectively, for the Group Benefits, Mutual Funds and Retirement Plans reporting units. Carrying value as of December 31, 2011 includes $138 , $92 , $118 and $69 , respectively, for the Group Benefits, Mutual Funds, Individual Life and Retirement Plans reporting units.
[4]
For further information, see Note 2 - Business Dispositions of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

Year ended December 31, 2012
During the first quarter of 2012, the Company determined that a triggering event requiring an impairment assessment had occurred as a result of its decision to pursue sales or other strategic alternatives for the Individual Life and Retirement Plans reporting units.
The Company completed interim impairment tests during each of the first three quarters of 2012 for the Retirement Plans reporting unit which resulted in no impairment of goodwill. The annual goodwill assessment for Retirement Plans was completed as of October 31, 2012 and an additional impairment test was completed as of December 31, 2012 as a result of the anticipated sale of this business unit. No write-down of goodwill resulted for the year ended December 31, 2012. Retirement Plans passed step one of the goodwill impairment tests with a margin of less than 10% between fair value and book value of the reporting unit as of both dates. The fair value of the Retirement Plans reporting unit as of October 31, 2012 and December 31, 2012 was based on a negotiated transaction price.
The Company completed interim impairment tests during each of the first three quarters of 2012 for the Individual Life reporting unit which resulted in no impairment of goodwill in the first and second quarters of 2012. In the third quarter of 2012, the Individual Life reporting unit failed the goodwill impairment test as the carrying amount of the Individual Life reporting unit's goodwill exceeded the implied goodwill value. Accordingly, an impairment loss of $342 was recognized, representing the carrying value of the reporting unit's goodwill. The goodwill impairment loss is included in reinsurance loss on disposition in the Company's Consolidated Statements of Operations. The fair value of the Individual Life reporting unit as of September 30, 2012 was based on a negotiated transaction price.
The annual goodwill assessment for the Mutual Funds and Consumer Markets reporting units and the Group Benefits reporting unit within Corporate was completed as of October 31, 2012, which resulted in no write-downs of goodwill for the year ended December 31, 2012. The reporting units passed the first step of their annual impairment test with a significant margin with the exception of the Group Benefits reporting unit. Group Benefits passed the first step of its annual impairment test with less than a 10% margin. The fair value of the Group Benefits reporting unit is based on discounted cash flows using earnings projections on in force business and future business growth. There could be a positive or negative impact on the result of step one in future periods if assumptions change about the level of economic capital, future business growth, earnings projections or the weighted average cost of capital.

F-65
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
9. Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets (continued)

Year ended December 31, 2011
During the second quarter of 2011, the Company wrote off the remaining $ 15 of goodwill associated with the Federal Trust Corporation (“FTC”) reporting unit within Corporate due to the announced divestiture of FTC. The write-off of the FTC reporting unit goodwill was recorded as a loss on disposal within discontinued operations.
The Consumer Markets reporting unit completed its annual goodwill assessment on October 1, 2011 and again on October 31, 2011, which resulted in no impairment of goodwill. In both tests, the Consumer Markets reporting unit passed the first step of the annual impairment tests with a significant margin. The annual goodwill assessment for the Property & Casualty Commercial reporting unit that was performed on October 1, 2011 resulted in a write-down of goodwill of $ 30 , pre-tax leaving no remaining goodwill. The results of the discounted cash flow calculations indicated that the fair value of the reporting unit was less than the carrying value; this was due primarily to a decrease in future expected underwriting cash flows. The decrease in future expected underwriting cash flows is driven by an expected reduction in written premium in the short term as the Company maintains pricing discipline in a downward market cycle, while retaining long term capabilities for future opportunities.
The Company completed its annual goodwill assessment for Mutual Funds, Individual Life, Retirement Plans and Group Benefits, including the goodwill within Corporate, on January 1, 2011 and October 31, 2011, which resulted in no impairment of goodwill. In both tests, the reporting units passed the first step of their annual impairment tests with a significant margin with the exception of the Individual Life reporting unit at the January 1, 2011 test. The Individual Life reporting unit had a margin of less than 10% between fair value and book value on January 1, 2011. As of the October 31, 2011 impairment test, the Individual Life reporting unit had a fair value in excess of book value of approximately 15% , a modest improvement from January 1, 2011 results due to improving cost of capital.
Year ended December 31, 2010
The annual goodwill assessment for the reporting units within Property & Casualty Commercial and Consumer Markets was completed on October 1, 2010, which resulted in no write-downs of goodwill for the year ended December 31, 2010.
The Company completed its annual goodwill assessment for Mutual Funds, Individual Life, Retirement Plans and Group Benefits, including the goodwill within Corporate, on January 1, 2010, which resulted in no write-downs of goodwill in 2010. The reporting units passed the first step of their annual impairment tests with a significant margin with the exception of the Retirement Plans and Individual Life reporting units.
The Retirement Plans reporting unit passed with a margin of less than 10% between fair value and book value. The fair value is based on discounted cash flows using earnings projections on in force business and future business growth.
The Individual Life reporting unit completed the second step of the annual goodwill impairment test resulting in an implied goodwill value that was in excess of its carrying value. Even though the fair value of the reporting unit was lower than its carrying value, the implied level of goodwill in Individual Life exceeded the carrying amount of goodwill. In the hypothetical purchase accounting required by the step two of the goodwill impairment test, the implied present value of future profits was substantially lower than that of the DAC asset removed in purchase accounting. A higher discount rate was used for calculating the present value of future profits as compared to that used for calculating the present value of estimated gross profits for DAC. As a result, in the hypothetical purchase accounting, implied goodwill exceeded the carrying amount of goodwill.
The Company completed its annual goodwill assessment for the FTC reporting unit within Corporate on June 30, 2010. Downward pressure on valuations in general and depressed prices in the banking sector in particular resulted in very few unassisted bank deals taking place. Thus, the Company’s annual assessment resulted in an impairment charge of $ 153 , pre-tax which is recorded in discontinued operations.
Other Intangible Assets
Activity in acquired intangible assets that are subject to amortization is as follows:
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
Gross carrying amount, beginning of period
$
89

$
89

$
90

Accumulated net amortization
34

25

18

Net carrying amount, beginning of period
55

64

72

Acquisition of business
—

—

(1
)
Amortization, net of the accretion of interest
(6
)
(9
)
(7
)
Net carrying amount, end of period [1]
49

55

64

Accumulated net amortization
40

34

25

Gross carrying amount, end of period
$
89

$
89

$
89

[1] Includes $11 for the Retirement Plans reporting unit. For further information, see Note 2 - Business Dispositions of the Notes to Consolidated
Financial Statements.

F-66
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
9. Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets (continued)


For the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , the Company did no t capitalize any costs to extend or renew the term of a recognized intangible asset. As of December 31, 2012 , the weighted average amortization period was 13  years for total acquired intangible assets. Net amortization expense for other intangibles is expected to be approximately $ 6 in each of the succeeding five years.
Net amortization expense for other intangible assets is included in other insurance operating and other expenses in the Consolidated Statement of Operations. Acquired intangible assets primarily consist of distribution agreements and servicing intangibles, and are included in other assets in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. With the exception of goodwill, the Company has no intangible assets with indefinite useful lives. For a discussion of present value of future profits that continue to be subject to amortization and aggregate amortization expense, see Note 8 .
10 . Separate Accounts, Death Benefits and Other Insurance Benefit Features
U.S. GMDB, International GMDB/GMIB, and UL Secondary Guarantee Benefits
Changes in the gross U.S. GMDB, International GMDB/GMIB, and UL secondary guarantee benefits are as follows:
 
U.S. GMDB
International
GMDB/GMIB
UL Secondary
Guarantees
Liability balance as of January 1, 2012
$
1,104

$
975

$
228

Incurred
210

133

113

Paid
(185
)
(189
)
—

Unlock
(211
)
(155
)
22

Currency translation adjustment
—

(103
)
—

Liability balance as of December 31, 2012
$
918

$
661

$
363

Reinsurance recoverable asset, as of January 1, 2012
$
724

$
40

$
22

Incurred
121

9

(1
)
Paid
(121
)
(27
)
—

Unlock
(116
)
18

—

Currency translation adjustment
—

(4
)
—

Reinsurance recoverable asset, as of December 31, 2012
$
608

$
36

$
21

 
U.S. GMDB
International
GMDB/GMIB
UL Secondary
Guarantees
Liability balance as of January 1, 2011
$
1,053

$
696

$
113

Incurred
220

122

53

Paid
(222
)
(165
)
—

Unlock
53

287

62

Currency translation adjustment
—

35

—

Liability balance as of December 31, 2011
$
1,104

$
975

$
228

Reinsurance recoverable asset, as of January 1, 2011
$
686

$
36

$
30

Incurred
128

18

(8
)
Paid
(143
)
(30
)
—

Unlock
53

15

—

Currency translation adjustment
—

1

—

Reinsurance recoverable asset, as of December 31, 2011
$
724

$
40

$
22


F-67
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)


The following table provides details concerning GMDB and GMIB exposure as of December 31, 2012 :
Individual Variable and Group Annuity Account Value by GMDB/GMIB Type
Maximum anniversary value (“MAV”) [1]
Account
Value
(“AV”) [8]
Net Amount
at Risk
(“NAR”) [10]
Retained Net
Amount
at Risk
(“RNAR”) [10]
Weighted Average
Attained Age of
Annuitant
MAV only
$
19,509

$
3,973

$
783

69
With 5% rollup [2]
1,517

379

115

69
With Earnings Protection Benefit Rider (“EPB”) [3]
4,990

582

80

66
With 5% rollup & EPB
561

127

28

69
Total MAV
26,577

5,061

1,006

 
Asset Protection Benefit (“APB”) [4]
20,008

1,069

701

67
Lifetime Income Benefit (“LIB”) – Death Benefit [5]
1,063

33

33

65
Reset [6] (5-7 years)
3,098

140

138

69
Return of Premium (“ROP”) [7]/Other
21,807

327

310

66
Subtotal U.S. GMDB
72,553

6,630

2,188

67
Less: General Account Value with U.S. GMDB
7,405

 
 
 
Subtotal Separate Account Liabilities with GMDB
65,148

 
 
 
Separate Account Liabilities without U.S. GMDB
76,421

 
 
 
Total Separate Account Liabilities
$
141,569

 
 
 
Japan GMDB [9], [11]
$
27,716

$
5,736

$
4,831

70
Japan GMIB [9], [11]
$
25,960

$
3,316

$
3,316

70
[1]
MAV GMDB is the greatest of current AV, net premiums paid and the highest AV on any anniversary before age 80 years (adjusted for withdrawals).
[2]
Rollup GMDB is the greatest of the MAV, current AV, net premium paid and premiums (adjusted for withdrawals) accumulated at generally 5% simple interest up to the earlier of age 80 years or 100% of adjusted premiums.
[3]
EPB GMDB is the greatest of the MAV, current AV, or contract value plus a percentage of the contract’s growth. The contract’s growth is AV less premiums net of withdrawals, subject to a cap of 200% of premiums net of withdrawals.
[4]
APB GMDB is the greater of current AV or MAV, not to exceed current AV plus 25% times the greater of net premiums and MAV (each adjusted for premiums in the past 12 months ).
[5]
LIB GMDB is the greatest of current AV, net premiums paid, or for certain contracts a benefit amount that ratchets over time, generally based on market performance.
[6]
Reset GMDB is the greatest of current AV, net premiums paid and the most recent five to seven year anniversary AV before age 80 years (adjusted for withdrawals).
[7]
ROP GMDB is the greater of current AV or net premiums paid.
[8]
AV includes the contract holder’s investment in the separate account and the general account.
[9]
GMDB includes a ROP and MAV (before age 80 years ) paid in a single lump sum. GMIB is a guarantee to return initial investment, adjusted for earnings liquidity which allows for free withdrawal of earnings, paid through a fixed payout annuity, after a minimum deferral period of 10 years , 15 years or 20 years . The GRB related to the Japan GMIB was $28.6 billion and $34.1 billion as of December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011 , respectively. The GRB related to the Japan GMAB and GMWB was $ 578 as of December 31, 2012 and $ 701 as of December 31, 2011 . These liabilities are not included in the Separate Account as they are not legally insulated from the general account liabilities of the insurance enterprise. As of December 31, 2012 , 55% of the GMDB RNAR and 73% of the GMIB NAR is reinsured to a Hartford affiliate, as a result, the effects of the reinsurance are not reflected in this disclosure.
[10]
NAR is defined as the guaranteed benefit in excess of the current AV. RNAR represents NAR reduced for reinsurance. NAR and RNAR are highly sensitive to equity markets movements and increase when equity markets decline. Additionally Japan’s NAR and RNAR are highly sensitive to currency movements and increase when the Yen strengthens.
[11]
Policies with a guaranteed living benefit (GMIB in Japan) also have a guaranteed death benefit. The NAR for each benefit is shown in the table above, however these benefits are not additive. When a policy terminates due to death, any NAR related to GMWB or GMIB is released. Similarly, when a policy goes into benefit status on a GMWB or GMIB, its GMDB NAR is released.
In the U.S., account balances of contracts with guarantees were invested in variable separate accounts as follows:
Asset type
As of December 31, 2012
As of December 31, 2011
Equity securities (including mutual funds)
$
58,208

$
61,472

Cash and cash equivalents
6,940

7,516

Total
$
65,148

$
68,988

As of December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011 , approximately 16% and 17% , respectively, of the equity securities above were invested in fixed income securities through these funds and approximately 84% and 83% , respectively, were invested in equity securities through these funds.
See Note 5 for further information on guaranteed living benefits that are accounted for at fair value, such as GMWB.

F-68
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)


11 . Sales Inducements
The Company offered enhanced crediting rates or bonus payments to contract holders on certain of its individual and group annuity products. The expense associated with offering a bonus is deferred and amortized over the life of the related contract in a pattern consistent with the amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs. Amortization expense associated with expenses previously deferred is recorded over the remaining life of the contract. Consistent with the Unlock, the Company unlocks the amortization of the sales inducement asset. See Note 8 for more information concerning the Unlock.
Changes in sales inducement activity are as follows:
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
Balance, beginning of period
$
434

$
459

$
438

Sales inducements deferred
7

20

31

Amortization — Unlock
(82
)
(28
)
(2
)
Amortization charged to income
(34
)
(17
)
(8
)
Balance, end of period
$
325

$
434

$
459

12 . Reserve for Future Policy Benefits and Unpaid Losses and Loss Adjustment Expenses
Property and Casualty Insurance Products Unpaid Losses and Loss Adjustment Expenses
A rollforward of liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses follows:
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
Beginning liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, gross
$
21,550

$
21,025

$
21,651

Reinsurance and other recoverables
3,033

3,077

3,441

Beginning liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, net
18,517

17,948

18,210

Add provision for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses
 

 

 

Current year
7,274

7,420

6,768

Prior years
(4
)
367

(196
)
Total provision for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses
7,270

7,787

6,572

Less payments
 

 

 

Current year
2,882

3,181

2,952

Prior years
4,216

4,037

3,882

Total payments
7,098

7,218

6,834

Ending liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, net
18,689

18,517

17,948

Reinsurance and other recoverables
3,027

3,033

3,077

Ending liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, gross
$
21,716

$
21,550

$
21,025

As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , property and casualty insurance products reserves were discounted by a total of $538 and $542 , respectively. The current accident year benefit from discounting property and casualty insurance products reserves was $48 in 2012 , $58 in 2011 and $46 in 2010 . The slight reduction in discount benefit in 2012 as compared to 2011 is due to a continued reduction in the discount rate, reflecting a lower risk-free rate of return over this period. The growth in discounting benefit in 2011 as compared to 2010 was due to growth in the workers' compensation line of business, tempered by a reduction in the discount rate, reflecting a lower risk-free rate of return over this period. Accretion of discounts for prior accident years totaled $52 in 2012 , $38 in 2011 , and $26 in 2010 . For annuities issued by the Company to fund certain workers’ compensation indemnity payments where the claimant has not released the Company of its obligation, the Company has recorded annuity obligations totaling $834 as of December 31, 2012 and $867 as of December 31, 2011 .
In the opinion of management, based upon the known facts and current law, the reserves recorded for the Company’s property and casualty insurance products at December 31, 2012 represent the Company’s best estimate of its ultimate liability for losses and loss adjustment expenses related to losses covered by policies written by the Company. However, because of the significant uncertainties surrounding reserves, and particularly asbestos and environmental exposures, it is possible that management’s estimate of the ultimate liabilities for these claims may change and that the required adjustment to recorded reserves could exceed the currently recorded reserves by an amount that could be material to the Company’s results of operations, financial condition and liquidity. For a further discussion, see Note 13 .

F-69
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
12. Reserves for Future Policy Benefits and Unpaid Losses and Loss Adjustment Expenses (continued)

Examples of current trends affecting frequency and severity include increases in medical cost inflation rates, the changing use of medical care procedures, the introduction of new products and changes in internal claim practices. Other trends include changes in the legislative and regulatory environment over workers’ compensation claims and evolving exposures to claims relating to molestation or abuse and other mass torts. In the case of the reserves for asbestos exposures, factors contributing to the high degree of uncertainty include inadequate loss development patterns, plaintiffs’ expanding theories of liability, the risks inherent in major litigation, and inconsistent emerging legal doctrines. In the case of the reserves for environmental exposures, factors contributing to the high degree of uncertainty include expanding theories of liabilities and damages, the risks inherent in major litigation, inconsistent decisions concerning the existence and scope of coverage for environmental claims, and uncertainty as to the monetary amount being sought by the claimant from the insured.
The following table presents (favorable) unfavorable prior accident years reserve development:
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
Auto liability
$
(25
)
$
(97
)
$
(169
)
Homeowners
(32
)
(1
)
23

Professional liability
40

29

(88
)
Package business
(20
)
(76
)
(19
)
Workers’ compensation
78

171

(70
)
General liability
(87
)
(40
)
(108
)
Fidelity and surety
(9
)
(7
)
(5
)
Commercial property
(8
)
(4
)
(16
)
Net asbestos reserves
48

294

189

Net environmental reserves
10

26

67

All other non-A&E
—

—

11

Uncollectible reinsurance
—

—

(30
)
Change in workers' compensation discount, including accretion
52

38

26

Catastrophes
(66
)
37

11

Other reserve re-estimates, net
$
15

$
(3
)
$
(18
)
Total prior accident years development
$
(4
)
$
367

$
(196
)
Net favorable reserve development in 2012 primarily included the following:
•
a release of general liability reserves, for accident years 2006 to 2008;
•
a release of catastrophes, primarily related to the 2001 World Trade Center worker's compensation claims;
•
partially offset by a strengthening of reserves for workers’ compensation reserves, for accident years 2009 to 2011; and
•
also offset by a strengthening of asbestos and environmental reserves.
Net unfavorable reserve development in 2011 primarily included the following:
•
a strengthening of reserves for workers’ compensation reserves, for accident years 2008 to 2010;
•
a strengthening of asbestos and environmental reserves;
•
partially offset by a release of auto liability claims for accident years 2006 to 2010; and
•
also offset by a release of package business liability coverages in accident years 2005 to 2009.
Net favorable reserve development in 2010 primarily included the following:
•
a release of reserves for auto liability, claims, for accident years 2002 to 2009;
•
a release of reserves for professional liability claims, for accident years 2004 to 2008;
•
a release of general liability claims, primarily related to accident years 2005 to 2008;
•
a release of workers’ compensation reserves related to accident years 2006 and 2007; and
•
partially offset by a strengthening of asbestos and environmental reserves.

F-70
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
12. Reserves for Future Policy Benefits and Unpaid Losses and Loss Adjustment Expenses (continued)

Life Insurance Products Unpaid Losses and Loss Adjustment Expenses
A rollforward of liabilities, primarily from group disability products, for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses follows:
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
Beginning liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, gross
$
6,547

$
6,388

$
6,131

Reinsurance recoverables
233

209

213

Beginning liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, net
6,314

6,179

5,918

Add provision for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses
 
 
 
Current year
2,989

3,196

3,260

Prior years
52

98

70

Total provision for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses
3,041

3,294

3,330

Less payments
 
 
 
Current year
1,460

1,524

1,552

Prior years
1,600

1,635

1,517

Total payments
3,060

3,159

3,069

Ending liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, net
6,295

6,314

6,179

Reinsurance recoverables
252

233

209

Ending liabilities for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses, gross
$
6,547

$
6,547

$
6,388

The decrease in the provision for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses is due to favorable claim terminations, particularly on long-term disability and group life.
The liability for future policy benefits and unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses is as follows:
 
2012
2011
Group life term, disability and accident unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses
$
6,547

$
6,547

Group life other unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses
206

213

Individual life unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses
173

134

Future policy benefits
12,350

12,572

Future policy benefits and unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses
$
19,276

$
19,466



F-71
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)


13 . Commitments and Contingencies
Contingencies Relating to Corporate Litigation and Regulatory Matters
Management evaluates each contingent matter separately. A loss is recorded if probable and reasonably estimable. Management establishes reserves for these contingencies at its “best estimate,” or, if no one number within the range of possible losses is more probable than any other, the Company records an estimated reserve at the low end of the range of losses.
Litigation
The Hartford is involved in claims litigation arising in the ordinary course of business, both as a liability insurer defending or providing indemnity for third-party claims brought against insureds and as an insurer defending coverage claims brought against it. The Hartford accounts for such activity through the establishment of unpaid loss and loss adjustment expense reserves. Subject to the uncertainties discussed below under the caption “Asbestos and Environmental Claims,” management expects that the ultimate liability, if any, with respect to such ordinary-course claims litigation, after consideration of provisions made for potential losses and costs of defense, will not be material to the consolidated financial condition, results of operations or cash flows of The Hartford.

The Hartford is also involved in other kinds of legal actions, some of which assert claims for substantial amounts. These actions include, among others, and in addition to the matters described below, putative state and federal class actions seeking certification of a state or national class. Such putative class actions have alleged, for example, underpayment of claims or improper underwriting practices in connection with various kinds of insurance policies, such as personal and commercial automobile, property, life and inland marine; improper sales practices in connection with the sale of life insurance and other investment products; and improper fee arrangements in connection with investment products. The Hartford also is involved in individual actions in which punitive damages are sought, such as claims alleging bad faith in the handling of insurance claims. Like many other insurers, The Hartford also has been joined in actions by asbestos plaintiffs asserting, among other things, that insurers had a duty to protect the public from the dangers of asbestos and that insurers committed unfair trade practices by asserting defenses on behalf of their policyholders in the underlying asbestos cases. Management expects that the ultimate liability, if any, with respect to such lawsuits, after consideration of provisions made for estimated losses, will not be material to the consolidated financial condition of The Hartford. Nonetheless, given the large or indeterminate amounts sought in certain of these actions, and the inherent unpredictability of litigation, the outcome in certain matters could, from time to time, have a material adverse effect on the Company's results of operations or cash flows in particular quarterly or annual periods.

Apart from the inherent difficulty of predicting litigation outcomes, the Mutual Funds Litigation identified below purports to seek substantial damages for unsubstantiated conduct spanning a multi-year period based on novel applications of complex legal theories. The alleged damages are not quantified or factually supported in the complaint, and, in any event, the Company's experience shows that demands for damages often bear little relation to a reasonable estimate of potential loss. The matter is in the earliest stages of litigation, with no discovery having been taken and no substantive legal decisions by the court defining the scope of the potentially available damages. Accordingly, management cannot reasonably estimate the possible loss or range of loss, if any, or predict the timing of the eventual resolution of this matter.

Mutual Funds Litigation - In February 2011, a derivative action was brought on behalf of six Hartford retail mutual funds in the United States District Court for the District of New Jersey, alleging that Hartford Investment Financial Services, LLC (“HIFSCO”), an indirect subsidiary of the Company, received excessive advisory and distribution fees in violation of its statutory fiduciary duty under Section 36(b) of the Investment Company Act of 1940.  HIFSCO moved to dismiss and, in September 2011, the motion was granted in part and denied in part, with leave to amend the complaint. In November 2011, plaintiffs filed an amended complaint on behalf of The Hartford Global Health Fund, The Hartford Conservative Allocation Fund, The Hartford Growth Opportunities Fund, The Hartford Inflation Plus Fund, The Hartford Advisors Fund, and The Hartford Capital Appreciation Fund. Plaintiffs seek to rescind the investment management agreements and distribution plans between HIFSCO and these funds and to recover the total fees charged thereunder or, in the alternative, to recover any improper compensation HIFSCO received, in addition to lost earnings. HIFSCO filed a partial motion to dismiss the amended complaint and, in December 2012, the court dismissed without prejudice the claims regarding distribution fees and denied the motion with respect to the advisory fees claims. HIFSCO disputes the allegations and intends to defend vigorously.
  


F-72
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
13. Commitments and Contingencies (continued)

Asbestos and Environmental Claims
The Company continues to receive asbestos and environmental claims. Asbestos claims relate primarily to bodily injuries asserted by people who came in contact with asbestos or products containing asbestos. Environmental claims relate primarily to pollution and related clean-up costs.
The Company wrote several different categories of insurance contracts that may cover asbestos and environmental claims. First, the Company wrote primary policies providing the first layer of coverage in an insured’s liability program. Second, the Company wrote excess policies providing higher layers of coverage for losses that exhaust the limits of underlying coverage. Third, the Company acted as a reinsurer assuming a portion of those risks assumed by other insurers writing primary, excess and reinsurance coverages. Fourth, subsidiaries of the Company participated in the London Market, writing both direct insurance and assumed reinsurance business.
Significant uncertainty limits the ability of insurers and reinsurers to estimate the ultimate reserves necessary for unpaid losses and expenses related to environmental and particularly asbestos claims. The degree of variability of reserve estimates for these exposures is significantly greater than for other more traditional exposures.
In the case of the reserves for asbestos exposures, factors contributing to the high degree of uncertainty include inadequate loss development patterns, plaintiffs’ expanding theories of liability, the risks inherent in major litigation, and inconsistent emerging legal doctrines. Furthermore, over time, insurers, including the Company, have experienced significant changes in the rate at which asbestos claims are brought, the claims experience of particular insureds, and the value of claims, making predictions of future exposure from past experience uncertain. Plaintiffs and insureds also have sought to use bankruptcy proceedings, including “pre-packaged” bankruptcies, to accelerate and increase loss payments by insurers. In addition, some policyholders have asserted new classes of claims for coverages to which an aggregate limit of liability may not apply. Further uncertainties include insolvencies of other carriers and unanticipated developments pertaining to the Company’s ability to recover reinsurance for asbestos and environmental claims. Management believes these issues are not likely to be resolved in the near future.
In the case of the reserves for environmental exposures, factors contributing to the high degree of uncertainty include expanding theories of liability and damages, the risks inherent in major litigation, inconsistent decisions concerning the existence and scope of coverage for environmental claims, and uncertainty as to the monetary amount being sought by the claimant from the insured.
The reporting pattern for assumed reinsurance claims, including those related to asbestos and environmental claims, is much longer than for direct claims. In many instances, it takes months or years to determine that the policyholder’s own obligations have been met and how the reinsurance in question may apply to such claims. The delay in reporting reinsurance claims and exposures adds to the uncertainty of estimating the related reserves.
It is also not possible to predict changes in the legal and legislative environment and their effect on the future development of asbestos and environmental claims.
Given the factors described above, the Company believes the actuarial tools and other techniques it employs to estimate the ultimate cost of claims for more traditional kinds of insurance exposure are less precise in estimating reserves for certain of its asbestos and environmental exposures. For this reason, the Company principally relies on exposure-based analysis to estimate the ultimate costs of these claims and regularly evaluates new account information in assessing its potential asbestos and environmental exposures. The Company supplements this exposure-based analysis with evaluations of the Company’s historical direct net loss and expense paid and reported experience, and net loss and expense paid and reported experience by calendar and/or report year, to assess any emerging trends, fluctuations or characteristics suggested by the aggregate paid and reported activity.
As of December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011 , the Company reported $ 1.8 billion and $ 1.9 billion of net asbestos reserves and $ 297 and $ 328 of net environmental reserves, respectively. The Company believes that its current asbestos and environmental reserves are appropriate. However, analyses of future developments could cause The Hartford to change its estimates and ranges of its asbestos and environmental reserves, and the effect of these changes could be material to the Company’s consolidated operating results, financial condition, and liquidity.


F-73
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
13. Commitments and Contingencies (continued)

Lease Commitments
The total rental expense on operating leases was $ 105 , $ 122 , and $ 132 in 2012 , 2011 , and 2010 , respectively, which excludes sublease rental income of $ 6 , $ 13 , and $ 4 in 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively.
Future minimum lease commitments as of December 31, 2012 are as follows:

Operating Leases
2013
$
61

2014
45

2015
37

2016
30

2017
21

Thereafter
43

Total minimum lease payments [1]
$
237

[1]
Excludes expected future minimum sublease income of approximately $ 4 and $ 2 in 2013 and 2014 , respectively.
The Company’s lease commitments consist primarily of lease agreements for office space, data processing, furniture and fixtures, office equipment, and transportation equipment that expire at various dates. Capital lease assets are included in property and equipment.
Unfunded Commitments
As of December 31, 2012 , the Company has outstanding commitments totaling $598 , of which $562 is committed to fund limited partnership and other alternative investments, which may be called by the partnership during the commitment period (on average 2 to 4 years) to fund the purchase of new investments and partnership expenses. Once the commitment period expires, the Company is under no obligation to fund the remaining unfunded commitment but may elect to do so. Additionally, $30 is largely related to commercial whole loans expected to fund in the first half of 2013. The remaining outstanding commitments are related to various funding obligations associated with private placement securities. These have a commitment period of one month to one year.
Guaranty Fund and Other Insurance-related Assessments
In all states, insurers licensed to transact certain classes of insurance are required to become members of a guaranty fund. In most states, in the event of the insolvency of an insurer writing any such class of insurance in the state, members of the funds are assessed to pay certain claims of the insolvent insurers. A particular state’s fund assesses its members based on their respective written premiums in the state for the classes of insurance in which the insolvent insurer was engaged. Assessments are generally limited for any year to one or two percent of the premiums written per year depending on the state.
The Hartford accounts for guaranty fund and other related assessments in accordance with Accounting Standards Codification 405-30, “Insurance-Related Assessments.” Liabilities for guaranty fund and other insurance-related assessments are accrued when an assessment is probable, when it can be reasonably estimated, and when the event obligating the Company to pay an imposed or probable assessment has occurred. Liabilities for guaranty funds and other insurance-related assessments are not discounted and are included as part of other liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , the liability balance was $160 and $145 respectively. As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , $34 and $31 related to premium tax offsets were included in other assets. In 2011, The Company recognized $22 for expected assessments related to the Executive Life Insurance Company of New York ("ELNY") insolvency.



F-74
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
13. Commitments and Contingencies (continued)

Derivative Commitments
Certain of the Company’s derivative agreements contain provisions that are tied to the financial strength ratings of the individual legal entity that entered into the derivative agreement as set by nationally recognized statistical rating agencies. If the legal entity’s financial strength were to fall below certain ratings, the counterparties to the derivative agreements could demand immediate and ongoing full collateralization and in certain instances demand immediate settlement of all outstanding derivative positions traded under each impacted bilateral agreement. The settlement amount is determined by netting the derivative positions transacted under each agreement. If the termination rights were to be exercised by the counterparties; it could impact the legal entity’s ability to conduct hedging activities by increasing the associated costs and decreasing the willingness of counterparties to transact with the legal entity. The aggregate fair value of all derivative instruments with credit-risk-related contingent features that are in a net liability position as of December 31, 2012 , is $643 . Of this $643 the legal entities have posted collateral of $589 in the normal course of business. Based on derivative market values as of December 31, 2012 , a downgrade of one level below the current financial strength ratings by either Moody’s or S&P could require approximately an additional $37 to be posted as collateral. Based on derivative market values as of December 31, 2012 , a downgrade by either Moody’s or S&P of two levels below the legal entities’ current financial strength ratings could require approximately an additional $57 of assets to be posted as collateral. These collateral amounts could change as derivative market values change, as a result of changes in our hedging activities or to the extent changes in contractual terms are negotiated. The nature of the collateral that we would post, if required, would be primarily in the form of U.S. Treasury bills and U.S. Treasury notes.
On February 5, 2013 Moody's lowered its counterparty credit and insurer financial strength ratings on Hartford Life and Annuity Insurance Company to Baa2. Given this downgrade action, termination rating triggers in seven derivative counterparty relationships were impacted. The Company is in the process of re-negotiating the rating triggers which it expects to successfully complete. Accordingly, the Company does not expect the current hedging programs to be adversely impacted by the announcement of the downgrade of Hartford Life and Annuity Insurance Company. As of December 31, 2012 , the notional amount and fair value related to these counterparties is $18.8 billion and $331 , respectively. These counterparties have the right to terminate these relationships and would have to settle the outstanding derivatives prior to exercising their termination right. Accordingly, as of December 31, 2012 five of these counterparties combined would owe the Company the derivatives fair value of $ 375 and the Company would owe two counterparties combined $ 44 . Of this $ 44 , the legal entities have posted collateral of $ 33 in the normal course of business. The counterparties have not exercised this termination right. The notional and fair value amounts include a customized GMWB derivative with a notional amount of $ 3.9 billion and a fair value of $ 133 , for which the Company has a contractual right to make a collateral payment in the amount of approximately $ 45 to prevent its termination.
14 . Income Taxes
Income (loss) from continuing operations before income taxes included income (loss) from domestic operations of $(1,305) , $481 and $1,998 for 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , and income (loss) from foreign operations of $778 , $(180) and $274 for 2012 , 2011 and 2010 . Substantially all of the income (loss) from foreign operations is earned by a Japanese subsidiary.
The provision (benefit) for income taxes consists of the following:
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
Income Tax Expense (Benefit)
 
 
 
Current - U.S. Federal
$
20

$
(495
)
$
106

- International
6

22

69

Total current
26

(473
)
175

Deferred - U.S. Federal Excluding NOL Carryforward
(377
)
921

93

- Net Operating Loss Carryforward
(301
)
(652
)
1

- International
158

(121
)
303

Total deferred
(520
)
148

397

Total income tax expense (benefit)
$
(494
)
$
(325
)
$
572


F-75
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)


Deferred tax assets (liabilities) include the following:
 
As of December 31,
Deferred Tax Assets
2012
2011
Tax discount on loss reserves
$
621

$
632

Tax basis deferred policy acquisition costs
481

528

Unearned premium reserve and other underwriting related reserves
414

421

Investment-related items
1,525

1,159

Insurance product derivatives
454

913

Employee benefits
599

523

Minimum tax credit
860

868

Net operating loss carryover
1,007

736

Foreign tax credit carryover
149

132

Capital loss carryover
5

—

Other
118

16

Total Deferred Tax Assets
6,233

5,928

Valuation Allowance
(58
)
(83
)
Deferred Tax Assets, Net of Valuation Allowance
6,175

5,845

Deferred Tax Liabilities
 
 
Financial statement deferred policy acquisition costs and reserves
(1,694
)
(2,361
)
Net unrealized gains on investments
(2,396
)
(1,210
)
Other depreciable & amortizable assets
(143
)
(104
)
Other
—

(39
)
Total Deferred Tax Liabilities
(4,233
)
(3,714
)
Net Deferred Tax Asset
$
1,942

$
2,131

As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , the net deferred tax asset included the expected tax benefit attributable to net operating losses of $2,946 and $2,194 , respectively, consisting of U.S. losses of $2,725 and $1,880 , respectively, and foreign losses of $221 and $314 . The U.S. losses expire from 2013-2032 and the foreign losses have no expiration.
The Company has recorded a deferred tax asset valuation allowance that is adequate to reduce the total deferred tax asset to an amount that will be more likely than not realized. The deferred tax asset valuation allowance, relating mostly to foreign net operating losses, was $58 , as of December 31, 2012 and $83 as of December 31, 2011 . In assessing the need for a valuation allowance, management considered future taxable temporary difference reversals, future taxable income exclusive of reversing temporary differences and carryforwards, taxable income in open carry back years, as well as other tax planning strategies. These tax planning strategies include holding a portion of debt securities with market value losses until recovery, altering the level of tax exempt securities, selling appreciated securities to offset capital losses, business considerations such as asset-liability matching, and the sales of certain corporate assets. Management views such tax planning strategies as prudent and feasible, and would implement them, if necessary, to realize the deferred tax asset. Based on the availability of additional tax planning strategies identified in the second quarter of 2011, the Company released $86 , or 100% of the valuation allowance associated with realized capital losses. Future economic conditions and debt market volatility, including increases in interest rates, can adversely impact the Company’s tax planning strategies and in particular the Company’s ability to utilize tax benefits on previously recognized realized capital losses.
Included in Other Liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheets at December 31, 2012 and 2011 are net deferred tax liabilities related to Japan of $376 and $ 352 , respectively.  The December 31, 2012 net deferred tax liability is comprised of a gross deferred tax asset of $274 related to tax discount on loss reserves and a gross deferred tax liability of $650 , comprised primarily of $331 for deferred policy acquisition costs and $197 for foreign currency translation adjustments.  The December 31, 2011 net deferred tax liability is comprised of a gross deferred tax asset of $270 related to tax discount on loss reserves and a gross deferred tax liability of $622 , comprised primarily of $370 for deferred policy acquisition costs and $346 for foreign currency translation adjustments.  The gross and net deferred tax assets and liabilities related to other foreign tax jurisdictions, other than Japan, is not significant.
As of December 31, 2012 the Company had a current income tax receivable of $19 , of which $1 was related to Japan and due from a foreign jurisdiction. As of December 31, 2011 the company had a current income tax payable of $459 , of which $46 was related to Japan and payable to a foreign jurisdiction.

F-76
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
14. Income Tax (continued)

The Company or one or more of its subsidiaries files income tax returns in the U.S. federal jurisdiction, and various state and foreign jurisdictions. The Company is no longer subject to U.S. federal, state and local, or non-U.S. income tax examinations for years prior to 2007. The audit of the years 2007-2009 commenced during 2010 and is expected to conclude by the end of 2013, with no material impact on the consolidated financial condition or results of operations. The 2010-2011 audit commenced in the 4th quarter of 2012 and is expected to conclude by the end of 2014. In addition, in the second quarter of 2011 the Company recorded a tax benefit of $52 as a result of a resolution of a tax matter with the IRS for the computation of the dividends-received deduction (“DRD”) for years 1998, 2000 and 2001. Management believes that adequate provision has been made in the financial statements for any potential assessments that may result from tax examinations and other tax-related matters for all open tax years.
The Company’s unrecognized tax benefits were unchanged during 2012 and 2011, remaining at $48 as of December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010. This entire amount, if it were recognized, would affect the effective tax rate in the period it is released.
The Company classifies interest and penalties (if applicable) as income tax expense in the financial statements. The Company recognized interest income (expense) of $0 , $5 , and $(2) during the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively. The Company had approximately $1 and $6 of interest receivable accrued at December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively. The Company does not believe it would be subject to any penalties in any open tax years and, therefore, has not booked any accrual for penalties.
A reconciliation of the tax provision at the U.S. Federal statutory rate to the provision for income taxes is as follows:
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
Tax provision (benefit) at U.S. Federal statutory rate
$
(184
)
$
105

$
795

Tax-exempt interest
(141
)
(148
)
(152
)
Dividends received deduction
(145
)
(206
)
(154
)
Valuation allowance
(25
)
(82
)
78

Other
1

6

5

Provision (benefit) for income taxes
$
(494
)
$
(325
)
$
572


F-77
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)


15 . Debt
The Hartford’s long-term debt securities are issued by either The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. (“HFSG Holding Company”) or Hartford Life, Inc. (“HLI”), an indirect wholly owned subsidiary, and are unsecured obligations of HFSG Holding Company or HLI and rank on a parity with all other unsecured and unsubordinated indebtedness of HFSG Holding Company or HLI.
On January 31, 2013, the Board of Directors authorized a capital management plan which provides for the repayment of approximately $1.0 billion of debt including repayment of $320 of 4.625% senior notes due in July 2013 and $200 of 4.75% senior notes due in March 2014.
Debt is carried net of discount. Short-term and long-term debt by issuance are as follows:
 
As of December 31,
 
2012
2011
Short-Term Debt
 
 
4.625% Notes, due 2013
$
320

$
—

Long-Term Debt
 

 

Senior Notes and Debentures
 

 

4.625% Notes, due 2013
—

320

4.75% Notes, due 2014
200

200

4.0% Notes, due 2015
300

300

7.3% Notes, due 2015
200

200

5.5% Notes, due 2016
300

300

5.375% Notes, due 2017
499

499

4.0% Notes, due 2017
325

—

6.3% Notes, due 2018
500

500

6.0% Notes, due 2019
500

500

5.5% Notes, due 2020
499

499

5.125% Notes, due 2022
796

—

7.65% Notes, due 2027
149

149

7.375% Notes, due 2031
92

92

5.95% Notes, due 2036
298

298

6.625% Notes, due 2040
299

299

6.1% Notes, due 2041
325

325

6.625% Notes, due 2042
424

—

Total Senior Notes and Debentures
5,706

4,481

Junior Subordinated Debentures
 

 

7.875% Notes, due 2042
600

—

8.125% Notes, due 2068
500

500

10.0% Notes, due 2068
—

1,235

Total Junior Subordinated Debentures
1,100

1,735

Total Long-Term Debt
$
6,806

$
6,216

The effective interest rate on the 6.1% senior notes due 2041 is 7.9% . The effective interest rate on the 10.0% junior subordinated debentures due 2068 was 15.3% . The effective interest rate on the remaining notes does not differ materially from the stated rate.
Interest Expense
Interest expense incurred is as follows:
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
Long-term debt
$
457

$
508

$
508

Total interest expense
$
457

$
508

$
508


F-78
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
15. Debt (continued)

Collateralized Advances
Hartford Life Insurance Company (“HLIC”), an indirect wholly owned subsidiary, became a member of the Federal Home Loan Bank of Boston (“FHLBB”) in May 2011. Membership allows HLIC access to collateralized advances, which may be used to support various spread-based business and enhance liquidity management. The Connecticut Department of Insurance (“CTDOI”) will permit HLIC to pledge up to $1.25 billion in qualifying assets to secure FHLBB advances for 2013 . The amount of advances that can be taken are dependent on the asset types pledged to secure the advances. The pledge limit is recalculated annually based on statutory admitted assets and capital and surplus. HLIC would need to seek the prior approval of the CTDOI if there were a desire to exceed these limits. As of December 31, 2012 , HLIC had no advances outstanding under the FHLBB facility.
Senior Notes
On April 5, 2012, the Company issued $1.55 billion aggregate principal amount of senior notes. The issuance consisted of $325 of 4% senior notes due 2017, $800 of 5.125% senior notes due 2022 and $425 of 6.625% senior notes due 2042 (collectively, the “Senior Notes”) for net proceeds of approximately $1.5 billion , after deducting underwriting discounts and offering expenses. The Senior Notes bear interest at their respective rate, payable semi-annually in arrears on April 15 and October 15 of each year, and began on October 15, 2012.
Junior Subordinated Debentures
On April 17, 2012, the Company (i) repurchased all outstanding 10% fixed-to-floating rate junior subordinated debentures due 2068 with a $1.75 billion aggregate principal amount held by Allianz SE (“Allianz”) (the “10% Debentures”) for $2.125 billion (plus a payment by the Company of unpaid interest on the 10% Debentures) and (ii) settled the repurchase of the Series B and Series C warrants held by Allianz to purchase shares of the Company’s common stock, see Note 16 . In addition, the 10% Debentures replacement capital covenant (the “10% Debentures RCC”) was terminated on April 12, 2012 with the consent of the holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the Company’s outstanding 6.1% senior notes due 2041. Upon closing, the Company recognized a loss on extinguishment in the second quarter of 2012 of $587 , after-tax, representing the premium associated with repurchasing the 10% Debentures at an amount greater than the face amount, the write-off of the unamortized discount and debt issuance costs related to the 10% Debentures and other costs related to the repurchase transaction. On April 5, 2012, the Company issued $600 aggregate principal amount of 7.875% fixed-to-floating rate junior subordinated debentures due 2042 (the “Debentures”) for net proceeds of approximately $586 , after deducting underwriting discounts and offering expenses. The Company financed the repurchase of the 10% Debentures through the issuance of the Senior Notes and the Debentures.
The Debentures bear interest from the date of issuance to but excluding April 15, 2022 at an annual rate of 7.875% , payable quarterly in arrears on January 15, April 15, July 15 and October 15 of each year to and including April 15, 2022. Commencing on April 15, 2022 the Debentures bear interest at an annual rate equal to three-month LIBOR, reset quarterly, plus 5.596% , payable quarterly in arrears on January 15, April 15, July 15 and October 15 of each year, commencing on July 15, 2022. The Company has the right, on one or more occasions, to defer the payment of interest on the Debentures. The Company may defer interest for up to ten consecutive years without giving rise to an event of default. Deferred interest will accumulate additional interest at an annual rate equal to the annual interest rate then applicable to the Debentures. If the Company defers interest payments on the Debentures, the Company generally may not make payments on or redeem or purchase any shares of its capital stock or any of its debt securities or guarantees that rank upon liquidation, dissolution or winding up equally with or junior to the Debentures, subject to certain limited exceptions.
The Company may elect to redeem the Debentures in whole at any time or in part from time to time on or after April 15, 2022, at a redemption price equal to the principal amount of the Debentures being redeemed plus accrued and unpaid interest to but excluding the date of redemption. If the Debentures are not redeemed in whole, at least $25 aggregate principal amount of the Debentures must remain outstanding after giving effect to such redemption. The Debentures may be redeemed in whole at any time prior to April 15, 2022, within 90 days of the occurrence of a tax event or rating agency event, at a redemption price equal to the greater of (i) the principal amount of the Debentures being redeemed, or (ii) the present value of the (a) outstanding principal and (b) remaining scheduled payments of interest that would have been payable from the redemption date to and including April 15, 2022 on the Debentures to be redeemed (not including any portion of such payments of interest accrued and unpaid to but excluding the redemption date), discounted from their respective interest payment dates to but excluding the redemption date at a discount rate equal to the Treasury Rate plus a spread of 0.7% , in each case, plus accrued and unpaid interest to but excluding the redemption date.
The Debentures are unsecured, subordinated and junior in right of payment and upon liquidation to all of the Company’s existing and future senior indebtedness. In addition, the Debentures are effectively subordinated to all of the Company’s subsidiaries’ existing and future indebtedness and other liabilities, including obligations to policyholders. The Debentures do not limit the Company’s or the Company’s subsidiaries’ ability to incur additional debt, including debt that ranks senior in right of payment and upon liquidation to the Debentures.

F-79
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
15. Debt (continued)

The Debentures rank equally in right of payment and upon liquidation with (i) any indebtedness the terms of which provide that such indebtedness ranks equally with the Debentures, including guarantees of such indebtedness, (ii) the Company’s existing 8.125% fixed-to-floating rate junior subordinated debentures due 2068 (the “ 8.125% Debentures”), (iii) the Company’s Income Capital Obligation Notes due 2067, issuable pursuant to the Junior Subordinated Indenture, dated as of February 12, 2007, between us and Wilmington Trust Company (the “ICON securities”), (iv) our trade accounts payable, and (v) any of our indebtedness owed to a person who is our subsidiary or employee.
Long-Term Debt Maturities
Long-term debt maturities as of December 31, 2012 are summarized as follows:
2013
$
320

2014
200

2015
500

2016
300

2017
825

Thereafter
5,075

Shelf Registrations
On August 4, 2010, The Hartford filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) an automatic shelf registration statement (Registration No. 333-168532) for the potential offering and sale of debt and equity securities. The registration statement allows for the following types of securities to be offered: debt securities, junior subordinated debt securities, preferred stock, common stock, depositary shares, warrants, stock purchase contracts, and stock purchase units. In that The Hartford is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 under the Securities Act of 1933, the registration statement went effective immediately upon filing and The Hartford may offer and sell an unlimited amount of securities under the registration statement during the three-year life of the registration statement.
Contingent Capital Facility
The Hartford is party to a put option agreement that provides The Hartford with the right to require the Glen Meadow ABC Trust, a Delaware statutory trust, at any time and from time to time, to purchase The Hartford’s junior subordinated notes in a maximum aggregate principal amount not to exceed $500 . Under the Put Option Agreement, The Hartford will pay the Glen Meadow ABC Trust premiums on a periodic basis, calculated with respect to the aggregate principal amount of notes that The Hartford had the right to put to the Glen Meadow ABC Trust for such period. The Hartford has agreed to reimburse the Glen Meadow ABC Trust for certain fees and ordinary expenses. The Company holds a variable interest in the Glen Meadow ABC Trust where the Company is not the primary beneficiary. As a result, the Company did not consolidate the Glen Meadow ABC Trust. As of December 31, 2012 , The Hartford has not exercised its right to require Glen Meadow ABC Trust to purchase the notes. As a result, the notes remain a source of capital for the HFSG Holding Company.
Commercial Paper and Revolving Credit Facility
The table below details the Company’s short-term debt programs and the applicable balances outstanding.
 
Effective Date
Expiration Date
Maximum Available December 31,
Outstanding
December 31,
Description
2012
2011
2012
2011
Commercial Paper
 
 
 
 
 
 
The Hartford
11/10/1986
N/A
$
2,000

$
2,000

$
—

$
—

Revolving Credit Facility
 
 
 

 

 

 

4-year revolving credit facility
1/6/2012
1/6/2016
1,750

—

—

—

5-year revolving credit facility [1]
8/9/2007
8/9/2012
—

1,900

—

—

Total Commercial Paper and Revolving Credit Facility
 
 
$
3,750

$
3,900

$
—

$
—

[1] Terminated in January 2012.
While the Company’s maximum borrowings available under its commercial paper program are $ 2.0 billion , the Company is dependent upon market conditions to access short-term financing through the issuance of commercial paper to investors. As of December 31, 2012 , the Company has no commercial paper outstanding.

F-80
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
15. Debt (continued)

In January 2012 , the Company entered into a senior unsecured revolving credit facility (the “Credit Facility”) that provides for borrowing capacity up to $1.75 billion (which is available in U.S. dollars, and in Euro, Sterling, Canadian dollars and Japanese Yen) through January 6, 2016. Of the total availability under the Credit Facility, up to $250 is available to support letters of credit issued on behalf of the Company or subsidiaries of the Company. Under the Credit Facility, the Company must maintain a minimum level of consolidated net worth of $14.9 billion . The definition of consolidated net worth under the terms of the Credit Facility, excludes AOCI and includes the Company’s outstanding junior subordinated debentures and perpetual preferred securities, net of discount. In addition, the Company’s maximum ratio of consolidated total debt to consolidated total capitalization is 35% , and the ratio of consolidated total debt of subsidiaries to consolidated total capitalization is limited to 10% . As of December 31, 2012 , the Company was in compliance with all financial covenants under the Credit Facility.
The Hartford’s Japan operations also maintain two lines of credit in support of operations. Both lines of credit are in the amount of approximately $60 , or ¥5 billion , and individually have expiration dates of September 30, 2013 and January 6, 2014.
Consumer Notes
The Company issued consumer notes through its Retail Investor Notes Program prior to 2009. A consumer note is an investment product distributed through broker-dealers directly to retail investors as medium-term, publicly traded fixed or floating rate, or a combination of fixed and floating rate, notes. Consumer notes are part of the Company’s spread-based business and proceeds are used to purchase investment products, primarily fixed rate bonds. Proceeds are not used for general operating purposes. Consumer notes maturities may extend up to 30 years and have contractual coupons based upon varying interest rates or indexes (e.g. consumer price index) and may include a call provision that allows the Company to extinguish the notes prior to its scheduled maturity date. Certain Consumer notes may be redeemed by the holder in the event of death. Redemptions are subject to certain limitations, including calendar year aggregate and individual limits. The aggregate limit is equal to the greater of $1 or 1% of the aggregate principal amount of the notes as of the end of the prior year. The individual limit is $250 thousand per individual. Derivative instruments are utilized to hedge the Company’s exposure to market risks in accordance with Company policy. As of December 31, 2012 , these consumer notes have interest rates ranging from 4% to 6% for fixed notes and, for variable notes, based on December 31, 2012 rates, either consumer price index plus 100 to 260 basis points, or indexed to the S&P 500, Dow Jones Industrials, foreign currency, or the Nikkei 225. The aggregate maturities of Consumer Notes are as follows: $78 in 2013 , $13 in 2014 , $30 in 2015 , $18 in 2016 , $12 in 2017 and $8 thereafter. For 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , interest credited to holders of consumer notes was $10 , $15 , and $25 , respectively.
16 . Equity
Issuance of Common Stock
On March 23, 2010, The Hartford issued approximately 59.6  million shares of common stock at a price to the public of $27.75 per share and received net proceeds of $1.6 billion .
Issuance of Series F Preferred Stock
On March 23, 2010, The Hartford issued 23 million depositary shares, each representing a 1/40th interest in The Hartford’s 7.25% mandatory convertible preferred stock, Series F, at a price of $25 per depositary share and received net proceeds of approximately $556 . The Company will pay cumulative dividends on each share of the mandatory convertible preferred stock at a rate of 7.25% per annum on the initial liquidation preference of $1,000 per share. Dividends will accrue and cumulate from the date of issuance and, to the extent that the Company is legally permitted to pay dividends and its board of directors declares a dividend payable, the Company will, from July 1, 2010 until and including January 1, 2013 pay dividends on each January 1, April 1, July 1 and October 1, in cash and (whether or not declared prior to that date) on April 1, 2013 will pay or deliver, as the case may be, dividends in cash, shares of its common stock, or a combination thereof, at its election. Dividends on and repurchases of the Company’s common stock will be subject to restrictions in the event that the Company fails to declare and pay, or set aside for payment, dividends on the Series F preferred stock.
The 575,000 shares of mandatory convertible preferred stock, Series F, will automatically convert into shares of common stock on April 1, 2013, if not earlier converted at the option of the holder, at any time, or upon the occurrence of a fundamental change. The number of shares issuable upon mandatory conversion of each share of mandatory convertible preferred stock will be a variable amount based on the average of the daily volume weighted average price per share of the Company’s common stock during a specified period of 20 consecutive trading days with the number of shares of common stock ranging from 29.536 to 36.036 per share of mandatory convertible preferred stock, subject to anti-dilution adjustments.
The declaration of a quarterly common stock dividend in the first quarter of 2012 triggered a provision in The Hartford's Fixed Conversion Rate Agreement resulting in an adjustment to the minimum conversion rate to 29.8831 from 29.536 shares and the maximum conversion rate to 36.4596 from 36.036 shares of Common Stock per share of Series F Preferred Stock.


F-81
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
16. Equity (continued)

Allianz SE Warrants
In connection with the Company’s October 17, 2008 investment agreement with Allianz SE, Allianz was issued warrants, with an initial term of seven years , to purchase the Company’s Series B Non-Voting Contingent Convertible Preferred Stock and Series C Non-Voting Contingent Convertible Preferred Stock, structured to entitle Allianz, upon receipt of necessary approvals, to purchase 69,115,324 shares of common stock at an initial exercise price of $25.32 per share.
The warrants were immediately exercisable, pending the receipt of specified regulatory approvals, for the Series B Preferred Stock, which were initially convertible, in the aggregate, into 34,806,452 shares of common stock.
In addition to the receipt of specified regulatory approvals, the conversion into 34,308,872 shares of common stock of the Series C Preferred Stock underlying certain of the warrants was subject to the approval of the Company’s stockholders in accordance with applicable regulations of the New York Stock Exchange. Under the investment agreement, the Company was obligated to pay a cash payment to Allianz if such stockholder approval was not obtained at the first or second stockholder meetings to consider such approval. Because the conversion of the Series C Preferred Stock was subject to stockholder approval and the related payment provision represents a form of net cash settlement outside the Company’s control, the warrants to purchase the Series C Preferred Stock and the stockholder approval payment were recorded as a derivative liability at issuance.
On March 26, 2009, the Company’s shareholders approved the conversion of the Series C Preferred Stock. As a result of this shareholder approval, the Company was not obligated to pay Allianz any cash payment related to these warrants and therefore these warrants no longer provide for any form of net cash settlement outside the Company’s control. As such, the warrants to purchase the Series C Preferred Stock were reclassified from other liabilities to equity at their fair value. As of March 26, 2009, the fair value of these warrants was $93 . For the year ended December 31, 2009, the Company recognized a gain of $70 , representing the change in fair value of the warrants through March 26, 2009.
The discretionary equity issuance program that the Company announced on June12, 2009 triggered an anti-dilution provision in the investment agreement with Allianz, which resulted in an adjustment of the warrant exercise price to $25.25 from 25.32 and to the number of shares that may be purchased to 69,314,987 from 69,115,324 . The exercise price under the warrants is subject to adjustment in certain circumstances.
The issuance of warrants to the U.S. Department of the Treasury triggered a contingency payment in the investment agreement related to additional investors. Upon receipt of preliminary approval to participate in the Capital Purchase Program, The Hartford negotiated with Allianz to modify the form of the contingency payment. The settlement of the contingency payment was negotiated to allow Allianz a one-time extension of the exercise period of its outstanding warrants from seven to ten years and a $200 cash payment on October 15, 2009. The Hartford recorded a liability for the cash payment and an adjustment to additional paid-in capital for the warrant modification resulting in a net realized capital loss of approximately $300 for the year ended December 31, 2009.
Additionally, the issuance of common and preferred stock during the first quarter of 2010 triggered an anti-dilution provision in investment agreement with Allianz, which resulted in an adjustment to the warrant exercise price to $25.23 from $25.25 and to the number of shares that may be purchased to 69,351,806 from 69,314,987 .
On March 30, 2012 the Company repurchased all of the outstanding Series B and Series C warrants held by Allianz for $300 . These warrants authorized Allianz to purchase 69,351,806 shares of the Company’s common stock at an exercise price of $25.23 per share. The repurchase was settled on April 17, 2012.

F-82
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
16. Equity (continued)

The Company’s Participation in the Capital Purchase Program
On June 26, 2009, as part of the Capital Purchase Program (“CPP”) established by the U.S. Department of the Treasury (“Treasury”) under the Emergency Economic Stabilization Act of 2008 (the “EESA”), the Company entered into a Private Placement Purchase Agreement with Treasury pursuant to which the Company issued and sold to Treasury 3,400,000 shares of the Company’s Fixed Rate Cumulative Perpetual Preferred Stock, Series E, having a liquidation preference of $1,000 per share (the “Series E Preferred Stock”), and a ten -year warrant to purchase up to 52,093,973 shares of the Company’s common stock, par value $0.01 per share, at an exercise price of $9.79 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $3.4 billion .
Cumulative dividends on the Series E Preferred Stock accrued on the liquidation preference at a rate of 5% per annum. The Series E Preferred Stock had no maturity date and ranked senior to the Company’s common stock. The Series E Preferred Stock was non-voting.
Upon issuance, the fair values of the Series E Preferred Stock and the associated warrants were computed as if the instruments were issued on a stand alone basis. The fair value of the Series E Preferred stock was estimated based on a five -year holding period and cash flows discounted at a rate of 13% resulting in a fair value estimate of approximately $2.5 billion . The Company used a Black-Scholes options pricing model including an adjustment for American-style options to estimate the fair value of the warrants, resulting in a stand alone fair value of approximately $400 . The most significant and unobservable assumption in this valuation was the Company’s share price volatility. The Company used a long-term realized volatility of the Company’s stock of 62% . In addition, the Company assumed a dividend yield of 1.72% .
The individual fair values were then used to record the Preferred Stock and associated warrants on a relative fair value basis of $2.9 billion  and $480 , respectively. The warrants of $480 were recorded to additional paid-in capital as permanent equity. The preferred stock amount was recorded at the liquidation value of $1,000 per share or $3.4 billion  , net of discount of $480 . The discount was amortized from the date of issuance, using the effective yield method and recorded as a direct reduction to retained earnings and deducted from income available to common stockholders in the calculation of earnings per share. The amortization of discount totaled $40 for the year ended December 31, 2009.
On March 31, 2010, the Company repurchased all 3.4 million shares of Series E preferred stock issued to the Treasury for an aggregate purchase price of $3.4 billion  and made a final dividend payment of $22 on the Series E preferred stock. The Company recorded a $440 charge to retained earnings representing the acceleration of the accretion of the remaining discount on the Series E preferred stock.
On September 27, 2010, the Treasury sold its warrants to purchase approximately 52 million shares of The Hartford’s common stock in a secondary public offering for net proceeds of approximately $706 . The Hartford did not receive any proceeds from this sale. The warrants are exercisable, in whole or in part, at any time and from time to time until June 26, 2019 at an initial exercise price of $9.79 . The exercise price will be paid by the withholding by The Hartford of a number of shares of common stock issuable upon exercise of the warrants equal to the value of the aggregate exercise price of the warrants so exercised determined by reference to the closing price of The Hartford’s common stock on the trading day on which the warrants are exercised and notice is delivered to the warrant agent. The Hartford did not purchase any of the warrants sold by the Treasury.
Subsequently, the declaration of common stock dividends of $0.40 per share during each of the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 triggered a provision in The Hartford’s Warrant Agreement with The Bank of New York Mellon, resulting in adjustments to the warrant exercise price. The warrant exercise price was $9.599 and $9.699 at December 31, 2012 and 2011, respectively.
Stock Repurchase Program
During the year ended December 31, 2012, the Company completed a $500 equity repurchase program authorized on July 27, 2011 by the Board of Directors that permitted for purchases of common stock, as well as warrants and other derivative securities. In addition to repurchases that occurred in 2011, the repurchases in 2012 included 8.0 million common shares for $149 , and the repurchase of all outstanding Series B and Series C warrants held by Allianz for $300 .
On January 31, 2013, the Board of Directors authorized a capital management plan which provides for a $500 equity repurchase program to be completed by December 31, 2014.
Noncontrolling Interests
Noncontrolling interest includes VIEs in which the Company has concluded that it is the primary beneficiary, see Note 6 for further discussion of the Company’s involvement in VIEs, and general account mutual funds where the Company holds the majority interest due to seed money investments.
In 2010, the Company recognized the noncontrolling interest in these entities in other liabilities since these entities represent investment vehicles whereby the noncontrolling interests may redeem these investments at any time.


F-83
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
16. Equity (continued)

Statutory Results
The domestic insurance subsidiaries of The Hartford prepare their statutory financial statements in conformity with statutory accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the applicable state insurance department which vary materially from U.S. GAAP. Prescribed statutory accounting practices include publications of the National Association of Insurance Commissioners (“NAIC”), as well as state laws, regulations and general administrative rules. The differences between statutory financial statements and financial statements prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP vary between domestic and foreign jurisdictions. The principal differences are that statutory financial statements do not reflect deferred policy acquisition costs and limit deferred income taxes, life benefit reserves predominately use interest rate and mortality assumptions prescribed by the NAIC, bonds are generally carried at amortized cost and reinsurance assets and liabilities are presented net of reinsurance.
The statutory net income (loss) and surplus was as follows:
 
For the years ended December 31,
Statutory Net Income (Loss)
2012
2011
2010
U.S. life insurance subsidiaries, includes domestic captive insurance subsidiaries
$
592

$
(1,272
)
$
(140
)
Property and casualty insurance subsidiaries
883

514

1,477

Total
$
1,475

$
(758
)
$
1,337

 
As of December 31,
Statutory Surplus
2012
2011
U.S. life insurance subsidiaries, includes domestic captive insurance subsidiaries
$
6,410

$
7,388

Property and casualty insurance subsidiaries
7,645

7,412

Total
$
14,055

$
14,800

The Company also holds regulatory capital and surplus for its operations in Japan. Under the accounting practices and procedures governed by Japanese regulatory authorities, the Company’s statutory capital and surplus was $1.1 billion and $1.3 billion , as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively.
Regulatory Capital Requirements
The Hartford's U.S. insurance companies' states of domicile impose risk-based capital (“RBC”) requirements. The requirements provide a means of measuring the minimum amount of statutory surplus appropriate for an insurance company to support its overall business operations based on its size and risk profile. Regulatory compliance is determined by a ratio of a company's total adjusted capital (“TAC”) to its authorized control level RBC (“ACL RBC”). Companies below specific trigger points or ratios are classified within certain levels, each of which requires specified corrective action. The minimum level of TAC before corrective action commences is two times the ACL RBC (“Company Action Level”). The adequacy of a company's capital is determined by the ratio of a company's TAC to its Company Action Level (known as the RBC ratio). All of The Hartford's operating insurance subsidiaries had RBC ratios in excess of the minimum levels required by the applicable insurance regulations.
Similar to the RBC ratios that are employed by U.S. insurance regulators, regulatory authorities in the international jurisdictions in which The Hartford operates generally establish minimum solvency requirements for insurance companies. All of The Hartford's international insurance subsidiaries have solvency margins in excess of the minimum levels required by the applicable regulatory authorities.

F-84
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
16. Equity (continued)

Dividend Restrictions
Dividends to the HFSG Holding Company from its insurance subsidiaries are restricted. The payment of dividends by Connecticut-domiciled insurers is limited under the insurance holding company laws of Connecticut. These laws require notice to and approval by the state insurance commissioner for the declaration or payment of any dividend, which, together with other dividends or distributions made within the preceding twelve months, exceeds the greater of (i)  10% of the insurer’s policyholder surplus as of December 31 of the preceding year or (ii) net income (or net gain from operations, if such company is a life insurance company) for the twelve-month period ending on the thirty-first day of December last preceding, in each case determined under statutory insurance accounting principles. In addition, if any dividend of a Connecticut-domiciled insurer exceeds the insurer’s earned surplus, it requires the prior approval of the Connecticut Insurance Commissioner. The insurance holding company laws of the other jurisdictions in which The Hartford’s insurance subsidiaries are incorporated (or deemed commercially domiciled) generally contain similar (although in certain instances somewhat more restrictive) limitations on the payment of dividends. Dividends paid to HFSG Holding Company by its life insurance subsidiaries are further dependent on cash requirements of HLI and other factors. The Company’s property-casualty insurance subsidiaries are permitted to pay up to a maximum of approximately $1.4 billion in dividends to HFSG Holding Company in 2013 without prior approval from the applicable insurance commissioner. The life insurance subsidiaries' dividend limitation under the holding company laws of Connecticut is $577 in 2013. However, because the life insurance subsidiaries' earned surplus is negative as of December 31, 2012, the life insurance subsidiaries will not be permitted to pay any dividends in 2013 without prior approval from the Connecticut Insurance Commissioner. In addition to statutory limitations on paying dividends, the Company also takes other items into consideration when determining dividends from subsidiaries. These considerations include, but are not limited to expected earnings and capitalization of the subsidiary, regulatory capital requirements and liquidity requirements of the individual operating company. In 2013 , HFSG Holding Company anticipates receiving approximately $800 in dividends from its property-casualty insurance subsidiaries, net of dividends to fund interest payments on an intercompany note between Hartford Holdings, Inc. and Hartford Fire Insurance Company, and no regular dividends from the life insurance subsidiaries. On February 5, 2013 the Company received approval from the State of Connecticut Insurance Department for a $1.2 billion extraordinary dividend from its Connecticut domiciled life insurance subsidiaries. This dividend was paid on February 22, 2013. In 2012 , HFSG Holding Company and HLI received no dividends from the life insurance subsidiaries, and HFSG Holding Company received $1.0 billion in dividends from its property-casualty insurance subsidiaries. The amount received from its property-casualty insurance subsidiaries included $156 related to funding interest payments on an intercompany note between Hartford Holdings Inc. and Hartford Fire Insurance Company and $841 used in conjunction with other resources at the HFSG Holding Company principally to fund dividends, interest, capital contributions to subsidiaries and debt maturities.
There are no current restrictions on the HFSG Holding Company's ability to pay dividends to its shareholders.
Restricted Net Assets
The Company's insurance subsidiaries had net assets of $24 billion , determined in accordance with U.S. GAAP, that were restricted from payment to the HFSG Holding Company, without prior regulatory approval at December 31, 2012 .

F-85
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)


17 . Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income (Loss), Net of Tax
The components of AOCI were as follows:
 
Unrealized
Gain (Loss)
on Securities
Net Gain on
Cash-Flow
Hedging
Instruments
Foreign
Currency
Translation
Adjustments
Pension and
Other
Postretirement
Plan
Adjustment
Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income (Loss)
For the year ended December 31, 2012
 

 

 

 

 

Balance, beginning of year
$
1,412

$
516

$
574

$
(1,251
)
$
1,251

Unrealized gain on securities [1] [2]
1,907

—

—

—

1,907

Change in other-than-temporary impairment losses recognized in other comprehensive income [1]
52

—

—

—

52

Change in net gain on cash-flow hedging instruments [1] [3]
—

(88
)
—

—

(88
)
Change in foreign currency translation adjustments [1]
—

—

(168
)
—

(168
)
Change in pension and other postretirement plan adjustment [1]
—

—

—

(111
)
(111
)
Balance, end of year
$
3,371

$
428

$
406

$
(1,362
)
$
2,843

For the year ended December 31, 2011
 
 
 
 
 
Balance, beginning of year
$
(664
)
$
385

$
467

$
(1,178
)
$
(990
)
Unrealized gain on securities [1] [2]
2,067

—

—

—

2,067

Change in other-than-temporary impairment losses recognized in other comprehensive income [1]
9

—

—

—

9

Cumulative effect of accounting change
—

—

—

—

—

Change in net gain on cash-flow hedging instruments [1] [3]
—

131

—

—

131

Change in foreign currency translation adjustments [1]
—

—

107

—

107

Change in pension and other postretirement plan adjustment [1]
—

—

—

(73
)
(73
)
Balance, end of year
$
1,412

$
516

$
574

$
(1,251
)
$
1,251

For the year ended December 31, 2010
 
 
 
 
 
Balance, beginning of year
$
(2,866
)
$
257

$
192

$
(1,055
)
$
(3,472
)
Unrealized gain on securities [1] [2]
1,889

—

—

—

1,889

Change in other-than-temporary impairment losses recognized in other comprehensive income [1]
116

—

—

—

116

Cumulative effect of accounting change
197

—

—

—

197

Change in net gain on cash-flow hedging instruments [1] [3]
—

128

—

—

128

Change in foreign currency translation adjustments [1]
—

—

275

—

275

Change in pension and other postretirement plan adjustment [1]
—

—

—

(123
)
(123
)
Balance, end of year
$
(664
)
$
385

$
467

$
(1,178
)
$
(990
)
[1]
Included in the unrealized gain (loss) balance as of December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 was net unrealized gains (losses) credited to policyholders of $(20) , $(65) , and $(87) , respectively. Included in the AOCI components were the following:
•
Unrealized gain (loss) on securities is net of tax and deferred acquisition costs of $1,600 , $1,126 , and $3,407 , for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively.
•
Change in other-than-temporary impairment losses recognized in other comprehensive income is net of changes in the fair value of non-credit impaired securities of $147 , $112 and $647 for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively, and net of tax and deferred acquisition costs of $(55) , $(14) and $(113) for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively.
•
Net gain (loss) on cash-flow hedging instruments is net of tax of $(47) , $71 , and $69 for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively.
•
Changes in foreign currency translation adjustments are net of tax of $(90) , $58 and $148 for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively.
•
Change in pension and other postretirement plan adjustment is net of tax of $(60) , $(39) , and $(66) for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively.
[2]
Net of reclassification adjustment for gains (losses) realized in net income of $57 , $88 , and $(78) for the years ended for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively.
[3]
Net of amortization adjustment of $139 , $125 , and $94 to net investment income for the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively.

F-86
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)


18 . Employee Benefit Plans
The Company maintains The Hartford Retirement Plan for U.S. Employees, a U.S. qualified defined benefit pension (the “Plan”) that covers substantially all U.S. employees hired prior to January 1, 2013. Effective for all employees who joined the Company on or after January 1, 2001, a new component or formula was applied under the Plan referred to as the “cash balance formula”. The Company began using the cash balance formula to calculate future pension benefits for services rendered on or after January 1, 2009 for all employees hired before January 1, 2001. These amounts are in addition to amounts earned by those employees through December 31, 2008 under the traditional final average pay formula.
The Company also maintains non-qualified pension plans to accrue retirement benefits in excess of Internal Revenue Code limitations.
Effective December 31, 2012, the Company amended the Plan to freeze participation and benefit accruals. As a result, employees will not accrue further benefits under the cash balance formula of the plan, although interest will continue to accrue to existing account balances. Compensation earned by employees up to December 31, 2012 will be used for purposes of calculating benefits under the Plan but there will be no future benefit accruals after that date. Participants as of December 31, 2012 will continue to earn vesting credit with respect to their frozen accrued benefits as they continue to work. The freeze also applies to The Hartford Excess Pension Plan II, the Company's non-qualified excess benefit plan for certain highly compensated employees, effective December 31, 2012. The Company announced these changes in April 2012.
The Company provides certain health care and life insurance benefits for eligible retired employees. The Company’s contribution for health care benefits will depend upon the retiree’s date of retirement and years of service. In addition, the plan has a defined dollar cap for certain retirees which limits average Company contributions. The Hartford has prefunded a portion of the health care obligations through a trust fund where such prefunding can be accomplished on a tax effective basis. Effective January 1, 2002, Company-subsidized retiree medical, retiree dental and retiree life insurance benefits were eliminated for employees with original hire dates with the Company on or after January 1, 2002.
The Company also amended its postretirement medical, dental and life insurance coverage plans for all current employees to no longer provide subsidized coverage for current employees who retire on or after January 1, 2014. The Company announced these changes in April 2012.
Assumptions
Pursuant to accounting principles related to the Company’s pension and other postretirement obligations to employees under its various benefit plans, the Company is required to make a significant number of assumptions in order to calculate the related liabilities and expenses each period. The two economic assumptions that have the most impact on pension and other postretirement expense are the discount rate and the expected long-term rate of return on plan assets. In determining the discount rate assumption, the Company utilizes a discounted cash flow analysis of the Company’s pension and other postretirement obligations and currently available market and industry data. The yield curve utilized in the cash flow analysis is comprised of bonds rated Aa or higher with maturities primarily between zero and thirty years. Based on all available information, it was determined that 4.00% and 3.50% were the appropriate discount rates as of December 31, 2012 to calculate the Company’s pension and other postretirement obligations, respectively. Accordingly, the 4.00% and 3.50% discount rates will also be used to determine the Company’s 2013 pension and other postretirement expense, respectively.
The Company determines the expected long-term rate of return assumption based on an analysis of the Plan portfolio’s historical compound rates of return since 1979 (the earliest date for which comparable portfolio data is available) and over 5 year and 10 year periods. The Company selected these periods, as well as shorter durations, to assess the portfolio’s volatility, duration and total returns as they relate to pension obligation characteristics, which are influenced by the Company’s workforce demographics. In addition, the Company also applies long-term market return assumptions to an investment mix that generally anticipates 60% fixed income securities, 20% equity securities and 20% alternative assets to derive an expected long-term rate of return. Based upon these analyses, management reduced the long-term rate of return assumption to 7.10% to determine the Company's 2013 expense. Management maintained the long-term rate of return assumption at 7.30% as of December 31, 2012 .
Weighted average assumptions used in calculating the benefit obligations and the net amount recognized as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 were as follows:
 
Pension Benefits
Other Postretirement Benefits
 
2012
2011
2012
2011
Discount rate
4.00
%
4.75
%
3.50
%
4.50
%
Rate of increase in compensation levels
3.75
%
3.75
%
N/A

 N/A


F-87
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
18. Employee Benefit Plans (continued)

Weighted average assumptions used in calculating the net periodic benefit cost for the Company’s pension plans were as follows:
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
Discount rate
4.50
%
5.50
%
6.00
%
Expected long-term rate of return on plan assets
7.30
%
7.30
%
7.30
%
Rate of increase in compensation levels
3.75
%
4.00
%
4.00
%
Weighted average assumptions used in calculating the net periodic benefit cost for the Company’s other postretirement plans were as follows:
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
Discount rate
4.00
%
5.25
%
5.75
%
Expected long-term rate of return on plan assets
7.30
%
7.30
%
7.30
%
Assumed health care cost trend rates were as follows:
 
As of December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
Pre-65 health care cost trend rate
8.45
%
8.95
%
9.70
%
Post-65 health care cost trend rate
6.15
%
7.75
%
8.25
%
Rate to which the cost trend rate is assumed to decline (the ultimate trend rate)
4.75
%
5.00
%
5.00
%
Year that the rate reaches the ultimate trend rate
2020

2019

2018

A one-percentage point change in assumed health care cost trend rates would have an insignificant effect on the amounts reported for other postretirement plans.
Obligations and Funded Status
The following tables set forth a reconciliation of beginning and ending balances of the benefit obligation and fair value of plan assets, as well as the funded status of The Hartford’s defined benefit pension and postretirement health care and life insurance benefit plans for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 . International plans represent an immaterial percentage of total pension assets, liabilities and expense and, for reporting purposes, are combined with domestic plans.
In addition to the discount rate change, the Company’s benefit obligation also increased due to the use of an updated mortality table.
 
Pension Benefits
Other Postretirement Benefits
Change in Benefit Obligation
2012
2011
2012
2011
Benefit obligation — beginning of year
$
5,465

$
4,795

$
424

$
408

Service cost (excluding expenses)
92

102

2

5

Interest cost
250

259

14

20

Plan participants’ contributions
—

—

20

18

Actuarial loss (gain)
28

43

1

(15
)
Settlements
(3
)
—

—

—

Curtailment gain due to plan freeze
(42
)
—

(116
)
—

Change in assumptions
545

497

19

37

Benefits paid
(256
)
(230
)
(54
)
(52
)
Retiree drug subsidy
—

—

3

3

Foreign exchange adjustment
1

(1
)
—

—

Benefit obligation — end of year
$
6,080

$
5,465

$
313

$
424


F-88
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
18. Employee Benefit Plans (continued)

 
 
 
Other Postretirement
 
Pension Benefits
Benefits
Change in Plan Assets
2012
2011
2012
2011
Fair value of plan assets — beginning of year
$
4,513

$
3,922

$
203

$
190

Actual return on plan assets
381

613

17

13

Employer contributions
201

201

—

—

Benefits paid
(230
)
(210
)
—

—

Expenses paid
(13
)
(12
)
—

—

Settlements
(3
)
—

—

—

Foreign exchange adjustment
1

(1
)
—

—

Fair value of plan assets — end of year
$
4,850

$
4,513

$
220

$
203

Funded status — end of year
$
(1,230
)
$
(952
)
$
(93
)
$
(221
)
The fair value of assets for pension benefits, and hence the funded status, presented in the table above excludes assets of $116 and $109 held in rabbi trusts and designated for the non-qualified pension plans as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively. The assets do not qualify as plan assets; however, the assets are available to pay benefits for certain retired, terminated and active participants. Such assets are available to the Company’s general creditors in the event of insolvency. The assets consist of equity and fixed income investments. To the extent the fair value of these rabbi trusts were included in the table above, pension plan assets would have been $4,966 and $4,622 as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively, and the funded status of pension benefits would have been $(1,114) and $(843) as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively.
The accumulated benefit obligation for all defined benefit pension plans was $6,079 and $5,413 as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , respectively.
The following table provides information for The Hartford’s defined benefit pension plans with an accumulated benefit obligation in excess of plan assets.
 
As of December 31,
 
2012
2011
Projected benefit obligation
$
6,080

$
5,441

Accumulated benefit obligation
6,079

5,394

Fair value of plan assets
4,850

4,492

Amounts recognized in the Consolidated Balance Sheets as of December 31 consist of:
 
Pension Benefits
Other Postretirement Benefits
 
2012
2011
2012
2011
Other assets
$
—

$
—

$
—

$
—

Other liabilities
1,230

952

93

221

Total
$
1,230

$
952

$
93

$
221


F-89
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
18. Employee Benefit Plans (continued)

Components of Net Periodic Benefit Cost and Other Amounts Recognized in Other Comprehensive Income (Loss)
In the Company’s non-qualified pension plan the amount of lump sum benefit payments exceeded the amount of service and interest cost for the year ended December 31, 2010. As a result, the Company recorded settlement expense of $20 to recognize the actuarial loss associated with the pro-rata portion of the obligation that has been settled.
Total net periodic benefit cost includes the following components:
 
Pension Benefits
Other Postretirement Benefits
 
2012
2011
2010
2012
2011
2010
Service cost
$
92

$
102

$
102

$
2

$
5

$
7

Interest cost
250

259

252

14

20

22

Expected return on plan assets
(312
)
(298
)
(286
)
(14
)
(14
)
(13
)
Amortization of prior service credit
(9
)
(9
)
(9
)
(4
)
(1
)
(1
)
Amortization of actuarial loss
231

159

107

1

—

—

Settlements
1

—

20

—

—

—

Curtailment gain due to plan freeze
(11
)
—

—

(1
)
—

—

Net periodic benefit cost
$
242

$
213

$
186

$
(2
)
$
10

$
15

Amounts recognized in other comprehensive income (loss) were as follows:
 
Pension Benefits
Other Postretirement Benefits
 
2012
2011
2012
2011
Amortization of actuarial loss
$
(231
)
$
(159
)
$
(1
)
$
—

Settlement loss
(1
)
—

—

—

Amortization of prior service credit
21

9

(111
)
1

Net loss arising during the year
477

237

18

24

Total
$
266

$
87

$
(94
)
$
25

Amounts in accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) on a before tax basis that have not yet been recognized as components of net periodic benefit cost consist of:
 
Pension Benefits
Other Postretirement Benefits
 
2012
2011
2012
2011
Net loss
$
2,175

$
1,930

$
58

$
39

Prior service credit
—

(21
)
(110
)
1

Transition obligation
—

—

—

2

Total
$
2,175

$
1,909

$
(52
)
$
42

The estimated net loss for the defined benefit pension plans that will be amortized from accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) into net periodic benefit cost during 2013 is $57 . The estimated prior service cost for the other postretirement benefit plans that will be amortized from accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) into net periodic benefit cost during 2013 is $(7) . The estimated net loss for the other postretirement plans that will be amortized from accumulated other comprehensive income into net periodic benefit cost during 2013 is an insignificant amount.

F-90
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
18. Employee Benefit Plans (continued)

Plan Assets
Investment Strategy and Target Allocation
The overall investment strategy of the Plan is to maximize total investment returns to provide sufficient funding for present and anticipated future benefit obligations within the constraints of a prudent level of portfolio risk and diversification. With respect to asset management, the oversight responsibility of the Plan rests with The Hartford’s Pension Fund Trust and Investment Committee composed of individuals whose responsibilities include establishing overall objectives and the setting of investment policy; selecting appropriate investment options and ranges; reviewing the asset allocation mix and asset allocation targets on a regular basis; and monitoring performance to determine whether or not the rate of return objectives are being met and that policy and guidelines are being followed. The Company believes that the asset allocation decision will be the single most important factor determining the long-term performance of the Plan.
The Company’s pension plan and other postretirement benefit plans’ target allocation by asset category is presented in the table below.
 
 
Target Asset Allocation
 
Pension Plans
Other Postretirement Plans
 
(minimum)
(maximum)
(minimum)
(maximum)
Equity securities
10
%
32
%
15
%
35
%
Fixed income securities
50
%
70
%
65
%
85
%
Alternative assets
10
%
25
%
—
%
—
%
Divergent market performance among different asset classes may, from time to time, cause the asset allocation to deviate from the desired asset allocation ranges. The asset allocation mix is reviewed on a periodic basis. If it is determined that an asset allocation mix rebalancing is required, future portfolio additions and withdrawals will be used, as necessary, to bring the allocation within tactical ranges.
The Company’s pension plan and other postretirement benefit plans’ weighted average asset allocation at December 31, 2012 and 2011 is presented in the table below.
 
Percentage of Pension Plans Assets
At Fair Value as of December 31,
Percentage of Other Postretirement Plans
Assets at Fair Value as of December 31,
 
2012
2011
2012
2011
Equity securities
20
%
20
%
23
%
22
%
Fixed income securities
60
%
62
%
77
%
78
%
Alternative Assets
20
%
18
%
—
%
—
%
Total
100
%
100
%
100
%
100
%
The Plan assets are invested primarily in separate portfolios managed by HIMCO, a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Company. These portfolios encompass multiple asset classes reflecting the current needs of the Plan, the investment preferences and risk tolerance of the Plan and the desired degree of diversification. These asset classes include publicly traded equities, bonds and alternative investments and are made up of individual investments in cash and cash equivalents, equity securities, debt securities, asset-backed securities and hedge funds. Hedge fund investments represent a diversified portfolio of partnership investments in absolute-return investment strategies.
In addition, the Company uses U.S. Treasury bond futures contracts and U.S. Treasury STRIPS in a duration overlay program to adjust the duration of Plan assets to better match the duration of the benefit obligation.
Investment Valuation
For further discussion on the valuation of investments, see Note 5 .

F-91
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
18. Employee Benefit Plans (continued)

Pension Plan Assets
The fair values of the Company’s pension plan assets by asset category are as follows:
 
Pension Plan Assets at Fair Value as of December 31, 2012
Asset Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Total
Short-term investments:
$
2

$
514

$
—

$
516

Fixed Income Securities:
 
 
 
 
Corporate
—

908

3

911

RMBS
—

325

3

328

U.S. Treasuries
35

980

—

1,015

Foreign government
—

52

2

54

CMBS
—

166

—

166

Other fixed income [1]
—

77

9

86

Equity Securities:
 
 
 
 
Large-cap domestic
—

591

—

591

Mid-cap domestic
51

—

—

51

Small-cap domestic
44

—

—

44

International
258

—

—

258

Other equities
—

1

—

1

Other investments:
 
 
 
 
Hedge funds
—

633

263

896

Total pension plan assets at fair value [2]
$
390

$
4,247

$
280

$
4,917

[1]
Includes ABS, municipal bonds, and foreign bonds.
[2]
Excludes approximately $76 of investment payables net of investment receivables that are not carried at fair value. Also excludes approximately $9 of interest receivable carried at fair value.
The fair values of the Company’s pension plan assets by asset category are as follows:
 
Pension Plan Assets at Fair Value as of December 31, 2011
Asset Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Total
Short-term investments:
$
119

$
549

$
—

$
668

Fixed Income Securities:
 
 
 
 
Corporate
—

741

3

744

RMBS
—

334

11

345

U.S. Treasuries
59

819

—

878

Foreign government
—

53

3

56

CMBS
—

117

—

117

Other fixed income [1]
—

70

4

74

Equity Securities:
 
 
 
 
Large-cap domestic
—

570

—

570

Mid-cap domestic
52

—

—

52

Small-cap domestic
38

—

—

38

International
217

—

—

217

Other equities
—

1

—

1

Other investments:
 
 
 
 
Hedge funds
—

—

759

759

Total pension plan assets at fair value [2]
$
485

$
3,254

$
780

$
4,519

[1]
Includes ABS and municipal bonds.
[2]
Excludes approximately $43 of investment payables net of investment receivables that are not carried at fair value. Also excludes approximately $37 of interest receivable carried at fair value.

F-92
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
18. Employee Benefit Plans (continued)

The tables below provide a fair value level 3 rollforward for the twelve months ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 for the Pension Plan Assets for which significant unobservable inputs (Level 3) are used in the fair value measurement on a recurring basis. The Plan classifies the fair value of financial instruments within Level 3 if there are no observable markets for the instruments or, in the absence of active markets, if one or more of the significant inputs used to determine fair value are based on the Plan’s own assumptions. Therefore, the gains and losses in the tables below include changes in fair value due partly to observable and unobservable factors.
Pension Plan Asset Fair Value Measurements Using Significant Unobservable Inputs (Level 3)
Assets
Corporate
RMBS
Foreign government
Other fixed income
Hedge funds
Totals
Fair Value as of January 1, 2012
$
3

$
11

$
3

$
4

$
759

$
780

Realized gains/(losses), net
—

(1
)
—

—

17

16

Changes in unrealized gains/(losses), net
1

1

—

—

(2
)
—

Purchases
1

17

1

10

267

296

Issuances
—

—

—

—

—

—

Sales
(2
)
(25
)
(2
)
(1
)
(106
)
(136
)
Transfers into Level 3
—

—

—

3

—

3

Transfers out of Level 3
$
—

$
—

$
—

$
(7
)
$
(672
)
$
(679
)
Fair Value as of December 31, 2012
$
3

$
3

$
2

$
9

$
263

$
280

The transfers in and out of level 3 were due to a change in the accounting policy classification of hedge funds.
Pension Plan Asset Fair Value Measurements Using Significant Unobservable Inputs (Level 3)
Assets
Corporate
RMBS
Foreign government
Other fixed income
Hedge funds
Totals
Fair Value as of January 1, 2011
$
3

$
9

$
2

$
8

$
635

$
657

Realized gains/(losses), net
—

—

—

—

—

—

Changes in unrealized gains/(losses), net
1

—

—

2

21

24

Purchases
2

10

3

1

223

239

Issuances
—

—

—

—

—

—

Sales
(1
)
(9
)
(2
)
(4
)
(120
)
(136
)
Transfers into Level 3
1

1

6

2

—

10

Transfers out of Level 3
$
(3
)
$
—

$
(6
)
$
(5
)
$
—

$
(14
)
Fair Value as of December 31, 2011
$
3

$
11

$
3

$
4

$
759

$
780

The transfers in and out of level 3 were due to a change in the pricing source.

There was no Company common stock included in the Plan’s assets as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 .

F-93
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
18. Employee Benefit Plans (continued)

The fair value of the Company’s other postretirement plan assets by asset category are as follows:
 
Other Postretirement Plan Assets
at Fair Value as of December 31, 2012
Asset Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Total
Short-term investments
$
—

$
14

$
—

$
14

Fixed Income Securities:
 
 
 
 
Corporate
—

65

—

65

RMBS
—

46

—

46

U.S. Treasuries
—

24

—

24

Foreign government
—

1

—

1

CMBS
—

24

—

24

Other fixed income
—

5

—

5

Equity Securities:
 
 
 
 
Large-cap
—

50

—

50

Total other postretirement plan assets at fair value [1]
$
—

$
229

$
—

$
229

[1]
Excludes approximately $10 of investment payables net of investment receivables that are not carried at fair value. Also excludes approximately $1 of interest receivable carried at fair value.

The fair value of the Company’s other postretirement plan assets by asset category are as follows:
 
Other Postretirement Plan Assets
at Fair Value as of December 31, 2011
Asset Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Total
Short-term investments
$
—

$
9

$
—

$
9

Fixed Income Securities:
 
 
 
 
Corporate
—

53

—

53

RMBS
—

48

—

48

U.S. Treasuries
—

28

—

28

Foreign government
—

2

—

2

CMBS
—

18

—

18

Other fixed income
—

4

—

4

Equity Securities:
 
 
 
 
Large-cap
—

43

—

43

Total other postretirement plan assets at fair value [1]
$
—

$
205

$
—

$
205

[1]
Excludes approximately $3 of investment payables net of investment receivables that are not carried at fair value. Also excludes approximately $1 of interest receivable carried at fair value.

There was no Company common stock included in the other postretirement benefit plan assets as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 .
Concentration of Risk
In order to minimize risk, the Plan maintains a listing of permissible and prohibited investments. In addition, the Plan has certain concentration limits and investment quality requirements imposed on permissible investment options. Permissible investments include U.S. equity, international equity, alternative asset and fixed income investments including derivative instruments. Derivative instruments include future contracts, options, swaps, currency forwards, caps or floors and will be used to control risk or enhance return but will not be used for leverage purposes.
Securities specifically prohibited from purchase include, but are not limited to: shares or fixed income instruments issued by The Hartford, short sales of any type within long-only portfolios, non-derivative securities involving the use of margin, leveraged floaters and inverse floaters, including money market obligations, natural resource real properties such as oil, gas or timber and precious metals.
Other than U.S. government and certain U.S. government agencies backed by the full faith and credit of the U.S. government, the Plan does not have any material exposure to any concentration risk of a single issuer.

F-94
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
18. Employee Benefit Plans (continued)

Cash Flows
The following table illustrates the Company’s prior contributions.
Employer Contributions
Pension Benefits
Other Postretirement Benefits
2012
$
201

$
—

2011
$
201

$
—

In 2012 , the Company, at its discretion, made $200 in contributions to the U.S. qualified defined benefit pension plan. The Company presently anticipates contributing approximately $100 to its U.S. qualified defined benefit pension plan in 2013 based upon certain economic and business assumptions. These assumptions include, but are not limited to, equity market performance, changes in interest rates and the Company’s other capital requirements. For 2013 , the Company does not have a required minimum funding contribution for the Plan and the funding requirements for all of the pension plans are expected to be immaterial.
Employer contributions in 2012 and 2011 were made in cash and did not include contributions of the Company’s common stock.
Benefit Payments
The following table sets forth amounts of benefits expected to be paid over the next ten years from the Company’s pension and other postretirement plans as of December 31, 2012 :
 
Pension Benefits
Other Postretirement Benefits
2013
$
301

$
40

2014
316

39

2015
305

36

2016
315

33

2017
322

31

2018 - 2022
1,710

122

Total
$
3,269

$
301

In addition, the following table sets forth amounts of other postretirement benefits expected to be received under the Medicare Part D Subsidy over the next ten years as of December 31, 2012 :
2013
$
4

2014
4

2015
4

2016
4

2017
5

2018 - 2022
24

Total
$
45

Investment and Savings Plan
Substantially all U.S. employees are eligible to participate in The Hartford Investment and Savings Plan under which designated contributions may be invested in common stock of The Hartford or certain other investments. These contributions are matched, up to 3.0% of base salary, by the Company. In 2012 , employees who had earnings of less than $110,000 in the preceding year received a contribution of 1.5% of base salary and employees who had earnings of $110,000 or more in the preceding year received a contribution of 0.5% of base salary. The cost to The Hartford for this plan was approximately $58 , $59 , and $62 for 2012 , 2011 , and 2010 , respectively. Additionally, The Hartford has established defined contribution pension plans for certain employees of the Company’s international subsidiaries. The cost to The Hartford in 2012 , 2011 , and 2010 for these plans was immaterial.
Effective January 1, 2013, the Company will increase benefits under The Hartford Investment and Savings Plan, its defined contribution 401(k) savings plan, and The Hartford Excess Savings Plan. The Company's contributions will be increased to include a non-elective contribution of 2% of eligible compensation and a dollar-for-dollar matching contribution of up to 6.00% of eligible compensation contributed by the employee each pay period. Eligible compensation is expanded to include overtime and bonuses but will be limited to a total of $1,000,000 annually.

F-95
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)


19 . Stock Compensation Plans
The Company has three primary stock-based compensation plans which are described below. Shares issued in satisfaction of stock-based compensation may be made available from authorized but unissued shares, shares held by the Company in treasury or from shares purchased in the open market. In 2012 and 2011 , the Company issued shares from treasury in satisfaction of stock-based compensation.
 
For the year ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
Stock-based compensation plans expense
$
95

$
53

$
94

Income tax benefit
(33
)
(19
)
(33
)
Total stock-based compensation plans expense, after-tax
$
62

$
34

$
61

The Company did not capitalize any cost of stock-based compensation. As of December 31, 2012 , the total compensation cost related to non-vested awards not yet recognized was $78 , which is expected to be recognized over a weighted average period of 1.8 years .
Stock Plan
The Hartford 2010 Incentive Stock Plan (the "2010 Stock Plan") provides for awards to be granted in the form of non-qualified or incentive stock options qualifying under Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code, stock appreciation rights, performance shares, restricted stock or restricted stock units, or any other form of stock-based award. The aggregate number of shares of stock which may be awarded is subject to a maximum limit of 18,000,000 shares applicable to all awards for the ten-year duration of the 2010 Stock Plan. If any award under the prior The Hartford Incentive Stock Plan (as approved by the Company’s shareholders in 2000) or under the prior The Hartford 2005 Incentive Stock Plan (as approved by the Company’s shareholders in 2005) that was outstanding as of March 31, 2010, is forfeited, terminated, surrendered, exchanged, expires unexercised, or is settled in cash in lieu of stock (including to effect tax withholding) or for the net issuance of a lesser number of shares than the number subject to the award, the shares of stock subject to such award (or the relevant portion thereof) shall be available for awards under the 2010 Stock Plan and such shares shall be added to the maximum limit. As of December 31, 2012 , there were 10,893,344 shares available for future issuance.
The fair values of awards granted under the 2010 Stock Plan are measured as of the grant date and expensed ratably over the awards’ vesting periods, generally 3 years . For stock option awards granted or modified in 2006 and later, the Company began expensing awards to retirement-eligible employees immediately or over a period shorter than the stated vesting period because the employees receive accelerated vesting upon retirement and therefore the vesting period is considered non-substantive. All awards provide for accelerated vesting upon a change in control of the Company as defined in the 2010 Stock Plan.
Stock Option Awards
Under the 2010 Stock Plan, all options granted have an exercise price at least equal to the market price of the Company’s common stock on the date of grant, and an option’s maximum term is not to exceed 10 years . Under the 2010 Stock Plan, options will generally become exercisable as determined at the time of grant. For any year, no individual employee may receive an award of options for more than 2,000,000 shares under the 2010 Stock Plan. Under the 2005 Stock Plan, certain options become exercisable over a three year period commencing one year from the date of grant, while certain other options become exercisable at the later of three years from the date of grant or upon specified market appreciation of the Company’s common shares.
The Company uses a hybrid lattice/Monte-Carlo based option valuation model (the “valuation model”) that incorporates the possibility of early exercise of options into the valuation. The valuation model also incorporates the Company’s historical termination and exercise experience to determine the option value.
The valuation model incorporates ranges of assumptions for inputs, and therefore, those ranges are disclosed below. The term structure of volatility is generally constructed utilizing implied volatilities from exchange-traded options, CPP warrants related to the Company’s stock, historical volatility of the Company’s stock and other factors. The Company uses historical data to estimate option exercise and employee termination within the valuation model, and accommodates variations in employee preference and risk-tolerance by segregating the grantee pool into a series of behavioral cohorts and conducting a fair valuation for each cohort individually. The expected term of options granted is derived from the output of the option valuation model and represents, in a mathematical sense, the period of time that options are expected to be outstanding. The risk-free rate for periods within the contractual life of the option is based on the U.S. Constant Maturity Treasury yield curve in effect at the time of grant. There were no stock option awards granted in 2010.

F-96
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
19. Stock Compensation Plans (continued)

 
For the year ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
Expected dividend yield
1.3%
1.3%
Expected annualized spot volatility
38.6
%
-
51.5%
35.8
%
-
47.1%
Weighted average annualized volatility
51.4%
41.7%
Risk-free spot rate
0.1
%
-
2.0%
0.1
%
-
3.5%
Expected term
5.2 years
5.7 years
A summary of the status of non-qualified stock options included in the Company’s Stock Plans as of December 31, 2012 and changes during the year ended December 31, 2012 is presented below:
 
Number of Options
(in thousands)
Weighted
Average
Exercise Price
Weighted
Average
Remaining
Contractual
Term
Aggregate
Intrinsic Value
Outstanding at beginning of year
4,839

$
47.89

3.7
$
—

Granted
1,582

20.63

 
 
Exercised
(363
)
7.37

 
 
Forfeited
(600
)
45.12

 
 
Expired
(921
)
65.27

 
 
Outstanding at end of year
4,537

38.42

5.2
—

Exercisable at end of year
2,537

$
50.51

2.5
—

The weighted average grant-date fair value of options granted during the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 was $ 7.41 and $ 10.76 respectively. The total intrinsic value of options exercised during the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 was $ 4 , $ 2 , and $ 1 , respectively.
Share Awards
Share awards are valued equal to the market price of the Company’s common stock on the date of grant. Share awards granted under the Stock Plans and outstanding include restricted stock units, restricted stock and performance shares. Generally, restricted stock units vest at or over three years and restricted stock vests in three to five years. Performance shares become payable within a range of 0% to 200% of the number of shares initially granted based upon the attainment of specific performance goals achieved over a specified period, generally three years. The maximum award of restricted stock units, restricted stock or performance shares for any individual employee in any year under the 2010 Stock Plan is 500,000 shares or units.
A summary of the status of the Company’s non-vested share awards as of December 31, 2012 , and changes during the year ended December 31, 2012 , is presented below:
Non-vested Shares
Shares (in thousands)
Weighted-Average Grant-Date Fair Value
Non-vested at beginning of year
4,164

$
27.60

Granted
4,667

20.56

Vested
(956
)
30.13

Forfeited
(884
)
24.25

Non-vested at end of year
6,991

$
22.98

The total fair value of shares vested during the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 was $ 20 , $ 20 and $ 13 , respectively, based on estimated performance factors. The Company did not make cash payments in settlement of stock compensation during the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 and 2010 .

F-97
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
19. Stock Compensation Plans (continued)

Restricted Unit awards
In 2010 and 2009, The Hartford issued restricted units as part of The Hartford’s 2005 Stock Plan. Restricted stock unit awards under the plan have historically been settled in shares, but under this award will be settled in cash and are thus referred to as “Restricted Units”. The economic value recipients will ultimately realize will be identical to the value that would have been realized if the awards had been settled in shares, i.e., upon settlement, recipients will receive cash equal to The Hartford’s share price multiplied by the number of restricted units awarded. Because Restricted Units will be settled in cash, the awards are remeasured at the end of each reporting period until settlement. Awards granted in 2009 vested after a three year period. Awards granted in 2010 include both graded and cliff vesting restricted units which vest over a three year period. The graded vesting attribution method is used to recognize the expense of the award over the requisite service period. For example, the graded vesting attribution method views one three-year grant with annual graded vesting as three separate sub-grants, each representing one third of the total number of awards granted. The first sub-grant vests over one year, the second sub-grant vests over two years and the third sub-grant vests over three years.
There were no restricted units awarded for 2012 or 2011. As of December 31, 2012 and 2011 , 832 and 5,319 restricted units were non-vested, respectively.
Deferred Stock Unit Plan
Effective July 31, 2009, the Compensation and Management Development Committee of the Board authorized The Hartford Deferred Stock Unit Plan (“Deferred Stock Unit Plan”), and, on October 22, 2009, it was amended. The Deferred Stock Unit Plan provides for contractual rights to receive cash payments based on the value of a specified number of shares of stock. The Deferred Stock Unit Plan provides for two award types, Deferred Units and Restricted Units. Deferred Units are earned ratably over a year, based on the number of regular pay periods occurring during such year. Deferred Units are credited to the participant's account on a quarterly basis based on the market price of the Company’s common stock on the date of grant and are fully vested at all times. Deferred Units credited to employees prior to January 1, 2010 (other than senior executive officers hired on or after October 1, 2009) are not paid until after two years from their grant date. Deferred Units credited on or after January 1, 2010 (and any credited to senior executive officers hired on or after October 1, 2009) are paid in three equal installments after the first, second and third anniversaries of their grant date . Restricted Units are intended to be incentive compensation and, unlike Deferred Units, vest over time, generally three years , and are subject to forfeiture. The Deferred Stock Unit Plan is structured consistent with the limitations and restrictions on employee compensation arrangements imposed by the Emergency Economic Stabilization Act of 2008 and the TARP Standards for Compensation and Corporate Governance Interim Final Rule issued by the U.S. Department of Treasury on June 10, 2009.
There were no deferred stock units awarded in 2012 or 2011.
A summary of the status of the Company’s non-vested awards under the Deferred Stock Unit Plan as of December 31, 2012 , is presented below:
Non-vested Units
Restricted Units (in thousands)
Weighted-Average Grant-Date Fair Value
Non-vested at beginning of year
491

24.84

Granted
—

—

Vested
(81
)
24.12

Forfeited
(101
)
24.66

Non-vested at end of year
309

$
25.08

Employee Stock Purchase Plan
In 1996, the Company established The Hartford Employee Stock Purchase Plan (“ESPP”). Under this plan, eligible employees of The Hartford purchase common stock of the Company at a discount rate of 5% of the market price per share on the last trading day of the offering period. In 2009 and prior years, eligible employees of The Hartford purchased common stock of the Company at a 15% discount from the lower of the closing market price at the beginning or end of the offering period. Employees purchase a variable number of shares of stock through payroll deductions elected as of the beginning of the offering period. The Company may sell up to 15,400,000 shares of stock to eligible employees under the ESPP. As of December 31, 2012 , there were 5,773,954 shares available for future issuance. During the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , 688,655 , 768,380 , and 729,598 shares were sold, respectively. The weighted average per share fair value of the discount under the ESPP was $ 1.00 , $ 1.03 and $ 1.24 during the years ended December 31, 2012 , 2011 and 2010 , respectively. In 2012 , 2011 , and 2010, the fair value is estimated based on the 5% discount off the market price per share on the last trading day of the offering period.
Additionally, The Hartford has established employee stock purchase sub-plans for certain employees of the Company's international subsidiaries. Under these sub-plans, participants may purchase common stock of The Hartford at a fixed price. The activity under these programs is not material.

F-98
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)


20 . Discontinued Operations
On November 1, 2011, the Company completed a merger with CenterState Banks, Inc. (“CBI”), pursuant to which Federal Trust Corporation (“FTC”), a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company, was merged with and into CBI, and Federal Trust Bank (“FTB”), a federally chartered, FDIC-insured thrift and wholly owned subsidiary of FTC, was merged with and into CenterState Bank of Florida, N.A. (“CenterState Bank”), a wholly owned subsidiary of CBI. The Company recorded an after-tax charge of $ 74 to net realized capital losses in the second quarter of 2011 for the estimated loss on disposal, including the write off of remaining goodwill of $ 10 , after-tax, and losses on certain FTC and FTB assets and liabilities, which were not transferred to CenterState Bank. Upon final closing with CBI, the Company recorded a benefit of $ 6 , after tax, in the fourth quarter of 2011 related to the divestiture.
In the first quarter of 2011, the Company completed the sale of its wholly-owned subsidiary Specialty Risk Services (“SRS”) and recorded a net realized capital gain of $ 150 , after-tax. SRS is a third-party claims administration business that provides self-insured, insured, and alternative market clients with customized claims services. The Company is required to provide certain services to SRS for up to 24 months under a Transition Services Agreement. During the fourth quarter 2011 the Company recorded a charge of $ 4 , after-tax, attributed to asset disposals. SRS is included in the Property & Casualty Commercial reporting segment.
In addition, during the fourth quarter of 2010, the Company completed the sales of its indirect wholly-owned subsidiaries Hartford Investments Canada Corporation (“HICC”) and Hartford Advantage Investment, Ltd. (“HAIL”) and recorded net realized gains (losses) of $ 41 and $ (4) , respectively.
The following table summarizes the amounts related to discontinued operations in the Consolidated Statements of Operations.
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
Revenues
 
 
 
Fee income and other
$
—

$
—

$
36

Net investment income
—

17

28

Net realized capital losses
—

(6
)
(5
)
Other revenues
—

48

213

Total revenues
—

59

272

Benefits, losses and expenses
 

 

 

Amortization of DAC
—

—

17

Insurance operating costs and other expenses
6

54

256

Goodwill impairment
—

—

153

Total benefits, losses and expenses
6

54

426

Income (loss) before income taxes
(6
)
5

(154
)
Income tax expense (benefit)
(2
)
1

(53
)
Income (loss) from operations of discontinued operations, net of tax
(4
)
4

(101
)
Net realized capital gain (loss) on disposal, net of tax
(1
)
82

37

Income (loss) from discontinued operations, net of tax
$
(5
)
$
86

$
(64
)


F-99
Table of Contents
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)


21 . Restructuring and Other Costs
As a result of a strategic business realignment announced in March 2012, the Company is currently focusing on its Property & Casualty, Group Benefits and Mutual Fund businesses. In addition, the Company implemented restructuring activities in 2011 across several areas aimed at reducing overall expense levels. The Company intends to substantially complete the related restructuring activities over the next 12 - 18 months. For further discussion of the Company's strategic business realignment and related business disposition transactions, see Note 1 and Note 2 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Termination benefits related to workforce reductions and lease and other contract terminations have been accrued through December 31, 2012 . Additional costs, mainly severance benefits and other related costs and professional fees, expected to be incurred subsequent to December 31, 2012, and asset impairment charges, if any, will be expensed as appropriate.
Restructuring and other costs are expected to approximate $ 275 , pre-tax. As the Company executes on its operational and strategic initiatives, the Company's estimate of and actual costs incurred for restructuring activities may differ from these estimates.
Estimated restructuring and other costs as of December 31, 2012 are as follows:
Property & Casualty Commercial
$
7

Consumer Markets
3

Group Benefits
1

Mutual Funds
4

Talcott Resolution
72

Corporate
188

Total estimated restructuring and other costs
$
275

Restructuring and other costs, pre-tax incurred in connection with these activities are as follows:
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
Severance benefits
$
148

$
17

Professional fees
44

—

Asset impairment charges
5

—

Other contract termination charges
2

8

Total restructuring and other costs
$
199

$
25

Restructuring and other costs costs, included in insurance operating costs and other expenses in the Consolidated Statements of Operations for each reporting segment, as well as the Corporate category are as follows:
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
Property & Casualty Commercial
$
5

$
—

Consumer Markets
1

—

Group Benefits
1

—

Mutual Funds
3

—

Talcott Resolution
68

—

Corporate
121

25

Total restructuring and other costs
$
199

$
25

The Company incurred restructuring and other costs of $26 , consisting primarily of severance benefits, and completed the associated restructuring activities in the year ended December 31, 2010. Restructuring and other costs for 2010 are included in the Corporate reporting category.

F-100
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATMENTS (continued)
21. Restructuring, Severance and Other Costs (continued)

Changes in the accrued restructuring and other costs liability balance included in other liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheets are as follows:
 
For the year ended December 31, 2012
 
Severance Benefits and Related Costs
Professional Fees
Asset impairment charges
Other Contract Termination Charges
Total Restructuring and Other Costs
Balance, beginning of period
$
12

$
—

$
—

$
5

$
17

Accruals/provisions
148

44

5

2

199

Payments/write-offs
(90
)
(44
)
(5
)
(7
)
(146
)
Balance, end of period
$
70

$
—

$
—

$
—

$
70


22 . Quarterly Results (Unaudited)
 
Three months ended
 
March 31,
June 30,
September 30,
December 31,
 
2012
2011
2012
2011
2012 [2]
2011
2012
2011
Revenues
$
7,661

$
6,300

$
4,574

$
5,401

$
6,442

$
4,520

$
7,735

$
5,638

Benefits, losses and expenses
7,659

5,913

4,823

5,551

6,464

4,537

7,993

5,557

Income (loss) from continuing operations, net of tax
97

339

(100
)
113

15

57

(45
)
117

Income (loss) from discontinued operations, net of tax
(1
)
162

(1
)
(80
)
(2
)
3

(1
)
1

Net income (loss)
96

501

(101
)
33

13

60

(46
)
118

Less: Preferred stock dividends and accretion of discount
10

10

11

11

10

10

11

11

Net income (loss) available to common shareholders [1]
$
86

$
491

$
(112
)
$
22

$
3

$
50

$
(57
)
$
107

Basic earnings (losses) per common share
$
0.20

$
1.10

$
(0.26
)
$
0.05

$
0.01

$
0.11

$
(0.13
)
$
0.24

Diluted earnings (losses) per common share [1]
$
0.18

$
0.99

$
(0.26
)
$
0.05

$
0.01

$
0.11

$
(0.13
)
$
0.23

Weighted average common shares outstanding, basic
440.7

444.6

438.2

445.1

435.8

445.3

436.2

445.1

Weighted average shares outstanding and dilutive potential common shares
469.0

508.2

438.2

482.4

461.7

473.4

436.2

468.9

[1] In periods of a net loss available to common shareholders, the Company uses basic weighted average common shares outstanding in the calculation of diluted loss per common share, since the inclusion of shares for warrants, stock compensation plans and the assumed conversion of the preferred shares to common would have been antidilutive to the earnings (loss) per common share calculation. In the absence of the net loss available to common shareholders, weighted average common shares outstanding and dilutive potential common shares would have totaled 485.8 million and 488.9 million for the three months ended June 30, 2012 and December 31, 2012, respectively. In addition, assuming the impact of mandatory convertible preferred shares was not antidilutive, weighted average common shares outstanding and dilutive potential common shares would have totaled 489.9 million , 482.7 million , 489.6 million , 494.1 million and 503.1 million for the three months ended March 31, 2012, September 30, 2012 December 31, 2011, September 30, 2011 and June 30, 2011, respectively.
[2]
On March 1, 2013, the Company filed Amendment No. 1 on Form 10-Q/A to amend and restate its Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2012 as originally filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on November 1, 2012. In this restatement the Company recognized an estimated pre-tax reinsurance loss on disposition of $533 comprised of impairment of goodwill attributed to the Individual Life business of $342 and a loss accrual for premium deficiency of $191 in the third quarter of 2012. The estimate is subject to change pending final determination of net assets sold, transaction costs, and other adjustments . The effect of the restatement is summarized as follows:
 
Three months ended September 30, 2012
 
As previously
reported
Adjustment
As restated
Income (loss) from continuing operations, net of tax
$
403

$
(388
)
$
15

Net income (loss)
$
401

$
(388
)
$
13

Net income (loss) available to common shareholders
$
391

$
(388
)
$
3

Basic earnings (losses) per common share
$
0.90

$
(0.89
)
$
0.01

Diluted earnings (losses) per common share
$
0.83

$
(0.82
)
$
0.01


F-101
Table of Contents

THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
SCHEDULE I
SUMMARY OF INVESTMENTS — OTHER THAN INVESTMENTS IN AFFILIATES
(In millions)
 
As of December 31, 2012
Type of Investment
Cost
Fair Value
Amount at
which shown on Balance Sheet
Fixed Maturities
 
 
 
Bonds and notes
 
 
 
U.S. government and government agencies and authorities (guaranteed and sponsored)
$
10,481

$
10,975

$
10,975

States, municipalities and political subdivisions
13,001

14,361

14,361

Foreign governments
3,985

4,136

4,136

Public utilities
7,792

8,785

8,785

All other corporate bonds
31,902

35,264

35,264

All other mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities
12,586

12,401

12,401

Total fixed maturities, available-for-sale
79,747

85,922

85,922

Fixed maturities, at fair value using fair value option
1,530

1,087

1,087

Total fixed maturities
81,277

87,009

87,009

Equity Securities
 
 
 
Common stocks
 
 
 
Industrial, miscellaneous and all other
378

404

404

Non-redeemable preferred stocks
488

486

486

Total equity securities, available-for-sale
866

890

890

Equity securities, trading
26,820

28,933

28,933

Total equity securities
27,686

29,823

29,823

Mortgage loans
6,711

6,933

6,711

Policy loans
1,997

2,165

1,997

Investments in partnerships and trusts
3,015

3,015

3,015

Futures, options and miscellaneous
1,679

1,114

1,114

Short-term investments
4,581

4,581

4,581

Total investments
$
126,946

$
134,640

$
134,250


S-1
Table of Contents

THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
SCHEDULE II
CONDENSED FINANCIAL INFORMATION OF THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
(Registrant)
(In millions)
 
As of December 31,
Condensed Balance Sheets
2012
2011
Assets
 
 
Fixed maturities, available-for-sale, at fair value
$
542

$
152

Other investments
23

28

Short-term investments
825

1,425

Investment in affiliates
28,104

26,151

Deferred income taxes
1,317

1,109

Unamortized Issue Costs
60

51

Other assets
30

31

Total assets
$
30,901

$
28,947

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
 

 

Net payable to affiliates
$
267

$
283

Short-term debt (includes current maturities of long-term debt)
320

—

Long-term debt
6,566

5,975

Other liabilities
1,301

1,203

Total liabilities
8,454

7,461

Total stockholders’ equity
22,447

21,486

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
$
30,901

$
28,947

 
For the years ended December 31,
Condensed Statements of Operations and Comprehensive Income
2012
2011
2010
Net investment income
$
3

$
2

$
5

Net realized capital losses
(6
)
(5
)
(5
)
Total revenues
(3
)
(3
)
—

Interest expense
439

490

489

Other expenses
926

(41
)
11

Total expenses
1,365

449

500

Loss before income taxes and earnings of subsidiaries
(1,368
)
(452
)
(500
)
Income tax benefit
(482
)
(154
)
(170
)
Loss before earnings of subsidiaries
(886
)
(298
)
(330
)
Earnings of subsidiaries
848

1,010

1,966

Net income (loss)
(38
)
712

1,636

Other comprehensive income (loss) - parent company:
 
 
 
Change in net unrealized gain/loss on securities
1

—

1

Change in pension and other postretirement plan adjustments
(172
)
(57
)
(118
)
Other comprehensive loss, net of taxes before other comprehensive income of subsidiaries
(171
)
(57
)
(117
)
Other comprehensive income of subsidiaries
1,763

2,298

2,402

Total other comprehensive income
1,592

2,241

2,285

Total comprehensive income
$
1,554

$
2,953

$
3,921

The condensed financial statements should be read in conjunction with
the consolidated financial statements and notes thereto.

S-2
Table of Contents


THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
SCHEDULE II
CONDENSED FINANCIAL INFORMATION OF THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC. (continued)
(Registrant)
(In millions)
 
For the years ended December 31,
Condensed Statements of Cash Flows
2012
2011
2010
Operating Activities
 
 
 
Net income
$
(38
)
$
712

$
1,636

Loss on extinguishment of debt
910

—

—

Undistributed earnings of subsidiaries
(847
)
(1,011
)
(960
)
Change in operating assets and liabilities
770

625

(21
)
Cash provided by operating activities
795

326

655

Investing Activities
 
 
 
Net sales of short-term investments
213

432

233

Capital contributions to subsidiaries
(334
)
(126
)
(311
)
Cash provided by (used for) investing activities
(121
)
306

(78
)
Financing Activities
 
 
 
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt
2,123

—

1,090

Repurchase of warrants
(300
)
—

—

Repayments of long-term debt
(2,133
)
(400
)
(275
)
Net proceeds from issuance of mandatory convertible preferred stock
—

—

556

Net proceeds from issuance of common shares under public offering
—

—

1,600

Redemption of preferred stock issued to the U.S. Treasury
—

—

(3,400
)
Treasury stock acquired
(154
)
(46
)
—

Proceeds from net issuances of common shares under incentive and stock compensation plans and excess tax benefits
7

9

22

Dividends paid — Preferred shares
(42
)
(42
)
(85
)
Dividends paid — Common Shares
(175
)
(153
)
(85
)
Cash used for financing activities
(674
)
(632
)
(577
)
Net change in cash
—

—

—

Cash — beginning of year
—

—

—

Cash — end of year
$
—

$
—

$
—

Supplemental Disclosure of Cash Flow Information
 
 
 
Interest Paid
$
443

$
483

$
465

Dividends Received from Subsidiaries
$
1,026

$
976

$
1,006

The condensed financial statements should be read in conjunction with
the consolidated financial statements and notes thereto.



S-3
Table of Contents

THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
SCHEDULE III
SUPPLEMENTARY INSURANCE INFORMATION
(In millions)
 
Segment
Deferred Policy
Acquisition Costs
and Present
Value of Future Profits
Future Policy Benefits,
Unpaid Losses and Loss Adjustment Expenses
Unearned Premiums
Other
Policyholder
Funds and Benefits Payable
 
 
As of December 31, 2012
 
 
 
 
 
Property & Casualty Commercial
$
407

$
16,020

$
3,170

$
—

 
Consumer Markets
141

1,926

1,799

—

 
Property & Casualty Other Operations
—

3,771

1

—

 
Group Benefits
43

6,791

68

228

 
Mutual Funds
22

—

—

—

 
Talcott Resolution
5,112

12,485

106

70,669

 
Corporate
—

(1
)
1

4

 
Consolidated
$
5,725

$
40,992

$
5,145

$
70,901

 
As of December 31, 2011
 

 

 

 

 
Property & Casualty Commercial
$
417

15,438

3,235

—

 
Consumer Markets
139

2,060

1,803

—

 
Property & Casualty Other Operations
—

4,053

1

—

 
Group Benefits
42

6,796

76

266

 
Mutual Funds
27

—

—

4

 
Talcott Resolution
5,931

12,670

106

75,803

 
Corporate
—

(1
)
1

—

 
Consolidated
$
6,556

$
41,016

$
5,222

$
76,073



S-4

THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
SCHEDULE III
SUPPLEMENTARY INSURANCE INFORMATION (continued)
(In millions)

Segment
Earned
Premiums,
Fee Income and Other
Net
Investment Income (Loss)
Benefits, Losses
and Loss
Adjustment Expenses
Amortization of
Deferred Policy
Acquisition Costs
and Present
Value of Future Profits
Insurance
Operating
Costs and
Other
Expenses [1]
Net Written Premiums [2]
For the year ended December 31, 2012
 
Property & Casualty Commercial
$
6,361

$
924

$
4,575

$
927

$
1,139

6,209

Consumer Markets
3,791

159

2,630

332

769

3,630

Property & Casualty Other Operations
(2
)
149

65

—

28

8

Group Benefits
3,810

405

3,029

33

1,033

—

Mutual Funds
599

(3
)
—

35

452

—

Talcott Resolution
3,594

7,137

7,515

661

1,866

—

Corporate
168

31

—

—

1,850

—

Consolidated
$
18,321

$
8,802

$
17,814

$
1,988

$
7,137

$
9,847

For the year ended December 31, 2011
 
Property & Casualty Commercial
6,224

910

4,584

917

1,170

6,176

Consumer Markets
3,903

187

2,886

337

871

3,675

Property & Casualty Other Operations
—

151

317

—

24

1

Group Benefits
4,147

411

3,306

35

1,121

—

Mutual Funds
649

(3
)
—

47

448

—

Talcott Resolution
3,959

1,234

2,176

1,108

1,504

—

Corporate
209

23

(3
)
—

710

—

Consolidated
19,091

2,913

13,266

2,444

5,848

9,852

For the year ended December 31, 2010
 
Property & Casualty Commercial
5,840

935

3,370

905

1,094

5,796

Consumer Markets
4,119

187

2,951

371

816

3,886

Property & Casualty Other Operations
1

163

251

—

30

2

Group Benefits
4,278

429

3,331

40

1,128

—

Mutual Funds
664

(8
)
—

51

458

—

Talcott Resolution
3,980

1,803

2,350

325

1,475

—

Corporate
188

81

(2
)
—

833

1

Consolidated
19,070

3,590

12,251

1,692

5,834

9,685

[1]
Includes interest expense, goodwill impairment, loss on extinguishment of debt, and reinsurance loss on disposition.
[2]
Excludes life insurance pursuant to Regulation S-X.




S-5
Table of Contents

THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
SCHEDULE IV
REINSURANCE
(In millions)
 
Gross
Amount
Ceded to Other
Companies
Assumed
From Other
Companies
Net
Amount
Percentage
of Amount
Assumed
to Net
For the year ended December 31, 2012
 
 
 
 
 
Life insurance in-force
$
946,160

$
137,719

$
48,032

$
856,473

6
%
Insurance revenues
 
 
 
 
 
Property and casualty insurance
$
10,484

796

205

9,893

2
%
Life insurance and annuities
6,618

458

69

6,229

1
%
Accident and health insurance
1,928

66

68

1,930

4
%
Total insurance revenues
$
19,030

$
1,320

$
342

$
18,052

2
%
For the year ended December 31, 2011
 

 

 

 

 

Life insurance in-force
$
992,921

$
139,590

$
47,365

$
900,696

5
%
Insurance revenues
 
 
 
 
 
Property and casualty insurance
$
10,337

688

225

9,874

2
%
Life insurance and annuities
7,220

463

71

6,828

1
%
Accident and health insurance
2,122

61

63

2,124

3
%
Total insurance revenues
$
19,679

$
1,212

$
359

$
18,826

2
%
For the year ended December 31, 2010
 

 

 

 

 

Life insurance in-force
$
987,104

$
135,269

$
43,999

$
895,834

5
%
Insurance revenues
 
 
 
 
 
Property and casualty insurance
$
10,105

668

256

9,693

3
%
Life insurance and annuities
7,261

518

128

6,871

2
%
Accident and health insurance
2,221

58

64

2,227

3
%
Total insurance revenues
$
19,587

$
1,244

$
448

$
18,791

2
%

S-6
Table of Contents

THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
SCHEDULE V
VALUATION AND QUALIFYING ACCOUNTS
(In millions)
 
Balance
January 1,
Charged to
Costs and
Expenses
Translation
Adjustment
Write-offs/
Payments/
Other
Balance
December 31,
2012
 
 
 
 
 
Allowance for doubtful accounts and other
$
119

$
44

$
—

$
(46
)
$
117

Allowance for uncollectible reinsurance
290

10

—

(32
)
268

Valuation allowance on mortgage loans
102

(14
)
—

(20
)
68

Valuation allowance for deferred taxes
83

(25
)
—

—

58

2011
 
 
 
 
 
Allowance for doubtful accounts and other
$
119

$
45

$
—

$
(45
)
$
119

Allowance for uncollectible reinsurance
290

5

—

(5
)
290

Valuation allowance on mortgage loans
155

26

—

(79
)
102

Valuation allowance for deferred taxes
165

(82
)
—

—

83

2010
 
 
 
 
 
Allowance for doubtful accounts and other
$
121

$
53

$
—

$
(55
)
$
119

Allowance for uncollectible reinsurance
335

11

—

(56
)
290

Valuation allowance on mortgage loans
366

157

—

(368
)
155

Valuation allowance for deferred taxes
87

78

—

—

165

THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
SCHEDULE VI
SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION CONCERNING
PROPERTY AND CASUALTY INSURANCE OPERATIONS
(In millions)
 
Discount
Deducted From Liabilities [1]
Losses and Loss Adjustment
Expenses Incurred Related to:
Paid Losses and
Loss Adjustment Expenses
 
Current Year
Prior Year
Years ended December 31,
 
 
 
 
2012
$
538

$
7,274

$
(4
)
$
7,098

2011
$
542

$
7,420

$
367

$
7,218

2010
$
524

$
6,768

$
(196
)
$
6,834

[1]
Reserves for permanently disabled claimants and certain structured settlement contracts that fund loss run-offs have been discounted using the weighted average interest rates of 4.0% , 4.4% , and 4.8% for 2012 , 2011 , and 2010 , respectively.

S-7
Table of Contents

SIGNATURES
Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.
 
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
 
 
 
By:  
/s/ Robert H. Bateman 
 
 
 
Robert H. Bateman 
 
 
 
Senior Vice President and Controller
 
 
 
(Chief accounting officer and duly
authorized signatory)
 
Date: March 1, 2013
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities and on the dates indicated
 
 
Signature
 
Title
 
Date
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
/s/ Liam E. McGee
 
Chairman, Chief Executive Officer and Director
 
March 1, 2013
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Liam E. McGee
 
(Principal Executive Officer)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
/s/ Christopher J. Swift
 
Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
 
March 1, 2013
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Christopher J. Swift
 
(Principal Financial Officer)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
/s/ Robert H. Bateman 
Senior Vice President and Controller
March 1, 2013
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Robert H. Bateman 
(Principal Accounting Officer)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
*
 
Director
 
March 1, 2013
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Robert B. Allardice III
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
*
 
Director
 
March 1, 2013
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Trevor Fetter
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
*
 
Director
 
March 1, 2013
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Paul G. Kirk, Jr.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
*
 
Director
 
March 1, 2013
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Kathryn A. Mikells
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
*
 
Director
 
March 1, 2013
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Michael G. Morris
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
*
 
Director
 
March 1, 2013
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Thomas A. Renyi
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
*
 
Director
 
March 1, 2013
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Charles B. Strauss
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
*
 
Director
 
March 1, 2013
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
H. Patrick Swygert
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
*By: 
 
/s/ Alan J. Kreczko
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Alan J. Kreczko
 
 
 
 
 
 
As Attorney-in-Fact
 
 
 
 

II-1
Table of Contents

THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
FOR THE FISCAL YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2012
FORM 10-K
EXHIBITS INDEX
The exhibits attached to this Form 10-K are those that are required by Item 601 of Regulation S-K.
Exhibit No.
Description
2.01
Purchase and Sale Agreement by and among Massachusetts Mutual Life Insurance Company, Hartford Life, Inc. and The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. dated as of September 4, 2012 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 2.01 to The Hartford’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the fiscal period ended September 30, 2012).

2.02
Purchase and Sale Agreement by and among Hartford Life, Inc., Prudential Financial, Inc. and The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. dated as of September 27, 2012 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 2.02 to The Hartford’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the fiscal period ended September 30, 2012).
3.01
Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. (“The Hartford”), (as amended by Certificate of Designations with respect to 7.25% Mandatory Convertible Preferred Stock Series F dated March 23, 2010 and the Certificate of Elimination of the Series A Participating Cumulative Preferred Stock, Series D Non-Voting Contingent Convertible Preferred Stock and Fixed Rate Cumulative Perpetual Preferred Stock, Series E, dated April 26, 2010) (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.01 to The Hartford’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the fiscal period ended March 31, 2010).
3.02
Amended and Restated By-Laws of The Hartford, amended effective September 20, 2012 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 3.1 to The Hartford’s Current Report on Form 8-K, filed September 21, 2012).
4.01
Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation and Amended and Restated By-Laws of The Hartford (incorporated by reference as indicated in Exhibits 3.01 and 3.02 hereto, respectively).
4.02
Senior Indenture, dated as of October 20, 1995, between The Hartford and The Chase Manhattan Bank (National Association) as Trustee (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.03 to the Registration Statement on Form S-3 (Registration No. 333-103915) of The Hartford, Hartford Capital IV, Hartford Capital V and Hartford Capital VI).
4.03
Supplemental Indenture No. 1, dated as of December 27, 2000, to the Senior Indenture filed as Exhibit 4.02 hereto, between The Hartford and The Chase Manhattan Bank, as Trustee (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.30 to The Hartford’s Registration Statement on Form S-3 (Amendment No. 1) (Registration No. 333-49666) dated December 27, 2000).
4.04
Supplemental Indenture No. 2, dated as of September 13, 2002, to the Senior Indenture filed as Exhibit 4.02 hereto, between The Hartford and JPMorgan Chase Bank, as Trustee (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.1 to The Hartford’s Current Report on Form 8-K, filed September 17, 2002).
4.05
Supplemental Indenture No. 3, dated as of May 23, 2003, to the Senior Indenture filed as Exhibit 4.02 hereto, between The Hartford and JPMorgan Chase Bank, as Trustee (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.1 of The Hartford’s Current Report on Form 8-K, filed May 30, 2003).
4.06
Senior Indenture, dated as of March 9, 2004, between The Hartford and JPMorgan Chase Bank, as Trustee (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.1 to The Hartford’s Current Report on Form 8-K, filed March 12, 2004).
4.07
Junior Subordinated Indenture, dated as of February 12, 2007, between The Hartford and LaSalle Bank, N.A., as Trustee (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.1 to The Hartford’s Current Report on Form 8-K, filed February 16, 2007).
4.08
Senior Indenture, dated as of April 11, 2007, between The Hartford and The Bank of New York Trust Company, N.A., as Trustee (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.03 to the Registration Statement on Form S-3 (Registration No. 333-142044) of The Hartford, Hartford Capital IV, Hartford Capital V and Hartford Capital VI, filed on April 11, 2007).
4.09
Junior Subordinated Indenture, dated as of June 6, 2008, between The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. and The Bank of New York Trust Company, N.A., as Trustee (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.1 to the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed on June 6, 2008).
4.10
First Supplemental Indenture, dated as of June 6, 2008, between The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. and The Bank of New York Trust Company, N.A., as Trustee (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.2 to the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed on June 6, 2008).
4.11
Replacement Capital Covenant, dated as of June 6, 2008 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.4 to the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed on June 6, 2008).

II-2
Table of Contents


Exhibit No.
Description
4.12
Warrant to Purchase Shares of Common Stock of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc., dated June 26, 2009 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.1 to The Hartford’s Current Report on Form 8-K, filed June 26, 2009).
4.13
Deposit Agreement, dated as of March 23, 2010, among The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc., The Bank of New York Mellon, as Depository, and holders from time to time of the Receipt issued thereunder (including form of Depository Receipt) (incorporated herein by reference to (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.6 to The Hartford’s Current Report on Form 8-K, filed March 23, 2010).
4.14
Form of Depository Receipt for the Depositary Shares (included as Exhibit A to Exhibit 4.06) (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.7 to The Hartford’s Current Report on Form 8-K, filed on March 9, 2010).
4.15
Third Supplemental Indenture, dated as of April 5, 2012, between The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. (“The Hartford”) and The Bank of New York Mellon Trust Company, N.A., as Trustee (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.3 to The Hartford’s Current Report on Form 8-K, filed April 6, 2012).
10.01
Preferred Partnership Agreement dated December 5, 2011 by and between The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc., Hartford Life, Inc., Hartford Investment Financial Services, LLC, HL Investment Advisors, LLC and Wellington Management Company, LLP (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.04 of The Hartford’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended 2012).†
10.02
Four-Year Revolving Credit Facility Agreement, dated January 6, 2012, among The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc., Bank of America, N.A., as administrative agent, JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A. and Citibank, N.A., as syndication agents, and the lenders referred to therein (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to The Hartford’s Current Report on Form 8-K, filed January 6, 2012).
*10.03
The Hartford Senior Executive Officer Severance Pay Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.07 of The Hartford’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended 2010).
*10.04
The Hartford Senior Executive Severance Pay Plan, as amended and restated effective February 22, 2011 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.08 of The Hartford’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended 2010).
*10.05
2010 Incentive Stock Plan, as amended effective January 27, 2011 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.09 of The Hartford’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended 2010).
*10.06
The Hartford 2010 Incentive Stock Plan Administrative Rules Related to Awards for Key Employees, as amended effective December 15, 2010 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.10 of The Hartford’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended 2010).
*10.07
The Hartford 2010 Incentive Stock Plan Administrative Rules Related to Awards for Non-Employee Directors, as amended effective December 15, 2010 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.11 of The Hartford’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended 2010).
*10.08
The Hartford 2010 Incentive Stock Plan Forms of Individual Award Agreements (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.12 of The Hartford’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the second quarter ended June 30, 2010).
*10.09
Summary of Annual Executive Bonus Program (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.2 to the Current Report on Form 8-K, filed on May 25, 2010).
*10.10
Written Summary of Compensation-related Arrangement with a Named Executive Officer effective May 18, 2011 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.01 of The Hartford’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the second quarter ended June 30, 2011)
*10.11
The Hartford 2005 Incentive Stock Plan, as amended (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.10 of The Hartford’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended 2009).



II-3
Table of Contents

Exhibit No.
Description
*10.12
The Hartford Deferred Stock Unit Plan, as amended on October 22, 2009 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.02 to The Hartford’s Current Report on Form 8-K, filed October 22, 2009).
*10.13
Form of Award Letters for Deferred Unit and Restricted Units under The Hartford’s Deferred Stock Unit Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.03 to The Hartford’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the third quarter ended September 30, 2009).
*10.14
Form of Key Executive Employment Protection Agreement between The Hartford and certain executive officers of The Hartford, as amended (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.06 to The Hartford’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2008).
*10.15
The Hartford 2005 Incentive Stock Plan Forms of Individual Award Agreements (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.2 to The Hartford’s Current Report on Form 8-K, filed May 24, 2005).
*10.16
The Hartford Incentive Stock Plan, as amended (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.09 to The Hartford’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2008).
*10.17
The Hartford Deferred Restricted Stock Unit Plan, as amended (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.12 to The Hartford’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2005).
*10.18
The Hartford Deferred Compensation Plan, as amended December 20, 2012.**.
*10.19
The Hartford Excess Pension Plan II (including amendments effective through January 1, 2013)**
*10.20
The Hartford Excess Savings Plan IA (including amendments effective through January 1, 2013)**

*10.21
Letter Agreement between David N. Levenson and The Hartford dated March 21, 2012 ((incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.02 to The Hartford’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the fiscal period ended March 31, 2012).
10.22
Put Option Agreement, dated February 12, 2007, among The Hartford, Glen Meadow ABC Trust and LaSalle Bank, N.A. (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to The Hartford’s Current Report on Form 8-K, filed February 16, 2007).
10.23
Warrant and Debentures Purchase Agreement, dated as of March 30, 2012, between The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. and Allianz SE (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to The Hartford’s Current Report on Form 8-K, filed April 2, 2012).
12.01
Statement Re: Computation of Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges. **
21.01
Subsidiaries of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. **
23.01
Consent of Deloitte & Touche LLP to the incorporation by reference into The Hartford’s Registration Statements on Form S-8 and Form S-3 of the report of Deloitte & Touche LLP contained in this Form 10-K regarding the audited financial statements is filed herewith. **
24.01
Power of Attorney. **
31.01
Certification of Liam E. McGee pursuant to Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. **
31.02
Certification of Christopher J. Swift pursuant to Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. **
32.01
Certification of Liam E. McGee pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. **
32.02
Certification of Christopher J. Swift pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. **
101.INS
XBRL Instance Document.
101.SCH
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema.
101.CAL
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Calculation Linkbase.
101.DEF
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Definition Linkbase.
101.LAB
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Label Linkbase.
101.PRE
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Presentation Linkbase.
*
 
Management contract, compensatory plan or arrangement.
 
 
 
**
 
Filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission as an exhibit to this report.
 
 
 
†
 
Confidential treatment has been requested for the redacted portions of this agreement. A complete copy of this agreement, including the redacted portions, has been filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission.
 

II-4

EXHIBIT 10.18

THE HARTFORD DEFERRED COMPENSATION PLAN
As amended December 20, 2012

ARTICLE I
PURPOSE

1.1    Purpose. The purpose of the Plan is to provide, in the discretion of the Committee, an opportunity for certain Key Employees and Directors to defer the receipt of certain Eligible Compensation to the extent provided herein. The Plan is intended to constitute an unfunded and unsecured deferred compensation arrangement for a select group of management or highly compensated individuals for purposes of ERISA. The Plan restates the terms of certain unfunded and unsecured deferred compensation arrangements established for such employees by ITT Corporation and The Hartford in 1994 and 1995, and continued by The Hartford to the extent provided hereunder. Capitalized terms used in the Plan shall have the meanings provided herein.

Effective January 1, 2009, the Plan is amended in order to comply with final regulations issued under Section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code (the “Code”). The Plan is intended to comply with Section 409A of the Code, and no action taken by the Company shall be construed in a manner that would result in the imposition of an additional tax on participants under Section 409A of the Code. The provisions designed to comply with Section 409A are retroactively effective to January 1, 2005, to comply with transitional guidance promulgated by the Internal Revenue Service under Section 409A. Consistent with that guidance, and notwithstanding Section 3.1 hereof, Plan participants have the opportunity to irrevocably redesignate during 2008 how amounts scheduled to be paid after 2008 in accordance with prior deferral elections are to be paid, provided that no such redesignation shall cause the payment of an amount scheduled to be made in a later year to be accelerated into the 2008 year.

Effective December 1, 2012, no further elections by Key Employees or Directors to defer Eligible Compensation shall be permitted.



ARTICLE II
DEFINITIONS

The following terms shall have the following meanings for purposes of the Plan:

" Account " means any account maintained on behalf of a Participant pursuant to the Plan.

" Act " means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.



" Beneficial Owner " means any Person who, directly or indirectly, has the right to vote or dispose of or has "beneficial ownership" (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 under the Act) of any securities of a company, including any such right pursuant to any agreement, arrangement or understanding (whether or not in writing), provided that : (A) a Person shall not be deemed the Beneficial Owner of any security as a result of an agreement, arrangement or understanding to vote such security (i) arising solely from a revocable proxy or consent given in response to a public proxy or consent solicitation made pursuant to, and in accordance with, the Act and the applicable rules and regulations thereunder, or (ii) made in connection with, or to otherwise participate in, a proxy or consent solicitation made, or to be made, pursuant to, and in accordance with, the applicable provisions of the Act and the applicable rules and regulations thereunder, in either case described in clause (i) or (ii) above, whether or not such agreement, arrangement or understanding is also then reportable by such Person on Schedule 13D under the Act (or any comparable or successor report); and (B) a Person engaged in business as an underwriter of securities shall not be deemed to be the Beneficial Owner of any security acquired through such Person's participation in good faith in a firm commitment underwriting until the expiration of forty days after the date of such acquisition.

“ Board of Directors ” means the Board of Directors of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc.

" Change of Control " means:

(A) a report on Schedule 13D shall be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission pursuant to Section 13(d) of the Act disclosing that any Person, other than The Hartford or a subsidiary of The Hartford or any employee benefit plan sponsored by The Hartford or a subsidiary of The Hartford, is the Beneficial Owner directly or indirectly of forty percent or more of the outstanding stock of The Hartford entitled to vote in the election of directors of The Hartford;

(B) any Person, other than The Hartford or a subsidiary of The Hartford or any employee benefit plan sponsored by The Hartford or a subsidiary of The Hartford, shall purchase shares pursuant to a tender offer or exchange offer to acquire any stock of The Hartford (or securities convertible into stock) for cash, securities or any other consideration, provided that after consummation of the offer, the Person in question is the Beneficial Owner of fifteen percent or more of the outstanding stock of The Hartford entitled to vote in the election of directors of The Hartford (calculated as provided in paragraph (d) of Rule 13d-3 under the Act in the case of rights to acquire stock);

(C) any merger, consolidation, recapitalization or reorganization of The Hartford approved by the stockholders of The Hartford shall be consummated, other than any such transaction immediately following which the persons who were the Beneficial Owners of the outstanding securities of The Hartford entitled to vote in the election of directors of The Hartford immediately prior to such transaction are the Beneficial Owners of at least 55% of the total voting power represented by the securities of the entity surviving such transaction entitled to vote in the election of directors of such entity (or the ultimate parent of such entity) in substantially the same relative proportions as their ownership of the securities of The


Hartford entitled to vote in the election of directors of The Hartford immediately prior to such transaction; provided that, such continuity of ownership (and preservation of relative voting power) shall be deemed to be satisfied if the failure to meet such threshold (or to preserve such relative voting power) is due solely to the acquisition of voting securities by an employee benefit plan of The Hartford, such surviving entity or any subsidiary of such surviving entity;


(D) any sale, lease, exchange or other transfer (in one transaction or a series of related transactions) of all or substantially all the assets of The Hartford approved by the stockholders of The Hartford shall be consummated; or

(E) within any 24 month period, the persons who were directors of The Hartford immediately before the beginning of such period (the "Incumbent Directors of The Hartford") shall cease (for any reason other than death) to constitute at least a majority of the board of directors of The Hartford or the board of directors of any successor to The Hartford, provided that any director of The Hartford who was not a director of The Hartford at the beginning of such period shall be deemed to be an Incumbent Director of The Hartford if such director (1) was elected to the board of directors of The Hartford by, or on the recommendation of or with the approval of, at least two-thirds of the directors of The Hartford who then qualified as Incumbent Directors of The Hartford either actually or by prior operation of this clause (E), and (2) was not designated by a Person who has entered into an agreement with The Hartford to effect a transaction described in paragraph (C) or paragraph (D) of this definition of Change of Control;

provided that, notwithstanding any provision in this Plan to the contrary, in the event of a Change of Control as described in paragraph (C) or paragraph (D) of this definition of Change of Control, in the case of a Key Employee or Director whose employment or service on the Board of Directors involuntarily terminates on or after the date of a shareholder approval described in either of such paragraphs but before the date of a consummation described in either of such paragraphs, and the consummation occurs within 60 days of such date of termination, the date of such termination shall be deemed for purposes of the Plan to be the day following the date of the applicable consummation.

" Committee ” means the Compensation and Personnel Committee of the Board of Directors, or such other Committee as the Board may designate to administer the Plan pursuant to Article VII.
 
“ Director ” means a member of the Board of Directors who is not an employee of a Participating Company.

" Eligible Compensation" means the amount of compensation of a Key Employee or Director, if any, designated by the Committee in its sole discretion as eligible for deferral under the Plan, which may include (A) the cash amount, if any, which may become payable to a Key Employee pursuant to a Participating Company's executive bonus program, (B) the cash amount, if any, which may become payable to a Key Employee pursuant to a Participating Company's sales incentive payment program, (C) the cash amount of commissions (net of expense reimbursements), if any, which may


become payable to certain wholesalers under the sales incentive program established for wholesalers for Planco Financial Services, (D) the cash amount, if any, which may become payable as a sign-on bonus to a person expected to become a Key Employee, (E) the cash amount, if any, which may be contributed to the Plan by a Participating Company on behalf of a Key Employee in lieu of Excess Contributions under the Excess Savings Plan, (F) the amount of any cash compensation which may become payable to a Director for service on the Board of Directors, and (G) the amount of any such other compensation of a Key Employee of a Participating Company or a Director as the Committee may deem appropriate for deferral in accordance with the Plan.

" ERISA " means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended from time to time.

“ Excess Contributions ” shall mean, collectively, Excess Floor Company Contributions and Excess Matching Company Contributions.

“ Excess Floor Company Contribution ” shall have the meaning assigned by the Excess Savings Plan.

“ Excess Matching Company Contribution ” shall have the meaning assigned by the Excess Savings Plan.

“ Excess Savings Plan ” means The Hartford Excess Savings Plan IA, as it may be amended from time to time, and any successor Plan thereto.

" Hypothetical Investment Fund " means a mutual fund or other investment vehicle or measure or index of investment performance selected by the Investment and Savings Plan Investment Committee to determine the hypothetical investment experience of Participant Accounts pursuant to Article IV.

" Incentive Stock Plan " means The Hartford 2005 Incentive Stock Plan, as it may be amended from time to time, and any successor Plan thereto.

" Investment and Savings Plan " means The Hartford Investment and Savings Plan, as it may be amended from time to time, and any successor Plan thereto.

" Investment and Savings Plan Investment Committee " shall have the meaning assigned by the Investment and Savings Plan.

" Key Employee " shall have the meaning assigned by the Incentive Stock Plan.

" Participant " means a Key Employee or Director who properly elects to participate in the Plan pursuant to Article III.

" Participating Company " shall have the meaning assigned by the Incentive Stock Plan.



" Person " has the meaning ascribed to such term in Section 3(a)(9) of the Act, as supplemented by Section 13(d)(3) of the Act; provided, however, that Person shall not include (A) The Hartford, any subsidiary of The Hartford or any Person controlled by The Hartford, (B) any trustee or other fiduciary holding securities under any employee benefit plan of The Hartford or of any subsidiary of The Hartford, or (C) a corporation owned, directly or indirectly, by the stockholders of The Hartford in substantially the same proportions as their respective ownership of securities of The Hartford.

" Plan " means this plan, The Hartford Deferred Compensation Plan, as it may be amended from time to time.

" Plan Administrator " shall have the meaning assigned by Article VII of the Plan.

“ Potential Change of Control ” means:
    
(A) A Person shall commence a tender offer, which if successfully consummated, would result in such Person being the Beneficial Owner of at least 15% of the stock of The Hartford entitled to vote in the election of directors of The Hartford;

(B) The Hartford enters into an agreement, the consummation of which would constitute a Change of Control;

(C) Solicitation of proxies for the election of directors of The Hartford by anyone other than The Hartford, which, if such directors were elected, would result in the occurrence of a Change of Control as described in paragraph (E) of the definition of Change of Control in this Plan; or

(D) Any other event shall occur which is deemed to be a Potential Change of Control by the Board of Directors, the Committee, or any other appropriate committee of the Board of Directors in its sole discretion.

" The Hartford " means The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc., or a successor by merger, purchase or otherwise.

" Valuation Date " means the close of business of the last business day of each month in an applicable calendar year, or such other date as may be designated by the Plan Administrator.


ARTICLE III
PARTICIPATION

3.1     Election to Participate . A Key Employee of a Participating Company or a Director may participate in the Plan by filing a properly completed election form (or such other authorization as the Plan Administrator may require) with the party and by the date designated by the Plan Administrator. The election of a Key Employee or Director in accordance with this Article III shall


apply only to the Eligible Compensation as to which the election is made, and shall have the effect, to the extent provided herein, of deferring the payment of such Eligible Compensation beyond the date that it might otherwise have become payable to the Participant. Such election shall be irrevocable. If a Key Employee or Director elects to defer a particular amount of Eligible Compensation under the Plan, and then terminates employment with all Participating Companies or, in the case of a Director, terminates service on the Board of Directors, and such termination occurs before the date such amount would have been payable to the Key Employee or Director in the absence of the election, then the election shall be deemed null and void and without effect.

Effective December 1, 2012, no further elections to participate hereunder shall be permitted by Key Employees or Directors.

3.2     Form of Election . The election form filed by a Participant pursuant to this Article III shall (A) identify a portion of the Participant's Eligible Compensation that may become payable with respect to the Participant's services, (B) contain the Participant's election to defer the payment of such portion of such Eligible Compensation in accordance with the terms of the Plan, and (C) contain such other information as the Plan Administrator may require.

3.3      Maximum and Minimum Amounts Required for Participation . The Committee or the Plan Administrator may designate a maximum and a minimum portion of the Eligible Compensation of a Key Employee or Director, in terms of a percentage or other amount thereof, as to which an election may be made hereunder.

3.4      Nullification of Election . Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, any election made by a Key Employee or Director hereunder shall be deemed null and void to the extent that (A) the Eligible Compensation as to which the election applies is designated by the Committee, in its sole discretion, as not payable to such Key Employee, or (B) such election applies to Eligible Compensation payable during the six month period during which the Key Employee ceases savings under the Investment and Savings Plan as a result of receiving a hardship withdrawal under that Plan.

3.5      Establishment of Participant Accounts . Up to a maximum number of Accounts (as permitted by the Committee or the Plan Administrator, and elected by the Participant) shall be maintained on behalf of each Participant on the books of The Hartford. Amounts shall be credited to or debited from a Participant's Account as provided in Article V. The Plan Administrator shall cause each Participant's Account to be valued on the applicable Valuation Date, and shall cause records indicating such value to be maintained. When an event requires a determination of the value of a Participant's Account, such value shall be determined as of the Valuation Date coincident with or immediately preceding the date of such event, unless otherwise required by the Plan. The value of a Participant's Account shall be reported to the Participant from time to time as determined appropriate by the Plan Administrator.

3.6      Obtaining of Life Insurance Policies . As a condition of participation hereunder, the Committee may require that a Participant provide assistance in obtaining a life insurance policy on the life of such Participant, such policy to be solely owned by, and solely payable to, The Hartford


(or such other entity as may be designated by the Committee). Such Participant may be required to (A) complete an application for life insurance, (B) furnish underwriting information (including but not limited to submitting to medical examinations by an insurance company approved examiner), (C) authorize the release of the Participant's medical history to an insurance company underwriter, and (D) provide such other information and take such other actions relating to such life insurance policy as may be required by the Plan Administrator. A Participant as to whom a life insurance policy is obtained hereunder shall have no right to or interest in such policy or the proceeds thereof.

3.7      Termination of Participation . The participation of a Participant in the Plan shall terminate on the earlier of (A) the date that all amounts credited to the Participant's Account have been distributed pursuant to the Plan, (B) the date of termination of the Plan, or (C) such other date as may be designated by the Committee consistent with Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder.


ARTICLE IV
HYPOTHETICAL INVESTMENT FUND ALLOCATIONS

4.1     Selection of Hypothetical Investment Funds . The Investment and Savings Plan Investment Committee shall select one or more Hypothetical Investment Funds to which a Participant may elect pursuant to the Plan to allocate all or a portion of the amount then and thereafter credited to the Participant's Account. To the extent provided herein, such Hypothetical Investment Funds shall be used to measure the hypothetical investment experience of the portion of a Participant's Account that the Participant properly elects to have allocated thereto. The Investment and Savings Plan Investment Committee may change the selection of Hypothetical Investment Funds from time to time in its sole discretion. The selection of any such Hypothetical Investment Funds shall not require the Company to invest or earmark any of its assets in any specific manner.

4.2     Investment Allocation Election . To the extent permitted by the Plan Administrator, a Participant may elect to have the amount then and thereafter credited to his or her Account allocated among one or more of the Hypothetical Investment Funds. Such election shall be made by filing a properly completed election form (or such other authorization as the Plan Administrator may require) with the party and by the date designated by the Plan Administrator. With respect to Excess Contributions, a Participant shall be deemed to have elected to have such amounts allocated to the same Hypothetical Investment Funds that the Participant elected for amounts distributable following the date his or her employment with all Participating Companies terminates. If the Participant has no such allocation election in place, then the Participant shall be deemed to have elected to have all Excess Contributions allocated to the Hypothetical Investment Fund that the Plan Administrator determines generally to have the least risk of loss of principal. Any election or deemed election under this Section shall result in the investment experience of an elected Hypothetical Investment Fund being used to measure the hypothetical investment experience of the particular portion of the Participant's Account allocated to that Hypothetical Investment Fund as provided herein.

4.3     Changes in Investment Allocation . To the extent permitted by the Plan Administrator, a Participant may change the investment allocation previously elected by filing a properly completed


change form (or such other authorization as the Plan Administrator may require) with the party and by the date designated by the Plan Administrator. Such change shall be effective as soon as practicable after the Valuation Date coincident with or next succeeding receipt of the timely filed change form by the designated party (or such other date as may be designated by the Plan Administrator), and shall apply to all amounts then and thereafter credited to the Participant's Account. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any request for a change in investment allocation with respect to Excess Contributions shall be subject to the same waiting periods and other similar rules as would have applied to such Excess Contributions under the Excess Savings Plan.

4.4     Failure to Make Proper Election . In the event that a Participant does not make a proper election pursuant to this Article IV, such Participant shall be deemed to have elected to have the entire amount (as to which no proper election is made) then and thereafter credited to the Participant's Account allocated to the Hypothetical Investment Fund that the Plan Administrator determines generally to have the least risk of loss of principal.
 
4.5     Limitations on Investment Allocation . The Plan Administrator may (A) establish a minimum and/or a maximum portion of a Participant's Account, in terms of a percentage or other amount thereof, that a Participant may elect to allocate to a particular Hypothetical Investment Fund hereunder, (B) preclude any Participant who is an executive officer of the Company or a Director from allocating any portion of his or her Account to a Hypothetical Investment Fund with an investment experience determined primarily in relation to the investment performance of securities issued by the Company, and (C) establish such other limitations on investment allocations as the Plan Administrator may deem appropriate.

4.6      No Actual Investment . Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, no amount of Eligible Compensation as to which an election is made hereunder, and no amount credited to a Participant's Account pursuant to the Plan, shall be set aside or invested in any actual fund on behalf of the Participant, provided, however, that nothing in the Plan shall be construed to preclude the Company from directly or indirectly making investments for its own account in any actual investment vehicle corresponding to the Hypothetical Investment Funds (or otherwise) in order to assist the Company in meeting its obligations hereunder, or for any other reason whatsoever. No Participant or any other person or entity shall have by reason of the Plan any right to or in any such investment made by the Company.


ARTICLE V
CREDITING AND DEBITING OF PARTICIPANT ACCOUNTS

5.1      Crediting of Eligible Compensation . Eligible Compensation as to which the Participant makes an election in accordance with the Plan shall be credited to the Participant's Account as of the Valuation Date coincident or next succeeding the date such Eligible Compensation would otherwise have been paid to, or contributed to the Excess Savings Plan on behalf of, the Participant.

5.2     Crediting and/or Debiting of Hypothetical Investment Fund Investment Experience . As of any particular Valuation Date upon which an amount is credited to a Participant's Account,


such Account shall be credited or debited, as the case may be, with an amount equal to the hypothetical net investment gain or loss that such Participant would have realized if the portion of his or her Account properly elected to be allocated to a particular Hypothetical Investment Fund pursuant to Article IV were actually invested in such Hypothetical Investment Fund during the period beginning with the preceding Valuation Date and ending upon such particular Valuation Date (or such other period as may be designated by the Plan Administrator).

5.3     Debiting of Distributions . The amount of any distribution from a Participant's Account pursuant to the Plan shall be debited from the Participant's Account as of the Valuation Date coincident with or immediately preceding the date of such distribution.

5.4      Debiting of Administrative Expenses . The Participant's allocable share (as determined by the Plan Administrator) of any administrative expenses related to the operation of the Plan shall be debited from the Participant's Account as of each monthly Valuation Date.

5.5      Vesting of Credited Amounts . The rights of a Participant in regard to the amounts credited to the Participant's Account hereunder shall be fully vested at all times.


ARTICLE VI
DISTRIBUTIONS FROM PARTICIPANT ACCOUNTS

6.1      Distribution Election . A Participant may elect, by filing a properly completed election form (or such other authorization as the Plan Administrator may require), not later than the end of the calendar year prior to the year in which the services which relate to the compensation to be deferred commence to be performed (or, in respect of performance-based compensation, not later than six months prior to the end of the performance period in respect of the performance-based compensation) to have all or a portion of the amount credited to the Participant's Account distributed to him or her on a date and in a manner permitted by the Plan Administrator; provided, however, that the Plan Administrator may permit elections to be made prior to 2009 in accordance with any applicable transition rules established under Section 409A of the Code. With respect to any Excess Contributions, if the Participant has timely elected a distribution in respect of all or any portion of his Account that provides for a distribution following separation from service, such election shall be deemed also to apply to such Excess Contributions, to the extent that it would have been timely made (including giving effect to any applicable transition rule) in respect of such Excess Contributions. In the absence of an effective and timely election as to all or any portion of the Participant's Account related to Excess Contributions, a Participant shall be deemed to have elected to receive such portion of his or her Account as of the fifth business day of the month following his or her separation from service, in the same manner as though Section 6.3(A) applied to such distribution. Except as otherwise expressly provided in this Section 6, distributions from a Participant's Account shall be made in accordance with the date(s) of distribution and manner of payment elected or deemed elected by the Participant. A Participant who does not timely submit a properly completed election form pertaining to the distribution of all or any portion of his or her Account shall be deemed to have elected such portion of his or her Account be distributed in a lump sum at the time and in the manner specified in Section 6.3(A). Unless the Plan Administrator shall


permit additional elections as to future deferrals in accordance with the applicable requirements of this Section 6.1 and Section 409A of the Code, any election made or deemed made by a Participant hereunder shall apply to all future deferrals (to the extent made on a timely basis (after giving effect to any applicable transition rule under Section 409A) to apply to such deferrals) and, to the extent made or deemed made in accordance with the Code Section 409A transition rules, any amounts theretofore credited to such Account. Unless and solely to the extent permitted by the Plan Administrator in accordance with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code, any election hereunder shall be irrevocable.

For purposes of the Plan, a Participant shall be deemed to have had a termination of employment or service at such time as the Participant has a separation from service. A Participant separates from service when the Participant either stops working, or when the level of services provided – whether as an employee or as an independent contractor – permanently decreases to no more than 20% of the average level of services provided during the prior 36 months. Separation from service shall be determined in accordance with policies or practices that The Hartford shall adopt in accordance with, or as otherwise determined pursuant to, Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder.

If a Participant is a “specified employee” as determined under the practices and policies of the Company as established in accordance with Section 409A of the Code, then a distribution to the Participant by reason of separation from service shall be made six months and one day after the date the Participant separates from service.


6.2      Distribution in the Event of Hardship . A Participant may request a hardship distribution from his or her Account by filing a properly completed hardship distribution form (or such other authorization as the Plan Administrator may require) by the date and with the party designated by the Plan Administrator. The Plan Administrator may, if it determines, consistent with Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder, that a severe and unforeseeable financial hardship on the part of the Participant exists, permit a distribution to the Participant of an
amount credited to the Participant's Account that is reasonably necessary to meet such hardship, including any amount reasonably necessary to pay any income or other taxes resulting from such distribution. Such hardship distribution shall be made within 90 days of the date the Plan Administrator determines that the Participant has incurred a severe and unforeseeable financial hardship.

6.3
Distribution Upon Termination of Employment or Board Service .

(A)
General Rule . Except as provided in Section 6.3(B), within 90 days of the fifth business day of the month following the month in which the Participant’s separation from service occurs, the Company shall distribute to the Participant a single lump sum cash payment equal to the total amount credited to the Participant's Account as of the Valuation Date immediately preceding such distribution.



(B)
Exception for Certain Terminations. In the case of a Participant who: (i) has reached age 55 or older at the time employment or service on the Board of Directors terminates or who has satisfied the requirements for early retirement treatment (“Rule of 70”) under The Hartford Retirement Plan for U.S. Employees, or (ii) is a commissioned wholesaler for Planco Financial Services,. who, at the time employment terminates, satisfies the minimum service and Account balance requirements established by the Committee or the Plan Administrator (two years and $50,000), the Company shall distribute the amounts credited to such a Participant’s Account in accordance with the distribution elections in place at such time. Notwithstanding the foregoing, except for a Participant who elected to participate in the Plan prior to 2009 while a commissioned wholesaler for Planco Financial Services or a Participant who first elects to participate in the Plan after 2008 while a wholesaler for Planco Financial Services, if a Participant has an election in place to receive payment of amounts from any Account during the time of employment or service on the Board of Directors, all amounts remaining in such Account shall be distributed to such Participant in a single lump sum cash payment within 90 days of the fifth business day of the month following the month in which the Participant’s separation from service occurs. Further, if any minimum Account balance requirement is not met, the particular Account shall be distributed to the Participant in a single lump sum cash payment as soon as practicable after the Valuation Date coincident with or next succeeding the date the first installment otherwise would have been payable.

6.4      Distribution in the Event of a Termination of the Plan . In the event of a termination of the Plan, the entire amount credited to a Participant's Account as of the Valuation Date coincident with or next succeeding such event shall be distributed to the Participant in a single lump sum cash payment within 90 days after such Valuation Date, to the extent consistent with Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder..

6.5      Distribution to Fiduciary . If the Plan Administrator determines that any person to whom any amount is otherwise distributable hereunder is unable to care for his or her affairs, such amount (unless a prior claim therefor shall have been made by a duly appointed guardian, committee or other legal representative) may be distributed to any person determined by the Plan Administrator to have
fiduciary responsibility for such person otherwise entitled to such amount, in such manner and proportions as the Plan Administrator may deem appropriate. Any such distribution shall constitute a complete discharge of any obligation of the Company to such person under the Plan.

6.6
Distribution in the Event of Death or Disability . Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, in the event of a Participant's death or, to the extent consistent with Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder, the Participant’s disability, the entire amount credited to the Participant's Account as of the Valuation Date coincident with or next succeeding the date of the Participant's death or disability shall be distributed in a single lump sum cash payment within 90 days after such Valuation Date to the Participant in the event of disability or, in the event of the Participant’s death, to one or more beneficiaries, if any, properly designated by the Participant by the date and in the manner required by the Plan A


dministrator. If (A) no such designation is in effect at the time of the Participant's death, (B) no designated beneficiary survives the Participant, or (C) any beneficiary designation made by the Participant conflicts with applicable law, such amount shall be paid to the Participant's estate as soon as practicable after such Valuation Date.

6.7      Distribution upon the Occurrence of a Change of Control .

( A) Distribution of Accounts . Upon the occurrence of a Change of Control that also constitutes a “change in control” as defined in the regulations promulgated under Section 409A of the Code, all Participants shall be paid single lump sum cash payments equal to the entire amount credited to their respective Accounts as of the date of such occurrence, such payments to be made immediately following, but in any event within 30 days of, the date of such Change of Control.

(B) Death Prior to Receipt of Payment . In the event of the death of a Participant before receiving a payment required by Section 6.7(A) hereof, such payment shall be made immediately following, but in any event within 90 days of, the date of the occurrence of the Change of Control to the individual or entity who would receive have received payment hereunder in the absence of a Change of Control.


ARTICLE VII
ADMINISTRATION

7.1      Administration by Committee . Except as otherwise delegated by the Committee pursuant to the Plan, (A) the Plan shall be administered by the Committee, (B) the Committee shall have full authority to administer and interpret this Plan in any manner it deems appropriate in its sole discretion, and (C) the determinations of the Committee shall be binding on and conclusive as to all parties.

7.2      Delegation of Certain Authority to Plan Administrator . Except as otherwise provided by the Committee in accordance with the Plan, the Plan Administrator shall be The Hartford's Executive Vice President, Human Resources (or other person holding a similar position) or the Chief Executive Officer. Except as otherwise provided herein, required by applicable law, or determined by the Committee, (A) the Plan Administrator shall be responsible for the performance of such administrative duties under this Plan that are not otherwise reserved to the Committee by the Plan, (B) the Plan Administrator shall have full authority to administer and interpret this Plan in any manner it deems appropriate in its sole discretion, and (C) the determinations of the Plan Administrator shall be binding and conclusive as to all parties.
  
7.3      Liability and Indemnification of Committee and Plan Administrator . In connection with any action or determination made in connection with the Plan, the Plan Administrator and the Committee shall be entitled to rely upon information furnished by or on behalf of the Company or any Participant. To the extent permitted by law, the Plan Administrator and the members of the Committee shall not be liable for, and The Hartford shall indemnify the Plan Administrator and the


members of the Committee against any liability for, any loss sustained by reason of any act or failure to act in their administrative capacities, provided such act or failure to act does not involve willful misconduct. Such indemnification shall include attorneys' fees and other costs and expenses reasonably incurred in defense of any action brought against the Plan Administrator or any member of the Committee by reason of any such act or failure to act. The Plan Administrator and any member of the Committee shall not be liable or responsible for any act or omission of another fiduciary in relation to the Plan unless the Plan Administrator or such member (A) participates knowingly in, or knowingly undertakes to conceal, such act or omission by such other fiduciary, or (B) has knowledge of a breach of fiduciary responsibility by such other fiduciary and does not make reasonable efforts to remedy such breach.


ARTICLE VIII
MISCELLANEOUS

8.1      Unfunded and Unsecured Plan . The Plan shall be unfunded and unsecured for tax purposes and for purposes of ERISA. The Hartford shall have no obligation to fund its liabilities, if any, under the Plan. Nothing in the Plan and no action taken by The Hartford or its agents hereunder shall be construed to create a trust of any kind, or a fiduciary relationship between The Hartford and any other person or entity. All funds or other assets received or held by The Hartford pursuant to or in connection with the Plan may be used by The Hartford for any corporate purpose, and The Hartford shall not be obligated to segregate such amounts from its general assets. No Participant or any other person or entity shall have any claim against The Hartford or its assets other than as an unsecured and unsubordinated general creditor of The Hartford. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, a Participant's claim hereunder shall at any time be solely for the amount then credited to the Participant's Account. Notwithstanding the foregoing, The Hartford may establish a grantor trust or purchase securities or take any other action deemed appropriate to assist The Hartford in meeting its obligations under the Plan, provided, however, that in no event shall any person or entity have any right to or interest in such trust or property by reason of the Plan.

8.2      Absence of Representations . The Plan shall not be construed to provide any representation or guarantee by The Hartford that any particular income or other tax consequence will result from a Participant's participation in the Plan. Each Participant shall be deemed to have consulted with his or her professional tax advisor to determine the tax consequences of participation hereunder. The Plan shall not be construed to provide any representation or guarantee by The Hartford that any
particular amount of a Participant's Account allocated to any of the Hypothetical Investment Funds hereunder will result in any particular investment experience related thereto, and The Hartford shall in no event be required to pay any amount to any person or entity on account of any loss suffered by reason of the operation of the Plan.

8.3      Tax Withholding . The Plan Administrator shall have the right to make such provisions as deemed appropriate in its sole discretion to satisfy any obligation of a Participating Company to withhold federal, state or local income or other taxes incurred by reason of the operation of the Plan or an Award under the Plan, including but not limited to at any time (i) requiring a Key Employee


to submit payment to a Participating Company for such taxes before making settlement of any amount due under the Plan, (ii) withholding such taxes from wages or other amounts due to the Key Employee before making settlement of any amount due under the Plan, or (iii) receiving shares of common stock of The Hartford already owned by the Key Employee or withholding such shares otherwise due to the Key Employee in an amount determined necessary to satisfy such withholding obligations; provided, however, that, notwithstanding any language herein to the contrary, any Key Employee who is an executive officer of The Hartford (within the meaning of Section 16 of the Act) shall have the right to satisfy his or her obligations to The Hartford pursuant to this Section 8.3 by instructing The Hartford not to deliver to the Key Employee common stock of The Hartford otherwise deliverable to the Key Employee in an amount sufficient to satisfy such obligations to The Hartford.

8.4      No Employment Rights . The Plan shall not, directly or indirectly, create in any Key Employee any right with respect to continuation of employment with any of the Participating Companies or to the receipt of any Eligible Compensation or other compensation. The Plan shall not interfere in any way with the rights of the applicable Participating Company to terminate, or otherwise modify, the employment of any Key Employee or its compensation policies at any time.

8.5      Rights Not Transferable . The rights of a Participant under the Plan shall not be sold, exchanged, transferred, pledged, hypothecated or otherwise disposed of, other than (A) by will, (B) by the laws of descent or distribution, or (C) pursuant to a qualified domestic relations order as defined in the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, provided that the rights of any transferee of a Participant shall not be greater than the rights of the Participant hereunder. The foregoing restriction shall be in addition to any restrictions imposed by applicable law on a Participant's ability to dispose of any rights under the Plan.

8.6      Effect of Plan . The provisions of the Plan shall be binding upon all successors and assigns of a Participant, including without limitation the Participant's estate and the executors, administrators or trustees thereof, heirs and legatees, and any receiver, trustee in bankruptcy or representative of creditors of the Participant.

8.7      Administrative Expenses . An annual charge to each Participant’s Account of up to 0.25% of the total amount credited to such Account shall be charged and applied to satisfy expenses reasonably incurred in connection with the administration of the Plan (as determined in the sole discretion of the Plan Administrator).

8.8      Amendment and Termination of the Plan . The Board of Directors or the Committee (acting on behalf of the Board of Directors) may amend or terminate the Plan or any Participant elections hereunder at any time. The Committee may at any time amend or terminate the Plan or any Participant elections hereunder if the Committee determines in its sole discretion that The Hartford will recognize income for income tax purposes with respect to any reserves accumulated under any life insurance policy obtained with respect to any Participant hereunder. The Committee or the Plan Administrator may amend the Plan to the extent (A) required by applicable law or regulation, or (B) required to maintain a favorable tax status for the Plan. Except as may be necessary to comply with a change in law or to avoid any payments hereunder being subject to an additional


tax under Section 409A of the Code, the Plan shall not be amended, modified, suspended or terminated during the period in which a Change of Control is threatened. For purposes of the preceding sentence, a Change of Control shall be deemed to be threatened for the period beginning on the date of any Potential Change of Control, and ending upon the earlier of: (I) the second anniversary of the date of such Potential Change of Control, (II) the date a Change of Control occurs, or (III) the date the Board of Directors or the Committee determines in good faith that a Change of Control is no longer threatened. Further, notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, no amendment, modification, suspension or termination following a Change of Control shall adversely impair or reduce the rights of any person with respect to any amounts previously deferred under the Plan without the consent of such person.

8.9      Governing Law . The laws of the State of Connecticut shall govern all matters relating to the Plan, except to the extent such laws are superseded by the laws of the United States.

8.10      Severability of Provisions . If any provision of the Plan shall be held invalid or unenforceable, such invalidity or unenforceability shall not affect any other provisions hereof, and the Plan shall be construed and enforced as if such invalid or unenforceable provisions had not been included herein.



EXHIBIT 10.19











THE HARTFORD

EXCESS PENSION PLAN II











(Including Amendments Effective Through January 1, 2013)














THE HARTFORD EXCESS PENSION PLAN II
The Hartford Excess Benefit Plan II (the "Plan") was effective as of January 1, 1988. The purpose of the Plan was to provide those employees participating in the Hartford Fire Insurance Company Retirement Plan for U.S. Employees (now The Hartford Retirement Plan for U.S. Employees) (the “Retirement Plan”) benefits which would have been payable under the Retirement Plan but for the limitations imposed on qualified plans by Section 415 of the Internal Revenue Code. Effective as of January 1, 1988, the Hartford Select Management Plan II was authorized by the Board of Directors of Hartford Fire Insurance Company to pay supplemental benefits to certain select management or highly compensated employees who have qualified for benefits under the Retirement Plan.
As of December 19, 1995 the Hartford Select Management Plan II was merged into the Hartford Excess Benefit Plan II and the surviving Plan was amended to accept the liabilities under ITT Hartford Excess Pension Plan I attributable to all participants thereunder other than former or then-current Presidents, Chairman, Chief Executive Officers, Chief Operating Officers or Executive Vice Presidents of Hartford Fire Insurance Company and renamed the ITT Hartford Excess Pension Plan II.
As of May 22, 1997, Hartford Life was authorized to participate in the Plan with respect to its employees. This Plan was amended and restated as of December 19, 1995, including amendments through May 22, 1997 and, effective as of May 2, 1997, was renamed the Hartford Excess Pension Plan II.
Effective January 1, 2009, the Plan, including all amendments adopted prior thereto, was further amended and restated in the form of this document, in order to comply with final regulations issued under Section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code. This Plan is intended to comply with Section



-i-


409A of the Code, and no action taken by the Corporation shall be construed in a manner that would result in the imposition of an additional tax on Participants under Section 409A of the Code.
All benefits payable under this Plan, which is intended to constitute both an unfunded excess benefit plan under Section 3(36) of Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended ("ERISA"), and a nonqualified, unfunded deferred compensation plan for a select group of management employees under Title I of ERISA, shall be paid out of the general assets of the Corporation. The Corporation may establish and fund a trust in order to aid it in providing benefits due under the Plan.
The Retirement Plan was amended, effective January 1, 2009, to provide all Participants accruing service on or after that date with Hartford Credits and Interest Credits under a Cash Balance formula. Whereas, as of December 31, 2012, Hartford Credits will cease under the Cash Balance formula of the Retirement Plan, such that only Interest Credits shall continue to be credited thereafter under that formula, effective as of December 31, 2012, Hartford Credits under this Plan shall likewise cease and only Interest Credits shall thereafter be credited.





-ii-





THE HARTFORD

EXCESS PENSION PLAN II


ARTICLE      Page
ARTICLE I DEFINITIONS     2
ARTICLE II PARTICIPATION; AMOUNT AND PAYMENT OF BENEFITS    8

2.01 Participation     8
2.02 Amount of Benefits     9
2.03 Vesting    11
2.04 Payment of Benefits    11
2.05 Payment Upon the Occurrence of a Change of Control    25

ARTICLE III GENERAL PROVISIONS     27

3.01 Funding     27
3.02 Duration of Benefits    27
3.03 Discontinuance and Amendment    28
3.04 Termination of Plan    28
3.05 Plan Not a Contract of Employment    29
3.06 Facility of Payment    29
3.07 Withholding Taxes    30
3.08 Nonalienation    30
3.09 Forfeiture for Cause    30
3.10 Claims Procedure    30
3.11 Construction    32
ARTICLE IV PLAN ADMINISTRATION    35

4.01 Responsibility for Benefit Determination    35
4.02 Duties of Committee    35
4.03 Procedure for Payment of Benefits Under the Plan     35


    





THE HARTFORD
EXCESS PENSION PLAN II
ARTICLE I
DEFINITIONS
The following terms when capitalized herein shall have the meanings assigned below.
1.01
Act shall mean the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.
1.02
Annuity Commencement Date shall mean a Participant's annuity starting date with respect to benefits payable to him or her on his or her behalf under this Plan.
1.03
Associated Company shall mean any division, subsidiary or affiliated company of the Corporation not participating in the Plan which is an Associated Company, as defined in the Retirement Plan.
1.04
Beneficial Owner shall mean any Person who, directly or indirectly, has the right to vote or dispose of or has “beneficial ownership” (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 under the Act) of any securities of a company, including any such right pursuant to any agreement, arrangement or understanding (whether or not in writing), provided that : (a) a Person shall not be deemed the Beneficial Owner of any security as a result of an agreement, arrangement or understanding to vote such security (i) arising solely from a revocable proxy or consent given in response to a public proxy or consent solicitation made pursuant to, and in accordance with, the Act and the applicable rules and regulations thereunder, or (ii) made in connection with, or to otherwise participate in, a proxy or consent solicitation made, or to be made, pursuant to, and in accordance with, the applicable provisions of the Act and the applicable rules and regulations thereunder, in either case described in clause (i) or (ii)


    





above, whether or not such agreement, arrangement or understanding is also then reportable by such Person on Schedule 13D under the Act (or any comparable or successor report); and (b) a Person engaged in business as an underwriter of securities shall not be deemed to be the Beneficial Owner of any security acquired through such Person’s participation in good faith in a firm commitment underwriting until the expiration of forty days after the date of such acquisition.

1.05
Beneficiary shall mean the spouse to whom the Member is married on his or her Annuity Commencement Date or his or her date of death, if earlier.
1.06
Board of Directors shall mean the Board of Directors of the Corporation.
1.07
Change of Control shall mean:

(i)
a report on Schedule 13D shall be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission pursuant to Section 13(d) of the Act disclosing that any Person, other than the Corporation or a subsidiary of the Corporation or any employee benefit plan sponsored by the Corporation or a subsidiary of the Corporation is the Beneficial Owner of forty percent or more of the outstanding stock of the Corporation entitled to vote in the election of directors of the Corporation;
(ii)
any Person other than the Corporation or a subsidiary of the Corporation or any employee benefit plan sponsored by the Corporation or a subsidiary of the Corporation shall purchase shares pursuant to a tender offer or exchange offer to acquire any stock of the Corporation (or securities convertible into stock) for cash, securities or any other consideration, provided that after consummation of the offer, the Person in question is the Beneficial Owner of fifteen percent or more of the outstanding stock of the Corporation entitled to vote in the election of directors of


    





the Corporation (calculated as provided in paragraph (d) of Rule 13d-3 under the Act in the case of rights to acquire stock);
(iii)
any merger, consolidation, recapitalization or reorganization of the Corporation approved by the stockholders of the Corporation shall be consummated, other than any such transaction immediately following which the persons who were the Beneficial Owners of the outstanding securities of the Corporation entitled to vote in the election of directors of the Corporation immediately prior to such transaction are the Beneficial Owners of at least 55% of the total voting power represented by the securities of the entity surviving such transaction entitled to vote in the election of directors of such entity (or the ultimate parent of such entity) in substantially the same relative proportions as their ownership of the securities of the Corporation entitled to vote in the election of directors of the Corporation immediately prior to such transaction; provided that, such continuity of ownership (and preservation of relative voting power) shall be deemed to be satisfied if the failure to meet such threshold (or to preserve such relative voting power) is due solely to the acquisition of voting securities by an employee benefit plan of the Corporation, such surviving entity or any subsidiary of such surviving entity;
(iv)
any sale, lease, exchange or other transfer (in one transaction or a series of related transactions) of all or substantially all the assets of the Corporation approved by the stockholders of the Corporation shall be consummated; or
(v)
within any 24 month period, the persons who were directors of the Corporation immediately before the beginning of such period (the “Incumbent Directors”) shall cease (for any reason other than death) to constitute at least a majority of the Board or the board of directors of any successor to the Corporation, provided that any


    





director who was not a director at the beginning of such period shall be deemed to be an Incumbent Director if such director (A) was elected to the Board by, or on the recommendation of or with the approval of, at least two-thirds of the directors who then qualified as Incumbent Directors either actually or by prior operation of this clause (v), and (B) was not designated by a Person who has entered into an agreement with the Corporation to effect a transaction described in clause (iii) or (iv).
1.08
Code shall mean the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time.
1.09
Committee shall mean the Pension Administration Committee under the Retirement Plan.
1.10
Company shall mean Hartford Fire or any successor by merger, purchase or otherwise with respect to its employees and any other Employer (as that term is defined in the Retirement Plan) authorized by the Board of Directors to participate in the Plan with respect to its employees.
1.11
Company Pension Plan shall mean any tax qualified defined benefit plan other than the Retirement Plan maintained by the Corporation, the Company, an Associated Company, New ITT or one of its associated companies, or ITT Industries or one its associated companies.
1.12
Corporation (the “Plan sponsor”) shall mean The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. or any successor by merger, purchase or otherwise. The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. is the sponsor of the Plan.
1.13
Deferred Compensation Program shall mean any nonqualified deferred compensation plan maintained by the Corporation, the Company, an Associated Company, New ITT or one of its associated companies, or ITT Industries or one of its associated companies.


    





1.14
Eligible Employee shall mean a person who is a member of the Retirement Plan not eligible to participate in the Hartford Excess Pension Plan IA or IB and who is determined by the Corporation as eligible to participate in the Plan. A person who is currently earning benefits under any other qualified pension or similar plan of the Company other than The Hartford Investment and Savings Plan is not an Eligible Employee. An employee who provided services to PLANCO, LLC or Hartford Life Distributors, LLC (formerly, PLANCO Financial Services, LLC) shall be eligible to participate in this Plan with respect to eligible compensation received after January 1, 2012.
1.15
ERISA shall mean the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended from time to time.
1.16
Excess Benefit Portion shall mean the portion of the Plan which is intended to constitute an unfunded excess benefit plan under Sections 3(36) and 4(b)(5) of Title I of ERISA which provides benefits not otherwise payable under the Retirement Plan due to restrictions imposed by Section 415 of the Code.
1.17
Hartford Fire shall mean Hartford Fire Insurance Company or a successor by merger, purchase or otherwise with respect to its employees.

1.18
ITT Industries shall mean the ITT Industries, Inc., an Indiana corporation, as constituted on and after December 19, 1995.
1.19
New ITT shall mean ITT Corporation, a Nevada corporation, as constituted on and after December 19, 1995.


    





1.20
Participant shall mean an Eligible Employee who is participating in the Plan pursuant to Section 2.01 hereof.
1.21
Person shall have the meaning ascribed to such term in Section 3(a)(9) of the Act, as supplemented by Section 13(d)(3) of the Act; provided, however, that Person shall not include: (a) the Corporation, any subsidiary of the Corporation or any other Person controlled by the Corporation, (b) any trustee or other fiduciary holding securities under any employee benefit plan of the Corporation or of any subsidiary of the Corporation, or (c) a corporation owned, directly or indirectly, by the stockholders of the Corporation in substantially the same proportions as their ownership of securities of the Corporation.
1.22
Plan shall mean the Hartford Excess Pension Plan II effective January 1, 2009, as set forth herein or as amended from time to time.
1.23
Plan Year shall mean the calendar year.
1.24
Retirement Plan shall mean The Hartford Retirement Plan for U.S. Employees, as amended from time to time.
1.25
Select Management Portion shall mean the portion of the Plan, other than the Excess Benefit Portion, which is intended to constitute an unfunded deferred compensation plan for a select group of management or highly compensated employees under Title I of ERISA.



    





ARTICLE II
PARTICIPATION; AMOUNT AND PAYMENT OF BENEFITS
2.01     Participation .
(a)
An Eligible Employee shall participate in the Excess Benefit Portion of the Plan provided such Eligible Employee's annual retirement allowance or vested benefit at the time of payment under the Retirement Plan exceeds the limitations imposed by Code Section 415(b) or 415(e).
(b)
An Eligible Employee shall participate in the Select Management Portion of the Plan provided such Eligible Employee's annual retirement allowance or vested benefit at the time of payment under the Retirement Plan is limited by reason of the Code Section 401(a)(17) limitation on Compensation (as that term is defined in the Retirement Plan).
(c)
(i)    A former Eligible Employee who was a Participant in the Hartford Excess Benefit Plan II receiving benefit payments thereunder as of December 18, 1995 shall continue to be a Participant in the Excess Benefit Portion of this Plan.
(ii)
A former Eligible Employee who was a Participant in the Hartford Select Management Plan II receiving benefit payments thereunder as of December 18, 1995 shall continue to be a Participant in the Select Management Portion of this Plan.
(d)
A Participant's participation in the Plan shall terminate upon the earlier of the Participant's death or other termination of employment with the Company and all Associated Companies unless a benefit is payable under the Plan with respect to the Participant or his or her Beneficiary under the provisions of this Article II.
2.02
Amount of Benefits . A Participant's benefit under this Article II shall be equal to the excess, if any, of (a) over (b) as determined below:


    





(a)
the monthly retirement allowance or vested benefit which would have been payable under the Retirement Plan (including any severance pay period that may be taken into account under the Retirement Plan for purposes of determining eligibility for Final Average Pay formula early retirement benefits), commencing as of the date that payments hereunder commence, determined
(i)
prior to the application of any offset required pursuant to an applicable Appendix of the Retirement Plan with respect to benefits payable under any other Company Pension Plan (as defined in Section 1.11);
(ii)
without regard to the provisions contained in the Retirement Plan relating to the maximum limitation on benefits under Section 415 of the Code;
(iii)
without regard to the limitation on Compensation resulting from the Annual Dollar Limit applicable under Section 401(a)(17) of the Code;
over
(b)    the sum of the following amounts:
(i)
the monthly retirement allowance or vested benefit which would have been payable under the Retirement Plan (including any severance pay period that may be taken into account under the Retirement Plan for purposes of determining eligibility for Final Average Pay formula early retirement benefits), commencing as of the date that payments hereunder commence, determined
(1)
prior to the application of any offset required pursuant to an applicable Appendix of the Retirement Plan with respect to benefits payable under any other Company Pension Plan (as defined in Section 1.11);


    





(2)
with regard to the provisions contained in the Retirement Plan relating to the maximum limitation on benefits under Section 415 of the Code; and
(3)
with regard to the limitation on Compensation resulting from the Annual Dollar Limit applicable under Section 401(a)(17) of the Code; and

(ii)
the amount of the benefit payable to the Participant under the ITT Corporation Excess Pension Plan II (or any successor plan thereto) or the ITT Industries Excess Pension Plan II (or any successor plan thereto) or any other nonqualified defined benefit plan maintained by an Associated Company with respect to any service which is recognized as Benefit Service for purposes of the computation of benefits under the Retirement Plan.
For purposes of this Section 2.02, if any benefit described in (b)(ii) above is payable in a form other than a single life annuity commencing on the Participant's Annuity Commencement Date, such benefit shall be converted to a single life annuity commencing on such date of Actuarial Equivalent value (as defined in the Retirement Plan).


    






2.03     Vesting
(a)
A Participant shall be vested in, and have a nonforfeitable right to, the benefit payable under this Article II to the same extent as the Participant is vested in his or her Accrued Benefit (as that term is defined in the Retirement Plan) under the provisions of the Retirement Plan.
(b)
Notwithstanding any provision of this Plan to the contrary, in the event of a Change of Control, all Participants and their Beneficiaries shall become fully vested in the benefits provided under this Plan.
2.04     Payment of Benefits
(a)
Benefits That Commenced Prior to January 1, 2009
Except as otherwise provided in Section 2.05, in accordance with transition rules promulgated by the Internal Revenue Service under Section 409A of the Code, benefits payable with respect to Plan participants that commenced prior to January 1, 2009 shall continue to be payable in accordance with the Plan provisions in effect at the time that those benefits commenced, under which Plan benefits are payable in accordance with the form, frequency and duration of benefit payments under the Retirement Plan.
(b)
Benefit Commencement Date on or After January 1, 2009
Except as otherwise provided in Section 2.05, in the event of a Participant's retirement or other termination of employment with the Company on or after January 1, 2009, or in the event of the commencement of vested benefits with respect to a Participant


    





who terminated employment prior to January 1, 2009 but who had not, as of December 31, 2008, commenced receiving his benefits under the Plan, such Participant shall receive the benefit payable under Section 2.02, to the extent vested pursuant to Section 2.03, in the form and at the time as the Participant elected (1) prior to January 1, 2009, in the case of a Participant who became a Participant prior to 2009, or (2) prior to the January 31 following the year in which a person first became a Participant, in the case of an Eligible Employee who was not a Participant prior to 2008. There are two formulas under the Plan that correspond to the two formulas under the Retirement Plan – an Excess Pension Plan Final Average Pay formula that provides benefits in excess of what can be provided by the Retirement Plan’s final average pay formula, and an Excess Pension Plan Cash Balance formula that provides benefits in excess of what can be provided by the Retirement Plan’s cash balance formula. If the form of payment of any Excess Pension Plan Final Average Pay formula benefit is other than a single life annuity over the life of the Participant, or if the form of payment of any Excess Pension Plan Cash Balance formula benefit is other than a lump sum, the benefit shall be adjusted as provided in the Retirement Plan to reflect the different payment form, and, if the commencement of any Excess Pension Plan Final Average Pay formula payments is other than the Participant’s Normal Retirement Date, as defined in the Retirement Plan, the benefit shall also be adjusted as provided in the Retirement Plan to reflect the different Annuity Commencement Date.
Participants shall make different time and form of payment elections with respect to their Excess Pension Plan Final Average Pay formula benefit (applicable to Eligible Employees who were originally hired before January 1, 2001, and whose


    





pensionable compensation for one or more years through 2008 exceeded the maximum amount that could be taken into account under the Retirement Plan), and their Excess Pension Plan Cash Balance formula benefit (applicable to Eligible Employees who were originally hired on or after January 1, 2001, and, after January 1, 2009, to Eligible Employees who were previously covered by the Final Average Pay formula and whose pensionable compensation for any year exceeded the Retirement Plan maximum amount). For purposes of the Excess Pension Plan Cash Balance formula, a Participant’s benefit as of any date is determined by the Participant’s account balance (including Hartford Credits for pensionable compensation that exceeds the Compensation that can be taken into account under the Retirement Plan, and Interest Credits thereon, as the amount of such Hartford Credits and Interest Credits are defined under the Retirement Plan).
If the present value of a Participant’s total vested Excess Pension Plan benefit (Final Average Pay formula and Cash Balance formula benefits combined, plus benefits under any other nonqualified defined benefit plan) is less than the Code Section 402(g) limit ($16,500, as adjusted for inflation after 2009), the Participant’s benefit will automatically be paid to the Participant in a single lump sum, rather than in accordance with any election made by the Participant or any default rule. For this purpose, the present value of a Participant’s Final Average Pay formula benefit will be determined based on the actuarial assumptions used for purposes of small lump sum cash-outs under the Retirement Plan. With respect to a Participant whose employment terminated prior to January 1, 2009, any such lump sum payment shall be made within 90 days of June 1, 2009, based on the present value as of June 1, 2009. With respect to a Participant whose employment terminates on or after January


    





1, 2009, any such lump sum payment shall be made within 90 days of the Participant’s separation from service, based on the present value as of that time. If the present value of the Participant’s total vested benefit is greater than the Code Section 402(g) limit, a Participant will receive benefits in the form the Participant selects (or in the default form of payment, in the absence of an election).
(i)     Final Average Pay Formula – Form of Payment
The sole form of distribution available under the Excess Pension Plan – Final Average Pay formula is an annuity. A Participant must select the specific form of actuarially-equivalent annuity payment (i.e. Single Life Annuity, 50% Joint & Survivor Annuity, or 25%, 50%, 75% or 100% Contingent Annuity) by the date that Final Average Pay formula payments are to commence. If a Participant does not make a distribution election by the date that the Final Average Pay formula payments are to commence, the default form of payment under the Excess Pension Plan – Final Average Pay formula is a Single Life Annuity if the Participant is single, or a 50% Joint & Survivor Annuity if the Participant is married.
Timing of payments - A participant in the Excess Pension Plan Final Average Pay formula can timely elect, as described above, that such Final Average Pay benefits begin either (i) as of the later of separation from service or any time between ages 50 and 65, or (ii) upon separation from service (but not earlier than age 50). For purposes of the Plan, a Participant separates from service when the Participant either stops working, or when the level of services provided – whether as an employee or as an independent contractor –permanently decreases to no more than 20% of the average level of services


    





provided during the prior 36 months. Separation from service shall be determined in accordance with policies or practices that the Company shall adopt in accordance with, or as otherwise determined pursuant to, Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder. In the event that payments begin upon separation from service, the first payment shall be made within the 90 day period starting with the first day of the third month following the date of separation from service, and such first payment shall include payments for any months (following attainment of age 50) that are after the later of separation from service or the end of any notice period.
Default timing rule – A participant in the Excess Pension Plan – Final Average Pay formula who does not make a timely election, as described above, as to when benefits are to begin will automatically begin receiving benefits the later of (1) attainment of age 50 (in which case the first payment shall be made within the 90 day period starting with the first day of the month following attainment of age 50, or (2) upon separation from service (in which case the first payment shall be made within the 90 day period starting with the first day of the third month following the date of separation from service, and such first payment shall include payments for any months after the later of separation from service or the end of any notice period). Notwithstanding the above, a Participant whose employment terminated prior to January 1, 2009, and who on January 1, 2009 has attained age 50, and who does not make a payment timing election prior to January 1, 2009, and who has not


    





previously commenced payments, shall begin receiving benefits during the 90 day period starting on June 1, 2009.
Changing the Form or Timing of a Distribution Election – A Participant may change either the form or timing of a prior Final Average Pay benefit distribution election (or default provision), provided, however, that such a change may not delay the benefit commencement date beyond the later of the time the Participant attains age 65 or separates from service. After December 31, 2008, in accordance with final regulations promulgated under Section 409A of the Code, a Participant who wishes to change the timing of a previously-elected (or default) benefit commencement date, is subject to the following restrictions:
•
the new election cannot take effect until at least 12 months after the date of the new election,
•
the election change must provide for a new payment date that is at least five years after the originally scheduled payment date, and
•
the new election may not be made less than 12 months prior to the date of the first scheduled payment.
(ii)     Cash Balance Formula – Form of Payment
A Participant in the Excess Pension Plan Cash Balance formula can elect that Cash Balance formula benefits begin upon separation from service, or as of the later of separation from service or any age up until attainment of age 65. An Eligible Employee who became a Participant in the Excess Pension Plan prior to 2009 can elect by December 31, 2008 whether to


    





receive any vested Excess Pension Plan Cash Balance formula benefit as an annuity or in a lump sum, and when payment is to begin. Such Cash Balance formula election is separate from any election with respect to the Excess Pension Plan Final Average Pay formula for a Participant who was hired prior to January 1, 2001 and is covered under both formulas. An Eligible Employee who first becomes a participant in the Excess Pension Plan in 2008 or later must elect, by January 31 following the calendar year in which the Participant first becomes eligible to participate, when and how (either as a lump sum or as an annuity) the Participant will receive any Excess Pension Plan Cash Balance formula benefit. If the Participant does not make a timely distribution election, the default form of payment for the Excess Pension Plan Cash Balance formula benefit is a lump sum payment payable upon separation from service (in which case payment shall be made within the 90 day period starting with the first day of the third month following the date of separation from service). Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, a Participant whose employment terminated prior to January 1, 2009, and who does not make a timely distribution election prior to January 1, 2009, and who has not previously commenced payment, shall receive a lump sum payment of the Participant’s Cash Balance formula account during the 90 day period starting on June 1, 2009.


    





Excess Pension Plan Cash Balance Formula – Form of Distribution – A Participant may elect either an actuarially-equivalent annuity or lump sum distribution option under the Excess Pension Plan Cash Balance formula. If an annuity is elected, the Participant may select the specific form of actuarially-equivalent annuity payment (i.e., Single Life Annuity, 50% Joint & Survivor Annuity, or 50% or 75% Contingent Annuity option) before the date the benefit is scheduled to commence.
Excess Pension Plan Cash Balance Formula – Timing of Distribution – With respect to any Excess Pension Plan Cash Balance formula benefit, a Participant can elect that benefits be paid following separation from service or as of any later age up to attainment of age 65, as described above. A Participant may subsequently change either the form or timing of a distribution election. However, a change may not delay the benefit commencement date beyond the later of the time the Participant attains age 65 or following separation from service. After December 31, 2008, if a Participant wishes to change the timing of the benefit commencement date, or to change the Excess Pension Plan Cash Balance formula benefit election from an annuity to a lump sum, or vice versa, the Participant is subject to the following restrictions:
•
the new election can not take effect until at least 12 months after the date of the new election,
•
the election change must provide for a new payment date that is at least five years after the originally scheduled payment date, and


    





•
the new election may not be made less than 12 months prior to the date of the first scheduled payment.
(iii)     Impact on specified employees
If a Participant is a “specified employee” as determined under the practices and policies of the Company as established in accordance with Section 409A of the Code, and payments are scheduled to start upon separation from service, then payments shall commence six months after the date the Participant separates from service. In the case of such a delay, the payments that would have been made but for the period of the delay shall be paid in a lump sum during the 10 day period following the six month anniversary of the Participant’s separation from service, together with interest thereon determined based on the interest rate credited for purposes of the Retirement Plan’s Cash Balance formula. Regular monthly annuity payments will then begin, if benefits are being paid in the form of an annuity.
(c)    Final Average Pay Formula -- Death Benefits
(i)
Final Average Pay Formula -- Pre-Retirement Survivor’s Benefit
A Participant’s spouse or other properly elected beneficiary is eligible for this coverage if the Participant is vested in the Plan and dies before pension payments begin, and is eligible for a Survivor’s Benefit under the Retirement Plan. The benefit is payable for the spouse or other beneficiary’s lifetime equal to 50% of the Participant’s adjusted Excess Pension Plan – Final Average Pay formula benefit, where the Participant’s adjusted pension benefit is the retirement or vested benefit that the Participant would have


    





been entitled to under the Excess Pension Plan – Final Average Pay formula if the Participant had terminated employment on the date of death (if then an active employee), survived until the earliest date on which the Participant could have begun receiving payments, commenced receiving payments on that date in the form of a 50% joint and survivor annuity; and died the next day. Survivor benefit payments begin on the first day of the month following the Participant’s date of death (if payments begin before the earliest date on which the Participant could have begun to collect a benefit, the survivor’s benefit payments will be further reduced actuarially, in accordance with the actuarial factors under the Retirement Plan, to reflect the earlier commencement date), and will be paid in the form of an annuity for the life of the survivor. If the total value as of the date of death of the survivor benefit payable (including any benefits payable under the Cash Balance formula portion of the Plan, if applicable) is less than the Code Section 402(g) limit ($16,500, as such amount may be adjusted for inflation after 2009), the pre-retirement survivor benefit will automatically be paid, in the form of a lump sum, within 90 days following the Participant’s death. For purposes of this Section, a Participant’s beneficiary will be the individual designated by the Participant by proper written request to the Company in accordance with the rules and procedures established by the Committee to receive the Pre-Retirement Survivor’s Benefit under the Final Average Pay formula in the event of the Participant’s death. A Participant may designate different individuals as beneficiaries for the Excess Pension Plan – Final Average Pay formula and the Excess Pension Plan – Cash Balance formula. If no


    





individual is specifically designated as beneficiary for purposes of the Pre-Retirement Survivor’s Benefit under the Excess Pension Plan – Final Average Pay formula, or if the designated beneficiary predeceases the Participant, the Participant’s beneficiary will be the Participant’s surviving spouse, or if there is no surviving spouse, then the first living person as follows: (a) a sole individual designated as beneficiary under the Excess Pension Plan – Cash Balance formula; (b) a sole individual designated as beneficiary under The Hartford Excess Savings Plan; (c) a sole individual designated as beneficiary under The Hartford Investment and Savings Plan; (d) a sole individual designated as beneficiary under the Company's basic group term life insurance plan; (e) a sole individual designated as beneficiary under the Company's optional group term life insurance plan; (f) in the event more than one individual was designated as primary beneficiary under any of the above plans, the oldest of such designated beneficiaries under the first-listed plan in the above order where that designation occurs [should there be multiple beneficiaries named under any of (a)-(e) above, but only one is living, the sole living beneficiary shall be treated as a “sole individual designated as beneficiary” for purposes of any of (a)-(e) above]; (g) the oldest descendant of the Participant; (h) the Participant's father; (i) the Participant's mother; (j) the Participant's oldest brother or sister; (k) the oldest descendant of any deceased brother or sister of the Participant; (l) the Participant's oldest grandparent; (m) the Participant's oldest uncle, aunt or descendants of deceased uncles and aunts; or (n) the oldest descendant of the Participant's last deceased spouse as if the deceased spouse had survived the Participant.


    





A Participant may change the beneficiary designation at any time, subject to the Participant’s spouse’s written notarized consent if the Participant is married, by completing a beneficiary designation form. A Participant may not name more than one person, nor may a Participant name a trust or estate, as beneficiary for purposes of the Excess Pension Plan – Final Average Pay formula benefit. Unless a later date is specified, a new beneficiary designation is effective on the first day of the month that falls on or follows the date the completed beneficiary designation form is received by the Company or its designated representative.
(ii)
Final Average Pay Formula: Dependent Spouse/Dependent Domestic Partner Benefit
The Dependent Spouse/Dependent Domestic Partner Benefit provides monthly income to a surviving dependent spouse or dependent domestic partner. This benefit income is paid regardless of the payment method elected under the Final Average Pay formula. A dependent spouse or dependent domestic partner of a deceased active employee or retiree entitled to benefits under the Final Average Pay formula will qualify for these benefits if the Participant meets all of the following requirements and is entitled to a Dependent Spouse/Dependent Domestic Partner Benefit under the Retirement Plan:
•
Was married to the dependent spouse (or was the domestic partner) for at least five years before death occurs;


    





•
Was married to the dependent spouse (or was the domestic partner) before the Participant reaches age 60; and
•
Had 20 years of Eligibility Service, as defined in the Retirement Plan, and was age 50, or had 25 years of Eligibility Service regardless of age.
A dependent spouse or dependent domestic partner is one who earns less than one-half of the total earned income of the couple during the three calendar years preceding the earlier of:
•
The retirement of the spouse or domestic partner;
•
The retirement of a retiree; or
•
The death of the employee or retiree.
Benefit payments begin on the first day of the month following the Participant’s death, and are payable as an annuity for the life of the surviving dependent spouse or dependent domestic partner. In the event of the death of an active employee, the monthly income of the Participant’s dependent spouse or dependent domestic partner (as described above) will equal 50% of the Participant’s Excess Pension Plan – Final Average Pay benefit computed as of the time of death. In the event of the death of an eligible retired Participant, the monthly payment to the dependent spouse or dependent domestic partner will be equal to 50% of the Participant’s earned Excess Pension Plan – Final Average Pay benefit. If the dependent spouse or dependent domestic partner is more than five years younger than the Participant, the benefit will be reduced on the same basis as under the Retirement Plan.


    





(d)
Cash Balance Pay Formula -- Death Benefits
In the event a vested Participant dies prior to commencement of the Participant’s Cash Balance formula benefit, the Participant’s beneficiary will receive the Participant’s full account balance as a lump sum payment within 90 days of the Participant’s death. Unless the Participant elects otherwise, a Participant’s beneficiary under the Excess Pension Plan - Cash Balance formula is the same as the beneficiary under the Retirement Plan’s Cash Balance formula. A Participant may designate a different beneficiary for the Excess Pension Plan – Cash Balance formula, and may change that beneficiary election at any time, subject to the Participant’s spouse’s written, notarized consent if the Participant is married. A Participant may not name more than one person as beneficiary. However, a Participant may name an estate or trust as beneficiary with respect to the Excess Pension Plan – Cash Balance formula benefit. Unless a later date is specified, a new designation is effective on the first day of the month that falls on or follows the date a completed beneficiary designation form is received by the Company or its designated representative.
If there is no surviving beneficiary designated for purposes of the Excess Pension Plan – Cash Balance formula (and there is no beneficiary designated under the Retirement Plan’s Cash Balance formula), any Cash Balance formula survivor benefit will automatically be paid to the Participant’s spouse, if any, and otherwise to the Participant’s estate.

2.05     Payment Upon the Occurrence of a Change of Control . Upon the occurrence of a Change of Control that also constitutes a “change in control” as defined in the regulations


    





promulgated under Section 409A of the Code, (i) all retired Participants then receiving or then entitled to receive a retirement allowance under the Plan, (ii) all former Participants then receiving or then entitled to receive a vested benefit hereunder, and (iii) all Participants who are then still in active service shall automatically receive, in a single lump sum payment, the benefit remaining due as of the Change of Control to any such retired or former Participant or the benefit, if any, accrued by such active Participant up to the Change of Control and as determined under Section 2.02 hereof. The amount of such lump sum payment shall be equal to the sum of (i) the Participant’s Cash Balance Account, if any, plus (ii) the present value of the Participant’s Final Average Pay benefit, if any, where such present value is calculated on an actuarial basis determined by the Committee, using the interest rate assumption for immediate annuities or, where applicable, deferred annuities used by the PBGC for valuing benefits for single employer plans as published by the PBGC for the month in which such Change of Control occurs. The lump sum payment shall be made within 90 days following the first of the month after the Change of Control. In the event the Participant dies after such Change of Control but before receiving such payment, the lump sum payment shall be made to his or her Beneficiary. The calculation of a lump sum payment hereunder shall be made on the basis of the Participant's age at the Change of Control and without regard to the possibility of any future changes after the Change of Control in the amount of benefits payable hereunder because of future changes in the limitations referred to in Section 2.02 hereof. The lump sum payment represents a complete settlement of all benefits on the Participant's behalf under the Plan. To the extent that benefits are not payable because a Change of Control does not constitute a “change in control” as


    





defined in the regulations promulgated under Section 409A of the Code, payment shall be made at the time otherwise specified under the Plan without regard to the occurrence of the Change of Control.



    





ARTICLE III
GENERAL PROVISIONS
3.01     Funding .
(a)
All amounts payable in accordance with this Plan shall constitute a general unsecured obligation of the Company. Such amounts, as well as any administrative costs relating to the Plan, shall be paid out of the general assets of the Company, to the extent not paid from the assets of any trust established pursuant to paragraph (b) below.
(b)
The Company may, for administrative reasons, establish a grantor trust for the benefit of Participants in the Plan. The assets placed in said trust shall be held separate and apart from other Company funds and shall be used exclusively for the purposes set forth in the Plan and the applicable trust agreement, subject to the following conditions:
(i)
the creation of said trust shall not cause the Plan to be other than "unfunded" for purposes of Title I of ERISA;
(ii)
the Company shall be treated as "grantor" of said trust for purposes of Section 677 of the Code; and
(iii)
the agreement of said trust shall provide that its assets may be used upon the insolvency or bankruptcy of the Company to satisfy claims of the Company's general creditors and that the rights of such general creditors are enforceable by them under federal and state law.

3.02
Duration of Benefits . Benefits shall accrue under the Plan on behalf of a Participant only for so long as (a) the provisions of Section 415 or 401(a)(17) of the Code limit the benefits that are payable under the Retirement Plan.


    





3.03
Discontinuance and Amendment . The Board of Directors reserves the right to modify, amend, or discontinue in whole or in part, benefit accruals under the Plan at any time. However, no modification, amendment, or discontinuance shall adversely affect the right of any Participant to receive the benefits accrued as of the date of such modification, amendment or discontinuance and after the occurrence of a Change of Control, no modification or amendment shall be made to Section 2.05. Notwithstanding the foregoing, following any amendment and except as provided in Article II with respect to lump sum payments hereunder, benefits may be adjusted as required to take into account the amount of benefits payable under the Retirement Plan after the application of the limitations referred to in Section 2.02 hereof.
3.04
Termination of Plan . The Board of Directors reserves the right to terminate the Plan at any time, provided, however, that no termination shall be effective retroactively. As of the effective date of termination of the Plan,
(a)
the benefits of any Participant or Beneficiary whose benefit payments have commenced shall continue to be paid, but only to the extent such benefits are not otherwise payable under the Retirement Plan because of the limitations referred to in Section 2.02 hereof, and
(b)
no further benefits shall accrue on behalf of any Participant whose benefits have not commenced, and such Participant and his or her Beneficiary shall retain the right to benefits hereunder; provided that, on or after the effective date of termination,
(i)
the Participant is vested under the Retirement Plan and


    





(ii)
such benefits are not at any time otherwise payable under the Retirement Plan because of the limitations imposed by Section 415 or 401(a)(17) of the Code.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Plan may not be terminated upon the occurrence of a Change of Control unless and until all Participants have been paid all benefits due under the Plan. All other provisions of this Plan shall remain in effect.
3.05
Plan Not a Contract of Employment . This Plan is not a contract of employment, and the terms of employment of any Participant shall not be affected in any way by this Plan or related instruments, except as specifically provided therein. The establishment of this Plan shall not be construed as conferring any legal rights upon any person for a continuation of employment, nor shall it interfere with the rights of the Company to discharge any person and to treat him or her without regard to the effect which such treatment might have upon him or her under this Plan. Each Participant and all persons who may have or claim any right by reason of his or her participation shall be bound by the terms of this Plan and all agreements entered into pursuant thereto.
3.06
Facility of Payment . In the event that the Committee shall find that a Participant is unable to care for his or her affairs because of illness or accident or is a minor or has died, the Committee may, unless claim shall have been made therefor by a duly appointed legal representative, direct that any benefit payment due him, to the extent not payable from a grantor trust, be paid on his or her behalf to his or her spouse, a child, a parent or other blood relative, or to a person with whom he or she resides, and any such payment so made shall be a complete discharge of the liabilities of the Company and the Plan therefor.


    






3.07
Withholding Taxes . The Company shall have the right to deduct from each payment to be made under the Plan any required withholding taxes, including FICA taxes.
3.08
Nonalienation . Subject to any applicable law, and except as may be required under the terms of a qualified domestic relations order regarding which the Committee or its delegate received notice prior to July 1, 2012, no benefit under the Plan shall be subject in any manner to anticipation, alienation, sale, transfer, assignment, pledge, encumbrance or charge, and any attempt to do so shall be void, nor shall any such benefit be in any manner liable for or subject to garnishment, attachment, execution or levy, or liable for or subject to the debts, contracts, liabilities, engagements or torts of the person entitled to such benefits. Effective July 1, 2012, no domestic relations order, other than an order which the Committee or its delegate received notice of prior to July 1, 2012, shall be accepted for this Plan.
3.09
Forfeiture for Cause . In the event that a Participant shall at any time be convicted of a crime involving dishonesty or fraud on the part of such Participant in his or her relationship with the Company, all benefits that would otherwise be payable to him or her to his or her spouse or a Beneficiary under the Plan shall be forfeited.
3.10
Claims Procedure
(a)     Submission of Claims
Claims for benefits under the Plan shall be submitted in writing to the Committee or to an individual designated by the Committee for this purpose.
(b)     Denial of Claim


    





If any claim for benefits is wholly or partially denied, the claimant shall be given written notice within 90 days following the date on which the claim is filed, which notice shall set forth
(i)    the specific reason or reasons for the denial;
(ii)    specific reference to pertinent Plan provisions on which the denial is based;
(iii)
a description of any additional material or information necessary for the claimant to perfect the claim and an explanation of why such material or information is necessary; and
(iv)    an explanation of the Plan's claim review procedure.
If special circumstances require an extension of time for processing the claim, written notice of an extension shall be furnished to the claimant prior to the end of the initial period of 90 days following the date on which the claim is filed. Such an extension may not exceed a period of 90 days beyond the end of said initial period.

If the claim has not been granted and written notice of the denial of the claim is not furnished within 90 days following the date on which the claim is filed, the claim shall be deemed denied for the purpose of proceeding to the claim review procedure.
(c)     Claim Review Procedure
The claimant or his or her authorized representative shall have 60 days after receipt of written notification of denial of a claim to request a review of the denial by making written request to the Committee, and may review pertinent documents and submit issues and comments in writing within such 60-day period.


    





Not later than 60 days after receipt of the request for review, the Committee shall render and furnish to the claimant a written decision, which shall include specific reasons for the decision and shall make specific references to pertinent Plan provisions on which it is based. If special circumstances require an extension of time for processing, the decision shall be rendered as soon as possible, but not later than 120 days after receipt of the request for review, provided that written notice and explanation of the delay are given to the claimant prior to commencement of the extension. Such decision by the Committee shall not be subject to further review. If a decision on review is not furnished to a claimant within the specified time period, the claim shall be deemed to have been denied on review.
(d)     Exhaustion of Remedy
No claimant shall institute any action or proceeding in any state or federal court of law or equity or before any administrative tribunal or arbitrator for a claim for benefits under the Plan until the claimant has first exhausted the procedures set forth in this Section.

3.11
Construction
(a)
The Plan is intended to constitute both an excess benefit arrangement and an unfunded deferred compensation arrangement maintained for a select group of management or highly compensated employees within the meaning of Section 201(2), Section 301(a)(3), and Section 401(a)(1) of ERISA. Subject to the preceding sentence, the Plan shall be construed, regulated and administered under the laws of the State of Connecticut, to the extent such laws are not superseded by applicable federal law.


    





(b)
The Plan is intended to satisfy the applicable requirements of Section 409A of the Code and regulations and guidance thereunder, and shall be operated and interpreted consistent with that intent.  If the Committee determines, in good faith, that any provision of this Plan does not satisfy such requirements or could otherwise cause any person to recognize additional taxes, penalties or interest under Section 409A of the Code, the Committee shall modify, to the maximum extent practicable, the original intent of the applicable provision without violation of the requirements of Section 409A of the Code (“ Section 409A Compliance ”), and, notwithstanding any provision herein to the contrary, the Committee shall have broad authority to amend or to modify the Plan, without advance notice to or consent by any person, to the extent necessary or desirable to ensure Section 409A Compliance.  In no event shall the Company have any liability or obligation with respect to any taxes, penalties or interest for which a Member may become liable as a result of the application of Section 409A of the Code.  Any determinations by the Committee shall be final and binding on all parties. The Plan has been administered in good faith compliance with Section 409A and the guidance issued thereunder from January 1, 2005 through December 31, 2008.
(c)
The masculine pronoun shall mean the feminine wherever appropriate.
(d)
The illegality of any particular provision of this document shall not affect the other provisions and the document shall be construed in all respects as if such invalid provision were omitted.
(e)
The headings and subheadings in the Plan have been inserted for convenience of reference only, and are to be ignored in any construction of the provisions thereof.


    





ARTICLE IV
PLAN ADMINISTRATION
4.01     Responsibility for Benefit Determination
The benefit of a Participant, spouse, or Beneficiary under this Plan shall be determined by the Committee, as provided in Section 4.02 below.
4.02     Duties of Committee
The Committee shall calculate, in accordance with Article II, the benefit of each Participant, spouse, or Beneficiary under the Plan. The Committee shall have full discretionary authority to resolve any question which shall arise under the Plan as to any person's eligibility for benefits, the calculation of benefits, the form, commencement date, frequency, duration of payment, or the identity of the Beneficiary. Such question shall be resolved by the Committee under rules uniformly applicable to all persons or employees similarly situated.
The power to amend the Plan, subject to the restrictions of Section 3.03, has been delegated to the Corporation’s Executive Vice President, Human Resources, provided that such amendment, in the judgment of the Corporation’s Executive Vice President, Human Resources, does not involve a material cost to the Company.
4.03     Procedure for Payment of Benefits Under the Plan



    





With respect to any benefit to which a Participant, spouse, or Beneficiary is entitled under this Plan, the Committee (i) shall direct the commencement of benefit payments hereunder in accordance with the applicable procedures established by the Corporation, the Company and/or the Committee regarding the disbursement of amounts from the general funds of the Corporation and (ii) shall arrange, in conjunction with any other applicable excess benefit plan, for the payment of benefits under the Plan and/or any other applicable excess benefit plan.


    


EXHIBIT 10.20
THE HARTFORD

EXCESS SAVINGS PLAN IA











(Including Amendments Effective Through January 1, 2013)


THE HARTFORD EXCESS SAVINGS PLAN IA
(As amended and restated effective January 1, 2013)

ARTICLE I
PURPOSE

1.1
Purpose . The purpose of the Plan is to provide a means of restoring the contributions lost by certain Members under the Qualified Plan due to the application of the limitation imposed by Code Section 401(a)(17) (which limits the amount of an employee's compensation that may be taken into account annually under a qualified plan), and, prior to January 1, 2013, Code Section 402(g)(1) (which limits the amount of compensation an employee may defer annually under a qualified plan), and Code Section 415 (which limits the amount of contributions that may be made annually under a qualified plan on behalf of a particular employee). The Plan is intended to constitute an unfunded deferred compensation arrangement maintained for a select group of management or highly compensated employees within the meaning of Sections 201(2), 301(a)(3) and 401(a)(1) of ERISA. Capitalized terms used herein and not defined herein shall have the meanings assigned to such terms by the Qualified Plan.

Effective January 1, 2009, the Plan, including all amendments adopted prior thereto, was amended and restated in the form of this document, in order to comply with final regulations issued under Section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code. The Plan is intended to comply with Section 409A of the Code, and no action taken by the Company shall be construed in a manner that would result in the imposition of an additional tax on participants under Section 409A of the Code. The Plan has been administered in good faith compliance with Section 409A of the Code and the guidance issued thereunder from January 1, 2005 through December 31, 2008.



ARTICLE II
DEFINITIONS

The following terms when capitalized herein shall have the meanings assigned below.

“ Accounts ” means, collectively, a Participant's Participant Contribution Account, Excess Matching Company Contribution Account, and Excess Non-Elective Company Contribution Account.

“ Act ” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended from time to time.

“ Beneficiary ” means, unless a Participant elects otherwise, the individual(s) designated to receive benefits under the Qualified Plan after the death of a Member (if any). A Participant may designate a different Beneficiary for the Plan, and may change that Beneficiary election at any time, subject to a spouse’s written, notarized consent if married. Unless a later date is specified, a new beneficiary designation is effective on the first day of the first month that falls on or follows the date the completed beneficiary form is received by the Plan Administrator (or its delegate). A Participant may also name an estate or a trust as Beneficiary. If (A) no Beneficiary designation is in effect at the time of the Participant's death, (B) no designated Beneficiary survives the Participant, or (C) any Beneficiary designation made by the Participant conflicts with applicable law, such amount shall be paid to the Participant's spouse, if any, or, if no surviving spouse, his or her estate as soon as practicable following the date of his or her death.

“ Change of Control ” has the meaning assigned by the Incentive Stock Plan as in effect on January 1, 2009.
    
“ Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time.

“ Company ” means Hartford Fire.

“ Effective Date ” means December 19, 1995.

“ Eligible Compensation ” means, on or after January 1, 2013, compensation recognized under the Qualified Plan without regard to the Statutory Compensation Limit, but excluding annual bonuses that are not “performance-based” as defined under Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder. Effective as of January 1, 2013, “Eligible Compensation” shall not include compensation in excess of one million dollars ($1,000,000). Prior to January 1, 2013, “Eligible Compensation” shall not be subject to the $1 million ($1,000,000) limit and shall have the meaning assigned by the Qualified Plan, except that (A) any reduction in compensation required under the Qualified Plan due to the application of Code Section 401(a)(17) shall be disregarded, and (B) any reduction required under the Qualified Plan due to an election to make Participant Contributions under this Plan shall be disregarded.

“ Eligible Member ” means a Member who is eligible to participate in the Plan as provided in Article III hereof.

“ ERISA ” means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended from time to time.



“ Excess Floor Company Contribution ” means the contribution credited on behalf of a Participant prior to January 1, 2013 under Section 5.3(A) hereof.

“ Excess Matching Company Contribution ” means the contribution credited on behalf of a Participant under Section 5.4 hereof.

“ Excess Matching Company Contribution Account ” means the account maintained for a Participant to record Excess Matching Company Contributions and the hypothetical earnings thereon.
 
“ Excess Non-Elective Company Contribution ” means the contribution credited on behalf of a Participant under Section 5.3(B) hereof.
“ Excess Non-Elective Company Contribution Account ”, formerly known as the “Excess Floor Company Contribution Account”, means the account maintained for a Participant to record Excess Non-Elective Company Contributions and, prior to January 1, 2013, Excess Floor Company Contributions, if any, and the hypothetical earnings thereon.
“ Excess Plan Committee ” means the committee established by the Board of Directors of The Hartford to handle funding and other related matters associated with certain nonqualified benefit plans, including the Plan.

“ Formula Price ” means the highest of the following: (i) the highest composite daily closing price of The Hartford stock during the 60 calendar day period preceding the date of the Change of Control, (ii) the highest gross price paid for such stock during the foregoing period, as reported in a report on Schedule 13D filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, or (iii) the highest gross price paid or to be paid for such stock (whether by exchange, conversion, distribution upon merger, liquidation or otherwise) in any of the transactions constituting a Change of Control.

“ Hartford Fire ” has the meaning assigned by the Qualified Plan. Hartford Fire is the sponsor of the Plan.

“ Hypothetical Investment Fund ” means a mutual fund or other investment vehicle or measure or index of investment performance selected by the Investment and Savings Plan Investment Committee to determine the hypothetical investment experience of Participant Accounts pursuant to Article IV.

“ Incentive Stock Plan ” means The Hartford 2005 Incentive Stock Plan, as it may be amended from time to time.

“ Investment and Savings Plan Investment Committee ” means the committee established by the Board of Directors of Hartford Fire to handle investment matters associated with the Qualified Plan and certain nonqualified benefit plans, including the Plan.

“ Member ” means an individual who qualifies as a Member as defined in the Qualified Plan.



“ Participant ” means an Eligible Member who has elected to participate in the Plan pursuant to Article III hereof, and who has not become an ineligible Member or received a distribution of all amounts credited to his or her Accounts under the Plan.

“ Participant Contributions ” means the amount of Eligible Compensation a Member has elected to defer in accordance with a Participant Contribution Election Form.

“ Participant Contribution Account ” means the account maintained for a Participant to record the Participant Contributions and the hypothetical gains and /or losses credited thereon under Article V.

“ Participant Contribution Election Form ” shall mean the form (in paper, electronic or other format) or other authorization for Participant Contributions filed by a Participant in accordance with Article III.

“ Pension Administration Committee ” has the meaning assigned by the Qualified Plan.

“ Plan ” means this plan - The Hartford Excess Savings Plan IA.

“ Plan Administrator ” has the meaning assigned to the term “Plan Administrator” by the Qualified Plan.

“ Plan Year ” has the meaning assigned by the Qualified Plan.

“ Qualified Plan ” means The Hartford Investment and Savings Plan, as it may be amended from time to time.

“ Statutory Compensation Limit ” means the limit set forth in Code Section 401(a)(17).

“ Statutory Limits ” means, collectively, the limits set forth in Code Sections 401(a)(17), 402(g)(1), and 415(c).

“ The Hartford ” has the meaning assigned by the Qualified Plan.




ARTICLE III
ELIGIBILITY AND PARTICIPATION

3.1 Eligibility of Members . A Member who qualifies as an Eligible Member pursuant to this Section shall be eligible to participate in the Plan in accordance with Section 3.2.

(A) Eligible Member Defined . A Member, other than a Member of a group that the Plan Administrator has determined is ineligible to participate in the Plan, (i) whose compensation recognized under the Qualified Plan for the next succeeding Plan Year is projected to exceed the Statutory Compensation Limit and (ii) who is notified, in accordance with Section 3.2(A), that he or she is eligible to participate in the Plan, shall be deemed to be an Eligible Member in this Plan as of the first day of the next succeeding Plan Year.

(B) Rehired Members . An Eligible Member whose employment with the Company terminates shall again become an Eligible Member only upon completing, subsequent to the date of rehire, the requirements for eligibility set forth in this Section, unless otherwise determined in the sole discretion of the Plan Administrator.

(C) Members Deemed Ineligible for Participation .

(i) Receipt of Hardship Withdrawal under the Qualified Plan . If a Member receives a hardship withdrawal under the Qualified Plan, and such Member ceases certain savings for a period of not less than 6 months pursuant to the Qualified Plan, such Member shall be deemed an ineligible Member for such 6 month period. Such Member shall no longer be deemed an ineligible Member as of the first day of the Plan Year following the end of such 6 month period.

(ii) Partial Ineligibility of Certain Members . A Member shall be deemed an ineligible Member solely with respect to Excess Matching Company Contributions, Excess Floor Company Contributions, or Excess Non-Elective Company Contributions to the extent such Contributions otherwise creditable on behalf of such Member hereunder are credited instead under The Hartford Deferred Compensation Plan.
 
3.2 Participation .

(A) Notice of Eligibility to Participate . The Plan Administrator shall notify a Member of his or her eligiblity to participate in the Plan. Receipt of Notice from the Plan Administrator pursuant to this Section 3.2(A) shall be a condition to participation in the Plan.

(B) Election to Participate . After an Eligible Member receives notice from the Plan Administrator pursuant to Section 3.2(A), such Eligible Member may elect to participate in the Plan by filing a properly completed Participant Contribution Election Form, or such other authorization or information as the Plan Administrator may require, with the


party and by the date designated by the Plan Administrator. With respect to years prior to 2013, such Participant Contribution Election Form shall authorize automatic Participant Contributions (by payroll deduction) from a Participant's Eligible Compensation for a calendar year in any whole percentage, up to a maximum of 6%, for each pay period beginning after the earlier of when (i) the Eligible Member’s elected level of combined before-tax and Roth 401(k) contributions under the Qualified Plan reaches the Code Section 402(g) annual deferral limit applicable to the calendar year (determined as of the December 31 prior to the start of the Plan Year, based on the Participant’s elected level of such Qualified Plan contributions for the applicable Plan Year), or (ii) the Eligible Member’s year-to-date Eligible Compensation exceeds the Statutory Compensation Limit for the applicable calendar year. With respect to years after 2012, such Participant Contribution Election Form shall authorize automatic Participant Contributions (by payroll deduction) from a Participant's Eligible Compensation for a calendar year in any whole percentage, up to a maximum of 6%, for each pay period beginning when the Eligible Member’s year-to-date Eligible Compensation exceeds the Statutory Compensation Limit for the applicable calendar year. Once commenced, such deductions shall continue each calendar year until the Participant changes the amount of such Participant Contributions pursuant to this Section 3.2. Such election shall be irrevocable as of the latest date that an election is permitted under Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, and except as otherwise permitted under Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder, an election with respect to the deferral of Eligible Compensation, other than “performance-based compensation” within the meaning of Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder, shall be irrevocable no later than the last day of the calendar year immediately preceding the calendar year in which the services related to such Eligible Compensation are performed, and an election with respect to the deferral of “performance-based compensation” within the meaning of Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder shall be irrevocable no later than the date that is six months before the end of the applicable performance period.

(i) Amount of Participant Contributions . The Participant Contributions authorized by a Participant shall be in whole percentages of Eligible Compensation (subject to the limitations set forth above) for each pay period, in effect on the date the payroll deductions to which the Participant Contribution Election Form relates.

(ii) Changes in Participant Contributions . Subject to Section 3.2(B)(i) hereof, a Participant may elect to increase or decrease the amount of Participant Contributions previously authorized by filing a properly completed change form, or such other authorization as the Plan Administrator may require, with the party and by the date designated by the Plan Administrator. Such change shall be made in whole percentages of Eligible Compensation. A change in election to defer Eligible Compensation, other than “performance-based compensation” within the meaning of Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder, shall be effective with respect to Eligible Compensation related to services performed on or after the first day of the Plan Year following receipt of the change form by the designated party. A change in election to defer "performance -


based compensation" (within the meaning of Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder) related to services performed during the year in which such change is made, must be made by and shall be effective on the date that is no later than six months before the end of the applicable performance period (which will generally be June 30). A change in election to defer performance-based compensation shall not be effective if such election is made on a date that is later than six months before the end of the performance period to which such performance-based compensation relates. A Participant cannot elect during the Plan Year to increase or decrease the amount of Participant Contributions for that year; in addition, no changes during the Plan Year to the Participant’s contribution elections under the Qualified Plan shall have any effect on the amount of the Participant’s Participant Contributions under this Plan.

(C) Establishment of Participant Accounts . With respect to each Participant, the Company shall maintain on its books a Participant Contribution Account, Excess Matching Company Contribution Account, and Excess Non-Elective Company Contribution Account. Amounts shall be credited to or debited from such Accounts as provided in Article V hereof. The Plan Administrator shall cause records indicating the value of each Participant's Accounts to be maintained. Such value shall be established at the same time as account values are established under the Qualified Plan, and shall be reported to the Participant from time to time as determined appropriate by the Plan Administrator.

(D) Termination of Participation . The participation of a Participant in the Plan shall terminate on the earlier of (i) the date that all amounts credited to the Participant's
Accounts have been distributed pursuant to the Plan, or (ii) such other date as may be designated by the Plan Administrator or the Pension Administration Committee consistent with Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder.




ARTICLE IV
HYPOTHETICAL INVESTMENT FUND INVESTMENT ALLOCATIONS

4.1 Selection of Hypothetical Investment Funds . The Investment and Savings Plan Investment Committee shall select one or more Hypothetical Investment Funds to which a Participant may elect pursuant to the Plan to allocate all or a portion of amounts then and thereafter credited to the Participant. Unless otherwise provided by the Investment and Savings Plan Investment Committee, such Hypothetical Investment Funds shall correspond to those offered for investment under the Qualified Plan from time to time. To the extent provided herein, such Hypothetical Investment Funds shall be used to measure the hypothetical investment experience of the portion of a Participant's Account that the Participant properly elects to have allocated thereto. The Investment and Savings Plan Investment Committee may change the selection of Hypothetical Investment Funds from time to time in its sole discretion. The selection of any such Hypothetical Investment Funds shall not require the Company to invest or earmark any of its assets in any specific manner.

4.2 No Actual Investment . Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, no Participant Contributions, Excess Matching Company Contributions, Excess Floor Company Contributions, or Excess Non-Elective Company Contributions hereunder, and no amounts credited to a Participant's Accounts pursuant to the Plan, shall be set aside or invested in any actual fund on behalf of the Participant, provided, however, that nothing in the Plan shall be construed to preclude the Company from directly or indirectly making investments for its own account in any actual investment vehicle corresponding to the Hypothetical Investment Funds (or otherwise) in order to assist the Company in meeting its obligations hereunder, or for any other reason whatsoever. No Participant or any other person or entity shall have by reason of the Plan any right to or in any such investment made by the Company.

4.3 Hypothetical Investment Fund Allocation for Accounts .

(A) Hypothetical Investment Fund Allocation Election . To the extent permitted by the Plan Administrator, a Participant may elect to have the amount then and thereafter credited to his or her Accounts allocated in multiples of one percent (1%) among one or more of the Hypothetical Investment Funds. Such election shall be made by filing a properly completed election form (or such other authorization as the Plan Administrator may require) with the party and by the date designated by the Plan Administrator. Such election shall result in the investment experience of an elected Hypothetical Investment Fund being used to measure the hypothetical investment experience of the particular portion of the Participant's Account allocated to that Hypothetical Investment Fund as provided herein.
  
(B) Change in Hypothetical Investment Fund Allocation Election . To the extent permitted by the Plan Administrator, a Participant may change the Hypothetical Investment Fund allocation previously elected by filing a properly completed change form (or such other authorization as the Plan Administrator may require) with the party and by the date designated by the Plan Administrator. Such change shall be effective following receipt of the timely filed change form by the designated party as of such date


as may be designated by the Plan administrator, and shall apply to all amounts then and thereafter credited to the Participant's Account.

(C) Failure to Make Proper Hypothetical Investment Fund Allocation Election . In the event that a Participant does not make a proper election with respect to Participant Contributions, Excess Matching Company Contributions, Excess Floor Company Contributions, or Excess Non-Elective Company Contributions pursuant to this Article IV, such Participant shall be deemed to have elected to have the entire amount (as to which no proper election is made) then and thereafter credited to his or her Participant Contribution Account, Excess Matching Company Contribution Account, or Excess Non-Elective Company Contribution Account, as the case may be, allocated to the Hypothetical Investment Fund that the Plan Administrator determines in its sole discretion generally to have the least risk of loss of principal. Effective September 1, 2006, in the event that a Participant does not make a proper Hypothetical Investment Fund allocation election with respect to any amounts credited pursuant to the Plan, such Participant shall be deemed to have elected to have the entire amount (as to which no proper election is made) then and thereafter credited to the Participant allocated to the Hypothetical Investment Fund corresponding to the applicable Default Vanguard Target Retirement Fund set forth in the Qualified Plan.

(D) Limitations on Hypothetical Investment Fund Allocation . The Plan Administrator may establish such limits on the Hypothetical Investment Fund allocations of a Participant as it may deem appropriate in its sole discretion. In the event that an investment fund under the Qualified Plan is eliminated, the Plan Administrator may provide that amounts allocated to the Hypothetical Investment Fund corresponding to the investment fund eliminated under the Qualified Plan, be reallocated to other Hypothetical Investment Funds in a manner comparable to the manner in which assets of the eliminated investment fund are reallocated under the Qualified Plan.


ARTICLE V
CREDITING AND DEBITING OF PARTICIPANT ACCOUNTS

5.1 Crediting and/or Debiting of Amounts to Participant Accounts . The amount of a Participant's Participant Contributions, Excess Matching Company Contributions, Excess Floor Company Contributions or Excess Non-Elective Company Contributions identified in this Article V shall be credited to the appropriate Accounts of the Participant during the Plan Year. Such amounts shall be so credited at the same time as such amounts would have been credited under the Qualified Plan in the absence of the Statutory Limits, had such contribution been made to the Qualified Plan.

5.2 Crediting of Participant Contributions . The amount of Participant Contributions credited to a Participant's Participant Contribution Account for a particular Plan Year shall be equal to the percentage of Eligible Compensation properly elected pursuant to the Participant Contribution Election Form of the Participant.



5.3 Crediting of Excess Floor Company Contributions and Excess Non-Elective Company Contributions .

(A) Prior to January 1, 2013, Excess Floor Company Contributions shall be credited to a Participant's Excess Floor Company Contribution Account (which account is now known as the Excess Non-Elective Company Contribution Account). The amount of Excess Floor Company Contributions credited to such account for a particular Plan Year equals one half of one percent (0.5%) of the Eligible Compensation properly taken into account for purposes of determining the Participant's Participant Contributions. Excess Floor Company Contributions are only credited after a Participant completes six months of service with the Company.
(B) On or after January 1, 2013, Excess Non-Elective Company Contributions shall be credited to a Participant's Excess Non-Elective Company Contributions Account. The amount of such contributions shall equal two percent (2%) of the Participant’s Eligible Compensation that exceeds the Statutory Compensation Limit. Excess Non-Elective Company Contributions shall only be credited after a Participant completes ninety (90) days of service with the Company (as determined under the Qualified Plan). Excess Non-Elective Company Contributions shall be credited regardless of whether or not the Participant is contributing any Participant Contributions to the Plan. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Excess Non-Elective Company Contributions shall be credited to an Excess Non-Elective Company Contribution Account for those Members, as designated by the Plan Administrator, who were not timely notified of their eligibility to participate in the Plan for the 2013 Plan Year, equal to eight percent (8%) of the Member’s 2013 Eligible Compensation that exceeds the 2013 Statutory Compensation Limit; each of those Members shall be a Participant in the Plan despite the Member not contributing any Participant Contributions to the Plan in 2013.

5.4 Crediting of Excess Matching Company Contributions .
(A) Prior to January 1, 2013, the amount of Excess Matching Company Contributions credited to a Participant's Excess Matching Company Contributions Account for a particular Plan Year equals fifty percent (50%) of the Participant's Participant Contributions for the applicable Plan Year. Excess Matching Company Contributions are only credited after a Participant completes six months of service with the Company.

(B) On or after January 1, 2013, the amount of Excess Matching Company Contributions credited to a Participant's Excess Matching Company Contributions Account for a particular Plan Year shall be equal to 100 percent (100%) of the Participant's Participant Contributions for the applicable Plan Year. Excess Matching Company Contributions shall only be credited after a Participant completes ninety (90) days of service with the Company (as determined under the Qualified Plan).

5.5 Crediting and/or Debiting of Investment Experience . A Participant's Accounts shall be credited and/or debited, as the case may be, with an amount equal to the hypothetical net investment gain or loss that such Participant would have realized if the portion of his or her Account properly elected to be allocated or deemed to be allocated to a particular Hypothetical Investment Fund pursuant to Article IV were actually invested in such Hypothetical Investment


Fund. Such gain or loss shall be credited or debited as of the same date that gains or losses are credited or debited to the corresponding funds under the Qualified Plan.

5.6 Debiting of Distributions . Amounts distributed from a Participant's Accounts pursuant to the Plan shall be debited therefrom as of the date of distribution of such amounts.

5.7 Vesting of Amounts Credited to Accounts . The amounts credited to the Accounts of a Participant hereunder shall be fully vested at all times.



ARTICLE VI
DISTRIBUTIONS FROM PARTICIPANT ACCOUNTS
 
6.1 Distribution to Fiduciary . If the Plan Administrator determines that any person to whom any amount is otherwise distributable hereunder is unable to care for his or her affairs, such amount (unless a prior claim therefor shall have been made by a duly appointed guardian, committee or other legal representative) may be distributed to any person determined by the Plan Administrator to have fiduciary responsibility for such person otherwise entitled to such amount, in such manner and proportions as the Plan Administrator may deem appropriate. Any such distribution shall constitute a complete discharge of any obligation of the Company to such person under the Plan.

6.2 Distribution Upon Termination of Employment . Within 90 days of the first day of the second month following the month in which a Participant’s separation from service occurs, the Company shall distribute to the Participant a single lump sum cash payment equal to the total amount credited to the Participant's Account. For purposes of the Plan, a Participant separates from service when the Participant either stops working, or when the level of services provided – whether as an employee or as an independent contractor – permanently decreases to no more than 20% of the average level of services provided during the prior 36 months. Separation from service shall be determined in accordance with policies or practices that the Company shall adopt in accordance with, or as otherwise determined pursuant to, Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder.

If a Participant is a “specified employee” as determined under the practices and policies of the Company as established in accordance with Section 409A of the Code, then distribution to the Participant shall be made in a single lump sum cash payment six months after the date the Participant separates from service.
  
6.3 Distribution in the Event of Death . Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, in the event of a Participant's death, the entire amount credited to the Participant's Account shall be distributed in a single lump sum cash payment within 90 days following the date of death to the Beneficiary(ies), if any, properly designated by the Participant by the date and in the manner required by the Plan Administrator.

6.4 Distribution in the Event of a Termination of the Plan . In the event of a termination of the Plan, the entire amount credited to a Participant's Accounts shall be distributed to the Participant in a single lump sum cash payment in accordance with Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder.

6.5 Distribution Upon Occurrence of a Change of Control . Upon the occurrence of a Change of Control that also constitutes a “change in control” as defined in the regulations promulgated under Section 409A of the Code, all Participants shall be paid single lump sum cash payments equal to the entire amount credited to their respective Accounts, such payments to be made within 90 days following the date of such Change of Control. For purposes of determining the value of the entire amount credited to a Participant's Account under the preceding sentence, any amount in the Participant's Accounts that is allocated to the Hypothetical Investment Fund corresponding to the


Qualified Plan fund principally invested in The Hartford stock shall be valued based on the Formula Price for stock of The Hartford. In the event of the death of a Participant before receiving payment required by this Section 6.5, such payment shall immediately be made to the Participant’s Beneficiary.
ARTICLE VII
MISCELLANEOUS

7.1 Unfunded and Unsecured Plan . The Plan shall be unfunded and unsecured for tax purposes and for purposes of ERISA. The Company shall have no obligation to fund its liabilities, if any, under the Plan. Nothing in the Plan and no action taken by the Company or its agents hereunder shall be construed to create a trust of any kind, or a fiduciary relationship between the Company and any other person or entity. All funds or other assets received or held by the Company pursuant to or in connection with the Plan may be used by the Company for any corporate purpose, and the Company shall not be obligated to segregate such amounts from its general assets. No Participant or any other person or entity shall have any claim against the Company or its assets other than as an unsecured and unsubordinated general creditor of the Company. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, a Participant's claim hereunder shall at any time be solely for the amount then credited to the Participant's Accounts. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Company may establish a grantor trust or purchase securities or take any other action deemed appropriate to assist the Company in meeting its obligations under the Plan, provided, however, that in no event shall any person or entity have any right to or interest in such trust or property by reason of the Plan.

7.2 Absence of Representations . The Plan shall not be construed to provide any representation or guarantee by the Company that any particular income or other tax consequence will result from a Participant's participation in the Plan. Each Participant shall be deemed to have consulted with his or her professional tax advisor to determine the tax consequences of participation hereunder. The Plan shall not be construed to provide any representation or guarantee by the Company that any particular amount of a Participant's Accounts allocated to any of the Hypothetical Investment Funds hereunder will result in any particular investment experience related thereto, and the Company shall in no event be required to pay any amount to any person or entity on account of any loss suffered by reason of the operation of the Plan.

7.3 Tax Withholding . The Plan Administrator shall have the right to make such provisions as deemed appropriate in its sole discretion to satisfy any obligation of the Company to withhold federal, state or local income or other taxes incurred by reason of the operation of the Plan or benefits provided under the Plan, including but not limited to at any time (i) requiring a Participant to submit payment to the Company for such taxes before paying benefits under the Plan or making settlement of any amount due under the Plan, (ii) withholding such taxes from wages or other amounts due to a Participant before paying benefits under the Plan or making settlement of any amount due under the Plan, (iii) making settlement of any amount due under the Plan part in shares of common stock of The Hartford and part in cash to facilitate satisfaction of such withholding obligations, or (iv) receiving shares of common stock of the Hartford already owned by a Participant or withholding such shares otherwise due to a Participant in an amount determined necessary to satisfy such withholding obligations.


7.4 Effect of Plan . The provisions of the Plan shall be binding upon, and inure to the benefit of, all successors of each Participant, including without limitation the Participant’s estate and the executors, administrators or trustees thereof, heirs and legatees, and any receiver, trustee in bankruptcy or representative of creditors of such Participant.

7.5 Use of Funds . All funds received or held by the Company pursuant to the Plan may be used by the Company for any corporate purpose, and the Company shall not be obligated to segregate such funds from its general assets.

7.6 No Employment Rights . The Plan shall not, directly or indirectly, create in any Participant any right with respect to continuation of employment with the Company or to the receipt of any Eligible Compensation or other compensation. The Plan shall not interfere in any way with the rights of the Company to terminate, or otherwise modify, the employment of any Participant or its compensation policies at any time.

7.7 Rights Not Transferable . The rights of a Participant under the Plan shall not be sold, exchanged, transferred (including an involuntary transfer incident to a divorce), pledged, hypothecated or otherwise disposed of, other than (A) by will, or (B) by the laws of descent or distribution, provided that the rights of any transferee of a Participant shall not be greater than the rights of the Participant hereunder. The foregoing restriction shall be in addition to any restrictions imposed by applicable law on a Participant's ability to dispose of any rights under the Plan.

7.8 Transfers .

(A) Tranfer to New Employer . Notwithstanding provisions herein to the contrary, to the extent consistent with Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder, in the event that the Company (i) sells or causes the sale of the stock or assets of any company in the controlled group of the Company to a third party, or (ii) causes the distribution to the holders of shares of the Company's common stock all of the outstanding shares of common stock of a subsidiary or subsidiaries of the Company, and as a result of such sale or distribution any particular Participant is no longer eligible to participate hereunder, the liabilities with respect to the benefits accrued by such Participant under the Plan shall, at the discretion and direction of the Company (and approval by the new employer), be transferred to a similar plan of such new employer and become a liability thereunder. Upon such transfer (and acceptance thereof) the liabilities for such transferred benefits shall become the obligation of the new employer and the liability under this Plan for such benefits shall cease.

(B) Transfer from Former Employer . Notwithstanding provisions herein to the contrary, at the discretion and direction of the Company, liabilities with respect to benefits accrued by a Participant under a plan maintained by such Participant's former employer may be transferred to this Plan and upon such transfer such liabilities shall become liabilities hereunder.
7.9 Claims Procedure .



(A) Submission of Claims . Claims for benefits hereunder shall be submitted in writing to the Plan Administrator or to such other person as may be designated by the Plan Administrator.

(B) Denial of Claim . If any claim for benefits hereunder is wholly or partially denied, the claimant shall be given written notice of such denial within the time and in the manner required for claim denials under the Qualified Plan.

(C) Claim Review Procedure . Any person whose claim for benefits hereunder is denied shall be entitled to a review of such denial, and such review shall be conducted in the same manner and in accordance with the same procedures that apply for review of claims under the Qualified Plan.

(D) Exhaustion of Remedy . No claimant shall institute any action or proceeding in any state or federal court of law or equity or before any administrative tribunal for a claim for benefits under the Plan until such claimant has first exhausted the procedures set forth in this Section.

7.10 Administration .

(A) Administration by Committees . Except as otherwise delegated to the Plan Administrator pursuant to this Section or otherwise, the Pension Administration Committee shall have the same administrative powers, responsibilities, and liability hereunder as are described herein or in the Qualified Plan. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the responsibilities and liabilities imposed on the Pension Administration Committee under the Qualified Plan as a result of such Qualified Plan being a plan qualifying for special tax treatment under Sections 401(a) and 401(k) of the Code and/or as a result of such Qualified Plan being an ERISA Plan shall in no event be imposed under this Plan. Except as otherwise delegated to the Plan Administrator pursuant to this Section or otherwise, the Excess Plan Committee shall have the administrative powers, responsibilities and limitations on liability under the Plan as are described in the resolution of the Board of Directors of The Hartford pursuant to which such Committee was created.

(B) Administration by Plan Administrator . Except as otherwise provided in the Plan, required by applicable law, or determined by the Pension Administration Committee, (i) the Plan Administrator shall be responsible for the performance of such administrative duties under the Plan not otherwise reserved hereunder to the Pension Administration Committee or the Excess Plan Committee, (ii) the Plan Administrator shall have full authority to administer and interpret the Plan in any manner it deems appropriate in its sole discretion, and (iii) the determinations shall be binding on and conclusive as to all parties.

7.11 Administrative Expenses . The Company shall pay for all administrative expenses related to the operation of the Plan, except as otherwise determined by the Pension Administration Committee.



7.12 Amendments to the Plan . The Board of Directors of Hartford Fire reserves the right to modify or amend the Plan at any time, provided that the Company’s Executive Vice President, Human Resources shall be entitled at any time to make modifications or amendments to the Plan that do not involve a material cost to the Company. Notwithstanding the foregoing, no modification or amendment shall be made to Section 6.5 hereof, and no modification or amendment shall adversely affect the right of any Participant to receive the benefits accrued as of the date of such modification or amendment. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, the Plan shall not be amended or modified during the period in which a Change of Control is threatened. For purposes of the preceding sentence, a Change of Control shall be deemed to be threatened for the same period that any Change of Control is deemed to be threatened for purposes of the Incentive Stock Plan. Further, notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, no amendment or modification following a Change of Control shall adversely impair or reduce the rights of any person with respect to benefits previously accrued hereunder without the consent of such person. Notwithstanding the above restrictions, the Company’s Executive Vice President, Human Resources may amend the Plan at any time in such manner as such officer deems necessary or advisable, in his or her reasonable judgment, to comply with a change in law or to avoid any payments hereunder being subject to an additional tax under Section 409A of the Code.

7.13 Suspension or Termination of Plan . The Plan is entirely voluntary on the part of Hartford Fire. The Board of Directors of Hartford Fire reserves the right at any time to suspend, reduce or partially or completely discontinue Company contributions hereunder, or, to the extent consistent with Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder, terminate the Plan, provided, however, that no suspension, reduction, discontinuance or termination shall be effective retroactively or shall adversely affect the right of any Participant to receive the benefits accrued as of the date thereof. As of the effective date of any suspension, reduction, discontinuance or termination of the Plan, no further Company contributions shall be made on behalf of any Participant, or in the case of a reduction, reduced contributions shall be made to the extent determined appropriate by the Company’s Executive Vice President, Human Resources. Each Participant's Account shall continue to be credited with investment experience pursuant to Section 5.5 until all amounts in such Account are distributed in accordance with the terms of the Plan. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, contributions under the Plan shall not be suspended, reduced or partially or completely discontinued and the Plan shall not be suspended, reduced, discontinued or terminated during the period in which a Change of Control is threatened. For purposes of the preceding sentence, a Change of Control shall be deemed to be threatened for the same period that any Change of Control is deemed to be threatened for purposes of the Incentive Stock Plan. Further, notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, no suspension, reduction, partial or full discontinuance of contributions, or other suspension, reduction, discontinuation or termination following a Change of Control shall adversely impair or reduce the rights of any person with respect to benefits previously accrued hereunder without the consent of such person.

7.14 Severability of Provisions . If any provision of the Plan shall be held invalid or unenforceable, such invalidity or unenforceability shall not affect any other provisions hereof, and the Plan shall be construed and enforced as if such invalid or unenforceable provisions had not been included herein.



7.15 Effect of Plan . The provisions of the Plan shall be binding upon all successors and assigns of a Participant, including without limitation the Participant's estate and the executors, administrators or trustees thereof, heirs and legatees, and any receiver, trustee in bankruptcy or representative of creditors of the Participant.

7.16 Governing Law . The laws of the State of Connecticut shall govern all matters relating to the Plan, except to the extent such laws are superseded by the laws of the United States.

7.17 Effective Date . The original Effective Date of this Plan is December 19, 1995.


EXHIBIT 12.01
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
COMPUTATION OF RATIOS OF EARNINGS TO FIXED CHARGES
AND PREFERRED SHARE DIVIDENDS

(In millions)
 
For the years ended December 31,
 
2012
2011
2010
2009
2008
EARNINGS (LOSS):
 
 
 
 
 
Income (loss) from continuing operations, before income taxes
$
(527
)
$
301

$
2,272

$
(1,577
)
$
(4,591
)
Less: Undistributed earnings from limited partnerships and other alternative investments
(8
)
65

60

(380
)
(539
)
Add: Total fixed charges, before interest credited to contractholders
498

562

566

537

413

Total earnings (loss), before interest credited to contractholders
(21
)
798

2,778

(660
)
(3,639
)
Interest credited to contractholders [1]
6,073

189

763

4,947

(8,533
)
Total earnings (loss)
$
6,052

$
987

$
3,541

$
4,287

$
(12,172
)
 
 
 
 
 
 
FIXED CHARGES:
 
 
 
 
 
Interest expense
$
457

$
508

$
508

$
476

$
343

Interest factor attributable to rentals and other [2]
41

54

58

61

70

Total fixed charges, before interest credited to contractholders
498

562

566

537

413

Interest credited to contractholders [1]
6,073

189

763

4,947

(8,533
)
Total fixed charges
6,571

751

1,329

5,484

(8,120
)
Preferred stock dividend requirements [3]
671

20

688

262

13

Total fixed charges and preferred stock dividend requirements, before interest credited to contractholders
1,169

582

1,254

799

426

Total fixed charges and preferred stock dividend requirements
$
7,242

$
771

$
2,017

$
5,746

$
(8,107
)
 
 
 
 
 
 
RATIOS:
 
 
 
 
 
Total earnings (loss) to total fixed charges [4]
NM

1.3

2.7

 NM

 NM

Total earnings (loss) to total fixed charges and preferred stock dividend requirements [4]
NM

1.3

1.8

 NM

 NM

 
 
 
 
 
 
Deficiency of total earnings (loss) to total fixed charges [5]
$
519

$
—

$
—

$
1,197

$
4,052

Deficiency of total earnings (loss) to total fixed charges and preferred stock dividend requirements [5]
$
1,190

$
—

$
—

$
1,459

$
4,065

 
 
 
 
 
 
Ratios before interest credited to contractholders [6]
 
 
 
 
 
Total earnings (loss) to total fixed charges [4]
NM

1.4

4.9

 NM

 NM

Total earnings (loss) to total fixed charges and preferred stock dividend requirements [4]
NM

1.4

2.2

 NM

 NM

[1]
Interest credited to contractholders includes interest credited on general account assets and interest credited on consumer notes. For the year ended December 31, 2008, the $(8.5) billion in interest credited to contractholders was primarily due to $(10.3) billion in investment income losses and mark-to-market effects of equity securities, trading, supporting the international variable annuity business.
[2]
Interest factor attributable to rental and others includes 1/3 of total rent expense as disclosed in the notes to the financial statements, capitalized interest and amortization of debt issuance costs.
[3]
Preferred stock dividend requirements include preferred stock dividends accrued and accretion of discount on preferred stock issuance.
[4]
Ratios of less than one-to-one are presented as “NM” or not meaningful.
[5]
Represents additional earnings that would be necessary to result in a one-to-one ratio. These amounts are primarily due to before-tax realized losses of $(711), $(2.0) billion and $(5.9) billion, which includes before-tax impairments of $(349), $(1.5) billion, and $(4.0) billion, for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
[6]
These secondary ratios are disclosed for the convenience of fixed income investors and the rating agencies that serve them and are more comparable to the ratios disclosed by all issuers of fixed income securities.

II-5

EXHIBIT 21.01
The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc.
Organizational List – Domestic and Foreign Subsidiaries
1stAgChoice, Inc. (South Dakota)
Access CoverageCorp, Inc. (North Carolina)
Access CoverageCorp Technologies, Inc. (North Carolina)
American Maturity Life Insurance Company (Connecticut)
Archway 60 R, LLC (Delaware)
Business Management Group, Inc. (Connecticut)
Catalyst360, LLC (Delaware)
Champlain Life Reinsurance Company (Vermont)
DMS R, LLC (Delaware)
Downlands Liability Management Ltd. (United Kingdom)
Eloy R, LLC (Delaware)
Ersatz Corporation (Delaware)
Excess Insurance Company, Limited (United Kingdom)
Fencourt Reinsurance Company, Ltd. (Bermuda)
First State Insurance Company (Connecticut)
FTC Resolution Company, LLC (Delaware)
Hart Re Group, L.L.C. (Connecticut)
Hartford Accident and Indemnity Company (Connecticut)
Hartford Administrative Services Company (Minnesota)
Hartford Casualty General Agency, Inc. (Texas)
Hartford Casualty Insurance Company (Indiana)
Hartford Equity Sales Company, Inc. (Connecticut)
Hartford Financial Products International Limited (United Kingdom)
Hartford Financial Services, LLC (Delaware)
Hartford Fire General Agency, Inc. (Texas)
Hartford Fire Insurance Company (Connecticut)
Hartford Funds Management Company, LLC (Delaware)
Hartford Funds Management Group, Inc. (Delaware)
Hartford Holdings, Inc. (Delaware)
Hartford Insurance Company of Illinois (Illinois)
Hartford Insurance Company of the Midwest (Indiana)
Hartford Insurance Company of the Southeast (Connecticut)
Hartford Insurance, Ltd. (Bermuda)
Hartford Integrated Technologies, Inc. (Connecticut)
Hartford International Life Reassurance Corporation (Connecticut)
Hartford Investment Financial Services, LLC (Delaware)
Hartford Investment Management Company (Delaware)
Hartford Investment Management K.K. (Japan)
Hartford Life and Accident Insurance Company (Connecticut)
Hartford Life and Annuity Insurance Company (Connecticut)
Hartford Life Insurance Company (Connecticut)     
Hartford Life Insurance KK (Japan)
Hartford Life International, Ltd. (Connecticut)
Hartford Life, Inc. (Delaware)
Hartford Life Limited (Ireland)
Hartford Life, Ltd. (Bermuda)
Hartford Life Private Placement, LLC (Delaware)
Hartford Lloyd's Corporation (Texas)
Hartford Lloyd's Insurance Company (Partnership) (Texas)
Hartford Management, Ltd. (Bermuda)
Hartford of Texas General Agency, Inc. (Texas)
Hartford Residual Market, L.L.C. (Connecticut)
Hartford Retirement Services, LLC (Delaware)
Hartford Securities Distribution Company, Inc. (Connecticut)
Hartford Specialty Insurance Services of Texas, LLC (Texas)
Hartford Strategic Investments, LLC (Delaware)



Hartford Technology Services Company, L.L.C. (Delaware)
Hartford Underwriters General Agency, Inc. (Texas)
Hartford Underwriters Insurance Company (Connecticut)
Hartford-Comprehensive Employee Benefit Service Company (Connecticut)
HARTRE Company, L.L.C. (Connecticut)
Heritage Holdings, Inc. (Connecticut)
Heritage Reinsurance Company, Ltd. (Bermuda)
HLA LLC (Connecticut)
HL Investment Advisors, LLC (Connecticut)
Horizon Management Group, LLC (Delaware)
HRA Brokerage Services, Inc. (Connecticut)
Lanidex Class B, LLC (Delaware)
M-CAP Insurance Agency, LLC (Delaware)
New England Insurance Company (Connecticut)
New England Reinsurance Corporation (Connecticut)
New Ocean Insurance Company, Ltd. (Bermuda)
Nutmeg Insurance Agency, Inc. (Connecticut)
Nutmeg Insurance Company (Connecticut)
Pacific Insurance Company, Limited (Connecticut)
Planco, LLC (Delaware)
Property and Casualty Insurance Company of Hartford (Indiana)
Revere R, LLC (Delaware)
RVR R, LLC (Delaware)
Sentinel Insurance Company, Ltd. (Connecticut)
Sunstone R, LLC (Delaware)
Symphony R, LLC (Delaware)
The Evergreen Group Incorporated (New York)
The Hartford International Asset Management Company Limited (Ireland)
Thesis S.A. (Argentina)
Trumbull Flood Management, L.L.C. (Connecticut)
Trumbull Insurance Company (Connecticut)
Twin City Fire Insurance Company (Indiana)
White River Life Reinsurance Company (Vermont)




EXHIBIT 23.01


CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

We consent to the incorporation by reference in the following registration statements on Form S-3 and Form S-8 of our reports dated March 1, 2013, relating to the consolidated financial statements and financial statement schedules of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. (the “Company”) (which report expresses an unqualified opinion and includes an explanatory paragraph regarding the retrospective adjustment of the accompanying consolidated financial statements and financial statement schedules for the Company's adoption of a change in accounting for costs associated with acquiring or renewing insurance contracts) and the effectiveness of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc.'s internal control over financial reporting, appearing in this Annual Report on Form 10-K of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. for the year ended December 31, 2012.


Form S-3 Registration No.
 
Form S-8 Registration Nos.
333-168532
 
333-105707
 
 
333-49170
 
 
333-105706
 
 
333-34092
 
 
033-80665
 
 
333-12563
 
 
333-125489
 
 
333-157372
 
 
333-160173
 
 
333-168537



DELOITTE & TOUCHE LLP
Hartford, Connecticut
March 1, 2013
 

II-8


EXHIBIT 24.01
POWER OF ATTORNEY

Each person whose signature appears below does hereby make, constitute and appoint CHRISTOPHER J. SWIFT, ALAN J. KREZCKO, ROBERT H. BATEMAN and DAVID C. ROBINSON, and each of them, with full power to act as his or her true and lawful attorneys-in-fact and agents, in his or her name, place and stead to execute on his or her behalf, as an officer and/or director of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. (the “Company”), an Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2012 (the “Annual Report”), and any and all amendments or supplements to the Annual Report, and to file the same with all exhibits thereto and other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) pursuant to the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”), and any applicable securities exchange or securities self-regulatory body, and any and all other instruments which any of said attorneys-in-fact and agents deems necessary or advisable to enable the Company to comply with the Exchange Act and the rules, regulations and requirements of the SEC in respect thereof, giving and granting to each of said attorneys-in-fact and agents full power and authority to do and perform each and every act and thing whatsoever necessary or appropriate to be done in and about the premises as fully to all intents as he or she might or could do in person, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, hereby ratifying and confirming all that his or her said attorneys-in-fact and agents or substitutes may or shall lawfully do or cause to be done by virtue hereof; provided, however, that the powers granted herein to each of said attorneys-in-fact and agents shall be effective only upon adoption by the Company’s board of directors of a resolution approving the form, substance and filing of the Annual Report.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned has hereunto subscribed this power of attorney this 1st day of March 2013 .
/s/ Liam E. McGee
 
/s/ Kathryn A. Mikells
Liam E. McGee
 
Kathryn A. Mikells
 
 
 
/s/ Christopher J. Swift
 
/s/ Michael G. Morris
Christopher J. Swift
 
Michael G. Morris
 
 
 
/s/ Robert H. Bateman 
 
/s/ Thomas A. Renyi
Robert H. Bateman 
 
Thomas A. Renyi
 
 
 
/s/ Robert B. Allardice, III
 
/s/ Charles B. Strauss
Robert B. Allardice, III
 
Charles B. Strauss
 
 
 
/s/ Trevor Fetter
 
/s/ H. Patrick Swygert
Trevor Fetter
 
H. Patrick Swygert
 
 
 
/s/ Paul G. Kirk, Jr.
 
 
Paul G. Kirk, Jr.
 
 
 
 
 





 

II-9



EXHIBIT 31.01
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO
18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350
AS ENACTED BY SECTION 302 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002
I, Liam E. McGee, certify that:
1.
I have reviewed this Annual Report on Form 10-K of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc.;
2.
Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;
3.
Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;
4.
The registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:
a.
Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;
b.
Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;
c.
Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;
d.
Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;
5.
The registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):
a.
All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and
b.
Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.
Date:
March 1, 2013
/s/ Liam E. McGee  
 
 
 
Liam E. McGee 
 
 
 
Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer 
 


II-10


EXHIBIT 31.02
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO
18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350
AS ENACTED BY SECTION 302 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002
I, Christopher J. Swift, certify that:
1.
I have reviewed this Annual Report on Form 10-K of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc.;
2.
Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;
3.
Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;
4.
The registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:
a.
Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;
b.
Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;
c.
Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and
d.
Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and
5.
The registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):
a.
All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and
b.
Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.
Date:
March 1, 2013
/s/ Christopher J. Swift  
 
 
 
Christopher J. Swift 
 
 
 
Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer 
 

II-11


EXHIBIT 32.01
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO
18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350
AS ENACTED BY SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002
In connection with the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the period ended December 31, 2012 of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. (the “Company”), filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), the undersigned hereby certifies, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. section 1350 as enacted by section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:
1)
The Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or section 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and
2)
The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.
Date:
March 1, 2013
/s/ Liam E. McGee  
 
 
 
Liam E. McGee 
 
 
 
Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer 
 


II-12


EXHIBIT 32.02
THE HARTFORD FINANCIAL SERVICES GROUP, INC.
CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO
18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350
AS ENACTED BY SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002
In connection with the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the period ended December 31, 2012 of The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. (the “Company”), filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), the undersigned hereby certifies, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. section 1350 as enacted by section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:
1.
The Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or section 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and
2.
The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.
Date:
March 1, 2013
/s/ Christopher J. Swift  
 
 
 
Christopher J. Swift 
 
 
 
Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer 


II-13